The Sacred Books of The East (Volume 8)

ioio
\o\o
V-8
THE
SACRED BOOKS OF THE EAST
[8]
ILontron
HENEY FKOWDE
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE
7 PATERNOSTER ROW
THE
SACRED BOOKS OF THE EAST
TRANSLATED
BY VARIOUS ORIENTAL SCHOLARS
AND EDITED BY
F. MAX MULLER
VOL. VIII
Wortr
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1882
[All rights reserved'}

THE BHAGAVADGITA
THE SANATSUCATIYA
AND
THE ANUGlTA
TRANSLATED BY
kAshinAth trimbak telang, m.a.
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1882
[ All rights reserved ]

CONTENTS.
PAGE
Bhagavadgita :
Introduction i
*v> Translation . . . . . . . 37
Sanatsugatiya :
Introduction . . . . . . . . 135
Translation . . . . . . . .149
Anugita :
Introduction 197
Translation .229
Index of Principal Matters . . . . . 395
Sanskrit Index 439
Transliteration of Oriental Alphabets adopted for the

Translations of the Sacred Books of the East . .443
(7\
10^7^
Of
BHAGAVADGITA.
[8]
INTRODUCTION
TO
BHAGAVADGiTA.
It has become quite a literary commonplace, that to
borrow the words of Professor Max tiller in one of his M
recent lectures history, in the ordinary sense of the word,
isalmost unknown in Indian literature 1 And it is certainly .
a remarkable irony of fate, that we should be obliged to

make this remark on the very threshold of an introduction
to the Bhagavadgita for according to the eminent French
;
philosopher, Cousin 2 this great deficiency in Sanskrit litera-

,
ture is due, in no inconsiderable measure, to the doctrines

propounded in the Bhagavadgita itself. But however that
may be, this much is certain, that the student of the Bha-
gavadgita must, for the present, go without that reliable
historical information touching the author of the work, the
time at which it was composed, and even the place it
occupies in literature, which one naturally desires, when

entering upon the study of any work. More especially in
an attempt like the present, mainly is for
intended as it
students of the history of religion, I should have been better

pleased, if I could, in this Introduction, have concentrated
to a focus, as it were, only those well ascertained historical
results, on which there is something like a consensus of
opinion among persons qualified to judge. But there is no
exaggeration in saying, that it is almost impossible to lay
down even a single proposition respecting any important
matter connected with the Bhagavadgita, about which any
such consensus can be said to exist. The conclusions
arrived at in this Introduction must, therefore, be distinctly
1
Hibbert Lectures, p. 131.
2
Lectures on the History of Modern Philosophy (translated by O.W.Wight),
vol. pp. 49, 50. At p. 433 seq. of the second volume, M. Cousin gives a
i,
general view of the doctrine of the Gita. See also Mr. Maurice's and Ritter's
Histories of Philosophy.
[8] B
BHAGAVADGITA.
understood to embody and must

individual opinions only,
be taken accordingly what they are worth. \yfor
The full name of the work is Bhagavadgita. In common
parlance, we often abbreviate the name into Gita, and in
Sanskrit literature the name occurs in both forms. In the
works of vSahkaraârya, quotations from the Gita are
introduced, sometimes with the words 'In the Gita,' or 'In
the Bhagavadgita,' and sometimes with words which may
be rendered In the Gitas,' the plural form being used 1
'
.
In the colophons to the MSS. of the work, the form current,

apparently throughout India, is, In the Upanishads sung '
(Gitas) by the Deity.' >Sankaraarya, indeed, sometimes

calls it the ljvara Gita 2 which, , I believe, is the specific title
work
of a different altogether. The signification, however,
of the two names is identical, namely, the song sung by
the Deity, or, as Wilkins translates it, the Divine Lay.
This Divine Lay forms part of the Bhishma Parvan of the
Mahabharata one of the two well-known national epics of
India. The Gita gives its name to a subdivision of the
Bhishma Parvan, which is called the Bhagavadgita Parvan,
and which includes, in addition to the eighteen chapters of
which the Gita consists, twelve other chapters. Upon this
the question has naturally arisen, Is the Gita a genuine
portion of the Mahabhirata, or is it a later addition ? The
question is one of considerable difficulty. But I cannot
help saying, that the manner in which it has been generally
dealt with is not altogether satisfactory to my mind. Be-
fore going any further into that question, however, it is
desirable to state some of the facts on which the decision
must be based. It appears, then, that the royal family
of Hastinapura was divided into two branches; the one
called the Kauravas, and the other the Pa/a/avas. The
former wished to keep the latter out of the share of the
kingdom claimed by them and so, after many attempts at ;
1
Ex. gr. Sariraka Bh&shya, vol. ii, p. 840. It is also often cited as a Smr/ti,
ibid. vol. i, p. 152.
2
See inter alia tfariraka Bhashya, vol. i, p. 455, vol. ii, p. 687, and Cole-
brooke's Essays, vol i, p. 355 (Madras) ; Lassen's edition of the Gita, XXXV.
INTRODUCTION.
an amicable arrangement had proved fruitless, it was deter-

mined to decide the differences between the two parties by
the arbitrament of arms. Each party accordingly collected
its adherents, and the hostile armies met on the 'holy
5
field of Kurukshetra, mentioned in the opening lines of our
poem. At this juncture, Krishna, Dvaipiyana, alias Vyasa,
a relative of both parties and endowed with more than
human powers, presents himself before Dhrztarish/ra, the
father of the Kauravas, who is stated to be altogether blind.
Vyasa asks Dhr/tarash/ra whether it is his wish to look
with his own eyes on and on
the course of the battle;
Dlmtarashfra's expressing his reluctance, Vyasa deputes
one Sang-aya to relate to DlWtar&sh/ra all the events of
the battle, giving to Sanâya, by means of his own super-
human powers, all necessary aids for performing the duty.
Then the battle begins, and after a ten days' struggle, the
first great general of the Kauravas, namely Bhishma, falls \
At this point Sang-aya comes up to Dhrztarashfra, and
announces to him the sad result, which is of course a great
blow to his party. Dhrztarash/ra then makes numerous
enquiries of Sanâya regarding the course of the conflict,
all of which Sanâya duly answers. And among his
earliestanswers is the account of the conversation between
Krishna and Arg*una at the commencement of the battle,
which constitutes the Bhagavadgtta. After relating to
Dhrztarash/ra that 'wonderful and holy dialogue,' and after
giving an account of what occurred in the intervals of the
conversation, Sanâya proceeds to narrate the actual events
of the battle.
With rough outline of the framework of the story
this
before us, we
are now in a position to consider the opposing
arguments on the point above noted. Mr. Talboys Wheeler
writes on that point as follows 2 But there remains one
:
'
other anomalous characteristic of the history of the great

war, as it is recorded in the Mahabhirata, which cannot
1
The whole story is given in brief by the late Professor Goldstiicker in the
Westminster Review, April 1868, p. 392 seq. See now his Literary Remains, II,
104 seq.
2
History of India, vol. i, p. 293.
B 2
ehagavadgitA.
be passed over in silence; and that is the extraordinary-

abruptness and infelicity with which Brahmanical discourses,
such as essays on law, on morals, sermons on divine things,
and even instruction in the so-called sciences are recklessly
grafted upon the main narrative. Krishna, and Aiûna . . .
on the morning of the first day of the war, when both

armies are drawn out in battle-array, and hostilities are
about to begin, enter into a long and philosophical dialogue
respecting the various forms of devotion which lead to the
emancipation of the soul and it cannot be denied that,
;
however incongruous and irrelevant such a dialogue must

appear on the eve of battle, the discourse of Krishna,
whilst acting as the charioteer of Ar^*una, contains the
essence of the most spiritual phases of Brahmanical
teaching, and is expressed in language of such depth and
sublimity, that has become deservedly known as the
it
Bhagavad-gM or Divine Song. Indeed no effort has . . .
been spared by the Brahmanical compilers to convert the

history of the great war into a vehicle for Brahmanical
teaching ; and so skilfully are many of these interpolations
interwoven with the story, that it is frequently impos-
sible to narrate the one, without referring to the other,
however irrelevant the matter may be to the main sub-
5
ject in hand. It appears to me, I own, very difficult to
accept that as a satisfactory argument, amounting, as it
no more than
does, to this that 'interpolations/ which must
needs be referred to in narrating the main story even to
make it intelligible, are nevertheless to be regarded 'as
5
evidently the product of a Brahmanical age 1, and pre-
sumably also a later age, because, forsooth, they are irrele-
vant and incongruous according to the tastes and ideas *
( 5

5
not of the time, be it remembered, when the main story '
is supposed to have been written, but of this enlightened

nineteenth century. The support, too, which may be sup-
posed to be derived by this argument from the allegation
that there has been an attempt to Brahmanize, so to say, the
1
History of India, vol. i, p. 288 ; and compare generally upon this point the
remarks in Gladstone's Homer, especially vol. i, p. 70 seq.
INTRODUCTION.
history of the great war, appears to me

to be extremely
weak, so far as the Gita is But that is a point
concerned.
which will have to be considered more at large in the
sequel \
^While, however, I am not prepared to admit the cogency
of Mr. Wheeler's arguments, I am not, on the other hand, to
be understood as holding that the Gita must be accepted

as a genuine part of the original Mahabharata. I own that
my feeling on the subject is something akin to that of the
great historian of Greece regarding the Homeric question,
a feeling of painful diffidence regarding the soundness of
any conclusion whatever. While it is impossible not to
feel serious doubts about the critical condition of the
Mahabharata generally; while, indeed, we may be almost
certain that the work has been tampered with from time to
time 2 it is difficult to come to a satisfactory conclusion
;
regarding any particular given section of it. And it must

be remembered, also, that the alternatives for us to choose
from in these cases are not only these two, that the section
in question may be a genuine part of the work, or that it
ftiay be a later interpolation but also this, as suggested
:
recently, though not for the first time, by Mr. Freeman 3

with reference to the Homeric question, that the section
may have been in existence at the date of the original
epos, and may have been worked by the author of the
epos into his own production. For that absence of dread,
'
either of the law or sentiment of copyright/ which Mr.
Freeman relies upon with regard to a primitive Greek poet,
was by no means confined to the Greek people, but may be
traced amongst us also. The commentator Madhusudana
Sarasvati likens the Gita to those dialogues which occur in
sundry Vedic works, particularly the Upanishads 4 Possi- .
bly I will not use a stronger word possibly the Gita may
1
Infra, p. 21 seq.
2 the Westminster
Compare the late Professor Goldstiicker's remarks in
Review for April 1868, p. 389.
3
Contemporary Review (February 1879).
4
Madhusudana mentions the dialogue between Ganaka and Yag-navalkya as
a specific parallel.
BHAGAVADGITA.
have existed as such a dialogue before the Mahabharata,

and may have been appropriated by the author of the
MahabMrata to his own purposes 1 But yet, upon the .
whole, having regard to the fact that those ideas of unity

on which Mr. Wheeler and others set so much store are
scarcely appropriate to our old literature to the fact that ;
the Gita fits pretty well into the setting given to it in the
Bhishma Parvan ; to the fact that the feeling of Arûna,
which gives occasion to it, is not at all inconsistent, but is
most consonant, with poetical justice; to the fact that there
is not in the Gitd, in my judgment, any trace of a sectarian
or Brahmanizing spirit 2 such as Mr. Wheeler and also
'
' ,
the late Professor Goldstiicker 3 hold to have animated the

arrangers of the Mahabharata having regard, I say, to all ;
these facts, I am prepared to adhere, I will not say without

diffidence, to the theory of the genuineness of the Bha-
gavadgitci as a portion of the original Mahabharata.
The next point to consider is as to the authorship of the
Gita. The popular notion on this subject is pretty well
known. The whole Mahabharata is, by our tradi-
of the
tions, attributed to Vyasa, whom we have already noticed
as a relative of the Kauravas and PaWavas and therefore ;
the Bhagavadgita, also, is naturally affiliated to the same

author. The testimony to this authorship,
earliest written
that I can trace, be found in Sankara&lrya's commen-
is to
tary on the Gita 4 itself and on the Brzhadara/zyakopani-
shad 5 To a certain extent, the mention of Vyasa in the
.
body of the Gita would, from a historic standpoint, seem to

militate against this tradition. But I have not seen in any
of the commentaries to which I have had access, any con-
sideration of this point, as there is of the mention in some
1
See to this effect M. Fauriel, quoted in Grote's Greece, II, 195 (Cabinet ed.)
2
Compare also Weber's History of Indian Literature (English translation),
p. 187. Theinstruction, however, as to 'the reverence due to the priesthood
from the military caste/ which is there spoken of, appears to me to be entirely
'
absent from the Gita; see p. 21 seq. infra.

3
Westminster Review, April 1868, p. 388 seq. ; and Remains, 1, 104, 105.
4
P. 6 (Calcutta ed., Samvat, 1927).
5
P. 841 (Bibl. Indie, ed.) ; also tfvetasvatara, p. 278.
INTRODUCTION.
Smrztis and Sutras of the names of those to whom those

Smrztis and Sutras are respectively ascribed \
v We must now leave these preliminary questions, un-
luckily in a state far from satisfactory, and proceed to
that most important topic the date when the Gita was
composed, and the position it occupies in Sanskrit litera-
ture. We have here to consider the external evidence
bearing on these points, which is tantalizingly meagre
and the internal evidence, which is, perhaps, somew hat r
more full. And taking first the internal evidence, the

various items falling under that head may be marshalled
into four groups. Firstly, we have to consider the general
character of the Gita with reference to its mode of handling
its subject. Secondly, there is the character of its style
and language. Thirdly, we have to consider the nature of
the versification of the Gitci. And fourthly and lastly, we
must take note of sundry points of detail, such as the atti-
tude of the Gita towards the Vedas and towards caste, its
allusions to other systems of speculation, and other matters
of the like nature. On
each of these groups, in the order
here stated, we now proceed to make a few observations.
And first about the manner in which the Gita deals with
its subject. It me ; that the work bears on the
appears to
face of it very plain marks indicating that it belongs to an
age prior to the system-making age of Sanskrit philosophy.
In 1875, 1 wrote as follows upon this point 'My view is, that :
in the Gita and the Upanishads, the philosophical part has

not been consistently and fully worked out. We have
there the results of free thought, exercised on different sub-
jects of great moment, unfettered by the exigencies of any
foregone conclusions, or of any fully developed theory. It
is afterwards, it is at a later stage of philosophical progress,
that system-making arises. In that stage some thinkers

interpret whole works by the light of some particular doc-
trines or expressions. And the result is the development

of a whole multitude of philosophical sects, following the
lead of those thinkers, and all professing to draw their
1
See, as to this, Colebrooke's Essays, vol. i, p. 328 (Madras).
8 BHAGAVADGITA.
doctrine from the GM or the Upanishads, yet each dif-

fering remarkably from the other V Since this was written,
Professor Max Mtiller's Hibbert Lectures have been pub-
lished. And I am happy to find, that as regards the
Upanishads, his view coincides exactly with that which I
have expressed in the words now quoted. Professor Max

Muller says There is not what may be called a philoso-
:
'
phical system in these Upanishads. They are in the true

sense of the word guesses at truth, frequently contradicting
2 .'
each other, yet all tending in one direction Further
corroboration for the same view is also forthcoming. Profes-
sor Fitz-Edward Hall, in a passage which I had not noticed
3
before, says :
'
In the Upanishads, the Bhagavadgita, and
other ancient Hindu books, we encounter, in combination,
the doctrines which, after having been subjected to modifi-
cations that rendered them as wholes irreconcileable, were
distinguished, at an uncertain period, into what have for
many ages been styled the SMkhya and the Vedanta.'
We have thus very weighty authority for adhering to the
view already expressed on this important topic. But as
Professor Weber appears to have expressed an opinion 4
intended perhaps to throw some doubt on the correctness
of that view, it is desirable to go a little more into detail to
fortify it by actual reference to the contents of the Gitd,
the more especially as we can thus elucidate the true
character of that work. Before doing so, however, it may
be pointed out, that the proposition we have laid down is
one, the test of which lies more in a comprehensive review

of the whole of the Gita, than in the investigation of
small details on which there is necessarily much room for
difference of opinion.
And first, let us compare that indisputably systematized
work, the current Yoga-sutras 5 with the , BhagavadgM on one
1
See the Introductory Essay to my BhagavadgM, translated into English
blank verse, p. lxvii. See also Goldstiicker's Remains, I, 48, 77; II, 10.
2
P. 317; cf. also p. 338.
3
Preface to Sankhya Sara, p. 7 (Bibl. Indie, ed.)
4
History of Indian Literature, p. 28.
* Are we to infer from the circumstance mentioned in Weber's History of
INTRODUCTION.
or two topics, where they both travel over common ground.

In the Gita, chapter VI, stanzas 33,34 (p. 7 1), we have Ar^-una
putting what is, in substance, a question to Krishna, as to
how the mind, which is admittedly '
fickle, boisterous, strong,
and obstinate,' is to be brought under control such control

having been declared by Krishna, to be necessary for attaining
devotion (yoga)? Krishna, answers by saying that the mind
may be restrained by '
practice (abhyasa) and indifference
to worldly objects (vairagya).' He then goes on to say,
that devotion cannot be attained without self-restraint, but
that one who has self-restraint, and works to achieve devo-
tion, may succeed in acquiring it. Here the subject drops.
There no further explanation of 'practice' or 'indifference
is
to worldly objects,' no exposition of the mode in which

they work, and so forth. Contrast now the Yoga-sutras.
The topic is there discussed at the very outset of the work.
As usual the author begins with ' Now therefore the Yoga
is to be taught.' He then explains Yoga by the well-known
definition '
Yoga is the restraint of the movements of the
mind.' And then after pointing out what the movements of

the mind are, he proceeds :
'
Their restraint is by means
of practice and indifference to worldly objects V the very
terms, be remarked in passing, which are used in the
it
BhagavadgM. But having come thus far, the author of

the Sutras does not drop the subject as the author of the
Gita does. He goes on in this wise 'Practice is the effort :
for keeping it steady. And that becomes firmly grounded

5
'
when resorted to for a long time, without interruption, and

with correct conduct.' far we have a discussion of the
So
first namely, practice. Patanâli then
requisite specified,
goes on to his second requisite for mental restraint. In- '
difference to worldly objects is the consciousness of having

subdued desires &c. (Vaiikira san^na) which belongs to one
having no longing for objects visible and those which are
heard of (from Sastras &c, such as heaven and so forth).
Indian Literature (p. 223, note 235), that the author of these Sutras was older
than Buddha?
1
Sutra 12, Abhyasa-vairagyabhyaw tannirodhafc.
IO BHAGAVADGiTA.
He next proceeds to distinguish another and higher species

5
of 'indifference, and then he goes on to point out the
results of that self-restraint which is to be acquired in the
mode he has expounded. That is one instance. Now take
another. In chapter VI, stanza 10 and following stanzas,
the Gita sets forth elaborately the mode of practically-
achieving the mental abstraction called Yoga. It need not
be reproduced here. The reader can readily find out how
sundry directions are there given for the purpose specified,
but without any attempt at systematizing. Contrast the
Yoga-sutras. In the Sadhanapada, the section treating of
the acquisition of Yoga, Patanâli states in the twenty-ninth
aphorism the well-known eight elements of Yoga. Then
he subdivides these elements, and expatiates on each of
them distinctly, defining them, indicating the mode of
acquiring them, and hinting at the results which flow from
them. That inordinate love of subdivision,' which Dr. F.
'
E. Hall 1 has somewhere attributed to the Hindus, appears

plainly in these aphorisms, while there is not a trace of it
in the corresponding passage in the Bhagavadgita. In my
opinion, therefore, these comparisons strongly corroborate
the proposition we have laid down regarding the unsys-
tematic, or rather non-systematic, character of the work. In
the one we have definition, classification, division, and sub-
division. In the other we have a set of practical directions,
without any attempt to arrange them in any very scientific
order. In the one you have a set of technical terms with
specific significations. In the other no such precision is
yet manifest. In one word, you have in the Gita the germs,
and noteworthy germs too, of a system 2 and you have ,
most of the raw material of a system, but you have no

system ready-made.
Let us look at the matter now from a slightly different
point of view. There are sundry words used in the Bhaga-
vadgita, the significations of which are not quite identical
1
In the Preface to his Sankhya Sara, I think.
2
This is all that we can infer from the few cases of division and classifica-
tion which we do meet with in the Gita. A subject like that treated of in this
work could not well be discussed without some classifications &c.
INTRODUCTION. I I
throughout the work. Take, for instance, the word yoga,' '
which we have rendered devotion.' At Gita, chapter II,

'
stanza 48 (p. 49), a definition is given of that word. In

chapter VI, the signification it bears is entirely different.
And again in chapter IX, stanza 5, there is still another
sense in which the word is used x
. The word Brahman
'
too occurs in widely varying significations. And one of its

meanings, indeed, is quite singular, namely, *
Nature (see '
chapter XIV, stanza 3). Similar observations, to a greater

Atman, and Sva-
or less extent, apply to the words Buddhi,
bhava 2 Now these are words which stand for ideas not
.
unimportant in the philosophy of the BhagavadgM. And

the absence of scientific precision about their use appears to
me to be some indication of that non-systematic character
of which we have already spoken.
There is one other line of argument, which leads, I think,
to the same conclusion. There are several passages in the
Giti which it is not very easy to reconcile with one another
and no attempt is made to harmonise them. Thus, for
example, in stanza 16 of chapter VII, Krishna, divides his
devotees into four classes, one of which consists of i
men of
knowledge,' whom, Kr/sh/za he considers as his own
says, '
self.' It would probably be difficult to imagine any expres-
sion which could indicate higher esteem. Yet in stanza

46 of chapter VI, we have it laid down, that the devotee is
superior not only to the mere performer of penances, but
even to the men of knowledge. The commentators betray
their gnostic bias by interpreting men of knowledge in c
'
this latter passage to mean those who have acquired erudi-

tion in the .S&stras and their significations. This is not an
interpretation to be necessarily rejected. But there is in it
a certain twisting of words, which, under the circumstances
here, I am not inclined to accept. And on the other hand,
it must not be forgotten, that the implication fairly deriva-
ble from chapter IV, stanza 38 (pp. 63, 63), would seem to
1
In chapter X the word occurs in two different senses in the same stanza (st. 7).
2
Compare the various passages, references to which are collected in the
Sanskrit Index at the end of this volume.
1 BHAGAVADGITA.
be rather that knowledge is superior to devotion is the

higher stage to be reached by means of devotion as the
stepping-stone. In another passage again at Gita, chapter
XII, stanza 13, concentration is preferred to knowledge,
which also seems to me to be irreconcileable with chapterVII,
stanza 16. Take still another instance. At Gita, chapter
V, stanza 15, it is said, that 'the Lord receives the sin or
merit of none.' Yet at chapter V, stanza 29, and again at
chapter IX, stanza 24, Krishna, calls himself 'the Lord
and enjoyer of all sacrifices and penances. How, it may
'
well be asked, can theSupreme Being e enjoy' that which

5
he does not even 'receive? Once more, at chapter X,
stanza 29, Krishna, declares that '
none is hateful to me,
none dear.' And yet the remarkable verses at the close of
chapter XII seem to stand in point-blank contradiction to
that declaration. There through a most elaborate series of
stanzas, theburden of Krzsrma's eloquent sermon is such a '
one is dear to me/ And again in those fine verses, where

Krishna, winds up his Divine Lay, he similarly tells Arg*una,
that he, Arûna, is dear ' to Krishna,. And Kr/sh;/a also
'
speaks of that devotee as 'dear' to him, who may publish

the mystery of the Gita among those who reverence the
Supreme Being \ And yet again, how are we to reconcile
the same passage about none being 'hateful or dear' to
Krishna,, with his own words at chapter XVI, stanza 18
and following stanzas ? The language used in describing
the ' demoniac people there mentioned is not remarkable
'
for sweetness towards them, while Krishna, says positively,

'
I hurl down such people into demoniac wombs, whereby
they go down into misery and the vilest condition.' These

persons are scarcely characterised with accuracy as neither '
hateful nor dear* to Krishna.. It seems to me, that all

these are real inconsistencies in the Gita, not such, perhaps,
as might not be explained away, but such, I think, as indi-
cate a mind making guesses at truth, as Professor Max
Miiller puts it, rather than a mind elaborating a complete
1
And see, too, chapterVII, stanza 17, where the man of knowledge is declared
to be 'dear' to Knshwa.
INTRODUCTION. 1
and organised system of philosophy. There is not even a

trace of consciousness on the part of the author that these
inconsistencies exist. And the contexts of the various
passages indicate, in my
judgment, that a half-truth is
struck out here, and another half-truth there, with special
reference to the special subject then under discussion but ;
no attempt is made to organise the various half-truths,

which are apparently incompatible, into a symmetrical
whole, where the apparent inconsistencies might possibly
vanish altogether in the higher synthesis. And having
regard to these various points, and to the further point, that
the sequence of ideas throughout the verses of the Gita is
not always easily followed, we are, I think, safe in adhering
to the opinion expressed above, that the Gita is a non-
systematic work, and in that respect belongs to the same
class as the older Upanishads.
We next come to the consideration of the style and
language of the Bhagavadgita. And that, I think, furnishes
a strong argument for the proposition, that it belongs to an
age considerably prior to the epoch of the artificial depart-

ment of Sanskrit literature the epoch, namely, of the
dramas and poems. In its general character, the style
impresses me as quite archaic in its simplicity. Compounds,
properly so called, are not numerous such as there are, are
;
not long ones, and very rarely, if ever, present any puzzle
in analysing. The contrast there presented with what is
called the classical literature, as represented by Bana or
Daîn, or even K&lidisa, is not a little striking. In
Kalidasa, doubtless, the love for compounds is pretty
well subdued, though I think his works have a perceptibly
larger proportion of them than the GM. But after Kali-
dasa the love for compounds goes through a remarkable
development, till in later writings it may be said almost to
have gone mad. Even in B&na and Dandin, Subandhu
and Bhavabhuti, the plethora of compounds is often weari-
some. And the same remark applies to many of the copper-
plate and other inscriptions which have been recently
deciphered, and some of which date from the early cen-
14 bhagavadgJta.
turies of the Christian era. Take again the exuberance of

figures and tropes which is so marked in the classical
style. There is little or nothing of that in the GM, where
you have a plain and direct style of natural simplicity, and
yet a style not by any means devoid of aesthetic merit
like the style of the Sutra literature. There is also an
almost complete absence of involved syntactical construc-
tions no attempt to secure that jingle of like sounds,
;
which seems to have proved a temptation too strong even

for Kalidasa's muse entirely to resist. But on the contrary,
we have those repetitions of words and phrases, which
are characteristic, and not only in Sanskrit, of the style of
an archaic period 1 Adverting specially to the language
.
as distinguished from the style of the Gtta, we find

such words as Anta, Bhasha, Brahman, some of which
are collected in the Sanskrit Index in this volume, which
have gone out of use in the classical literature in the
significations they respectively bear in the Gitci. The
word ha/ which occurs once, is worthy of special note. It
'
is the equivalent of 'gha,' which occurs in the Vedic

Sa/^hitas. In the form 'ha' it occurs in the Brahmaâs.
But it never occurs, I think, in what is properly called the

classical literature. It is, indeed, found in the Puraâs.
But that is a class of works which occupies a very unique
position. There is a good deal in the Purd/zas that, I think,
must be admitted to be very ancient 2 while undoubtedly ;
also there is a great deal in them that is very modern. It

is, therefore, impossible to treat the use of 'ha' in that class
of works as negativing an inference of the antiquity of
any book where the word occurs while its use in Vedic ;
works and its total absence from modern works indicate such
antiquity pretty strongly. We may, therefore, embody the
result of this part of the discussion in the proposition, that
1
Compare Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, p. 5. See, too, Goldstiicker's Remains,
I, 177.
2
This opinion, which I had expressed as long ago as 1874 in the Introduction
to my edition of Bhartr/hari's tfatakas, is, I find, also held by Dr. Biihler see ;
his Introduction to Apastamba in this series, p. xx seq., note. Purawas are

mentioned in the Sutta Nipata (p. 115), as to the date of which, see inter alia
Swamy's Introduction, p. xvii.
INTRODUCTION. 1
the Gita is removed by a considerable linguistic and chro-

nological distance from classical Sanskrit literature. And
so far as it goes, this proposition agrees with the result of
our investigation of the first branch of internal evidence.
The next branch of that evidence brings us to the character
of the versification of the Gita. Here, again, a survey of
Sanskrit verse generally, and the verse of the Gita in par-
ticular, leads us to a conclusion regarding the position of the
Gita in Sanskrit literature, which is in strict accord with
the conclusions we have already drawn. In the verse of the
Vedic Sa/^hit&s, there is almost nothing like a rigidly fixed
scheme of versification, no particular collocation of long
and short syllables is absolutely necessary. If we attempt
to chant them in the mode in which classical Sanskrit verse
is chanted, we invariably come across lines where the
chanting cannot be smooth. If we come next to the versi-

fication of the Upanishads, we observe some progress made
towards such fixity of scheme as we have alluded to above.
Though there are still numerous lines, which cannot be
smoothly chanted, there are, on the other hand, a not
altogether inconsiderable number which can be smoothly
chanted. In the Bhagavadgita a still further advance,
though a slight one, may, I think, be marked. A visibly
larger proportion of the stanzas in the Gita conform to the
metrical schemes as laid down by the writers on prosody,
though there are still sundry verses which do not so conform,
and cannot, accordingly, be chanted in the regular way.
Lastly, we come to the Kavyas and Na/akas the classical
literature. And here in practice we find everywhere a most
inflexible rigidity of scheme, while the theory is laid down
in a rulewhich says, that even masha may be changed to
*
masha, but a break of metre should be avoided.' This

survey of Sanskrit verse may, I think, be fairly treated as
showing, that adhesion to the metrical schemes is one test
of the chronological position of a work the later the work,
the more undeviating is such adhesion. need not stay
I
here to point out, how this view receives corroboration
from the rules given on this subject in the standard work
l6 BHAGAVADgJtA.
of Pingala on the AT/andas .Sastra. I will only conclude

this point by saying, that the argument from the versification
of the Gita, so far as it goes, indicates its position as being
prior to the classical literature, and nearly contemporaneous
with the Upanishad literature.
We now proceed
to investigate the last group of facts
fallingunder the head of internal evidence, as mentioned
above. And first as regards the attitude of the Gita towards
the Vedas. If we examine all the passages in the Gita, in
which reference is made to the Vedas, the aggregate result
appears to be, that the author of the does not throw GM
the Vedas entirely overboard. He feels and expresses
reverence for them, only that reverence is of a somewhat
special character. He says in effect, that the precepts of
the Vedas are suitable to a certain class of people, of a
certain intellectual and spiritual status, so to say. So far
their authority is unimpeached. But if the unwise sticklers
for the authority of the Vedas claim anything more for
them than this, then the author of the Gita holds them
to be wrong. He contends, on the contrary, that acting
upon the ordinances of the Vedas is an obstacle to the
attainment of the sum mum bonum 1
. Compare this with
the doctrine of the Upanishads. The coincidence appears
to me to be most noteworthy. In one of his recent lectures,
Professor Max M tiller uses the following eloquent language
regarding the Upanishads 2 : 'Lastly come the Upanishads;
and what is their object? To show the utter uselessness,
nay, the mischievousness of all ritual performances (compare
our Gita, pp. 47, 48, 84 s ); to condemn every sacrificial act
which has for its motive a desire or hope of reward (comp.
Gita, p. 119 4 ) ; to deny, if not the existence, at least the ex-
ceptional and exalted character of the Devas (comp. Gita,
5
pp. 76-84 ) and to teach that there is no hope of salvation
;
and deliverance except by the individual self recognising the

true and universal self, and finding rest there, where alone
rest can be found 6 (comp. our Git& Translation, pp. 78-83).
'
1
Compare the passages collected under the word Vedas in our Index.
2 3
Hibbert Lectures, p. 340 seq. II, 42-45 IX, 20, 21. ;
4
XVII, 12. 5
VII, 21-23 J IX, 23-24. VIII, 14-16 IX, 29-33. ;
INTRODUCTION. 1
The passages to which I have given references in brackets

will show, that Professor M
Max tiller's words might all
be used with strict accuracy regarding the essential teaching
of the Bhagavadgita. We have here, therefore, another
strong circumstance in favour of grouping the Gita, with
the Upanishads. One more point is worthy of note.
Wherever the Gita refers to the Vedas in the somewhat
disparaging manner I have noted, no distinction is taken
between the portion which relates to the ritual and the
portion which relates to that higher science, viz. the science
of the soul, which Sanatkumara speaks of in his famous
dialogue with Narada 1
. At Gita, chapter II, stanza 45,
Ar^-una is told that the Vedas relate only to the effects of
the three qualities, which effects Ar^*una is instructed to
overcome. At Gita, chapter VI, stanza 44, Arûna is told
that he who has acquired some little devotion, and then
exerts himself for further progress, rises above the Divine

word the Vedas. And there are also one or two other
passages of the like nature. They all treat the Vedas as
concerned with ritual alone. They make no reference to
any portion of the Vedas dealing with the higher know-
ledge. If the word Vedanta, at Gita, chapter XV, stanza 15
seems to signify, this latter portion of
(p. 113), signifies, as it
the Vedas, then that the only allusion to it. But, from all
is
the passages in the Gita which refer to the Vedas, I am in-

clined to draw the inference, that the Upanishads of the Vedas
were composed at a time not far removed from the time of
the composition of the Gita, and that at that period the Upa-
nishads had not yet risen to the position of high importance
which they afterwards commanded. In the passage referred
to at chapter XV, the word Vedantas probably signifies
the Ara/zyakas, which may be regarded as marking the
beginning of the epoch, which the composition of the Upa-
nishads brought to its close. And it is to the close of this
epoch, that I would assign the birth of the Gita, which is
1
See .KMndogya-upanishad, p. 473, or rather I ought to have referred to the
Mundaka-upanishad, where the superiority and inferiority is more distinctly
stated in words, pp. 266, 267.
[8] C
1 bhagavadg!tA.
probably one of the youngest members of the group to

which it belongs.
It appears to me, that this conclusion is corroborated by
the fact that a few stanzas in the GM are identical with
some stanzas in some of the Upanishads. With regard
to the epic age of Greece, Mr. E. A. Freeman has said that,
in carrying ourselves back to that age, we must cast aside
'
all the notions with which we own age

are familiar in our
about property legal or moral in literary compositions. It
is plain that there were phrases, epithets, whole lines, which
were the common property of the whole epic school of

poetry 1 .'
It appears to me that we must accept this
proposition as equally applicable to the early days of
Sanskrit literature, having regard to the common passages
which we meet with in sundry of the Vedic works, and also
sometimes, I believe, in the different Puraâs. If this view
is correct, then the fact that the Gtti contains some stanzas
in the very words which we meet with in some of the
Upanishads, indicates, to my mind, that the conclusion
already drawn from other data about the position of the
Gita with regard to the Upanishads, is not by any means
unwarranted, but one to which the facts before us rather
seem to point.
And here we may proceed to draw attention to another
factconnected with the relation of the Gitd to the Vedas.
In stanza 17 of the ninth chapter of the Giti, only Rik,
Saman, and Yagus are mentioned. The Atharva-veda is
not referred to at This omission does certainly seem

all.
a very noteworthy one. For it is in a passage where the

Supreme Being is identifying himself with everything, and
where, therefore, the fourth Veda might fairly be expected
to be mentioned. I may add that in commenting on 6anka-
raMrya's remarks on this passage, Anandagiri (and Madhu-
sudana Sarasvati also) seems evidently to have been conscious
of the possible force of this omission of the Atharva-veda.
He accordingly says that by force of the word 'and' in the
verse in question, the Atharvangirasas, or Atharva-veda, must
Contemporary Review, February 1879.

INTRODUCTION. 1
also be included. Are we at liberty to infer from this, that

the Atharva-veda did not exist in the days when the Gita
was composed ? The explanation ordinarily given for the
omission of that Veda, where such omission occurs, namely,
thatit is not of any use in ordinary sacrificial matters, is one
which can scarcely have any force in the present instance;

though it is adequate, perhaps, to explain the words those '
who know the three branches of knowledge,' which occur only

a few lines after the verse now under consideration. The
commentators render no further help than has been already
stated. Upon the whole, however, while I am not yet
quite prepared to say, that the priority of the Gita, even to
the recognition of the Atharva-veda as a real Veda, may be
fairly inferred from the passage in question, I think that
the passage is noteworthy as pointing in that direction.
But further data in explanation of the omission referred
to must be awaited.
^ If the conclusions here indicated about the relative posi-
tions of the Giti and certain Vedic works are correct, we
can fairly take the second century B. C. as a terminus before
which the Gita must have been composed. For the Upani-
shads are mentioned in the Mahabhishya of Patanâli,
which we are probably safe in assigning to the middle of
that century. The epoch of the older Upanishads, there-
which reference has been so frequently made here,
fore, to
may well be placed at some period prior to the beginning

of the second century B. C. The Atharva-veda is likewise
mentioned by Pataryfali 1 and as 'ninefold,' too, be it remem-
,
bered so that if we are entitled to draw the conclusion which

;
has been mentioned above from chapter IX, stanza 17,

we come to the same period for the date of the Gita.
Another point to note in this connexion is the refer-
ence to the Sima-veda as the best of the Vedas (see p. 88).
That is a fact which seems to be capable of yielding
some chronological information. For the estimation in
which that Veda has been held appears to have varied at
different times. Thus, in the Aitareya-brahma/za 2 , the glory
1 2
See also Sutta Nipata, p. 115. Haug's edition, p. 68,
C %
20 bhagavadgIta.
of the Saman is declared to be higher than that of the Rik.

In the j&TMndogya-upanishad x
the Saman is said to be the
essence of the Rik, which >Sankara interprets by saying that
the Saman is more weighty. In the Pra^na-upanishad 2
,
too, the implication of the passage V, 5 (in which the Saman

is stated as the guide to the Brahmaloka, while the Ya^*us
is said to guide to the lunar world, and the Rik to the
human world) is to the same effect And we may also
mention as on the same side the Nris'wiha. Tapini-upani-
shad and the Vedic passage cited in the commentary of
*Sankara on the closing sentence of the first khanda, of that
Upanishad 3 On the other side, we have the statement in
.
Manu that the sound of the Sama-veda is unholy; and the

consequent direction that where the sound of it is heard,
the Rik and Ya^*us should not be recited 4 We have also .
the passages from some of the Puraâs noted by Dr. Muir

in his excellent work, Original Sanskrit Texts, which
point in the same direction 5 And we have further the .
direction in the Apastamba Dharma-sutra, that the Saman

hymns should not be recited where the other Vedas are
6
being recited , as well as the grouping of the sound of the
Saman with various classes of objectionable and unholy
noises, such as those of dogs and asses. It is pretty evident
that the view of Apastamba is based on the same theory as
that of Manu. Now in looking at the two classes of autho-
rities thus marshalled, it is plain that the Gita ranges itself
with those which are unquestionably the more ancient.
And among the less ancient works, prior to which we may
place the Gita on account of the facts now under considera-
tion, are Manu and Apastamba. Now Manu's date is not
ascertained, though, I believe, he is now generally considered
to belong to about the second or third century B. C. 7 But
1 2
Bibl. Ind. ed., p. 12. Bibl. Ind. ed., p. 221 seq.
3 4
Bibl. Ind. ed., p. 11. Chapter IV, stanzas 123, 124.
5
Vol. iii (2nd ed.), p. 11 seq. Cf. Goldstucker's Remains, I, 4, 28, 266 II, 67. ;
6
Apastamba (Biihler's ed.) I, 3, 17, 18 (pp. 38, 39 in this series) see further on ;
this point Mr. Burnett's Devatadhyaya-brahmarca, Introd., pp. viii, ix, and notes.
7
Professor Tiele (History of Ancient Religions, p. 127) considers the 'main
features ' of Manu to be '
pre-Buddhistic'
INTRODUCTION. 2
Dr. Biihler, in the Preface to his Apastamba in the present

series, has adduced good reasons for holding that Apa-
stamba is prior to the third century B. C. \ and we therefore
obtain that as a point of time prior to which the Gita must
have been composed.
The next important item of internal evidence which we
have to note, is the view taken of caste in the Bhagavad-
gita. Here, again, a comparison of the doctrine of the
Gita with the conception of caste in Manu and Apastamba
is interesting and instructive. The view of Manu has been
already contrasted by me with the Git& in another place 2
.
I do not propose to dwell on that point here, as the date of

Manu is far from being satisfactorily ascertained. I prefer
now to take up Apastamba only, whose date, as just now
stated, is fairly well fixed by Dr. Biihler. The division of
castes, then, is twice referred to in the Bhagavadgita. In
the first passage (p>59) it is stated that the division rests on
and duties; in the second (pp. r 26, 127)
differences of qualities
the various duties are distinctly stated according to the dif-
ferences of qualities. Now in the first place, noting as we
pass along, that there is nothing in the Gita to indicate
whether caste was hereditary, according to its view, whereas
Apastamba distinctly states it to be such, let us compare
the second passage of the Gita with the Sutras of Apa-
stamba bearing on the point. The view enunciated in the
Gita appears to me plainly to belong to an earlier age to
an age of considerably less advancement in social and reli-
gious development. In the Gitcl, for instance, the duties of
a Brahmaâ are said to be tranquillity, self-restraint, and so
forth. In Apastamba, they are the famous six duties,
namely, study, imparting instruction, sacrificing, officiating
at others' sacrifices, making gifts, and receiving gifts and ;
three others, namely, inheritance, occupancy, and gleaning

ears of corn, which, it may be remarked en passant, are
not stated in Manu. The former seem to my mind to point
1
P. XXXV.
2
See the Introductory Essay to my Bhagavadgita in English verse, published
in 1875, p. cxii.
22 bhagavadgItA.
when the qualities which in early times gave the

to the age
Br^hmaâs their pre-eminence in Hindu society were still
a living reality 1 . It will be noted, too, that there is nothing
in that list of duties which has any necessary or natural
connexion with any privilege as belonging to the caste.
The Law lays down these duties, in the true sense of the
word. In Apastamba, on the contrary, we see an advance
towards the later view on both points. You have no re-
ference to moral and religious qualities now. You have to
do with ceremonies and acts. You have under the head
'
duties ' not mere obligations, but rights. For the duty of
receiving gifts is a right, and so is the duty of teaching
others and officiating at others' sacrifices
as we know not ;
merely from the subsequent course of events, but also from

a comparison of the duties of Brahma/zas on the one hand,
and Kshatriyas, VaLryas, and 6udras on the other, as laid
down by Manu and Apastamba themselves. Apastamba's
rules, appear to belong to the time when the
therefore,
Brahmaâs had long been an established power, and were
assuming to themselves those valuable privileges which they
have always claimed in later times. The rules of the Gita,
on the other hand, point to a time considerably prior to
this
to a time when the Brahma/zas were by their moral
and intellectual qualities laying the foundation of that pre-
eminence in Hindu society which afterwards enabled them
to lord it over all castes. These observations mutatis
mutandis apply to the rules regarding the other castes
also. Here again, while the Gita still insists on the inner
qualities, which properly constitute the military profession,

for instance, the rules of Apastamba indicate the powerful
influence of the Brahmaâs 2 For,
. as stated before, offi-
ciating at others' sacrifices, instructing others, and receiving
presents, are here expressly prohibited to Kshatriyas as
also to Vakyas. The result of that is, that the Brahmaâs
become indispensable to the Kshatriyas and VaLsyas, for
1
The remarks in the text will show how little there is in the Gita of that
'
Brahmanizing' which has been shortly noticed on a previous page.
2
As to the Kshatriyas the contrast with Manu's rules is even stronger than
with Apastamba's. See our Introduction to the Gita in English verse, p. cxiii.
INTRODUCTION. 2$
upon both the duty of study, of offering sacrifices, and

making gifts and presents is inculcated. In his outline of
the History of Ancient Religions, Professor Tiele, speaking
of the *
increasing influence of the Brahmans,' writes as
follows :
'
Subject at first to the princes and nobles, and
dependent on them, they began by insinuating themselves
into their favour, and representing it as a religious duty
to show protection and liberality towards them. Mean-
while they endeavoured to make themselves indispensable
to them, gradually acquired the sole right to conduct pub-
lic worship, and made themselves masters of instruction 1 /
And after pointing out the high position thus achieved by
the Brahmans, and the low position of the iTaâlas and
others of the inferior castes, he adds Such a position :
'
could not long be endured and this serves to explain not

;
only the rise of Buddhism, but also its rapid diffusion, and
the radical revolution which it brought about V To pro-
ceed, however, with our comparison of the Gita and Apa-
stamba. The superiority distinctly claimed by the latter
for the Brahma/za is not quite clearly brought out in the

GM. 'Holy Brahmaâs and devoted royal saints' are
bracketed together at p. 86; while the Kshatriyas are
declared to have been the channel of communication be-
tween the Deity and mankind as regards the great doctrine
of devotion propounded by the Bhagavadgtta. That in-
dicates a position for the Kshatriyas much more like

what the Upanishads disclose 3 than even that which Apa- ,
stamba assigns to them. The fact is further noteworthy,

that in the Git& each caste has its own entirely distinct set
of duties. There is no overlapping, so to say. And that
is a circumstance indicating a very early stage in the de-
velopment of the institution 4 . Besides, as already indicated,
2
1
P. 120. Pp. 129, 130.
8
See p. and compare with this Weber's remarks on one of the
58 infra ;
classes into which he divides the whole body of Upanishads, History of Indian
Literature, p. 165. See also Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, p. 508 ; Max Muller,
Upanishads, vol. i, p. lxxv.
* Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 32
; and also Mr. Davids' note on that passage in his
Buddhism, p. 131.
24 bhagavadgitA.
the duties laid down by Apastamba and Manu as common

to Kshatriyas and Vaiiyas are the very duties which make
those castes dependent to a very great extent on the Brah-
ma/zas. Lastly, it is not altogether unworthy of note, that
in the elaborate specification of the best of every species
which we find in chapter X, the Brahma/za is not men-
tioned as the best of the castes, there is nothing to indicate
the notion contained in the well-known later verse, 'The
Brahmaâ is the head of the castes.' On the contrary,
the ruler of men is specified as the highest among men 1 ,
indicating, perhaps, a state of society such as that described

at the beginning of the extract from Professor Tiele's work
quoted above.
We come now to another point. What is the position of
the Gita in regard to the great reform of Sakya. Muni ?
The questionone of much interest, having regard parti-

is
cularly to the remarkable coincidences between Buddhistic

doctrines and the doctrines of the Gita to which we have
drawn attention in the foot-notes to our translation. But
the materials for deciding the question are unhappily not
forthcoming. Professor Wilson, indeed, thought that there
was an allusion to Buddhism in the Gita 2 But his idea .
was based on a confusion between the Buddhists and the

3
iif arvakas or materialists . Failing that allusion, we have
nothing very tangible but the unsatisfactory negative argu- *
ment' based on mere non-mention of Buddhism in the

Gita. That argument is not quite satisfactory to my own
mind, although, ashave elsewhere pointed out 4 some of
I ,
the ground occupied by the Gita. is common to it with

Buddhism, and although various previous thinkers are
alluded to directly or indirectly in the Gita. There is,
however, one view of the facts of this question, which
appears to me to corroborate the conclusion deducible by
means of the negative argument here referred to. The
1 2
P. 89 infra. Essays on Sanskrit Literature, vol. iii, p. 150.
3
See our remarks on this point in the Introductory Essay to our Gita in
verse, p. ii seq.
* Introduction to Gita in English verse, p. v seq.
INTRODUCTION. 25
main points on which Buddha's protest against Brahmanism

rests,seem to be the true authority of the Vedas and the
true view of the differences of caste. On most points of
doctrinal speculation, Buddhism is still but one aspect of
the older Brahmanism \ The various coincidences to which
we have drawn attention show that, if there is need to show it.
Well now, on both these points, the Gita, while it does not go
the whole length which Buddha goes, itself embodies a protest
against the views current about the time of its composition.
The Gtta does not, like Buddhism, absolutely reject the
Vedas, but it shelves them. The Gita does not totally root
out caste. It places caste on a less untenable basis. One of
two hypotheses therefore presents itself as a rational theory
of these facts. Either the Gita and Buddhism were alike the
outward manifestation of one and the same spiritual up-
heaval which shook to its centre the current religion, the
Gita being the earlier and less thorough-going form of it
or Buddhism having already begun to tell on Brahmanism,
the Giti was an attempt to bolster it up, so to say, at its
least weak points, the weaker ones being altogether aban-
doned. I do not accept the latter alternative, because I
cannot see any indication in the Gita of an attempt to
compromise with a powerful attack on the old Hindu
system while the fact that, though strictly orthodox, the
;
author of the Gita still undermines the authority, as un-

wisely venerated, of the Vedic revelation and the further ;
fact, that in doing this, he is doing what others also had
done before him or about his time go, in my opinion, ;
a considerable way towards fortifying the results of the

negative argument already set forth. To me Buddhism is
outcome of that play of thought
perfectly intelligible as one
on high spiritual topics, which in its other, and as we may
say, less thorough-going manifestations, we see in the Upa-
nishads and the Gita 2 But assume that Buddhism was
.
1
Cf. Max Muller's Hibbert Lectures, p. 137; Weber's Indian Literature, pp.
288, 289; and Mr. Rhys Davids' excellent little volume on Buddhism, p. 151 ;
and Mr. Davids' book.
see also p. 83 of
2
Weber's History of Indian Literature, p. 285. In Mr. Davids' Buddhism,
Cf.
p. 94, we have a noteworthy extract from a standard Buddhistic work, touching
26 BHAGAVADGITA*
a protest against Brahmanism prior to its purification

and elevation by the theosophy of the Upanishads, and
those remarkable productions of ancient Indian thought
become difficult to account for. Let us compare our small
modern events with those grand old occurrences. Suppose
our ancestors to have been attached to the ceremonial law
of the Vedas, as we are now attached to a lifeless ritualism,
the Upanishads and the Gita might be, in a way, compar-

able to movements like that of the late Raja Rammohun
Roy. Standing, as far as possible, on the antique ways,
they attempt, as Raja Rammohun attempted in these
latter days, to bring into prominence and to elaborate the
higher and nobler aspects of the old beliefs. Buddhism
would be comparable to the further departure from old
traditions which was led by Babu Keshub Chander Sen.
The points of dissent in the olden times were pretty nearly
the same as the points of dissent now. The ultimate
motive power also was in both cases identical a sense of
dissatisfaction in its integrity with what had come down
from old times encrusted with the corruptions of years.
In this view the old system, the philosophy of the Upani-
shads and the Gita, and the philosophy of Buddha, con-
stitute a regular intelligible progression. But suppose the
turn events took was different, as is supposed by the alter-
native theory indicated above. Suppose Babu Keshub's
movement was chronologically prior, and had begun to tell
on orthodox society. Is it likely, that then one of the
orthodox party would take up the position which Ram-
mohun Roy took ? Would he still rely on old authorities,
but with sundry qualifications, and yet earnestly assail the
current forms of orthodoxy? I do not think so. I think the
true view to be, as already stated, very different. The
Upanishads, with the Git&, and the precepts of Buddha
the existence of the soul. Compare that with the corresponding doctrine in the
Gita. It willbe found that the two are at one in rejecting the identity of the
soul with the senses &c* The Gita then goes on to admit a soul separate from
these. Buddhism rejects that also, and sees nothing but the senses.
INTRODUCTION. 2J
appear to me to be the successive 1 embodiments of the spi-

ritual thought of the age, as it became more and more dissa-
tisfied with the system of mere ceremonial then dominant.
There are several other points of much interest in the

Bhagavadgita, such as the reference to the Sankhya and
Yoga the place assigned to the M&rgaiirsha month the
; ;
allusion to the doctrines of materialism ; the nearly entire

coincidence between a stanza of the Gita and one in the
Manu Snw'ti. But in the present state of our knowledge, I
do not think that we can extract any historical results from
any of them. Without dwelling on them any further 2 ,
therefore, I will only state it as my opinion, that the

Sankhya and Yoga of the Gita are not identical with
known to us under those names, and that the
the systems
Manu Smrz'ti has probably borrowed from the Gitci the
stanza common to the two works.
We now proceed to a discussion of some of the external
evidence touching the age of the Bhagavadgita. It is, of
course, unnecessary to consider any evidence of a date later
than the eighth century A. C, that being the date generally
received, though not on very strong grounds, as the date of
.SankaraMrya, the celebrated commentator of the Gita 3 .
For the period prior to that limit, the first testimony to con-
sider is that of Ba;zabha#a, the author of the Kadambari.
The date of Baâ is now fairly well settled as the middle
of the seventh century A. C. The doubt which the late
4
Dr. Bhau Daji had cast upon its correctness , by impugn-
ing the received date of king Harshavardhana, appears to
me to have been satisfactorily disposed of by the paper of
1
The word Brahma-nirvana, which occurs so often at the close of chapter V
and also at chapter seems to me to indicate that nirvana had not yet
II, 72,
become technically pinned down, so to say, to the meaning which Buddhism
subsequently gave to it, as the name of what it deemed thesummumbonum.
Nirvana by itself occurs at VI, 15.
2
See some further remarks on these points in my Introduction to the Gita
in verse.
3
Professor Tiele (History of Ancient Religions, p. 140) says tfarikara was born
in 788 a. d.; on the authority, I presume, of the Aryavidyasudhakara, p. 226.
4
Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, vol. viii, p. 350
and see, too, Indian Antiquary, vol. vi, p. 61 (Dr. Buhler).
28 BHAGAVADGiTA.
my friend Professor R.G. Bha/zafarkar on the Kalukya. dates 1

.
In the Kadambari, then, we have testimony to the existence

of the Bhagavadgita in the middle of the seventh century
A.C. For in that well known, abounds with
work, which, as is
equivoques, we have a passage which compares the royal

palace to the Mahabharata, both being 'Anantagitakanzana-
nanditanaram V which, as applied to the royal palace, means
*
in which the people were delighted by hearing innumerable
songs;* and as applied to the Mahabharata means 'in
which Ar^-una was delighted at hearing the Anantagita.'
Anantagita is evidently only another name here for Bha-
gavadgita. The conclusion deducible from this fact is not
merely that the Gita existed, but that it existed as a recog-
nised portion of the Bharata, in the seventh century A. C.
Now the Kadambari shows, in numerous passages, in what
high esteem the Mahabharata was held in its days. The
queen Vilasavati used to attend at those readings and
expositions of the Mahabharata, which have continued down
to our own times and it was even then regarded as a sacred
;
work of extremely high authority, in the same way as it

is now. It follows, therefore, that the Gita must have been
several centuries old in the time of Ba/zabha#a.
Prior in time to Baâ is the Indian Shakespeare, Kali-
3
dasa, as he is referred to in BaâbhazVa's Harshaârita ,
and also in a copperplate inscription of the early part of

the seventh century, as a poet who had then already ac-
4
quired a high reputation . Unfortunately, it is not yet
possible to fix exactly the date at which Kalidasa flourished.
Still, I think, we have pretty satisfactory evidence to show
that the middle of the fifth century A. C. is the very latest
date to which he can be referred. In a small tract (written
by me in 1873), discussing Professor Weber's theory about
the Ramayaâ, I have pointed out 5 that the Panâtantra
1
Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, vol. xiv,
p. 16 seq.
2
P. 182 (Taranatha's ed.)
3
See F. E. Hall's Vasavadatta, p. 14 note.
4
See Indian Antiquary, vol. v, p. 70.
5 * Was the Ramayarca copied from Homer V See pp. 36-59.
INTRODUCTION. 29
quotes from Kalidasa a passage which there is good reason

to believe formed part of the Panâtantra when it was trans-
lated for king Nushirvan of Persia about the beginning of

1
the sixth century A. C. Allowing for the time required to
raise Kalidasa to the position of being cited as an autho-
rity^ and for the time required for the spread of the fame of
an Indian work to Persia in those early days, I think, that
the middle of the fifth century is a date to which Kalidasa
cannot well have been subsequent. Now in the works of
Kalidasa we have some very remarkable allusions to the
Bhagavadgita. It is not necessary to go through all these
allusions. I will only mention the most remarkable, one
from the Raghuvawâ, and one from the Kumarasambhava.

In Raghu, canto X, stanza 67, the gods addressing Vishnu
say There is nothing for you to acquire which has not
:
{
been acquired. The one motive in your birth and work is

the good of the worlds.' The first sentence here reminds
one at once of Gita, chapter III, stanza 22, the coincidence
with which in sense as well as expression is very striking.
The second sentence contains the words ' birth and work,'
the precise words employed at Gita IV, 9 ; and the idea of
*
good of the worlds is identical with the idea expressed in
'
Gita III, 20-24, the words only in which it is clothed being

different. Couple this passage with the one from Kuma-
rasambhava, canto VI, 67, where the seven Rtshis say to
the Himalaya mountain, 'Well hast thou been called
Vishnu in a firmly-fixed form.' The allusion there to the
Gita, chapter X, stanza 25 (p. 89), is, I venture to think,
unmistakable. The word '
firmly-fixed ' is identical in
both passages the idea is identical, and Mallinatha refers

;
to the passage in the Gita as the authority which Kalidasa

had in view. It follows, therefore, that the Gita must be
prior to Kalidasa's time. It may be added, that Kali-
dasa in his Raghu XV, 67, cites Manu as an authority
1
Cf. Colebrooke's Essays, vol. ii, p. 166 seq. It may be remarked that
thisargument is not affected by the attempt to distinguish the Kalidasa of the
tfakuntala from the Kalidasa of the Raghuvamsa. Because the work cited in
the Pafiatantra is the Kumarasambhava, which indisputably belongs to the
same author as the Raghuvamsa.
30 bhagavadgitA.
for the proposition that a king must protect all castes and
all orders or airamas. Manu, therefore, must have lived
considerably earlier than Kalidasa, and the Gita, as we have
already argued, must be considerably earlier, not only than
Manu, but also than his predecessor Apastamba. The Gita
may, therefore, be safely said to belong to a period several
centuries prior to the fifth century A. C.
The next piece of external evidence is furnished by the
Vedanta-sutras of Badarayaâ. In several of those Sutras,
references are made to certain Smrztis as authorities for the
propositions laid down. Take, for instance, I, 2, 6, or I, 3,
23, and many others. Now three of these Sutras are very
useful for our present purpose. The first we have to con-
sider is Sutra II, 3, 45. The commentators SankaraMrya,
Ramanug*a, Madhva, and Vallabha 1 are unanimous in un-
derstanding the passage in Gita, chapter XV, stanza 7 (p.
112), to be the one there referred to by the words of the
Sutra, which are, *
And it is said in a Smrtt'u
9
Now a glance
at the context of the Sutra will, I think, satisfy us that
the commentators, who are unanimous though representing
different and even conflicting schools of thought, are also
quite right. Sutra 43, in the elliptical language charac-
teristic of that branch of our literature, says, part, from '
A
the statement of difference, and the reverse also ; some lay
down that it is a fisherman or a cheat.'
Sutra 44 runs
thus, ' And also from the words of the Mantra. And then 5
comes Sutra 45 as set out above. It is plain, that the

Sutra No. 45 indicates an authority for something not speci-
being regarded as part of some other thing also not
fied,
specified. Now the discussion in previous Sutras has been

about the soul ; so we can have little difficulty in accepting
the unanimous interpretation of the commentators, that the
proposition here sought to be made out is that the indi-
vidual soul is part of the Supreme Soul, which is the proposi-
tion laid down in the Gita in the passage referred to. The
1 I am indebted to Professor M. M. Kunte for a loan of VallabhaHrya's

commentary on the Sutras noted in the text. I had not seen it in 1875, when
I last discussed this question.
INTRODUCTION. 3
next Sutra to refer to is IV, i, 10. I shall not set forth

the other relevant Sutras here as in the preceding case. I
only state that the three commentators, Sankara, Ra-

manu^-a, and Madhva, agree that the Gita is here referred
to, namely, chapter VI, stanza seq. Vallabha, how- n
ever, I am bound to add, does not agree with this, as he
interprets the Sutra in question and those which precede
and follow as referring to an entirely different matter. If
I may be permitted to say so, however, I consider his
interpretation not so satisfactory as that of the three
other and older commentators. Lastly, we come to Sutra
IV, 3-19. On this, again, all the four commentators are
unanimous, and they say that Gita, chapter VIII, stanza
24 seq. (p. 80), is the authority referred to. And I
think there can be very little doubt that they are right.
These various pieces of evidence render it, I think, histori-

cally certain, that the Gita must be considerably prior to the
Vedanta-sutras and that the word Brahma-sutras, which
;
occurs at Gita, chapter XIII, stanza 4 (p. 102), is correctly

interpreted by the commentators as not referring to the
Vedanta-sutras, which are also called Brahma-sutras, but
to a different subject altogether
1
When were the Vedanta- .
sutras composed ? The question must at once be admitted

to be a but I think the following considera-
difficult one ;
tions will show that the date of those Sutras must, at the
latest, be considerably earlier than the period which we
have already reached in this part of our investigation. We
may take it as fairly well settled, that Bha#a Kumarila, the
celebrated commentator of the Purva Mima^sa school,
flourished not later than the end of the seventh century
A. C. 2 A him must be placed
considerable time prior to
the great commentator on the Mima^sa-sutras, namely,
Sabarasv&min. If we may judge from the style of his great
commentary, he cannot have flourished much later than
Patang-ali, who may now be taken as historically proved to
1
Cf. Weber's Indian Literature, p. 242. See also Lassen's Preface to his
edition of Schlegel's Gita, XXXV.
Ramanug-a takes the other view.
2
See Burnett's Samavidhana-brahmawa, Introduction, p. vi note.
32 bhagavadg3!tA.
have flourished about 140 B. C. 1 Now a considerable time

must have intervened between Sabarasvamin and another
commentator on the Purva Mima^sa, whom Sahara
quotes with the highly honorific title Bhagavan, the
Venerable, namely, Upavarsha. Upavarsha appears from
5ankara's statement to have commented on the Vedanta-
sutras 2 We have thus a long catena of works from the
.
seventh century A. C, indicating a pretty high antiquity

for the Vedanta-sutras, and therefore a higher one for the
Bhagavadgita. The antiquity of the Vedanta-sutras follows
also from the circumstance, which we have on the testimony
of Ramanu-a, repeated by Madhavaârya, that a commen-
3
tary on the Sutras was written by Baudhayana/fcarya ,
which commentary Ramanuâ says he followed. Baudha-

yana's date is not accurately settled. But he appears to be
older than Apastamba, whose date, as suggested by Dr.
4
Biihler,has already been mentioned The Vedanta-sutras, .
then,would appear to be at least as old as the fourth cen-

tury B. C. if the information we have from Ramanu*a
;
may be trusted. A third argument may be mentioned,

bearing on the date of the Vedanta-sutras. In Sutra no
of the third Pada of the fourth Adhyaya of Pacini's Sutras,
a Parai-arya mentioned as the author of a Bhikshu-sutra.
is
Who is this Paraârya, and what the Bhikshu-sutra ? Un-

luckily Patanâli gives us no information on this head, nor
does the Klrika Vrztti. But a note of Professor Taranatha
Tarkavaâspati, of Calcutta, says that Paraârya is Vyasa,
5
and the Bhikshu-sutra is the Vedanta-sutra . If this is
correct, the Vedanta-sutras go very far indeed into anti-

quity. For Pa/zini can certainly not be assigned to a later
date than the fourth century B.C., while that learned
1
The authorities are collected in our edition of Bhartn'hari (Bombay Series of
Sanskrit Classics), Introd. p. xi note. See also Buhler's Apastamba in this
series* Introd. p. xxviii.
2
See Colebrooke's Essays, vol. i, p. 332. An Upavarsha is mentioned in the
Kathasaritsagara as living in the time of king Nanda, and having Pacini, Katya-
yana, and VyaJi for his pupils.
3
See the Ramanug-a Bhashya ; and the Ram&nug-a Darsana in Sarvadarsana-
sangraha.
* Apastamba, p. xvi.
6
See Siddhanta Kaumudi, vol. i, p. 592.
INTRODUCTION. 33
scholar, Professor Goldstlicker, on grounds of considerable

strength, assigned him to a much earlier date
1
. The ques-
tion thus comes remark of Professor Tara-
to this, Is the
natha, above setout, correct ? I find then, from enquiries
made of my venerable and erudite friend Ya^ncsvar 5astrin,

the author of the Aryavidyasudhakara, that the note of
Taranatha is based on the works of Bhattogt Dikshita,
Nagqgi Bha//a, and (Jnanendra Sarasvati, who all give the
same interpretation of the Sutra in question. It is certainly
unfortunate that we have no old^r authority on this point

than Bha//qî. The interpretation is in itself not impro-
bable. Vyasa is certainly by the current tradition 2 called
the author of the Vedanta-sutras, and also the son of
Parai-ara. Nor is Bhikshu-sutra a name too far removed in
sense from Vedanta-sutra, though doubtless the former
name is not now in use, at all events as applied to the Sutras
attributed and though, it must also
to Badarayaâ, be
stated, a Bhikshu-sutra Bhashya Vartika is mentioned eo
nomine by Professor Weber as actually in existence at the
present day 3 Taking all things together, therefore,
. we
may provisionally understand the Bhikshu-sutra mentioned
by Pacini to be identical with the Vedanta-sutras. But
even apart from that identification, the other testimonies
we have adduced prove, I think, the high antiquity of those
Sutras,and consequently of the Bhagavadgita.
We
have thus examined, at what, considering the im-
portance and difficulty of the subject, will not, I trust, be
regarded as unreasonable length, some of the principal
pieces of internal and external evidence touching the age
of the Bhagavadgita and its position in Sanskrit literature.
Although, as stated at the very outset, the conclusions we
have deduced in the course of that examination are not all
such as at once to secure acceptance, I venture to think that
we have now adequate grounds for saying, that the various
and independent lines of investigation, which we have pur-
sued, converge to this point, that the Gita, on numerous and
1
See his Pamni ; and see also Biihler's Apastamba in this series, Introd.
2
p. xxxii note. The correctness of this tradition is very doubtful.
3
Indische Studien I, 470.
[8] D
34 BHAGAVADGITA.
essential topics, ranges itself as a member of the Upanishad

group, so to say, in Sanskrit literature. Its philosophy, its
mode of treating its subject, its style, its language, its versi-
fication, its opinions on sundry subjects of the highest im-
portance, all point to that one conclusion. We may also, I
think, lay it down

more than probable, that the latest
as
^date at which the Gita can have been composed, must be
earlier than the third century B. c, though it is altogether
impossible to say at present how much earlier. This pro-
position, too, is supported by the cumulative strength of
^several independent lines of testimony.
Before closing this Introduction, it is desirable to add a
word concerning the text of the Bhagavadgita. The reli-
gious care with which that text has been preserved is very
worthy of note. Schlegel and Lassen x have both declared
it as their opinion, that we have the text now almost
exactly in the condition in which it was when it left the
hands of the author. There are very few real various
readings, and some of the very few that exist are noted
by the commentators. Considering that the Mahabharata
must have been tampered with on numerous occasions, this
preservation of the Gita is most interesting. It doubtless
indicates that high veneration for it which is still felt, and
has for long been felt, by the Hindus, and which is em-
bodied in the expression used in the colophons of the MSS.
describing the Gita as the '
Upanishad sung by God V In
view of the facts and deductions set forth in this essay,
that expression existing as, I believe, it does, almost uni-
versally in Indian MSS.
of the Gita, is not altogether
devoid of historical value.
Schlegel draws attention to one other circumstance re-
garding the text of the Gita, which is also highly interesting,
namely, that the number of the stanzas is exactly 700.
1
See the
latter's edition of the Gita, Preface, p. xxvii.
2
In the edition of the Gita" published in Bombay in aka 1782, there is a
stanza which says that the Upanishads are the cows, Kr/sha the milkman,
Arg-una the and the milk is the nectar-like Gita, which indicates the tradi-
calf,
tional view of the Gita

a view in consonance with that which we have been
led to by the facts and arguments contained in this Introduction.
INTRODUCTION. 35
Schlegel concludes that the author must have fixed on that

number deliberately, in order to prevent, as far as he could,
all subsequent interpolations \ This is certainly not un-
likely ; and if the aim of the author was such as Schlegel
suggests, it has assuredly been thoroughly successful. In
the chapter of the Mahabharata immediately succeeding
the eighteenth chapter of the Gita, the extent of the work
in .rlokas is distinctly stated. The verses in which this
is stated do not exist in the Gauâ or Bengal recension,
and are doubtless not genuine. But, nevertheless, they are
interesting, and I shall reproduce them here. 'Ke.?ava
spoke 610 j-lokas, Arûna fifty-seven, San*aya sixty-seven,
and Dhrztarash/ra one ^loka such is the extent of the ;
Git&.' It is very difficult to account for these figures.

According to them, the total number of verses in the Gita
would be 745, whereas the number in the current MSS.,
and even in the Mahabharata itself, is, as already stated,
only 700 2 I cannot suggest any explanation whatever of
.
this discrepancy.
In conclusion, a few words may be added regarding the
general principles followed in the translation contained in
this volume. My aim has been to make that translation
as close and literal a rendering as possible of the Gitd, as
interpreted by the commentators 6ankaraarya, Sridhara-
svamin, and Madhusudana Sarasvati. Reference has also
been frequently made to the commentary of Ramanuâ-
arya, and also to that of Nilakaâ, which latter forms part
of the author's general commentary on the Mahabharata. In
some places these commentators differ among themselves,
and then I have made my own choice. The foot-notes are
mainly intended to make clear that which necessarily re-
mains obscure in a literal translation. Some of the notes,
however, also point out the parallelisms existing between the
Gita and other works, principally the Upanishads and the
Buddhistic Dhammapada and Sutta Nipata. Of the latter
1
P. xl (Lassen's ed.)
2
tfankara's commentary states in so many words that the Gita he used con-
tained only 700 slokas.
D 2
36 BHAGAVADGITA.
I have not been able to procure the original Pali I have ;
only used Sir M. C. Swamy's translation. But I may here

note, that there are some verses, especially in the Salla
Sutta (see pp. 124-127 of Sir M. C. Swamy's book), the
similarity of which, in doctrine and expression, to some of
the verses of the Gita, is particularly striking. The analo-
gies between the Gita and the Upanishads have been made
the basis of certain conclusions in this Introduction. Those
between the Gita and these Buddhistic works are at present,
to my mind, only interesting; I am unable yet to say
whether they may legitimately be made the premises for
any historical deductions.
There are two indexes the first a general index of
:
matters, the second containing the principal words in the

Gita which may prove useful or interesting for philolo-
gical, historical, or other kindred purposes.
BHAGAVADGITA.
Chapter I.
Dhrztar&sh/ra said :
What did and the Paâvas do, O

my (people)
Sanâya when they assembled together on the
!
holy field of Kurukshetra, desirous to do battle ?
Safiâya said :
Seeing the army of the PaWavas drawn up in

battle-array the prince Duryodhana approached
l
,
the preceptor, and spoke (these) words O pre- :

'
ceptor observe this grand army of the sons of

!
Paû, drawn up in battle-array by your talented

pupil, the son of Drupada. In it are heroes
(bearing) large bows, the equals of Bhlma and

Arôina in battle (namely), Yuyudhana, Vira/a, and
Drupada, the master of a great car 2 and Dhrzshfe- ,
and the valiant king of Kasi, Puruît

ketu, Aêkitana,
and Kuntibho/a, and that eminent man 6aibya; the
heroic Yudhamanyu, the valiant Uttamauâs, the
son of Subhadra, and the sons of Draupadf all
masters of great cars. And now, O best of Brah-
1
Several of these modes of array are described in Manu VII, 187,
like a staff, like a wain, like a boar, &c. That of the PaWavas, here
referred to, appears to have been like the thunderbolt, as to which
see Manu VII, 191.
2
This is a literal rendering ; the technical meaning is '
a warrior
proficient in military science, who can fight single-handed a thou-
sand archers/
38 BHAGAVADGITA.
ma;âs ! learn who are most distinguished among

us, and are leaders of my army. I will name them
to you, in order that you may know them well.
Yourself, and Bhishma, and Karâ, and Krzpa the
victor of (many) battlesAivatth&man, and Vikar/za,
;
and also the son of Somadatta, and many other

brave men, who have given up their lives for me,
who fight with various weapons, (and are) all dex-
terous in battle. Thus our army which is protected
by Bhishma is unlimited ; while this army of theirs
which is protected by Bhima is very limited. And
therefore do ye all, occupying respectively the posi-
1
tions assigned to you, protect Bhishma 2
only/
Then his powerful grandsire, Bhishma, the oldest
of the Kauravas, roaring aloud like a blew his lion,
conch, (thereby) affording delight to Duryodhana.
And then all at once, conchs, and kettledrums, and
tabors, and trumpets were played upon and there ;
was a tumultuous din. Then, too, Madhava and the

son of F&ndu (Arûna), seated in a grand chariot to
which white steeds were yoked, blew their heavenly
conchs. Hrzshikeici 3 blew the Pin/aânya 4 and ,
Dhananâya the Devadatta, and Bhima, (the doer) of

fearful deeds, blew the great conch Pau/^ra. King
Yudhishîra, the son of Kunti 5
blew the Anan- ,
tavi^*aya, and Nakula and Sahadeva (respectively)
1
The original word means, according to -Sridhara, ' the ways of
entrance into a Vyuha or phalanx.'
2
Who, as generalissimo, remained in the centre of the army.
3
Literally, according to the commentators, ' lord of the senses of
perception/
4
Schlegel renders the names of these conchs by Gigantea,
Theodotes, Arundinea, Triumphatrix, Dulcisona, and Gemmi-
florea respectively.
5
So called, par excellence, apparently.
CHAPTER I, 24. 39
the Sughosha and Maîpushpaka. And the king

of KcLsl, too, who has an excellent bow, and Sikh.a7t~
din, themaster of a great car, and Dhrzsh/adyumna,
Viri/a,and the unconquered Satyaki, and Drupada,
and the sons of Draupadi, and the son of Subhadra,
of mighty arms, blew conchs severally from all sides,
O king of the earth That tumultuous din rent !
the hearts of all (the people) of Dhrztarcishfra's

(party), causing reverberations throughout heaven
and earth. Then Dhrz-
seeing (the people of)
tar&sh/ra's party regularly marshalled, the son of
Pa/û, whose standard is the ape, raised his bow \
after the discharge of missiles had commenced, and
O king of the earth! spake these words to Hrzshi-
kess. O undegraded one station my chariot
:
'
1
between the two armies, while I observe those, who

stand here desirous to engage in battle, and with
whom, in the labours of this struggle, I must do
battle. I will observe those who are assembled
here and who are about to engage in battle, wishing

2
to do service in battle to the evil-minded son of
Dhrztarash/ra.'
Sanâya said
Thus addressed by Guâkeâ 3 O descendant of ,
4
Bharata ! Hrzshfkeâ stationed that excellent cha-
riot between the two armies, in front of Bhishma
and Droâ and of all the kings of the earth, and
1
I. e. to join in the fight.
2
In the original, several derivatives from the root yudh, mean-
ing '
to fight/ occur with the same frequency as '
battle ' here.
3
Generally interpreted '
lord of sleep/ i. e. not indolent. Nila-
ka/â also suggests, that it may mean '
of thick hair/
4
The son of Dushyanta and -Sakuntala, after whom India is called
' Bharatavarsha/ and from whom both PaWavas and Kauravas
were descended.
4-0 BHAGAVADGITA.
said :
'
O son of Pmha ! look at these assembled
Kauravas.' There the son of Pmha saw in both
armies, fathers and grandfathers, preceptors, ma-
ternal uncles, brothers, sons 1 grandsons, companions, ,
fathers-in-law, as well as friends. And seeing all
those kinsmen standing (there), the son of Kunti

was overcome by excessive pity, and spake thus
despondingly.
Arûna said
Seeing these kinsmen,
Krzshnal standing (here) O
desirous to engage in battle, my limbs droop down
my mouth is quite dried up; a tremor comes on
my body and my hairs stand on end the Ga^fva
; ;
(bow) slips from my hand; my skin burns intensely.

I am stand up; my mind whirls
unable, too, to
round, as were; O Keâva! I see adverse omens 2
it ;
and I do not perceive any good (to accrue) after

killing (my) kinsmen in the battle. I do not wish
for victory, O Krishna, ! nor sovereignty, nor plea-

sures : what is sovereignty to us, O Govinda ! w hat
T
enjoyments, and even life ? Even those, forwhose

sake we desire sovereignty, enjoyments, and plea-
sures, are standing here for battle, abandoning life
and wealth preceptors, fathers, sons as well as

grandfathers, maternal uncles, fathers-in-law, grand-
sons, brothers-in-law, as also (other) relatives. These I
do not wish to kill, though they kill (me), O destroyer

of Madhu 3 even for the sake of sovereignty over
!
the three worlds, how much less then for this earth
1
The words in this list include all standing in similar relation-
ships to those directly signified.
2
Such as the appearance of vultures, cars moving without
horses, &c., mentioned in the Bhishma Parvan II, 17. Cf. Sutta
Nipata, p. 100.
3
A demon of this name.
CHAPTER I, 44. 41
(alone) ? What joy shall be ours, O anardana

after killing Dhrztarash/ras sons ? Killing these
felons 2
we shall only incur sin. Therefore it is not
proper for us to kill own kinsmen, the sons of
our
Dhrztarash/ra. For how, O M&dhava shall we be !
happy after killing our own relatives ? Although

having their consciences corrupted by avarice, they
do not see the evils flowing from the extinction of a
family, and the sin in treachery to friends, still, O
Ganardana! should not we, who do see the evils
flowing from the extinction of a family, learn to
refrain from that sin ? On the extinction of a family,
the eternal rites of families are destroyed 2 . Those
rites being destroyed, impiety predominates over the
whole family 3 In consequence of the predominance
.
of impiety, O Krishna, ! the women of the family

become corrupt 4 and the women becoming
; corrupt,
O descendant of Vrishni ! intermingling of castes re-
sults; that intermingling necessarily leads the family
and the destroyers of the family to hell ; for when
the ceremonies of (offering) the balls of food and
water (to them) fail 5
, their ancestors fall down (to
hell). By these transgressions of the destroyers of

families,which occasion interminglings of castes,
the eternal rites of castes and rites of families are
1
Six classes are mentioned an incendiary; one who administers
:
poison; one who assaults another weapon in hand; one who

destroys property one who robs another of his wife or his fields.
; ;
2
I. e. there being none to attend to the rites/ women being '
ineligible.
3
I. e. members.
the surviving
4
I. e. by the mere fact of relationship to such men, or by
either
following their bad example.
5
There being no qualified person to perform them; their '
ancestors' that is to say, of the '

destroyers of families/
42 BHAGAVADGITA.
subverted. And O an&rdana! we have heard

that men whose family-rites are subverted, must
necessarily live in hell. Alas ! we are engaged in
committing a heinous sin, seeing that we are making
efforts for killing our own kinsmen out of greed of
the pleasures of sovereignty. If the sons of Dhrzta-
rashfra, weapon in hand, should kill me in battle,
me weaponless and not defending (myself), that
would be better for me.
Sanâya said :
Having spoken thus, Arûna cast aside his bow

together with the arrows, on the battle-field, and
sat down in (his) chariot, with a mind agitated by
grief
Chapter II.
Sanâya said :
To him, who was thus overcome with pity, and

dejected, and whose eyes were full of tears and
turbid, the destroyer of Madhu spoke these words.
The Deity said

How (comes it Arûna!
that) this delusion, O
which is discarded by the good, which excludes from
heaven, and occasions infamy, has overtaken you
in this (place of) peril ? Be not effeminate, O son
of Prz'tha it is not worthy of you.
! Cast off this
base weakness of heart, and arise, O terror of (your)
foes
Arûna said
How, O destroyer of Madhu ! shall I encounter
with arrows in the battle Bhlshma and Droâ both,
O destroyer of enemies ! entitled to reverence? Not
CHAPTER II, II. 43
killing (my) preceptors (men) of great glory it
is better to live even on alms in this world. But

killing them, though they are avaricious of worldly
goods, I should only enjoy blood-tainted enjoyments.
Nor do we know which of the two is better for

us whether that we should vanquish them, or that
they should vanquish us. Even those, whom having
killed, we do not wish to live even those sons of
Dhrztarashfra stand (arrayed) against us. With a
heart contaminated by the taint of helplessness \
with a mind confounded about my duty, I ask you.
Tell me what is assuredly good for me. I am your
disciple ; instruct me, who have thrown myself on
your (indulgence). do not perceive what is to For I
dispel that grief dry up my organs 2 after

which will
I shall have obtained a prosperous kingdom on
earth without a foe, or even the sovereignty of the

gods 3 .
Sanâya said :
Having spoken thus to Hrzshikei'a, O terror of

(your) foes ! Gu^keâ said to Govinda, *
I shall not
engage in battle and verily remained silent. To
;
'
him thus desponding between the two armies, O

descendant of Bharata ! Hrtshikesa, spoke these
words with a slight smile.
The Deity said :
You have grieved for those who deserve no grief,
1
The commentators say that 'heart' here signifies the dis-
positions which are stated in chapter XVIII infra, p. 126. The
feeling of ' helplessness ' is incompatible with what is there stated
as the proper disposition for a Kshatriya.
2
I. e. by the heat of vexation; the meaning is, 'which will cause
constant vexation of spirit.'
8
I. e. if the means employed are the sinful acts referred to.
44 bhagavadg!tA.
and you talk words of wisdom 1 . Learned men grieve

not for the living nor the dead. Never did I not
exist, nor you, nor these rulers of men nor ; will any
one of us ever hereafter cease to be. As in this
body, infancy and youth and old age (come) to the
embodied (self) 2 so does the acquisition of another
,
body; a sensible man is not deceived about that*

The contacts of the senses 3 O son of Kunti! which ,
produce cold and heat, pleasure and pain, are not

permanent, they are ever coming and going. Bear
them, O descendant of Bharata ! For, O chief of
men! that sensible man whom they 4
(pain and
pleasure being alike to him) afflict not, he merits
immortality. There is no existence for that which
is unreal ; there no non-existence for that which
is
is real. And 5
the (correct) conclusion about both is
perceived by those who perceive the truth. Know
that to be indestructible which pervades all this ;
the destruction of that inexhaustible (principle) none

can bring about. These bodies appertaining to the
embodied (self) which is eternal, indestructible, and
indefinable, are said 6
to be perishable ; therefore do
engage in battle, O descendant of Bharata! He
who thinks it to be the killer and he who thinks
1
Scil. regarding family-rites, &c, for, says Nilaka/â, they indi-
cate knowledge from body.
of soul as distinct
2
A common word in the Gita, that which presides over each
individual body.
4
3
Scil. with external objects. I. e. the ' contacts.'
5
The sense is this there are two things apparently, the soul
which is indestructible, and the feelings of pain &c. which come '
and go.' The true philosopher knows that the former only is real and
exists; and that the latter is unreal and non-existent. He therefore
does not mind the latter.

6
Scil. by those who are possessed of true knowledge.
CHAPTER II, 27. 45
it to be killed, both know nothing. It kills not,

1
is not killed . It is not born, nor does it ever
die, nor, having existed, does it exist no more.
Unborn, everlasting, unchangeable, and primeval,
it is not killed when the body is killed
2
O son of .
Prttha, how can that man who knows it thus to be

!
indestructible, everlasting, unborn, and inexhausti-

ble, how and whom can he kill, whom can he cause
to be killed ? As a man, casting off old clothes, puts
on others and new ones, so the embodied (self)
casting off old bodies, goes to others and new ones.
Weapons do not divide it (into pieces) fire does not ;
burn it; waters do not moisten it; the wind does not
dry it up. It is not divisible; it is not combustible;
it is not to be moistened; it is not to be dried up.
It is everlasting, all-pervading, stable, firm, and
3
eternal be unperceived, to be unthink-
. It is said to
able, to be unchangeable. Therefore knowing it to

be such, you ought not to grieve. But even if you
think that it is constantly born, and constantly dies,
still, O you of mighty arms you ought not to grieve !
thus. For to one that is born, death is certain

4
and to one that dies, birth is certain . Therefore
1
Cf. Ka/â-upanishad, p. 104.
2
Ka/â-upanishad, pp. 103, 104.
3 7
'Eternal. Nilaka//â explains this by 'unlimited by time,
place/ &c. ASahkara and others as '
uncreated/ '
without cause/
Stable = not assuming new forms; firm = not abandoning the original
form. (-Sridhara.) The latter signifies a slight change; the former
a total change.
4
from the Sutta Nipata (Sir M. C. Swamy's
Cf. the following
translation), pp. 124, 125: 'There is, indeed, no means by which
those born could be prevented from dying/ Even thus the world '
is afflicted with death and decay; therefore wise men, knowing the
course of things in the world, do not give way to grief/

46 BHAGAVADGITA.
about (this) unavoidable thing, you ought not to

grieve. The source of things, O descendant of
Bharata ! is unperceived ; their middle state is per-
ceived; and their end again is unperceived. What
(occasion is there for any) lamentation regarding
them 1
? One looks upon it
2
as a wonder ; another
similarly speaks of it as a wonder; another too hears
of it as a wonder and even
; after having heard of it,
no one does really know it
3
. This embodied (self),
O descendant of Bharata ! within every one's body
is ever indestructible. Therefore you ought not to
grieve for any being. Having regard to your own
duty also, you ought not to falter, for there is
4
nothing better for a Kshatriya than a righteous
battle.Happy those Kshatriyas, O son of Prztha
who can find such a battle (to fight) come of
itself 5
an open door to heaven ! But if you will
not fight this righteous battle, then you will have
abandoned your own duty and your fame, and you
will incur sin. All beings, too, will
tell of your
everlasting infamy and to one who has been

;
honoured, infamy is (a) greater (evil) than death.

(Warriors who are) masters of great cars will think
that you abstained from the battle through fear,
and having been highly thought of by them,
you will fall down to littleness. Your enemies, too,
1
Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 125. 'In vain do you grieve, not knowing
well the two ends of hirn whose manner either of coming or going
you know not.'
2
I. e. the self spoken of above.
3
Ka/â-upanishad, p. 96.
4
One of the warrior caste.
5
Without any effort, that is to say, of one's own.
CHAPTER II, 42. 47
decrying your power, will speak much about you

that should not be spoken. And what, indeed,
more lamentable than that ? Killed, you will obtain
heaven; victorious, you will enjoy the earth. There-
fore arise, O son of Kuntf ! resolved to (engage in)
battle. Looking alike on pleasure and pain, on gain

and on victory and defeat, then prepare for
loss,
battle, and thus you will not incur sin. The know-
ledge here declared to you is that relating to the
Sankhya 1 Now hear that relating to the Yoga.
.
Possessed of this knowledge, O son of Prz'tha you !
will cast off the bonds of action. In this (path to

final emancipation) nothing that is commenced be-
comes abortive and even a little
; no obstacles exist;
of this (form of) piety protects one from great
danger 2 There is here 3 O descendant of Kuru
. ,
but one state of mind consisting in firm understand-

ing. But the states of mind of those who have no
firm understanding are many-branched and endless.
The state of mind consisting in firm understanding
4
regarding steady contemplation does not belong to
those, O son of Prz'tha ! who are strongly attached to
(worldly) pleasures and power, and whose minds are
drawn away by that flowery talk which is full of
(ordinances of) specific acts for the attainment of
(those) pleasures and (that) power, and which pro-
1
Sankhya is explained in different modes by the different com-
mentators, but the resulting meaning here seems to be, that the
doctrine stated is the doctrine of true knowledge and emancipation
by its means. See infra, p. 52.
2
Viz. this mortal mundane life.
3
I. e. for those who enter on this path/ '
4
I. e. of the supreme Being Yoga meaning
; really the dedication
of all acts to that Being.

48 BHAGAVADGITA.
mises birth as the fruit of acts 1

(that flowery
talk) which those unwise ones utter, who are ena-
moured of Vedic words, who say there is nothing
else, who are full of desires, and whose goal is
heaven 2 The Vedas (merely) relate to the effects
.
of the three qualities 3 do you, O Arûna rise ; !
above those effects of the three qualities, and be

free from the pairs of opposites 4 always preserve ,
courage 5 be free from anxiety for new acquisitions

,
or protection of old acquisitions, and be self-con-

trolled 6
. To the instructed Brahma/za, there is in
all the Vedas as much utility as in a reservoir of
water into which waters flow from all sides 7 Your .
business is with action alone not by any means ;
with fruit. Let not the fruit of action be your

motive (to action). Let not your attachment be
(fixed)on inaction 8 Having recourse to devotion,
.
O Dhananâya! perform actions, casting off (all)

attachment, and being equable in success or ill
1
See Sutta Nipata, p. 4.
2
This is a merely temporary good, and not therefore deserving
to be aspired to before final emancipation.
3
I. e. the whole course of worldly affairs. As to qualities, see
chapter XIV.
4
pleasure, and so forth. Cf. Manu I, 26.
Heat and cold, pain and
5
and other places.
Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 17
6
Keeping the mind from worldly objects.
7
The meaning here is not easily apprehended. I suggest the
following explanation :
Having said that the Vedas are concerned
with actions for special benefits, Krishna, compares them to a
reservoir which provides water for various special purposes,
drinking, bathing, &c. The Vedas similarly prescribe particular rites
and ceremonies for going to heaven, or destroying an enemy, &c.
But, says Knsha, man's duty is merely to perform the actions
prescribed for him among these, and not entertain desires for the
special benefits named. The stanza occurs in the Sanatsugitiya, too.
8
Doing nothing at all.
CHAPTER II, 55. 49
success; (such) equability is called devotion. Action,

O Dhananâya! is far inferior to the devotion of
the mind. In that devotion seek shelter. Wretched
are those whose motive (to action) is the fruit (of
action). He who has obtained devotion in this
world casts both merit and sin 1
off Therefore apply .
yourself to devotion devotion in (all) actions is ;
wisdom. The wise who have obtained devotion

cast off the fruit of action ; and released from the
shackles of (repeated) births 2 repair to that seat where ,
there no unhappiness 3
is When your mind shall .
have crossed beyond the taint of delusion, then will

you become indifferent to all that you have heard or
will hear 4 When your mind, confounded by what
.
you have heard 5 will stand firm and steady in con-

,
templation 6 then will you acquire devotion.

,
Arûna said
What are the characteristics, O Keâva of one !
whose mind is steady, and who is intent on con-

templation ? How should one of steady mind speak,
how sit, how move ?
The Deity said
When a man, O son of Pr/thd ! abandons all the
1
Merit merely leads to heaven, as to which see note on last
page. Cf. Sutta Nip&ta, pp. 4, 136, 145 note.

2
Sutta Nipata, pp. 3-7, &c.
3
Sutta Nip&ta, p. 21.
* This, according to Anandagiri, means all writings other than
those on the science of the soul.
5
I. e. about the means for the acquisition of various desired
things.
6
I. e. of the soul (-Sahkara), of the supreme Being (Sridhara).
Substantially they both mean the same thing.
[8] E
50 bhagavadgitA.
desires of his heart, and is pleased in his self only

and by his self 1 he is then called one of steady mind.
,
He whose heart is not agitated in the midst of

calamities, who has no longing for pleasures, and
from whom (the feelings of) affection, fear, and
wrath 2 have departed, is called a sage of steady
mind. His mind is steady, who, being without
attachments anywhere, feels no exultation and no
aversion on encountering the various agreeable and
disagreeable 3 (things of this world). A man's mind
\s steady, when he withdraws his senses from (all)
objects of sense, as the tortoise (withdraws) its
limbs from all sides. Objects of sense draw back

from a person who is abstinent; not so the taste
(for those objects). But even the taste departs
from him, w hen he has seen the Supreme
r
The 4
.
boisterous senses, O son of Kuntt carry away by !
force the mind even of a wise man, who exerts

himself (for final emancipation). Restraining them
all, a man should remain engaged in devotion,
making me his only resort. For his mind is steady
whose senses are under his control* The man who
ponders over objects of sense forms an attachment
to them from (that) attachment is produced desire;
;
and from desire anger is produced 5 from anger ;
results want of discrimination 6 from want of dis- ;
VI. e. pleased, without regard to external objects, by self-con-

templation alone.
2
Cf. Sutta Nip&ta, p. 3.
3
The word ,rubha\mbha in this sense also occurs in the Dhamma-
pada, stanza 78, and in the Maitrf-upanishad, p. 34.
4
See on this, Wilson's Essays on Sanskrit Literature, vol. iii,
p. 130*
5
I, e. when the desire is frustrated.
6
I. e. between right and wrong. Confusion of memory =for-
getfulness of *SUstras and rules prescribed in them.
CHAPTER II, 70. 51
crimination, confusion of the from con- memory ;
fusion of the memory, loss of reason and in conse- ;
quence of loss of reason he is utterly ruined. But

the self-restrained man who moves among 1 objects
with senses under the control of his own self, and
free from affection and aversion, obtains tranquillity 2 .
When there is tranquillity, all his miseries are de-

stroyed, for the mind of him whose heart is tranquil
soon becomes steady. He who is not self-restrained
has no steadiness of mind nor has he who is not self-
;
restrained perseverance 3 in the pursuit of self-know-

ledge there is no tranquillity for him who does not
;
persevere in the pursuit of self-knowledge ; and

whence can there be happiness for one who is not
tranquil ? For the heart which follows the rambling
senses leads away his judgment, as the wind leads
a boat astray upon the waters. Therefore, O you of
mighty arms! his mind is steady whose senses are
restrained on all sides from objects of sense. The
self-restrained man is awake, when it is night for all
beings ; and when all beings are awake, that is the

night of the right-seeing sage 4
. He into whom all
objects of desire enter, as waters enter the ocean,

which, (though) replenished, (still) keeps its position
unmoved, he only obtains tranquillity not he who
;
desires (those) obj ects of desire. The man who, casting
1
Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 45.
2 where the commentator explains
Cf. Maitri-upanishad, p. 134,
it to mean freedom from desires.

3
For a somewhat similar use of the word bhavanS in this sense,
comp. Dhammapada, stanza 301.

* Spiritual matters are dark as night to the common run of men,
while they are wide awake in all worldly pursuits. With the sage
the case is exactly the reverse.
E 2
52 BHAGAVADGiTA.
off all desires, lives free from attachments, who is

free from egoism *, and from (the feeling that this or
that is) mine
2
obtains tranquillity.
,
This, O son of
3
Prztha! is the Brahmic state attaining to this, one ;
is never deluded and remaining in it in (one's) last

;
moments, one attains (brahma-nirvi/za) the Brahmic

4
bliss .
Chapter III.
Ar^*una said
O anardana! devotion is deemed by you
If,
to be superior to action, then why, O Keâva!

do you prompt me to (this) fearful action ? You
seem, indeed, to confuse my mind by equivocal
words. Therefore, declare one thing determinately,
by which I may attain the highest good.
The Deity said :
sinless one ! I have already declared, that in

this world there is a twofold path 5 that of the
Sinkhyas by devotion in the shape of (true) know-
ledge and that of the Yogins by devotion in the
;
shape of action. A
man does not attain freedom
from action 6 merely by not engaging in action nor ;
does he attain perfection by mere renunciation. 7 8
For nobody ever remains even for an instant without

1
Either pride or, better, the false notion mentioned infra, p. 55.
2
An almost identical expression occurs in the Dhammapada,
stanza 367, and Maitri-upanishad, p. 37.
3
The state of identification of oneself with the Brahman, which
results from a correct knowledge of the Brahman.
4 5
Infra, p. 66. Supra, p. 47.
6
I. e., according to *S*ahkara, identification of oneself with
7
Brahman. Final emancipation.
8
I. e. not coupled with knowledge and purity of heart.
CHAPTER III, 13. 53
performing some action; since the qualities of nature

constrain everybody, not having free-will (in the
matter), to some action l
. The deluded man who,
2
restraining the organs of action , continues to think
in mind about objects of sense, is called a
his
hypocrite. But he, O Arûna who restraining his !
senses by his mind 3 and being free from attach-

,
ments, engages in devotion (in the shape) of action,

with the organs of action, is far superior. Do you
perform prescribed action, for action is better than
inaction, and the support of your body, too, cannot
be accomplished with inaction. This world is fet-
tered by all action other than action for the purpose
of the sacrifice 4
O son of Kuntl do
. Therefore, !
you, casting off attachment, perform action for that

purpose. The Creator, having in olden times created
men together with the sacrifice, said Propagate :
'
with this. May

be the giver to you of the things
it
you desire. Please the gods with this, and may

those gods please you. Pleasing each other, you
will attain the highest good. For pleased with the
sacrifices, the gods will give you the enjoyments
you desire. And he who enjoys himself without
giving them what they have given, is, indeed, a thief/
The good, who eat the leavings of a sacrifice, are
released from all sins. But the unrighteous ones,
who prepare food for themselves only, incur sin 5 .
2
1
Cf. infra, pp. 122-128. Hands, feet, &c.
3
By means of true discrimination keeping the senses from
attachments to worldly objects, which lead to sin and evil.
4
Cf. infra, pp. 60, 61. Probably the sacrifices spoken of in '
'
that passage must be taken to be the same as those referred to
in the Creator's injunction mentioned in this passage.

5
Cf. Maitrt-upanishad, p. 143.
54 bhagavadgIta.
From food are born (all) creatures ; from rain is the

production of food ; rain is produced by sacrifices ;
sacrifices are the result of action ; know that action

has its source in the Vedas ; the Vedas come from
the Indestructible. Therefore the all-comprehending
Vedas are always concerned with sacrifices 1
. He
who in this world does not turn round the wheel
revolving thus, is of sinful life, indulging his senses,
and, O son of Prztha! he lives in vain. But the
man who is attached to his self only, who is con-
tented in his self, and is pleased with his self 2 has ,
nothing to do. He has no interest at all in what

is done, and none whatever in what is not done, in
3
this world ; nor is any interest of his dependent
4
on any being. Therefore always perform action,
which must be performed, without attachment. For
a man, performing action without attachment, attains
the Supreme. By action alone, did (kanaka and the
rest work for perfection 5 And having regard also .
to the keeping of people (to their duties) you should

perform action. Whatever a great man does, that
other men also do. And people follow whatever he
receives as authority. There is nothing, O son of
PrztM! for me to do in (all) the three worlds,
1
The commentators explain this to mean that though the
Vedas elucidate all matters, their principal subject is the sacrifice.
2
The distinctions here are rather nice, an ordinary man is
'
attached ' to worldly objects, is '
contented ' with goods &c, and
is '
pleased ' with special gains.
3
No good or evil accrues to him from anything he does or
omits to do.
4
-Srldhara says that Arg-una is here told to perform action, as free-
dom from it is only for the man of true knowledge, which Arûna
is not as yet.
5
I. e. final emancipation ; cf. p. 59 infra, and Iropanishad, p. 6.
CHAPTER III, 30. 55
nothing to acquire which has not been acquired.

Still do engage in action. For should I at any
I
time engage without sloth in action, men

not
would follow in my path from all sides, O son of
Prztha. ! If I did not perform actions, these worlds
would be destroyed, I should be the cause of caste-
interminglings; and I should be ruining these people.
As the ignorant act, O descendant of Bharata! with
attachment to action, so should a wise man act
without attachment, wishing to keep the people (to
their duties). A wise man should not shake the
convictions of the ignorant who are attached to
action, but acting with devotion (himself) should
make them apply themselves to all action. He
whose mind is deluded by egoism thinks himself
the doer of the actions, which, in every way, are
done by the qualities of nature 1 But he, O you .
of mighty arms! who knows the truth about the

difference from qualities and the difference from
actions 2 forms no attachments, believing that quali-
,
ties deal with qualities 3 But those who are deluded .
by the qualities of nature form attachments to the

actions of the qualities 4 A man of perfect knowledge
.
should not shake these men of imperfect know-

ledge (in their convictions). Dedicating all actions
to me with a mind knowing the relation of the
supreme and individual self, engage in battle with-
1
The active principle is nature, the aggregate of the three
qualities; the soul is only the looker-on; cf. inter alia, p. 104 infra.
2
Scil. the difference of the soul from the collection of qualities,
viz. the body, senses, &c, and from the actions of which they are
the authors.
3
Qualities (i. e. senses) deal with qualities, i. e. objects of sense.
* I. e. all mundane affairs.
56 bhagavadgitA.
out desire, without (any feeling that this or that is)
mine, and without any mental trouble \ Even those

men who always act on this opinion of mine, full of
faith, and without carping, are released from all
actions. But those who carp at my opinion and do
not act upon it, know them to be devoid of dis-
crimination, deluded as regards all knowledge 2 and ,
ruined. Even a man of knowledge acts consonantly

to his own nature 3 . All beings follow nature. What
will restraint effect ? Every sense has its affections
and aversions towards its objects fixed. One should
not become subject to them, for they are one's
opponents 4 . One's own duty, though defective, is
better than another's duty well performed. Death

in (performing) one's own duty is preferable ; the
(performance of the) duty of others is dangerous.
Arîina said :
But by whom, O descendant of Vrishnll is man

impelled, even though unwilling, and, as it were,
constrained by force, to commit sin ?
1
About the consequences of your actions.
2
Of actions, or of the Brahman in its various forms.
8
Which is the result of the virtues and vices of a preceding
life. The sequence of ideas here is as follows The true view :

stated here about the *
difference from qualities and actions' is
disregarded by some, owing to their '

nature ' as now explained.
Then the question is, If nature is so potent, what is the good of
the *Sastras ? The answer is, Nature only acts through our likes
and dislikes. Withstand them and then you can follow the *S"dstras.
It is under the influence of these likes and dislikes, that some may
say, we shall practise duties prescribed for others (our own being
bad ones) as they are equally prescribed by the *Sastras. That, as
stated in the last sentence here, is wrong.
4
Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. ioi, as to '
likings and dislikings/
CHAPTER III, 43. 57
The Deity said
It is desire, it is wrath \ born from the quality of

passion ; it is very ravenous, very sinful. Know that
that is the foe in this world. As fire is enveloped
by smoke, a mirror by dust, the foetus by the
womb, so is this 2 enveloped by desire. Knowledge,
O son of Kuntl is enveloped by this constant foe
1
of the man of knowledge, in the shape of desire,

which is like a fire 3
and insatiable. The senses, the
mind, and the understanding are said to be its seat 4 ;
with these it deludes the embodied (self) after en-
veloping knowledge. Therefore, O chief of the

descendants of Bharata! first restrain your senses,
then cast off this sinful thing which destroys know-
ledge and experience 6 . It has been said 6
, Great
are the senses, greater than the senses is the mind,
greater than the mind is the understanding. What is
greater than the understanding is that 7

. Thus know-
ing that which is higher than the understanding, and
restraining (your)self by (your)self, O you of mighty
1
Vide p. 50 supra.
2
I. e. knowledge, mentioned in the next sentence, for which
construction p. 71 and p. 98 may be compared.
3
Which becomes more powerful the more it is fed.
4
The mind is that which ponders over things as such or such ;
the understanding is that which finally determines (cf. Lewes'

History of Philosophy, II, 463-465). These and the senses are
the '
seat ' of desire, because the perception of an object by the
sense, the pondering over it by the mind, and the determination
about by the understanding are the preliminaries to the

it
awakening of the desire ; supra, p. 50.

5
Knowledge is from books or teachers, experience is the result
of personal perception.
6
Ka/ôpanishad, p. 114; and see also pp. 148, 149.
7
I. e. the supreme Being, as in the KaMopanishad.
58 BHAGAVADGITA.
arms destroy this unmanageable enemy

! in the shape
of desire.
Chapter IV.
The Deity said
This everlasting (system of) devotion I declared

1
to the sun, the sun declared it to Manu 2 and Manu ,
communicated it to Ikshvaku. Coming thus by steps,

it became known to royal sages. But, O terror of
(your) foes ! was lost to the world by
that devotion
long (lapse of) time. That same primeval devotion I
have declared to you to-day, seeing that you are my
devotee and friend, for it is the highest mystery.
Arûna said
Later is your birth ; the birth of the sun is prior.
How then shall I understand that you declared (this)
first?
The Deity said
I have passed through many births, O Arf una
and you also. I know them all, but you, O terror

of (your) foes do not know them.
! Even though I
am unborn and inexhaustible in (my) essence, even
though I am lord of all beings, still I take up the
control of my own nature 3 and am born by means ,
1
Because its fruit is imperishable, viz. final emancipation.
In the -Oandogya-upanishad, Manu is the channel of com-
2
munication for some doctrine taught by Praâpati, which Manu

teaches the 'people,' interpreted by Sahkara to mean Ikshvaku, &c.
(p. 178; see too p. 625).
3
Nature is what goes to the formation of the material form in
which he is born ; the ' power includes knowledge, omnipotence,
'
&c. It is delusive because he is still really '

unborn/
CHAPTER IV, 1 6. 59
of my delusive power. Whensoever, O descendant

of Bharata ! piety languishes, and impiety is in the
ascendant, I create myself. I am born age after age,
for the protection of the good, for the destruction of
evil-doers,and the establishment of piety. Whoever
truly knows thus my divine birth and work, casts off
(this) body and is not born again. He comes to me,
O Arûna! Many from whom affection, fear 1 and ,
wrath have departed, who are full of me, who depend

on me, and who are purified by the penance of know-
ledge 2 have come into my essence. I serve men in
,
the way in which they approach me 3 In every way, .
son of Prztha! men follow in my path 4 . Desiring

the success of actions 5
, men in this world worship
the divinities, for in this world of mortals, the success
produced by action is soon obtained. The fourfold
was created by me according to
division of castes
the apportionment of qualities and duties. But
though I am its author, know me to be inexhausti-
ble,and not the author. Actions defile me not.
1 have no attachment to the fruit of actions. He
who knows me thus is not tied down by actions.
Knowing this, the men of old who wished for final
emancipation, performed action.
Therefore do you,
too,perform action as was done by men of old in
olden times. Even sages are confused as to what
1 2
Cf. Sutta Nip&ta, p. 73. Cf. infra, p. 61.
3
I. e. I give to each worshipper what is proper for him.
4
The original words used here occur before in a different sense
(see p. 55). Here the meaning is that to whomsoever directly ad-
dressed, all worship is worship of me (see p. 84). In the whole
passage, Krishna, says that the Deity is not chargeable with partiality
on account of the variety of human qualities and states.
5
Such as acquisition of sons, cattle, &c.
6o bhagavadgitA.
is action, what inaction. Therefore I will speak to

you about action, and learning that, you will be freed
from (this world of) evil. One must possess know-
ledge about action one must also possess knowledge
;
about prohibited action and again one must possess

;
knowledge about inaction. The truth regarding

action is abstruse. He is wise among men, he is
possessed of devotion, and performs all actions \
who sees inaction in action, and action in inaction.
The wise call him learned, whose acts are all free
from desires and fancies, and whose actions are
burnt down by the fire of knowledge. Forsaking
all attachment to the fruit of action, always con-
tented, dependent on none, he does nothing at all,
though he engages in action. Devoid of expecta-
tions, restraining the mind and the self, and
casting off all belongings 2 he incurs no sin, per-
,
forming actions merely for the sake of the body 3 .
Satisfied with earnings coming spontaneously 4 rising ,
above the pairs of opposites, free from all animosity,

and equable on success or ill-success, he is not fettered
down, even though he performs (actions). The acts of
one who is devoid of attachment, who is free 5 whose ,
mind is fixed on knowledge, and who performs action

6
for (the purpose of) the sacrifice are all destroyed.
1
Devoted though performing all actions.
2
'Appropriating nothing/ at Sutta Nipata, p. 101, seems to be
the same idea. * Self just before this means senses.
3
Preferably, perhaps, 'with the body only/ But -Sankara
rejects this.
4
Cf. infra, p. ioi; and Sutta Nip&ta, p. 12.
The commentators vary in their interpretations of this word
5
(mukta), but the common point appears to be free from attachment '
to worldly concerns/ Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 8.

6
Sacrifice here apparently means every act for the attainment of
CHAPTER IV, 29. 6l
Brahman is the oblation ; with Brahman (as a sacri-

ficial instrument) it is offered up Brahman is in the
;
fire ; and by Brahman it is thrown and Brahman, ;
too, is the goal to which he proceeds who meditates
on Brahman in the action \ Some devotees perform

the sacrifice to the gods, some offer up the sacrifice
by the sacrifice itself in the fire of Brahman 2 Others .
offer up the senses, such as the sense of hearing and

others, in the fires of restraint 3 others offer up the ;
objects of sense, such as sound and so forth, into

the fires of the senses \ Some again offer up all the
operations of the senses and the operations of the
life-breaths into the fire of devotion by self-restraint 5 ,
kindled by knowledge. Others perform the sacrifice

of wealth, the sacrifice of penance, the sacrifice of
concentration of mind, the sacrifice of Vedic study 6 ,
and of knowledge, and others are ascetics of rigid

vows. Some offer up the upward life-breath into the
downward life-breath, and the downward life-breath
into the upper life-breath, and stopping up the motions
of the upward and downward life-breaths, devote them-
7
selves to the restraint of the life-breaths . Others,
who (take) limited food, offer up the life-breaths into
the supreme; cf. supra, p. 53. In Ajval&yana GrzTiya-sutra I, 1, 5,
a text is cited meaning *

salutation verily is a sacrifice/
1
This thorough identification with the Brahman explains why
the action is destroyed ' and does not fetter the doer.
i
' '
2
I. e. all acts, religious and other, offered up to the Brahman in
the mode above stated.
3
Practise yoga and other like exercises.
*
'
4
Remaining unattached to sensuous enjoyments.
5
Stopping the bodily operations mentioned, and engaging in
contemplation.
6
This is called Brahmaya^na, Awalayana Gr/hya-sutra III, 1, 3.
7
Maitrt-upanishad, p. 129.
62 BHAGAVADGITA.
the life-breaths. All of these, conversant with the

sacrifice, have their sins destroyed by the sacrifice.
Those who eat the nectar-like leavings of the sacri-

fice repair to the eternal Brahman 1 . This world
is not for those who perform no sacrifice, whence
(then) the other, O best of the Kauravas ! Thus
sacrifices of various sorts are laid down in the
Vedas. Know them all to be produced from action 2 ,
and knowing this you be released (from the

will
fetters of this world). The sacrifice of knowledge,
O terror of (your) foes ! is superior to the sacrifice
of wealth, for action, O son of Prtth&l is wholly
and entirely comprehended in knowledge. That 3
you should learn by salutation, question, and service 4 .
The men of knowledge who perceive the truth will

teach knowledge to you. Having learnt that, O
son of F&ndul you will not again fall thus into
delusion; and by means of it, you will see all beings,
without exception, first in yourself, and then in me 5 .
Even if you are the most sinful of all sinful men,

you will cross over all trespasses by means of the
boat of knowledge alone. As a fire well kindled,
O Ar^nna! reduces fuel to ashes, so the fire of
knowledge reduces all actions to ashes 6 For there .
is in this world no means of sanctification like know-
ledge 7 and that one perfected by devotion finds

,
within one's self in time. He who has faith, whose
1
Supra, p. 53.
2
Operations of mind, senses, &c. ; cf. supra, p. 54.
3
I. e. knowledge.
4
Addressed to men of knowledge. Cf. Mudakopanishad, p. 282.
5
The essential unity of the supreme and individual soul and the
whole universe. Cf. iropanishad, pp. 13, 14.
6 7
Supra, p. 60. Sutta Nip&ta, p. 48.
CHAPTER V, 3. 63
senses are restrained, and who is assiduous, obtains

knowledge \ Obtaining knowledge, he acquires,
without delay, the highest tranquillity. He who is
ignorant and devoid of faith, and whose self is full

of misgivings, is Not this world, not the
ruined.
next, nor happiness, him whose self is full
is for
of misgivings. Actions, O Dhananâya do not !
fetter one who is self-possessed 2 who has renounced ,
action by devotion, and who has destroyed mis-

givings by knowledge. Therefore, O descendant
of Bharata! destroy, with the sword of knowledge,
these misgivings of yours which fill your mind, and
which are produced from ignorance. Engage in
devotion. Arise
Chapter V.
Arûna said
O Kr/shâ! you praise renunciation of actions

and also the pursuit (of them). Tell me determinately
which one of these two is superior.
The Deity said
Renunciation and pursuit of action are both

instruments of happiness. But of the two, pursuit
of action is superior to renunciation of action. He
3
should be understood to be always an ascetic ,
who has no aversion and no desire. For, O you

of mighty arms ! he who is free from the pairs of
opposites is easily released from (all) bonds. Children
not wise men talk of sllnkhya and yoga as dis-
1
Sutta Nip&ta, p. 49.
2
Cautious, free from heedlessness.
3
I. e. one who has performed renunciation/
'
64 BHAGAVADGITA.
tinct. One who pursues either well obtains the fruit

of both. The seat which the sankhyas obtain is
reached by the yogas x also. He sees (truly), who
sees the Sclnkhya and yoga as one. Renunciation,
O you of mighty arms ! is difficult to reach without
devotion; the sage possessed of devotion attains
Brahman 2 without delay. He who is possessed of
devotion, whose self is pure, who has restrained
his self 3 , and who has controlled his senses, and
who identifies his self with every being, is not
tainted though he performs (actions). The man of
devotion,who knows the truth, thinks he does
nothing at all, when he sees 4
, hears, touches,
smells, eats, moves, sleeps, breathes, talks, throws
5
out , takes, opens or closes the eyelids ; he holds
that the senses deal with the objects of the senses.
He who, casting off (all) attachment, performs actions
dedicating them to Brahman, is not tainted by sin,
as the lotus-leaf 6
(is not tainted) by water. De-
votees, casting off attachment, perform actions for
attaining purity of self, with the body, the mind, the
understanding, or even the senses 7
(all) free (from
1
Those who follow the yoga path/
'
The form is noteworthy,
grammatically.
2 (
I. e. attains true renunciation/ says *Sahkara ; Sridhara says,
' attains Brahman, after becoming a " renouncer."
3
Here self is explained as body; in the line which goes before
it is explained as heart.
4
These are the various operations of the organs of perception,
action, &c.
5
Excretions, &c.
6
A very common simile. Cf. inter alia iTMndogya-upanishad,
p. 276; Sutta NipSta, pp. 107-134; and Davids' Buddhism, p, 158
note.
7
Body = bathing, &c; mind = meditation, &c.; understanding
ascertainment of truth; senses = hearing and celebrating God's name.
CHAPTER V, 19. 65
egoistic notions). He who is possessed of devotion,

abandoning the fruit of actions, attains the highest
tranquillity. He who is without devotion, and
attached to the fruit (of action), is tied down by
(reason of his) acting in consequence of (some)
desire. The self-restrained, embodied (self) lies at
ease within the city of nine portals \ renouncing all
actions by the mind, not doing nor causing (any-

thing) to be done. The Lord is not the cause of
actions, or of the capacity of performing actions
amongst men, or of the connexion of action and
fruit. But nature only works. The Lord receives
no one's sin, nor merit either. Knowledge is
enveloped by ignorance, hence all creatures are
deluded 2 But to those who have destroyed that
.
ignorance by knowledge of the self, (such) know-

ledge, like the sun, shows forth that supreme
(principle). And those whose mind is (centred) on
it, whose (very) self it is, who are thoroughly
devoted to it, and whose final goal it is, go
never to return, having their sins destroyed by
knowledge. The wise look upon a Brahma/za pos-
sessed of learning and humility, on a cow, an ele-
phant, a dog, and a .SVapaka, as alike 3 Even here, .
those have conquered the material world, whose

mind rests in equability 4 since Brahman is free
;
from defects and equable, therefore they rest in
1
Cf. Pra^nopanishad, p. 202 ; -Svetasvatara, p. 332 ; Sutta Nipata,
p. 52. The Ka/ôpanishad has eleven portals (p. 132). The nine
are the eyes, nostrils, ears, mouth, and the two for excretions.
2
As regards the Lord's relation to mans merit or sin.
3
As manifestations of Brahman, though of different qualities
and classes. As to -SVapaka, a very low caste, see Sutta Nipata, p. 36.
4
As stated in the preceding words.
[8] F
66 BHAGAVADGITA.
Brahman. He who knows

Brahman, whose mind
is steady, who is not deluded, and who rests in
Brahman, does not exult on finding anything agree-

able, nor does he grieve on finding anything disagree-
able \ One whose self is not attached to external
objects, obtains the happiness that is in (one's) self;
and by means of concentration of mind, joining one's
self (with the Brahman), one obtains indestructible
happiness. For the enjoyments born of contact (be-
tween senses and their objects) are, indeed, sources
of misery; they have a beginning as well as an
end 2 O son of Kunt! a wise man feels no pleasure
. !
in them. He who even in this world, before his

release from the body, is able to bear the agitations
produced from desire and wrath, is a devoted man,
he is a happy man. The devotee whose happiness
is within (himself), whose recreation is within (him-
self), and whose light (of knowledge) also is within
(himself), becoming (one with) the Brahman 3 obtains ,
the Brahmic bliss 4 The sages whose sins have

.
perished, whose misgivings are destroyed, who are

self-restrained, and who are intent on the welfare
of all beings 5 obtain the Brahmic bliss.
, To the
ascetics, who are free from desire and wrath 6 and ,
whose minds are restrained, and who have know-

ledge of the self, the Brahmic bliss is on both sides
(of death). The sage who excludes (from his mind)
1 2
Ka/ôpanishad, p. ioo. Cf. supra, p. 44.
3
He is one with the Brahman as he is intent exclusively on the
Brahman.
4
The bliss of assimilation with the Brahman, or, as Ramanug-a
puts it, the bliss of direct knowledge of the self.
5
Sutta Nipata, p. 39; also Davids' Buddhism, p. 109.
6
CHAPTER VI, 5. 67
external objects, the visual power

(concentrates)
between the brows and making the upward and
1
,
downward life-breaths even, confines their move-

ments within the nose, who restrains senses, mind,
and understanding 2 whose highest goal is final
,
emancipation, from whom desire, fear, and wrath

have departed, is, indeed, for ever released (from
birth and death). He knowing me to be the enjoyer
of all sacrifices and penances, the great Lord of all
worlds, and the friend of all beings, attains tran-
quillity.
Chapter VI.
The Deity said
He who, regardless of the fruit of actions, per-

forms the actions which ought to be performed, is
the devotee and renouncer; not he who discards the
(sacred) fires 3 norhe who performs no acts. Know,
,
O son of Pa/zdii that what is called renunciation is

!
devotion for nobody becomes a devotee who has

;
not renounced (all) fancies 4 To the sage who wishes

.
to rise to devotion, action is said to be a means, and

to him, when he has risen to devotion, tranquillity 5
is said to be a means. When one does not attach one-
self to objects of sense,nor to action, renouncing all

fancies, one said to have risen to devotion.
then is
(A man) should elevate his self by his self 6 he should ;
not debase his self, for even (a man's) own self is his
1 2
Cf. infra, p. 78. P. 57 and Ka/ôpanishad, p. 157.
8
Which are required for ordinary religious rites.
4
Which are the cause of desires see supra, p. 50.;
5
Abandonment of distracting actions ; means scil. to perfect
knowledge, says ridhara.
6
I. e. by means of a mind possessed of true discrimination.
F 2
68 BHAGAVADGITA.
friend, (a man's) own self is also his enemy 1 . To

him who has subjugated his self by his self his 2
,
self is a friend but to him who has not restrained

;
his self, his own self behaves inimically, like an
enemy. The self of one who has subjugated his self

and is tranquil, is absolutely concentrated (on itself),
in the midst of cold and heat, pleasure and pain, as
well as honour and dishonour. The devotee whose
self is contented with knowledge and experience 3 ,
who is unmoved 4 who has restrained his senses, and

,
to whom a sod, a stone, and gold are alike, is said to

be devoted. And he is esteemed highest, who
thinks alike 5 about well-wishers, friends, and enemies,
and those who are indifferent, and those who take
part with both sides, and those who are objects of
hatred, and relatives, as well as about the good and
the sinful. A
devotee should constantly devote his
self to abstraction, remaining in a secret place 6 ?
alone, with his mind and self 7 restrained, without

expectations, and without belongings. Fixing his
8
seat firmly in a clean place, not too high nor too
low, and covered over with a sheet of cloth, a deer-
skin, and (blades of) Kara (grass), and there seated
on (that) seat, fixing his mind exclusively on one
point, with the workings of the mind and senses
1
Self is here explained as mind, the unsteadiness of which
prevents the acquisition of devotion, p. 71.
2
This means restraining senses by mind. See Maitri-upa-
nishad, p. 180.
3 4
Supra, p. 57. By any of the vexations of the world.
5
I. e. is free from affection or aversion towards them.
6
' Release from society ' is insisted on at Sutta Nipata, p. 55.
7
Self is here explained as senses ; in the previous clause as mind.
8
This requisite is prescribed by many authorities. Cf. Kh&n-
dogya-upanishad,p.62 6; Maitrf, p. 156; -SVetawatara, pp. 318, 319;
and A^valayana (Grzhya-sutra) III, 2, 2, for Vedic study too.
CHAPTER VI, 1 8, 69
restrained, he should practice devotion for purity of

self. Holding his body, head, and neck even and
unmoved, (remaining) steady, looking at the tip of
his own nose 1 and not looking about in (all)
,
directions, with a tranquil self, devoid of fear, and

adhering to the rules of Brahmaârins 2 he should ,
restrain his mind, and (concentrate it) on me, and

sit down engaged in devotion, regarding me as his
final goal. Thus constantly devoting his self to

abstraction, a devotee whose mind is restrained,
attains that tranquillity which culminates in final
emancipation, and assimilation with me. Devotion
is not his, O Arûna! who eats too much, nor his
who eats not at all not his who is addicted to too
;
much sleep, nor his who is (ever) awake. That

devotion which destroys (all) misery is his, who
takes due food and exercise 3 who toils duly in all
,
works, and who sleeps and awakes (in) due (time) \

When mind well restrained becomes steady
(a man's)
upon the then he being indifferent to all
self alone,
objects of desire, is said to be devoted. As a light
standing in a windless (place) flickers not, that is
declared to be the parallel for a devotee, whose mind

is and who devotes his self to abstraction.
restrained,
That (mental condition), in which the mind restrained
by practice of abstraction, ceases to work in which ;
too, one seeing the self by the self

5
is pleased in ,
1
Cf. Kumarasambhava, Canto III, 47. This is done in order to
prevent the sight from rambling a total closing of the eyes being
objectionable as leading to sleep.
2
See these in Apastamba (p. 7 in this series); and cf. Sutta
Nipata, pp. 159, 160; and Miiller's Hibbert Lectures, p. 158.
3
Cf. Sutta Nipata, pp. 28, 95.
4
Buddhism shows similar injunctions. Cf. Sutta Nipata, pp. 21,
28, 95; and Dhammapada, stanza 8.

5
Sees the highest principle by a mind purified by abstraction.
JO BHAGAVADGITA.
the self; in which one experiences that infinite happi-

ness which transcends the senses, and which can be
grasped by the understanding only ; and adhering to
which, one never swerves from the truth ; acquiring
which, one thinks no other acquisition higher than it;
and adhering to which, one is not shaken off even by

great misery; that should be understood to be called
devotion in which there is a severance of all con-
nexion with pain. That devotion should be practised
with steadiness and with an undesponding heart.
Abandoning, without exception, all desires 1 which ,
are produced from fancies, and restraining the whole

group of the senses on all sides by the mind only 2 ,
one should by slow steps become quiescent 3 with ,
a firm resolve coupled with courage 4 and fixing ;
his mind upon the self, should think of nothing.

Wherever the active and unsteady mind breaks
forth 5 there one should ever restrain it, and fix it
,
steadily on the self alone. The highest happiness

comes to such a devotee, whose mind is fully
tranquil, in whom the quality of passion has been
suppressed, who
from sin, and who is become
is free
(one with) the Brahman. Thus constantly devoting
his self to abstraction, a devotee, freed from sin,
easily obtains that supreme happiness contact with

the Brahman 6 He who has devoted his self to ab-
.
straction, by devotion, looking alike on everything,

sees the self abiding in all beings, and all beings in
1 2
Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 62. Cf. supra, p. 53.
3
I. e. cease to think of objects of sense. Cf. supra, p. 69.
4
I. e. an undespairing and firm resolution that devotion will be
achieved ultimately.
5
6
Assimilation with the Brahman.
CHAPTER VI, 36. 71
the self 1 To him who sees me in everything, and

.
everything in me, I am never lost, and he is not
lost to me The devotee who worships me abiding

2
.
3
in all beings, holding that all is one , lives in me,
however he may be living That devotee, O 4
.
Arûna is deemed to be the best, who looks alike

!
on pleasure or pain, whatever it may be, in all

(creatures), comparing all with his own (pleasure or
5
pain) .
Arûna said
I cannot see, O destroyer of Madhu ! (how)

the sustained existence be secured) of this (is to
devotion by means of equanimity which you have
declared
in consequence of fickleness. For, O
Krishna! the mind is fickle, boisterous strong, and
6
,
obstinate ; and I think that to restrain it is as

difficult as (to restrain) the wind.
The Deity said :
Doubtless, O
you of mighty arms the mind is !
difficult to restrain, and fickle 7 Still, O son of .
Kunti! it may be restrained by constant practice and

by indifference (to worldly objects). It is my belief,
that devotion is hard to obtain for one who does not
restrain his self. But by one who is self-restrained
1
Realises the essential unity of everything.
2
He has access to me, and I am kind to him.
3
Cf. Lyopanishad, p. 13.
4 ' Even abandoning all action/ says -SYidhara ; and cf. infra,
p. 105.
5
Who believes that pleasure and pain are as much liked or
disliked by others as by himself, and puts himself in fact in the
place of others.
6
Troublesome to the body, senses, &c.
7
Cf. Dhammapada, stanza 33 seq.
72 BHAGAVADGitA.
and assiduous, it can be obtained through (proper)

expedients.
Arûna said :
What is the end of him, O Krishna ! who does

not attain the consummation of his devotion, being
not assiduous *, and having a mind shaken off from
devotion, (though) full of faith ? Does he, fallen
from both (paths) 2 go to ruin like a broken cloud,
,
being, O you of mighty arms without support, and !
deluded on the path (leading) to the Brahman ? Be

pleased, O Krtshna, to entirely destroy this doubt of
!
mine, for none else than you can destroy this doubt.
The Deity said
son of Pntha ! neither in this world nor the

next, is ruin for him ; for, O dear friend ! none who
performs good (deeds) comes to an evil end. He
who is from devotion attains the worlds of
fallen
those who perform meritorious acts, dwells (there) for
many a year, and is afterwards born into a family
of holy and illustrious 3 men. Or he is even born
into a family of talented devotees; for such a birth as
that in this world is more difficult to obtain. There
he comes into contact with the knowledge which
belonged to him in his former body, and then again,
O descendant of Kuru he works for perfection 4 ! .
For even though reluctant 5 he is led away by the ,
1
Cf. p. 73 infra.
2
The path to heaven, and that to final emancipation.
3
' Kings or emperors,' says Madhusudana.
4
I. e. final emancipation.
5
* As Arûna himself/ says Madhusudana, '
receives instruction
in knowledge,though he comes to the battle-field without any such
object; hence it was said before, "nothing is here abortive."'
See p. 47.
CHAPTER VII, 4. 73
self-same and although he only

former practice,
wishes to learn devotion, he rises above the (fruits
of action laid down in the) divine word. But the
devotee working with great efforts 1
and cleared of 9
his sins, attains perfection after many births, and

then reaches the supreme goal. The devotee is
esteemed higher than the performers of penances,
higher even than the men of knowledge, and the
devotee is higher than the men of action ; therefore,
O Arûna ! become a devotee. And
even among
all devotees, he who, being full worships
of faith,
me, with his inmost self intent on me, is esteemed

by me to be the most devoted.
Chapter VII.
The Deity said

O son of Pntha! now hear how you can without
doubt know me fully, fixing your mind on me, and
resting in me, and practising devotion. I will now
tellyou exhaustively about knowledge together with
experience that being known, there is nothing
;
further left in this world to know. Among thou-

sands of men, only some 2
work for perfection 3 ;
and even of those who have reached perfection,

and who are assiduous, only some know me truly.
Earth, water, fire, air, space, mind, understanding,
1
As distinguished from the others who work half-heartedly, so
to say. See p. 72.
2 ' Some one ' in the original.
3
knowledge of the self,
I.e. âhkara says, as to the next clause,
that those even who work for final emancipation must be deemed
to have '
reached perfection/
74 BHAGAVADGITA.
and egoism thus is my nature divided eightfold.

1
,
But this is a lower (form of my) nature. Know

(that there is) another (form of my) nature, and
higher than this, which is animate, O you of mighty
arms and by which this universe is upheld. Know
!
that all things have these (for their) source 2 I am .
the producer and the destroyer of the whole universe.

There is nothing else, O Dhananâya higher than !
myself; all this is woven upon me, like numbers of

pearls upon a thread 3 I am the taste in water, O .
son of Kunti I am the light of the sun and moon.

!
I am Om 4 in all the Vedas, sound 5 in space, and

' '
manliness in human beings; I am the fragrant smell

in the earth, refulgence in the fire ; I am life in all
beings, and penance 6

in those who perform penance.
Know me, O
son of Prztha to be the eternal seed !
of all beings I am the discernment of the discerning

;
ones, and I the glory of the glorious 7

. I am also
8
the strength, unaccompanied by fondness or desire ,
of the strong. And, O chief of the descendants of

Bharata! I am love unopposed to piety 9 among all
1
This accords with the Sahkhya philosophy. See chapter I,
sutra 6 1 of the current aphorisms.

2 3
Cf. infra, p. 105. Cf. Mufld/akopanishad, p. 298.
4
Infra, p. 79. Cf. Goldstiicker's Remains, I, 14, 122; Yoga-
sutras I, 27.
5
I. e. the occult essence which underlies all these and the other
qualities of the various things mentioned.
6
I. e. power to bear the pairs of opposites.
7
Glory here seems to mean dignity, greatness.
8
Desire is the wish to obtain new things; fondness is the
anxiety to retain what has been obtained. The strength here
spoken of, therefore, is that which is applied to the performance
of one's own duties only.
9
I. e. indulged within the bounds allowed by the rules of the
*Sastras, namely, for the procreation of sons &c. only.
CHAPTER VII, 20. 75
beings. And all entities which are of the quality of

goodness, and those which are of the quality of
passion and of darkness, know that they are, indeed,
all from me; I am not in them, but they are in me\ t-
The whole universe deluded by these three states of
mind, developed from the qualities, does not know
me, who am beyond them and inexhaustible for ;
this delusion of mine, developed from the qualities,

is divine and difficult to transcend. Those cross be-
yond this delusion who resort to me alone. Wicked
men, doers of evil (acts), who are deluded, who
are deprived of their knowledge by (this) delusion,
and who incline to the demoniac state of mind 2 do ,
not resort to me. But, O Arûna ! doers of good

(acts) me one who is dis-
of four classes worship :
tressed,one who is seeking after knowledge, one who

wants wealth, and one, O chief of the descendants of
Bharata who is possessed of knowledge. Of these,
!
he who is possessed of knowledge, who is always

devoted, and whose worship is (addressed) to one
(Being) only, is esteemed highest. For to the man
of knowledge I am dear above all things, and he is
dear to me. All these are noble. But the man
possessed of knowledge is deemed by me to be my
own self. For he with (his) self devoted to abstrac-
tion, has taken to me as the goal than which there is
nothing higher. At the end of many lives, the man

possessed of knowledge approaches me, (believing)
that Vasudeva is everything. Such a high-souled
man is very hard to find. Those who are deprived
of knowledge by various desires approach other
1
They do not dominate over me, I rule them.
2
Infra, p. 115.
76 BHAGAVADGITA.
divinities, observing various regulations and con- 1

,
trolled by their own natures 2

. Whichever form (of
deity) any worshipper wishes to worship with faith,
to that form I render his faith steady. Possessed of
that faith, he seeks to propitiate (the deity in) that
(form), and obtains from it those beneficial things
which he desires, (though they are) really given by me.
But the fruit thus (obtained) by them, who have little
judgment, is perishable. Those who worship the
divinities go to the divinities 3 and my worshippers,
,
too, go to me. The undiscerning ones, not knowing

my transcendent and inexhaustible essence, than
which there is nothing higher, think me, who am un-
perceived, to have become perceptible 4 Surrounded .
by the delusion of my mystic power 5 I am not ,
manifest to all. This deluded world knows not me

unborn and inexhaustible. I know, O Arg'una the !
things which have been, those which are, and those

which are to be. But me nobody knows. All beings,
O terror of (your) foes ! are deluded at the time of
birth by the delusion, O descendant of Bharata
caused by the pairs of opposites arising from desire
and aversion. But the men of meritorious actions,
whose sins have terminated, worship me, being re-
leased from the delusion (caused) by the pairs of
1
Fasts and so forth.
2
Which are the result of the actions done in previous lives.
3
And the divinities are not eternal, so the fruit obtained is
ephemeral.
4
The
ignorant do not know the real divinity ofVishmi, thinking
him be no higher than as he is seen in the human form. This
to
gives them an inadequate notion of the purity and eternity of the
happiness to be obtained by worshipping him; cf. infra, p. 83.
5
The veil surrounding me is created by my mysterious power,
and that everybody cannot pierce through; cf. Ka//$a, p. 117.
CHAPTER VIII, 4. 77
opposites,and being firm in their beliefs 1 Those .
who, resting on me, work for release from old age

and death 2 know the Brahman 3 the whole Adhya-
, ,
tma, and all action. And those who know me with

the Adhibhtita, the Adhidaiva, and the Adhiya^na,
having minds devoted to abstraction, know me at
the time of departure (from this world).
Chapter VIII.
Arûna said
What Brahman, what the Adhyatma, and

is that
what, O best of beings is action? And what is !
called the Adhibhtita ? And who is the Adhiya^na,

and how in this body, O destroyer of Madhu ?
And how, too, are you to be known at the time of
departure (from this world) by those who restrain
their selfs ?
The Deity said :
The Brahman is the supreme, the indestructible.

Its manifestation (as an individual self) is called the
Adhyatma. The offering (of an oblation to any
which
divinity), is the cause of the production and
development of all things, is named action. The
Adhibhtita is all perishable things. The Adhidai-
vata is the (primal) being. And the Adhiya^na, O
best of embodied (beings)! is I myself in this body 4 .
1
Concerning the supreme principle and the mode of wor-
shipping it.
2 3
Cf. infra, p. 109. See the next chapter.
4
Adhyatma where it occurs before g. p. 55) has been ren-
(e.
dered 'the relation between the supreme and individual soul/ As to

78 bhagavadg!ta.
And he who leaves

body and departs (from this
this
world) remembering me in (his) last moments, comes
into my essence. There is no doubt of that. Also
whichever form (of deity) he remembers when he
1
finally leaves this body, to that he goes, O son of

Kunti! having been used to ponder on it. Therefore,
at all times remember me, and engage in battle. Fixing
your mind and understanding on me, you will come to
me, thereis no doubt. He who thinks of the supreme
divine Being, O son of Prztha! with a mind not (running)

to other (objects), and possessed of abstraction in the
shape of continuous meditation (about the supreme),
goes to him. He who, possessed of reverence (for
the supreme Being) with a steady mind, and with
the power of devotion, properly concentrates the
2
life-breath between the brows and meditates on
,
the ancient Seer, the ruler, more minute than the

minutest atom 3
, the supporter of all, who is of an
unthinkable form, whose brilliance is like that of
the sun, and who
beyond all darkness 4 he attains
is ,
to that transcendent and divine Being. 1

5
will tell
you briefly about the seat, which those who know
the Vedas declare to be indestructible which is ;
entered by ascetics from whom all desires have

departed and wishing for which, people pursue the
;
action, cf. pp. 53, 54. Adhibhuta is apparently the whole inanimate
creation, and Adhidaivata is the being supposed to dwell in the
sun. Adhiya^-na is Kr/sh/za. Cf. too pp. 113, 114.
1
Some commentators say 'whatever thing' generally. The
'form' remembered in one's last moments would be that which
had been most often meditated on during life.
2 3
Cf. supra, p. 67. Ka/$a, p. 105 ; Svetarvatara, p. 333.
4
Cf. *Sveta\yvatara-upanishad, p. 327.
6
Ka/ôpanishad, p. 102.
CHAPTER VIII, 17. 79
mode of life of Brahmaârins 1

. He who leaves the
body and departs (from this world), stopping up all
passages 2 and confining the mind within the heart 3
, ,
placing the life-breath in the head, and adhering

4
to uninterrupted meditation , repeating the single
syllable 'Om,' (signifying) the eternal Brahman 5 and ,
meditating on me, he reaches the highest goal.

To the devotee who constantly practises abstraction,
O son of Prz'tha ! and who with a mind not (turned)
to anything else, isever and constantly meditating
on me, I am easy of access. The high-souled ones,
who achieve the highest perfection, attaining to me,
do not again come to life, which is transient, a
home of woes 6 All worlds, O Arûna! up to the
.
world of Brahman, are (destined) to return 7 But, .
O son of Kuntt after attaining to me, there is no

!
birth again. Those who know a day of Brahman

to end after one thousand ages, and the night to
terminate after one thousand ages, are the persons
1
As to BrahmaMrins, see supra, p. 69.
2
'The senses/ say the commentators. Might it not refer to the
'
nine portals' at p. 65 supra ? See also, however, p. 108.
3
I. e. thinking of nothing, making the mind cease to work.
Cf. Maitri-upanishad, p. 179.
4
Cf. Maitri-upanishad, p. 130, uninterrupted, like 'oil when
poured out/ says the commentator.
5
Cf. jOdndogya-upanishad, p. 151; Mandukya, pp. 330-388
(Om is all past, present, and future); NWsi/rcha Tapini, pp. no,
117, 171; Maitri, p. 140; Prajna, p. 220. On the opening passage
of the .A'Mndogya, -Sahkara says, ' Om is the closest designation of
the supreme Being. He is pleased when it is pronounced, as people
are at the mention of a favourite name/ See also Max Miiller,
Hibbert Lectures, p. 84; Goldstucker's Remains, I, 122.
6
See infra, p. 86 and cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 125.
;
7
They are only temporary, not the everlasting seats of the
soul.
8o bhagavadgItA.
who know day and night K On the advent of day,

all perceptible things are produced from the unper-
ceived and on the advent of night they dissolve in
;
thatsame (principle) called the unperceived. This

same assemblage of entities, being produced again and
again, dissolves on the advent of night, and, O son
of Prz'tha! issues forth on the advent of day, without
a will of its own 2 But there is another entity,
.
unperceived and eternal, and distinct from this un-

perceived (principle), which is not destroyed when
all entities are destroyed. It is called the unper-
ceived, the indestructible ; they call it the highest
goal. Attaining to it, none returns That is my 3
.
supreme abode. That supreme Being, O son of

Prz'tha he in whom all these entities dwell 4 and
! ,
by whom all this is permeated, is to be attained to

by reverence not (directed) to another. I will state
the times, O descendant of Bharata at which !
devotees departing (from this world) go, never to

return, or to return. The fire, the flame 5
, the day,
1
Cf. Manu I, 73. Sankara why the
says, that this explains
abodes of Brahma and others are said to be not They lasting.
are limited by time. As to ages, -Sridhara says, a human year

is a day and night of the gods. Twelve thousand years made
of such days and nights make up the four ages : one thousand
such quaternions of ages' make up a day, and another thousand
'
a night of Brahma. Of such days and nights Brahma has a

hundred years to live. At the close of his life, the universe is
destroyed.
2
Cf. p. 82 infra; also Manu-smnti I, 52; and Kalidasa's Ku-
marasambhava II, 8.
3
Cf. Ka/ôpanishad, p. 149 and also p. 112 infra.
;
4
I. e. by whom, as the cause of them, all these entities are sup-
ported; cf. p. 82 infra.
5
.Sridhara understands '
the time when,* in the sentence pre-
ceding this, to mean '
the path indicated by a deity presiding over
CHAPTER IX, 2. 8
the bright fortnight, the six months of the northern

solstice, departing (from the world) in these, those
who know the Brahman go to the Brahman. Smoke,
night, the dark fortnight, the six months of the
southern solstice, (dying) in these, the devotee goes
to the lunar light and returns \ These two paths,
bright and dark, are deemed to be eternal in this
world 2
. By the one, (a man) goes never to return,
by the other he comes back. Knowing these two
paths, O son of Pntha no devotee is deluded 3 ! .
Therefore at all times be possessed of devotion, O

Ar*una ! A devotee knowing all this \ obtains all
the holy fruit which is prescribed for (study of) the

Vedas, for sacrifices, and also for penances and gifts,
and he attains to the highest and primeval seat.
Chapter IX.
Now speak to you, who are not given to
I will
carping, of that most mysterious knowledge, accom-
panied by experience, by knowing which you will
be released from evil. It is the chief among the
sciences, the chief among the mysteries. It is the
best means of sanctification. It is imperishable, not
time, by which;' and the though

fire-flame as included in this,
having no connexion with time. though he also
*Sarikara agrees,
suggests that fire means a deity presiding over time. I own I have
no clear notion of the meaning of these verses. Cf. .Oandogya,
p. 342 ; Br/had-ara/zyaka-upanishad, p. 1057 seq.
1
Cf. Prajna-upanishad, p. 64; and *Sariraka BMshya, p. 747 seq.
2
I. e. for those who are fitted for knowledge or action.
3
I.e. does not desire heaven, but devotes himself to the supreme
Being, seeing that heavenly bliss is only temporary.
4
All that is stated in this chapter.
[8] G
82 BHAGAVADGfTA.
opposed to the sacred law. It is to be apprehended

directly *, and is easy to practise. O terror of your
foes! those men who have no faith in this holy
doctrine, return to the path of this mortal world,
without attaining to me. This whole universe is
pervaded by me in an unperceived form. All entities
live in me, but I do not live in them 2 Nor yet .
do all entities live in me. See my divine power.

Supporting all entities and producing all entities,
my self lives not in (those) entities. As the great
and ubiquitous atmosphere always remains in space,
know that similarly all entities live in me 3

. At the
expiration of a Kalpa, O son of Kuntl ! all entities
enter my nature ; and at the beginning of a Kalpa, I
again bring them forth. Taking the control of my

own nature 4
, I bring forth again and again this
whole collection of entities, without a will of its
own 5 by the power of nature. But, O Arûna
,
these actions do not fetter 6 me, who remain like

one unconcerned, and who am unattached to those
actions. Nature gives birth to movables and im-
movables through me, the supervisor, and by reason
of that 7 O son of Kuntl! the universe revolves.
,
Deluded people of vain hopes, vain acts, vain know-

1
I. e. by immediate consciousness, not mediately ;
'
not opposed
to the sacred law/ i.e. like the *Syena sacrifice for destroying a foe.
2
Because he is untainted by anything. And therefore also the
entities do not live in him, as said in the next sentence. See p. 8o
supra.
3
As space is untainted and unaffected by the air which remains
in it, so am I by the entities.

4
Supra, p. 58. Nature the unperceived principle,
5
Cf. p. 80 supra.
6
I am not affected by the differences in the conditions of these
entities.
7
Viz. the supervision.
CHAPTER IX, 1 8. 83
ledge whose minds are disordered, and who are

1
,
inclined to the delusive nature of Asuras and Ra-

kshasas, not knowing my highest nature as great
lord of all entities, disregard me as I have assumed
a human body 2 But the high-souled ones, O son
.
of Przth& ! who are inclined to the godlike nature,

knowing me as the inexhaustible source of (all) enti-
ties, worship me with minds not (turned) elsewhere.
Constantly glorifying me, and exerting themselves 3 ,
firm in their vows 4 and saluting me with reverence,

,
they worship me, being always devoted. And others

again, offering up the sacrifice of knowledge, worship
me as one, as distinct, and as all-pervading in nume-
rous forms 5
. I am the Kratu 6
, I am the Ya^fia,
I am the Svadha, I the product of the herbs. I am
the sacred verse. I too am the sacrificial butter,
and I the fire, I the offering 7 . I am the father of this

universe, the mother, the creator, the grandsire, the
thing to be known, the means of sanctification,
the syllable Om 8 the Rik, Saman, and Yaûs also;
,
the goal, the sustainer, the lord, the supervisor, the
1
Hope, viz. that some other deity will give them what they want;
acts, vain as not offered to the supreme; knowledge, vain as
abounding in foolish doubts, &c.
2
Cf. p. 76 supra.
8
For a knowledge of the supreme, or for the means of such
knowledge.
4
Vows = veracity, harmlessness, &c.
5
Sacrifice of knowledge, viz. the knowledge that Vasudeva is all;
as one = believing that all is one; as distinct believing that sun, =
moon, &c. are different manifestations of *
me.'
6
is a Vedic sacrifice;
Kratu Ya^-fia, a sacrifice laid down in
Smr/tis. =
Svadha offering to the manes; product of the herbs' '
=
food prepared from vegetables, or medicine.
7 8
Cf. p. 61 supra. P. 79 supra.
G 2
84 bhagavadg!ta.
residence \ the asylum, the friend, the source, and

that in which it merges, the support, the receptacle,
and the inexhaustible seed. I cause heat and I send
forth and stop showers. I am immortality and also
death; and I, O Arûna! am that which is and that

which is not 2 Those who know the three (branches
.
of) knowledge, who drink the Soma juice, whose sins

are washed away, offer sacrifices and pray to me for
a passage into heaven and reaching the holy world
;
of the lord of gods, they enjoy in the celestial

regions the celestial pleasures of the gods. And
having enjoyed that great heavenly world, they
enter the mortal world when (their) merit is ex-
hausted 3
. Thus those who wish for objects of
desire, and resort to the ordinances of the three
(Vedas), obtain (as the fruit) going and coming. To
those men who worship me, meditating on me and
on no one else, and who are constantly devoted, I
give new gifts and preserve what is acquired by
them 4 Even those, O son of Kuntt who being
. !
devotees of other divinities worship with faith, wor-

ship me only, (but) irregularly 5 . For I am the en-
joy er as well as the lord 6 of all sacrifices. But
they know me not truly, therefore do they fall 7
.
Those who make vows 8

to the gods go to the gods ;
1
I. e. the seat of enjoyment; receptacle = where things are pre-
served for future use, say the commentators.
2
The gross and the subtle elements, or causes and effects.
3
MuWakopanishad, p. 279; and .Oandogya, p. 344.
Cf.
4
Cf. Dhammapada, stanza 23. I.e. attainment to the Brahman
and not returning from it. Ramanuâ.
5
Because in form they worship other divinities.
6
Giver of the fruit. As to enjoyer, cf. p. 67 supra.
7
I. e. return to the mortal world.
8
I.e. some regulation as to mode of worship. Cf. also p. 76 supra.
CHAPTER IX, 32. 85
thosewho make vows to the manes go to the manes

those who worship the Bhutas go to the Bhtitas
and those likewise who worship me go to me. Who-
ever with devotion offers me leaf, flower, fruit, water,
that, presented with devotion, I accept from him
whose self is pure. Whatever you do, O son
of Kuntl whatever you eat, whatever sacrifice
!
you make, whatever you give, whatever penance you

perform, do that as offered to me \ Thus will you
be released from the bonds of action, the fruits of
which are agreeable or disagreeable. And with
your self possessed of (this) devotion, (this) renun-
ciation 2 you will be released (from the bonds of
,
action) and will come to me. I am alike to all
beings to me none is hateful, none dear.

; But
those who worship me with devotion (dwell) in me 3 ,
and I too in them. Even if a very ill-conducted

man worships me, not worshipping any one else, he
must certainly be deemed to be good, for he has
well resolved 4 He soon becomes devout of heart,
.
and obtains lasting tranquillity. (You may) affirm,

O son of Kuntl that my devotee is never ruined.
!
For, O son of Prztha! even those who are of sinful

birth 5 women, Vai^yas, and .Sftdras likewise, resorting
,
to me, attain the supreme goal. What then (need

1
Cf. p. 55 supra, and other passages.
2
This mode of action is at once devotion and renunciation the :
first, because one cares not for fruit the second, because it is offered
;
to the supreme.
3 ' They dwell in me ' by their devotion to me ; I dwell in them
as giver of happiness to them.
4
supreme Being alone should be reverenced.
Viz. that the
5
Sankara takes Vaisyas &c. as examples of this ; not so Sridhara.
Cf. as to women and *Sudras, Nrzsiwha-tapini, p. 14. 'Of sinful
birth'=of low birth (*Sridhara)= birth resulting from sins (Sankara).
S6 BHAGAVADGITA.
be said of) holy Brahma/zas and royal saints who

are (my) devotees ? Coming to this transient un-
happy 1 world, worship me. (Place your) mind on
me, become my devotee, my worshipper reverence ;
me, and thus making me your highest goal, and

devoting your self to abstraction, you will certainly
come to me.
Chapter X.
Yet again, O you of mighty arms ! listen to
my excellent 2
words, which, out of a wish for your
welfare, speak to you who are delighted (with
I
them). Not the multitudes of gods, nor the great

sages know my source; for I am in every way 3
the origin of the gods and great sages. Of (all)
mortals, he who knows me to be unborn, without
beginning, the great lord of the world, being free
from delusion, is released from all sins. Intelligence,
knowledge, freedom from delusion, forgiveness, truth,
restraint of the senses, tranquillity, pleasure, pain, birth,
death, fear, and also security, harmlessness, equability,
contentment, penance, (making) gifts, glory, disgrace,
all these different tempers 4 of living beings are from

me alone. The seven great sages, and likewise the
four ancient Manus 5 whose descendants are (all)
,
these people in the world, were all born from my

1
Cf. p. 79 supra.
2
As referring to the supreme soul.
3
As creator, as moving agent in workings of the intellect, &c.
* The names are not always names of tempers/ but the corre-
'
sponding temper must be understood.

'
'
6
The words are also otherwise construed, The four ancients
'
(Sanaka, Sanandana, Sanatana, Sanatkum&ra) and the Manus/

According to the later mythology the Manus are fourteen.
CHAPTER X, 1 6. 87
mind 1 (partaking) of my powers. Whoever correctly

,
knows these powers and emanations of mine, be-

comes possessed of devotion free from indecision
of this (there is) no doubt. The wise, full of love 2
,
worship me, believing that I am the origin of all,

and that all moves on through me. (Placing their)
minds on me, offering (their) lives to me, instructing
each other, and speaking about me, they are always
contented and happy. To these, who are con-
and who worship with love, I give
stantly devoted,
that knowledge by which they attain to me. And
remaining in their hearts, I destroy, with the brilliant
lamp of knowledge, the darkness born of ignorance
in such (men) only, out of compassion for them.
Argima said :
You are the supreme Brahman, the supreme goal,

the holiest of the holy. All sages, as well as the
3
divine sage Narada, Asita , Devala, and Vyisa, call
you the eternal being, divine, the first god, the un-
born, the all-pervading. And so, too, you tell me
yourself, O Kesava! I believe all this you tell
that
me (to be) true ; for, O lord ! neither the gods nor
demons understand your manifestation 4 You only .
know your self by your self. O best of beings creator !
of all things lord of all things god of gods lord

! ! !
of the universe ! be pleased to declare without

exception your divine emanations, by which emana-
1
By the mere operation of my thought. As to ancients, cf*
Aitareya-ararcyaka, p. 136.
2
-Sahkara renders the word here by perseverance in pursuit of
truth.
3
Anandagiri calls Asita father of Devala. See also Davids'
Buddhism, p. 185; Miiller's Anc. Sansk. Lit., p. 463.
4
Scil. in human form for the good of the gods and the destruc-
tion of demons.
88 BHAGAVADGITA.
tions you stand pervading all these worlds. How

shall I know you, O you of mystic power! always
meditating on you ? And in what various entities 1 ,
lord should I meditate on you ?

! Again, O
Ganclrdana do you yourself declare your powers
!
and emanations because hearing this nectar, I (still)

;
feel no satiety.
The Deity said :
Well then, O best of Kauravas I will state to !
you my own divine emanations but (only) the chief ;
(ones), for there is no end to the extent of my (ema-

nations). I am the self, O Gudakesa, ! seated in the
hearts of all beings 2
. I am the beginning and the
middle and the end also of all beings. I am Vishnu
among the Adityas 3
, the beaming sun among the
shining (bodies) among the Maruts 4
; I am MarLi ,
and the moon among the lunar mansions 5 Among .
the Vedas, I am the Sama-veda 6 I am Indra .
among the gods. And I am mind among the

senses 7 . I am consciousness in (living) beings. And
1 am 6ankara 8
among the Rudras, the lord of
wealth among Yakshas and Rakshases. And I am
9
fireamong the Vasus, and Meru 10 among the high-

topped (mountains). And know me, O Arûna to !
1
To know you fully being impossible, what special manifesta-
tion of you should we resort to for our meditations ?
2
P. 129 infra.
3 ' Aditya is used in the Veda chiefly as a general epithet for a
number of solar deities.' Max Mtiller, Hibbert Lectures, p. 264.
4
The storm-gods, as Max Mtiller calls them.
5
6
As being, probably, full of music.
7
^ândogya, p. 121, where Sahkara
Cf. says, ' Mind is the chief
,
of man's inner activities.
8
Now the third member of our Trinity.
10
Kubera. The Golden Mount.
CHAPTER X, 30. 89
be Brzhaspati, the chief among domestic priests.

I am Skanda among generals. I am the ocean
among reservoirs of water \ I am Bhrzgu among the
great sages. am the single syllable (Om ) among
I
2
words. Among sacrifices I am the Gapa sacrifice a ;
the Himalaya among the firmly-fixed (mountains);

the Asvattha trees, and N&rada among
4
among all
divine sages among the heavenly choris-

; Aîtraratha
ters, the sage Kapila among the Siddhas
5
Among .
horses know me to be Uâi^ravas 6 brought forth ,
by (the labours for) the nectar and Airavata among ;
the great elephants, and the ruler of men among

men 7 I am the thunderbolt among weapons, the
.
wish-giving (cow) among cows. And I am love

which generates Among serpents I am Vasuki.
8
.
Among Naga snakes I am Ananta I am Varu/za

9
;
among aquatic beings. And I am Aryaman among the

manes, and Yama 10 among rulers. Among demons,
too, I am Pralhida. I am the king of death (Kala,
time) among those that count n Among beasts I .
I 2
Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 121. Vide p. 79 supra.
3
<7apa is the silent meditation. Madhusudana says it is superior
owing to its not involving the slaughter of any animal, &c.
4
The fig tree. It is the symbol of '
life ' in chapter XV infra.
5
Those who even from birth are possessed of piety, knowledge,
indifference to the world, and superhuman power. Cf. vet&-
svatara-upanishad, p. 357.
6
This islndra's horse, brought out at the churning of the ocean.
Airavata is Indra's elephant.
7
8
I. e. not the merely carnal passion. Cf. p. 74 supra.
9
Nagas are without poison, says *Sridhara. Varurca is the sea-god.
10
Yama and Pralhada the virtuous demon for whom
is death,
Vishmi became incarnate as the man-lion. As to manes, see
Goldstucker's Remains, 1, 133.
II
Counts the number of men's sins/ Rlmanuâ ; -Sridhara says
f
90 bhagavadgIta.
am the lord of beasts, and the son of Vinata 1 among

birds. am the wind among those that blow
I I
2
.
am Rama among those that wield weapons.

3
Among fishes I am Makara 4 and among streams ,
the âhnavi Of created things I am the begin-

5
.
ning and the end and the middle also, O

Arûna
Among sciences, I am the science of the Adhyatma,
and I am the argument of controversialists. Among
letters I am the letter A and among the group of 6
,
compounds the copulative compound. I myself am 7
time inexhaustible, and I the creator whose faces

are in all directions. I am death who seizes all, and
the source of what is to be. And among females,
fame 8
, fortune, speech, memory, intellect, courage,
forgiveness. among Saman hymns, I am
Likewise
the Brz'hat-saman 9 and the Gayatri 10 among metres.
, I
I am Margaslrsha among the months, the spring

this refers to '
time, with its divisions into years, months/ &c.
while a little further on it means time *
eternal.'
1
I. e. the Garikfa or eagle, who is the vehicle of Vishmi in
Hindu mythology.
2
Those who have the capacity of motion/ says Ramanuâ.
'
3
The hero of the Hindu epos, Ramayaw a, translated into verse
by Mr. R. T. H. Griffiths.
4
The dolphin. 5
The Ganges.
6
That supposed to comprehend all language. Cf.
letter is
Aitareya-arawyaka, p. 346, and another text there cited by Madhava

in his commentary (p. 348).
7
This is said to be the best, because all its members are co-ordi-
nate with one another, not one depending on another.
8
I. e. the deities of fame, &c.
9
See, as to this, Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, p. 16. *Sankara
says this hymn relates to final emancipation.
10
Cf. .Oandogya-upanishad, p. 181, where *Sahkara says, 'Gayatri
is the chief metre, because it is the means to a knowledge of the
Brahman.' It is the metre of the celebrated verse 'Om Tat-
savitur/ &c.
CHAPTER X, 42. 91
among the seasons 1 ; of cheats, I am the game of

dice ; I am the glory of the glorious ; I am victory,
I am industry, I am the goodness of the good. I
am Vasudeva among the descendants of Vrtsh.nl 2

,
and Arûna among the Paâfavas. Among sages

also, I am Vyasa 3 and among the discerning ones,
;
I am the discerning Uianas am the rod of

4
I .
those that restrain, and the policy 5 of those that

desire victory. I am silence respecting secrets. I
am the knowledge of those that have knowledge.

And, O Ar*una ! I am also that which is the seed
of all There is
things. nothing movable or im-
movable which can exist without me. O terror
of your foes there is no end to my divine emana-
!
tions. Here I have declared the extent of (those)

emanations only in part. Whatever thing (there is)
of power, or glorious, or splendid, know all that
to be produced from portions of my energy. Or
rather, O Arûna what have you to do, knowing
!
all this at large ? I stand supporting all this by

6
(but) a single portion (of myself) .
1
Cf. .Oandogya-upariishad, p. 126. Margasirsha is November-
December. Madhusudana says this is the best month, as being
neither too hot nor too cold ; but see Schlegel's Bhagavadgita, ed.
Lassen, p. 276.
2
One of Krishna's ancestors.
3
The compiler of the Vedas.
4
The preceptor of the Daityas or demons. A work on politics
is ascribed to him.
5
Making peace, bribing, &c.
6
Cf. Purusha-sukta (Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, p. 9).
92 BHAGAVADGiTA.
Chapter XI.
Arûna said:
In consequence of the excellent and mysterious

words concerning the relation of the supreme and
individual soul, which you have spoken for my wel-
fare, this delusion of mine is gone away. O you
whose eyes are like lotus leaves I have heard from !
you at large about the production and dissolution of

things, and also about your inexhaustible greatness.
O highest lord! what you have said about yourself
is so. I wish, O best of beings! to see your divine
form. If, O lord you think that it is possible for

!
me to look upon it, then, O lord of the possessors

of mystic power 1 show your inexhaustible form
!
to me.
The Deity said :
In hundreds and in thousands see my forms, O

son of Prz'tha! various, divine, and of various colours
and shapes. See the Adityas, Vasus, Rudras, the
two A^vins, and Maruts likewise. And O descen-
dant of Bharata ! see wonders, in numbers, unseen
before. Within my body, O Guâkeâ! see to-day
the whole universe, including (everything) movable
and immovable, (all) in and whatever else
one,
you wish to see. But you not be able to see
will
me with merely this eye of yours. I give you an
eye divine. (Now) see my divine power.
Sanâya said :
Having spoken thus, O king! Hari, the great

1
Madhusudana takes power to mean capacity of becoming
small or great, of obtaining what is wanted, &c; the so-called
eight Bhutis.
CHAPTER XT, I 7. 93
lord of the possessors of mystic power, then showed

to the son of Pntha his supreme divine form, having
many mouths and eyes, having (within it) many
wonderful sights, having many celestial ornaments,
having many celestial weapons held erect, wearing
celestial flowers and vestments, having an anoint-
ment of celestial perfumes, full of every wonder, the
infinite deity with faces in all directions 1 . If in
the heavens, the lustre of a thousand suns burst
forth all at once, that would be like the lustre of
that mighty one. There the son of F&ndu then
observed in the body of the god of gods the whole
universe (all) in one, and divided into numerous 2
(divisions). Then Dhananâya filled with amaze-

ment, and with hair standing on end, bowed his
head before the god, and spoke with joined hands.
Arûna said
god ! I see within your body the gods, as also

all the groups of various beings ; and the lord
Brahman seated on (his) lotus seat, and all the
sages and celestial snakes. I see you, who are of
countless forms, possessed of many arms, stomachs,
mouths, and eyes on And, O lord of the
all sides.
universe O you of all forms I do not see your

! !
end or middle or beginning. I see you bearing a

coronet and a mace and a discus a mass of glory,
brilliant on all sides, difficult to look at, having on
1
Cf. p. 90 supra. afikara explains it as meaning '
pervading
everything/ The expression occurs in the Nmiwha-tapini-upani-
shad, p. 50, where it is said, '
as, without organs, it sees, hears,
goes, takes from all sides and pervades everything, therefore it has
faces on all sides.'
2
Gods, manes, men, and so forth.
94 bhagavadg!tA.
all sides the effulgence of a blazing fire or sun, and

indefinable. You are indestructible, the supreme
one to be known. You are the highest support 1
of
this universe. You are the inexhaustible protector
of everlasting piety. I believe you to be the eternal
being. I see you void of beginning, middle, end
of infinite power, of unnumbered arms, having the
sun and moon for eyes, having a mouth like a
blazing and heating the universe with your
fire,
radiance. For this space between heaven and

earth and all the quarters are pervaded by you
alone. Looking at this wonderful and terrible form
of yours, O high-souled one! the three worlds are
affrighted. For here these groups of gods are
entering into you. Some being afraid are praying
with joined hands, and the groups of great sages
and Siddhas are saying 'Welfare 2 !' and praising
you with abundant (hymns) of praise. The Rudras,
and Adityas, the Vasus, the S&dhyas, the VLrvas, the
two Asvins, the Maruts, and the Ushmapas, and the
groups of Gandharvas, Yakshas, demons, and Sid-
dhas are all looking at you amazed. Seeing your
mighty form, with many mouths and eyes, with
many arms, thighs, and feet, with many stomachs,
and fearful with many jaws, all people, and I like-
wise, are much alarmed, O you of mighty arms!
Seeing you, O Vishnu ! touching the skies, radiant,
possessed of many hues, with a gaping mouth, and
with large blazing eyes, I am much alarmed in my
inmost self, and feel no courage, no tranquillity.
1
The words are the same as at p. 97 infra, where see the note.
2
Seeing signs of some great cataclysm, they say, May it be well
'
with the universe/ and then proceed to pray to you.

CHAPTER XI, 32. 95
And seeing your mouths terrible by the jaws, and

resembling the fire of destruction, I cannot recog-
nise the (various) directions, I feel no comfort. Be
gracious, O lord of gods ! who pervadest the uni-
verse. And all these sons of Dh^tarish/ra, together
with all the bands of kings, and Bhishma and Droâ,
and son 1 likewise, together with our
this charioteers
principal warriors also, are rapidly entering your
mouths, fearful and horrific 2 by (reason of your)
jaws. And some with their heads smashed are seen
(to be) stuck in the spaces between the teeth. As
the many rapid currents of a river's waters run
towards the sea alone, so do these heroes of the
human world enter your mouths blazing all round.
As butterflies, with increased velocity, enter a blazing
fireto their destruction, so too do these people enter
your mouths with increased velocity (only) to their
destruction. Swallowing all these people, you are
licking them over and over again from all sides,
with your blazing mouths. Your fierce splendours,
O Vish/zu! filling the whole universe with (their)
effulgence, are heating it. Tell me who you are in
this fierce form. Salutations be to thee, O chief of
the gods ! Be gracious. I wish to know you, the
primeval one, for I do not understand your actions.
The Deity said
I am death, the destroyer of the worlds, fully

developed, and I am now active about the over-
1
Kanza, who was really the eldest brother of the PaWavas,
I.e.
but having been immediately on birth abandoned by Kunti, was

brought up by a charioteer. Kama was told of his true origin by
Bhishma on his deathbed, and advised to join the PaWavas, but he
declined.
2
By reason of the ruggedness and distortion of face.
96 bhagavadgitA.
throw of the worlds. Even without you, the war-

riors standing in the adverse hosts, shall all cease to
be. Therefore, be up, obtain glory, and vanquishing
(your) foes, enjoy a prosperous kingdom. All these
have been already killed by me. Be only the in-
strument, O Savyasaîn 1
! Dro/za, and Bhfshma, and
âyadratha, and Kama, and likewise other valiant
warriors also, whom I have killed, do you kill. Be
not alarmed. Do fight. And in the battle you will
conquer (your) foes.
Sanâya said
Hearing these words of Kesava, the wearer of the
coronet2
trembling, and with joined hands, bowed
,
down and sorely afraid, and with throat choked up,

;
he again spoke to Krishna, after saluting him.
Arûna said
It is quite proper, O Hrzshikesa ! that the uni-
verse is delighted and charmed by your renown,
that the demons run away affrighted in all directions,
and that all the assemblages of Siddhas bow down

(to you). And why, O high-souled one should !
they not bow down to you (who are) greater than

Brahman, and first cause ? O infinite lord of
gods O you pervading the universe you are
! !
the indestructible, that which is, that which is not,

and what is beyond them 3 You are the primal .
1
Argoma, as he could shoot with his left hand as well as the
right. Sridhara.
2
Arg-una, who had this coronet given him by Indra. Madhu-
sudana.
3
The commentators interpret this to mean the perceptible, the
unperceived, and the higher principle. Cf. p. 84 supra, and also
pp. 103, 113 infra and notes there.
CHAPTER XI, 44. 97
god, the ancient being, you are the highest support

of this universe l
. You are that which has know-
ledge, that which is the object of knowledge, you
are the highest goal. By you is this universe per-
vaded, O
you of infinite forms You are the wind, !
Yama, fire, Varu#a, the moon, you Praâpati, and

the great grandsire 2 Obeisance be to thee a thou-
.
sand times, and again and again obeisance to thee !
In front and from behind obeisance to thee Obei- !
sance be to thee from all sides, O you who are all

You are of infinite power, of unmeasured glory ;
you pervade all, and therefore you are all What- !
ever I have said contemptuously, for instance, O *
Krzshnal' 'O YadavaP 'O friend!' thinking you to

be (my) friend, and not knowing your greatness (as
shown in) this (universal form), or through friend-
liness, or incautiously; and whatever disrespect I
have shown you for purposes of merriment, on (occa-

sions of) play, sleep, dinner, or sitting (together),
whether alone or in the presence (of friends), for
all that, O undegraded one I ask pardon of you !
who are indefinable 3

. You are the father of the
world
movable and immovable you its great
and venerable master there is none equal to you, ;
whence can there be one greater, O you whose

power is unparalleled in all the three worlds ?
Therefore I bow and prostrate myself, and would
propitiate you, the praiseworthy lord. Be pleased,
1
See
p. 94 supra. Here the commentators say the words mean
1
which the universe is placed at deluge-time/
that in
2
Professor Tiele mentions great-grandfather as a name for the
Creator among Kaffirs (History of Religion, p. 18). Cf. p. 83 supra.
I. e. of whom it is impossible to ascertain whether he is such
3
or such. Cf. p. 94 supra.

[8] H
98 bhagavadgIta.
O god ! to pardon (my guilt) as a father (that of

his) son, a friend (that of his) friend, or a husband
(that of his) beloved. I am delighted at seeing
what had never seen before, and my heart is also
I
alarmed by fear. Show me that same form, O god

Be gracious, O lord of gods O you pervading the !
universe I wish to see you bearing the coronet

!
and the mace, with the discus in hand, just the same
(as before) 1 O you of thousand arms O you of
. !
all forms assume that same four-handed form.

!
The Deity said
O Arîina ! have by
being pleased (with you), I
my own mystic power shown you this supreme form,

full of glory, universal, infinite, primeval, and which
has not been seen before by any one else but you,
O you hero among the Kauravas I cannot be seen !
in this form by any one but you, (even) by (the help

of) the study of the Vedas, or of 2 sacrifices, nor by
gifts, nor by actions, nor by fierce penances. Be not
alarmed, be not perplexed, at seeing this form of
mine, fearful like this. Free from fear and with
delighted heart, see now again that same form of
mine.
Sanâya said
Having thus spoken to Arûna, Vasudeva again
showed his own form, and the high-souled one be-
coming again of a mild form, comforted him who
had been affrighted.
1
This is the ordinary form of Krishna,.
2
This is the original construction. One suspects that sacri-
fices and study of the Vedas are meant. Cf. the speech of Krishna
on the next page.
CHAPTER XII, 3. 99
Arûna said
O Ganardana ! seeing this mild, human form of

yours, I am now in my right mind, and have come to
my normal state.
The Deity said
Even the gods are always desiring to see this

form of mine, which it is difficult to get a sight
of, and which you have seen. I cannot be seen, as
you have seen me, by (means of) the Vedas, not by

penance, not by gift, nor yet by sacrifice. But, O
Arûna by devotion to me exclusively, I can in
!
this form be truly known, seen, and assimilated 1

with, O terror of your foes He who performs acts
!
for (propitiating) me, to whom I am the highest

who is my devotee, who is free from attach-
(object),
ment, and who has no enmity towards any being, he,
O son of F&ndu ! comes to me.
Chapter XII.
Arûna said
Of the worshippers, who thus, constantly devoted,
meditate on you, and those who (meditate) on the
unperceived and indestructible, which best know
devotion ?
The Deity said

Those who being constantly devoted, and pos-
sessed of the highest faith, worship me with a mind
fixedon me, are deemed by me to be the most
devoted. But those, who, restraining the (whole)
group of the senses, and with a mind at all times
1
Literally, 'entered into;' it means final emancipation. See p. 128.
H 2
IOO BHAGAVADGITA.
equable, meditate on the indescribable, indestructible,

unperceived (principle) which is all-pervading, un-
thinkable, indifferent 1
, immovable, and constant, they,
intent on the good of all beings, necessarily attain to
me. For those whose minds are attached to the un-
perceived, the trouble is much greater. Because the
unperceived goal 2 is obtained by embodied (beings)
with difficulty. As to those, however, O son of Prztha
who, dedicating all their actions to me, and (holding)
me as their highest (goal), worship me, meditating
on me with a devotion towards none besides me,
and whose minds are fixed on me, I, without delay,
come forward as their deliverer from the ocean of
this world of death. Place your mind on me only; fix
your understanding on me. In me you will dwell 3
hereafter, (there is) no doubt. But if you are
unable to fix your mind steadily on me, then,
O Dhananâya endeavour 4 to obtain me by the
!
abstraction of mind (resulting) from continuous medi-

tation 5 If you are unequal even to continuous
.
meditation, then let acts for (propitiating) me be

your highest (aim). Even performing actions for
(propitiating) me, you will attain perfection. If you
are unable to do even this, then resort to devo-
tion 6 to me, and, with self-restraint, abandon all
fruit of action. For knowledge is better than conti-
nuous meditation; concentration 7 is esteemed higher
1
Passively looking on what occurs on earth; immovable =
changeless; constant = eternal.
2
Viz. the indestructible.
3
I, e, assimilated with me, as expressed before.
4 5
Literally, 'wish.' Cf. p. ?8 supra.
6
Performing actions, but dedicating them to me.
7
Fixing the mind with effort on the object of contemplation.
CHAPTER XII, 19. IOI
than knowledge and the abandonment of fruit of

;
action than concentration from (that) abandonment, ;
tranquillity soon (results). That devotee of mine,

who hates no being, who is friendly and compas-
sionate, who is free from egoism, and from (the
idea that this or that is) mine, to whom happiness
and misery are alike, who is forgiving, contented,
constantly devoted, self-restrained, and firm in his
determinations, and whose mind and understanding
are devoted to me, he is dear to me. He through
whom the world is not agitated 1
and who is not
,
agitated by the world, who is free from joy and

anger and fear and agitation, he too is dear to
me. That devotee of mine, who is unconcerned 2 ,
pure, assiduous 3
from distress 4 who
, impartial, free ,
abandons all actions (for fruit 5 ), he is dear to me.

He who is full of devotion to me, who feels no joy
and no aversion, who does not grieve and does
not desire, who abandons (both what is) agreeable
and (what is) disagreeable, he is dear to me. He
who is alike to friend and foe, as also in honour and
dishonour, who is alike in cold and heat, pleasure
and pain, who is free from attachments, to whom
praise and blame are alike, who is taciturn 6 and ,
contented with anything whatever (that comes), who

is homeless 7 and of a steady mind, and full of devo-
,
1
No disturbance results from him to other men, or from other
men to him. Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 56.
2
Indifferent to worldly objects.
3
Ready to do work as it arises.
4
Not feeling afflicted by other people's doing an injury to him.
5 *
For fruit ' must be understood here.
6
I. e. governs his tongue properly. Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 55, and
Dhammapada, stanza 96.
7
Cf. Sutta Nipata, pp. 94, 101, 122 ; Apastamba, Dharma-sutra,
I02 BHAGAVADGITA.
tion, that man is dear to me. But those devotees

who, imbued with faith, and (regarding) me as their
highest (goal), resort to this holy (means for at-
taining) immortality, as stated, they are extremely
dear to me.
Chapter XIII.
The Deity said :
This body, O son of Kuntt is called Kshetra 1 !

,
and the learned call him who knows it the Kshe-

tra^na 2 And know me also, O descendant of Bha-
.
rata to be the Kshetra^na in all Kshetras.

! The
knowledge of Kshetra and Kshetra^na is deemed
by me (to be real) knowledge. Now hear from me
in brief what that Kshetra (is), what (it is) like,
what changes (it undergoes), and whence (it comes),
and what is he 3 and what his powers, (all which) is
,
sung in various ways by sages in numerous hymns 4 ,
distinctly, and in well-settled texts full of argu-

ment, giving indications or full instruction about
the Brahman. The great elements 5
, egoism, the
understanding, the unperceived also, the ten senses,
and the one, and the five objects of sense, desire,
p. 86 (p. 152 in this series); and Dhammapada, stanzas 40-91

(where the identical word is used).
1
I retain the original for want of a good equivalent.
2
Cf. *SVeta\?vataropanishad, p. 368, and Maitri, pp. 25-72.
3
I. e. the Kshetra^-na.
4
Hymns = scil. from the Vedas about ordinary or special actions
and so forth. Argument =e. g. in texts like 'How can entity come
from non-entity ?' Who could breathe,
f
if &c. ?'
5
Cf. Aitareya-ararayaka, p. 97. The subtle elements, earth, fire,
&c, are meant. The unperceived = nature ; the one = mind;

courage = that by which the drooping body and senses are sup-
ported; egoism = self-consciousness the feeling c
this is 1/
CHAPTER XIII, 13. IO3
aversion, pleasure, pain, body, consciousness, cou-

rage, thus in brief has been declared the Kshetra
with changes \ Absence of vanity, absence of os-
tentatiousness, absence of hurtfulness, forgiveness,
straightforwardness, devotion to a preceptor, purity 2 ,
steadiness, self-restraint, indifference towards objects

of sense, and also absence of egoism ;
perception of
3
the misery and evil of birth, death , old age, and
disease ; absence of attachment, absence of self-
4
identifying regard for son, wife home, and so forth; ,
and constant equability on the approach of (both

what is) agreeable and (what is) disagreeable un- ;
swerving devotion to me, without meditation on any

one else resorting to clean places, distaste for
;
assemblages of men 5 constancy in knowledge of the ,
relation of the individual self to the supreme, percep-

tion of the object 6
of knowledge of the truth, this is
called knowledge that ; is ignorance which is opposed

to this. I will declare that which is the object of
knowledge, knowing which, one reaches immortality
the highest Brahman, having no beginning nor end,
which cannot be said to be existent or non-existent 7 .
It has hands and feet on all sides, it has eyes, heads,

and faces on all sides, it has ears on all sides, it
1
See the last page. Changes = development.
2
Internal as well as external ; as to devotion to a preceptor, cf.
Apastamba, p. 1 1(p. 23 in this series); Taittiriya-upanishad, p. 38 ;
*SVeta\rvatara, p. 117; and Sutta Nipata, p. 87 ; as to egoism, see

p. 52 supra.
3
Cf. Sutta Nipata, pp. 18-95.
5
4
Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 12. Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. n.
6
and acquisition of happiness.
Viz. removal of ignorance
7
Words indicate a class, a quality, an action, or a relation, says
*Sankara. None of these can be predicated of the Brahman so ;
you cannot apply either of these words to it. Cf. pp. 84, 96 supra,
also *SVeta\rvatara, p. 346.
I>4 BHAGAVADGITA.
stands pervading everything in the world. Pos-

sessed of the qualities of all the senses, (but) devoid
of all senses 1 unattached,
, it supports all, is devoid of
2
qualities, and the enjoyer of qualities. It is within
all them it is movable and
things and without ;
also immovable it is unknowable through (its)

;
subtlety it stands afar and near a

; Not different in .
4
(different) things , but standing as though different,
it should be known to be the supporter of (all)
things, and that which absorbs and creates (them).

It is the radiance even of the radiant (bodies) ; it is
said (to be) beyond darkness. It is knowledge, the

object of knowledge, that which is to be attained to
by knowledge, and placed in the heart of all 5 Thus .
in brief have Kshetra, knowledge, and the object of

knowledge been declared. My devotee, knowing
this, becomes fit for assimilation with me. Know
nature and spirit both (to be) without beginning,
and know all developments and qualities 6 (to be)
produced from nature. Nature is said to be the
origin of the capacity of working (residing) in the
body and the senses and spirit is said (to be) the
;
origin of the capacity of enjoying pleasures and
1
Cf. *SVeta\rvatara, p. 331. He has no ears, but has the quality
of hearing, and so forth ; unattached =
really out of relation to
everything, though seeming to be connected with other things
through delusion.
2
I. e. he perceives them.
3
Iropanishad, p. 12; Mu/zdaka, p. 313.
4
Everything being really one. Cf. inter alia, p. 124 infra. The
various manifestations of the Brahman are really one in essence,
though apparently different, like foam and water.
5
Cf. p. 88.
6
Developments = body, senses, &c. Qualities = pleasure, pain, &c;
altogether the expression means the body and feelings and so forth.
CHAPTER XIII, 26. I05
pains \ For spirit with nature joined, enjoys the

qualities born of nature. And the cause of its birth
in good or wombs is
evil the connexion with the
qualities 2
. The supreme spirit in this body is
3
called supervisor, adviser , supporter, enjoyer, the
great lord, and the supreme self also. He who
thus knows nature and spirit, together with the quali-
ties, is not born again, however living
4
Some by .
concentration see the self in the self by the self;

others by the Sankhya-yoga and others still by the ;
Karma-yoga 5 others yet, not knowing this, practise

;
concentration, after hearing from others 6 They, too, .
being (thus) devoted to hearing (instruction) cross

beyond death. Whatever thing movable or im-
movable comes into existence, know that to be
from the connexion of Kshetra and Kshetra^na, O
chief of the descendants of Bharata ! He sees (truly)
1
Yidhara says that '
is said to be means by Kapila and others.
'
For the notion that activity is not a function of the soul, see inter
alia, p. 55 supra. Enjoyment, however, is, according to this pas-
sage, the function of the soul, not of nature. See also Maitri-upa-
nishad, pp. 107, 108.
2
I.e. 'the senses,' says ridhara; good = gods, &c. ; evil =
beasts, &c.
3
Scil. concerning the operations of the body and senses. Cf.
Nrzsiflzha-tapini, p. 224. He is adviser because, though he does
not interfere, he sees and therefore may be said to sanction the
operations alluded to. Supporter, i. e. of body &c. in their workings.
4
I. e. though he may have transgressed rules.
6
Concentration = fixing of the mind exclusively on the soul, the
senses being quiescent. '
See the self,' i. e. the soul ;
'
in the self,'
i. e. within themselves ;
'
by the self/ i. e. by the mind. Sankhya-
yoga= belief that qualities are distinct from the self, which is only
a passive spectator of their operations. Cf. *SVeta\rvatara, p. 109.
Karma-yoga = dedication of actions to the supreme. Cf. as to this
the gloss on -Sahkara's Bh&shya on Vedanta-sutra IV, 2, 21.
6
io6 bhagavadgIta.
who sees supreme lord abiding alike in all

the
entities, and not destroyed though they are de-
stroyed. For he who sees the lord abiding every-
where alike, does not destroy himself 1 by himself,
and then reaches the highest goal. He sees (truly),
who sees (all) actions (to be) in every way done by
nature alone, and likewise the self (to be) not the
doer. When a man sees all the variety of entities as
2
existing in one , and
emanating from that, (all as)
then he becomes (one with) the Brahman. This
inexhaustible supreme self, being without begin-
ning and without qualities, does not act, and is not
tainted, O son of Kuntt ! though stationed in the
body. As by (reason of its) subtlety the all-per-
vading space is not tainted, so the self stationed in
every body is not tainted. As the sun singly lights
up all this world, so the Kshetra^fia, O descendant
of Bharata lights up the whole Kshetra.
! Those
who, with the eye of knowledge, thus understand
the difference between Kshetra and Kshetra^fia, and
3
the destruction of the nature of all entities ,
go to
the supreme.
Chapter XIV.
The Deity said :
Again I will declare (to you) the highest know-

ledge, the best of (all sorts of) knowledge, having
1
Not to have true knowledge is equivalent to self-destruction.
Cf. Iropanishad, pp. 9, 15, 16.
2
I. e. absorbed at the time of the deluge in nature, one of the
c
energies of the supreme ; emanating/ i. e. at the time of creation.
3
Nature, which is the material cause from which all entities
are produced ; the destruction of it results from true knowledge of

the soul. See the third note on p. 107 infra.
CHAPTER XIV, 8. IO7
learnt which, all sages have reached perfection

beyond (the bonds of) this (body). Those who,
resorting to this knowledge, reach assimilation with
my essence, are not born at the creation, and are
l
not afflicted at the destruction (of the universe).
The great Brahman 2
is a womb for me, which I
in
cast the seed. From that, O descendant of Bha~
rata ! is the birth of all things. Of the bodies, O son
of Kuntf which are born from all wombs, the (main)
!
womb is the great Brahman, and I (am) the father,

the giver of the seed. Goodness, passion, darkness,
these qualities born from nature, O you of mighty
3
arms bind down the inexhaustible soul in the body.

!
Of these, goodness, which, in consequence of being

untainted, is enlightening and free from (all) misery,
binds the soul, sinless one O
with the bond of !
pleasure and the bond of knowledge 4 Know that .
passion consists in being enamoured, and is produced

from craving and attachment. That, O son of
Kuntf binds down the embodied (self) with the
!
1
I.e. ' are not destroyed,' Madhusudana; 'do not fall/ Sankara;
'
are not born/ *Srrdhara, and apparently Ramanu^-a.
2 f
I. e. the nature ' spoken of before.
3
These constitute nature. We must understand nature, with
Professor Bhaârkar, as the hypothetical cause of the soul's feel-
ing itself limited and conditioned. If nature is understood, as it
usually is, to mean matter, its being made up of the qualities is
inexplicable. Interpreted idealistically, as suggested by Professor
BhaWarkar, the destruction of it spoken of at the close of the last
chapter also becomes intelligible. By means of knowledge of the
soul, the unreality of these manifestations is understood and nature
is destroyed.
4
Pleasure and knowledge appertain to the mind, not the self,
hence they are described as constituting bonds, when erroneously
connected with the self, -Sankara and ridhara. They constitute
'
bonds/ because the when brought
self into contact with them,
strives to obtain them, R&manuâ.
IOS BHAGAVADGITA.
bond of action. Darkness (you must) know to be

born of ignorance, it deludes all embodied (selfs).
And that, O descendant of Bharata binds down !
(the self) with heedlessness 1 indolence, and sleep. y
Goodness unites (the self) with pleasure ;

passion,
O descendant of Bharata! with action and darkness ;
with heedlessness, after shrouding up knowledge.

Passion and darkness being repressed, goodness
stands, O descendant of Bharata Passion and !
goodness (being repressed), darkness and likewise ;
darkness and goodness (being repressed), passion 2 .
When body at all portals 3 light (that is to

in this
say) knowledge prevails, then should one know
goodness to be developed. Avarice, activity 4 per- ,
formance of actions, want of tranquillity, desire, these

are produced, O chief of the descendants of Bha-
rata! when passion is developed. Want of light,
want of activity 5
, heedlessness, and delusion, these
are produced, O descendant of Kuru ! when dark-
ness is developed. When
an embodied (self) en-
counters death, while goodness is developed, then he
reaches the untainted worlds of those who know the
6
highest . Encountering death during (the preva-
1
Carelessness about duty, owing to being intent on something
else. Cf. Sutta Nipata, pp. 51-91 ; Dhammapada, stanza 21 ;
Ka//$opanishad, p. 152.
2
The effects of each quality assert themselves, when the other
two are held in check.
3
I. e. the senses of perception.
4
= always doing something or another; performance,
Activity
&c.=rearing large mansions, &c. want of tranquillity perpetual
;
=
agitation of mind, 'this I will do now, then that, and next the other;'
desire = to obtain everything that one comes across.
5
I. e. doing absolutely nothing.
6
The highest manifestations of Brahman, viz. the Hira/zya-
garbha, &c, say *Sridhara and Madhusudana. Nilaka//$a also
suggests that ' those who know the highest' means gods.
CHAPTER XIV, 21. IO9
lence of) passion, he born among those attached to

is
action. Likewise, dying during (the prevalence of)

darkness, he is born in the wombs of the ignorant \
The fruit of meritorious action is said to be good,
untainted while the fruit of passion is misery and
; ;
the fruit of darkness ignorance. From goodness is

produced knowledge, from passion avarice 2 and ,
from darkness heedlessness and delusion and igno-

rance also. Those who adhere to (the ways of)
goodness go up the passionate remain in the
3
;
middle while those of the qualities of darkness,

;
adhering to the ways of the lowest quality, go dow n. r
When a right-seeing person sees none but the qua-

lities (to be) the doers (of all action), and knows
what above the qualities
is he enters into my 4
,
essence. The embodied (self), who transcends these

three qualities, from which bodies are produced 5 ,
attains immortality, being freed from birth and

death and old age and misery.
Ar^nina said
What are the characteristics, O lord ! of one who
has transcended these three qualities ? What is his
conduct, and how does he transcend these three
6
qualities ?
1
Lower creation, such as birds, beasts, &c.
2
3
I.e. are born as gods, &c; 'middle,' as men, &c; 'down/
as brutes, &c.
4
I. e. what has been called Kshetraîia before, the supervising
principle within one.
5
Bodies are developments of the qualities, say the commen-
tators, which is not incompatible with the explanation of qualities
given above. As to transcending qualities, cf. p. 48 supra.

6
Cf. as to what follows what is said in chapter II about < one
whose mind is steady/
IIO BHAGAVADGITA.
The Deity said
He is said to have transcended the qualities, O

son of F&ndu ! who is not averse to light and activity
and delusion (when they) prevail, and who does not
desire (them when they) cease 1 who sitting like ;
one unconcerned is never perturbed by the qualities 2 ;
who remains steady and moves 3 not, (thinking)

merely that the qualities 4 exist; who is self-con-
tained 5 ; to whom pain and pleasure are alike ; to
whom a sod and a stone and gold are alike ; to whom
what is agreeable and what is disagreeable are alike
who has discernment ; to whom censure and praise
of himself are alike ; who is alike in honour and dis-
honour; who is alike towards the sides of friends
and foes and who abandons all action 6
; And .
he who worships me with an unswerving devotion,

transcends these qualities, and becomes fit for
(entrance into) the essence of the Brahman. For
I am the embodiment of the Brahman 7 of indefea- ,
sible immortality, of eternal piety, and of unbroken

happiness.
1
I.e. who does not feel troubled, for instance, thinking now I am
actuated by a motive of passion or darkness, and so forth.
2
So as to lose all discrimination.
3
I. e. from his determination to pursue truth, by worldly plea-
sures or pains.
4
Cf. p. 55 supra.
5
Intenton the self only.
6
For the whole passage, cf. p. ioi supra.
7
Nilakaâ interprets this to mean '
the ultimate object of the
Vedas/ I here means Krishna. -Sridhara suggests this parallel,
as light embodied is the sun, so is the Brahman embodied identical
with V&sudeva.
CHAPTER XV, 5. Ill
Chapter XV.
The Deity said
They say the inexhaustible A^vattha l

has (its)
roots above, (its) branches below ; jOandas are

the
its leaves. He who knows it knows the Vedas.
Upwards and downwards extend its branches, which
are enlarged by the qualities, and the sprouts of
which are sensuous objects. And downwards to
this human world are continued its roots which lead
on to action. Its form is not thus known here, nor
(its) end, nor beginning, nor support. But having
with the firm weapon of unconcern, cut this A^vat-
tha, whose roots are firmly fixed, then should one
seek for that seat from which those that go there
never return, (thinking) that one rests on that same
primal being from whom the ancient course (of
worldly life) emanated. Those who are free from
pride and delusion, who have overcome the evils
of attachment, who are constant in (contemplating)
the relation of the supreme and individual self,
from whom desire has departed, who are free

from the pairs (of opposites) called pleasure and
pain, go undeluded to that imperishable seat
2
The .
1
Cf. Ka/ôpanishad, p. 70, and Sutta Nipata, p. 76.
2
Awattha stands here for the course of worldly life. Its roots
are above, viz. the supreme being its boughs are Hira/zyagarbha
;
and others of the higher beings. The Vedas are its leaves, pre-
serving it as leaves preserve trees (another interpretation is that
they are the causes of the fruit which the tree bears, i. e. salvation,
&c.) Upwards and downwards, from the highest to the lowest of

created things. Enlarged = the qualities manifesting themselves,
as body, senses, &c. ; objects of sense are sprouts as they are at-
tached to the senses, which are the tips of the branches above stated.
The roots which extend downwards are the desires for various
1 1 2 BHAGAVADGITA.
sun does not light it, nor the moon, nor fire 1
. That
ismy highest abode, going which none returns.
to
An eternal portion of me it which, becoming an
is,
individual soul in the mortal world, draws (to itself)

the senses with the mind as the sixth 2
. Whenever
the ruler (of the bodily frame) obtains or quits a
body, he goes taking these (with him) as the wind
(takes)perfumes from (their) seats 3 And presiding .
over the senses of hearing and seeing, and touch,

and taste, and smell, and the mind, he enjoys sen-
suous objects. Those who are deluded do not see
(him) remaining in or quitting (a body), enjoying or
joined to the qualities 4 ; they see, who have eyes of
knowledge. Devotees making efforts perceive him
abiding within their selfs 5 But those whose selfs .
have not been refined, and who have no discern-

ment, do not perceive him even (after) making efforts.
Know that glory (to be) mine which, dwelling in the
sun, lights up the whole world, or in the moon or fire 6 .
enjoyments. Its form not thus known here, i.e. to those who live and
move in this world, thus viz. as above described. The man who
knows is said to know the Vedas, because knowledge
the tree thus
of knowledge of the substance of the Vedas, which is, that the
it is
course of worldly life springs from the supreme, is kept up by

Vedic rites, and destroyed by knowledge of the supreme. As to
freedom from pride, cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 4.
1
Cf. Ka/ôpanishad, p. 142; Muâka, p. 304; Nn'si^ha-
tapini, p. 106; -SVetawatara, p. no.
2
Five senses and the mind issue from nature, in which they are
absorbed during sleep or at a dissolution of the world. Cf. Sutta
Nipata, p. 44.
3
Cf. Kaushitaki-upanishad, pp. 86, 87.
4
Perceiving objects of sense, or feeling pleasure, pain, &c.
5
'Selfs ' = bodies, Ram&nuâ and ridhara; 'understandings/
*Sarikara. In the next sentence '
self means mind.
6
Cf. Maitri-upanishad, p. 142. This sentence continues what
has been stated at the top of the page. The intervening
CHAPTER XV, 1 8. 113
Entering the earth I by my power support all

1
,
things and becoming the juicy moon, I nourish

;
all herbs. I becoming the fire, and dwelling in the
bodies of (all) creatures, and united with the upward

and downward life-breaths, cause digestion of the
fourfold food 2
. And I am placed in the heart of
all from3
; me (come) memory, knowledge, and their
removal be learnt from all the
; I alone am to
Vedas; I am the author of the Vedantas 4 and ;
I alone know the Vedas. There are these two

beings in the world, the destructible and the inde-
structible 5
. The destructible (includes) all things.
The unconcerned one is (what is) called the inde-
structible. But the being supreme is yet another,
called the highest self, who as the inexhaustible
lord, pervading the three worlds, supports (them).
And since I transcend the destructible, and since
I am
6
higher also than the indestructible , therefore
portion explains how souls do come back in some cases. As a

general rule, '
all going ends in returning/ But the soul is an
exception in some cases, as the '
going' to the Brahman is going
to the fountain-head. Then the question arises, How does the
severance come off at all ? And that is what the lines up to this
explain.
1 *
Entering in the form of the goddess earth/ say Anandagiri
and Madhusudana. Support, i. e. by keeping the earth from falling
or crumbling away. The moon is said to nourish herbs by commu-
nicating to them some of her 'juice/ The moon, it may be noted,
is called '
watery star' by Shakespeare. As to her relation to the
vegetable kingdom, see Matsya-pura/za XXIII, stanza 10 seq.
2
I. e. what is drunk, what is licked, what is powdered with the
teeth, and what is eaten without such powdering.

3
Cf. p.104 supra.
4
See Introduction, p. 17.
5
Cf. -Sveta^vatara, p. 294.
6
The two are the whole collection of things as they appear and
their material cause. The supreme being is a third principle.
[8] I
1
1 bhagavadgItA.
am I celebrated in the world and in the Vedas as the

best of beings. He
who, undeluded, thus knows
me me every way \ O
the best of beings, worships
descendant of Bharata! knowing everything. Thus,
O sinless one have I proclaimed this most myste-
!
rious science. He who knows this, has done all he

need do, and he becomes possessed of discernment.
Chapter XVI.
Freedom from fear, purity of heart, perseverance
in (pursuit of) knowledge and abstraction of mind,
gifts 2
, self-restraint 2 and sacrifice, study of the Vedas,
,
2
penance, straightforwardness, harmlessness, truth ,
freedom from anger, renunciation tranquillity, free- 3

,
dom from the habit of backbiting 4 compassion for ,
(all) beings, freedom from avarice, gentleness,

modesty, absence of vain activity, noblemindedness,
forgiveness, courage, purity, freedom from a desire
to injure others, absence of vanity, (these), O de-
scendant of Bharata are his who is born to godlike
!
endowments. Ostentatiousness, pride, vanity 5 anger, ,
and also harshness and ignorance (are) his, O son

of Prztha who is born to demoniac 6 endowments.
!
Godlike endowments are deemed to be (means) for
1
Cf. p. 129 infra. Here *Sankara paraphrases it by thinking
' me
to be the soul of everything/
2 8
Cf. Sutta Nipata, p. 49. See next chapter.
4
Sutta Nipata, pp. 15, 101.
5
Ostentatiousness = making a show of piety pride = ; scil. of
wealth and learning ; vanity = esteeming oneself too highly; harsh-
ness = mercilessness.
6
Cf. .Oandogya-upanishad, p. 585, and Mtiller's Hibbert Lec-
tures, p. 322.
CHAPTER XVI, 12. 115
final emancipation, demoniac for bondage \ Grieve

not, O descendant of Bharata! you are born to god-
like endowments. (There two classes of created are)
beings in this world, the godlike and the demoniac
the godlike (class) has been described at length;
now hear from me, O son of Prztha about the !
demoniac. Demoniac persons know not action or

2
inaction , neither purity nor yet (correct) conduct
nor veracity are in them. They say the universe
is devoid of truth 3
devoid of fixed principle 4 and
, ,
devoid of a ruler, produced by union (of male and

female) caused by lust and nothing else. Holding
5
,
6
this view, (these) enemies of the world, of ruined
selfs, of little knowledge, and of ferocious actions, are
born for the destruction (of the world). Entertaining

insatiable desire, full of vanity, ostentatiousness, and
frenzy, they adopt false notions 7 through delusion,
and engage in unholy observances. Indulging in
boundless thoughts ending with death 8 given up to ,
the enjoyment of objects of desire, being resolved

that that is all, bound down by nets of hopes in
hundreds, given up to anger and desire, they wish
1
and death in this world.
Scil. to birth
2
should be done for the attainment of real good, and what
What
should not be done as productive of mischief. See too p. 125.
I.e. contains nothing that is entitled to belief, as the Vedas, &c.
3
4
No principle based on virtue and vice in the government of
the world.
They do not believe in any unseen cause, but say the lust of
5
mankind is the cause of the universe.

I. e. who have none of the means of reaching the next world.
6
7
Such as that by propitiating a certain divinity by a certain rite
they may obtain treasure and so forth.

8
Till their last moments, thinking of making new acquisitions
and preserving old ones.

I 2
11 BH AGAVADGITA.
to obtain heaps of wealth unfairly for enjoying

objects of desire. '
This have I obtained to-day;
this wish I will obtain; this wealth is mine; and this
also shall be mine ; this foe I have killed ; others
too I will destroy; I am lord, I am the enjoyer, I
am perfect 1
, strong, happy; I have wealth ; I am of
noble birth ; who else is like me ? I will sacrifice 2
;
I will make gifts ; I will rejoice/ Thus deluded by

ignorance, tossed about by numerous thoughts, sur-
rounded by the net of delusion, and attached to the
enjoyment of objects of desire, they fall down into
impure hell. Honoured (only) by themselves, void
of humility, and full of the pride and frenzy of
wealth, these calumniators (of the virtuous) perform
which are sacrifices only in name, with
sacrifices,
ostentatiousness and against prescribed rules 3 in- ;
dulging (their) vanity, brute force, arrogance, lust,

and anger; and hating me in their own bodies and in
those of others 4 These enemies 5 ferocious, meanest
.
,
of men, and unholy, I continually hurl down to these

worlds 6 only into demoniac wombs.
, Coming into
demoniac wombs, deluded in every birth, they go
down to the vilest state, O son of Kunti without !
ever coming to me. Threefold is this way to hell,
1
Blessed with children, &c. Sridhara takes it to mean, < one who
has done all he need do/ and Ramanuâ sufficient in himself.'
2
I. e. renown for sacrifices than others.
get higher
3
That because of indulgence in vanity, &c. Vanity believing
is,
=
oneself to have virtues which one has not; arrogance
dain of others.
proud dis- =
4
There is trouble to oneself in sacrifices and to the animals
killed for them.
5
I. e. of God.
6
The commentators render the original here by the paths of
life and death/ or path to '
hell/
CHAPTER XVII, 3. 117
ruinous to the self 1 ,

and likewise avarice;
lust, anger,
therefore one should abandon this triad. Released

from these three ways to darkness, O son of Kuntl
a man works out his own welfare, and then proceeds
to the highest goal. He 2 who abandoning scripture
ordinances, acts under the impulse of desire, does
3
not attain perfection , nor happiness, nor the high-
est goal. Therefore between what
in discriminating
should be done and what should not be done, your

authority (must be) scripture. And knowing what
is declared by the ordinances of scripture, you should
perform action in this world.
Chapter XVII.
Argoina said
What is the state of those, O Krishna who I
worship with faith, (but) abandoning scripture ordi-

nances goodness, passion, or darkness ?
The Deity said :
Faith is of three kinds in embodied (beings), it is

4
produced from dispositions . It is of the quality of
goodness, of the quality of passion, and of the
quality of darkness. Hear about it. The faith of
all, O descendant of Bharata ! is conformable to the
1
I.e. rendering the self unfit for any of the highest ends of man.
2
Here, says Sridhara, it is laid down that the* triad is not to be
got rid of save by following scripture rules.

I.e. fitness for the attainment of the summum bonum. As
3
to acting from desire, see also p. 65.

4
I.e. the result of the actions in a former birth, cf. p. 56 supra.
1 1 BHAGAVADGf TA.
heart \ A being here is full of faith, and whatever

is a mans faith, that is a man himself 2 . Those of
the quality of goodness worship the gods ; those of
the quality of passion the Yakshas and Rakshases 3
;
and the others, the people of the quality of darkness,

worship departed and the multitudes of
(spirits)
Bhfttas. Know those to be of demoniac convictions,

who practise fierce penance 4 not ordained by scrip-
ture who are full of ostentatiousness and egoism,
;
and of desire, attachment, and stubbornness; who are

without discernment and who torment the groups
;
of organs in (their) bodies, and me also seated

within (those) bodies. The food also, which is liked
by all, and likewise the sacrifice, the penance, and
gifts, are of three kinds. Listen to the distinctions
regarding them as follows. The kinds of food which
increase life, energy, strength, health, comfort, and
relish, which are savoury, oleaginous, full of nutrition,
and agreeable, are liked by the good. The kinds
of food which are bitter, acid, saltish, too hot,
sharp, rough, and burning, and which cause pain,
grief, and disease, are desired by the passionate.
And the food 5 which is cold, tasteless, stinking,

stale, impure, and even leavings, are liked by the
dark. That sacrifice is good which, being prescribed

in (scripture) ordinances, is performed by persons
1
The hearts of gods are said to be good, those of Yakshas &c.
passionate, those of men mixed, and so forth.
2
Faith is the dominant principle in man, and he is good, pas-
sionate, or dark, as his faith is.
3
Goldstiicker, Remains, I, 154.
4
Troublesome to oneself and others, as standing on heated
stones, &c. Egoism' (Ahankara)=the feeling that one is worthy
'
of honour, Nilaka/â.
5
Cf. Sutta Nip&ta, p. 109, and Apastamba, p. 31 (p. 62 in this
series).
CHAPTER XVII, 1 8. 119
not wishing for the fruit (of and after determining it),
(in their) mind that the sacrifice must needs be per-

formed. But when a sacrifice is performed, O highest
of the descendants of Bharata with an expectation of !
fruit (from it), and for the purpose of ostentation,

know that sacrifice (to be) passionate. They call
that sacrifice dark, which is against the ordinances

(of scripture), inwhich no food is dealt out (to Brah-
maâs, &c), which is devoid of Mantras *, devoid of
Dakshi/za presents, and which is without faith.
Paying reverence to gods, Brahmaâs, preceptors,
and men of knowledge purity 2 straightforward-; ,
ness, life as Brahmaiarin, and harmlessness, (this) is

called the penance bodily. The speech which causes
no sorrow, which is true, agreeable, and beneficial,
and the study 3 of the Vedas, (this) is called the
penance vocal. Calmness of mind, mildness, taci-
turnity 4 , and purity of heart, this is
self-restraint,
called the penance mental. This threefold penance,
practised with perfect faith, by men who do not wish
for the fruit, and who are possessed of devotion,
is called good. The penance which is done for
respect, honour, and reverence 5 and with ostenta- ,
1
Texts from the Vedas which ought to be recited on such occa-
sions. Presents (Dakshiwa) to Brahma/zas are insisted on in
Bnhad-arawyaka-upanishad, p. 661 ; Awalayana Gr/hya I, 23, 14.
2
Cleanliness of body; straightforwardness = not doing prohibited
acts; harmlessness = not injuring any living beings. These are
*
bodily/ because the body is the main instrument in these actions.
3
I. e. recitation of the Vedas.
4
This is part of the '
mental penance/ because the government
of the tongue is a consequence of mental restraint ; the effect being,
according to *Sankara, put here for the cause.
5
Respect = people rising to receive one, &c; honour = people
saying *
this is a holy man/ &c; reverence = people washing one's
feet, &c.
120 BHAGAVADGITA.
tiousness, and which is uncertain and transient 1 , is
here called passionate. And that penance is de-

scribed as dark, which is performed under a mis-
guided conviction, with pain to oneself, or for the
destruction of another. That gift is said (to be)
good, which is given, because ought to be given,
it
to one who (can) do no service (in return), at a

(proper) place and time, and to a (proper) person.
But that gift which is given with much difficulty, for
a return of services, or even with an expectation of
fruit 2 is said to be passionate.
, And that gift is
described as dark, which is given to unfit persons, at
an unfit place and time, without respect, and with
contempt. Om, Tad, and Sat, this is said (to be)
the threefold designation of the Brahman. By that 3 ,
the Brihmaâs and the Vedas and sacrifices were

created in olden times. Hence, the performance by
those who study the Brahman, of sacrifices, gifts,
and penances, prescribed by the ordinances (of scrip-
ture), always commence after saying Om V Those '
who desire final emancipation perform the various

acts of sacrifice and penance, and the various acts of
gift, without expectation of fruit, after (saying) 'Tad 5 /
'Sat' employed is to express existence and good-
ness; and likewise, O son of Prztha! the word 'Sat'
is used to express an auspicious act. Constancy in
1
The fruit of which is uncertain or perishable.
2
Heaven &c. as a reward for liberality.
3
the Brahman, according to ridhara.
I. e.
4
Apastamba, p. 21 (p. 49 in this series). Nilaka/*//&a cites
Cf.
texts to show that this and the other two words are used to designate
the Brahman. The texts are from the Taittiriya, Aitareya, and
i^Mndogya-upanishads.
5
Nilaka/a says, 'after "Tad"' means considering the act and
all are Brahman, and cites p. 61 supra.
CHAPTER XVIII, 3. 121
;'
(making) sacrifices, penances, and gifts, is called 'Sat
and (all) action, too, of which that 1 is the object, is
also called 'Sat/ Whatever oblation is offered, what-

ever is given, whatever penance is performed, and
whatever is done, without faith 2
, that, O son of
Pntha ! is called 'Asat/ and that is nought, both
after death and here 3 .
Chapter XVIII.
Arûna said :
you of mighty arms O Hrzshikesa O de- ! !
stroyer of Kesin I wish to know the truth about

!
renunciation and abandonment distinctly.
The Deity said

By renunciation the sages understand the rejection
of actions done with desires. The wise call the
abandonment of the fruit of all actions (by the name)
abandonment. Some wise men say, that action
should be abandoned as being full of evil ; and
others, that the actions of sacrifice, gift, and penance
1
I. e. either the Brahman itself, or sacrifice, penance, and gift.
2
3
The meaning of this whole passage seems to be that these three
words, which designate the Brahman, have distinct uses, as specified.
c
Om,' says Nilakaâ, is employed whether the action is done
with any special desire or not. Those who study the Brahman
there means '
study the Vedas.' '
Tad is employed in case of
'
actions without desires only. '

Sat '
is employed, according to
-Sankara, in case of existence, such as the birth of a first son;
1
goodness,' the reclamation of a bad man ;
'
auspicious acts/ mar-
riage, &c. The intelligent use of these terms as here specified is
said to cure any defects in the actions, the various classes of which
are mentioned before.
12 2 BHAGAVADGITA.
should not be abandoned. As to that abandonment,

O best of the descendants of Bharata ! listen to my
decision ; for abandonment, O bravest of men ! is
described (to be) threefold. The actions of sacrifice,

gift,and penance should not be abandoned they ;
must needs be performed for sacrifices, gifts, and ;
penances are means of sanctification to the wise. But

even these actions, O son of Prz'tha should be per- !
formed, abandoning attachment and fruit such is ;
my excellent and decided opinion. The renunciation

of prescribed action is not proper. Its abandon-
ment through delusion 1
is described as of the quality
of darkness. When a man abandons action, merely
as being troublesome, through fear of bodily afflic-
tion, he does not obtain the fruit 2

of abandonment
by making (such) passionate abandonment. When
prescribed action is performed, O Argoma! aban-
doning attachment and fruit also, merely because it
ought to be performed, that is deemed (to be) a good
abandonment. He who is possessed of abandon-
ment 3 being full of goodness, and talented, and
,
having his doubts destroyed, is not averse from

unpleasant actions, is not attached to pleasant 4
(ones). Since no embodied (being) can abandon
actions without exception he is said to be pos- 5
,
sessed of abandonment, who abandons the fruit of

action. The threefold fruit of action, agreeable, dis-
agreeable, and mixed, accrues after death to those
who are not possessed of abandonment, but never to
1
Without delusion no such abandonment will occur.
2
Namely, final emancipation, by means of purity of heart.
3
I.e. who has the frame of mind necessary for a good aban-
donment.
4 5
Such as bathing at midday in summer. Cf. p. 53 supra.
CHAPTER XVIII, 1 8. 123
renouncers \ Learn from me, O you of mighty arms !
these five causes of the completion of all actions,

declared in the Sankhya system 2
. The substratum,
the agent likewise, the various sorts of organs, and
the various and distinct movements, and with these
the deities, too, as the fifth. Whatever action, just
or otherwise, a man performs with his body, speech,
and mind, these five are its causes. That being so, the
undiscerning man, who being of an unrefined under-
standing, sees the agent in the immaculate self, sees
He who has no feeling of egoism 4
not (rightly) 3 . ,
and whose mind is not tainted, even though he kills

(all) these people, kills not, is not fettered 5 (by the
action). Knowledge 6
, the object of knowledge, the
knower threefold is the prompting to action. The
instrument, the action, the agent, thus in brief is
action threefold. Knowledge and action and agent
1
The original is sannyasf, but -Srfdhara is probably right in taking
it to mean one who has command of 'abandonment.' *Sankara
and Madhusudana, however, take the word in its ordinary sense of
' ascetic' What follows explains, says Sridhara, why *
the fruit does
not accrue to renouncers.'
2
-Sankara and Madhusudana say this means Vedanta-âstra.
*Sridhara suggests also the alternative Sankhya-âstra. Substratum
=the body, in which desire, aversion, &c. are manifested; agent=
one who egoistically thinks himself the doer of actions organs ;
senses of perception, action, &c. movements = of the vital breaths

;
in the body; deities = the deities which preside over the eye and
other senses (as to this cf. Aitareya-upanishad, p. 45; Pragma, pp. 216,
217; Muâka, p. 3 1 4 ; Aitareya-drarayaka, pp. 88-270; and Max
Muller's Hibbert Lectures, p. 204, note).
3
Cf. p. 1 06.
4
Egoism = the feeling that he is the doer of the action; taint
must accrue to him.
the feeling that the fruit of the action
5
and Dhammapada, stanza 294.
Cf. p. 45,
6
Knowledge, i. e. that something is a means to what is desired
object is the means ; the knower is he who has this knowledge.
When these co-exist we have action. The instrument = senses, &c.
124 BHAGAVADGITA.
1
are declared in the enumeration of qualities (to be)
of three classes only, according to the difference of
qualities. Hear about these also as they really are.
Know that knowledge to be good, by which (a man)
sees one entity, inexhaustible, and not different in
all things (apparently) different 2 (from one another).
Know that knowledge to be passionate, which is
3
(based) on distinctions (between different entities),
which sees in all things various entities of different

kinds. And that is described as dark, which clings
to one created (thing) only as everything, which is
devoid of reason, devoid of real principle, and in-

4
significant That action is called good, which is
.
prescribed, which is devoid of attachment, which is
not done from (motives of) affection or aversion,

(and which is done) by one not wishing for the
fruit. That is described as passionate, which (oc-
casions) much performed by one who
trouble, is
wishes for objects of desire, or one who is full of

egotism 5 The action is called dark, which is com-
.
menced through delusion, without regard to con-

sequences, loss, injury, or strength 6 That agent is .
called good, who has cast off attachment, who is free

from egotistic talk, who is possessed of courage and
energy, and unaffected by success or ill-success. That
agent is called passionate, who is full of affections 7
,
1 2
The system of Kapila. Cf. p. 104.
3
Cf. Ka/ôpanishad, p. 129.
4
Reason = argument in support; real principle = truth, view of
things as they are ; insignificant, i. e. in comprehensiveness.
5
I.e.
l
pride of learning/ &c, *Sankara; 'egoism/ Ramanug-a.
6
Consequences = good or evil resulting; loss = of wealth or
strength; inj ury= to others ; strength = one's own capacity.
7
I. e.
l
for children/ &c, according to *Sndhara ;
'
for the action/
according to others.
who wishes for the fruit of actions, who is covetous,

cruel,and impure, and feels joy and sorrow.
That agent is called dark, who is without applica-
1
tion , void of discernment, headstrong, crafty, ma-
licious, lazy, melancholy, and slow. Now hear, O
Dhananâya the ! threefold division of intelligence 2
and courage, according to qualities, which I am

about to declare exhaustively and distinctly. That
intelligence, O son of Prztha is good which under- !
3
stands action and inaction what ought to be done ,
and what ought not to be done, danger and the

absence of danger, emancipation and bondage.
That intelligence, O son of Prz'tha! is passionate,
by which one imperfectly understands piety and
impiety, what ought to be done and also what ought
not to be done. That intelligence, O son of Pntha!
is dark, which shrouded by darkness, understands
impiety (to be) piety, and all things incorrectly.

That courage, O son of Pr/thd! is good courage,
which unswerving 4 and by which one controls
is ,
the operations of the mind, breath, and senses,

through abstraction. But, O Arûna that courage !
is passionate, by which one adheres to piety,

lust, and wealth 5 and through attachment 6 wishes,
,
1
I.e. attention to work; melancholy = always desponding and
wanting in energy.
2
The nature of the faculty of understanding ; and courage is the
firmness of that faculty.
3
See p. 1 15. iSahkara takes these to mean the '
paths ' of action
and knowledge, and Nilakaâ takes the next expression to mean
that which is constant and that which is not constant nitya, anitya.
4
Always co-existing with mental abstraction and supporting it.
5
Three of the aims of mankind, the highest being final emanci-
pation. In the view of the GM, piety, leading only to heaven, is
of doubtful benefit.
6
I. e. to the action for attaining them, in the belief that one is
126 BH AGAVADGITA.
O son of Prztha ! for the fruit. That courage is
dark, O son of Prztha! by which an undiscerning

man does not give up sleep, fear, sorrow, despon-
dency, and folly. Now, O chief of the descendants
of Bharata ! hear from me
about the three sorts of
happiness. That happiness is called good, in which
one is pleased after repetition 1 (of enjoyment), and
reaches the close of all misery, which is like poison
first and comparable to nectar in the long run, and

which is produced from a clear knowledge of the
self 2 . That happiness is called passionate, which
(flows) from contact between the senses and their
objects, and which is at first comparable to nectar
and in the long run like poison. That happiness is
described as dark, which arises from sleep, laziness,
heedlessness, which deludes the self, both at first
and in its consequences. There is no entity either
on earth or in heaven among the gods, which is free
from these three qualities born of nature. The
duties of Brihmaâs, Kshatriyas, and VaLryas, and
of 6ildras, too, O terror of your foes are distin- !
guished according to the qualities born of nature 3 .
4
Tranquillity , restraint of the senses, penance, purity,
forgiveness, straightforwardness, also knowledge, ex-
perience, and belief (in a future world), this is the
natural duty of Brahmaâs. Valour, glory, courage,
the doer of it; the 'fruit' scil. of the action performed with an eye
to the three things named.
1
Not at once, as in the case of sensuous pleasures.
2
Cf. p. 51. The original has also been rendered by 'tranquillity
of one's own mind.'
3
Cf. p. 59.
4
I. e. resulting from control of the mind, purity here is both
external and internal. And see p. 119.
dexterity 1 not slinking , away from battle, gifts, exer-

2
cise of lordly power , this is the natural duty of Ksha-
triyas. Agriculture, tending cattle, trade, (this) is the
natural duty of VaLsyas. And the natural duty of
.Sudras, too, consists in service. (Every) man intent on
hisown respective duties obtains perfection 3 . Listen,
now, how one intent on one's own duty obtains per-
fection. Worshipping, by (the performance of) his
own duty, him from whom all things proceed, and
by whom all this is permeated, a man obtains per-
fection. One's duty, though defective, is better than
another's duty well performed 4 . Performing the
duty prescribed by nature, one does not incur sin. O
son of Kuntl ! one should not abandon a natural duty
though tainted with evil ; for all actions are enve-
loped by evil, as fire by smoke 5 . One who is self-
restrained,whose understanding is unattached every-

where, from whom affections have departed, obtains
the supreme perfection of freedom from action 6 by
renunciation. Learn from me, only in brief, O son
of Kunti ! how one who has obtained perfection at-
tains the Brahman, which is the highest culmination

of knowledge. A man possessed of a pure under-
standing, controlling his self by courage, discarding
sound and other objects of sense, casting off affection
1
I. e. in battle, Nilakaw/â seems to say. *Sankara says it means
ready resource whenever occasion arises.
2
I. e. ' power to restrain people from going astray/ Nilaka//$a.
3
Eligibility for the path of knowledge.
4
Cf. p. 56.
5
Cf. p. 1 2 1 ; the evil appears to be the quality of '
fettering ' the
soul.
6
-Sridhara compares p. 65 (V, 13) and distinguishes this from
p. 64 (V, 8 seq.) *Sankara says the perfection here spoken of is
emancipation, and it is obtained by true knowledge.
128 EH AGAVADGITA.
and aversion who frequents clean places, who eats

;
little, whose speech, body, and mind are restrained, who
is always intent on meditation and mental abstrac-
tion 1 and has recourse to unconcern, who abandoning

,
egoism 2 stubbornness, arrogance, desire, anger, and

,
(all) belongings, has no (thought that this or that is)
mine, and who is tranquil, becomes fit for assimila-

tion with the Brahman. Thus reaching the Brah-
man 3 and with a tranquil self, he grieves not,
,
wishes not ; but being alike to all beings, obtains

the highest devotion to me. By (that) devotion he
truly understands who I am and how great. And
then understanding me truly, he forthwith enters
into my (essence). Even performing all actions,
always depending on me, he, through my favour,
obtains the imperishable and eternal seat. Dedi-
4
cating in thought all actions to me, be constantly
given up to me, (placing) your thoughts on me,
through recourse to mental abstraction. (Placing)
your thoughts on me, you will cross over all difficulties
by my favour. But if you will not listen through
egotism 5 you ,
will be ruined. If entertaining egotism,
you think that you may not fight, vain, indeed, is
that resolution Nature 6 will constrain

of yours.
you. That, O son of Kunti which through delu- !
sion you do not wish to do, you will do involuntarily,
1
Abstraction is concentrated and exclusive meditation, -Sahkara.
The other commentators take dhyanayoga as meditation simply,
as treated of in chapter VI, says Nilaka/z/â.
2
See p. 52.
3
I. e. comprehending his identity with the Brahman.
4
Cf. p. 55.
5
Pride of learning and cleverness, or of piety. See p. 1 24, note 5.
6
The nature of a Kshatriya, ahkara.
tied down by your own duty, flowing from your

nature. The lord, O Arûna ! is seated in the
region of the heart l of all beings, turning round all
beings (as though) mounted on a machine, by his

delusion. With him, O descendant of Bharata
seek shelter in every way 2
; by his favour you will
obtain the highest tranquillity, the eternal seat.
Thus have I more

declared to you the knowledge
mysterious any mystery.
than Ponder over it
thoroughly, and then act as you like. Once more,
listen to my excellent words most mysterious of all.
Strongly I like you, therefore I will declare what is
for your welfare. On me (place) your mind, become
my devotee, sacrifice to me, reverence me, you will
certainly come to me. I declare to you truly, you
are dear to me. Forsaking all duties 3 come to me ,
as (your) sole refuge. I will release you from all
sins. Be not grieved. This 4 you should never

declare to one who performs no penance 5 who is not ,
a devotee 6 nor to one who does not wait on (some

,
preceptor) 7 nor yet to one who calumniates me.

,
He who, with the highest devotion 8 to me, will pro-

claim this supreme mystery among my devotees,
will come to me, freed from (all) doubts. No one
1
Svetawatara-upanishad, pp. 333-345; Ka/ôpanishad, p. 157.
2
Cf. p. 114; by thought, word, and deed.
3
Of caste or order, such as Agnihotra and so forth.
4
All that has been taught in the GM.
5
*Sridhara renders this to mean, 'who performs no pious acts/
6
I. e. of God and a preceptor. Cf. last stanza of -SVeta^vataro-
panishad.
7
Cf. p. 62. *Sankara says all these elements must co-exist to
give eligibility.
8
I.e. belief that in disseminating it, he is serving me. Cf. Ka/ô-
panishad, p. 120.
L8] K
1 30 BHAGAVADGITA.
amongst men is superior to him in doing what is
dear to me. And there will never be another on

earth dearer to me than he. And he who will study
this holy dialogue of ours, will, such is my opinion,
have offered to me the sacrifice of knowledge \
And the man, also, who with faith and without
carping will listen (to this), will be freed (from sin),
and attain to the holy regions of those who perform
pious acts 2 Have you listened to this, O son of
.
Prztha! with a mind (fixed) on (this) one point only ?

Has your delusion (caused) by ignorance been de-
stroyed, O Dhananâya ?
Arûna said
Destroyed is my delusion by your favour, O ;
undegraded one I (now) recollect 3 myself. I stand

!
freed from doubts 4 I will do your bidding. .
Sanâya said :
Thus did I hear this dialogue between V&sudeva

and the high-minded son of Prztha, (a dialogue)
wonderful and causing the hair to stand on end. By
the favour of Vy&sa, I heard this highest mystery,
5
(this) devotion , from Krishna, himself, the lord of
the possessors of mystic power, who proclaimed it
in person. O king! remembering and (again) re-

membering this wonderful and holy dialogue of
Kesava and Arûna, I rejoice over and over again.
And remembering and (again) remembering that
1
Which is the best of sacrifices ; see p. 62.
2
Cf. p. 72.
3
I. e. understand my real essence, what I am, &c.
4
As to whether the battle was right or not.
5
The work is so called, as it refers to devotion.
excessively wonderful form of Hari also, great is
my amazement, O king ! and I rejoice over and

over again. Wherever (is) K>zsh/za, the lord of
the possessors of wherever
mystic power, (is)
the (great) archer, the son of Pntha, there in my

opinion (are) fortune, victory, prosperity 1
, and
eternal justice.
1
Prosperity is the greater development of fortune.
K 2
SANATSUGATIYA.
INTRODUCTION
TO
SANATSUGATfYA.
THE Sanatsuyâtiya is, like the Bhagavadgita, one of the
numerous episodes of the Mahabharata 1 . It is true, that
it has never commanded anything like that unbounded
veneration which has always been paid in India to the
Bhagavadgita. Still it is sometimes studied even in our
days, andit has had the high distinction of being com-
mented on by the great leader of the modern Vedantic

school wSankaraârya 2
. The Sanatsu^-atiya purports to
be a dialogue mainly between Sanatsug*ata on the one side
and Dhrztarash/ra on the other. Sanatsuâta, from whom
it takes its name, is said to be identical with Sanatku-
mara, a name not unfamiliar to students of our Upanishad

literature. And Dhrztarash/ra is the old father of those
Kauravas who formed one of the belligerent parties in
the bellum plusquam civile which is recorded in the
Mahabharata. The connexion of this particular episode
with the main current of the narrative of that epos is one
of the loosest possible character much looser, for instance,
than that of the Bhagavadgita. As regards the latter, it
can fairly be contended that it is in accordance with poet-

Arûna to feel despondent and unwilling to
ical justice for
engage in battle, after actual sight of 'teachers, fathers,
sons/ and all the rest of them, arrayed in opposition to him
and that therefore it was necessary for the poet to adduce
some specific explanation as to how Ar^-una was ultimately
enabled to get over such natural scruples. But as regards
the Sanatsuâtiya, even such a contention as this can have
Mahabharata, Udyoga Parvan, Adhyaya 41-46.

1
Madhavaarya, in speaking of Ankara's works, describes him as having

2
commented on the Sanatsug-atiya, which is far from evil (persons) [asatsudu-

'
'
ram]. tfankara-vig-aya, chapter VI, stanza 62.

1 36 SANATSUGATfYA.
no place. For this is how the matter stands. In the

course of the negotiations for an amicable arrangement l
between the Pa/âvas and the Kauravas, Sanâya, on one

occasion, came back to Dhrztarash/ra with a message from
the Paâvas. When he saw Dhrztarash/ra, however, he
said that he would deliver the message in the public
assembly of the Kauravas the next morning, and went away
after pronouncing a severe censure on Dhr/tarash/ra for
his conduct. The suspense thus caused was a source of
much vexation to the old man, and so he sent for Vidura,
in order, as he expresses it, that Vidura might by his dis-
course assuage the fire that was raging within him. Vidura
accordingly appears, and enters upon an elaborate prelection
concerning matters spiritual, or, perhaps, more accurately
quasi-spiritual, and at the outset of the Sanatsuâtiya he
is supposed to have reached a stage where, as being born
a 6udra, he hesitates to proceed. After some discussion

of this point, between Vidura and Dhrztarash/ra, it is deter-
mined to call in the aid of Sanatsuâta, to explain the
spiritual topics which Vidura felt a delicacy in dealing
with and Sanatsuâta is accordingly introduced on the
;
scene in a way not unusual in our epic and puramc litera-

ture, viz. by Vidura engaging in some mystic process of
meditation, in response to which Sanatsu^-ata appears. He
is received then with all due formalities, and after he has
had some rest, as our poem takes care to note, he is cate-

chised by Dhrztarash/ra and with one or two exceptions,
;
all the verses which constitute the Sanatsug-atiya are Sanat-

2
suâta's answers to Dhrztarashfra's questions .
This brief statement of the scheme of this part of the

Mahabharata shows, as already pointed out, that the con-
nexion of the Sanatsuâtiya with the central story of that
epic is very loose indeed and that it might have been
;
entirely omitted without occasioning any aesthetical or other

defect. And therefore, although there is nothing positive
1
See p. 3 supra.
2
After this dialogue is over, trie dawn breaks, and Dhntarash/ra and the
Kaurava princes meet in general assembly.
INTRODUCTION. I 37
tending to prove the Sanatsuâtiya to be a later addition

to the original epos, still the misgivings which are often
entertained upon such points may well, in this case, be
stronger than in the case of the Bhagavadgtta. The text,
too, of the Sanatsuâtiya is not preserved in nearly so satis-
factory a condition as that of the Gita. I have had before
me, in settling my text, the editions of the Mahabharata
respectively printed and published at Bombay 1 Calcutta, ,
and Madras, and three MSS., one of which was most kindly
and readily placed at my disposal by my friend Professor
RamkrzsriTza Gopa/ Bhaârkar; the second by another
friend, Professor Aba^t Vishnu Kathava/e and the third
;
was a copy made for me at Sagar in the Central Provinces,

through the good offices of a third friend, Mr. Vaman Maha-
deva Kolha/kar. The copy lent me by Professor Bha^rfar-
kar comes from Pu/za, and that lent by Professor Kathavate
also from Pu#a. This last, as well as the Sagar copy, and
the edition printed at Madras, contains the commentary of
6ankaraarya. And the text I have adopted is that which
is indicated by the commentary as the text which its author
had before him. But the several copies of the commentary

differ so much from one another, that it is still a matter
of some doubt with me, whether I have got accurately the
text which 5ankara commented upon. For instance, the
Sagar copy entirely omits chapter V, while the other
copies not only give the text of that chapter, but also a
commentary upon it which calls itself 5ankaraarya's com-
mentary 2 Again, take the stanzas which stand within
.
brackets at pp. 167, 168 3 of our translation. There is in

none of the copies we have, any commentary of 5arikara-
/arya on them. And yet the stanzas exist in the text of
the Mahabharata as given in those copies which do contain
5ankara's commentary. The matter is evidently one for
further investigation. I have not, however, thought it abso-
1
This contains Nilaka/^/ea's commentary, but his text avowedly includes the
text of tfankara,and verses and readings contained in more modern copies.
2
The commentary on the sixth chapter, however, takes up the thread from
the end of the fourth chapter.
3
See p. 182, where one of the lines recurs.
138 sanatsugatIya.
lutely necessary to make such an investigation for the pur-

poses of the present translation. But
to be on the safe side,
I have retained in the translation everything which is to
be found in those copies of the Sanatsug*atiya which also
contain wSankara's commentary. As to other stanzas
and there are some of this description which other MSS.
or commentators vouch for, but of which no trace is to be
found in the MSS. containing ^Sankara's commentary 1 ,
I have simply omitted them.

These facts show that, in the case of the Sanatsuâtiya,
the materials for a trustworthy historical account of the
work are not of a very satisfactory character. The mate-
rials for ascertaining its date and position in Sanskrit litera-
ture are, indeed, so scanty, that poor as we have seen the
materials for the Bhagavadgita to be, they must be called
superlatively rich as compared with those we have now to
deal with. As regards external evidence on the points now
alluded to, the first and almost the last fact falling under
that head, is the fact of the work being quoted from and
commented upon by 5ankaraarya. In his commentary
on the vSveta-svatara-upanishad 2 vSankara cites the pas-
,
sage about the flamingo at p. 189, introducing it with the

words, ' And in the Sanatsuâta also.' In the same 3 com-
mentary some other passages from the Sanatsu*atiya are
also quoted, but without naming the work except as a
Smr/ti, and mixing up together verses from different parts
of the work.
This is really all the external evidence, that I am aware
of, touching the date of the Sanatsuâtiya. There is,how-
ever, one other point, which it is desirable to notice, though
not, perhaps, so much because it is of any very great value
in itself, as because it may hereafter become useful, should
further research into the Mahabharata and other works
yield the requisite information. There are, then, eight
stanzas in the thirty-sixth, thirty-seventh, thirty-ninth, and
fortieth chapters of the Udyoga Parvan of the Mahabha-
rata (the Sanatsug-atiya commencing at the forty-first
1 2 3
See note 1, p. 137. P. 283. P. 252. See,
too, tfariraka Bhashya, p. 828.
INTRODUCTION. 1 39
chapter), seven of which are quoted in the Panâtantra \ and

2
the eighth in the Mahabhashya of Patang-ali. Of course,
italmost goes without saying, that neither the Panâtantra
nor the Mahabhashya mentions the source from which they
derive the verses in question. But I do not think it unallow-
able to make the provisional assumption, that they were
derived from the Mahabharata, so long as we cannot produce
any other, and more likely, source. It is true, that Professor
Weber has, in another connexion, impugned the cogency
of this argument. He seems to think, that the probability
in the casehe was actually dealing with of the Ramayaâ
having borrowed from the Mahabhashya, is quite as strong
as the probability of the Mahabhashya having borrowed
from the Ramaya/za 3 And doubtless, he would by parity
.
of reason contend, in the case before us, that the probabi-

lities, Mahabharata on the one hand, and the
as between the
Mahabhashya and the Panâtantra on the other, bear the
same mutual relation. I cannot accept this view. I am not
now concerned to discuss the merits of the conclusion in
support of which Professor Weber has advanced this argu-
ment 4 . I am only considering, how far it affects the
question now before us. And as to that question, I may
say, that the Panâtantra expressly introduces the stanzas
now under consideration with some such expression as, ' For
it has been said,' indicating clearly that it was there quoting
the words of another. And so, too, does the Mahabhashya,
where the passage we refer to runs as follows :
'
(It is) laid
down, (that there is) a sin in one of tender age not rising to
1
PaMatantra, p. 28 (I, 28, Bombay S. C. ed.), with Udyoga
Cf. Kosegarten's
Parvan, chap.XL, st. 7 (Bombay ed.) PaMatantra, pp. 112 and 209 (II, 10;
;
IV, 5, Bombay ed.), with Udyoga Parvan, chap. XXX VIII, 9 p. 35 (I, 37, ;
Bombay ed.) with chap. XXX VI, st. 34; p. 140 (II, 40, Bombay ed.) with
chap. XXXVII, st. 15; p. 160 (III, 62, Bombay ed.) with chap. XXXVII,
st. 17, 18 ; p. 106 (II, 2, Bombay ed.) with chap. XXXVI, st. 59.
2
Udyoga Parvan, chap. XXXVIII, st. 1, and Mahabhashya VI, 1-4, p. 35
(Banaras ed.)
3
See Indian Antiquary IV, 247. The parallel from Madhava which Professor
Weber adduces is quite inconclusive, and as far as it goes appears to me to
militate against the Professor's own view.
4
I may, however, admit at once, that I ought not to have expressed myself
as strongly as I did in the note which Professor Weber criticises.
1 40 sanatsugatIya.
receive (an elderly person), and (that there is) merit in rising
to receive. How ?
Thus, "The life-winds of a youth depart
upwards, when an elderly man approaches (him). By rising
to receive (him), and salutation, he obtains them again." It '
appears to me, that the indications of this being a quotation

in theBhashya are very strong. But apart from that, I do
demur to the proposition, that the probabilities are equal,
of a work like the Mahabharata or Ramiyaâ borrowing
a verse from the Mahabhashya, and vice versa. It appears
to me perfectly plain, I own, that the probability of a gram-
matical work like the Bhashya borrowing a verse from
a standard work like the Bharata or Ramayaâ for pur-
poses of illustration is very much the stronger of the two.
And this, any inquiry as to whether
quite independently of
the Bhashya does or does not show other indications of
acquaintance with the Bharata or the Ramayazza.
If these arguments are correct, it seems to me that they
carry us thus far in our present investigation namely,
that we may now say, that we have reason to believe some
parts, at all events, of the thirty-sixth, thirty-seventh, thirty-
eighth, and fortieth chapters of the Udyoga Parvan of the
Mahabharata to have probably been in existence prior to the
sixth century A.C. 1 and that some parts of the thirty-seventh
;
chapter were probably extant in the time of Patanâli, viz.

2
the second century B. C. Now, internal evidence does not
yield any indications tending to show that the several
chapters here referred to must have been prior in time to
the chapters composing the Sanatsu*atiya, which come so
soon after them in the Mahabharata. On the contrary, it
is not too much to maintain, that to a certain extent the

style and language of the Sanatsuâtiya is, if anything,
rather indicative of its priority in time over the five chapters
immediately preceding it. And, therefore, so far as this

argument goes, it enables us provisionally only, it must be

remembered to fix the second century B. C. as a terminus
ad quern for the date of the Sanatsuâttya.
This is all the external evidence available for a discussion
1 a
See p. 29 supra. See p. 32 supra.
INTRODUCTION. 141
of the question when the Sanatsuâtiya was composed.

We now turn to the internal evidence. Standing by itself,
internal evidence is not, in my opinion, of much cogency

in any case. Still in ascertaining, as best we can, the history
of our ancient literature, even this species of evidence is not
to be despised ; it must only be used and received with
caution. Under this head, then, we may note first the
persons who are supposed to take part in the dialogue.
Sanatsu^-ata r
or Sanatkumaraas already pointed out, is
a name already familiar to the readers of one of our older
Upanishads the .Oandogya. Dhrztarash/ra is not known
in the Upanishads, but he is an important personage in the
epic literature. And it is to be remarked, that his character
as disclosed in the Sanatsuâtiya is not at all similar to
that which has attached itself to his name, alike in the later
literature of our country, and in that popular opinion which
was probably formed by this later literature. In the dialogue
before us, he figures as an earnest inquirer after truth ; he
is described as the 'talented king Dhrztarash/ra ;' and is
addressed by Sanatsuâta as,

c
O acute sir!' 'O learned
person!' True it is, that Nilaka^/â in one place, as we
have noticed in our note there 2 endeavours to bring out ,
the later view of Dhr ztarash/ra's character 3 but it seems to ;
me that that endeavour, based as it is on a forced and far-

fetched interpretation of a single word in our poem, is an
unsuccessful one. None of the questions, which Dhrz'ta-
rash/ra puts to Sanatsu^-ata in the course of their dialogue,
indicates the avaricious old man who wished to deprive his
innocent nephews of their just rights in the interests of his
own wicked and misguided sons. They rather indicate the
bona fide student of spiritual lore, and thus point to what
is, perhaps, an earlier view of Dhrztarash/ra's character.
If we look next to the general style of this poem, we find
that it has none of that elaboration which marks what I
1 2
See Hall's Sankhyasara, preface, pp. 14, 15. P. 151, note 2.
3
Nilakawâ himself, however, treats Dhntarash/ra's question later on as
showing that he had attained indifference to worldly concerns. That question
does not occur in tfankara's text, but is given at p. 158 infra.
142 SANATSUGATIYA.
have called the age of Kavyas and Na/akas. The remarks

on this topic in the Introduction to the Gita apply pretty
accurately to this work also. We observe here the same
paucity of long-drawn compounds, the same absence of
merely ornamental adjectives, the same absence of figures
and tropes 1 in one word, the same directness and simplicity
;
of style. Furthermore, there is a somewhat greater want

of finish about the syntax of our poem than there is even
in the Gita. Such constructions as we find inter alia at
chapter II, stanza 2, or 35, or at chapter III, stanza 14, or
chapter IV, stanza 12, or in the early verses of the last
chapter, indicate a period in the history of the language,
when probably the regulations of syntax were not quite
thoroughly established in practice.
If we turn to the metre of the poem, an analogous phe-
nomenon strikes us there. Similar irregularities in the
collocation of long and short syllables, similar superfluities
and deficiencies of syllables, meet us in the Sanatsuâtiya
and the Bhagavadgita. And in the former work, as in the
2
latter, the irregularities are less observable in the Anush/ubh
than in the other metres used. Probably the explanation,

apart from the great elasticity of that metre, is that the
Anush/ubh had been more used, and had in consequence
become comparatively more settled in its scheme even in
practical composition.
Looking now more particularly to the language of the
work before us, we find one word to be of most frequent
occurrence, namely, the word vai, which we have rendered
'verily.' It is not a common word in the later literature,
while in the Upanishad literature we meet with great

frequency, not merely vai, but the words, which I think are
cognate with it, va and vava. The former word, indeed,
appears to me to stand in some passages of the Upanishads
for vai by euphonic alterations. Thus in the passage tvaw
1
The five similes which occur, and which are nearly all that occur, in the

poem, are the very primitive ones of the hunter, of water on grass the tiger of
straw, death eating men like a tiger, dogs eating what is vomited, a branch of a
tree and the moon, and birds and their nests.
2
Cf. as to this the Nnsiraha Tapini, p. 105.
INTRODUCTION. 1 43
va aham asmi bhagavo devate, aham vai tvam asi, it is

difficult not to suppose that the va of the first part of the
sentence is the same word as the vai of the second part,

only altered according to the rules of Sandhi in Sanskrit.
A
second point of similarity between the language of the
Upanishads and that of the Sanatsuâtiya is to be found in
the phrase, He who knows this becomes immortal.'
'
This
sentence, or one of like signification, is, as is well known,
of common occurrence in the Upanishads and in the Brah-
ma/zas. In the Bhagavadgtta, the verses towards the end,
which come after Krzsh/za's summing-up of his instruction,
seem to be of a somewhat analogous, though in some respects
different, nature. And in the Puraâs we meet sometimes
with elaborate passages extolling the merits of a particular
rite, or a particular pilgrimage, and so forth. This form of
the Phala^ruti, as appears to have been developed
it is called,
in process of time from the minute germ existing in the
Brahmaâs and the Upanishads. In the Sanatsuâtiya,
however, we are almost at the beginning of those develop-
ments ; indeed, the form before us is identically the same
as that which we see in the works where it is first met with.
It isa short sentence, which, though complete in itself, still
appears merely at the end of another passage, and almost
as a part of such other passage.
There is one other point of a kindred nature which it may
be well to notice here. As in the Gita, so in the Sanatsu-
^-atiya, we meet with a considerable number of words used
in senses not familiar in the later literature. They are
collected in the Index of Sanskrit words in this volume
but a few remarks on some of them will not, it is thought,
be entirely out of place here. The word marga 1 in the
sense of 'worldly life'
is rather remarkable. 5ahkara
renders it by 'the path of sa^sara' or worldly life. And
he quotes as a parallel the passage from the .Oandogya-
upanishad which speaks of returning to the 'path.' There,
however, vSankara explains it to mean the path by which '
1
I give no references here, as they can be found in the Index of Sanskrit
words at theend of this volume.
1 44 sanatsugatIya.
the self returns to worldly life,' namely, from space to the
wind and so forth into vegetables, and food, ultimately

appearing as a foetus. Another remarkable word is varga,' *
which occurs twice in the Sanatsuâtiya. 6ankara and

Nilakantka, differ in their explanations of it, and Nilaka/z/â
indeed gives two different meanings to the word in the two
passages where it occurs. We may also refer here specially to
utsa, rztvig; and matva. In Boehtlingk and Roth's Lexicon
the only passages cited under 'utsa' are from Vedic works,
except two respectively from Samita and the Daâkumara-
arita. One passage, however, there cited, viz.Vishô^ pade
parame madhva utsa^, is plainly the original of the passage
we now considering. As to rztvig in the sense it bears
are
here, we see, I think, what was the earlier signification of
that word before it settled down into the somewhat technical
meaning in which it is now familiar. And matva in the
sense of meditating upon' is to be found in the Upanishads,
but not, I think, in any work of the classical literature.
These words, therefore, seem to indicate that the Sanatsu-
*atiya was composed at a stage in the development of the
Sanskrit language which is a good deal earlier than the
stage which we see completely reached in the classical
literature.
Coming now to the matter of the Sanatsuâtiya, it appears
to me, thatwe there see indications pointing in a general
way to the same conclusion as that which we have here
arrived at. There is, in the first place, a looseness and want
of rigid system in the mode of handling the subject, similar
to that which we have already observed upon as charac-
terising the Bhagavadgita. There is no obvious bond of
connexion joining together the various subjects discussed,
nor are those subjects themselves treated after any very
method. Again, if the fourth chapter
scientific or rigorous
is a genuine part of the Sanatsu*atiya, we have an elaborate

repetition in one part, of what has been said in another part
of the work, with only a few variations in words, and perhaps
fewer still in signification. As, however, I am not at present
prepared to stand finally by the genuineness of that chapter,
I do not consider it desirable to further labour this argument
INTRODUCTION. 1 45
than to point out, that similar repetitions, on a smaller scale,

perhaps, are not uncommon in our older literature \
Coming now to the manner in which the Vedas are
spoken of in the work before us, there are, we find, one
or two noteworthy circumstances proper to be considered
here. In the first place, we have the reference to the four
Vedas together with Akhyanas as the fifth Veda. This is
inconformity with the old tradition recorded in the various
works to which we have referred in our note on the passage.
The mention of the Atharva-veda, which is implied in this
passage, and expressly contained in another, might be re-
garded as some mark of a modern age. But without dwell-
ing upon the fact, that the Atharva-veda, though probably
modern as compared with the other Vedas, is still old
enough to date some centuries before the Christian era 2 ,
it must suffice to draw attention here to the fact that the
iTMndogya-upanishad mentions that Veda, and it is not

here argued that the Sanatsu^-atiya is older than the KMn-
dogya-upanishad. We have next to consider the reference

to the Saman hymns as 'vimala,' or pure. The point
involved in this reference has been already sufficiently
3
discussed in the Introduction to the Gita ; and it is not
necessary here to say more than that, of the two classes
of works we have there made, the Sanatsu^*atiya appears
from the passage under discussion to rank itself with the
class which is prior in date.
The estimate of the value of the Vedas which is implied
in the Sanatsuâtiya appears to coincide very nearly with
that which we have shown to be the estimate implied in the
Bhagavadgtta. The Vedas are not here cast aside as useless
any more than they are in the Bhagavadgtta. For, I do
not think the word Anrz/kas which occurs in one passage
of the work can be regarded really as referring to those
who entirely reject the Vedic revelation. But without going
as far as that, the Sanatsuâttya seems certainly to join the
Bhagavadgita in its protest against those men of extreme
views, who could see nothing beyond the rites and ceremonies
1 2 3
See p. 181, note 1 infra. P. 19 supra. Pp. 19, 20.
[8] L
1 46 SANATSUGATIYA.
taught in the Vedas. A

study of the Vedas is, indeed,
insisted on
sundry passages of the Sanatsuâtiya. But
in
it is equally maintained, that the performance of the cere-
monies laid down in the Vedas is not the true means of

final emancipation. It is maintained, that action done with
any desire is a cause of bondage to worldly life ; that the
gods themselves are ordinary creatures who have reached
a certain high position owing to the practice of the duties
of Brahmaârins, but that they are not only not superior
to, but are really under the control of, the man who has
acquired the true knowledge of the universal self. On all

these points, we have opinions expressed in the Sanatsu-
âtiya, which conclusively establish an identity of doctrine
1
as between the Upanishads and the Bhagavadgita on the
one hand, and the Sanatsuâtiya on the other. Lastly, we
have an explicit statement, that the mere study of Vedic
texts avails nothing, and that sin is not to be got rid of by
one who merely studies the Rik and the Yaûs texts, and
'
the Sama-veda.' It is not necessary to repeat here the

chronological deductions which may be based upon this
relation between the Sanatsuâtiya and the Vedas. We
have already argued in the Introduction to the Bhagavad-
gita, that such a relation points to a period of Indian reli-
gious history prior to the great movement of Gautama
Buddha 2 .
There is, however, this difference, perhaps, to be noted

between the Gita and the Sanatsuâttya namely, that the
latter work seems to afford more certain indications of the
recognition, at the date of its composition, of a Gnanakaâ
as distinguished from a Karmakaâ Vedas, than,
in the
we have seen, are contained in the Bhagavadgita 3 The .
passage, for instance, which speaks of the .Oandas as

referring '
Brahman, and the passage
of themselves ' to the
which refers to an understanding of the Brahman by means
of the Vedas, according to the principle of the moon and

the branch these seem rather to point to a portion of the
Vedas which was regarded as giving instruction in true
1 2 3
Cf. p. 16 supra. Cf. pp. 25, 26. P. 17.
INTRODUCTION. I47
knowledge, as distinguished from merely laying down

various sacrifices and ceremonials for special purposes. In
fact, in one passage we have the germ of the whole Ved&ntic
theory as afterwards settled. For there we are told, that
sacrifices and penances are laid down as the preliminary
steps towards the acquisition of true knowledge. By those
sacrifices one is purified of one's sins, and then acquires
a knowledge of the supreme self as described in the Vedas
which, I apprehend, must mean the Upanishads.
There is but one other point on which we need say
anything further. And that is connected with the definition
of a Brahmaâ. That definition appears to me, to point
to an earlier stage in religious progress than is indicated
in Apastamba and Manu. The true Brihmaâ is he who
is attached to the Brahman. Perhaps, this marks some
little advance beyond the more general doctrine of the
Gita, but it is still very far short of the petrified doctrine,

if I may so call it, of the later law-givers. The Brahmaâ
has not yet degenerated into the mere receiver of fees and
presents, but is still in possession of the truth.
We thus see, that the external and internal evidence
bearing upon the question of the position of the Sanatsu-
âtiya in Sanskrit literature, seems to point to nearly the
same period and place for it as for the Bhagavadgita. It
is plain enough, that the evidence under both heads is
extremely scanty and meagre. But such as it is, it appears

to us to justify a provisional conclusion, that the Sanatsu-
from a period prior to the rise of Buddhism,
*atiya dates
and forms part of that same movement in the religious
history of ancient India of which the Gita is another
embodiment. More than this, we are not at present in
a position to assert. To this extent, the evidence enables
us, I think, to go. And we accordingly hold, that unless
other and further evidence requires a reversal of this judg-
ment, the Sanatsug-atlya may
be treated as a work nearly
contemporary with the Bhagavadgita, and occupying gene-
rally the same point of view.
One word, finally, about the translation. As stated
already, the text adopted is that which appears to have
L 2
1 48 SANATSUGATiYA.
been before 5ankararya. And the translation follows

mainly his interpretations in his commentary. Sometimes
we have followed Nilaka^/â, whose commentary has been
consulted as well as a very incorrect copy of another com-
mentary by one Sarva^na Narayaâ, contained in the MS.
from Pu;za lent me by Professor Bhaârkar. In some
places even the commentators have failed to clear up obscu-
rities, and there we have given the best translation we could
suggest, indicating the difficulties. There has been an

endeavour made here, as in the case of the Bhagavadgita,
to keep the translation as close and faithful to the text as
the exigencies of the English language permitted. The
exegetical notes are mostly taken from the commentaries,
even where the name of the commentator is not specified ;
while the references to parallel passages have been col-

lected, mostly by myself, in the same way as in the case of
the Bhagavadgita.
SANATSUGATIYA.
Chapter I.
Dhrztar&sh/ra said
If, O Vidura ! there is anything not (yet) said by
you in (your) discourse, then do impart it to me
who wish to hear, for you have spoken marvellous
(things).
Vidura said
O Dhrztar&sh/ra ! the ancient youth Sanatsu^dta,
(otherwise called) San&tana 1 , who declared that death
exists not he, O descendant of Bharata I the best
of talented men, will explain
all all the doubts of
your mind, both those (which are) secret 2 and those ,
openly declared.
Dhrztar&shfra said
What, do you not yourself know more about this
(subject), that San&tana should explain to ? (it) me
Explain (it) O Vidura! if there is any
yourself,
remnant of intelligence (left) in you.
1
So Nilaka/#a. *Sankara says Sanatsuîta is Sanatkumara,
and the component parts of the name he paraphrases by born *
from Brahman/ For Sanatana, see B/Yhadarayaka, p. 506, and

note 1, p. 141 supra.
2
I. e. which may be freely discussed by all,
relating to subjects
and those which may not. Nilaka#/â adopts a different reading,
which he interprets to mean 'doctrines exoteric and esoteric/
e. g. self-restraint, &c, and the acquisition of mystic power, &c,
respectively. The expression doubts of the mind occurs, how-

' '
ever, further on.

1 50 SANATSUGATiYA.
Vidura said
I am born of a .Siidra womb, and do not like to say
more than what (I have said). But the intelligence
of that youth, I believe to be eternal 1
. He who
has come of a Brahmaâ womb, even though he
may proclaim a great mystery, does not thereby
become liable to the censure of the gods. There-
fore do I say this to you.
Dhrztarash/ra said
Do you, O Vidura ! speak to the ancient Sand-
tana for me, so that there may be a meeting even
here, between (myself in) this body (and him).
2
Vaiiampayana said :
(Then) Vidura meditated on that sage whose

vows are laudable And he, too, O descendant
3
.
of Bharata knowing of such meditation, made his

!
appearance. And he 4 too, received him with the ,
ceremonies prescribed in the ordinances. After he

had been comfortably seated, and had taken rest,
Vidura then spoke to him Venerable sir there is :
'
!
some doubt in Dhrztarash/ras mind, which cannot
1
I. e., I suppose, never-failing, and such as can deal with all
sorts of topics. Sanatkum&ra, it need scarcely be stated, is the
teacher of Narada in the famous dialogue in the .A'Mndogyopa-
nishad, p. 473.
2
VaLrampayana is the narrator of the grand story of which
pieces like the present form parts.
3
The reading is sometimes different, so as to mean '
of rigid
vows/ as at Gita, p. 6 1 supra.
4
The pronouns
here are too numerous. Does 'he' here refer to
Dhr/tarash/ra Vidura seems more likely, though the express
?
mention of him in the next sentence might be treated as pointing

the other way.
CHAPTER II, 2. 151
be explained by me. Do you be pleased to explain

(it) to him. Hearing it (explained), this lord of men
may cross beyond all misery, so that gain and loss x ,
(what is) agreeable and (what is) odious, old age and
death, fear and vindictiveness, hunger and thirst,
frenzy and worldly greatness, disgust and also lazi-
ness, desire and wrath, ruin and prosperity, may not
trouble him/
Chapter IL
VaLrampayana said :
Then the talented king, Dhrztarash/ra, bowed 2 to

those words uttered by Vidura, and, in a secluded
3
place , interrogated Sanatsuâta regarding the
4
highest knowledge , wishing to become (a) high-
5
souled (man) .
Dhr/tarash/ra said
Sanatsu^dta which of the two is correct, your
!
teaching 6
, about which I have heard, that death
exists not, or that 7 the gods and demons practised
1
Comp. Gita passim ; disgust, sciL that resulting from a general
dissatisfaction with everything. As to '
ruin and prosperity,' Nila-
karc/yfca adds, '

and their causes, sin and merit.'
2
Literally 'respected.' NilakaMa says it means 'rejoiced over/
for Dhr/tarash/ra thought, that in spite of his treachery he was
safe, as death was taught by Sanatsuâta to have no existence.
e. free from the presence of ignorant and vulgar people.
3
I.
Cf. Gita, p. 68 supra.

4
I. e.knowledge concerning the supreme Self.
5
Sahkara s construction seems different, but is not quite clear.
He says, wishing to become
' Brahman the meaning is wishing
to acquire the self lost through ignorance.'
6
I. e. imparted to your pupils, Sankara adds ;
' heard/ scil. from
Vidura.
7
The construction is imperfect, but the sense is clear. Is your
152 SANATSUGATIYA.
the life of Brahma/arins l

, for freedom from
death ?
Sanatsu^ta said
Some freedom from death (results) from
(say), that
action and others that death exists not. Hear me
2
;
explain (this), O king! have no misgiving about it 3 .
Both truths, O Kshatriya! have been current from

the beginning 4 The wise maintain what (is called)
.
6
delusion (to be) death. 1 verily call heedlessness
\ death, and likewise freedom from heedlessness
I call
\. .
immortality. Through heedlessness, verily, were

the demons 6 vanquished and through freedom ;
view correct, or the view involved in the practice of gods and

demons ?
1
See Gita,
p. 69 supra Ka/Aopanishad, p. 102 Prama, p. 162.; ;
As gods being afraid of death, see .Oandogya, p. 50 and

to the ;
NWsi/tfha Tapini, p. 32 and as to gods and demons practising

;
the life of BrahmaMrinSj see .A'Mndogya, p. 571; and cf. Bn'had-

ararcyaka, p. 964.
2
I. e. action prescribed in the Vedas.
3
I. e. as to how I shall be able to reconcile the seeming con-
tradiction between the '
two truths/
4
I. e. of creation.
5
Sanatsug^ta says he differs from 'the wise;' delusion = thinking
the not-self to be the self; heedlessness = falling off from one's
natural condition as the Brahman which is the cause of delusion
(iSahkara). See p. 153 infra; Ka/â, p. 152 andTaittiriya-upanishad,
;
p. 80.
6
*Sankara suggests that demons might mean creatures attached
to worldly objects ; and gods those who are pleased in their own
self; and he cites a stanza in support of this suggestion. The
allusion, however, seems to be plainly to the story at jO&ndogya,
7
p. 571 seq., where the idea and expression of 'being vanquished
also occurs (p. 583). That word -Sahkara interprets in connexion
with his suggested interpretation to mean are born in lower '
species/ See A^Mndogya, p. 585, and Maitrt, p. 211, about asuras

or demons. It is interesting to note that in the Introduction to the
MaMbhashya, there is an allusion to a story of the 'demons' being
'
vanquished in consequence of their grammatical blunders.
'
CHAPTER II, 9. 153
from heedlessness the gods attained to the Brah-

man. Death, verily, does not devour living crea-
tures like a tiger for, indeed, his form is not to be
;
perceived. Some 1 say that death is different from

this, (named) Yama, who dwells in the self
2
the ;
(practice of the) life of Brahmaârins (being) immor-

tality. That god governs his kingdom in the world
of the PitWs, (being) good to the good, and not good
to (those who are) not good. That death, (or) heed-
lessness, develops in men as desire, and afterwards as
wrath, and in the shape of delusion 3
. And then
4
travelling in devious paths through egoism, one
does not attain to union 5 with the self. Those who
are deluded and who remain under its in-
by it
6
,
fluence, depart from this (world), and there again

fall down 7 Then the deities 8 gather around
.
them. And then he undergoes death after death 9 .
Being attached to the fruit of action, on action pre-

senting itself, they follow after it 10 and do not cross ,
1
Those deluded by worldly objects; 'this' means 'heedlessness.'
2
ankara cites a stanza from Manu, which says that king
Yama Vaivasvata dwells in the heart of every one. Cf. Aitareya-
upanishad, p. 187. The following clause he understands to contain
two epithets of Yama, meaning '
immortal, and intent on the Brah-
man.' I follow Nilakaw/â, but not very confidently.
8
Cf. GM, p. 57. Here we have the developments, the varying
forms, of death or heedlessness.
4
I. e. paths contrary to *Srutis and Sm/Ytis.
5
Concentration of mind on the self or Brahman.
6
I. e. the egoism spoken of before.
7
I.e. to this mortal world. Cf. GM, p. 84, and Brzhad&ra/zyaka,
PP- 855, 856. There = from the next world. -Sankara says,
'having lived there.'
8
I.e. the senses. Cf. GM, p. 123, and inter alia lyopanishad,
p. 10.
9
Cf. Ka/â, p. 129, and Br/hadarayaka, p. 889.
10
I. e. the fruit. Cf. KaMa, p. 155, and Mudaka, p. 317.
1 54 sanatsugatiaa.
beyond death. And the embodied (self), in conse-

quence of not understanding union 1 with the real
2
entity, proceeds on all hands with attachment to
enjoyments. That 3 , verily, is the great source of
4
delusion to the senses ; for by contact with unreal
5
entities, his migrations are (rendered) inevitable
because having his inner self contaminated by
contact with unreal entities, he devotes himself to
objects of sense on all sides, pondering on them
(only). (That) pondering, verily, first ruins 6
him ;
and soon afterwards desire and wrath, after at-

tacking him. These 7 lead children to death. But
sensible men cross beyond death by their good
sense. He who pondering (on the self) destroys 8
even thinking
(the) fugitive (objects of sense), not
of them through contempt (for them), and who
being possessed of knowledge destroys desires in
this way, becomes, as it were, the death of death
(itself), and swallows (it) up 9 The being who .
1
I. e. its identity with the Brahman.
2
I. e. in various forms of life, Nilaka^Ma.
3
The going about in search of enjoyments.
4
The contact leads to pondering on them, and that to desire, &c,
as described further on.
5
Through various lives. Birth and death are certain for him.
6
I.e. causes oblivion of his real nature, *Sankara. Cf. the
whole train of cause and effect at GM, p. 50 supra.
7
I. e. the pondering, desire, wrath, &c. As to '
children/ cf.
Ka/a, pp. 96 and 123, where bala is contrasted with dhira, as

here. The 'good sense' is of help in withstanding the temptations
of worldly objects.
8
Destroys = abandons; pondering, just before this, is rendered by
*Sahkara to mean 'thinking of the objects as transient, impure,' &c.
9
Sahkara cites on this a stanza of unknown authorship, which
says, 'The learned and clever man who knows the self, and by
discrimination destroys all objects of sense, is said to be the death
of death/ See too p. 178 infra.
CHAPTER II, 17. 155
pursues desires, is destroyed (in pursuing) after

the desires But casting away desires, a being
1
.
2
gets rid of whatever. This body, void of
all taint
3
enlightenment seems (to be) a hell for (all) beings.
,
Those who are avaricious run about 4

,
going head-
long to a ditch. A man, O Kshatriya ! who con-
temns everything else 5
learns nothing. To him
(the body is) like a tiger made of straw 6
. And this
and fear 7 in conse-
internal self (joined to) delusion
quence of wrath and avarice, within your body,
that verily is death 8 Understanding death 9 to be .
thus produced, and adhering to knowledge, one is

10
not afraid of death in this (world). In his province
death is destroyed, as a mortal (is destroyed) on
arriving in the province of death.
Dhrztardsh/ra said :
The good, eternal, and most holy worlds u which ,
1
On this Nilaka^/â quotes these lines,'The antelope, elephant,
butterfly, bee, and fish these five are destroyed by the five/
i. e. the five objects of sense, sound, &c. See Santi Parvan (Moksha
Dharma), chap. 174, st. 45.
2
I. e. misery, Nilaka^/â ; merit or sin, Sankara.
3
I. e. void of discrimination between the real and unreal, Ntla-
ka//a; result of ignorance, arikara. 'A hell, as being full of
filth/ says *Sarikara, ' such as phlegm, blood, excretions.' Cf. Maitri,
p. 48.
4
As blind men groping about fall into a ditch, so do these,
*Sankara.
5
I.e. other than the sensuous objects he loves; 'learns nothing*
about the supreme Self which he disregards.
6
Useless for any good purpose.
7
Cf. Taittiriya-upanishad, p. 102.
8
As being ruinous to oneself. *Sankara compares Gita, p. 68.
Cf. also Taittiriya-upanishad, p. 103, and see Br^*hadarayaka, p. 61.
9
I. e. heedlessness and its developments as stated.
10
*Sankara cites on this Taittiriya-upanishad, p. 78.
11
Such as Satyaloka, &c.
156 s anatsugatIya.
are mentioned (as attainable) by the twice-born by

means of worship 1
, those, say the Vedas, are the
highest aim 2
. How is it, then, that one who under-
stands this does not resort to action ?
Sanatsuâta said:
(Thinking) an ignorant man does resort to
so,
action. The Vedas
likewise do lay down various
3
benefits (for him). But that 4 (man) comes not
5
hither (Becoming) the supreme self 6 he attains
. ,
the supreme, by the (right) path destroying the

wrong paths 7
.
Dhrztarcish/ra said
Who 8
is it that constrains this unborn primeval
(self), if it is (itself) all this severally 9
? And what
1
(ryotish/oma, Awamedha, and other rites.
2
As leading to final emancipation.
3
I. e. objects for which various ceremonies (or ' actions') should
be performed.
4
I. e. the man of knowledge.
5
I. e. into the sphere of action. Cf. Gita, p. 48.
6
Knowing the supreme self is identical with becoming the
supreme self, Mu<faka, p. 323.
7
I. e. getting rid of the paths which keep one away from the
Brahman by means of contemplation of the Brahman, &c. Nila-
ka/â renders right path' to mean the Sushumwd passage by
'
which the soul proceeds to final emancipation, see -Oandogya,

p. 570; Ka/â, p. 157.
8
*Sahkara says Having shown that true death is heedlessness,
:
'
and having shown that heedlessness in its forms of anger &c. is the
cause of all evil, and having also shown that death is destroyed by
true knowledge, and having shown further that heaven &c. are
really not man's highest goal ; the author has also implied the
unity of the supreme and individual self. On that arises a doubt,
which is stated in this passage/
9
All this = all the developments of the Brahman, i.e. space,
wind, fire, water, earth, vegetation, food, living creatures; see
Taittiriyopanishad, p. 68.
CHAPTER II, 21. I57
has it to do, or what is its unhappiness * ? Tell me

all that accurately, O learned person
Sanatsuâta said
There is great danger 2
in attributing distinctions
3
to it. JXhe everlasting (principles) exist by con-
nexion with the beginningless 4 (principle). So that
5
his greatness is not lost at all , and beings exist
by connexion with the beginningless 4 (principle).
That which is the real the supreme Being 6 is
eternal. He creates the universe by means of
changes 7
for such is his power held to be
, and ;
for such connexions of things the Vedas are

8
(authority) .
What is the purpose of its existence, and what misery does it

1
undergo on entering the course of worldly life ?

2
The danger,' says -Saiikara, is that of contravening Vedic
' '
texts such as " I am the Brahman/' " Thou art that/' &c/ May it
not rather be that pointed out at Ka/ôpanishad, p. 129, viz. never
attaining final emancipation? Cf. also Nrzsiwha T&pini, p. 223.
3 4
The individual selfs, *Sahkara. Nature or maya.
5
The appearance of degradation to an inferior state being delusive.
6
The original word implies the possession of awvarya, dharma,
yaâs, sit, vairagya, moksha. See *SVeta\rvatara, p. 329 (where the list
is slightly different). For another definition, see Maitri, p. 6 (gloss).

7
See note g, p. 156.
8
Sankara says: 'The question of Dhn'tarash/ra having suggested
a difference between two principles, one of which constrains, and the
other of which is constrained, the answer is Such a difference ought
not to be alleged, as it involves " danger." Then the question arises,
How is the difference, which does appear, to be explained? The reply
is, It is due to the beginningless principle delusion or ignorance.
The next sentence shows that the universe as it appears is also a
result of delusion/ Nilakaâ says expressly, changes = delusion.
He renders the original which we have translated by 'beginningless'
first, to mean 'collection of objects of enjoyments.' Sahkara's
explanation seems tautological as regards the words 'connexion
with the beginningless/ which occur twice in the above. Nila-
1 58 SANATSUGATIYA.
Dhrztarash/ra said
Since some practise piety 1
in this world, and some
likewise practise impiety in this world ; is the piety
destroyed by the sin, or else does the piety destroy
sin ?
Sanatsu/ata said
Whichever 2 he adheres to, the man of under-
standing always destroys both by means of know-
ledge ;
(that is) settled 3 . Likewise, in the other case 4 ,
the embodied (self) obtains merit; and to such a

one sin (also) accrues ;
(that too is) settled 3
. De-
parting (from this world), he enjoys by his actions
both (kinds of) which are not enduring 5 of
fruit,
actions (which are) pure, and of (those which are)
sinful. The man of understanding casts aside sin
by piety in this (world), for know that his piety is
more powerful 6 . Those Br&hmaâs, in whom there

is emulation 7 about (their) piety, as there is in
strong men about (their) strength, after departing
from this world, become glorious in heaven 8
. And
ka/z/â's is not quite clear. May the expression on the second
occasion mean, that the connexion by which beings are stated
before to exist has had no beginning has existed from eternity ?
The translation should then run thus by a con- : 'And beings exist
nexion which had no beginning;' (see Sariraka Bhashya, p. 494.)
=
Connexions of things creation of universe by his power.
1
E. g. Agnish/oma, &c, Safikara.
2
I. e. impiety or piety, sin or merit.
3
In and Smrztis, which *Sankara quotes. ^TMndogya,
*Srutis
p. 622; Muâka, p. 309; Brz'hadara^yaka, p. 911. See, too,

4
Maitri, p. 131. Of the man devoid of knowledge.
5
Cf. Gita, p. 76, and Brzriadara^yaka, p. 636.
6
See p. 164, note 9 infra.
7
The feeling of one's own superiority over others in piety.
8
' In the shape of Nakshatras/ says ASarikara, which is not quite
intelligible. See .ATMndogya, p. 258, and Anugitd infra, p. 240.
CHAPTER II, 31. 159
to those in whom there is no emulation about

(their) piety, that (piety) is a means of (acquiring)
knowledge 1 Such Brahma/zas released from this
.
(world), go to the heaven which is free from the

threefold source of pain 2
. People who understand
the Vedas call his conduct good. (But) people
closely connected 3
, as well as strangers, do not pay
much regard to him. Wherever he may believe
food and drink for a Brcihma/za to exist in abun-
dance, like water on grass in the autumn, there
would he and not be vexed 4
live (To him) only .
that person is good, and no other (as a companion),

who does nothing in excess, and who occasions
fear and injury to a taciturn man 5 And his food is .
acceptable to the good, who does not vex the self

of a taciturn man, and who does not destroy the
property of a Brihmaâ 6 . A Brdhmaâ should
hold, that living in the midst of kinsmen, his actions
should be always unknown 7
; and he should not
1
According to theVedantic theory, the acts of piety purify the inner
man, and are thus a stepping-stone to knowledge. See Introduction,
p. 147 supra. Cf. Gita, p. 122; and Brz'hadara/zyaka, p. 899.
2
I. e. physical, mental, and such as is caused by superhuman
agency. This is -Sankara's explanation. It is somewhat far-
fetched, but I can find none better. Cf. Gita, p. 49. And see also
B/Yhadara/zyaka, p. 876, and the commentary of *Sahkara there with
8
Anandagiri's gloss. E. g. wife, children, &c.
4
I. e. vexed as to how be earned, &c.
his livelihood is to
5
Excess, e.g. too much obsequiousness towards a 'taciturn
man/ owing to his holiness, &c. Taciturn man ascetic. =
Injury = disrespect, &c. Perhaps the protest against worldliness
is here carried to an extreme. *Sahkara cites Manu as a parallel,
'
A Brahmarca should be afraid of (worldly) respect as of poison/
6
Kara grass, deerskin, &c, mentioned at GM, p. 68.
E. g. the
7
he should not parade his actions. *Sankara compares
I. e.
VasishMa and a Vedic text. See, too, the quotation at Taitt. Ara//.
p. 902.
1 60 SANATSUGATIYA.
think 1
(about them). What Brahma/*a ought to
think of the inner which is void of symbols 2 self, ,
immovable, pure, and free from all pairs of oppo-

sites, in this way ?
3
What sin is not committed by
that thief, own self 4 who re-
who steals away his ,
gards his self as one thing, when it is a different

thing. The far-seeing Brahma/za, who knows the
Brahman, he receives nothing 6 he
is not wearied 5
, ;
is honoured, free from trouble 7 and wise, but acts ,
as if he was not wise 8 As dogs eat what is .
vomited, so do they, enjoying their own bravery 9 ,
eat what is vomited, always with disaster (to them-

selves). Those twice-born persons, who are not
1
Cf. Gita, p. 103. -Sahkara suggests an alternative explanation
of this stanza, which will make it mean that one performing the
operations of the senses, should devote oneself nevertheless to the
unknown principle, and not consider the senses to be the self.
2
I.e. beyond the reach of inference; 'subtle/ says -Sahkara. Cf.
*Sveta\yvatara, p. 364; Br/hadara^yaka, p. 855; Maitri, p. 182; and
Ka//$a, p.where *Sankara suggests a somewhat different
149,
meaning. immovable, cf. ira, p. 10, and GM, p. 104. San-
As to
;
kara renders it by void of activity '
and pure he paraphrases by '
'free from ignorance and other taints.'

8
It is difficult to say what 'in this way* refers to. ASankara
renders it by as possessing qualities appertaining to the two kinds
'
of body/ On ânkara's suggested meaning of the stanza pre-

ceding (see note 1), it would refer to the confusion of the senses
with the self.
* Such a person is called a destroyer of his own self at Lropani-

shad, p. 9.
5
I. e. by the troubles of worldly life.
6
Cf. 'without belongings' at Gita, p. 128.
7
Anger and other obstacles to concentration of mind.
8
I. e. unintelligent. The text of Vasish/â referred to in note 7,
p. 159, says he should act like an unintelligent man. Cf. also

Gau</apada-karikas, p. 443, and -Sariraka Bhashya, p. 1041.
9
I. e. singing the praises of their own greatness and worth,
instead of keeping their '

conduct unknown/
CHAPTER II, 41. l6l
first
1
in respect of human wealth, but who are first
3
in the Vedas 2 are unconquerable, not
, to be shaken ;
they should be understood to be forms of the Brah-

man. Whosoever may in this (world) know all the

gods 4 doers of favours he is not equal to a Brah-
ma/za, (nor even) he 5 for whom he exerts himself.
The man who makes no efforts 6 and is respected, ,
does not, being respected, think himself respected 7 ,
nor does he become vexed in consequence of dis-

respect. One who is respected 8
should think it to
be a natural operation of people, like their opening
or closing of the eyelids, that the learned respect
him in this world. One who is not respected should
think, that the deluded people who do not under-
stand piety, and who are devoid of (knowledge of)
the world and the 6astras, will never respect one
who is worthy of respect. Respect and taciturnity 9 ,
verily, never dwell together for this world is (the ;
field) for respect, the next for taciturnity, as is

10
understood , For worldly wealth dwells in the
1
Highly esteemed for or strongly attached to, -Sankara. Human
wealth = wife, offspring, property, &c. Cf. -Oandogya, p. 319;
Brz'hadara/zyaka, p. 262.
2
I. e. veracity and other duties taught by the Vedas.
3
They need fear nought/ says NilakawMa.
'
4
I. e. may sacrifice to them, -Sankara.
5
Not even the deity to whom the sacrifice is offered is equal to one
who knows the Brahman. Cf. Taittiriya, p. 23, and Anugita, p. 250.
6
I. e. one who is taciturn and does not parade his greatness.
'
'
7
He does not care for the respect shown him.
Because he knows the Brahman.
9
I. e. restraint of all senses, not of speech only. For the con-
trast compare that between sreya and prey a at Ka//a, p. 92.
10
I.e. by all men of understanding. ankara's rendering is
different :
'
The next, which is known as Tad, is for taciturnity/
He cites for this Gitd, p. 120.
[8] M
1 62 s anatsugat! ya.
sphere of respect an obstacle 2

1
, and that, too, is .
While the Brahmic wealth 3 O Kshatriya is diffi- , !
cult to be attained by any one devoid of knowledge.

The ways (to it) are stated by the good to be of
various descriptions, and difficult to reach truth,
4
straightforwardness, modesty , restraint (of senses),
( purity, knowledge, which are the six impediments
^ (in the way) of respect and delusion.
Chapter III.
Dhrztarash/ra said
Who possesses this taciturnity 5 and which of the ,
two 6
is taciturnity ? Describe, O learned person !
the condition of taciturnity here. Does a learned

man reach taciturnity by taciturnity? And how,
7
O sage ! do they practise taciturnity in this world ?

1
I. e. they both follow on devotion to worldly life.
2
I. e. in the way to final emancipation.
3
The enjoyment of supreme felicity, Brahmananda (Sahkara)
the greatness consisting of a knowledge of Rik, Yaûs, Sdman,
and the substance of their teaching, which is worthy of a Brahma/za
(Nilakaâ). See, too, Anugita, p. 232.
4
Modesty = being ashamed of doing wrong; restraint (of senses)
= mental restraint; and purity is both internal and external, An-
kara knowledge is, of course, knowledge of the Brahman.
;
5
I. e. that spoken of in the last chapter.
6
Viz. mere silence, or the contemplation of the self after re-
straining all the senses. In the Brz'hadara/zyaka-upanishad, Sahkara
(p. 605) renders the original word, mauna, to mean, 'The fruit of
the destruction of the consciousness of any thing other than the self/
And his commentator makes it clearer thus : 'The conviction in the
mind that one is the self the supreme Brahman and that there
is nothing else existing but oneself/
7
I. e. the highest seat the Brahman ; for mind, sense, &c. are
all non-existent there. Cf. Ka//za, p. 151, and Maitri, p. 161.
CHAPTER III, 4. 163
Sanatsu*ata said
Since the Vedas, together with the mind 1 , fail to
attain to him, hence (is he) taciturnity 2

he about
whom the words of the Vedas were uttered and 3
,
who, O king shines forth as consubstantial 4 with

!
them.
Dhr/tarash^ra said :
Does the twice-born person who studies the Rik

5
and the Yaûs texts, and the Sdma-veda, committing

sinful (acts), become tainted, or does he not become
tainted ?
Sanatsuâta said :
Not the Saman texts, nor yet the Rik texts, nor
the Yaûs texts 6 save him, O acute sir from sinful !
1
Cf. Kenopanishad, p. 39; Ka/â, p. 152; Taittirfya, p. 119.
2
* Taciturnity is his name,' says Nilaka^/â.
3
who is the author of the Vedas/
Or, says *Sankara, '
4
I. e. Vedas/ says Nilakaâ, Om, the quintessence of
'with the
the Vedas, being a name of the Brahman (as to which cf. Gita, p. 79,
and Maitri, p. 84). -Sankara takes the whole expression to mean
^yotirmaya, consisting of light. Nilaka#/â says this stanza answers
the five following questions put in the stanza preceding, viz. of what
use is taciturnity? which of the two is taciturnity? &c, as above.
The first four questions are answered by the first two lines of this
stanza the substance of the answer being, that the use of taci-
turnity is to attain the seat which is not to be grasped even by the

mind, that taciturnity includes both restraint of mind and of the
external senses. By means of such restraint, the external and
internal worlds cease to be perceived as existing, and the highest
goal is attained.
5
This question arises naturally enough on Nilakafl/â's inter-
pretation of the preceding stanza, the meaning of which is in

substance that the Vedas cannot grasp the Brahman fully, but they
are of use towards a rudimentary comprehension of it, as is said
further on, see p. 172 infra.
6
Cf. Svetawatara-upanishad, p. 339 ; see, too, Nrzsizrcha Tapini,
pp. 81-98.
M 2
1 64 SANATSUGATIYA.
action.I do not tell you an untruth. The Afândas

do not save a sinful deceitful man who behaves l
deceitfully 2
At the time of the termination (of his
.
life), the Aândas abandon 3 him, as birds who have

got wings (abandon their) nest.
DhrztarashA*a said :
If, O Vedas are not able to save

acute sir ! the
one who understands the Vedas, then whence is this
4
eternal talk of the Brahma/zas ?
Sanatsuâta said
O you of great glory ! this universe becomes
manifest through his special forms names 5
and
the rest. The Vedas proclaim (his form) after
describing and (they 7 also) state his
(it) well 6
,
difference from the universe. For that 8 are this

penance and sacrifice prescribed. By these a
learned man acquires merit, and afterwards destroy-
ing sin by merit 9 he has his self illuminated by
,
knowledge. By knowledge the learned man attains
1
I. e. one who parades his piety.
2
I. e. hypocritically.
3
I. e. do not rise to his memory Nilakaw/â, citing Gita,
p. 78 supra.
4
Scil. about the veneration due to one who has studied the
Vedas Nilaka^/â, citing one or two passages in point.
5
The universe consists of names and forms/ '
the reality being
the Brahman only. Cf. iTMndogya, p. 407 seq.
6
.Sankara refers to Taittiriya-upanishad, p. 68 ; -Oandogya,
p. 596 seq. &c.
7
-Sahkara takes this to mean '
sages/ who, according to him,
state the dilference. He quotes Paraâra for this.
8
Brahman, that is to say, for attaining to it. Penance =
I.e. the
Mndraya/za and other observances; sacrifice =gyotish/oma, &c.

9
Cf. p. 158 supra, and Taittiriya-ara/zyaka, p. 888.
CHAPTER III, 12. 165
the self 1 . But, on the other hand, one who wishes

for the fruit heaven takes with 2
him 3 all that he
has done in this (world), enjoys it in the next, and
4
then returns to the path (of this world). Penance
is performed in this world the fruit is enjoyed ;
elsewhere. But the penance of Brahma/zas is fur-

ther developed 5 that of others remains only as
;
much (as when first performed).
Dhrztarashfra said
How does the pure penance become developed
and well developed 6
? O Sanatsu^dta ! tell (me)
how I should understand that, O Lord
Sanatsu^dta said :
This penance, free from sin 7 is called pure 8 and , ;
this pure penance becomes developed and well de-

veloped, not otherwise 9 All this 10 O Kshatriya . , !
1
327 Mundaka, p. 323.
Cf. -SVetsLyvatara, p. ;
So Sahkara. NilakaraMa takes the original word to mean

2
'
the group of the senses/ and the whole phrase to mean enjoy- '
ments of sense/ Nilaka^Ma is supported by a passage further on,

p. 167. But as to 'those who wish for heaven/ cf. Gita, pp. 48-84.
3
I. e. in the form of merit, &c.
4
Cf. Gita, p. 84.
8
Cf. -Oandogya, p. 23. Brahmaâs= those that know the
Brahman. See p. 171 infra.
6
I am not quite sure about the meaning of the original here.
i?z*ddha, which I Nilakaâ understands
have rendered developed/ '
to mean what is performed merely for show/ What has been

*
rendered well developed in the text, Nilaka/â takes to mean

'
'
1
performed from some desire/ &c.
7
Anger, desire, &c.
8
The original is kevala. Nilaka/zMa says it is so called as
being a means of kaivalya, {
final emancipation/
9
I. e. not that which is not free from sin, which latter is not
developed at all.
10
All objects of enjoyment, Nilaka#Ma.
1 66 SANATSUGATIYA.
has for its root that penance about which you

question me. By penance 1
, those conversant with
the Vedas attained immortality, after departing
from this world.
Dhrztar&sh/ra said
I have heard about penance free from sin, O
Sanatsuâta Tell me what is the sin (connected)
!
with penance, so that I may understand the eternal

2
mystery .
Sanatsu^dta said
The twelve beginning with wrath, and likewise
the seven cruelties, are the defects (connected) with
it ; and there are (stated) in the 6astras twelve
merits (connected) with it, beginning with know-
ledge, which are known to the twice-born, and may
\ be developed. Wrath, desire 3 avarice, delusion 4 ,
,
craving 5 mercilessness, censoriousness, vanity, grief 6

,
,
attachment 7 envy 8 reviling others

, these twelve
,
should always be avoided by a man of high quali-
1
Tapas is variously rendered. See
Cf. Brzhad&ra/zyaka, p. 899.
162-170; *Sveta\rvatara, p. 307; Muwdaka, pp.
inter alia, Pragma, pp.
270-280, 311-314; ^"Mndogya, p. 136; AnugM, pp. 247, 339.
2
I. e. Brahma-vidy&, or science of the Brahman, Nilaka;z/â
the Brahman itself, *Sankara.

3
I. e. lust.
4
Want of discrimination between right and wrong.
5
Desire to taste worldly objects.
6
For the loss of anything desired.
7
The difference between this
Desire to enjoy worldly objects.
and craving, according to *Sahkara, appears to be between merely
tasting and continual enjoyment. According to Nilakaw/â, the
former is a desire which is never contented the latter is merely ;
a general liking.
8
Impatience of other people's prosperity ; censoriousness being
the pointing out of flaws in other people's merits ; and reviling
being an ignoring of the merits and merely abusing.
fications 1
. These, O king of kings ! attend each
and every man, wishing to find some opening 2 ,
as a hunter (watches) animals. [Boastful, lustful,

|
haughty, irascible, unsteady 3
, one who does not 1
4
protect (those dependent on him), these six sinful I
acts are performed by sinful men who are not afraid

(even) in the midst of great danger One whose 5
.]
thoughts are (all) about enjoyments, who prospers

by injuring (others), who repents of generosity, who
is miserly, who is devoid of the power (of know-
6
ledge), who esteems the group 7

(of the senses),

who hates his wife 8 these seven, different (from
those previously mentioned), are the seven forms
of cruelty. Knowledge, truth, self-restraint, sacred
learning, freedom from animosity (towards living
beings), modesty 9 endurance 10 freedom from cen-
, ,
soriousness, sacrifice, gift, courage n quiescence 12 ,

,
these are the twelve great observances 13 of a Brih-

maâ, Whoever is not devoid of these twelve
can govern this whole world, and those who are
1
Scil. for attaining to the Brahman.
2
Some weak point by which they may attack a man.
3
Fickle in friendship, &c.
*
Such as a wife, &c.
5
Connected with this or the next world, Nilaka/â. This and
a stanza further on I place within brackets, as it is not quite certain
whether Sankara's copy had them, though they are now in some
of our copies of the text with his commentary. See Introduction.
Cf. Mundaka, p. 319; iTMndogya, p. 494.
6
7
See note 2, at page 165.
8
The wife having no other protector.
9
See note 4, at page 162.
10
Of pairs of opposites, such as heat and cold, &c.
11
Restraint of senses in presence of their objects.
12
Cf. GM, pp. 69, 70.
13
Which are serviceable in attaining the highest goal.
1 68 SANATSUGATIYA.
possessed of three, two, or even one (of these) be-

come, in (due) course, distinguished (for knowledge)
V and identified with the Brahman
l
[Self-restraint, .
2
abandonment and freedom from heedlessness on ,
J
these depends immortality. And the talented Brah-
lma;zas say that truth is chief over them.] Self-
-restraint has eighteen defects ; if (any one of them
is) committed, it is an obstacle (to self-restraint).
They are thus stated. Untruthfulness, backbiting,
3 4
thirst , antipathy (to all beings), darkness , repin-
5 6
ing , hatred of people, haughtiness, quarrelsome-
ness, injuring living creatures, reviling others, gar-
8
rulity, vexation want of 7
, want of endurance ,
9 10
courage , and slaugh-
imperfection , sinful conduct,
ter. That is called self-restraint by the good, which
is free from these defects. Frenzy has eighteen
defects n and abandonment is of six kinds. The
;
contraries of those which have been laid down 12 are

stated to be the defects of frenzy. Abandonment
of six kinds is excellent. Of those six, the third
is hard to achieve. With it one certainly crosses
1
The original is the word 'taciturnity ' as at p. 162 supra.
2
Offering one's acts to God (Nilaka/#a), as to which cf. GM,
p. 64. See also p. 182 infra for this stanza.
3 4
I. e. for objects of sense. Ignorance.
5
Discontent even when one obtains much.
6
This is active ; antipathy is passive only.
7
Of by brooding on evil.
oneself, Cf. Taittiriya, p. 119. One
copy of Ankara's commentary says this means '
thinking ill of
others without cause/
8
Of pairs of opposites.
9
Restraint of senses in presence of their objects.
10
I. e. of piety, knowledge, and indifference to worldly objects.
11
I. e. qualities which destroy it.
12
Scil. as defects of self-restraint, viz. untruthfulness, &c.
beyond all misery without distinction \ That being

achieved, (everything) is accomplished 2
. The (first
is the) giving away of sons and wealth to a de-

serving man who asks (for them) the second is ;
gifts at Vedic ceremonies, and gifts at ceremonies

laid down in the Smrztis 3
. The abandonment of
desires, O king of kings ! by means of indifference
(to down as the third 4
worldly objects) is laid .
With these one should become free from heed-

lessness. That freedom from heedlessness, too, has
eight characteristics, and is (a) great (merit). Truth-
fulness, concentration, absorbed contemplation, re- '
flexion 5
, and also indifference (to worldly objects),
6
not stealing , living the life of a Brahma/arin, and I
1
Scil. any distinction as to physical, mental, or that which is
caused by superhuman agency.

2
Literally, all is conquered/
'
Everything that needs to be
done is done. Cf. Ka/ôpanishad, p. 155 Mu?/daka, p. 317. ;
3
Another interpretation of ish/apurta is offerings to gods, and '
offerings to the manes;' a third sacrifices, &c, and works of '
charity, such as digging tanks and wells;' for a fourth, see Sankara
on Mu/zdaka, p. 291.
4
Each of the three classes mentioned contains two sub-classes,
and so the six are made up. It is not quite easy to see the two
heads under the third class; but perhaps indifference, and the
consequent abandonment of desire, may be the two intended. To
indicate that, I have adopted the construction which takes the
words 'by means of indifference with abandonment, instead of '
with gifts at Vedic ceremonies/ &c. *Sankara seems to understand

'
'
giving away of wealth with the words by means of indifference/
'
'
and thus to constitute the second head under the third class. But
he is not quite clear.
5
Concentration = fixing the mind continuously on some object,
such as the being in the sun, &c. which
; contemplation is that in
one identifies oneself with the Brahman; reflexion as to what one
is, whence one comes, and so forth.
6
*Sahkara says this may refer to the stealing mentioned at '
'
p. 160. The life of a Brahma&irin is here taken to mean con-

1 70 SANATSUGATIYA.
likewise freedom from all belongings 1

. Thus have
the defects of self-restraint been stated ; one should
avoid those defects. Freedom from (those) defects
is freedom from heedlessness; and that, too, is
deemed to have eight characteristics 2 Let truth .
be your (very) self, O king of kings On truth all !
the worlds rest 3 Truth is said to be their main

.
(principle). Immortality depends on truth 4 Get- .
ting rid of (these) defects, one should practise the

observance of penance. This is the conduct pre-
scribed by the Creator. Truth is the solemn vow
of the good. The pure penance, which is free from
these defects, and possessed of these characteristics,
becomes developed, and well developed 5 I will .
state to you, in brief, O king of kings! what you

ask of me. This (observance) 6 is destructive of sin,
and pure, and releases (one) from birth and death and
old age Y If one is free from the five senses, and also
.
from the mind 8 O descendant of Bharata! also from

,
(thoughts regarding) the past and the future 9 one ,
becomes happy.
Dhrztarish/ra said
Some people make great boasts in consequence
of (their knowing) the Vedas with the Akhyanas as
tinence by the commentators, as also at Muâka, p. 3 1 1 inter alia.
See also ,Oandogya, p. 533.
1
Son, wife, home, &c. as to which cf. Gita, p. 103, and.Nrz-
;
siwha Tapin?, commentary.

p. 198,
2 3
The eight mentioned already. Cf. Taitt. Araw. p. 885.
4
Cf. Mu;zdaka, p. 312; *Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 199,
st. 64 seq. Immortality = final emancipation.
5 6
P. 165 supra. Of penance, that is to say.
7
109 for the collocation.
Cf. Gita, p.
8
Ka/ôpanishad, p. 151; Maitri, p. 161. Sankara seems to take
the five and the senses separately; the five meaning the five classes of
9
sensuous objects. Past losses and future gains, Nilaka^Ma.
1
the fifth ; others, likewise, are (masters) of four
Vedas ; others, too, of three Vedas ; others are
(masters) of two Vedas, and of one Veda ; and
others of no Veda 2 Tell me which . of these is the
greatest, whom I may know (to be) a Brahma;za.
Sanatsu&ta said:
Through ignorance of the one Veda 3 the one
truth
O king of kings numerous Vedas came into I
existence. Some 4 only adhere to the truth. The

fancies of those who have fallen away from the truth
are abortive, and through ignorance of the truth,
ceremonies become amplified 5 . One should under-
stand a Brahma/za,who (merely) reads much, to be a
man many words 6 Know him only to be the
of .
(true) Br^hmaâ, who swerves not from the truth 7 .
O you who are the highest among men 8 the !
iOandas, indeed, refer of themselves 9 to it. There-

1
Cf., as to tins, Max Miiller's Ancient Sanskrit Literature,
p. 38 seq.; and -Oandogya, pp. 164, 474, 493; Brzhadarawyaka,
pp. 456, 687, 926 Maitri, p. 171; NWsi/raha Tapini, p. 105.
;
2
The original is void of JZzks.' The commentators give no
'
explanation. Does it mean those who abandon thekarma-marga?

Heretics who reject all Vedas are scarcely likely to be referred to in
this way. Nilaka#//$a's interpretation of all this is very different.
See his gloss.
3
/Sahkara gives various interpretations of this. Perhaps the
best is to take it as meaning knowledge. The one knowledge '
the one truth' would then be like the famous text Taittiriya,
p.56 The Brahman is truth, knowledge,' &c.
'
4
For this phrase cf. Gita, p. 73.
5
Those who do not understand the Brahman lose their natural
power of obtaining what they wish, and so go in for various
ceremonies for various special benefits. Cf. .Oandogya, p. 541;
Gita, p. 47; and p. 184 infra.
6 7
Cf. Brz'hadarawyaka, p. 893. Ibid. p. 636.
8
Literally, '
highest among bipeds/ a rather unusual expression.
9
Nilakaw/â says, '
The part of the Vedas which teaches the
1 72 SANATSUGATIYA.
fore, studying them, the learned persons who under-

stand the Aândas, attain to the Veda, not that
which is to be known 1 Among the Vedas, there .
is none which understands

2
By the unintelligent 3 .
,
one understands not the Veda, nor the object of

knowledge 4 He who knows the Veda knows the
.
object of knowledge. He who knows the object of

knowledge 5 knows not the truth. He who under-
stands the Vedas understands also the object of
knowledge but that 6 is not understood by the Vedas
;
or by those who understand the Vedas. Still the
Brahma/zas who understand the Vedas, understand

the Veda by means of the Vedas Y
. As the branch
of a tree with regard to the part of a portion of the
8
glorious one, so, they declare, are the Vedas with
knowledge of the supreme enough by itself for its purpose
is
it is &c, which rites must be per-

not like the part about rites,
formed before they serve any useful purpose/ The Gnanakanda

is enough by itself for understanding the Brahman. -Sankara
compares Gita, p. 113, and Ka/â, p. 102.
1
The Veda=the Brahman, as above, cf. -Sveta^vatara, p. 372
and commentary ; that which is to be known = the material world,
which is a subject for human knowledge.
2
Scil. understands the
Veda the Brahman.
3
' The mind/ says Nilaka/Aa ; literally, '
that which is to be
understood.'
4
Because a real knowledge of it requires a knowledge of the
Brahman. As to the next clause cf. inter alia .Oandogya, p. 384 ;
Brzliadara/zyaka, p. 450.
5
This is the converse of the last sentence, as to which cf.
Br/hadaraTzyaka, p. 925.
6
The supreme.
7
The apparent contradiction is explained in the next sentence.
8
I.e. the moon. This refers to the well-known âkhaândra-
nyaya. As the small digit of the moon, which cannot be perceived by
itself, is pointed out as being at the tip of a branch of a tree pointing
towards the moon, so the Vedas are of use as pointing towards
the Brahman, though inaccurately and imperfectly.
CHAPTER III, 45. I73
regard to the subject of understanding the supreme

self. understand him to be a Brahma;za who is
I
ingenious, and explains 1 (Vedic texts). He who

apprehends (those texts) thus 2 does verily know ,
that supreme (principle). One should not go in

3
search of it among (things) antagonistic to it at all.
Not looking (for him there) one sees that Lord by

means of the Veda 4 Remaining quiet, one should
.
practise devotion, and should not even form a wish

in the mind 5
To him the Brahman presents 6
.
itself, and directly afterwards he attains to the

perfect 7
(one). By taciturnity 8
, verily, does one
become a sage ;
(one does) not (become) a sage by
dwelling in a forest 9
. And he is called the highest
sage, who understands that indestructible (principle).
10
One is called an analyser (also) in consequence of
1
Scil. in the manner just indicated.
2
As giving an idea of the Brahman. The first step to a
knowledge of the Brahman is to '
hear ' about it from Vedic texts.
Cf. Brz'hadara/zyaka, p. 925.

3
Such as the body, the senses, &c, which must be distinguished as
quite distinct from the self, though most often confounded with it.
4
Such passages, namely, as Thou art that, ' I am the Brahman/ &c.
5
About the objects of the senses.
6
Cf. Ka/â, p. 155.
Cf. iTMndogya, p. 516. The Bhuman there is the same as
7
theBahu here, viz. the Brahman. -Sarikara says expressly in his

comment on the Upanishad text, that Bahu and Bhuman, among
other words, are synonyms.
8
Self-restraint, as explained before at p. 163.
9
Though this is not unimportant, as may be seen from the
contrast between town and forest at .Aândogya, p. 340. See also
Maitrt, p. 100; Muâka, p. 240. As to the 'highest sage/ see
BnTiadarawyaka, p. 899, where the passage about sacrifice, gift,
'
penance' should be compared with Gita, p. 122.

10
The construction in the original is not quite clear. I under-
stand the sense to be as follows : In the science of the soul, the
1 74 SANATSUGATIYA.
analysing all objects. The analysis (is) from that

as the root ; and as he makes (such an) analysis,
hence is he so (called). The man who sees the
worlds directly sees everything 1
. A Brahma/za,
verily, adhering to the truth, understands it, and
becomes omniscient. I say to you, O learned person!
that adhering to knowledge and the rest 2 in this
way, one sees the Brahman, O Kshatriya! by means
of a course (of study) in the Vedas 3 .
Chapter IV.
Dhretardsh/ra said
O Sanatsuâta since you have spoken these
!
words of highest significance, relating to the Brah-

man, and of numerous forms 4 give me that advice ,
which is excellent, and difficult to obtain in the
analyser (the word is the same as the word for grammarian) is he

who analyses objects, not words merely. Now the true analysis
of objects reduces them all to the Brahman (cf. Aândogya, p. 407 ;
Brz'hadarawyaka, p. 152); and the sage understands this, and makes

the analysis accordingly, so he is rightly called an analyser.
1
This again is not clear, and the discrepancies of the MSS.
make it more perplexing. The meaning, I take to be, that a man
may perceive all material things, such as the worlds, Bhur, &c.
(as the commentators put it), but to be really omniscient, you must

have knowledge of the truth the Brahman. See Sabha Parvan,
chapter V, stanza 7. And see, too, Bn'hadara/zyaka, p. 613.
2
P. 167 supra.
3 '
Hearing the Vedantas Upanishads/ &c, says âhkara. See
note 2 supra, p. 173.
4
Does this mean referring to many aspects of the Brahman ?
Sahkara merely says nanarupa. Nilaka#//$a takes it differently,

and as meaning that in which everything is elucidated ;
'
relating
to the Brahman Nilakaw/â
' takes to mean '
leading to the Brah-
man,' or 'instrument for attaining to the Brahman.'
CHAPTER IV, 5. 175
midst of these created objects 1 . Such is my request,

O youth !
Sanatsuâta said:
This Brahman, O king ! about which you question
me with such perseverance, is not to be attained by
anybody who is in a hurry. When the mind is ab-
2
sorbed understanding then can that know-
in the ,
ledge, which must be deeply pondered over, be

attained by living the life of a BrahmaMrin 3 For .
you are speaking of that primordial knowledge 4 ,
which consists in the truth which is obtained by ;
the good by living the life of Brahmaârins 5 which ;
being obtained, men cast off this mortal world and ;
which knowledge, verily, is to be invariably (found)

in those who have been brought up under pre-
6
ceptors .
Dhretardsh/ra said :
Since that knowledge is capable of being truly

acquired by living the life of a Brahmaârin, there-
fore tell me, O Brahmaâ ! of what description the
7
life of a Brahma/ârin is .
Sanatsuâta said :
Those who entering (as it were) the womb 8

of a
1
In this material world, the highest knowledge is not to be got.
Cf. Ka/$a, p. 96.
2
I. e. withdrawn from objects and fixed on the self only. Cf.
Gita, p. 79, and Maitri, p. 179, where, however, we have hrz'd for
buddhi.
3
Viro/ana and Indra do so according to the iTMndogya, p. 570.
See also MuWaka, p. 311.
4
The object of which is the primal Brahman.
5
-Oandogya, p. 534
Cf. ; and Gita, pp. 78, 79, and the passage
from the Ka/â there cited.
6 7
.ATMndogya, pp. 264-459. See .Oandogya, p, 553 seq.
8
I. e. attending closely upon him ; foetus = pupil.
1 76 SANATSUGATIYA.
preceptor, and becoming (as it were) a foetus, prac-
tise the life of Brahmaiarins, become even in this

world authors of vSastras 1
, and they repair to the
highest truth 2
after casting off (this) body. They
subjugate desires here in this world, practising for-
bearance Brahmic state 3 and with
in pursuit of the ;
courage, they even here remove the self out of the

body 4 like the soft fibres from the Munâ. Father
,
and mother, O descendant of Bharata! only form

the body. But the birth 5 obtained from the pre-
ceptor, that verily is true 6 and likewise immortal. ,
He perfects 7 (one), giving (one) immortality. Re-

cognising what he has done (for one), one should
not injure him. The disciple should always make
8
obeisance to the preceptor ; and, free from heedless-
ness, should always desire sacred instruction. When
the pure man obtains knowledge by this same
9
course of discipleship , that is the first quarter of
his life as a Brahmaârin. As (is) his conduct
1
Learned, men of knowledge, -Sankara.
2
The supreme, which is described as '
truth, knowledge/ &c.
In our ancient works the truth often means the real.
3
The state of being absorbed in the Brahman. Cf. GM, p. 52.
4
Cf. Ka/â, p. 158.
5
iSankara cites Apastamba (p. 1 1) in support of this, and Prajna-
upanishad, p. 256. The consciousness of being one with the
Brahman is a new birth. See, too, Mundaka, p. 282.
6
That birth is not merely delusive, and does not result in death.
?
Immortality or final emancipation is not to be achieved without
knowledge, which can only be got from a preceptor. And one is
not perfect without that immortality ; one is limited by the con-
ditions of human existence. See Nirukta (Roth's ed.), p. 41.
8
*Sankara compares *Sveta\yvatara, p. 374. The necessity of having
a Guru is often insisted on even in the Upanishads. Cf. Mu/zdaka,
p. 282 ; .Oandogya, p. 264.
9
Stated at the beginning of this speech, *Sahkara.
CHAPTER IV, 14. 177
always towards his preceptor, so likewise should he

behave towards the preceptor's wife, and so likewise
should he act towards the preceptor s son (that) is
said to be the second quarter. What one, recog-
nising what the preceptor has done for one, and
1
understanding the matter (taught), feels with a
delighted heart regarding the preceptor believing
that one has been brought into existence 2
by him
that is the third quarter of life as a BrahmaMrin.
One should do what is agreeable to the preceptor,
by means of one's life and riches, and in deed,

thought, and word 3 that is said to be the fourth
quarter. (A disciple) obtains a quarter by time 4 ,
so likewise a quarter by associating with the pre-

ceptor, he also obtains a quarter by means of his
own energy; and then he attains to a quarter by
means of the .Sastras. The life as a Brahmaiarin
of that man, whose beauty 5 consists in the twelve
beginning with knowledge, and whose limbs are
the other (qualifications mentioned), and who has
1
The meaning of the Vedic texts, &c, *Sankara in one copy
the highest aim of man, according to another copy.
2
See note 5 on p. 176.
8
I keep the order of the original, though I do not translate
quite literally; 'thought and word' should be literally'mind and
speech/ See, on the collocation, Gita, p. 123 inter alia.
4
Time = maturity of understanding which comes by time;
energy = intellectual power; Sastras = consultation about -Sastras
with fellow-students -Sankara, who adds that the order is not
material as stated, and quotes a stanza which may be thus ren-
dered, 'The pupil receives a quarter from the preceptor, a
quarter by his own talent ; he receives a quarter by time and ;
a quarter through fellow-BrahmaMrins.

5
The body being disregarded, these qualities are attributed to
the self in this way.For the twelve, see p. 167; the others are
abandonment, truthfulness, &c, p. 169.
[8] N
1 78 SANATSUGATIYA.
strength *, bears fruit, they say, by association with

a preceptor, in (the shape of) contact with that entity
the Brahman. Whatever wealth may come to a
man who way, he should even pay that
lives in this
over to the preceptor. He would thus be adopting
the conduct of the good which is of many merits
and the same conduct is (to be adopted) towards the
preceptors son. Living thus, he prospers greatly 2
on all sides in this world he obtains sons and
;
3
position ; the quarters and sub-quarters shower
(benefits 4)on him, and men pass their lives as
Brahmaiarins under him. By this life as a Brah-
maMrin, the divinities obtained their divinity. And
the sages, too, became great by living the life of
Brahma/arins. By this same (means), too, the Apsa-
rasas, together with the Gandharvas, achieved for
themselves beautiful forms. And by this life as a
Brahmaiarin, the sun illuminates (the universe).
That man of knowledge, O king! who practising
penance, may by penance pierce through or tear off
his body, crossesbeyond childhood 5 by means of this
(life as a BrahmaMrin), and at the time of the
termination (of life) obstructs death 6 Those who .
understand this (life as a Brahma/arin) attain to a
1
To observe the duties referred to, -Sahkara. But see, too, p. 167,
note 6.
2 '
Obtains wealth, learning, and greatness,' says a commentator.
For similar benefits, cf. .O&ndogya, p. 122.
3
Cf. .Ajfcandogya, p. 132.
4
' Wealth/ says Nilakaâ, as well as another commentator.
5
Ignorance; cf. note 7 at p. 154 supra. Nilakaw/â reads
'reaches' instead of '
crosses beyond/ and interprets 'balya' to
mean freedom from
'
affection, aversion/ &c. Cf. Br/"hadarayaka,
p. 605. As to the divinity of divinities, cf. Taitt. Ara#. p. 886.
6
Nilaka//a reads i
vanquishes death/ The meaning is, he
reaches final emancipation, Cf. p. 154 supra.
CHAPTER IV, 21. I 79
condition like that of those who ask (for what they

want) from the wish-giving stone when they obtain
1
,
the thing desired. By performing action, O Ksha-

triya ! people conquer (for themselves only) perish-
able worlds 2
. (But) the man of understanding
attains by knowledge to the everlasting glory for
there is no other way to it 3 .
Dhrztarash/ra said
Where a Br&hmaâ possessed of knowledge, per-
4
ceives it, does it appear as white , as red, or again
as black, or again as grey or tawny ? What is the
colour of that immortal, indestructible goal ?
Sanatsuâta said
It appears not as white, as red, nor again as black,
nor again as grey, nor tawny 5 It dwells not on .
earth, nor in the sky nor does it bear a body in this ;
ocean 6 (-like world). It is not in the stars, nor
does it form 7 to be
dwell in the lightning ; nor is its
seen in the clouds, nor even in the air, nor in the

deities it is not to be seen in the moon, nor in the
;
sun. It is not to be seen in Rik texts, nor in
1
Called iTintamam. The effect of Brahma&irya is that those
who practise it can get what they desire.
2
Cf. Gita, p. 76 ; .ATMndogya, p. 538; Muâka, p. 279.
8 4
Cf. *SVeta\rvatara, p. 327. Cf. Br/hadarawyaka, p. 877.
5
Cf. Ka/â, p. 119 ; and MuWaka, p. 267. As to its not dwell-
ing in earth, sky, &c, -Sahkara refers to ^ândogya, p. 518, as
implying that.
6
Literally, ' it bears no water in the ocean/
l
Water ' is said by
the commentators to mean the five elements of which the body is
composed. See Manu and .Oandogya, p. 330. In the *SVeta-

I, 5,
jvatara it signifies mind (see p. 388). For ocean meaning world, or

sa#zsara; cf. Aitareya-upanishad, p. 182.
7
Here I do not render rupa by colour, as before.
N 2
1 80 SANATSUGATIYA.
Yaîis texts ; nor yet in the Atharvan texts, nor in

the pure Saman texts nor yet, O king, in the ;
Rathantara or Brzhadratha 1 hymns. It is seen in

the self of a man of high vows 2 It is invincible, .
beyond darkness 3 , it comes forth from within 4

at
the time of destruction. Its form is minuter than
the minutest (things), its form is larger even than
the mountains 5
. That is the support 6 (of the uni-
verse) ; that is immortal ;
(that is) all things percep-
tible 7
. That is the Brahman, that is glory 8 . From
that all entities were produced 9 , in that they are
dissolved. All this shines forth as dwelling in it in
the form of light 10
. And it is perceived by means
of knowledge by one who understands the self;
11
on depends this whole universe. Those who

it
understand this become immortal.
1
See Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, p. 16 Ta^ya-brahmawa, ;
p. 838; Gitd, p. 90; and Kaushitaki, p. 21. Br/hadratha=Brihat-

saman (?).
2
The twelve great vows knowledge, &c, mentioned above,
see p. 167. Nilaka//&a takes Mahavrata to refer to the sacrifice
of that name. It is described in the Aitareya Arawyaka.
3
See Gita, p. 78, note 4.
4
Cf. Gita, p. 82, and tropanishad, p. 12.
5
See Gita, p. 78, note 3.
6
Cf. Gita, p. 113 ; Ka/â p. 99.
7
So Nilakaâ. The original word ordinarily means '
worlds/
8
Cf. *SVeta\rvatara, p. 347.
9
Cf. the famous passage in the Taittiriya, p. 123: and also
MuWaka, p. 289.
10
The explanations of the commentators are not quite clear
as to the word ahna, ' in the form of light/ Probably the meaning
is : The universe depends on the Brahman, and is, as it were, the
light of the Brahman. *Sahkara compares the passages referred to
4
at Gita , p. 112, note 1.

11
'Not by means of action/ says Sahkara.
CHAPTER V, 3. l8l
Chapter V 1
.
Grief and wrath, and avarice, desire, delusion,

laziness, want of forgiveness, vanity, craving, friend-
ship 2
, censoriousness, and reviling others these
twelve great enormities are destructive of a man's
life. These, O king of kings ! attend on each and
every man. Beset by these, a man, deluded in his
understanding, acts sinfully. A man full of at-
tachments, merciless, harsh (of speech), talkative,
cherishing wrath in his heart, and boastful these
are the men of cruel qualities ;
(such) persons, even
3
obtaining wealth, do not always enjoy (it) .
1
The whole of this chapter is wanting in one of our copies
of Sarikara's commentary. In the copy published in the MaM-
bharata (Madras edition) there is, however, this passage :
'
Wrath
&c. have been already explained, still there are some differences
here and there, and those only are now explained.
7
The chapter
is for the most part a repetition of what we have already had.
For such repetitions cf. Brz'hadarawyaka, pp. 31 7-1 01 6; 444-930.
The same copy of *Sahkara's commentary gives this general state-
ment of the object of this and the next chapter: 'The course of study
of the science of the Brahman, in which knowledge is the principal
thing, and concentration of mind &c. are subsidiary, has been
described. Now iscourse of study in which
described the
concentration of mind and knowledge subsidiary.
is principal,
The first mode consists in understanding the meaning of the
word " you " by means of concentration of mind, and then identify-
ing it with the Brahman by means of a study of the Upanishads
the second, in first intellectually understanding the identity of the
individual self and Brahman, by such study of the Upanishads,
and then realising the identity to consciousness by con-
templation, &c. In both modes the fruit is the same, and the
means are the same; and to show this, the merits and defects
already stated are here again declared/ This explanation is
verbatim the same in Nilaka^Ma's commentary.
2
The original is 'pity/ which is explained to mean 'friend-
ship by Sahkara and Nilaka/â.
'
3
Owing to there being in it no enjoyment for the self/ says one
'
182 SANATSUGATIYA.
One whose thoughts are fixed on enjoyments, who

is proud 2 boastful when he makes a gift,
partial 1
9 ,
miserly, and devoid of power 3 who esteems the ,
group (of the senses), and who hates (his) wife

thus have been stated the seven (classes of) cruel
persons of sinful dispositions. Piety, and truthful-
Jness, and penance, and self-restraint, freedom from
animosity, modesty, endurance, freedom from cen-
soriousness, liberality, sacred learning, courage, for-
giveness these are the twelve great observances of
a Brcihma/za. Whoever does not swerve from these
twelve may govern this whole world. And one
who is possessed of three, two, or even one, of these,
must be understood to have nothing of his own 4 *
V Self-restraint, abandonment, freedom from delusion,

on these immortality depends 5 These are possessed .
by those talented Brahma/zas to whom the Brahman

is the principal 6 (thing). A Brahmaâ's speaking ill
of others, whether true or false, is not commended.
copy of -Sankara's commentary. Another reading, which is in the

Madras edition and in Nilaka#/#a, may be rendered, even obtaining '
do not respect one (from whom they obtain them).

,
benefits, they
1
The commentary says the meaning is the same as that of the
expression used in the corresponding place before, viz. one who
prospers by injuring others.
2
One copy of *Sarikara's commentary takes this to mean one
who thinks the not-self to be the self. I adopt the other meaning,
however, as agreeing with that of atimani, which is the reading
of some copies instead of abhimani.
3
and does not explain it. See p. 167.
Nilaka/y$a reads durbala
4
One commentator means that he should not be
says this
supposed to have incurred the demerit of having any attachment
to this world. Nilaka#//$a says, he gives up everything in the
pursuit of even one of these observances.
5
See p. 168.
6
I. e. the goal to be reached. The commentary takes Brahman
to mean the Vedas, and the whole phrase to mean those who devote
themselves to the performance of actions stated in the Yedas.
CHAPTER V, 13. T83
The men who act thus have their places in hell

Frenzy has eighteen defects as already describe
here
hatred of men, factiousness 1 censoriousness, ,
untruthful speech, lust, wrath, want of self-control 2 ,
speaking ill of others, backbiting, mismanagement

3
in business ,
quarrelsomeness, animosity, troubling-
living creatures, want of forgiveness, delusion, flip-
4 5
pancy, loss of reason , censoriousness ; therefore
a wise man should not be subject to frenzy, for it
is always censured. Six characteristics should be

understood as (belonging) to friendship that one
should rejoice at (anything) agreeable ; and feel
grieved at (anything) disagreeable ; that with a
pure heart one, when asked by a deserving (man),
should give to him who asks what can 6
certainly
be given, (though it) may be beneficial to oneself,
and even though it ought not to be asked, (namely)
one's favourites, sons, wealth, and one's own wife
that one should not dwell there where one has be-
stowed (all one's) wealth, through a desire (to get a
return for one's liberality) that one should enjoy (the ;
1
One copy of xSankara's commentary says this means *
obstruct-
ing other people's acts of piety/ &c.
2
One copy of -Sahkara's commentary says this means being'
given up to intoxicating drinks/ &c. ; another copy says, '

doing
another's bidding without thought.'
3 ;'
One copy says this means 'inattention to any work undertaken
another renders the original by 'destruction of property, i.e. squan-
dering iton dancers/ &c.
4
I. e. discrimination between right and wrong.
5
This seems to be some error, for 'censoriousness' has occurred
before. But neither the texts nor the commentaries give any help
to correct the error. Perhaps the latter is to be distinguished as
referring to the habit, and the former only to sporadic acts, of
censoriousness. These qualities, I presume, constitute frenzy ; they
are not the '
defects/
6
I. e. where the power to give exists.
1 84 SANATSUGATIYA.
1
fruit of one s own) toils (only) and that one should
;
forego one's own profit 2

. Such a man, possessed of
wealth, and possessed of merits, is a liberal man of
3
the quality of goodness ; such a one diverts the
4 5
five elements from the five (senses). This pure
penance, acquired out of desire 6
by those who are
from the truth, even though developed,
fallen off
leads upwards 7 since sacrifices are performed
;
owing to a misapprehension of the truth 8 (The .
1
Not a friend's. 2
For a friend. 3
See GM, p. 120.
4
The commentators take this to mean objects of sense, and
they interpret '
elements ' before to mean senses.
5 ' Viz. the turning away of the senses from their objects/ says
one copy of -Sarikara.
6
Scil. to enjoy the higher enjoyments of superior worlds.
7
I. e. to the higher worlds ; it does not lead to emancipation here.
8
Cf. Mu*/aka, p. 277. I must own that I do not quite under-
stand this passage, nor its explanation as given in the commentaries.
I do not quite see what the penance here mentioned has to do
with sacrifice, and yet the commentators seem to take the words
*
since sacrifices/ &c, with what precedes them, not with what
follows. Taking them, however, with what follows, it is difficult to
explain the word i since/ As far as I can understand the passage
I take the sense of it to be as follows The author having said that :
penance performed out of a particular motive does not lead to

final emancipation, he then proceeds to point out that all action '
or 'sacrifice' is due to an imperfect understanding of the truth (cf.

p. 171 supra), being mostly due to some particular motive. Then
he goes on to show the different classes of sacrifice, and finally
points out that he who is free from desires is superior to one who
is actuated by desires. The original for 'misapprehension' is ava-
bodha, which commonly means apprehension/ but -Sarikara finally '
makes it mean moha or delusion/ The original for truth is rendered

'
by Nilakaâ to mean fancies/ Nilaka^/â says that the sacrifice

'
by the mind is the highest that by speech, viz. Brahmaya^na,

;
<2apa, &c., is middling ; and

that by deed, viz. with clarified butter
and other offerings, of the lowest class. 'Perfected by fancies '=
one whose fancies are always fulfilled 'through a knowledge/
says Nilaka/2/$a, ' of the Brahma as possessing qualities/
CHAPTER V, 21. 185
sacrifices) some are by the mind, of others by

of
speech, and alsoby deed. The man void of fancies
takes precedence over the man perfected by fancies,
especially among Brihma/zas \ And hear this
further from me. One should teach this great and
2
glorious (doctrine) ;
(other doctrines) the wise call
mere arrangements of words. On this concentration
of mind 3 all this 4 depends. Those who know this
,
become immortal. Not by meritorious action only,

O king ! does one conquer the truth 5
. One may offer
offerings, or sacrifice. By that the child(-like man)
does not cross beyond death ; nor, O king ! does he
obtain happiness in his last moments 6 . One should
practise devotion quietly,and should not be active
even and then one should avoid
in the mind 7
;
delight and wrath (resulting) from praise and cen-

sure 8
. I say to you, O learned person ! that
adhering to this 9
, one attains the Brahman and
perceives it, O Kshatriya ! by a course (of study)
of the Vedas.
1
This also is far from clear. Should it be, '
and a Brahmarca
more especially ? This might be taken as referring to one who
'
knows the Brahman as devoid of qualities, as Nilakaw/â does take

it. But his construction is not quite clear.
2
As serviceable in attaining to ' the glory/ the Brahman; see p. 1 80.
3
See note 1 at p. 181. As to 'arrangements of words/ cf.
Maitri, p. 179.
4
Everything/ says one copy of ^Sahkara's commentary
' all that ;
'
is good and desirable/ says another.

5
Cf. inter alia, Muwâka, pp. 281-314.
6
For he has got to undergo migration from one life to another
as the result of the action. Cf. Brz'hadarawyaka, p. 856; Muâka,
p. 278.
7 8
Cf. Gita, p. 70. Ibid. pp. 101-110.
9
I. e. the yoga or concentration of mind here described. This
stanza, like many others in this chapter, occurs in chapter III with
slight variations.
1 86 S AN ATSU G ATI YA.
Chapter VI.
That pure 1
which is radiant that
)
great light 2
, ;
great glory 3
which the gods worship 4
that, verily,

; ;
that by means of which the sun shines forth 5

that eternal divine being is perceived by devotees.
From (that) pure (principle) the Brahman 6 is pro-
duced by (that) pure (principle) the Brahman is
;
developed 7 that pure (principle), not illumined

;
among all radiant (bodies), is (itself) luminous and

illuminates (them) 8 . That eternal divine being is
perceived by devotees. The perfect is raised out

of the perfect It (being raised) out of the perfect
is called The perfect is withdrawn
the perfect.
from the and the perfect only remains 9
perfect, .
That eternal divine being is perceived by devotees.

1
Free from ignorance and other taints. See Ka/$a, p. 144.
2
-Sankara compares KaMa, p. 142. See, too, Muwdaka, p. 303 ;
and note 4 infra.

3
347, and p. 180 supra.
*Sveta\yvatara, p.
4
-Sankara refers to Brz'hadara/zyaka, p. 887.
5
Cf. Gita, p. 112, note 1.
6
' Named Hirawyagarbha/ -Sahkara. Cf. Gitd, p. 107 ; SVeta\rva-
tara, p. 354; Mu/zdaka, p. 309; Maitri, p. 130; Taitt. Ara#. p. 894.
7 ' In the form of Vira^/ says -Sankara. As to these two, cf.
Muâka, pp. 270-272; and /Sankara's and Anandagiri's notes
there. See also Veta\rvatara, pp. 324, 325 and NWsi/#ha Tapini, ;
PP- 233, 234 ; Colebrooke, Essays, pp. 344, 368 (Madras reprint).
The Virag corresponds rather to the gross material world viewed as
a whole ; the Hira^yagarbha to the subtle elements similarly viewed,
an earlier stage in the development. Cf. the Vedantasara.
8
Cf. Mu/zâka, p. 303, and Gita, p. 112.
9
The individual self is part of the supreme (Gita, p. 1 12); perfect
= not limited by space, time, &c. ; as being part of a thing perfect
in its essence, the individual soul also is perfect. The individual
self is withdrawn from the perfect, viz. the whole aggregate of body,
senses, &c. presided over by the self, and when so withdrawn it
appears to be the pure self only. Cf. B/Vhadarayaka, p. 948.
CHAPTER VI, 6. 187
(From the Brahman), the waters 1

(are produced) ; and
then from the waters, the gross body. In the space
within that 2 dwelt the two divine (principles).
,
Both
enveloping the quarters and sub-quarters, support
earth and heaven 3
. That eternal divine being is
perceived by devotees. The horse (-like senses) 4
lead towards heaven him, who is possessed of know-

ledge and divine, (who is) free from old age, and
who stands on the wheel of this chariot(-like body),
which is transient, but the operations of which are
imperishable 5
. That eternal divine being 6
is per-
ceived by devotees. His form has no parallel no 7
;
one sees him with the eye 8 Those who apprehend .
him by means of the understanding, and also the

mind and heart, become immortal 9 That eternal .
1
'The five elements/ says -Sahkara, cf. Aitareya, p. 189; and
;
for '
gross body,' the original is literally '
water ' see supra, p. 179,
note 6; and see, too, lyopanishad, p. n, and *SVeta\rvatara, p. 368,
for different but kindred meanings.
2
Viz. the lotus-like heart. Cf. iTMndogya, p. 528.
3
The two principles between them pervade the universe, the
individual self being connected with the material world, the other
with heaven; '
divine' is, literally,
(
the brilliant,' says ^Sankara, who
quotes Ka/â, p. 305, as a parallel for the whole passage.
4
Cf. Ka/â, p. in; Maitri, pp. 19-34; and Mahabharata Stri
Parvan, chap. VII, st. 13. Heaven = the Brahman here (see Brz'hada-
ra/zyaka, p. 876) ; divine = not vulgar, or unrefined-Sahkara, who
adds that though the senses generally lead one to sensuous objects,
they do not do so when under the guidance of true knowledge.
5
The body is done by the self while in
perishable, but action
the body leaves its effect.
6
To whom, namely, the man of knowledge goes, as before stated.
7
Cf. -SVetajvatara, p. 347.
8
Cf. Ka/â, p. 152, and comment there, where the eye is said to
stand for all the senses.
9
Ka//$a, p. 149; Svetajvatara, pp. 346-348, also p. 330 (should it
be manisha, there instead of manviyo ?). The meanings of the three
words are difficult to fix accurately. -Sankara varies in his interpre-
1 88 SANATSUGATIYA.
divine being is perceived by devotees. The cur-

rents of twelve collections \ supported by the Deity,
regulate the honey 2
; and those who follow after it
move about in (this) dangerous (world). That

3
eternal divine being is perceived by devotees.
The bee 4
drinks that accumulated honey for half
a month The Lord created the oblation for all
5
.
beings That eternal divine being is perceived by

6
.
devotees. Those who are devoid of wings 7 coming ,
tations. Probably the meaning he gives here is the best. Mind and
understanding have been explained at GM, p. 57. The heart is the
place within, where the self and it may be taken as indi-
is said to be,
cating the self, the meaning would then be a direct consciousness in
the self of its unity with the Supreme. See, too, Taitt. Ararc. p. 896.
1
The five organs of action, the five senses of perception, the
mind and understanding make the twelve.
2
Each current has its own honey regularly distributed to it
under the supervision of the Deity, the Supreme. Honey = material

enjoyment. Cf. Ka//fca, p. 126, where âhkara renders it by kar-
maphala, fruit of action/
'
3
Who supervises the distribution as stated. Cf Ved&nta-sutra
.
III, 2, 28-31.
4
Bhramara, which the commentators interpret to mean '
one
who is given to flying about the individual self/
5
I. e. in one life in respect of actions done in a previous life.
6
*Sarikara says this is in answer to a possible difficulty that
action performed here cannot have its fruit in the next world,
as the fruit is so far removed in time from the action. The
answer is, The Lord, the Supreme, can effect this, and taking his
existence into account there is no difficulty. Oblation = food, &c.,
*Sarikara. The meaning of the whole passage, which is not very
clear, seems to be that the Lord has arranged things so that each
being receives some of this honey, this food, which is the fruit
of his own action. Then the question arises, Do these beings
always continue taking the honey and '
migrating,' or are they
ever released ? That
answered by the following sentence.
is
7 (
The wings of knowledge,' says -Sahkara, citing a Brahma/za text,
'
those, verily, who have knowledge are possessed of wings, those
who are not possessed of knowledge are devoid of wings/
CHAPTER VI, IO. 189
to the Ai'vattha of golden leaves there become 1

,
possessed of wings, and away happily 2 That fly .
eternal divine being 3 is perceived by devotees.

The upward life-wind swallows up the downward
life-wind; the moon swallows up the upward life-
wind; the sun swallows up the moon 4 and another 5 ;
swallows up the sun. Moving about above the

waters, the supreme self 6 does not raise one leg 7
.
(Should he raise) that, which is always performing

8
sacrifices , there will be no death, no immortality 9
.
That eternal divine being 10

is perceived by devotees.
1
So, literally Sahkara explains golden to mean
;
'
'
'
beneficial
and pleasant/ by a somewhat fanciful derivation of the word
hira^ya. He refers to Gitd, p. in, about the leaves of the As-
vattha. Nilakaw/â takes the leaves to be son, wife, &c, which are
'
golden/ attractive at first sight. '
Coming to the A^vattha/ Sah-
kara says, means being born as a Brahmawa/ &c.
* '
Flying away'
= obtaining final emancipation.
The 'sehV are compared to birds in the famous passage at
2
Mu^daka, p. 306 (also Svetaxvatara, p. 337). See also Brzhada-

rawyaka, p. 499.
3
Knowledge of whom leads to flying away happily/ '
4
Cf. .Oandogya, p. 441. Sahkara says that the author here ex-
plains the yoga by which the Supreme is to be attained. As to the
life- winds, cf. Gita, p. 61. 'The moon/ says Sahkara/ means the
mind, and the sun the understanding, as they are the respective
deities of those organs' (cf. Br/hadarawyaka, pp. 52 1-542, and Aita-
reya, p. 187, where, however, the sun is said to appertain to the eye).
5
I. e. the Brahman ; the result is, one remains in the condition
of being identified with the Brahman.
6
Literally, flamingo.
Cf. Sveta\rvatara, pp. 332, 367; see also
p. 289 ; and the commentary on Svetawatara, p. 283.

Maitri, p. 99 ;
7
Viz. the individual self, Sahkara ; that is, as it were, the bond
of connexion between the Supreme and the world. Cf. Gita, p. 1 12.
8
This is the meaning, though the word in the original is RitVig,
which in the later literature only means priest.
9
As the whole of the material world is dissolved, when the
self is dissevered from the delusion which is the cause of it.
10
Viz. who moves about on the waters, as above stated.
1 90 SANATSUGATIYA.
The being which is the inner self, and which is of

the size of a thumb *, is always migrating in con-
sequence of the connexion with the subtle body 2 .
The deluded ones do not perceive that praiseworthy

lord, primeval and radiant, and possessed of creative
power 3 . That eternal divine being is perceived by
devotees. Leading mortals to destruction by their
own action 4
, they conceal themselves like serpents
in secret recesses 5
. The deluded men then become
more deluded 6
. The enjoyments afforded by them
cause delusion, and lead to worldly life 7
. That
8
eternal divine being is perceived by devotees.
This 9 seems to be common to all mankind
whether possessed of resources 10 or not possessed

of resources it is common to immortality and the
other n Those who are possessed (of them) 12 attain
.
there to the source of the honey 13 That eternal .
divine being is perceived by devotees. They go,

1
*Sveta\yvatara, pp. 330-355; Taitt. Ara/z. p. 858, and comments
there.
2
The organs or senses, mind, and under-
life-winds, the ten
standing. See the same word similarly interpreted at *Sveta\rvatara,
p. 306, and Sahkhya-sutra III, 9.
3
According to -Sahkara, he who makes the distinct entities, after
entering into them he alludes apparently to -Oandogya, p. 407.
;
4
Namely, that of giving the poison of sensuous objects.
5
I. e. the eye, ear, &c, like the holes of serpents.
6
can appreciate nought but those sensuous objects.
I. e.
7
One reading is, 'lead to danger' which means 'to = hell,'
according to Nilaka/â.
8
Scil. delusion about whom leads to '
danger ' or '
worldly life/
9
The quality of being one with the Brahman in essence.
10
Self-restraint, tranquillity, &c.
11
I. e. whether in the midst of worldly life, or in the state of
perfect emancipation.
12
spoken of before.
Viz. the resources
13
Viz. the supreme
Brahman. There *Sahkara takes '
' to mean ' in
the supreme abode of Vishmi/ See Introduction.
CHAPTER VI, 1 6. I9I
pervading both worlds by knowledge 1 Then the .
Agnihotra though not performed is (as good as)

performed 2 Your (knowledge) of the Brahman,
.
therefore, will not lead you to littleness 3 Know- .
ledge is (his) 4 name. To that the talented ones

attain. That eternal divine being is perceived by
devotees. The self of this description absorbing
the material cause becomes great. And the self
6
ofhim who understands that being is not degraded

here 6 That eternal divine being is perceived by
.
devotees. One should ever and always be doing

good. (There is) no death, whence (can there be)
immortality 7
? The real and the unreal have both
the same real (entity) as their basis. The source of
the existent and the non-existent is but one 8 . That
eternal divine being is perceived by devotees. The
1
-Sankara does not explain this. Nilaka^Ma says pervading =
fully understanding; both worlds = the self and the not-self. Is
the meaning something like that of the passage last cited by
*Sankara under Vedanta-sutra IV, 2, 14 ?
2
He obtains the fruit of it, *Sankara. See as to Agnihotra,
-Oandogya, p.381 seq. and Vedanta-sutra IV, 1,16.
;
3
I. e. this mortal world, as action &c. would do.
4
I. e. of one who understands himself to be the Brahman.
See Aitareya-upanishad, p. 246.
5
-Sarikara says, 'the cause in which all is absorbed.' Cf. a
similar, but not identical, meaning given to VaLrvanara at .Oan-
dogya, p. 264; and see Vedanta-sutra I, 2, 24. Becomes great=
becomes the Brahman, *Sankara.
6
Even in this body, Sarikara; degradation he takes to mean
departure from the body, citing Bnhadarawyaka, p. 540.
7
There is no worldly life with birth and death for one who does
good, and thinks his self to be the Brahman ; hence no emancipa-
tion from such life either.
8
The Brahman is the real, and on that the unreal material world
is imagined. Cf. Taittiriya, p. 97, and Ankara's comments there,
which are of use in understanding this passage.
192 SANATSUGATIYA.
being who is the inner self, and who is of the

size of a thumb, is not seen, being placed in the
heart 1
. He is unborn, is moving about day and
night, without sloth. Meditating on him, a wise
man remains placid 2
. That eternal divine being
is perceived by devotees. From him comes the
3
wind ; in him, likewise, is (everything) dissolved.
From him (come) the fire and the moon ; and from
4
him comes life . That is the support (of the uni-
verse) ; that is immortal ; that is all things per-
ceptible 5
; that isthe Brahman, that glory. From
that all entities were produced and ; in that (they)
are dissolved 6
. That eternal divine being is per-
ceived by devotees. (Brahman) sup- The brilliant
ports the two divine principles and the universe,
7
earth and heaven, and the quarters. He from whom

the rivers flow in (various) directions, from him were
created the great oceans 8 That eternal divine being .
is perceived by devotees. Should one fly, even after

furnishing oneself with thousands upon thousands
of wings, and even though one should have the
velocity of thought 9 one would never reach the ,
end of the (great) cause 10 That eternal divine .
1
Cf. Ka/â, pp. 130, 157 and Bn'hadarawyaka, p. 360.
;
2
Cf. veta,rvatara, p. 342; Ka/â, pp. 100, 107; Maitri, p. 134.
8
Cf. Taittiriya, p. 67 Ka/â, p. 146 ; Muwâka, p. 293.
;
4
Ka/#a, p. 298; Muâka, p. 288.
5 6
See p. 180, note 7. See p. 180 supra.
7 '
The and God/ say the commentators, the
individual soul,
latter being distinct from the supreme self. The universe/ says '
Nilakaw/â, means earth,' &c, by which I suppose he means earth,

'
heaven, quarters, mentioned directly afterwards.

8
Ka/$a, p. 293.
9
This figure is implied in the tyopanishad, p. 10.
10
'Therefore it is endless/ says Sankara; and as to this, cf.
Taittiriya, p. 51.
CHAPTER VI, 24. 193
being is perceived by devotees. His form dwells

in the unperceived 1
; and those whose understand-
ings are very well refined 2
perceive him. The
talented man who has got rid (of affection and
aversion) perceives (him) by the mind. Those who
understand him 3
become immortal. When one
sees this self in all beings stationed in various
what should one grieve for
places \ after that 5
?
The Brihmaâ has (as much interest) in all beings,

as in a big reservoir of water, to which waters flow
from all sides 6
. I alone am your mother 7
, father
1
'In a sphere beyond the reach of perception/ says *Sahkara,
who also quotes Ka/#a, p. 149, or *SVeta\yvatara, p. 347, where
the same line also occurs.
2
The original for understandings is sattva, which Sarikara
renders to mean anta^karaâ. '
Refined/ he says, 'by sacrifices
and other sanctifying operations/ In the Ka/â at p. 148 sattva is
rendered by *Sarikara to mean buddhi a common use of the word.
3

' As being/ says *Sankara, '
identical with themselves/ It will
be noted that the form of expression is slightly altered here. It
is not those who understand this.'

'
4
I.e. in different aggregates of body, senses, &c. Cf. Gita,
pp. 104 and 124; also .ATMndogya, pp. 475-551.
5
Cf. Brz'hadara/zyaka, p. 882 aSahkara also ; refers to Iropa-
nishad, p. 14.
6
The words are pretty nearly the same as at Gita, p. 48. *Sah-
kara says, the Brahma/za '
who has done all he need do ' has no
interest whatever in any being, as he has none in a big reservoir,
and he support of this.
cites Gita, p. 54, in One copy of *Sahkara,
however, from this ; that runs thus
differs As a person who has :
'
done all he need do, has no interest in a big reservoir of water, so

to a Brahma/za who sees the self in all beings, there is no interest
in all the actions laid down in the Vedas, &c. ; as he has obtained
everything by mere perception of the self/ Nilakaâ's reading is
exactly the same as at Gita, p. 48.

7
-Sankara says that Sanatsuguta states here his own experiences,
like Vamadeva (about whom there is a reference at Brzhadara/zyaka,
p. 216) and others, to corroborate what he has already said. Cf.
also Gita, p. 83, as to the whole passage.
[8] O
1 94 SANATSUGATIYA.
and I too am the son. And I am the self of all
this that which exists and that which does not

exist \ (I am) the aged grandfather of this, the
father, and the son, O descendant of Bharata
You dwell in my self only
2
. You are not mine,
nor I (yours). The self only is my seat 3
; the self
too is (the source of) my birth 4
. I am woven
through and through 5 (everything). And my seat
is free from (the attacks of) old 6
age I am .
unborn, moving about day and night, without

sloth. Knowing (me), verily, a wise man remains
placid 7
Minuter than an atom 8 possessed of a
.
,
good mind 9 I am stationed within all beings 10

, .
(The wise) know the father of all beings to be

placed in the lotus n (4ike heart of every one).
1
See Gita, p. 84. Nilaka^/â takes what exists to mean
'
present,' and what does not exist to mean '
past and future/ Cf.
TsfMndogya, p. 532.
2
See Gita, p. 82, where there is also a similar apparent contra-
diction.
8
Cf. JTMndogya, p. 518.
4
That is to say he is unborn,' says Nilaka/â. -Sarikara seems
'
to take my with seat only, and not with birth

' ' '
' for he says, ;
1
everything has its birth from the self/
5
Cf. Mundaka., p. 298; Maitri, p. 84, and comment there.
6
Cf. Gita, pp. 77, 109, and ^Mndogya, pp. 535, 550.
7
See p. 192, note 2.
8
Cf. Gita, p. 78, and note 3 there.
9
I.e. a mind free from affection and aversion, hatred, &c,
Sankara.
10
Cf. Gita, p. 113, and note 3; and also Iropanishad, p. 12.
11
.ATMndogya, p. 528; and cf. Gita, p. 113.
A N U GITA.
O 2
INTRODUCTION
TO
ANU Gf TA.
Like the BhagavadgM and the Sanatsuâttya, the Anu-
gita is one of the numerous episodes of the MahabMrata.
And like the Sanatsuâttya, it appears here for the first
time in an English, or, indeed, it is believed, in any European
garb. It forms part of the A^vamedha Parvan of the Maha-
bMrata, and is contained in thirty-six chapters of that

Parvan. These chapters being chapters XVI to LI toge-
ther with all the subsequent chapters of the A^vamedha
Parvan, form by themselves what in some of our copies is
called the AnugM Parvan-a title which affords a parallel
to the title Bhagavadgiti Parvan, which we have already
referred to. The AnugM is not now a work of any very
great or extensive reputation. But we do find some few
quotations from it in the Bhashyas of 5ankar&Mrya, and
one or two in the Sdnkhya-sara of Vi^nana Bhikshu, to which
reference will be made hereafter. And it is included in the
present volume, partly because it affords an interesting
glimpse of sundry old passages of the Upanishad literature
in a somewhat modified, and presumably later, form and ;
partly, perhaps I may say more especially, because it pro-

fesses to be a sort of continuation, or rather recapitulation,
of the Bhagavadgitl At the very outset of the work, we
war of the
read, that after the great fratricidal MaMbharata
was and the Paâvas had become sole and complete
over,
masters of their ancestral kingdom, Krishna, and Arûna
the two interlocutors in the Bhagavadgita happened to
take a together in the great magical palace built for
stroll
the P&âvas by the demon Maya. In the course of the

conversation which they held on the occasion, Krishna.
communicated to Arûna hiswish to return to his own
people at Dvaraka, now that the business which had called
I98 ANUGITA.
him away from them was happily terminated. Anuria, of

course, was unable to resist the execution of this wish but ;
he requested Kr/shâ, before leaving for Dvaraka, to repeat

the instruction which had been already conveyed to him on
'
the holy field of Kurukshetra,' but which had gone out of
his 'degenerate mind.' Krishna, thereupon protests that he
is not equal to a verbatim recapitulation of the Bhagavad-
gM, but agrees, in lieu of that, to impart to Ar^*una the
same instruction in other words, through the medium of
a certain 'ancient story' or puratana itihasa. And the
instruction thus conveyed constitutes what is called the
Anugita, a name which is in itself an embodiment of this
anecdote.
Now the first question which challenges investigation with
reference to this work is, if we may so call it, the funda-
mental one how much is properly included under the
name? The question is not one quite easy of settlement,
as our authorities upon it are not all reconcilable with one
another. In the general list of contents of the A^vamedha
Parvan, which is given at the end of that Parvan in the
edition printed at Bombay, we read that the first section
is the Vyclsa Vakya, the second the Samvartamaruttiya.
With neither of these have we aught to do here. The list
then goes on thus: ' AnugM, Visudevagamana, Brahmaâ

Gita, Gurujishyasawv&da, Uttankopakhy&na,' and so forth.
With the later sections, again, we are not here concerned.
Now let us compare this list may be
with the list which
obtained from the titles body of the
of the chapters in the
work itself. With the sixteenth chapter, then, of the Asva-
medha Parvan, begins what is here called the Anugita
Parvan and that chapter and the three following chapters
;
are described as the sixteenth, seventeenth, eighteenth, and

nineteenth chapters respectively of the Anugita Parvan,
which forms part of the A^vamedha Parvan. The title
of the twentieth chapter contains a small, but important,
addition. It runs thus, 'Such is the twentieth chapter
of the Anugita Parvan, forming part of the A^vamedha
Parvan being the Brahma Gita.' This form is con-
tinued down to the thirty-fourth chapter, only Brdhmaâ
INTRODUCTION. 1 99
Gita being substituted for Brahma Gita. At the close of the

thirty-fifth chapter, there is another alteration caused by
the substitution of Gunmshyasa^vada for Brahmaâ Gita
and this continues down to the fifty- first chapter, where the
thread of the narrative is again taken up the philosophical
parenthesis, if I may so say, having come to an end. With
the fifty-first chapter our present translation also ends. Now
it appears from the above comparison, that the list of con-
tents set out above is accurate, save in so far as it mentions
Vasudevagamana as a distinct section of the A^vamedha
Parvan. No such section seems to be in existence. And
there appears to be nothing in the A^vamedha Parvan to
which that title could be appropriately allotted. The
edition printed at Madras agrees in all essential particulars
with the Bombay edition ; with this difference, that even at

the close of the twentieth chapter, the name is Brahmaâ
Gita, and not Brahma Gita as it is in the Bombay edition.
The Calcutta edition also agrees in these readings. Turning
now to a MS. procured for me by my excellent friend Pro-
fessor Aba^-i at Ahmedabad, and bearing
Vishnu Kathava/e
date the 15th of Phalguna Vadya 1833, Sunday, we find
there at the end of the A^vamedha Parvan a list of contents
like that which we have seen in the printed edition. The
relevant portion of that list is as follows :
'
Samvartamarut-
Anugita, Guruiishyasa/^vada, and Uttankopakhyana.'
tiya,
Here we find neither the erroneous entry of Vasudevaga-
mana, nor the correct entry of Brahma Gita, which are both
contained in the other list. In another MS. which I have
now before me, and which has been lent me by Professor
Bha/zârkar, who purchased it in Pu/za for the Government

of Bombay in this MS., which contains the commentary of
Arûna MLrra, the earlier chapters are described not as
chapters of the Anugita Parvan, but of the Anugita con-
tained in the A^vamedha Parvan, and they
are numbered
there as they are numbered in our translation, not con-
tinuously with the numbering of the previous chapters of
the Ai*vamedha Parvan. At the close of chapter IV, we
have an explicit statement that the Anugita ends there.
Then the Brahma Gita begins. And the first chapter is
200 anug!tA.
described as a chapter of the Brahma Gita in the A.svamedha

Parvan. The numbering of each of these chapters of the
Brahma Gita is not given in the copy before us the titles
and descriptions of the various chapters being throughout
incomplete. Some of the later chapters are described as
chapters of the Brahma Gita, and some as chapters of the
Brahmaâ Gita ; but this discrepancy is probably to be put
to the account of the particular copyist who wrote out the
copy used by us. With what is chapter XX in our num-
bering the Guruîshyasa^vada begins. This MS. omits all
reference to any Anugita Parvan, and fails to number the
various chapters. Its list of sections agrees with that in the
Bombay edition. It bears no date.
So much for what may be described as our primary
sources of information on this subject. Let us now glance
at the secondary sources. And, first, Nilaka/â in com-
menting on what is, according to his numbering, chapter
XV, stanza 43, apparently distinguishes that chapter from
what he speaks of as the Brahma/za Gita and Gunmshya-
sawvada, which he implies follow after that chapter thus
indicating that he accepted in substance the tradition re-
corded in the passages we have already set forth, viz. that
the first four chapters of our translation form the Anugita,
the next fifteen the Brahmaâ Gita, and the last seventeen
the Gurujishyasa/^vada. This is also the view of Ar^*una
Mura. At the close of his gloss on chapter IV, he distinctly
states that the Anugita ends at that chapter and again at
;
the close of the gloss on chapter XIX, he explicitly says that

the Brahma/za Gita ends there. He also adds the following
interesting observation :The feminine form (Gita, namely)
'
is used in consequence of (the word) Upanishad being
feminine.' The full title of that part of the Mahabharata

would then be, according to this remark of Arûna MLsra,
'the Upanishads sung by the Brahma/za,' a title parallel
to that of the Bhagavadgita, the Upanishads sung by the
'
Deity.' It is to be further remarked, that the last chapter

of the Gurarishyasa/^vada is called in this commentary
the eighteenth chapter of the Guruîshyasa^zvada, a fact
which seems to indicate that Ar^*una Mura either found
INTRODUCTION. 201
in the MS. which he used, or himself established, a separate

1
numbering for the chapters in the several sections of which
the A^vamedha Parvan is made up.
Although the information here set out from these various
sources is not easily to be harmonised in all its parts, the
preponderance of testimony seems to be in favour of re-
garding the portion of the A^vamedha Parvan embraced in
our translation as containing three distinct sections, viz.
the Anugita, the Brahma/za Gita, and the Guruîshyasa^-

v&da. And some may be derived for this
indirect support
conclusion, from one or two other circumstances. In the
Sankhya-sara of Vig*nana Bhikshu a work which, as we
shall see in the sequel, expressly mentions the Anugita
we have a passage cited as from the Bharata 2 which ' '
coincides almost precisely with a passage occurring at

chapter XXVII of our translation (see p. 335). And in the
Bhashya of 6ankaraarya on the Bhagavadgita, chapter XV,
stanza1, we have a citation as from a Pura/za' of a passage'
which coincides pretty closely with one which occurs at

chapter XX of our translation (see p. 313). If the dis-
crepancies between the quotations as given by Vi^fiana
Bhikshu and .Sankara, and the passages occurring in our
text, may be treated merely as various readings and
there is nothing inherently improbable in this being the

case it may be fairly contended, that neither 5ankara nor
Vi^nana Bhikshu would have used the vague expressions,
6
a Pura/za,' or even the Bharata,' if they could have cor-
*
rectly substituted in lieu of them the specific name Anu-

gita. And this, it may be a contention of some
said, is
weight, when it is remembered, that both vSaiikara and
Vi^nana show, in other parts of their writings, an acquaint-

ance with this very Anugita. If this reasoning is correct,
1
In the beginning of his gloss on the Anugita he says, that it proposes to
explain difficult passages in the Anugita, &c.
Anugitadishu. And at the
outset of his gloss on the whole Parvan he says, that in the Anugita we have a
statement of the miseries of birth, &c. as a protest against worldly life in the ;
Brahma Gita we have a recommendation of Prarcayama, &c. ; and in the Guru-

sishyasaravada we have a eulogium on the perception of the self as distinct from
Prakn'ti or nature, and incidentally a protest against Pravntti or action.
2
P. 21.
202 ANUGITA.
it must be, that ^Sankara

the conclusion to be derived from
and Vi^nana must have considered the chapters of the
A^vamedha Parvan from which their respective quotations
are taken as not forming part of the Anugita.
The testimony we have thus collected is apparently of
considerable weight. Against weigh
it, however, we have to
some testimony which appears upon
to me to be entitled,
the whole, to even greater weight. In the Sankhya-sara
of Vi^n&na Bhikshu, to which we have already referred,
we have two quotations 1 from the Anugita which are
distinctly stated to be taken from that work. The first
occurs in our translation at p. 332, the second at p. 313.
Now, if we adopt the conclusion above referred to, regarding
the correct titles of the thirty-six chapters which we have
translated, it is a mistake to attribute the passages in ques-
tion to the Anugtta. They would, on that view, form part of
the Gurarishyasa^vada. Again, in his commentary on the
Sanatsuâtiya, Sahkara refers to sundry passages which he
expressly says are taken from the Anugita, but which are
not contained in the Anugita as limited by the evidence we
have considered above. One of the passages referred to is
taken from chapter XI of our translation, and others are con-
tained in the comments on Sanatsuâtiya I, 6, and on I, %o
and I, 41 2 It is difficult to resist the conclusion to which this
.
positive evidence leads. One cannot possibly explain this

evidence upon the view which we have first stated while, on ;
the other hand, the points which apparently support that

view are capable of some explanation on the theory that
the Anugita includes all the chapters here translated. And
that in this wise. The passages which we have referred
to as cited by 6ankara and Vi^nana from a Pura/za and
from the Bharata may have been actually taken from some
other work than the Anugita. Even waiving the fact that
the readings are different, though in regard especially to the
quotation given by .Sahkara it is not one to be entirely lost
sight of, there is this fact which is of great and almost
conclusive weight on such a point as this, namely, that we
1
Pp. 15, 21. The latter corresponds to tfankara's quotation above referred to.
2
See p. 206 note.
INTRODUCTION. 203
have many instances of passages common, almost verbatim

et literatim, to the Mahabharata and other works. For
one instance, take the very passage on which a chronolo-
gical argument has been founded by us in the Introduction
to the Sanatsuâttya \ It ought to have been there pointed
out, that the stanza about a young man being bound to
rise to receive an elderly person, also occurs in the Manu
Smrzti 2 in exactly the same words. The omission to note

this circumstance in its proper place in the Introduction
to the to a mere inadvertence.
S ana t subtly a was due
But the conclusion there hinted at was expressed in very
cautious language, and with many qualifications, out of re-
gard to circumstances such as those which we are now con-
sidering. Similar repetitions may be pointed out in other
places. The passage about the Kshetra^na and Sattva
and their mutual relations (see p. 374) occurs, as pointed
out in the note there, in at least two other places in the
MaMbMrata. The passage likewise which occurs at Gita,
5
p. 103, about the hands, feet, &c, on all sides, is one
'
which may be seen, to my own knowledge, in about half

a dozen places in the Mahabharata. Such cases, I believe,
may be easily multiplied and they illustrate and are illus-
;
trated by Mr. Freeman's proposition respecting the epic age

in Greece, to which we have already alluded. It follows,
consequently, that the quotations from 5ankara and
Vi^nana, to which we have referred above, do not militate
very strongly against the final conclusion at which we
have arrived. The testimony of the MSS. and the com-
mentators is, no doubt, of considerably greater force. But
Nilaka^/â, whatever his merits as an exegete and even
these are often marred by a persistent effort to read his
own foregone conclusions into the text he comments on
Nilaka^/â is but an indifferent authority in the domain
of historical criticism. In his commentary on the Sanatsu-
âtiya, for instance, he tells us that he has admitted into
his text sundry verses which were not in the copy used
by Sankara, and for which he had none but a very modern
voucher, and he very naively adds that he has done so
1
P. 139, and cf. p. 176 with Vishmi XXX, 44 seq.
2
See II, 120.
204 ANUGITA.
on the principle of collecting all good things to a focus.

Arûna MLsra is a very much more satisfactory com-
mentator. But he is not likely to be a writer of much
antiquity. I assume, that he must be more recent than
vSankaraârya, though I cannot say that I have any very
tenable ground for the assumption. But assuming that,
I think more it satisfactory to adopt 5ankaraarya's
nomenclature, and to treat the thirty-six chapters here
translated as constituting the Anugita. It is not impro-
bable, if our assumption is correct, that the division of the
thirty-six chapters in the manner we have seen may have
come into vogue after the date of Vi^nana Bhikshu, who,
according to Dr. F. E. Hall, lived in ' all probability in the
sixteenth or seventeenth century, and whom there is some
slight reason for carrying back still further V
Do these thirty-six chapters, then, form one integral
work ? Are they all the work of one and the same author ?
These are the questions which next present themselves for
consideration. The evidence bearing upon them, however,
is, as might be expected, excessively scanty. Of external
evidence, indeed, we have really none, barring vSankara's
statement in his commentary on the Bnhadara/zyaka-upa-
nishad 2 that the verse which he there quotes from the
Anugitcl has Vyasa for its author. That statement indi-
cates that vSankara accepted the current tradition of
Vyasa's authorship of the Anugita ; and such acceptance,
presumably, followed from his acceptance of the tradition
of Vyasa's authorship of the entire Mahabharata. If that
tradition and Vyasa is not the author of the
is incorrect,
Anugita, we have no means of ascertaining who is the
author. And as to the tradition in question, it is difficult,
in the present state of our materials, to form any satis-

factory judgment. We therefore proceed at once to
consider whether the Anugita is really one work. And
I must admit at the outset that I find it difficult to answer
this question. There are certainly some circumstances
connected with the work which might be regarded as indi-
1 2
See Preface, Sankhya-sara, p. 37. P. 234.
INTRODUCTION. 205
eating a different authorship of different parts of it. Thus

in an early portion of the work, we find the first personal
pronoun is used, where the Supreme Being is evidently
intended to be signified, and yet the passage is not put
into the mouth of Krishna, but of the Brahmaâ. similar A
passage occurs a little later on also. Now it must be taken
to be a somewhat strained interpretation of the words used
in the passages in question to suppose that the speaker
there used the first personal pronoun, identifying himself
for the nonce with the Supreme Being 1 Again, in a passage .
still further on, we have the vocative O Partha where the !
person addressed is not Ar^-una at all, but the Brahmaâ's

wife. Now these lapses are susceptible of two explana-
tions either we are to see in them so many cases of
*
Homer nodding,' or we may suppose that they are errors
occasioned by one writer making additions to the work of
a previous writer, without a vivid recollection of the frame-
work of the original composition into which his own work
had to be set 2 I own, that on balancing the probabilities
.
on the one side and the other, my mind rather leans to the
hypothesis of one author making a slip in the plexus of
his own story within story, rather than the hypothesis of
a deliberate interpolator forgetting the actual scheme of the
original work into which he was about to foist his own
additions 3 And this the rather, that we find a similar
.
sliptowards the very beginning of the work, where we

have the Brahma/za Klsyapa addressed as Parantapa, or
destroyer of foes an epithet which, I think, is exclusively
reserved for Kshatriyas, and any case, a very inap-
is, in
propriate one to apply to a humble seeker for spiritual
light. This slip appears to me to be incapable of explana-
tion on any theory of interpolation 4 And hence the other .
slips above noted can hardly be regarded as supporting

any such theory. Another circumstance, not indeed bearing
1
In fact the Brahmaraa is n o t identified with the Supreme Being afterwards.
But that fact has not much bearing on the question here.
2
Cf. Wilson's Dasakumaraarita, Introd. p. 22.
3
The third alternative, that a work independently written was afterwards
bodily thrown into the Mahabharata, is one which in the circumstances here
seems to me improbable. * See also
pp. 235, 252, 299.
206 ANUGITA.
out that theory, but rendering interpolations possible, de-

serves to be noted. The scheme of the Anugita certainly
lends itself to interpolations. A story might without much
difficulty be added to the series of story joined to story
which it contains. Against this, however, it must not
be forgotten, that the Santi Parvan of the Mahabharata
and the Yogavasishâ exhibit a precisely similar frame-
work of contents, and that the Panâtantra and the Katha-
saritsagara, among other works, follow the same model.
And from this fact it may be fairly argued, that while
there is, doubtless, room for suspecting interpolations in
such cases, there is this to be remembered, that with
respect to any particular one of these cases, such suspicion
can carry us but a very short way. And further, it is to
be observed, valeat quantum, that the connexion of the
several chapters of the Anugita one with the other is not
altogether a loose one, save at one or two points only,
while they are all linked on to the main body of the
narrative, only in what we have treated as the last chapter
of the Anugita, without any trace of any other connecting
link anywhere else. Upon the whole, therefore, we here
conclude, though not without doubt, that the whole of the
Anugita is the work of one author.
The next question to be discussed is the important one
of the age of the work. The quotations already given
above from vSankaraârya's works, and one other which
1
is referred to in the note below suffice to show that the
,
Anugita must have been some few centuries old in the

time of ,Sarikara/arya. For whether we treat the Anu-
gita as a part of the original Mahabharata or not, it is
not likely that such a scholar as 6ankara would have
accepted the book as a genuine part of the Mahabharata,
and as a work of Vyasa, if it had not been in his day of
some respectable antiquity, of antiquity sufficient to have
thrown the real author into oblivion, and to have substi-
1
See tfankara, ariraka Bhashya, p. 726. That, however, may be a quotation
from some other work. It may be noted that the passages quoted in the Bhashya
on Sanatsug-atiya I, 20 and I, 41 are not to be traced in our copies, though
expressly stated there to have been taken from the Anugita.
INTRODUCTION. 207
tuted in his place Vyasa, who lived at the junction of

the Dvapara and Kali ages 1 upwards of thirty centuries
,
before the Christian era. The calculation is avowedly a

very rough one, but I think we may, as the result of it,
safely fix the third century of the Christian era as the
which the Anugita can have been composed.
latest date at
Let us now endeavour to find out whether we can fix the
date as lying within any better defined period. It is
scarcely needful to say, that the Anugita dates from a

period considerably subsequent to the age of the Upani-
shads. The passages relating to the Praâsa/^vada and
so forth, which occur originally in the Upanishads, are
Anugita as 'ancient stories
referred to in the an indication
J

that the Upanishads had already come to be esteemed as
ancient compositions at the date of the latter work. It is
not necessary, therefore, to go through an elaborate exa-

mination of the versions of the ancient stories alluded
to above, as contained in the Upanishads and in the
Anugita, more especially because it is possible for us to
show that the Anugita is later than the Bhagavadgita,
which latter work, as we have seen, is later than the Upa-
nishads. And to this point we shall now address ourselves.
We have already observed upon the story referred to at
the opening of this Introduction, which, historically inter-
preted, indicates the priority of the Bhagavadgita to the
Anugita. This conclusion is confirmed by sundry other
circumstances, which we must now discuss in some detail,
as they are also of use in helping to fix the position of the

work in the history of Sanskrit literatureand philosophy.
First, then, seems to me, that the state of society mirrored
it
in the Anugitd indicates a greater advance in social evolu-

tion than we have already seen is disclosed in the Bhaga-
vadgita. Not to mention decorations of houses and so
forth, which are alluded to in one passage of the Anugita,
we are here told of royal oppressions, of losses of wealth
accumulated with great difficulty, and of fierce captivities ;
we are told, to adapt the language of a modern English

poet, of laws grinding the weak, for strong men rule the
1
Cf. Sariraka Bhashya, p. 913.
208 anug!t1.
law; we have references to the casting of images with

liquefied iron,and to the use of elephants as vehicles 1 ;
and we meet with protests against the amusements of music

and dancing, and against the occupation of artisans 2 True .
it is, that all these indications put together, fail to constitute

what, according to the standard of modern times, would be
called a highly artificial state of society. But it seems to
me to mark a very perceptibleand distinct advance beyond
the social condition in which mankind was divided into four
castes or classes, with such a division of duties, to put it
briefly, as that of preparation for a future world, govern-

ment of this world, agriculture and trade, and service re-
3
spectively . Artisans, it will be observed, are not even
referred to in the Bhagavadgtta, nor is there any trace of
royal oppressions, or unequal laws. Then as regards
music, it may be noted, that there are references to it in
the Brzhadara^yaka and Kaushitaki-upanishads 4 without ,
any indications of disapprobation. The protest against

music, therefore, and the sister art of dancing, is probably
to be explained as evoked by some abuses of the two arts
which must have come into prevalence about the time of
the composition of the Anugtta. similar protest is foundA
recorded in the Dharmaâstras of Manu and Apastamba
and Gautama 5 We shall consider in the sequel the chrono-
.
logical positions of the Anugtta with reference to those

Dharmaâstras. But we have already pointed out that the
Gita stands prior to them both 6 .
Look again at the views on caste which are embodied

in the Anugita and the Bhagavadgtta respectively. The
reference to the Kshatriya as representing the quality of
passion, while the Brahmaâ represents the quality of good-
ness 7 seems to place a considerably larger distance between
,
the Brahmaâ and the Kshatriya than is suggested by the

Bhagavadgtta, and thus marks an advance in the direction
of the later doctrine on the subject. And in connexion
1 2 s
Cf. Lalita Vistara, p. 17. See pp. 325-365. See Gita, p. 126.
4
See BWhadararcyaka, p. 454, and Kaushitaki, p. 68.
5
See Buhler's Apastamba 1, 1, 3, 11, Gautama II, 13, and Manu II, 178.
6 7
P. 21 seq. P. 329.
INTRODUCTION. 209
with this, perhaps, the discrepancy between the reading of

the Bhagavadgita at p. 85, and that of the Anugita at p. 255,
is not entirely without significance, though much weight
would not be due to it, if it stood alone. The expression

'devoted royal sages,' which we find in the one work,
makes way for '
well-read Kshatriyas who are intent on
their own duties ' in the other. Again, although the pas-
sage at p. 353 undoubtedly susceptible of a different
is
interpretation, seems to me, that the word twice-born

it '
there employed, was meant to be interpreted as meaning

the Brahma/zas, and not the three twice-born castes and ;
if this interpretation is correct, we have here the very

proposition upon the absence of which in the Bhagavad-
gita we have already made some observations 1 . That
twice-born in the passage in question means Brahma/za
only, is, of course, not a proved fact.
But having regard
to the passages noted above and to the passage at p. 320,
where reference is made to disparagement of Brahmaâs
it is not twice-born there
and in the same clause with
disparagement of gods and Vedas, it seems to me that the
interpretation we have suggested must be taken to be the
true one. And it is to be further noted, that this conclusion
is corroborated by a comparison of the passage now under
consideration with a passage occurring in the vSanti Parvan 2 ,
in the Raâdharma section of it, where we read that ' the

cow is first among quadrupeds, gold among metals,
the
a mantra among words, and the Brahmaâ is the first
among bipeds.' The cow and gold occur in the passage
in the Anugita also, very near the clause we are now dis-
cussing. And it is allowable to argue, that reading the
two together, twice-born in the Anugita must be inter-
preted to be synonymous with Brahma/za in the Raâ-
dharma. And the same conclusion is, to my mind, confirmed
indirectly by comparing the clause ' the twice-born among
men' of the Anugita with 'the ruler of men among men*
of that Bhagavadgita, the teaching of which the former
work professes to recapitulate.
1 2
P. 24 suprar See note at p. 353.
[8] P
2IO ANUGITA.
A similar inference seems to be derivable from a com-

parison of the specific doctrines as to the duties of Brah-
ma/zas which are enunciated in the Gita and the Anugita.
In the latter work, the famous six duties are expressly-
mentioned. We
have already argued in our Introduction
to the Gita, that a comparison of the teaching of that work
upon this point with the teaching of Apastamba and Manu
shows the former to have been older than the latter. The
six duties mentioned in the Anugita are those also mentioned
by Manu and Apastamba. It follows, therefore, that the
Gita is prior to the Anugita also. Whether the Anugita is
prior or subsequent to Manu and Apastamba, is a question
which will have to be discussed in the sequel.
The net result of the whole of this comparison appears to
me to clearly show the Anugita to be a work of considerably
more recent date than the Bhagavadgita. What interval
of time lay between the two, is a most interesting, but also
a most difficult, question. The differences we have noted

appear to me to indicate a pretty wide interval. If I am
right in regarding the Gita as a work of what may be called,
for practical purposes, the age of the older Upanishads, I
am inclined to think that the interval between the Gita and
the Anugiti must have been one of larger extent than even
three or four centuries. For as we have already pointed
out, the description of the various 'Itihasas' mentioned in

the Anugita as 'pur&tana' ancient points to at least
three or four centuries having elapsed between the close of
the Upanishad period and the composition of the Anugita.
It is obvious, however, that this result
is not one with
which we can rest satisfied. Evenwere more precise

if it
and accurate, it would only fix the age of the Anugita
with reference to the age of another work itself of unknown

and unascertained date. We must therefore endeavour to
compare the Anugita with some other work, the date of
which is better known. For this purpose, it seems to be not
of any great use to refer to the Sankhya and Yoga-sutras,
although it is not improbable that some materials might be
forthcoming for a useful comparison between them and the
Anugita. Neither the Sankhya nor the Yoga-sutras can
INTRODUCTION. 211
be said to have their ages fixed with even any approach to

accuracy. And in the case of the Sankhya-sutras, there is
the further difficulty presented by the circumstance, that

there is room for very serious doubts as to whether the
current Sutras are really of the authorship of Kapila, or
whoever else was the original founder of the system. With
regard to the Yoga, one or two observations from a different
point of view may not, however, be entirely out of place.
At p. 348 the Yoga 6astra is referred to eo nomine. What
vSastra is here alluded to ? Is it Patanâli's, or some other
vSastra dealing with similar topics? Or, again, is it an
entirely different matter that is alluded to, and are we not
to see in the expression in question an allusion to any sys-
tem formally propounded ? I own, as stated in the note on
the passage, that my mind inclines to the last view. There
is not very much on either side of the question, as
to say
far as I am able to understand it. But the view I incline to
appears to have one small circumstance in its favour. At
p. 349 we have an allusion to persons who understand the
Yoga, and to a certain illustration propounded by them.
Now who are these persons? My limited knowledge of
Yoga literature has not enabled me to trace the illustration
anywhere else than in the Ka/ôpanishad, and in the Sanat-
su^-atiya. seems to me very unlikely, that the illustration
It
can have been put forward in any work older than the
Ka//fc>panishad. And we may, I think, assume it as most
probable that the Sanatsuâtiya borrowed it from that work.
If so, it is not likely that the Anugita can have referred to
any other master of the Yoga than the author of the Ka//o-
panishad. And then it would seem to follow, that the
Anugita must have been composed at a time when, although
the Upanishads were looked on with reverence and as works
of authority, they were not yet regarded as part and parcel of
the Vedic revelation 1 . It is impossible not to perceive, that
the train of reasoning here at every stage hedged round
is
with and doubts. And the inference therefore to

difficulties
which we are led by it must be accepted with proportionate

1
This seems to be also the implication of the passage at p. 309, where the
rules for final emancipation are alluded to.
P 2
212 ANUGf TA.
caution. But
the reasoning is correct, it seems to be
if
certain, that theAnugita belongs to some period prior to the

second, and probable, that it belongs to some period prior
to the third century, before Christ. For in the second cen-
tury before Christ was composed the Mahabhashya of

Patanâli, in which Rahasyas which is another name for

Upanishads are mentioned as forming part of the Vedic
literature. And in Apastamba's Dharma-sutras, which are
older than Patanâli, Upanishads 1 are mentioned in the
same way. I am aware that it may be said, that because
Upanishads as a class of works are mentioned by Patafiâli
and Apastamba, it does not follow that any particular Upa-
nishad, such as the Ka/â, for instance, also existed at that
time. This is quite true. But without going now into the
general question, it is sufficient to point out, that our argu-
ment here is concerned merely with the recognition of the
Upanishads as a class of works forming part of the Vedic
canon. Such recognition must have come later than the
period at which the Anugita could speak of a passage in
the Ka/â-upanishad as the utterance of Yogavids, or
personswho understood the Yoga.
Turning now to the materials available for ascertaining
the relative chronological positions of the Anugita and
the rise of Buddhism, we have again to complain of their
unsatisfactory character. We will briefly note the two or
three circumstances which appear to have a bearing upon
this question. In the first place, we have the word Nir-
vana used in one passage of the Anugita in the sense of
the highest tranquillity, and there the simile of the ex-
tinction of the fire is expressly adduced. On this it may
be argued, that if the term Nirvana had become the well-
understood property of Buddhism, such a use of it as we
find here would probably not have occurred. Again, we
have the injunction that an ascetic must dwell in a
town only for one day and no more, while he may stay
at one place during the rains. This is very similar to an
injunction prescribed by the Buddhistic teachers also. But
1
They are also referred to in the Buddhistic Lalita Vistara, p. 65.
INTRODUCTION. 213
this fact furnishes, I think, no safe ground for a chronolo-

gical inference, more especially because, as pointed out by
Dr. Blihler, the Buddhistic injunction is itself only borrowed
from the Brahminical rules on the subject 1 It is impos- .
sible, therefore, to say that the Anugita borrowed its
doctrine from Buddhism. It is, of course, equally impos-

sible on the other hand to say, that Buddhism borrowed
its rule from the Anugita. And, therefore, we can build
no safe inference upon this fact either. We have next the
very remarkable passage at chapter XXXIV, where various
contradictory and mutually exclusive views of piety are
stated, or rather passingly and briefly indicated a passage
which one most devoutly wishes had been clearer than it
is. In that passage I can find no reference to Buddhism.
True it is that Nilaka/zâ's commentary refers some of
the doctrines there stated to Buddhistic schools 2 . But that
commentary, unsatisfactory enough in other places, is par-
ticularly unsatisfactory here. And its critical accuracy
may be judged from its reference to Saugatas and Yoga-
Mras apparently as two distinct schools, whereas in truth
the Saugatas are Buddhists, and Yogaâras one of the
four principal Buddhist sects. And it must be further
remembered, that the interpretations of Nilaka^â, upon
which his specifications of the different schools are based,
are by no means such as necessarily claim acceptance. If
then we do not find any reference to Buddhism in this
passage, that fact becomes certainly a remarkable one.
Still, on the other hand, I am not prepared to apply the
'
negative argument here, and to say that inasmuch as
'
Buddhism is not referred to where so many different

opinions are referred to, Buddhism cannot have come
into existence at the date of the Anugita. It seems to
me that the argument will here be a very hazardous one,
because if the author of the Anugita was, as we may assume
he was, an orthodox Hindu, he might well have declined,
although not unacquainted with Buddhism, to put into
the mouths of the seven sages even as a possible view, that
1
See Gautama, pp. lv and 191. 2
See also the gloss on chap. XXXIV, st. 14.
214 ANUGITA.
which was the view of a school esteemed heretical by the

author and his co-religionists. This passage, therefore,
also fails to furnish any tangible ground for a chronological
inference, at all events in the present state of our knowledge.
Lastly, we come to the allusion to those who indulge in con-
stant talk in disparagement of Vedasand Brahmaâs, the two
being thus bracketed together in the original. That seems,
at the first blush, to be a somewhat more distinct allusion
to Buddhism than any of those we have noted above. But
even that is not unambiguous. If the stanzas quoted by Ma-
dhava/arya, in his Sarvadarânasahgraha in its first section,
are the composition of the original founder of the iTarvaka

school, or even if they correctly represent the earliest
opinions of that school, it is at least quite as likely that
the iTarvikas were the target for the denunciations of
the Anugita in the passage in question as that the
Buddhists were so. To me, indeed, it appears to be more
likely. For Buddha's opinion with regard to the Vedas
is, that they are inadequate with regard to the Brahmaâs,
;
that they are in no sense the chosen of God as they claim

to be. The opinion of the .AT&rvakas, on the other hand, is a
far more aggressive one, so to say. According to Madha-
vârya, they taught that the Vedas were either simple
fatuity or imposture, and that the Brahma/zas were im-
postors. It seems to me much more likely, that this,
which I have called a comparatively aggressive attitude, was
the one at which the remarks of the Anugita were levelled
and more especially does this appear to be correct when
we remember, that the view taught by Gautama Buddha
regarding the Vedas and the Brahmaâs was propounded
by him only in its strongest form and that even before
;
his time, the doctrine of the inadequacy of the Vedas for the
purpose of securing the summum bonum of humanity
had been taught by other teachers. It is further to be
recollected, that we have evidence showing that other
thinkers also than Buddha, or Br/haspati, had in early
days attacked the authority of the Vedas. Kautsa is the
name of one who was probably the most distinguished
among them. It is certainly possible that his followers
INTRODUCTION. 21
were the people branded as of the dark quality by the

c
'
Anugita in the passage in question. We have, therefore,

at least two different recognised bodies of thinkers, and
one individual thinker, to whom the words under dis-
cussion may apply, and it is plainly unsafe, under these
circumstances, to draw any chronological inference based
on the hypothesis of one particular body out of those
three being the one intended by the author. Before
closing this part of the investigation, it may be interesting
to note, that the phrase turning the wheel/ a phrase now
'
so familiar to us as one of the household words of Buddhism,

is used in the Anugita with respect to King (kanaka. I do
not think, however, that either alone, or even coupled with

the word Nirvana, that phrase can be made the basis of any
legitimate deduction in favour of the priority of the Anugita
to Buddhism. At the outside, the only deduction admissible,
ifany deduction were admissible, would be, that the Anu-
gita was composed prior to the recognition, of Nirvana and
iTakrapravartana as specially Buddhistic words. But
priority to such recognition is not, I apprehend, necessarily
synonymous with priority to the rise of Buddhism.
The net result of this part of the investigation appears
to be, that we have pretty strong grounds for holding the
Anugita to belong to a period very considerably removed
from the period of the Upanishads and the Bhagavadgita
but that we have no tangible grounds on which to base any
deduction regarding its priority or otherwise to the Sankhya
and Yoga systems of philosophy, or to the great movement
of Gautama Buddha. There is only one other point, which
we can establish in a not entirely unsatisfactory way, and
which enables us to draw closer the limits within which the
Anugita must have been composed. That point is the
position of the Anugita with reference to Apastamba's
Dharma-sutra. I need not say again, that I accept here
the proposition about the age of Apastamba which has been
laid down by Dr. Blihler, as a sufficiently satisfactory work-
ing hypothesis. And accepting that proposition, I venture
to suggest the fourth century B.C. as a not unlikely date
for the Anugita. It appears to me, that a comparison of
2l6 ANUGITA.
the Anugita and the rules of Apastamba upon one impor-

tant point which they both deal with shows the priority of
the former work. I allude to the rules and regulations
touching the four A-sramas or orders contained in the Anu-
gita and in the Dharma-sutra of Apastamba. One circum-
stance strikes us at once on comparing the two works on
this point. Apastamba goes into a very great deal of
minute details more than the Anugita, although the latter
work does not deal with the topic in any very summary
mode. Taking all the differences between the two works
together, and the fact that the Anugita sets about the dis-
cussion of the topic in a manner which seems intended to
be not, indeed, absolutely exhaustive, but still very full,
I am very strongly inclined to attribute the differences to

an actual development and progress of doctrine. I will
endeavour to illustrate this view by means of a few detailed
instances 1 . And let us first take the order of householders
to which the Anugita gives precedence over the others.
One of the injunctions laid down by the Anugita is that the
householder should always be devoted to his wife. Against
this simple precept, we have a very minute series of rules
prescribed by Apastamba, which it is not necessary to refer
to specifically, but which may be seen in several of the
Sutras contained in the first Kha/zâ of the first Pa/ala of
the second Pra^na. Compare again the excessive minute-
ness of the rules regarding the Bali-ofifering or the reception
of guests, as given by Apastamba, with the simple statement
of the Anugita that the five great sacrifices should be per-
formed. There again, I think, we are to see in this difference
of treatment the result of a pretty long course of ceremonial
progress. Proceeding to the rules regarding the Brahma-
arin or student, an analogous phenomenon meets us there.
Taking first the subject of food, we have a considerable
number of detailed injunctions in Apastamba, compared with
the simple rule of the Anugita, that the student should, with
the leave of his preceptor, eat his food without decrying it.
Again with regard to alms, whereas the Anugita simply
1
Cf. pp. 358, 360 infra with Apastamba, pp. 9 seq., 103 seq., 114 seq.
INTRODUCTION. 21
says that the student should take his food out of the alms
received by him, Apastamba has an elaborate catena of
rules as to how the alms are to be collected, and from whom,
and so forth. Take again the provisions in the two works
regarding the description of the cloth, staff, and girdle of the
student. Apastamba refers to various opinions on this
subject, of which there is not even a trace in the Anugita 1 .
It appears that even before Apastamba's time, distinctions

had been laid down as to the description of girdle staff and
cloth to be used by the different castes
distinctions of which
there is no hint in the Anugita, where all students, of what-
ever caste, are spoken of under the generic name. These
distinctions appear to me to point very strongly to that
ceremonial and doctrinal progress of which we have spoken
above. The tendency is visible in them to sever the Brah-
ma/zas from the other castes by external marks. And that
tendency, seems to me, must have set in, as the merits
it
which had given the Brahma/za caste its original position at

the head of Hindu society were ceasing to be a living reality,
and that caste was intrenching itself, so to say, more behind
the worth and work of the early founders of its greatness, than
the worth and work of their degenerating representatives.
These comparisons, taken together, appear to me to warrant
the proposition we have already laid down with regard to
the priority of the Anugita to Apastamba. If we have not
referred to the rules relating to the two other orders of
forester and ascetic, it is because the scope for a comparison
of those is very limited. Those rules alone would scarcely
authorise the inference drawn above but I can perceive
;
nothing in them to countervail the effect of the comparisons

already made. And it must be remembered, that the rules
as to foresters and ascetics would be less apt to undergo
change than those as to students and householders.
It appears to me that the view we have now expressed
may be also supported by a comparison of the doctrines of
the Anugita and Apastamba touching the duties of Brah-
maâs. According to Apastamba, the occupations lawful
Cf. also Biihler's Gautama, p. 175.

218 anug!tA.
to Brahma/zas are the famous six referred to in our Intro-

duction to the Bhagavadgtta, and two others superadded,
namely, inheritance and gleaning corn in the fields. These
last not mentioned in the Anugita, or in Manu
are
either,and are, even according to Apastamba, common to
Brahmaâs with Kshatriyas and Vauyas. But as regards
the six above referred to, it is worthy of note, that the
Anugita apparently groups them into two distinct sets of
three. The first set of three consists of those which, in our
Introduction to the Bhagavadgtta, we have characterised as
constituting rather the rights than the duties of Brahmaâs,
and which the Anugita describes as means of livelihood for '
Brahma/zas.' The other set of three consists of real duties, and

these the AnugM speaks of as 'pious duties/ This grouping
appears to me to furnish powerful corroboration of the view
put forward in our Introduction to the Bhagavadgtta. It
would seem, that the possession of the moral and spiritual
merits which, according to the Gtta, constituted the duty of
Brahmaâs, in the simple and archaic society there disclosed,
was developed, a more advanced and artificial state of
in
society, into theperformance of the 'pious duties' of the Anu-
gita and the duties which are the means of livelihood. Then
5
'
in the further social evolution, in the course of which the old

spiritual view began to be forgotten, and the actual facts of
the past began to be transmuted into the dogmatic rules of
the future, the occupations of receiving presents, imparting
instruction, and officiating at sacrifices, became the special
occupations of the Brahma/zas, and the distinction between
these occupations from their higher duties was thrown into
the background and accordingly we find no allusion to any
;
such distinction in Apastamba or Manu, or, as far as I know,

in any other later embodiment of the current ideas on the
subject 1 . If all this has been correctly argued, the conclusion
derivable from it is in entire accord with that which we have
already drawn, namely, that the Bhagavadgtta, the Anugita,
and the Dharma-sutra of Apastamba, belong to different
1
In Gautama X, 1-3, the '
pious duties ' are called '
obligatory,' the others
' additional for Brahmaraas.' See the note on the passage in Biihler's edition,
and cf. Gautama VIII, 9, 10.
INTRODUCTION. 219
stages of ancient Indian history, and that the stage to

which the Gita belongs is the earliest, and that to which
Apastamba belongs, the latest of such stages.
I am unable to find anything else in the way of internal
evidence bearing upon the date of the Anugita. It appears
to me, that the date to which the investigation we have
now gone through leads us, is one which, in the present
state of our information, may be fairly accepted as a pro-
visional hypothesis. It does not appear to me to conflict
with any ascertained dates, while it is pointed to as pro-
bable by the various lines of testimony which we have here
considered. We now proceed to discuss one or two other
points which may have a bearing upon this topic, but which
at present cannot yield us any positive guidance in our
search for the date of the Anugita. And first among these,
let us consider the various names of deities that occur
in different parts of the work. We have, then, Vish/zu,
vSambhu, Gishnu, Soma, Aditya, Mitra, Agnij
Surya,
iTandra, Rudra, .Siva, Varuâ, Praâpati, Maghavat,
Purandara, Indra, Brahman, 6atakratu, Dharma, Narayaâ,
Vayu, Yama, Tvash^W, Hari, t^vara, and lastly Uma under
three different names, namely, Uma, Mahe^vari, and Par-
vati. Now, leaving aside for the moment the three names
of Uma, which appear from the passage where they are
used to be all three the names of the same goddess, there
isno doubt that in the list above set out, some of the names
are merely used in different passages, but still to indicate
the same being. Thus, Indra, vSatakratu, Purandara, and
Maghavat are really the names of one and the same deity.
But when Soma is mentioned as the deity presiding over
the tongue, and iTandramas as the deity presiding over
the mind, it becomes doubtful whether the two names
do really indicate the same deity, albeit in later Sanskrit
Soma and iTandramas both signify the moon. Similarly,
when Arka is said to be the deity presiding over the eye,
and Mitra over another organ, it seems open to question
whether Arka and Mitra both signify the sun there, as
they undoubtedly do in classical Sanskrit. True it is, that
even in such a recent work as the Sankhya-sara, this mention
2 20 ANUGITA.
of Arka and Mitra as presiding deities of two several

organs does occur. But it is plain, that that circumstance
can have no bearing on the inquiry before us, for the
Sankhya-sara is avowedly a compilation based on older
authorities, and in the particular part under consideration,
really reproduces a passage from some older work. It can-
not, therefore, be argued, that because Arka and Mitra were
identified withone another at the time of the Sankhya-sara,
and yet are mentioned as deities of two separate organs,
therefore, they must have also been regarded as one in
the older original work where they are also mentioned as
deities of two separate organs. And it may, perhaps, be
remarked here in passing, that the Vedanta Paribhasha has
Mrztyu instead of Mitra, which would get rid of the diffi-
culty here altogether while as regards Soma and iTandra-
;
mas, the passage in the Sankhya-sara reads Praêtas instead

of Soma, which would get rid of the other difficulty above
pointed out. Whether these discrepancies are owing to any
tampering with the and deities, at a time
lists of organs
when the between different deities took
later identifications
place, or whether they are to be explained on some other
theory, it is impossible at present to say. And, therefore,
it is also unnecessary to pursue the inquiry here any further.
It must suffice for the present to have drawn attention to
the matter.
Akin to this point, though quite distinct from it, is one
which arises on a passage where the emancipated being

is identified with Vishnu, Mitra, Agni, Varuâ, and Praâ-
pati 1 . Now it is reasonable to suppose, that the deities thus
must have been among those held in highest
specified here
repute at the time, the whole significance of the passage
where they are mentioned requiring that that should be
so. But
in our Pantheon as disclosed by our later litera-
ture,Mitra and Agni and Varu/za occupy but a very sub-
ordinate position. Even in Kalidasa 2 the subordination ,
of these deities to our celebrated Trinity seems to be quite

1
See p. 345.
2
See inter alia, Kumara II, 20 seq., and VII, 44 seq., and cf. our Bhartnhari
(Bombay Sanskrit Classics), Introd. p. xix.
INTRODUCTION. 221
fully established. But, on the other hand, in the Vedic

theogony, they are among the most prominent deities. In
the Taittiriya-upanishad, we have in the very first sentence
Mitra, Varu/za, Vishnu, and Brahman (who may be iden-
tified all mentioned together, and their
with Praâpati)
blessings invoked. This does not help in fixing a date for
the Anugita but it lends some support to the conclusion
;
already arrived at on that point, by showing that the

theogony of the Anugita is not yet very far removed from
the theogony of the Vedic times, while it is separated by
a considerable interval from the theogony disclosed in the
works of even such an early writer of the classical period
as Kalidasa.
Another point of similar bearing on our present investi-
gation is the mode in which the story of Paraûrama is
dealt with in the Anugita. There is in the first place no

allusion to his being an incarnation of Vishnu, nor to the
encounter between him and his namesake, the son of
Dai-aratha and the hero of the Rdmayaâ. We have, on
the contrary, an explicit statement, that after the advice
of the Pitrzs he entirely abandons the slaughter of the
'
'
Kshatriyas, and resorting to penance thereby achieves

final emancipation. We have elsewhere argued 1} that the
theory of Parai-urama being an incarnation of Vishnu, must
have probably originated prior to the time of Bhartrzhari,
but later than the time of Kalidasa. The allusion to
Paraûrama in the work before us does not, however, enable
us to judge of its chronological position with reference to
Kalidasa. But the last point discussed renders it unnecessary
to consider this question further. It may be noted, by the
way, that the Anugita represents Paraûrama, although
living in the Aj-rama or hermitage of his father, who was a
Rzshi, as mounting a chariot for the purpose of sweeping
away the kinsmen Whence he obtained a
of Kartavirya.
Anugita does not explain.
chariot in a hermitage, the
In connexion with the episode of Paraûrama, may be
noted the list which occurs in the course of it, of the
1
See 'Was the Ramayawa copied from Homer V pp. 56, 57.
22 2 ANUg!tA.
degraded Kshatriya tribes, of Dravk/as, 6abaras, &c. I am

unable to see that those names can give us any further
help in our present investigation than in so far as they
show that, at the time of the Anugita, there must have
been some information about the south of India available
in the districts where the author of the Anugita lived.
Some of the tribes mentioned appear to have been located
far in the south of the Indian peninsula. But this is a
point on which we shall have to say something more in
discussing the next item of internal evidence to which we
shall refer. Here it is enough to point out that some of
the tribes mentioned in the Anugita are also referred to
in no less a work than the Aitareya-brahmaâ 1 .
We come next to the enumeration of the principal

mountains which is contained in one passage of the Anu-
gita. Those mountains are the Himalaya, the Pariyatra,
the Sahya, the Vindhya, the Trikuâvat, the Sveta, the
Nila, the Bhasa, the Koshâvat, the Mahendra, the Malya-
vat, and perhaps the Guruskandha. I am not sure whether
the last name is intended to be taken as a proper name,
or only as an epithet of Mahendra. Now compared with
the mountains mentioned in the Bhagavadgita, this is cer-
tainly a remarkable list. The Gita mentions only Meru 2
and Himalaya; while here we have in the Anugita the
Sahya, and Malaya, and Triku/avat, and Nila (the same, I
presume, with the modern Nilgiri, the Sanatarium of the
Madras Presidency), which take us far to the west and
south of the Indian peninsula; and the Mahendra and
Malyavat, which, coupled with the mention of the river
Ganges, cover a considerable part of the eastern districts.
The Pariyatra and Vindhya occupy the regions of Central
India. The Anugita, therefore, seems to belong to that
period in the history of India, when pretty nearly the whole,
1
Haug's ed., p. 183. And see generally on these tribes, Wils on' s Vishmi Purarca
(Hall's ed.), vol. ii, p. i7oseq., and .Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 207, st.42.
2
This is also mentioned in the Anugita, but in a different passage. The Nila
is said by Professor Wilson to be a
mountain in Orissa. But our suggestion has,
I find, been already made by Dr. F. E. Hall also see on this, and generally,
;
Wilsons Vish/ra Puraâ, vol. ii, p. 141 seq. (ed. Hall). See also Indian
Antiquary, VI, 133 seq.
INTRODUCTION. 223
if not absolutely the whole, of the Indian continent was

known to the Sanskrit-speaking population of the country.
When was knowledge reached? It is difficult to fix
this
the precise period and even if it could be fixed, it would
;
not help us to fix satisfactorily any point of time to which

the Anugita could be attributed. But it may be pointed
out here, that in Patafiâli's Mahabhashya we have evidence
of such knowledge having been possessed by the Aryas in
the second century B.C. In truth, the evidence available
in the Mahabhashya is even fuller than this in the Anu-
gita. For Patanâli tells us of a town or city in the south
named Kanîpura 1 he speaks of the dominions of the
;
Pa^ya kings, and of the Kola, and Kerala districts 2 ;
he refers also to the large tanks of the south and he ;
makes allusions to linguistic usages current in the southern

and other provinces 3 Before Patafiâli's time there
.
had taken place Mahendra's invasion of Ceylon, and the

invading army must have penetrated through the southern
provinces. And there had been also put up the great
Inscriptions of Aôka, which have attracted so much in-
terest, and are proving such prolific sources of information
departments of knowledge. One of these inscrip-
in various
tions at Gafi^-am, which is not very far from the
was
Mahendra mountain alluded to in the Anugita 4 All these .
facts support the conclusion drawn by General Cunningham

from the correctness of the information given to Alexander
the Great by the Hindus of his time, namely, that the '
Indians, even at that early date in their history, had a very

accurate knowledge of the form and extent of their native
land 5 And not only do they support that conclusion,
.'
they show that the knowledge covered other facts regarding
1
Banaras ed., 74 (IV, 2, 2).
p.
2
P. 60 (IV, 1, See also p. 65.
4).
3
See Mahabhashya, p. 82 (1, 1, 5), p. 16 (1, 1,1) ; and cf. Muir, Sanskrit Texts,
vol.ii, pp. 152, 355.
* See Cunningham's Corpus Inscriptionum, I, p. I.
See Ancient Geography of India, p. 3. And compare also the information

5
collected in the Periplus of the Eurythrysean Sea (translated by Mr. McRindle),

pp. 11 2-1 36, where a large number of ports is mentioned as existing on the
Indian coasts. The Periplus seems to date from about 90 a. d. (see ibid. p. 5).
224 ANUGITA.
their native land than its form and extent. It follows con-
sequently that this enumeration of mountains does not
require the date of the Anugita to be brought down to
a later period than the fourth century B. c, and leaves it
open to us, therefore, to accept whatever conclusion the
other evidence available may seem to justify. On the
other hand, it is plain no positive
also, that it affords
information as to when the Anugita was composed, and
therefore we need not dwell any further upon the point
on the present occasion.
There are a few other points which arise upon the contents
of the Anugita, but which are not, in the present condition
of our knowledge, capable of affording any certain guidance
in our present investigation. Thus we have the story of
Dharma appearing before king (kanaka disguised as a Brah-
ma/za. I am not aware of any case of such disguises occur-
ring in any of the Upanishads, although there are numerous
parallel instances throughout the Puranik literature 1 It is, .
however, difficult to draw any definite chronological infer-

ence from this fact. There is further the reference to the
attack of Rahu on the sun. It is difficult, in the present
state of our knowledge, to say for certain, when the theory

of eclipses there implied was prevalent. In the KMndogya,-
upanishad 2 we have the emancipated self compared to the
moon escaped from the mouth of Rahu. And a text of the
Rig-veda, quoted by Mr. Ya^nesvara Gastrin in his Arya-
vidyasudhakara 3 speaks of the demon Rahu attacking the
,
sun with darkness. Here again we have another matter of

some interest ; but I cannot see that any safe deduction can
be derived from it, without a more ample knowledge of
other relevant matters than is at present accessible. Take
again the references to certain practices which look very
much Gainas of the present day.
like the practices of the
Is theAnugita, then, earlier or later than the rise of the
Gaina system ? It is not safe, I think, to found an answer
to this question upon the very narrow basis afforded by the
1
And see, too, Kalidasa Kumara V, st. 84.
2
P. 622.
3
P. 26. In Kalidasa'sRaghuvamsa the true explanation of eclipses is
alluded to. See Canto XIV, 40.
INTRODUCTION. 2 25
passage referred to. But it may be observed, that the pre-

cepts laid down in the passage in question are laid down as
precepts for orthodox Hindus, and not as the doctrines of
a heretical sect. They are also very general, and not so
minute as those which the Cainas of the present day observe
as binding upon them. If, therefore, any conclusion is to be
drawn from these precepts, it must be that the Anugita
must have been composed prior to the rise of Cainism and ;
that Gainism must have appropriated and developed this

doctrine which it obtained from the current Br&hmanism 1 .
If this is so, the Anugitd must be a very ancient work

indeed. It is not, however, necessary to further work out
this line of argument, having regard to the opinions recently

expressed by Mr. Thomas 2 , rehabilitating the views enun-
ciated long ago by Colebrooke and others. If those views
are correct, and if Cainism was a dominant system in this
country prior even to the time of Gautama Buddha, and if,
further, we are right in the suggestion for it is no more,
it must be remembered that the Anugttd dates from a
period prior to the rise of Gainism, then it would seem to
follow that the Anugita belongs to some period prior to the
sixth century B.C. All this, however, is at present very
hypothetical, and we draw attention to it only that the
question may be hereafter considered when fuller materials
for adjudicating upon it become accessible. Meanwhile,

having regard to the views above alluded to as so elabo-
rately put forward by Mr. Thomas, it is possible for us still
to hold that,, in the present state of our knowledge, the third
or fourth century B.C. is not too early a date to assign to
the Anugiti, even on the assumption that the precepts
contained in that work regarding the care to be taken of
worms and insects were borrowed by it from the Gaina
system. With this negative result, we must for the present
rest contented.
One other fact of similar nature to those we have now
1
As the Buddhists did in sundry instances. Cf. inter alia Buhler's Gautama,
pp. lv and 191. And cf. also Was the Ramayawa copied from Homer?' pp. 48, 49.
*
2
See Mr. Thomas's very elaborate discussion of the whole subject in the
Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (New Series), vol. ix, p. 155 seq.
[8] Q
226 ANUGiTA.
dealt with may, perhaps, be also noticed here. We allude

to the stanzas which we find in the Anugita and also in the
6anti Parvan of the MaMbharata and in the Manusmrzti.
There is also one which the Anugita has in common with
the ParLrish/a of Y&ska's Nirukta 1 . It is not possible, I
conceive, to say finally whether one of these works borrowed
these stanzas from the other of them ; while, on the other
hand, it is quite possible, as already argued by us in the
Introduction to the GM, that all these works were only repro-
ducing from some entirely different work, or that the stanzas
in questionwere the common property of the thinkers of
the time. We have no means available for deciding between
these conflicting hypotheses.
We have thus noticed all the salient points in the evidence,
external and internal, which is available for determining the
position of the Anugita in our ancient literature. Nobody
who has seen even a little of the history of that literature
will be surprised at the quantity or quality of that evidence,
or the nature of the conclusions legitimately yielded by it.
We have endeavoured to express those conclusions in lan-

guage which should not indicate any greater certainty as
attaching to them than can fairly be claimed for them.
The net result appears to be this. The AnugM may be
taken with historical certainty to have been some centuries
old in the time of the great *Sankar&Arya. It was very
probably older than the Dharma-sutras of Apastamba, but
by what period of time we are not in a position at present
to define. It was, perhaps, older also than the rise of
Buddhism and Gainism, and of the Yoga philosophy but ;
on this it is impossible to say anything with any approach

to confidence. It is, on the other hand, almost certain that
it belongs to a period very considerably removed from the
older Upanishads probably removed by a distance of some
;
centuries, duringwhich stories' not contained in the Upa-

*
nishads had not only obtained currency, but also come to be

regarded as belonging to antiquity 2 . And yet the period to
1
Cf. Anugita I, 36 with Yaska (ed. Roth), p. 190.
2
Some of the Puratana Itihasas, e. g. that of Narada and Devamata, are
not traceable in any Vedic work known to us. Devamata's name I do not find
referred to anywhere else.
INTRODUCTION. 227
which the work belongs was one in which the Upanishads

were only reverenced as the authoritative opinions of emi-
nent men, not as the words of God himself 1 In this respect, .
it may be said that the Anugita seems rather to belong to
an earlier stratum of thought than even the Sanatsu^-atiya,

in which a Gfianakaâ, as forming a part of the Vedic
canon, seems to be recognised 2 But it is abundantly clear,
.
that the Anugita stands at a very considerable chronological

distance from the Bhagavadgita.
Such are the results of our investigation. We have not
thought it necessary to discuss the verse or the language of
the work. But it must in fairness be pointed out, that upon
the whole, the verse and language are both pretty near the
classical model. There are, it is true, a few instances of the
metrical anomalies we have noticed elsewhere, but having
regard to the extent of the work, those instances are far
from being very numerous. The language and style, too,
are not quite smooth and polished though, judging ;
from them alone, I should rather be inclined to place the

Sanatsu^-atiya prior to the Anugita. But that suggests a
question which we cannot now stop to discuss.
One word, in conclusion, about the translation. The text
used has been chiefly that adopted in the commentary of
Arûna Mura, a commentary which on the whole I prefer
very much to that of Nllaka*Aa, which has been printed in
the Bombay edition of the Mahabharata. Arûna Mura,
as a rule, affordssome explanation where explanation is
wanted, and does not endeavour to suit his text to any fore-
gone conclusion. His comments have been of the greatest
possible help to me and my only regret is that the only
;
copy of his commentary which was available to me, and the

use of which I owe to the kindness of my friend Professor
Bhaâ&rkar, was not as correct a one as could be desired.
I have also looked into the Vishamadoki, a short work
containing notes on difficult passages of the Mahabharata.
1
See p. 2 1 1 supra.
2
See p. 146 supra. The Buddhists seem to have borrowed the division of
Karma and Gflanakawtfas. See Dr. Raêndralala Mitra's Lalita Vistara (transl.),
p. 21. The division, therefore, was probably older than the first century b. g.
Q 2
2 28 ANUGITA.
The MS. of it belonging to the Government Collection

of MSS. deposited in Deccan College was lent me also by
Professor Bhdârkar. The principles adopted in the trans-
lation and notes have been the same as those followed in
the other pieces contained in this volume.
P. S. I take this opportunity of stating that it is not at

all certain that Ar^*una MLsra is the name of the author of
the commentary which I have used. I find that in sup-
posing Arûna MLsra to be the author, I confounded that
commentary, which does not mention its author's name,
with the commentary on another section of the Maha-
bharata which does give its author's name as Ar^*una MLsra,
and which is also among
the MSS. purchased by Professor
Bhaârkar Government of Bombay. (See with
for the
regard to these MSS. Professor Bhaârkar's recently pub-
lished Report on the search for Sanskrit MSS. of 7th July,
1880.)
A N U G T A. I
Chapter L
Ganameâya * said:
What conversation, one 2O took

twice-born !
place between the high-souled Keâva and Arîma,

while they dwelt in that palace 3 after slaying their
enemies ?
Vaisamp&yana said :
The son of Prztha, after becoming possessed of

his kingdom (in an) undisturbed (state), enjoyed
himself in the company of KWsh/za,full of delight
in thatheavenly palace. And once, O king they !
happened to go, surrounded by their people, and

rejoicing, to a certain portion of the palace which
resembled heaven. Then Ar^*una, the son of Paû,
having surveyed with delight that lovely palace, in
the company of Krishna, spoke these words O :
'
you of mighty arms O you whose mother is

!
4
Devaki when the battle was about to commence,
!
I became aware of your greatness, and that divine
1
This is the prince to whom the Mahabharata, as we have it,
purports to have been related.

2
I. e. Vai-rampayana, who relates the Mahabharata to ana-
meâya.
3
This appears to have been situated at Indraprastha, and to
have been the one built for the Pa#</avas by the demon Maya, as
related in the SabM Parvan.
4
This is a rather unusual form of address.
23O ANUGITA.
form of yours 1 But that, O Keâva! which through

.
affection (for me) you explained before 2 has all dis- ,
appeared, O tiger-like man from my degenerate !
mind. Again and again, however, I feel a curiosity

about those topics. But (now), O Madhava you !
will be going at no distant date to Dv&raka.'
Vaisamp&yana said
Thus addressed, that best of speakers, Krishna,
possessed of great glory, replied in these words after
embracing Ar^nna.
V&sudeva said:
From me, O son of Prztha you heard a mystery, !
and learnt about the eternal 3 (principle), about

piety in (its true) form, and about all the everlasting
worlds 4 . It is excessively disagreeable to me, that
you should not have grasped it through want of
intelligence. And the recollection (of it) now again
is not possible (to me). Really, O son of a.ndu !
you are devoid of faith and of a bad intellect. And,

O Dhananuya it is not possible for me to repeat
!
in full (what I said before). For that doctrine was

perfectly adequate for understanding the seat 5
of the
Brahman. It is not possible for me to state it again
in full in that way. For then accompanied by my
mystic power 6
,
I declared to you the Supreme
Brahman. But I shall relate an ancient story upon
1
Cf. BhagavadgM, chapters X and XI passim.
2
I. e. in the Bhagavadgita\
3
This may also be taken with piety thus :
'
and learnt about the
eternal piety in (its true) form/
4
As to the plural, see Sarikara on Muwâka, p. 320.
5
Cf. Gita, p. 78. For 'understanding' here we might, perhaps,
substitute 'attaining/ The original word means both understanding
and attaining. Cf. GttS, p. 82.
CHAPTER I, 21. 231
that subject, so that adhering to this knowledge, you

may attain the highest goal. O best of the sup-
porters of piety ! listen to all that I say. (Once), O
restrainer of foes! came from the heavenly
there
world and the world of Brahman *, a Brahmaâ
difficult to withstand
2
and he was (duly) honoured ,
by us. (Now) listen, without entertaining any mis-

givings, O chief of the descendants of Bharata! O
son of PWtha ! to what he said on being interrogated
3
by us according to heavenly rules .
The Br&hma/za said

Krishna. ! O destroyer of Madhu ! I will explain
to you accurately what you, out of compassion for

(all) beings 4 have asked me touching the duties
, (to
be performed) for final emancipation. It is destructive
of delusion, O Lord ! Listen to me with attention 5

,
as I M&dhava
relate A certain Brdhmaâ
it, O !
named Kasyapa, who had performed (much) penance,

and who best understood piety, approached a certain
twice-born (person) who had learnt the Scriptures
6
relating to having heard (of him, as
(all) duties ,
one) who had over and over

again gone through all
knowledge and experience about coming and going 7 ,
who was well versed in the true nature of all worlds 8 ,
1
This seems to mean not the Supreme Brahman, but the Creator.
2
Cf. Sanatsu^-atiya, p. 161, 'not to be shaken.'
3
I suppose this to mean according to the forms proper in the
case of such a being as the one in question. Cf. GM, p. 62,
and note there.
4
This is not easy to understand. Perhaps the allusion is to the doc-
trine at GM, pp. 54, 55.
5
Cf. Br/hadarawyaka, p. 447.
6
I.e. all prescribed acts of piety.
7
As to knowledge and experience, cf. GM, p. 57; and as to
coming and going, cf. ibid. p. 84.
8
1, e. as stated, for instance, at GM, p. 7 9, or Br/hadara^yaka,p. 613.
232 ANUGITA.
who knew about happiness and misery \ who knew

the truth about birth and death 2 who was con- ,
versant with merit and sin, who perceived the migra-

tions of embodied and low (degrees)
(souls) of high
in consequence of (their) actions, who moved about
like an emancipated being, who had reached per-
fection 3 who was tranquil, whose senses were re-
,
strained, who was illumined with the Brahmic

splendour 4
, who moved about in every direction,
who understood concealed movements 5
, who was
going in company of invisible Siddhas and celestial
singers 6
, and conversing and sitting together (with
them) in secluded (places), who went about as he
pleased, and was unattached (anywhere) like the
wind. Having approached him, that talented ascetic
possessed of concentration (of mind), that best of
the twice-born, wishing to acquire piety, fell at his
feet, after seeing that great marvel. And amazed on
seeing that marvellous man, the best of the twice-
born, Klryapa, pleased the preceptor by his great
devotion. That was all appropriate 7 (being) joined ,
to sacred learning and correct conduct. And, O

terror of your foes he pleased that (being) by (his
!
purity of) heart and behaviour (suitable) towards

a preceptor 8
. Then being satisfied and pleased, he
spoke to the pupil these words, referring to the
1 2
Cf. infra, p. 245. Cf. Gitd, pp. 48, 103.
3 4
Cf. Gita, passim. Cf. Sanatsuâtiya, p. 162.
5
I. e. moving about so as not to be seen by everybody.
6
holders of wheels/ which Arûna MLrra interprets to
Literally,
mean J53raas/ At S&nti Parvan (Moksha Dharma) CCXLIV, 26

'
Nilakaâ renders âkradhara by iTakravartin or Emperor.

7
I. e. as Ka\syapa was possessed of Vedic and behaved as
lore,
he ought to behave in his capacity of pupil, it was natural that the
other should be pleased. 8
See p. 176 seq. supra.
CHAPTER I, 38. 233
highest perfection. Hear (them) from me, O

ânirdana
The Siddha said:
Mortals, O dear friend * ! by their actions which
are (of) mixed (character), or which are meritorious
and pure, attain to this world as the goal, or to
residence in the world of the gods 2
. Nowhere is
there everlasting happiness; nowhere eternal re-

3
sidence . Over and over again is there a down-
fall from a high position attained with difficulty.

Overcome by lust and anger, and deluded by desire,
I fell into uncomfortable and harassing states (of
life), in consequence of (my) committing sin. Again

and again death, and again and again birth 4 I ate .
numerous (kinds of) food, sucked at various breasts,

saw various mothers, and fathers ofdifferent sorts; and,
O sinless one (I saw) strange pleasures and miseries.
!
Frequently (I suffered) separation from those I loved,

association with those I did not love. Loss of
wealth also came on me, after I had acquired that
wealth with difficulty; ignominies full of affliction
from princes and likewise from kinsmen excessively ;
poignant pain, mental and bodily. I also underwent

frightful indignities, and fierce deaths and captivities;
(I had a) fall into hell, and torments in the house of
Yama 5 I also suffered much from old age, continual

.
ailments, and numerous misfortunes flowing from the

pairs of opposites 6
. Then on one occasion, being
much afflicted with misery, I abandoned the whole
1
The same word as at Giti, p. 72.
2
Cf.^Mndogya-upanishad, pp. 356-359, and Gita, p. 84.
3
See GM, p. 76, and cf. Ka/â, p. 90.
4
For the whole of this passage, cf. Maitri-upanishad, p. 8.
5
See Manu VI, 61. 6
See Gita, p. 48.
234 ANUGITA.
course of worldly life, through indifference (to worldly

objects), and taking refuge with the formless (prin-
ciple) 1
. Having learnt about this path in this world,
I exercised myself (in it), and hence, through favour
2
of the self , have I acquired this perfection 3 . I shall
not come here again 4
; I am surveying the worlds,
and the happy migrations 5 of (my) self from the
creation of beings to (my attaining) perfection.
Thus, O best of the twice-born have I obtained !
this highest perfection. From here I go to the

next (world), and from there again to the still
6
higher (world) the imperceptible seat of the Brah-

man. Have no doubt on that, O terror of your
foes 7
! I shall not come back to this mortal world.
I am O you of great intelligence
pleased with you,
Say, what can do for you ? The time is now
I
come for that which you desired in coming to me.

I know for what you have come to me. But I shall
be going away in a short time, hence have I given
1
Taking my being
refuge, says Nilaka^/â, in the belief of
identical with the Brahman, which
be comprehended by means is to
of the profound contemplation called Asampra^nata Samadhi.
2
I.e., says Nilaka/â, the mind, and he cites Maitrl, p. 179. Cf.
Ka/â, p. 108. The rendering at p. 192 supra will also suit (through
becoming placid). This placidity is defined at xSanti Parvan
the self
(Moksha Dharma) CCXLVII, 11, with which cf. Gita, p. 69. See
GM, p. 51.
3
As above described.
4
^"Mndogya, p. 628 see also ibid. p. 282.
Cf. ;
5
He calls them happy because they have ended happily, I presume.
'
Surveying the worlds' Nilakaw/â takes to be an index of omni-
science. Cf. Sanatsugutiya, p. 174. See also Yoga-sutras III, 25,
and commentary there.
6
I. e. the world of Brahman, or the Satyaloka ; and the next
step is assimilation into the Brahman.
7
So read all the copies I have seen, though Kasyapa is the
person addressed.
CHAPTER II, 5. 235
this hint to you. I am exceedingly pleased, O clever

one ! with your good conduct.Put (your) questions
without uneasiness, I will tell (you) whatever you de-
sire. I highly esteem your intelligence, and greatly
respect it, inasmuch as you have made me out 1 ;
for, O Klsyapa you are (a) talented (man).

!
Chapter II.
Vasudeva 2 said
Then grasping his feet,Kasyapa asked questions
very difficult to explain, and all of them that (being),
the best of the supporters of piety, did explain.
Klsyapa said:
How
does the body perish, and how, too, is it
produced ? How does one who moves in this
harassing course of worldly life become freed ? And
(how) does the self, getting rid of nature, abandon
the body (produced) from ? And how, being freed
it
3
from the body, does he attain to the other 4 ? How

does this man enjoy the good and evil acts done
by himself? And where do the acts of one who is
released from the body remain ?
The Brahma/za said

Thus addressed, O descendant of Vrzshni ! that
Siddha answered these questions in order. Hear
me relate what (he said).
1
This was difficult, as the Siddha possessed extraordinary powers,
2
such as that of concealed movement, &c. Sic in MSS.
8
Cf. as to getting rid of nature, Gita, pp. 75-106. As to the
body produced from nature, cf. ibid. p. 112, and pp. 317-318 infra.
4
I. e. the Brahman, says Nilaka/y5a.
236 ANUGITA.
The Siddha said

When those actions, productive of long life and
fame 1
, which a man performs here, are entirely
exhausted, after his assumption of another body,
he performs (actions of an) opposite character, his
self being overcome at the exhaustion of life 2 And .
his ruin being impending, his understanding goes

astray. Not knowing his own constitution 3 and ,
strength, and likewise the (proper) season, the man

not being self-controlled, does unseasonably what is
injurious to himself. When he attaches himself to
numerous very harassing (actions); eats too much 4 or ,
does not eat at all when he takes bad food, or meat 5

;
,
or drinks, or (kinds of food) incompatible with one

another, or heavy food in immoderate quantities, or
without (previously taken food) being properly di-
gested; or takes too much exercise, or is incontinent; or
constantly, through attachment to action, checks the
regular course (of the excretions 6) or takes juicy food 7 ; ;
8
or sleeps by clay ; or (takes food) not thoroughly
prepared ;
(such a man) himself aggravates the dis-
1
One reading omits '
fame/ as to which cf. Taittiriya-upanishad,
p. 129; .Oandogya, pp. 122-227. As to long life, cf. iTMndogya,
p. 272 ; exhausted, i. e. by enjoyment of fruit in another world.
2
Cf. *Sariraka BMshya, p. 753 seq., where we have a slightly
different view.
3
Arg-una Mi^ra renders the original, sattva, by svabh&va.
4
Cf. for all this, GM, pp. 62, 69, 118, which passages, however, are
from a slightly different point of view. See also -O&ndogya, p. 526.
5
A various reading here excludes meat. But cf. Apastamba I,
6
1, 2, 23; Gautama II, 13. So says Nilaka/â.
7
I. e. which turns to juice in digestion, much juice being a cause
of indigestion, say the commentators.
8
This is doubtful. The sense may be, '
who takes juicy or not
thoroughly prepared food by day and night.' But see Asvalayana
G/Yhya-sutra, p. 90; Apastamba I, 1, 2, 24 ; Gautama II, 13.
CHAPTER II, 20. 237
orders (in the body) when the time comes \ By

aggravating the disorders (in) his own (body), he
contracts a disease which ends in death, or he even
engages in unreasonable (acts), such as hanging 2
(oneself). From these causes, the living 3

body of
that creature perishes. Learn about that
then
correctly as I am
about to state it. Heat being
kindled in the body, and being urged by a sharp
wind 4 pervades the whole frame, and, verily, checks
,
the (movements of all the) life-winds. Know this

truly, that excessively powerful heat, if kindled in
the body, bursts open the vital parts the seats of
the soul 5
. Then the soul, full of torments, forthwith
falls away from the perishable (body). Know, O
best of the twice-born ! that (every) creature leaves
the body, when the vital parts are burst open, its self
being overcome with torments. All beings are con-
and death and, O chief
stantly distracted with birth ;
of the twice-born are seen abandoning (their) bodies,

!
or entering the womb on the exhaustion of (their

previous) actions 6
. Again, a man suffers similar tor-
ments, having his joints broken and suffering from
1
The time of destruction, says Arôina Misra.
2
Which, say the commentators, leads to death, even without
any disease.
3
So I construe the original, having regard to the question, how l
does the body perish ?' The other reading, which is in some respects
better, is equivalent to '
the life falls away from the body of that
creature/
4
This is different, as the commentators point out, from the
ordinary life-winds.
B
The original here is iva, not dtman, which we have rendered
' self/ This refers rather to the vital principle. As to the seats,
cf. Ya^-ftavalkya Smnti III, 93 seq.
6
I adopt the reading karmawam, which I find in one of the MSS.
I consulted. I think it probable that that was the reading before
the commentators. The other reading is marma^dm.
238 ANUGITA
cold, consequence of water 1

in the compact . As
association of the five elements broken up, the is
wind in the body, distributed within the five elements 2 ,
between the upward and downward life-winds, being

aggravated by cold, and urged by a sharp wind 3 goes ,
upwards 4 abandoning the embodied (self) in con-

,
sequence of pain. Thus it 5 leaves the body, which

appears devoid of breath. Then devoid of warmth,
devoid of breath, devoid of beauty, and with con-
sciousness destroyed, the man, being abandoned by
the Brahman 6 is said to be dead. (Then) he ceases
,
to perceive (anything) with those very currents 7

with which the supporter of the body 8 perceives
objects of sense. In the same way, it is the eternal
soul which preserves in the body the life-winds which
are produced from food 9
. Whatever (part of the
body) is employed in the collection 10
of that, know
1
Having spoken of heat, he now speaks of the effects of cold.
I am not sure if the water here refers to the water of the l
juicy'
substances before referred to.
2
This means, I presume, within the dissolving body. Cf. Maitri-
upanishad, p. 42.
8
See note 4, last page. 4
To the head, Arûna Mixra.
5
That is, the wind, I suppose, and then the breath departs from
the body, and the man is said to die. '
Devoid of beauty/ further
on, means, disfigured in the state of death.
6
I. e. the mind, Argrma Mura.
7
The senses. Cf. Svetawatara, p. 288.
8
See and cf. p. 262 infra.
9
This, says Arg-una MLsra, is in answer to the possible question
why this 'sharp wind' does not work with the life-winds. The
answer is, that such working requires the presence of the soul,
which Arûna Mi^ra says here means 'mind.' As to production '
from food/ cf. .A'Mndogya, p. 421 seq., and Taittiriya Arawyaka,

p. 893.
10
Collection of that = turning the food into semen, says Arûna
Mura, who adds, ' in those vital parts, which are useful for this pur-
pose, the life-wind dwells/

CHAPTER II, 34. 239
that to be a vital part, for thus it is seen (laid down)

in the Scriptures. Those vital parts being wounded,
that (wind) directly comes out therefrom, and entering
the bosom of a creature obstructs the heart \ Then
the possessor of consciousness knows nothing 2 .
Having his knowledge enveloped by darkness 3 ,
4
while the vitals are still enveloped, the soul , being
without a fixed shaken about by the wind.
seat, is
And then he heaves a very deep and alarming gasp,
and makes the unconscious body quiver as he goes
out (of it). That soul, dropping out of the body, is
surrounded on both sides by his own actions 5 his ,
own pure and meritorious, as also his sinful (ones).

Brihmaâs, possessed of knowledge, whose con-
victions are correctly (formed) from sacred learning,
know him by (his) marks as one who has performed
meritorious actions or the reverse. As those who
have eyes see a glow-worm disappear here and there
in darkness, so likewise do those who have eyes
of knowledge. Such a soul, the Siddhas see with
a divine eye, departing (from the body), or coming
to the birth, or entering into a womb 6 . Its three
descriptions 7
of seats are here learnt from the Scrip-
tures. This world is the world of actions 8
, where
1
Aig-una Mwra renders this to mean mind/ '
2
As the mind is obstructed, says Aig-una MLrra. The possessor
of consciousness = the self, Ar^-una.
3
I. e. pain, Arûna Mwra.
4 5
I. e. mind, Arg-una MLnra. Cf. Br/hadara/zyaka, p. 843.
6
See Aitareya-upanishad, p. 222, and *Sankara's commentary
there. The coming to the birth is the coming out of the womb
into the world. Cf. also Gita, p. 112.
7
As stated further on, viz. this world, the next world, and
the womb. With this compare .^Mndogya, p. 359.
8
Cf. our Bhartnhari (Bombay series), Notes (Nitirataka), p. 27.
24O ANUGITA.
creatures dwell. All embodied (selfs), having here

performed good or evil (actions), obtain (the
fruit).
It is here they obtain higher or lower enjoy-

ments by their own actions. And it is those whose
actions here are evil, who by their actions go to hell.
Harassing is that lower place where men are tor-
mented. Freedom from it is very difficult, and the
self should be specially protected from it. Learn
from me now the seats in which creatures going
up 1 dwell, and which I shall describe truly. Hearing
this, you will learn the highest knowledge, and
2
decision regarding action . All (the worlds in) the
forms of and this lunar sphere 3 and also this
stars, ,
solar sphere which shines in the world by its own

lustre, know these to be the seats of men who
perform meritorious actions. All these, verily, fall
down again and again in consequence of the ex-
haustion of their actions 4
. And there, too, in
heaven, there are differences of low, high, and

middling 5 . Nor, even there, is there satisfaction,
(even) after a sight of most magnificent splendour.
Thus have I stated to you these seats distinctly.
I will after this (proceed to) state to you the pro-
duction of the foetus 6
. And, O twice-born one
hear that attentively from me as I state it.
1
Cf. on this and 'lower place/ GM, p. 109; Sahkhya Karika, 44.
2
The readings here are most unsatisfactory. The meaning of
the printed reading adopted above would seem to be, ' decision as
to what actions should be performed/ &c.
3
Cf. GM, p. 81, and Sanatsu^dtiya, p. 158.
4
Cf. GM, p. 84.
5
Argnna Mura says, 'In heaven = in the next world, low = infe-
rior (?), high = heaven, and middling = the space below the skies
(antariksha)/ For the three degrees of enjoyment in heaven, see
Yogavasish//$a I, 35 seq.
6
This is the third of the three seats above referred to.
CHAPTER III, 7. 24I
Chapter III.
There no destruction here of actions good or

is
not good Coming to one body after another they

1
.
become ripened in their respective ways 2 As a .
fruitful (tree) producing fruit may yield much fruit,
so does merit performed with a pure mind become

expanded 3 Sin, too, performed with a sinful mind, is
.
similarly (expanded). For the self engages in action,

putting forward this mind 4
. And now further, hear
how 5
a man, overwhelmed with action, and enveloped
in desire and anger 6 enters a womb. Within the
, womb
of a woman, (he) obtains as the result of action a body
good or else bad 7
, made up of virile semen and blood.
Owing to (his) subtlety though and imperceptibility,
he obtains a body appertaining to the Brahman, he
is not attached anywhere hence is he the eternal ;
Brahman 8
. That is the seed of all beings ; by that
1
Cf. Maitri-upanishad, p. 53, and Mu^daka, p. 270. And see
generally as to this passage, -Sariraka Bhashya, pp. 751-760.
2
I. e. they yield their respective fruits ; cf. Maitri, p. 43, and
.A'Mndogya, p. 358.
3
This explains, say the commentators, how even a little merit or
sin requires sometimes more than one birth to enjoy and exhaust.
4
As a king performs sacrifices '
putting forward' a priest, Arûna
Mijra and cf. Dhammapada, the
; first two verses.
5
Argoma Mijra has tatha, '
in the same way,' instead of this,
and renders it to mean '
putting forward ' the mind.
6
Hence he does not get rid of birth and death.
7
Good = of gods or men; bad = of the lower species of crea-
tures, Ar^-una.
8
He, in the preceding sentences, according to Arûna MLrra,
means the self, through the mind, or *
putting forward ' the mind,
as said above. In this sentence, he takes '
he ' to mean the mind
itself; Brahman == the self; and the mind, he says, is called the
Brahman, as it, like the self, is the cause of the iTaitanya, intelli-
gence, in all creatures.
[8] R
242 ANUGITA.
all creatures exist. That soul, entering all the limbs

of the foetus, part by part, and dwelling in the seat
of the life-wind 1 supports (them) with the mind
9
2
.
Then the foetus, becoming possessed of consciousness,

moves about its limbs. As liquefied iron being
poured out assumes the form of the image 3 such ,
you must know is the entrance of the soul into the

foetus. As fire entering a ball of iron, heats it, such
too, you must understand, is the manifestation of
the soul in the foetus. And as a blazing lamp shines
in a house, even so does consciousness light up
bodies And whatever action he performs, whether
4
.
good or bad, everything done in a former body must

necessarily be enjoyed (or suffered). Then 5 that is
exhausted, and again other (action) is accumulated,

so long as the piety which dwells in the practice
of concentration of mind for final emancipation 6
has
not been learnt. As to that, O best (of men) I will !
tellyou about that action by which, verily, one going

the round of various births, becomes happy. Gifts,
penance, life as a Brahmaârin, adherence to pre-
scribed regulations, restraint of the senses 7
, and also
1
I. e. the heart.
2
Arg-una Misra says that the soul at the beginning of the sen-
tence means the mind, and mind here means knowledge or intelli-
gence. Cf. p. 238 supra.

3
In the mould of which, that is to say, it is poured.
4
Cf. Gita, p. 106. The three similes, says Nilakaâ, show
that the soul pervades the whole body, is yet imperceptible, and
also unattached to the body. Ar^-una Misra's explanation is
different, but I prefer Nilakara/â's.

5
I. e. by the enjoyment or suffering.
6
I. e. while he does not possess the knowledge which leads to
the piety necessary as a preliminary for final emancipation, and
which ultimately destroys action. Cf. Gita, p. 62.
7
I. e. keeping the senses of hearing &c. from all operations
tranquillity, compassion to (all) beings, self-restraint,

and absence of cruelty, refraining from the appro-
priation of the wealth of others, not acting dishonestly
even in thought towards (any) being in this world,
serving mother and father, honouring deities and
guests, honouring preceptors, pity, purity, constant
restraint of the organs 1
, and causing good to be
done ; this is said to be the conduct of the good 2 .
From this is produced piety, which protects people

to eternity. Thus one should look (for it) among
the good, for among them it constantly abides. The
practice to which the good adhere, points out (what)
piety (is)
3
. And among them dwells that (course of)
action which constitutes eternal piety. He who
acquires that, never comes to an evil end 4
. By this
are people held in check from making a slip in the
paths of piety 5 . But the devotee who is released 6
is esteemed higher than these. For the deliver-

ance from the course of worldly life of the man who
acts piously and well, as he should act, takes place
after a long time 7
. Thus a creature always meets
with (the effects of) the action performed (in a)
previous (life). And that 8
the sole cause by which
is
he comes here (in a) degraded (form). There is
save those relating to the Brahman. Tranquillity is the same thing

as regards the mind.
1
This I take to mean restraint of the active organs, such as
speech, &c. '
Self-restraint ' is rendered by Nilaka/z/Aa to mean
'
concentration of mind/
2
Cf. Maitrf, p. 57 ; .Oandogya, p. 136 ; and Gita, pp. 103,119.
3
Cf. Apastambal, 1, 1, 2; I, 7, 20, 7; *Sakuntala, p. 30 (Williams).
4
Cf. Gita, p. 72.
5
By this, e. by the practice of the good, Argnna Mi^ra.
i.
6
From delusion, Arûna Mirra; emancipated by force of his
devotion, Nilaka/z/6a.
7 8
Cf. Gita. p. 73 ; .Oandogya, pp. 136, 137. Scil. the action.
R 2
244 ANUGITA.
in the world a doubt as to what originally was the

source from which he became invested with a body.
And that I shall now proceed to state. Brahman, the
grandfather of all people, having made a body for
himself, created the whole of the three worlds, mov-
ing and fixed From that he created the Pradhana,
1
.
the material cause of all embodied (selfs), by which all

this is pervaded, and which is known in the world as
the highest 2 This is what is called the destructible 3
.
;
but the other 4 is immortal and indestructible. And

Praâpati, who had been first created, created all
creatures and (all) the fixed entities, (having) as
regards the moving (creation), a pair separately for
5
each (species). Such is the ancient (tradition)
heard (by us). And as regards that, the grandsire
fixed a limit of time, and (a rule) about migrations
among and about the return 6
(various) creatures, .
What I say is all correct and proper, like (what

may be said by) any talented person who has in
* I.e. animate and inanimate. 'A body for himself '= undeveloped
Aka\?a, Nilaka/a. But see Sankhya-s&ra, p. 19, and Sahkhya Prav.
Bhashya I, 122, and III, 10.
2
Cf. inter alia GM, p. 58 and note, and Sankhya-sara, p. 11.
As to the words at the beginning of this sentence, from that/ cf.
'
Taittiriya-upanishad, p. 67, where everything is derived from Akaya,

mentioned in the last note, and Akstaa from the Brahman.
3
Cf. Gita, p. 113, where there are three principles distinguished
from each other.
4
I. e. the self, Arûna Mi.yra.
5
A pair, i.e. a male and female for each species, such as man, &c,
Argrma Mura.
6
Pra^-apati fixed the limit of life for every 'moving' creature, and
the rule as to going from one species of body into another, and
as to going from one world to another. As to a part of 'the
ancient tradition/ the first stanza of the Muradaka-upanishad may
be compared.
CHAPTER IV, I. 245
a former birth perceived the self 1

. He who properly
perceives pleasure and pain to be inconstant, the
body be an unholy aggregate 2 and ruin to be
to ,
connected with action 3 and who remembers that

,
whatever little there is of happiness is all misery 4 ,
he will cross beyond the fearful ocean of worldly

life, which is very difficult to cross. He who under-
5
stands the Pradhana (though) attacked by birth
,
and death and disease, sees one (principle of) con-

6
sciousness in all beings possessed of consciousness .
Then seeking after the supreme seat, he becomes

indifferent to everything 7
. O best (of men) ! I will
give you accurate instruction concerning it. Learn

from me exhaustively, O Brahmaâ the excellent !
knowledge concerning the eternal imperishable seat,

which I am now about to declare.
Chapter IV.
He who
becoming placid 8 and thinking of nought, ,
may become absorbed in the one receptacle 9 aban- ,
doning each previous (element), he will cross beyond

1
Argrma Mirra says the strength of the impression in the former
birth would give him this knowledge in the subsequent birth.
3
2
Cf. Sanatsu-atiya, p. 155. Cf. inter alia p. 256 infra.
4
Cf. GM, p. 79.
5
Otherwise called Prakn'ti, or nature.
6
Cf. GM, p. 124.
7
Cf. GM, p. in.
8
We now begin, as Nilaka/z//$a points out, the answer to the
question put above by Kasyapa about the emancipation of the self.
Placid, Arg-una MLrra renders to mean 'silent, taciturn/ See p. 234

supra.
9
Thepath of knowledge, says Arûna Mifra; the Brahman,
says Nilakaâ. Abandoning each element absorbing the gross =
into the subtle elements, and so forth, Nilakaâ; abandoning
each elementary mode of worship till one reaches that of contem-
plating the absolute Brahman, Arûna MLrra.
246 ANUGITA.
(all) bonds. A man who is a friend of all, who en-

dures all, who
devoted to tranquillity *, who has
is
subdued his senses, and from whom fear and wrath

have departed, and who is self-possessed 2
, is re-
leased. He who moves among all beings as if they
were like himself 3 who is self-controlled, pure, free
,
from vanity 4 and egoism, he is, indeed, released

from everything. And he, too, is released who is
equable towards both life and death 5 and likewise ,
pleasure and pain, and gain and loss, and (what is)
agreeable and odious 6 He who is not attached to
.
any one, who contemns no one, who is free from

the pairs of opposites, and whose self is free from
affections 7 he is, indeed, released in every way.
,
He who has no enemy, who has no kinsmen, who

has no child, who has abandoned piety, wealth, and
lust altogether, and who has no desire, is released.
He who is not pious and not impious 8 who casts off ,
(the merit or sin) previously accumulated, whose

self is tranquillised by the exhaustion of the primary
elements of the body 9 and who is free from the pairs
,
of opposites, is released. One who does no action 10 ,
and who has no desire, looks on this universe as tran-
1
This, in the terminology of the Vedanta, means keeping the
mind from everything save hearing &c. about the Brahman.
'
'
2
One who has his mind under his control. But see Gita, p. 63.
3
Cf. GM, p. 71.
4
I. e. the desire to be honoured or respected, Arûna Misra.
Cf. Sanatsuâtfya, p. 161.
5
Who does not care when death comes. 6
Cf. p. 151 supra.
7 8
Cf.Gita for all this, pp. 101,103, 125, &c. Cf. Ka/â, p. 101.
9
Nilaka/z/â says this means the constituents of the body.
Arg-una Mura says, 'Praâ or life-wind/ &c. They are seven. See
gloss on .Oandogya-upanishad, p. 441, and p. 343 infra.
10
Because, says Arûna MLrra, he has no desire. Nilakaâ
says this means an ascetic, sannyasin. See p. 257 infra, note 1.
CHAPTER IV, 13. 247
sient, likean Asvattha tree 1 always full of birth, ,
death, and old age 2 Having his understanding .
always (fixed) upon indifference to worldly objects,

searching for his own faults 3 , he procures the release
of his self from bonds in no long time. Seeing the
4
self void of smell , void of taste, void of touch,
void of sound, void of belongings, void of colour,
and unknowable, he is released. He who sees the
5
enjoyer of the qualities , devoid of qualities, de-
6
void of the qualities of the five elements , devoid
of form, and having no cause, is released. Aban-
doning by the understanding 7 all fancies bodily and
mental 8 he gradually obtains tranquillity 9 like fire
, ,
devoid of fuel. He who is free from all impres-

10
sions free from the pairs' of opposites, without
,
belongings, and who moves among the collection of

organs with penance n he is indeed released. Then ,
freed from all impressions, he attains to the eternal
1
Cf. Gita, p. in, where -Sankara explains the name to mean
'
what will not remain even till to-morrow.'
2
Cf. Gita, p. 109, and other passages.
g
Ar^-una Mura has a different reading, which means '
particu-
larly observing the evils of (the three kinds of) misery.'
4
Cf. Ka/â, p. 119; Mu/zdaka, pp. 267 and Ma/zdukya, p. 371. ;
5
Cf. GM, pp. 104, 105, and Ka//&a, p. 112.
6
Nilakaâ says this refers to the gross elements, the next
expression to the subtle ones, and being free from these two, he is
7
'
devoid of qualities,' viz. the three qualities. Cf. Gita, p. 65.
8
I. e. those which cause bodily and mental activity.
9
Cf. Maitri, p. 178. The original word Nirvana.'
is the famous '
10
Scil. derived from false knowledge, says Arûna MLsra. Nila-
kaâ all impressions from outside oneself which are destroyed
says
by those produced from concentration of mind, &c. See p. 391 infra.
11
I. e. all those operations by which the internal man is rendered
pure and free from all taints ; see below, p. 248, where Nilaka////*a ren-
ders it as the performance of one's duty which is called penance/ But
'
see, too, pp. 74, 119, 166 supra. The meaning seems to be that the
248 ANUGITA.
Supreme Brahman, tranquil, unmoving, constant, in-

1
destructible . After this I shall explain the science
of concentration of mind, than which there is nothing
higher, (and which teaches) how devotees concen-
trating (their minds) perceive the perfect self 2 . I
will impart instruction regarding it accurately. Learn

from me the paths 3
by which one directing the self
within the 4
self perceives the eternal (principle).
Restraining the senses, one should fix the mind
on the self; and having first performed rigorous
penance 5 he should practise concentration of mind
,
for final emancipation. Then the talented Brah-

maâ, who has practised penance, who is constantly
practising concentration of mind, should act on (the
precepts of) the science of concentration of mind 6
,
seeing the self in the self by means of the mind 7

.
If such a good man is able to concentrate the self
on the self, then he, being habituated to exclusive

8
meditation ,
perceives the self in the self. Being
man in question lets his senses work, but does not permit himself to
be in any way identified with their operations. Cf. Gita, p. 64.
1
Cf. the expressions at Gitd, p. 45. Unmoving/ which occurs
'
at Ira, p. 10, is there explained by -Sankara to mean 'always the same/
The same sense is given by Mahidhara. Weber's -Satapatha, p. 980.

2
< Perfect' would seem to mean here free from all bonds or
taints, the absolute.
3
I. e. sources of knowledge, says Arûna Mura.
4
Cf. as to < directing the self within the self,' Gita, p. 69. Nila-
k&nfM says, 'paths, means of mental restraint; the self, mind; in
the self, in the body.'
5
See p. 247, note 11. Nilaka/z/â's note there referred to occurs
on this passage. See also
p. 166, note 1 supra.
6
It is not easy to say what this science is. Is it Patanâli's
system that is meant ? No details occur to enable one to identify
the 'science/ But, probably, no system is alluded to.
7
See note 4 above.
8
Nilaka/$a has a very forced explanation of the original word,
CHAPTER IV, 25. 249
self-restrained and self-possessed 1 and always con- ,
centrating his mind, and having his senses subju-

who has achieved proper
gated, he concentration of
mind sees the self in the self. As
2
a person having
seen one in a dream, recognises him (afterwards),
saying, '
so does one who has achieved
This is he ;'
proper concentration of mind perceive the self 3 .
And as one may show the soft fibres, after extracting

them from the Mun^*a, so does a devotee see the
self extracted from the body. The body is called
the Munâ ; the soft fibres stand 4 for the self. This
is the excellent illustration propounded by those
who understand concentration of mind. When an
embodied (self) properly perceives the self con-
5
centrated , then there is no ruler over him, since he
is the lord of the triple world 6
. He obtains various
bodies as he pleases ; and casting aside old age and
death, he grieves not and exults not. The man who
which also occurs further on; he takes the meaning to be, 'he
who is habituated to that by which the One is attained, viz. medi-
tation/
The original is the same as at Gita, p. 63.
1
2
That is to say, one who has got the power of concentrating
his mind as he pleases; and the words 'always concentrating' &c,
just before, would mean one who always exercises that power.'
'
3
I. e. having perceived the self in the state of concentration, he
sees the whole universe to be the self in this state when the concen-
tration has ceased, Nilaka/z//a. Arûna Mura says, ' having per-
ceived the self at the time of concentration, he recognises it as the
same at the time of direct perception,' meaning, apparently, the
time of final emancipation.
4
I. e. the reality, which in this simile forms the substratum of
what are called the fibres ; the simile is in the Ka/â-upanishad
see, too, Sanatsu^-atiya, p. 176.
5
I. e. on the supreme self, as above explained.
8
Cf. Sanatsuâtiya, p. *SVeta\rvatara, p. 290; and Bnhadara-
161 ;
tfyaka, p. 218; -Oandogya,p.523; Aitareya,p.26; Kaushitaki,p.i2 6.

25O ANUGITA.
has acquired concentration of mind, and who is self-
restrained, creates for himself even the divinity

x
of the gods and abandoning the transient body,
;
he attains to the inexhaustible Brahman. When

(all) beings are destroyed, he has no fear when (all) ;
beings are afflicted, he is not afflicted by anything 2 .
He whose self is concentrated, who is free from

attachment, and of a tranquil mind, is not shaken
by the fearful effects of attachment and affection 3 ,
which consist in pain and grief 4 Weapons do not .
pierce him 5 there is no death for him nothing can

; ;
be seen anywhere in the world happier than he.

Properly concentrating his self, he remains steady
to the self; and freed from old age and grief, he
sleeps at ease. Leaving this human frame, he as-
sumes bodies at pleasure. But one who is practising
concentration should never become despondent 6 .
When one who has properly achieved concentration

perceives the self in the self, then he forthwith
ceases to feel any attachment to Indra himself 7 .
1
I do not quite understand the original. The other reading,
dehatvam for devatvam, is not more intelligible. But comparing
the two, the meaning seems to be, that the divinity of the gods, i. e.
their qualities and powers as gods, are within his reach, if he likes
to have them.
2
Cf. Gita, p. 107.
3
Affection is the feeling that a thing is one's own ; attachment
is the feeling of liking one has for a thing acquired with difficulty,
Ar^-una Mi^ra.
4
Pain appears to be the feeling immediately following on hurt
or evil suffered; grief is the constant state of mind which is a
5
later result. Cf Yoga-sutra Bhashya, p. 208.
6
Cf. Gita, p. 70. Despondency is the feeling that one has not
acquired '
concentration ' after much practice, and that therefore
the practice should be abandoned.
7
The other reading here may be rendered, 'Then forthwith
Indra himself esteems him highly.'
CHAPTER IV, 36. 25I
Now listen how one habituated to exclusive medita-

tion attains concentration. Thinking 1 of a quarter
seen before, he should steady his mind within and
not out of the city in which he dwells. Remaining
within (that) city, he should place his mind both in
its external and internal (operations) in that habita-
tion in which he dwells. When, meditating in that

habitation, he perceives the perfect one, his mind
should not in any way wander outside. Restraining the
group of the senses, in a forest 2 free from noises and
unpeopled, he should meditate on the perfect one
within his body with a mind fixed on one point. He
1
This is all rather mystical. Nilakaâ takes 'city' to mean
'body,' and 'habitation' to mean the muladhara, or other similar
mystic centre within the body, where, according to the Yoga philo-
sophy, the soul sometimes to be kept with the life-winds, &c.
is
'
Thinking of a quarter,' &c., he explains to mean meditating on '
the instruction he has received after studying the Upanishads.'

I do not understand the passage well. 'City* for 'body' is a
familiar use of the word. Cf. Gita\ p. 65. The original word for
habitation occurs at Aitareya-upanishad, p. 199, where Sankara
explains it to mean 'seat' Three 'seats' are there mentioned,
the organs of sights &c. ; the mind and the Akaâ in the heart.
;
There, too, the body is described as a city,' and Anandagiri

'
explains habitation to mean '

seat of amusement or sport/ Here,
however, the meaning seems to be that one should work for con-
centration in the manner indicated, viz. first fix the mind on the
city where one dwells, then on the particular part of it oftenest seen
before, then one's own habitation, then the various parts of one's
body, and finally one's own heart and the Brahman within it. Thus
gradually circumscribed in its operations, the mind is better fitted
for the final concentration on the Brahman.
and As to external
internal operations, cf. note one is the
8, p. 247. The perfect
Brahman. Cf. Sanatsuâtiya, p. 171. avasatha, which we As to
have rendered by habitation,' see also Ma/zdukya, p. 34.0 ; Bnfhada-
'
rawyaka, p. 751; and the alternative sense suggested by -Sankara

on the Aitareya, loc. cit.
2
252 ANUGfTA.
should meditate on his teeth 1 palate, tongue, neck, and ,
throat likewise, and also the heart, and likewise the

seat of the heart. That talented pupil, O destroyer
of Madhu having been ! thus instructed by me, pro-
ceeded further to interrogate (me) about the piety
(required) for final emancipation, which is difficult
to explain. How does this food eaten from time
'
to time become digested in the stomach ? How

does it turn to juice, and how also to blood ? And
how, too, do the flesh, and marrow, and muscles, and
bones
which all (form) the bodies for embodied
(selfs) develop in a woman as that (self) develops?
How, too, does the strength develop ? (And how is
it also) about the removal of non-nutritive (sub-

stances) and of the excretions, distinctly ? How,
2
,
too, does he breathe inwards or outwards ? And

what place does the self occupy, dwelling in the
self 3
? And how does the soul moving about carry
the body ? And of what colour and of what
description (is it when) he leaves it ? O sinless
venerable sir ! be pleased to state this accurately
to me/ Thus questioned by that Brdhmaâ, O
M&dhava I replied 4 O you of mighty arms
! ,
'
! O
1
Nilaka^Ma cites numerous passages from works of the Yoga
philosophy in illustration of this. He takes '
heart' to mean the
Brahman .Oandogya, p. 528), and 'the seat
seated in the heart (cf.
of the heart to mean the one hundred and one passages of the
'
heart. The latter expression Arûna Mi^ra seems to render by

'mind/ See also generally on this passage, Maitri-upanishad,
p. 133, and Yoga-sutra III, 1 and 28 seq., and commentary there.
2
Literally, *
those which are void of strength/ I adopt Arg-una
MLrra's reading. The other reading literally means '
obstructions.'
3
The self here means the body, I take it. See p. 248 supra.
4
The reply does not appear here. Nilaka/Aa says that the suc-
ceeding chapters contain it. Arg-una Mi^ra seems to say that the
answer has been already given. The context here is obscure.
CHAPTER IV, 51. 253
restrainer of (your) foes ! according to what (I had)

heard. As one placing any property in his store-room
should mind on the property 1 so placing
fix his ,
one's mind in one's body, and (keeping) the passages

confined, one should there look for the self and
2
avoid heedlessness Being thus always assiduous
.
and pleased in the self, he attains in a short time

to that Brahman, after perceiving which he under-
stands the Pradhclna 3 He is not to be grasped .
by the eye, nor by any of the senses. Only by the

mind (used) as a lamp is the great self perceived 4 .
He has hands and feet on all sides he has eyes, ;
heads, and faces on all sides he has ears on all ;
sides; he stands pervading everything in the world 5 .
The soul sees the self 6 come out from the body;
and abandoning his body, he perceives the self,
holding it to be the immaculate Brahman, with,
as it were, a mental smile 7 And then depending .
upon it thus, he attains final emancipation in me 8 .
1
Nilakaw/â says the original means household effects ; Arguna
Mirra says wealth, and adds, the mind is fixed on it from fear of
others finding it out.
2
Cf. Sanatsuâtiya, p. 152. Here, however, the sense is the
ordinary one.
3
I. e. all nature, that from which the universe is developed.
4
Cf. Ka/fca, pp. 1 1 7-130. See Santi Parvan (Moksha) CCXL, 1 6.
5
Cf. GM, p. 103. The stanza occurs often in the Bh&rata. This,
says Argima MLrra, answers the. question 'how the soul carries the
body.' The soul can do that as it is all-pervading.
6
The individual soul, which has acquired true knowledge, per-
ceives the self to be distinct from the body. See p. 249 supra.
7
I. e. at the false notions which he entertained. Nilaka^/â
says, *
smile, i.e. amazement that he should have been deceived
by the mirage like course of worldly life/
8
I. e. emancipation and assimilation with the supreme
final ;
'
depending upon it thus =
taking refuge with the Brahman in
'
the way above stated.

2 54 ANUGITA.
This whole mystery I have declared to you, O best

of Brahmaâs * ! I gowill now Take my leave, I will
away and do you (too) go away, O Brahmaâ
;
according to your pleasure/ Thus addressed by me,

O Krishna that pupil, possessed of great penance,
!
that Brclhma/za of rigid vows, went away as he

pleased.
Vasudeva said
Having spoken to me, O son of Pmhd! these
good words relating to the piety (required) for final
emancipation, that best of BrAhmaâs disappeared
then and there. Have you listened to this, O son
of Prztha! with a mind (fixed) on (this) one point
2
only For on that occasion, too, sitting in the
?
chariot you heard this same (instruction). It is my

belief, O son of Pntha! that this is not easily
understood by a man who is confused, or who has
not acquired knowledge with his inmost soul purified 3 .
What I have spoken, O chief of the descendants of

Bharata is a great mystery (even) among the gods.
!
And it has never yet been heard by any man in this
world, O son of Przthd ! For, O sinless one ! there

is no other man
than you worthy to hear it. Nor
is it easily to be understood by (one whose) in-
ternal self (is) confused. The world of the gods 4 ,
O son of Kunti! is filled by those who perform
Arûna Mura says, the only questions among those stated

1
above, which are of use for final emancipation, have been here
answered. The others should be looked for elsewhere.
2
The original words here are identical with those at Gita, p. 139.
3
Iadopt Nilakaâ's reading here. Arûna Mijra reads
' vi^-agdhena,' which he explains to mean one who eats kinds '
of food incompatible with one another.' A third reading is

'
krz'taghnena/ ungrateful
4
See Gita, p. 84.
CHAPTER IV, 66. 255
actions. And the gods are not pleased with a

cessation of the mortal form 1
. For as to that
eternal Brahman, O son of Pntha that is the highest !
goal, where one, forsaking the body, reaches immor-

tality and is ever happy. Adopting this doctrine,
even those who are of sinful birth, women, VaLsyas,
and 6ttdras likewise, attain the supreme goal. What
then (need be said of) Brahmaâs, O son of Pntha 2 !
or well-read Kshatriyas, who are constantly intent on

their own duties, and whose highest goal is the world
of the Brahman ? This has been stated with reasons ;
and also the means for its acquisition and the fruit ;
of its full accomplishment, final emancipation, and

determination regarding misery 3
. O chief of the
descendants of Bharata ! there can be no other
happiness beyond this. The mortal, O son of
Paû ! who, possessed of talents, full of faith, and
4
energetic , casts aside as unsubstantial the (whole)
5
substance of this world he forthwith attains the ,
highest goal by these means. This is all that is

to be said, there is nothing further than this. Con-
centration of mind comes to him, O son of Prztha
who practises concentration of mind constantly
throughout six months 6
.
1
Cf. BrzTiadara;zyaka, p. 234, where ankara quotes the original
stanza, but with a reading which means, '
And the gods are not
pleased at mortals rising above (them)/ That is a better reading.
2
See GM, pp. 85, 86, where the words are nearly identical
with those in the text.
3
This is not quite clear. Does '
determination regarding
misery,' the original of which is du^khasya ka, vininzaya^, mean
'
conclusion of all misery ?' Comp. Gita, p. 79.
4
Arûna MLrra says this means assiduous.
5
I. e. wealth and so forth, says Nilakaw/â. Cf. '
human
wealth' at Sanatsu^dtiya, p. 161.
6
Cf. Maitn-upanishad, p. 154. The copy of Arguna Mijra's
256 ANUGITA.
Chapter V.
On this 1 , too, O chief of the descendants of Bha-
rata! they relate this ancient story, (in the form of) a
dialogue, which occurred, O son of Prz'tha ! between
a husband and wife. A Brcihmaâ's wife, seeing
the Brahmaâ her husband, who had gone through
all knowledge and experience 2 seated in seclusion, ,
spoke to him (thus) What world, indeed, shall I go

:
'
to, depending on you as (my) husband, you who live
renouncing (all) action, and who are harsh and un-

discerning 3 We have heard that wives attain to
.
the worlds acquired by (their) husbands. What goal,

verily, shall I reach, having got you for my husband?'
Thus addressed, that man of a tranquil self, spoke
to her with a slight smile O beautiful one O :
'
!
sinless one I am not offended at these words of

!
yours. Whatever action there is, that can be caught

(by the touch) 4 or seen, or heard, that only do the
,
men of action engage in as action. Those who are

devoid of knowledge only lodge 5 delusion in them-
selves by means of action. And freedom from action
commentary which I have used, says that the Anugita ends here.
But, as we have shown, there is a verse coming further on, which
*Sahkara/arya cites as from the Anugita. In the printed copies of
the Mahabharata the next chapter is called the Brahmaâgita.
1
I. e. the questions at p. 252, Nilaka^Ma; more probably, per-
haps, the '
doctrine ' mentioned at p. 254 is what is alluded to.
2
Cf. Gita, p. 57 and note.
3
Ntlakaw/â says this means 'ignorant that the wife has no
other support.' Arg-una Misra interprets kina\ra to mean 'indi-
gent '
instead of ' harsh/
4
So Arg-una Mirra. Nilaka/zMa's reading and his interpretation
of the passage are different.
5
I follow Ar^-una Miyra; the original literally means 'restrain.'
CHAPTER V, 12. 257
is not to be attained in this world even for an instant 1 ,
From birth to the destruction of the body, action,

good or bad, by act, mind or speech 2 does exist ,
among (all) beings. While the paths 3 (of action),

in which the materials are visible, are destroyed
by demons 4 I have perceived by means of the
,
self the seat abiding in the self 5 (the seat) where

dwells the Brahman free from the pairs of opposites,
and the moon together with the fire 6 upholding (all) ,
beings (as) the mover of the intellectual principle 7

;
(the seat) for which 8

Brahman and others concen-
trating (their minds) worship that indestructible
(principle), which learned men have their
and for
senses restrained, and their selfs tranquil, and
(observe) good vows. It is not to be smelt by
the nose, and not to be tasted by the tongue. It
is not to be touched by the sense of touch, but
is to be apprehended by the mind. It cannot be
1
Cf. Gitd, pp. 52, 53; see also, as to freedom from action,
GM, p. 127.
2
I. e. thought, word, and deed. I have in the text kept to a
more literal rendering.
8
This is Nilaka/zMa's reading and interpretation. Ar^-una Mura
reads ' and invisible/
actions visible
4
Cf. inter alia Kumara-sambhava II, 46.
5
I. e. says Arûna MLrra, the safe place, within the body and ;
says Nilakaw/â, the seat called Avimukta, between the nose and
the brows; as to which cf. GM, p. 67. In the Kenopanishad
(p. 220) the word ayatana is used to signify a means to the
attainment of the Brahman.
6
The moon and fire constitute the universe, says Arûna
Misra. Cf. GM, p. 1 1 3. Nilakaw/â interprets this more mystically
as referring to the Ida. and Pingala arteries.
7
So Nilaka^/â, but he takes it to stand for vayu or wind, as '
'
a distinct principle. The sense is by no means clear. But the

moon being the deity of the mind also may, perhaps, be described
as she is here, on that account.
8
This is Ar^-una Mura's interpretation of the original locative.
[8] S
258 anug!ta.
conquered by the eyes, and is entirely beyond the

senses of hearing. It is devoid of smell, devoid of
taste and touch, devoid of colour and sound, and

imperishable 1 (It is that) from which (this whole)
.
2
expanse (of the universe) proceeds, and on which
it rests. From this the Praâ, Ap&na, Sam&na,
Vyana, and Udana also proceed, and into it they
enter Between the Sam&na and the Vyana, the
3
.
Pr&â and the Apana moved. When that 4 is

asleep, the Samana and Vy&na also are absorbed 6 ;
and between the Prdâ and the Apana dwells the

Udclna pervading (all). Therefore the Prd/za and
the Apana do not forsake a sleeping person. That
is called the Ud&na, as the life-winds are controlled 6
(by it). And therefore those who study the Brahman

engage in penance 7
of which I am the goal 8
. In
1
Cf. note 4, p. 247 supra, and p. 253.
2
Argnna Mirra says this means the five great elements, the
eleven organs (active and perceptive, and the mind), the life-wind,
and the individual soul.
8
The Pra#a is at the nose, the Apana at the arms, the Sa-
mana at the navel, the Vy&na pervades the whole body, and the
Ud&na is at all the joints ; Yoga-sutra III, 38 seq. Nilaka/a
cf.
says this explains how the '

expanse (meaning, he says, the opera-
'
tions of the creation, Sec.) '

proceeds ' from the Brahman. See on
the life-winds, Bnhadarawyaka, p. 667; .ATMndogya, pp. 42-188;
Sankhyatattvakaumudi, p. 96; Vedanta Paribhasha, p. 45; p. 271
infra.
4
The self, Arg-una MLyra. Nilaka/z/y&a says, ' the PrS/z a accom-
panied by the Ap&na/
5
I. e. into the Praâ and Apdna, Argnna Misra.
6
Ntlakaw/â derives the word thus, utkarshe/za anayati.
7
I.e. the subjugation of the life-winds as indicated at GM, p. 61.
8
The meaning of the passage as a whole is not very clear,
and the commentators afford but little help. The sense appears
to be this ; The course of worldly life is due to the operations of
the life-winds which are attached to the self and lead to its manifes-
tations as individual souls. Of these, the Sam&na and Vyana are
CHAPTER V, 21. 259
the interior 1 in the midst of , all these (life-winds)

which move about in the body and swallow up one
another 2 blazes the Vaisv&na
, fire 3
sevenfold. The
nose, and the tongue, and the eye, and the skin,
and the ear as the fifth, the mind and the under-
4
standing, these are the seven tongues of the blaze
of Vai^vanara. That which
be smelt, that is to
which is to be drunk, that which is to be seen, that
which is to be touched, and likewise that which is
to be heard, and also that which is to be thought
of, and that which is to be understood, those are
the seven (kinds of) fuel for me 5 That which .
smells, that which eats, that which sees, that which

touches, and that which hears as the fifth, that which
thinks, and that which understands, these are the
seven great officiating priests 6 . And mark this always,
controlled and held under check by the Praa and Ap&na, into
which latter the former are absorbed in sleep. The latter two
are held in check and controlled by the Udana, which thus
controls all. And the control of this, which is the control of all
the five, and which is otherwise called penance, destroys the
course of worldly life, and leads to the supreme self.
1
I. e. within the body.
2
As explained in note 8, p. 258.
8
word I in the sentence
This, says Nilaka^/â, explains the '
'
preceding. Vaiwanara is a word often used to denote the self.

The Vishamadoki derives it thus, that which saves all beings '
;
from hell seethe Prama-upanishad, pp. 167-188 (where seven
'
tongues are also referred to) ; Muâka, p. 292 .Oandogya, ;
p. 364; Ma/^/ukya, p. 341.

4
Cf. Taittiriya-arawyaka, p. 802.
5
I. e. the Vaijvanara. Cf. Taittiriya-arawyaka, p. 803 and gloss.
6
These I take to be the powers of hearing, &c., which are
presided over by the several deities ; or, better, perhaps, they
may mean the soul distinguished as so many with reference to
these several powers; cf. Br/hadara/zyaka, p. 169; Maitri, p. 96;
Prasna, pp. 214, 215; Kaushitaki, p. 96; Aitareya, p. 187; jOan-
dogya, p. 616. The latter sense is accepted by Arûna Mura.
S 2
260 anugItA.
O beautiful one ! The learned sacrificers throwing

(in) due (form) the seven offerings into the seven
fires in seven ways, produce them in their wombs *
(namely), that which is to be smelt, that which is
to be drunk, that which is to be seen, that which
is to be touched, and likewise that which is to be
heard, that which is to be thought of, and also that

which is to be understood. Earth, air, space, water,
and light as the fifth, mind and understanding, these
seven, indeed, are named wombs. All the qualities
which stand 2 as offerings are absorbed into the
mouth of the fire 3 and having dwelt within that
;
dwelling are born in their respective wombs 4 And .
in that very (principle), which is the generator of all

entities, they remain absorbed during (the time of)
deluge. From that 5 is produced smell from that ;
is produced taste from that is produced colour

;
;
from that touch is produced from that is produced ;
sound from that doubt 6 is produced from that

; ;
is produced determination. This (is what) they know
as the sevenfold production. In this very way was

it
7
comprehended by the ancients. Becoming per-
fected by the perfect sacrifice 8 they were perfectly ,
filled with light/
1
The
next clause explains this that which is to be smelt is
;
earth, and so on throughout. The men who sacrifice all sensuous

objects, get such powers that they can create the objects whenever
they like. As to 'in their wombs/ see Yoga Bhashya, p. 108.
2
I. e. are so treated in the above allegory.
3
I. e. the Brahman.
4
I. e. when the sacrificer wishes, as stated in note i.
5
6
That principle viz. the Brahman.
This is the operation of the mind, see Gita, p. 57 note.
7
The Brahman, Ar^-una Mura. Or it may be the '
sevenfold
production/
8
The wholesale sacrifice of all sensuous perceptions. The
CHAPTER VI, 6. 26l
Chapter VI.
The Br&hma/za said

On this, too, they relate this ancient story. Learn
now of what description is the institution of the ten
sacrificial priests \ The ear 2
, the skin, the two eyes,
the tongue, the nose, the two feet, the two hands,
speech, the genital organ, and the anus, these, verily,
are ten sacrificial priests, O beautiful one ! Sound,
touch, colour, and taste, smell, words, action, motion,
and the discharge of semen, urine, and excrement,
these are the ten oblations. The quarters, wind,
sun, moon, earth and fire, and Vish/m also, Indra,
Praîpati, and Mitra, these, O beautiful one are !
the ten fires 3 The ten organs are the makers

.
of the offering; the offerings are ten, O beautiful

one ! Objects of sense, verily, are the fuel ; and they
are offered up into the ten fires. The mind is the
4
ladle and the wealth is the pure, highest know-
;
ledge (Thus) we have heard, was the universe

5
.
duly divided 6 And the mind, which is the instru-

.
root corresponding with perfect occurs three times in the original,

hence the repetition of perfect above.
1
Cf. Taittiriya-bralimawa, p. 411, and Arawyaka, p. 281.
2
Cf. Br/had&rawyaka, p. 459. The reading in the printed edition
of Bombay is defective here.
8
See p. 337 seq., where all this is more fully explained. And
cf. the analogous Buddhistic doctrine stated at Lalita Vistara (Trans-
lationby Dr.R. Mitra), p. 11.

See Taittiriya-ara/zyaka loc. cit., and cf. Gita, p. 61.
4 'The
wealth probably means the Dakshiâ to be given to the
' priests,
which is mentioned at Gita, p. 119.

5
The 'priests' here being the senses, the knowledge would
accrue to them, as to which cf, Gita, p. 108.
6
See note 3.
262 ANUGITA.
ment of knowledge, requires everything knowable 1

(as its offering). The mind is within the body the
upholder of the frame, and the knower is the upholder
of the body 2 That 3 upholder of the body is the
.
Garhapatya fire from that another is produced,

;
and the mind which is the Ahavanlya and into this ;
the offering is thrown. Then the lord of speech

was produced 4 ; that (lord of speech) looks up to
the mind. First, verily, are words produced ; and
the mind runs after them.
1
Each sense can only offer up its own perceptions the mind
offers up all knowledge whatever.
2
Ar^-una Mi^ra says this an implied simile, the mind is an
is
upholder of the body as the knower or self is.

'
'
3
Arûna MLyra says this means the mind.' I think it better'
to take it here as the self (see p. 238 supra), to which the 'mind'
and the other,' mentioned further on, would be subordinate the
'
;
'
other Ar^-una MLrra renders by the group of the senses.' The
'
'
senses are compared to fires at GM, p. 61. The passage at

Taittiriya-arawyaka above cited refers only to the Garhapatya and
Ahavaniya fires. Nilaka/zMa's text and explanation of this passage
are, to my mind, not nearly so satisfactory as Ar^-una MLrra's.
4
In the Taittiriya-br&hmafla and Ara/zyaka loc. cit., the equi-
valent of the original word for lord of speech here occurs, viz.
'
'
Vakpati for Vaâspati here; but that is there described as the

Hot/V priest, and speech itself as the Vedi or altar. The com-
mentator there interprets 'lord of speech' to mean the wind
which causes vocal activity, and resides in the throat, palate, &c.
As to mind and speech, see also isfMndogya, pp. 285-441, and
comments of *Sarikara there. The meaning of this passage,
however, is not by any means clear to my mind. The Daâhotr/
mantras in the Taittiriya are stated to be the mantras of the Ish/i,
or sacrifice, performed by Praâpati for creation. It is possible,
then, that the meaning here is, that speech which is to be learnt
by the pupil, as stated further on namely, the Vedas was first
produced from that Ish/i (cf. Kulluka on Manu I, 21). But to

understand that speech, mind is necessary; hence it is said to
look up to the mind. The Brahma/za's wife, however, seems to
understand speech as ordinary speech, hence her question.
CHAPTER VI, 15. 263
The Brahmaâs wife said

How come into existence first, and
did speech
how did the mind come into existence afterwards,
seeing that words are uttered (after they have been)
thought over by the mind ? By means of what
experience does intelligence come to the mind,
and (though) developed, does not comprehend * ?
What verily obstructs it ?
The Brahmaâ said:

The Ap&na becoming lord changes it into the
state of the Apana in consequence. That is called
the movement of the mind, and hence the mind is
in need But since you ask me a question
(of it)
2
.
regarding speech and mind, I will relate to you

a dialogue between themselves. Both speech and
mind went to the self of all beings 3 and spoke
(to him thus), 'Say which of us is superior; destroy
our doubts, O lord!' Thereupon the lord positively
said to speech, Mind (is superior)/ But speech there-
'
upon said to him,' I, verily, yield (you) your desires 4 /

1
is to my mind very hard to understand.
This, again, The
original word for intelligence is mati, which at -O&ndogya,
'
'
p. 514, Sankara interprets thus: 'intelligence is pondering, ap-

plication to (literally, respect for) the subject of thought/ The
original for developed/ Arg-una Mirra renders by mixed or assimi-
' '
lated with;' and does not comprehend/ he takes to mean 'does

'

not understand speech or words/ This question appears to be
suggested by the last words of the previous speech.
2
These two sentences are again very obscure. Ntlakaw/â, as
usual, deserts his original, giving peculiar meanings to the words
without producing any authority. Arûna Mura is very meagre,
and besides the MS. is very incorrect. See p. 264, note 5 infra.
3
I. e. Praâpati, says Arûna MLsra, which seems to be justified
by the sequel. Nilakara/â takes it to mean the individual self,
which doubtless is its meaning elsewhere, e. g. Maitri, p. 56.
4
I. e. speech conveys information on all matters, Arg-una MLrra
264 ANUGITA.
The Brihmaâ 1
said :
Know, that (in) my

two minds 2 (view), there are ,
immovable and also movable. The immovable,

verily, is with me; the movable is in your dominion.
Whatever mantra, or letter, or tone goes to your
dominion, that indeed is the movable mind 3 To .
that you are superior. But inasmuch, O beautiful

one as you came personally to speak to me (in the
!
way you did) 4 therefore, O Sarasvatt you shall

, !
never speak after (hard) exhalations 5 The goddess .
speech, verily, dwelt always between the Praâ and

Apana 6 But, O noble one going with the Apana
. !
as the means of acquiring desired fruit, visible or invisible, is
learntby speech, Nilaka^Ma. Cf. as to all this, Brzliadara/zyaka-

upanishad, pp. 50 seq. and 261.
1
I. e. Nilakaâ Brahmawa named mind/ alluding
says, ' the
apparently to p. 310 infra. But the reading of some of the
MSS., viz. Brahman for the Brdhmawa, seems preferable, having
regard to what follows. Apparently, the Brahmaâ's own speech
should begin at The goddess speech further on.
' '
2
Nilaka//a says, immovable to be understood by the external =
senses; movable=not perceptible by senses, such as heaven, &c,
which is not quite intelligible. Arûna Mirra says, the immovable
mind is that of the teacher, which is fixed, as it has not to learn or
acquire anything, while that of the pupil is movable as acquiring
new impressions and knowledge.
3
I. e. it is the movable mind which takes cognisance of the
significations of all mantras (sacred texts), letters, tones, in which,
I presume, sacred instruction is conveyed. To this mind, speech
is superior, as that mind only works on what speech places before
it ; but the mind which is '
with ' Praâpati, is superior to speech
as it is not dependent on speech like the other.
4
I. e. proudly, about her being the giver of desires to Brahman.
5
I. e., says Arg-una MLrra, the words will not come out with the
and convey any sense to the hearer, but will be
Pra/za life-wind
absorbed down into the Ap&na life-wind, and not be articulated as
speech at all. Cf. Kaushitaki, p. 41 ; Ka/â, p. 184 (with glosses);
and A'Mndogya, p. 42.
6
I. e., I presume, was dependent on the two life-winds named.
CHAPTER VI, 25. 265
wind 1 though impelled,

, (in consequence of) being
without the Praâ, she ran up to Praâpati, saying,
'
Be pleased 2 , O venerable sir
!
' Then 3 the Pra/za

appeared again nourishing speech. And therefore
speech never speaks after (hard) exhalation. It is
always noisy or noiseless. Of those two, the noise-
less is superior to the noisy 4 (speech). This excel-
lent (speech), like a cow, yields milk 5 and speaking ,
of the Brahman it always produces the eternal

(emancipation). This cow-like speech, O you of a
bright smile is divine, with divine 6 power. Observe
!
the difference of (its) two subtle, flowing (forms) 7 .
The Br&hma/zas wife said :
What of speech say on that

did the goddess
occasion when, though (she was)
in days of old,
impelled with a desire to speak, words could not
be uttered ?
The Brahmaâ said
The (speech) which is produced in the body by
Cf. p. 353 infra. For this sense of the word 'between/ see p. 258
supra, and -Oandogya-upanishad, p. 623.
1
And not with the PraVza, so as to be articulated. Cf. p. 264.
2
I.e. to withdraw the curse' pronounced, as above stated.
'
8
After the curse was withdrawn, says Arg-una Misra. Cf.
Br/hadara/zyaka, p. 317.
4
Since, says Arg-una MLrra, noiseless speech is the source of all
words Vahmaya. Perhaps we may compare Aitareya-brahmawa

(Haug), p. 47.
5
Viz. Vanmaya ; milk, as a source of pleasure.
6
I. e. enlightening, Ar^-una MLrra. But, perhaps, the translation
should be, has powers divine and not divine/
' As to this, cf. San-
khya Bhashya on III, 41, and Sarikhyatattvakaumudi, p. 118, and
Wilson's Sahkhya Karika, p. 37 (Sanskrit), and *SVeta\yvatara,
p. 284 (gloss).
7
Arnna Mi^ra refers to a '
atapatha text ' in praise of the
subtle speech. I cannot trace the text. But see Nirukta (Roth),
pp. 167-187.
266 ANUGITA.
means of the Praâ and which then goes into the1

,
Apana, and then becoming assimilated with the

Ud&na leaves the body 2 and with the Vyana ,
3
envelopes all the quarters , then (finally) dwells in
the So speech formerly spoke. Hence
Samana 4
.
the mind by reason of its being

is distinguished
immovable, and the goddess distinguished by reason
5
of her being movable .
Chapter VII.
The Brdhmaâ said
On this, too, O beautiful one ! they relate this

ancient story, (which shows) of what description is
the institution of the seven sacrificial priests 6 The .
1
Cf. -Oandogya, p. 285, and the passage there quoted by *San-
kara as well as Anandagiri's gloss. And see, too, p.
353 infra.
2
Viz. the part of it which specially appertains to speech the
throat, &c.
3
Mura.
All the n&dls or passages of the body, Arg-una
4
I. e. form of sound, as the material cause of
at the navel in the
all words. There and in that condition speech dwells after going
through the body, as above stated. There, adds Arûna Mirra,
devotees are to meditate on speech.
5
This is not quite clear, but the meaning seems to be, that the
merit of the immovable mind consists in its unchangeability, and
that of speech in being the cause of variations in the movable
mind by conveying new knowledge and new impressions. Cf. on
this result, jOandogya-upanishad, p. 482.
6
Arg-una MLrra says, the last chapter explained Pra/zayama, and
this explains PratyaMra. Praâyama is the restraint of the life-
winds, Pratyahara that of the senses, according to the Yoga
philosophy (see the quotation in the commentary at Yoga-sutra III,
1, and see also pp. 141- 145). Cf. also GM, p. 61. The Sapta-
hotn-vidhana as taught in the Taittirfya-brahmawa and Ara^yaka
is to be found a few pages after the pages referred to for the
Dasahotr/'-vidhana at p. 261 supra. And the other Vidhanas also

are to be found in the same parts of those books.
CHAPTER VII, 12. 267
nose, and the and the tongue, and the skin, and
eye,
the ear as the fifth, mind and understanding, these
are the seven sacrificial priests separately stationed.
Dwelling in a minute space, they do not perceive
each other. Do you, verily, O beautiful one ! learn
about these sacrificial priests, (which are) seven
according to (their several) natures.
The Brahma/zas wife said

How (is it) do not perceive each other,
these
dwelling (as they do) in a minute space ? What
are their natures, O venerable sir ? Tell me this,
O lord!
The Br&hma/za said:
Not knowing the qualities (of anything) is igno-
rance (ofit). Knowledge of the qualities is know-
ledge. And these never know the qualities of each
other. The tongue, the eye, the ear likewise,
the skin, the mind, and the understanding also, do
not apprehend smells, the nose apprehends them.
The nose, the eye, the ear likewise, the skin, the
mind, and the understanding also, do not apprehend
tastes, the tongue apprehends them. The nose, the
tongue, the ear likewise, the skin, the mind, and the
understanding also, do not apprehend colours, the
eye apprehends them. The nose, the tongue, and

next the eye, the ear, the understanding, the mind
likewise, do not apprehend (objects of) touch, the skin
apprehends them. The nose, the tongue, and the
eye, the skin, the mind, and the understanding also,
do not apprehend sounds, the ear apprehends them.
The nose, the tongue, and the eye, the skin, the
ear, and the understanding also, do not apprehend
doubt, the mind apprehends it. The nose, the
tongue, and the eye, the skin, the ear, and the mind
268 ANUGITA.
also, do not apprehend final determination, the under-

standing apprehends it. On this, too, they relate
this ancient story, a dialogue, O beautiful one!
between the senses and the mind.
The mind said:
The nose smells not without me, the tongue does

not perceive taste, the eye does not take in colour,
the skin does not become aware of any (object of)
touch. Without me, the ear does not in any way
hear sound. I am the eternal chief among all
elements Without me, the senses never shine,

1
.
like an empty dwelling, or like fires the flames of

which are extinct. Without me, all beings, like fuel
half dried and half moist, fail to apprehend qualities or
2
objects, even with the senses exerting themselves .
The senses said :
This would be true as you believe, if you, without

us, enjoyed the enjoyments (derived from) our objects 3 .
If when we are extinct, (there is) pleasure and support

of life, and
you enjoy enjoyments, then what you
if
believe is true or if when we are absorbed 4 and

;
,
objects are standing, you enjoy objects according

to their natures by the mere operation of the mind.
1
Cf. Kaushitaki-upanishad, p. 93; -Oandogya, p. 297; Maitri,
p. and Brzhad&ra/zyaka, p. 284.
158 ; The passages in the last two
works seem to be identical ones.
2
I. e. in their respective operations.
3
The implication, of course, is, as Arôina Mirra says, that this
is not so, as what is not perceived by the senses cannot be the
object of the mind's operations, a proposition which reminds
one of the maxim, Nihil ' est in intellectu quod non fuerit in sensu,'
apparently without Leibnitz's limitation of it. Cf. Archbishop

Thomson's Laws of Thought, p. 52.
4
As in sleep, &c.
CHAPTER VII, 27. 269
If again- you think your power over our objects

is
1
then take in colours by the nose, take
constant 9
in tastes by the eye, take in smells by the ear, take

in (objects of) touch by* the tongue, and take in sounds
by the skin, and also (objects of) 2 touch by the under-
standing. For those who are powerful have no rules
(to govern them) rules are for the weak. ; You
should accept enjoyments unenjoyed before you ;
3
ought not to enjoy what has been tasted (by others).
As a pupil goes to a preceptor for Vedic learning,
and having acquired Vedic learning from him, per-
forms the directions of the Vedic texts, so you treat
as yours 4 objects shown 5 by us, both past and
future 6 in sleep and likewise wakefulness.
, Besides,
when creatures of little intelligence are distracted
in mind, life is seen to be supported, when our
objects perform their functions. And even after
7
having carried on numerous mental operations, and

indulged in dreams, a creature, when troubled by
desire to enjoy, does run to objects of sense only.
One entering upon enjoyments, resulting from mental
operations (alone), and not connected with objects
1
I. e. if you can enjoy objects independently of the senses,
whenever you choose to perform your operations. This, says
Arg-una Mura, meets an objection which might be made, that the
mind at the time stated does not desire objects.
2
comes twice.
Sic in original. It
8
Eating what has been tasted by another is a cause of degrada-
tion. Cf. -Oandogya, p. 81; Maitri, p. 103; and p. 363 infra.
4
You incorrectly attribute to yourself the quality of appre-
hending them.
5
I. e. presented before you by us.
6
This is Arûna MLyra has, 'not past, not
not quite clear.
future;' literally, 'not come, not gone/
7
Viz. smell, sound, &c. not by the mere operations of the
;
mind, but by obtaining the objects, is life supported.

270 anug!ta.
of sense, (which is) like entering a house without

a door \ always meets death, on the exhaustion of
the life-winds 2 as a fire which is kindled (is extin-
,
guished) on the exhaustion of fuel. Granted, that

we have connexions with our (respective) qualities,
and granted that we have no perception of each
others qualities ; still, without us, you have no
3
perception , and so long no happiness can accrue
to you.
Chapter VIII.
The Brahma/za said
On this, too, they relate an ancient story, O

beautiful one ! (showing) of what description is the
institution of the five sacrificial priests. The learned
know this to be a great principle, that the Prd/za
and the Apana, and the Udana, and also the Samana
and the Vyana, are the five sacrificial priests.
The Br&hma/zas wife said

My former belief was that the sacrificial priests
4
were seven by (their) nature . State how the great
principle is that there are verily five sacrificial priests 5 .
1
The senses are the doors of the house here, as they are among
the doors of the city at GM, p. 65.
2
Owing to the want of food, &c. Cf. Maitri, p. 112, and .Oan-
dogya, p. 422.
3
Perception of pleasure, says Arg-una Mi^ra ; but he takes the
subsequent clause to mean this, 'and without you no pleasure
accrues to us either/ The text is here in an unsatisfactory state.
4
As stated in the last chapter; some MSS. read 'your' for 'my*
at the beginning of the sentence.
5
Arûna MLrra says that in this Paii&thotn-vidhana the five
chief Hotrzs only are stated for briefly explaining the Prawayama,
CHAPTER VIII, 7. 27I
The Brahmaâ said
The wind prepared by the Pra/za afterwards be-

comes the Apana. The wind prepared in the Apana
then works as the Vyana. The wind prepared by the
Vyana works as the Udana. And the wind prepared
in the Udana is produced as Samdna 1 They for- .
merly went to the grandsire, who was born first, and

said to him, 'Tell us which is greatest among us.
He shall be the greatest among us 2 /
Brahman said
He, verily, is the greatest, who being extinct, all

the life-winds in the body of living creatures become
extinct ; and on whose moving about, they again move
about. (Now) go where (you) like.
The Praâ said
When I am extinct, all the life-winds in the body
1
Ar^-una Mi^ra says, ' The wind going to the Praa, and being
obstructed in upward progress by the Pra/za, goes to the Apana,
and then unable to go upwards or downwards, enters the passages
or naafts of the body and becomes Vyana. In the same way Udana,
by the collision of the two, produces sound in the throat, and de-
pends on Praraa and Apana so, too, the Samana dwelling in the
;
navel and kindling the gastric fire is also dependent on those two/
The meaning seems to be that one life- wind is distributed in the
different places, and gets different names, as stated, in the order
mentioned. See Maitri, p. 28.
2
A similar visit
on the part of the Praâs (who, however, are not
there the life-winds only, but the Praâ life-wind and the active
organs) to Praâpati is mentioned at Brz'hadarawyaka-upanishad,
p. 1016, and -Oandogya, p. 297. Cf. also Pra^na, p. 178; Brz-
haddrawyaka, p. 317; and Kaushitaki, p. 63. See also, generally, as
to the life- winds and their functions, Br/haddrawyaka, p. 280, and
iSahkara's comment there Yoga-sutras III, 38, and comment
;
Cowell's note at Maitri, p. 247; *Santi Parvan (Moksha Dharma),

chap. 184, st. 24-25 ; chap. 185, st. 1 seq.; and p. 258 supra.
272 ANUGITA.
of living creatures become extinct; and on my moving

about, they again move about. I am the greatest.
See I am extinct!
The Brahmaâ said

Then the Praâ became extinct, and again moved
about. Then the Samana and Udana also 1
, O
beautiful one! spoke these words, 'You do not per-
vade all this here as we do. You are not the greatest
among us, O Pra/za, because the Ap&na is subject
to you V The Pra/za again moved about 3 and , the
4
Ap&na said to him.
The Ap&na said

When I am extinct, all the life-winds in the body
of living creatures become extinct; and on my moving
about, they again move about. I am the greatest.
See I am extinct
The Brahmaâ said

Then the Vyna and the Ud&na addressed him
who was speaking (thus) You are not the greatest, :
'
O Ap&na because the Priâ is subject to you/

!
Then the Ap&na moved about, and the Vy&na spoke

to him I am the greatest among (you) all.
:
'
Hear
the reason why. When I am extinct, all the life-
winds in the body of living creatures become extinct.
1
Arôina Mwra says, Vyana and Apana also by force of the two
' ands' which occur in the original; and so in other places too.
2
Arûna MLrra says on this, 'The Praa moves upwards through
the help of the Apana. If it moved downwards, it would be simply
absorbed into the Apana/
3
I. e. recommenced its proper operation in its proper place.
4
And the other life-winds also, Arg-una Mura says, the name
Praa being merely indicative/ as the phrase
'
is, of the class to
which it belongs.
CHAPTER VIII, 21. 273
And on my moving about, they again move about.

I am the greatest See I am extinct
!
The Brahmaâ said:

Then the Vyana became and again moved extinct,
about. And the Pra/za and Apana, and the Udana, and
the Samana, spoke to him, You are not the greatest '
among us, O Vyana because the Samana 1 is subject

!
to you.' The Vy&na moved about again, and the

Samdna spoke again. I am the greatest among
'
(you) all. Hear the reason why. When I am extinct,

all body of living creatures
the life-winds in the
become extinct and on my moving about, they again
;
move about. I am the greatest. See I am extinct

'
Then the Samdna moved about, and the Udana said

to him I am the greatest among (you) all.
:
'
Hear the
reason why. When I am extinct, all the life-winds
in the body of living creatures become extinct and ;
on my moving about, they again move about. I am

the greatest. See I am extinct!' Then the Udana
became extinct, and again moved about. And the
Pra/za and Apana, and the Samana, and the Vyana
also, spoke to him: *0 Udcina! you are not the
greatest. The Vyana 2 only is subject to you/
The Br&hma/za said
Then Brahman, the lord of (all) creatures, said to

them who were assembled together You are :
'
all
greatest, and not greatest 3 . You are all possessed
1
Because the Samana helps in the digestion of the food which
afterwards goes to the Vyana for distribution through the naafts.
2
Because the Udana is able to generate sound after the na</is
are filled up by the Vyana.
3
'Not greatest' because none of them is independent of the
other.
i
Greatest ' Arg-una Mi^ra renders by '
superior to objects/
[8] T
274 anugIta.
of one another's qualities 1 . All are greatest in their

own spheres, and all support one another. There
2
is one unmoving (life -wind). There are others
moving about, (which are) five, owing to (their) speci-
fic qualities. My own
one only 3 (but) accumu-self is ,
lated in numerous (forms). Being friendly with one

another, and pleasing one another, go away happily.
Welfare be to you Support one another/ !
Chapter IX.
The Brdhmaâ said

On this, too, they relate this ancient story, a
dialogue between Narada and the sage Devamata.
Devamata said
When a creature is about to be born, what comes

into existence first, his Pra/za, or Apana, or Samana,
or Vyana, or else Udana ?
Narada said
By whichever the creature is produced, that which
is other than this first comes to him. And the pairs
of the life-winds should be understood, which (move)
upwards, or downwards, or transversely.
1
This is not quite clear. I presume it means that each one has
the generic qualities which make the others great in their own
spheres ; but the specific qualities are different.
2
The one life-wind is supposed here to be generally unmoving,
but its distribution among the different parts of the body as spe-
cified, for instance, in commentary on the Yoga-sutra III, 38,
the
gives it The expression does not seem to be
the different names.
quite accurate for this, which nevertheless seems to be the true, sense.
3
Another reading is, That one is my own self/ Cf. Maitri,
'
pp. 28 seq., 105, and Bn'hadarawyaka, p. 169.

CHAPTER IX, 9. 275
Devamata said :
By which (of the life-winds) is a creature produced ?

and which (of them) first comes to him ? Explain
to me also the pairs of the life-winds, which (move)
upwards, or downwards, or transversely.
Narada said :
Pleasureproduced from a mental operation 1

is ,
and (it) is also produced from a sound, (it) is also

produced from taste, and (it) is also produced from
colour, and (it) is also produced from touch, and
(it) is also produced from smell. This is the effect 2
of the Udana the pleasure is produced from union 3
; .
From desire the and from the

semen is produced ;
semen is produced menstrual excretion. The semen

and the blood are produced by the Sam&na and the
Vyana in common 4 From the combination of the .
semen and the blood, the Prdâ comes first into

operation and the semen being developed by the
;
Praâ, the Ap&na then comes into operation. The

pair Praâ and Apana go upwards and downwards,
and the Samana and Vyana are called the pair
(moving) transversely. It is the teaching of the
1
I. e. Sound' = recollection of a woman's voice taste,'
desire. '
;
'
scil. of chastity; colour '= the beauty of a woman, Arûna MLsra.

'
Cf. Apastamba I, 2, 7, 8, and Lalita Vistara, p. 19.

2
Literally, form,' which Arg-una MLsra interprets to mean effect,
'
and adds, The Udana causes mental activity, and by mental acti-
*
vity sound &c. are apprehended.

I. e. of Udana and mind, Arg-una Mura
3 l
; adding, the result is
that a creature is produced by the Udana.'

4
Or, perhaps, generally, that is to say, the store of them, the
specific semen being produced from desire, as before stated. The
Samana's function is the digestion of food, and that of the Vyana
is the distribution of the digested food to the whole body through
the nai/is, hence the proposition in the text.
T 2
276 ANUGITA.
Veda, that the fire verily is all the deities 1 and ,
knowledge (of it) arises among Brahmaâs, being

accompanied by intelligence 2 The smoke of that .
(fire), which is of excellent glory, (appears) in the
shape of (the quality of) darkness (its) ashes, (the ;
quality of) passion and (the quality of) goodness

;
3
is that in connexion with it in which the offering ,
is thrown. Those who understand the sacrifice under-
stand the Samana and the Vyana as the principal

(offering). The Praâ and Apana are portions 4 of
the offering of clarified butter, and between them
is the That is the excellent seat of the Udana
fire.
as understood by Brihmaâs 5 As to that which .
is distinct from these pairs 6

, hear me speak about
1
Cf. inter alia, Aitareya-brahmawa (Haug's ed.), p. 1.
2
Arg-una Misra says intelligence means discussion, or argument/ '
The connexion of this with what has gone before, according to

Arg-una Mwra, is this, that the author having first stated the five
Hotrzs fully, now explains in what the Praa and Apana are to be
offered up for acquiring the Pra/zayama. The fire he takes to mean
the self. Cf. what has been said about Vauvanara above, p. 259.
3
That is to say, the flame, I take it. He is drawing out here
the figure of the fire.
4
These are only a subordinate part of the offering, called A^ya-
bMga. They are called subordinate, I suppose, as the operations
of the Samana and Vyana are more practically important for vita-
lity. The fire is the self. The place of the principal offering is
between the A^yabhagas, as stated by Arûna Mwra.
6
The Udana is here treated as the life-wind into which the others
are to be offered up. See p. 258, and note 8 there.
6
The next three sentences seem to indicate what is to be de-
stroyed in common with the life- winds. One has to get rid of all
notions about day and night, good and evil, existence and non-
existence, and then final emancipation is reached. The fire, which
is common to all the passages, stands for the self; into that appa-
rently all the ideas of time, and good and evil, and so forth, are to
be offered as the life-winds are ; and that fire stands in the place of
CHAPTER X, 2. 277
that. Day and night are a pair, between them

is the fire. That is the excellent seat of the Udana
as understood by Brahmaâs. That which exists
and that which does not exist are a pair, between
them isThat is the excellent seat of the
the fire.
Ud&na as understood by Brahmaâs. The two

good and evil are a pair, between them is the
fire. That is the excellent seat of the Udana as
understood by Brclhma/zas. First 1 the Samana and ,
Vy&na, their function 2 is performed then, secondly, :
the Samana comes into operation again. Then the

Vimadevya for tranquillity, and tranquillity is the
3
eternal Brahman. This is the excellent seat of the

Udana as understood by Brahmaâs.
Chapter X.
On this, too, they relate an ancient story (showing)
of what nature is the institution of the iTaturhotra 4 .
The due performance of it in its entirety is now

taught. Hear me, O good woman! state this won-
the Udana, for this purpose, as into the last all the other life-winds
have to be offered. As to that which exists, &c., cf. Gita, p. 103,
and 370, note 9 infra.

p. As to good and evil and generally, cf.
.^TMndogya, p. 60; Kaushitaki, p. 19. They are nothing to one
who knows the Brahman. Day and night Arg-una MLsra takes to
mean the Ida and Pingala naWis, between which is the Sushurrma,
as they are connected with the sun and moon. But the sense of
the whole passage is far from clear.
1
Ar^-una MLrra understands these to be three Savanas.
2
Of taking into the nadis the food digested in the night, this is
the morning Savana ; the afternoon Savana is the kindling of the

gastric fire for digesting new food.
3
The Vamadevya is a sukta beginning 'Kaya nas &tra' (Rv. IV,
31, 1). The singing of it is the third Savana, Arûna Mwra. And
see Taittiriya-ara^yaka, p. 889.
4
Cf. Aitareya-brahmawa (Haug), pp. 132, 133.
278 ANUGITA.
derful mystery. The instrument, the action, the

agent, and emancipation 1
, these, indeed, O you of
a (pure) heart! are the four Hotrzs by whom this
universe is enveloped. Hear also the assignment
of causes exhaustively 2 . The nose, and the tongue,
and the eye, and the skin, and the ear as the fifth,
mind and understanding, these seven should be un-
derstood to be the causes of (the knowledge of 3 )
qualities. Smell, and taste, and colour, sound, and
touch as the fifth, the object of the mental opera-
tion and the object of the understanding 4 these ,
seven are causes of action. He who smells, he who

eats, he who sees, he who speaks, and he who hears
as the fifth, he who thinks, and he who understands,
these seven should be understood to be the causes
of the agents 5 These 6 being possessed of qualities 7
. ,
,
enjoy their own qualities, agreeable and disagree-

able. And I am here devoid of qualities. Thus
these seven are the causes of emancipation 8
. And
among the learned who understand (everything), the
1
Cf. as to the three first, GM, p. 1 23. They are the four categories,
to one or other of which everything in the world may be referred.
2
The texts here differ. Aignna Mirra's reading he interprets
to mean '
the subjugation of these Hotr/s.' The reading followed
in the textseems to some extent to be supported by the sequel.
But the passage altogether is not very clear.
3

So Arûna Mura through these the knowledge of the quali-
ties of objects of sense is acquired.
4
The sensations, or perceptions, referred to lead to action.
5
This seems to mean, that the powers of smelling, &c, when
attributed to the self, make him appear as an agent, as an active
principle.
6
I. and instrument, Arûna Mura.
e. action, agent,
7
I. e. the three, goodness, passion,
and darkness.
8
It is these seven from which the self is to be emancipated.
' I ' must mean the self, not the Brahmaraa who speaks,
CHAPTER X, 14. 279
qualities 1 which are in the position of the deities, each

in its own place, always enjoy the offering according
to prescribed rules. To him who is not learned, eating
various (kinds of) food, the (feeling of this or that
being) mine adheres. And cooking food for him-
self, he, through the (feeling of this or that being)
mine, is ruined 2 . The eating of that which should
not be eaten, and drinking of intoxicating drinks also
destroys him. He destroys the food, and destroying
that food he is destroyed in return. The learned
man, being (himself) a ruler, destroying this food
again produces it
3
. And not even a trifling obstacle 4
arises tohim from that food. Whatever is thought

by the mind 6 whatever is spoken by speech, what-
,
ever is heard by the ear, whatever is seen by the

eye, whatever is touched by the sense of touch, and
whatever is smelt by the nose, absorbing all these
offerings from all sides, together with those (senses)
which with the mind are six 6 , my fire 7
of (high)
qualifications 8
, shines dwelling within the body. My
sacrifice of concentration of mind is in progress, the
performance of which yields the fire

9
of knowledge
1
I.e., I presume, the senses. Cf. Gita, p. 55. The learned do not
suppose their self to have aught to do with them. Cf. Gita, p. 64.
2
Cf. Gita, p. 53; Manu III, 118.
8
His knowledge gives him this power. He is not '
destroyed
by the food as the other man is. Nilaka//$a compares Br/hadara-
*zyaka, p. 884. See too p. 260, note 1 supra.
4
I.e. mischief owing to the destruction of life necessary for
getting food, says Nilaka/>â quoting BrzTiadara/zyaka, p. 913.
5
This includes the operation of the understanding also. Nila-
kan/M says this verse explains what the word food means here. '
'
6
For the phrase cf. Gita, p. 112.
7
That is to say, my self, Ar^-una Mura. See p. 259, note 3 supra.
8
As the objects of sense &c. are all absorbed into it.
9
It is called fire/ as it burns up all action.
'
Cf. Gita, p. 62.
280 ANUGiTA,
the Stotra in which, is the upward life-wind; the6astra,

the downward life-wind and which is very beneficial;
on account of the abandonment of everything the l

;
Brahman priest in which, is the counsellor in all
action 2 ; the Hotrz priest, the self; the Adhvaryu

priest, (the self) whose hymn of praise 3 is the offer-
ing ; the 6astra of the Prasastrz, truth ; and the
Dakshi/zi, final On this, too, Rik
emancipation.
verses are recited by the men who understand
Narayaâ 4 the god N^riyaâ to whom they for-
merly offered animal 5 (offerings). On that Saman
hymns 6 are sung, of which an illustration is stated 7 .
1
Aig-una MLra's commentary is not intelligible here, so I follow
Nilaka/z/$a, but diffidently.
2
I. e. the mind, say the commentators. '
Manta' simply is given
among the synonyms of Ahankara at Sarikhya-sara, p. 16.
3
I. e. the actions performed for knowledge of the truth, Arg-una
MLn-a.
4
Nilaka/a refers to a Rik 'Tapa dsid-grzhapatih/ and also the
famous allegory at the end of the Taittiriya-ara^yaka. These are
cited, he says, as authorities for this sacrifice (consisting of) con-
'
centration of mind/
5
I. e. the senses, Nilakaâ. Arûna Miyra compares the
whole passage with the Purusha Sukta, which are the Rik verses
alluded to, according to him. He refers for further explanations to
his own commentary on that sukta of the Rig-veda.
6
They sing these hymns, out of the gratification produced by
knowledge of the self, says Nilakaw/fo, and he cites Taittiriya-
ara/zyaka, p. 749. See also Taittiriya-upanishad, p. 138, and An-
kara's commentary there.
7
The readings of our texts here are not very satisfactory. The
illustration is stated, says Nilaka^/â, whose reading we by
follow,
the Taittiriyas in the passage referred to in the last note. Arûna
Mwra^ reading means such as Tahu /ahu/ '
which would seem to
be the words of the Saman hymn referred to. But his commentary
does not show what the words before him were. The whole figure
as drawn out in this passage is not quite clear, though the general
sense is pretty intelligible. Cf. the allegories at Aitareya-brahmaa,
pp. 132, 133, and at the close of the Taittiriya-ara/zyaka.

CHAPTER XI, 3. 28l
O modest one ! understand that god Naraya/za, who

is the self of everything.
Chapter XL
There one director
is 1
there is no second di- ;
rector. Ispeak concerning him who abides in the

heart. This being, the director, dwells in the heart
and directs (all creatures). Impelled by that same
(being), I move as I am ordered, like water on a
declivity. There is one instructor there is no ;
second (different) from him. I speak concerning

him who abides in the heart. Taught by that in-
structor, all snakes whatever are ever hated in
the world 2 . There is one kinsman; there is no
second (different) from him. I speak concerning
him who abides in the heart. Taught by him

kinsmen are possessed of kinsmen 3 (and) the seven ,
i?zshis, O son of Pntha 4 shine in heaven 5 There ! .
1
I. e. the Supreme Being, Arûna Mura. Nilakaw/fta connects
this with the preceding chapter by saying that this describes Nara-
yawa, who is there mentioned. See *Santi Parvan (Moksha Dharma),
chap. 226, st. 8 (Bombay ed.)
2
The Supreme
natural feelings of animosity are caused by the
Being Such seems to be the meaning. Cf. Gita, pp. 128,
within.
129. I may remark that Arûna Misra seems to interpret the
original words, which we have rendered by I speak concerning *
him,' &c, to mean I repeat what has been said by/ &c.
'
This
does not seem to me to be satisfactory and it may be added, too, ;
that Arûna Mora's interpretation appears in his gloss not on the

first verse, about the '
director/ but only on the second, about the
* instructor/ Hated=full of animosity, Nilaka/a.
3
I. e. the feeling of kinsmanship arises from his inspiration.
4
The poet seems to be nodding here, as this expression cannot
form part of the Brahmaâ's speech to his wife.
5
The seven sages are always mentioned together, and may
well be spoken of as types of the feeling of kinship.
282 ANUGITA.
is one hearer 1 there is no second (different) from

;
him. I speak concerning him who abides in the
heart. Living under that instructor, (according to

the proper mode of) living with an instructor,
vSakra 2 acquired immortality in all worlds. There
is one enemy there is no second (different) from
;
him. I speak concerning him who abides in the
heart. Taught by that instructor, all snakes what-

ever are ever hated in the world 3 On this, too, .
they relate an ancient story, (about the) instruction

of the snakes, and the gods, and sages, by Praâpati.
The gods, and sages, and the snakes, and the de-
mons, approaching Praâpati, said (to him) Tell us :
'
the highest good/ To them who were inquiring

about the highest good, the venerable one said,
'
Om 4 the Brahman, in a single syllable/ Hearing
,
that, they ran away in (various) directions 5 . When

they were running for instruction regarding the self,
the inclination of the snakes to biting had been

already formed. The natural inclination of the de-
mons towards ostentatiousness had been formed. The
gods had been engaged in gifts, and the great sages
in restraint of the senses. Having had one teacher,
1
Nilakaw//â takes this to mean pupil, but it is difficult to recon-
cile that with the rest of the passage. Ar^-una Misra renders it by
'
the destroyer of every one's doubts/ For that, it will be necessary
to take the word as a form of the causative, and not the simple root
jru, to hear. But see, too, p. 283, 'the instructor . . . the hearer.'
2
Cf. Sanatsug-atiya, p. 152, note 1.
3
The words here are nearly the same as before; the commenta-
tors give no explanation of the repetition. But see p. 281, note 2.
4
Cf. Gita, p. 79. The full sense is that from the study of this
Om the highest good is attained.
5
I. e. to their own dwellings, believing that they had learnt what
they wanted.
CHAPTER XI, 17. 283
and having been instructed with one word, the snakes,

the gods, the sages, and the demons, all engaged in
different 1
(pursuits). One hears what is said (to
one) and apprehends it duly; (but even) to one who
inquires and extols highly, there is no other in-
structor 2 And by his counsel does action afterwards
.
take place. The instructor, the learner, the hearer, and

the enemy, are always within the heart. Acting sin-
fully in the world, he becomes (a man of) sinful
conduct. Acting virtuously in the world he becomes
(a man of) virtuous conduct 3 And he becomes a .
man of conduct according to his own desire 4 who, ,
owing to his desires, is given up to the pleasures of

the senses. But he who, casting aside vows 5 and
actions, merely adheres to the Brahman, he moving
about in the world identifying himself with the
Brahman, becomes a Brahmaârin. To him the
Brahman itself is the fuel, the Brahman the fire,
the Brahman his origin, the Brahman water, the
Brahman the instructor. He is rapt in the
The meaning seems to be that the original inclination was

1
not altered by thenew instruction received by them. Nilaka/yfe

seems to understand the passage differently. What has been ren-
dered in the text by when they were running for instruction/
'
he renders by when they were practically carrying out the instruc-

'
;
tion received by them but this rendering seems to omit all consi-
'
deration of the words '

Purvameva tu '

already. Though, therefore,
there are one or two circumstances in favour of this construction,
I have adopted the other. Cf. B/YhadaraTzyaka, p. 964.
2
The meaning is that the real instructor is within oneself,
(
abiding in the heart/ as said before, although instruction may in
form be received from one outside, of whom one seeks to learn,
and whom one respects (or extols highly, as the text has it), and
although such instruction may be well apprehended.
3 4
Cf. Br/hadarawyaka, pp. 546-853. See Gita, p. 117.
6
I. e. fasts and other like observances.
284 anugitA.
Brahman 1 Such is this subtle life as a Brahma/arin

.
understood by the wise. Understanding it they

practised it, being instructed by the Kshetra^fia 2 .
Chapter XII.
The Br^hmaâ said
have crossed beyond that very impassable
I
place, in which fancies are the gadflies and mos-

quitoes 3
in which grief and joy are cold and heat,
,
in which delusion is the blinding darkness, in which

avarice is the beasts of prey and reptiles, in which de-
sire and anger are the obstructors, the way to which
consists in worldly objects, and is to be crossed by
one singly 4 And I have entered the great forest 5
. .
The Brahmaâs wife said :
Where is that forest, O very intelligent person

what are the trees (there), and what the rivers, and
the hills and mountains and at what distance is ;
that forest?
1
Cf. Gita, p. 61. The water is that required for the sacrifice.
The words '
the Brahman is his origin are not quite clear, as being
'
not connected with the figure employed. Perhaps it might be
taken otherwise thus, '

the Brahman (is) the fire produced from
the Brahman/ this last standing for the aram.
I. e. one who understands the truth, Nilakaâ
2
God, Arûna ;
Mi^ra. The same sentence winds up two of the following chapters;

and at p. 310 Kr/sha says the Kshetra^na signifies the supreme
self. See Gita, p. 102 seq.
3
Cf. Lalita Vistara, p. 44.
4
I. e. not with the help of son, wealth, &c, says Nilaka#//$a, as
each man's salvation after having got into the course of worldly life
depends on himself. Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 193,
Cf. *Santi
st. and Manu IV, 240; obstructor, thief, Arg-una MLsra.
32,
5
I. e. the Brahman. Nilakaw/â compares a text from the *Sruti,
'
Kim svid vanaw ka u sa vn'ksha asa ;' see Rig-veda X, 31, 7.
CHAPTER XII, 8. 285
The Brahma/za said
There is nothing else more delightful than that,

when there is no distinction from it. There is
nothing more afflicting than that, when there is a
distinction from it \ There is nothing smaller than
that, there is nothing larger than that 2 There is .
nothing more subtle than that there is no other ;
happiness equal to that. Entering it, the twice-

born do not grieve, and do not exult They 3
.
are not afraid of anybody, and nobody is afraid

of them. In that forest 4 are seven large trees 5 ,
seven fruits, and seven guests seven hermitages, ;
seven (forms of) concentration, and seven (forms

of) initiation. This is the description of the forest.
That forest is filled with trees producing splendid
flowers and fruits of five colours 6 That forest .
1
Cf. -O&ndogya, pp. 516, 517.
2
Cf. Sanatsuâtiya, p. 180 and note there.
3
Cf. as to all this GM, p. 101.
4
This is not the forest spoken of before, but what has been
before called the 'impassable place/ but which also at p. 286 is
by implication called a forest, viz. the course of worldly life.

5
Viz. the eye, ear, tongue, skin, and nose, and the mind, and
understanding these are called trees, as being producers of the
fruits, namely, the pleasures and pains derived from their several
operations ; the guests are the powers of each sense personified
they receive the fruits above described ; the hermitages are the
treesabove mentioned, in which the guests take shelter ; the seven
forms of concentration are the exclusion from the self of the seven
functions of the seven senses &c. already referred to ; the seven
forms of initiation refer to the initiation into the higher life, by repu-
diating as not one's own the actions of each member out of the group
of seven. Cf. as to this .Oandogya, p. 2 1 9, and commentary there.
6
Cf. for these different numbers of colours, Yoga-sutra II, 19, and
commentary, p. 105, and Sarikhya-sara, p. 1 8. The trees here meant
are the Tanmatras, or subtle elements, and the theory is that the
Gandha-tanmatra, or subtle element of smell, has five qualities, its
286 ANUGITA.
is filled with trees producing flowers and fruits of

four colours. That forest is filled with trees pro-
ducing flowers and fruits of three colours, and mixed.
That forest is filled with trees producing flowers
and fruits of two colours, and of beautiful colours.
That forest is filled with trees producing flowers
and fruits of one colour, and fragrant. That forest
is filled with two large trees producing numerous
flowers and fruits of undistinguished colours *.
There is one fire 2 here, connected with the Brah-
man 3 and having a good mind 4 And there is
, .
fuel here, (namely) the five senses. The seven

(forms of) emancipation from them are the seven
(forms of) initiation 5
. The qualities are the fruits,
and the guests eat the fruits. There, in various
places, the great sages receive hospitality. And
when they have been worshipped and have dis-
6
appeared , another forest shines forth, in which
intelligence is the tree, and emancipation the fruit,
and which possesses shade (in the form of) tran-
own special one, so to say, and the four special ones of the others
the next is taste, the next colour, the next touch, and the last sound;
each has one quality less than its predecessor. See Yoga-sutra, p. 106,
and gloss Sankhya-sutra I, 62 and Vedanta Paribhasha, p. 45.
; ;
1
These are mind and understanding ; the fruits and flowers are
here of undistinguished colours/ as the text expresses
' it, since they
include the colours of all the fruits of all the other five sets of trees;
that is to say, the subject-matter of their operations is sound, taste,
&c, the subject-matters of all the senses together. 'Undistinguished
colours' is, perhaps, more literally 'of colours not clear/ Argnna
Misra paraphrases it by of variegated colours/ which is no doubt
*
the true ultimate sense.

2
The self, Nilaka^/â. See p. 279, note 7 supra.
3
I. e., I presume, devoted to the Brahman.
4 5
I. e. true knowledge, Arûna Mura. See note 5, p. 285.
6
I. e. when the senses having worked, as unconnected with the self,
are finally absorbed into it. Cf. Sankhya-karika 49andKa/â, p. 151.

CHAPTER XII, 21. 287
quillity, which depends on knowledge, which has con-

tentment for water, and which has the Kshetra^fia
its
within for the sun. The good who attain to that,

have no fear afterwards. Its end cannot be per-
ceived upwards or downwards or horizontally \
There always dwell seven females there 2 with faces ,
(turned) downwards, full of brilliance, and causes of

generation. They absorb 3 all the higher delights
of people, as inconstancy (absorbs) everything 4 .
In that same 5
(principle) the seven perfect sages,
together with their chiefs, the richest and 6
, abide,
again emerge from the same. Glory, brilliance, and
greatness, enlightenment, victory, perfection, and

power 7 these seven rays follow after this same
sun. Hills and mountains also are there collected
together, and rivers and streams flowing with water
produced from the Brahman 8 And there is the con- .
fluence of the rivers in the secluded place 9 for the
1
It extends on all sides, its end cannot be perceived on any side.
2
These are, according to Aigiina Miira, the Mahat, Ahankara,
and five Tanmatras. Their faces are turned downwards, as they
are obstacles in the way upwards, viz. the way of final emancipa-
tion ; they are brilliant, as they light up the course of worldly life
and hence, too, they are '

causes of generation/ They give birth
to the universe.
3
They conceal the higher delight of final emancipation.
4
I follow Arg-una Mura, but the text is doubtful.
5
Viz. the Brahman.
6
Cf. .Oandogya, pp. 295-300. The word sages here, as before,
means the various organs. See Brz'hadarawyaka, p. 415.
7
Glory = renown; brilliance = Brahmic splendour (Brahmateâs);
perfection = obtaining what desired; power = not being conquered
is
by others, Argxma Misra. About the sun, see line 3 of text above.
8
I. e. contentment. See the second line in the text above.
9 (
I. e. the space in the heart, the sacrifice being that of con-
centration of
mind/ yogaya^na, Nilakaâ. A confluence of
rivers is very sacred
here the meaning intended seems to be the
absorption of all desires by contentment into the heart.
288 anugIta.
sacrifice, whence those who are contented in their

own selfs repair to the divine grandsire himself.
Those whose wishes are reduced 1 whose wishes ,
are (fixed) on good vows, whose sins are burnt up

by penance, merging the self in the self 2 devote ,
themselves to Brahman. Those people who under-

3
stand the forest of knowledge ,
praise tranquillity.
And aspiring to that forest, they are born so as
4
not to lose courage . Such, indeed, is this holy
forest, as understood by Br&hma/zas. And under-
standing it, they act (accordingly), being directed
by the Kshetra^na.
Chapter XIII.
The Brahma/za said
do not smell smells, I perceive no tastes, I see

I
no colour, and I do not touch, nor yet do I hear

various sounds, nor even do I entertain any fancies 5 .
Nature desires objects which are liked nature ;
hates all (objects) which are hateful 6 Desire and .
hatred are born from nature 7 as the upward and ,
1
Literally, ' lean/
2
body in the soul, Arg-una Mkra.
I. e. the
3
Knowledge is Brahman, which is described as a forest here,
Arg-una Mura.
4
Cf. Gita, p. 70.
5
This is the name for the operations of the mind.
6
The sense is similar to that at Gita,, p. 55. The self has nothing
to do with these feelings ; the qualities deal with the qualities.
7
Cf. Gita, p. 65. The meaning of nature here, as in the Gita,
is in substance the result of all previous action with which the self
has been associated, which result, of course, exists connected not
with the self, but with the developments of nature, in the form of body,
CHAPTER XIII, 7. 289
downward life-winds, after attaining to the bodies of

living creatures. Apart from them, and as the
constant entity underlying them, I see the individual
self in the body. Dwelling in that (self), I am in
1
no wise attached (to anything) through desire or
anger, or old age, or death. Not desiring any
object of desire, not hating any evil, there is no
tainton my natures 2 as there is no (taint) of a drop

,
of water on lotuses 3 They are inconstant things .
appertaining to this constant (principle) which looks

on various natures. Although actions are per-
formed, the net of enjoyments does not attach itself
to it, as the net of the sun's rays does not attach
itself to the sky 4
. On this 5
, too, they relate an
ancient story, (in the shape of) a dialogue between
an Adhvaryu priest and an ascetic. Understand
that, O glorious one! Seeing an animal being
sprinkled at a sacrificial ceremony, an ascetic who
6
was sitting (there) spoke to the Adhvaryu, censur-

ing (the act) as destruction of life. The Adhvaryu
senses, &c. The comparison appears to mean that the feelings of

desire &c. are, like the life-winds, self, though
unconnected with the
associated with and are both alike manifestations of nature.
it,
1
Nilaka/#a compares Brz'hadararayaka, p. 770. Arg-una Mi^ra
has a different reading, meaning liable (to be subjugated)/ '
2
The plural, which is in the original, is unusual. The various
aspects of the '
result' stated in p. 288, note 7, being looked at
separately, are described as 'natures,' like the leaves of a lotus, which

in their ensemble make one lotus.
3
p. 64 supra.
Lalita Vistara, p. 2, and
4
The seems to be somewhat like that at Gitd, p. 82, about
figure
the atmosphere and space, which latter remains untainted by the
former. Looking on various natures, i. e. as distinct from the self.
5
Viz. the remaining untainted.
6
I. e. with water, preparatory to its being offered up for the
sacrifice.
[8] U
29O ANUGITA.
answered him (saying), this goat will not be de-

stroyed. (This) creature will obtain welfare, since
the Vedic text is such. For that part of him which
is of the earth will go to the earth ; whatever in
him is produced from water, that will enter water.
His eye (will enter) the sun, (his) ear the quarters,
and his life-winds likewise the sky 1 . There is no
offence on my part, adhering (as I do) to the
2
scriptures .
The Ascetic said

If you perceive (that) good (will) result upon his
life being severed (from him), then the sacrifice
is what benefit (is it) to you ? Let the
for the goat,
brother, father, mother, and friend (of the goat) give
you their consent 3 take him (to them) and consult
;
(them), especially as he is dependent. You ought

to inquire of those who can give their consent thus.
After hearing their consent, (the matter) will be
fit for consideration 4
. The life-winds 5
, too, of this
goat have gone to their sources, and I think only
his unmoving body remains. To those who wish
to derive enjoyment from the slaughter (of a living
creature), the unconscious body being comparable
to fuel, that which is called an animal becomes
1
Cf. Br*hadara;zyaka, p. 542, and p. 337 below.
2
Cf. .ffMndogya-upanishad, p. 627, and also -Sariraka Bh&shya
on Sutra III, 1, 25, p. 774.
8
I. e. for his slaughter, which is to bring welfare to the goat.
Aignna Mura says that this is a sort of reductio ad absurdum,
as the sacrifice is in truth not in the interests of the goat at all.
* Viz. whether the goat should be killed. Without their consent

he ought not to be slaughtered ; with their consent, it becomes a
matter for consideration, Arguna Mirra.
6
It may also mean the senses, as in the iTMndogya, p. 297.
CHAPTER XIII, 21. 29
the fuel 1 . The teaching of the elders 2 is, that re-

fraining from slaughter (of living creatures) is (the
duty) among all duties. We maintain that that
action should performed which involves no
be
slaughter. (Our) proposition is no slaughter (of living
creatures). If I spoke further, it would be possible
to find fault with your proceedings in many ways 3 .
Always refraining from the slaughter of all beings is

what we approve. We substantiate (this) from what
is actually visible
4
we do not rely on what is not
,
visible.
The Adhvaryu said
You enjoy the earth's quality of fragrance, you

drink watery juices, you see the colours of shining
bodies, you touch the qualities of the air, you hear
the sound produced in space, you think by the mind
(on the objects of) mental operations. And all
these entities, you believe, have life. You have not

(then) abstained from taking life. You are (engaged)
5
in the slaughter (of living creatures) . There is no
movement without slaughter (of living creatures).
6
Or what do you think, O twice-born one ?

1
This is not very clear, but the meaning seems to be that the
slaughter is committed for the enjoyment of the sacrificer; the
sacrificer only requires fuel, and the slaughtered animal is then
used for that purpose.
2
^ândogya, p. 627, and next note; and Gita, inter alia,
Cf.
3
p. 114, and p. 348 infra. See Sahkhyatattvakaumudi, p. 7.
4
I. e. a rule expressly laid down. What is not visible means
what is not expressly stated, but is to be derived by inference, and
so forth (cf. Apastamba I, 1, 4, 8). The express text is the famous
one, Na himsyatsarva bhutani.' Hi/rasa, which is rendered slaughter
l
here, may mean also c

giving pain ' generally.
5
This is the tu quo que argument. The sustentation of life
requires some sort of slaughter.

6
I. e. the support of the body, says Arûna Misra.
U 2
292 anug!ta.
The Ascetic said :
The indestructible and the destructible, such is
the double manifestation of the self. Of these the

indestructible is the existent \ the manifestation as an
individual 2
(entity) is called the destructible 3
. The
life-winds, the tongue, the mind, and (the quality of)
4
goodness, together with (the quality of) passion ,
(these
make up) the manifestations as individual entities.
And to one who is free from these manifestations,
who is free from the pairs of opposites, who is devoid
of expectations, who is alike to all beings, who is
freefrom (the thought that this or that is) mine,

who has subdued his self, and who is released on all
hands there is no fear anywhere 6
5
, .
The Adhvaryu said

best of talented men one ! should in this (world)
1
Argum. Mi^sra takes it otherwise, 'the true nature of the Sat,
the self/ Nilakaw/â renders the original by sadrupam without
further explanation. This indestructible seems
to correspond to
that mentioned which should be considered in con-

at Gita, p. 113,
nection with Gita, pp. 73, 74. The note at the former page is,
perhaps, not quite accurately expressed, as the word material cause' '
conveys some inadmissible associations. Perhaps underlying prin- '
ciple' might be a nearer approach to the correct idea. The existent

will thus be that which really exists, as it is indestructible.
2 3
Cf. Gita, p. 77. See -Santi Parvan (Moksha), ch. 240, st. 3T.
4
Arg-una Mi^ra says, l
The life-winds here are indicative of the
operations of the organs of action (as to which see p. 290, note 5
supra), the tongue of the perceptive senses, the mind of the internal
activities, the quality of goodness of all sources of pleasure, and
passion of all sources of pain/ the last two apparently covering the
external world, the previous ones the human activities, internal and
external.
5
Released scil. from piety or impiety, &c, Arûna MLrra, who
says *
self ' in the phrase preceding means mind.
6
Because, says Arûna MLrra, according to the very authority
which says there is sin in slaughter, all sin is destroyed by know-
ledge. Cf. Gita, p. 64.
CHAPTER XIV, 2. 1()'.
dwell incompany of good men only For having l

.
heard your opinion, my mind is enlightened. O

venerable sir I approach you, in the belief (that you
!
are) the Lord and I say (to you), O twice-born one

; !
there is no fault (attaching) to me, performing (as I

have done) the rites performed by others 2 .
The Brahmaâ said
With this explanation, the ascetic thereafter re-

mained silent, and the Adhvaryu also proceeded with
the great sacrifice, freed from delusion. Thus Brah-
ma/zas understand the very subtle emancipation to
be of this nature, and understanding it, they act
(accordingly), being directed by the Kshetra^na.
Chapter XIV.
The Brahma/za said
On this too, they relate an old story, (in the

3
,
shape of) a dialogue, O you of a pure heart between !
Kartavirya and the ocean. (There lived once) a

king named Arûna 4 a descendant of Krztavirya, ,
possessed of a thousand arms, who with his bow

conquered the (whole) earth up to the ocean. Once
1
Cf. Taittiriya-upanishad, p. 40.
2
The readings here in the MSS. are not satisfactory. I adopt
as the best that which appears to have been before Arûna Mi^ra.
The meaning seems to be this : I have now understood the truth,
but I cannot be blamed for having hitherto done that which I saw
every one else do. Now I have had the benefit of conversation with
a good man, and have become free from my delusion.
3
Namely, that final emancipation is not to be obtained by action,
and that slaughter is sinful.
4
He is also called a Yogin at RaghuvawâVI, 38. See Mallinath's
commentary there.
294 anugItA.
on a time, as we have heard, he was walking about

near the sea, proud of his strength, and showering
hundreds of arrows on the sea. The ocean, saluting
him, and with joined hands, said, O brave man do '
!
not throw arrows (on me). Say, what shall I do for

you ? The creatures, who take shelter with me, are
being destroyed, O tiger-like king! by the great
arrows thrown by you. Give them security, O Lord
'
!
Arûna said :
If there anywhere any wielder of the bow equal

is
to me who might stand against me in the

in battle,
field, name him to me.
The ocean said
If, O king! you have heard of the great sage
Camadagni, his son is (the) proper (person) to show

you due hospitality 1 .
Then the king, full of great wrath, went away, and

arriving at that hermitage approached Rama only.
In company with his kinsmen, he did many (acts)
disagreeable to Rma, and caused much trouble to
the high-souled Rama. Then the power of Rama,
whose power was unbounded, blazed forth, burning
the hosts of the enemy, O lotus-eyed one ! And then
R&ma, taking up his axe, hacked away that man of
the thousand arms in battle, like a tree of many
branches. Seeing him killed and fallen, all (his)
kinsmen assembled together, and taking swords and
lances, surrounded the descendant of Bhrzgu. Rama
also taking up a bow, and hurriedly mounting a
chariot, shot away volleys of arrows, and blew
away the army of the king. Then some of the
1
I. e. by giving him what he desired a <
foeman worthy of his
steel' to fight with him.
CHAPTER XIV, 20. 295
Kshatriyas, often troubled by fear of the son of

Gamadagni, entered mountains and inaccessible
places, like antelopes troubled by a lion. And the
subjects of those (Kshatriyas) who were not per-
forming their prescribed duties * through fear of him,
became Wzshalas, owing to the disappearance of
Brahma/zas 2
. Thus the DraviaJas, Abhiras, Pau^ras,
together with the 6abaras, became Wzshalas 3 owing ,
to the abandonment of their duties by Kshatriyas.

Then when the heroic (children) of Kshatriya women
were destroyed again and again, the Kshatriyas, who
4
were produced by the Brahma/zas were also de- ,
stroyed by the son of Gamadagni. At the end of

the twenty-first slaughter, a bodiless voice from
heaven, which was heard by all people, spoke
sweetly to R&ma, ' O Rama O Rama ! ! desist (from
this slaughter). What good, dear friend, do you
perceive, in taking away the lives of these kins-
men of Kshatriyas over and over again ?
' Then,
too, his grandfathers 5
, with RikSkz as their head,
likewise said to the high-souled (Rama), *
Desist,
O noble one 6 !'
But Rama, not forgiving his fathers
1
Viz. the protection of their subjects.
2
As the kings failed to protect the people, the Brahmaâs appa-
rently were nowhere forthcoming.
3
Cf. Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, pp. 482 seq., 358, 391; vol. ii,
p. 423 ; *Santi 13 ch. 207, st. 42 (Rag-adharma).

Parvan, ch. 65, st. ;
4
As Kshatriyas were required for the protection of the people,
the Br&hmaâs procreated them on Kshatriya women.See Muir,
Sanskrit Texts, vol.p. 451 i, were the offspring
seq. And
of as they
these anomalous connexions they are described as kinsmen of '
Kshatriyas/ Cf. .Oandogya, p. 317; Bnliadara/zyaka, p. 1037 anc *
comments there. As to heroic, see Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. iv,
p. 302 note.
5
Cf. Gita, p. 40, note 1.
6
See as to the whole story, Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, p. 442.
296 ANUGITA.
murder, said to those sages, 'You ought not to keep

me back from this/
The Vitris said

O best of victors ! you ought not to destroy these
kinsmen of Kshatriyas. It is not proper for you,
being a Brahma/za, to slaughter these kings.
Chapter XV.
The Fitrts said
On this 1 too,
, they relate an ancient story; hearing
that (story), O best of the twice-born ! you should
act accordingly. There was (once) a royal sage,
named Alarka, whose penance was very great, who
understood duty, who was veracious, high-souled,
and very firm in his vows. Having with his bow
conquered this world as far as the ocean, having
performed very difficult deeds 2 he turned his ,
mind to subtle (subjects). While he was sitting at
3
the foot of a tree, O you of great intelligence his !
thoughts, abandoning (those) great deeds, turned to

subtle (questions).
Alarka said :
My mind is become (too) strong 4 ; that conquest is
constant in which the mind is conquered. (Though)

surrounded by enemies, I shall direct my arrows
elsewhere 5
. As by its unsteadiness, it wishes 6
to
1
The impropriety or sinfulness of slaughter.
2
Such as the subjugation of enemies and so forth.
3
The Brahman, says Nilaka/zMa.
4
I. e. too strong to be under control.
5
That is to say, elsewhere than towards the external foes with
whom he was waging war.
6
The text is unsatisfactory here. I adopt Nilakaâ's reading.
CHAPTER XV, 12. 297
make all mortals perform action, I will cast very

sharp-edged arrows at the mind.
The mind said :
These arrows, O Alarka ! will not penetrate

through me at all. They will only pierce your
own vital part, and your vital part being pierced,
you will die. Look out for other arrows by which
you may destroy me.
Hearing that, he then spoke these words after
consideration :
Alarka said
Smelling very many perfumes, one hankers after
them only. Therefore I will cast sharp arrows at
the nose.
The nose 1 said :
These arrows, O Alarka! will not penetrate

you may destroy me.
consideration :
Alarka said
Enjoying savory tastes, this (tongue) hankers after
1
This and the other corresponding words must be understood
to refer not to the physical nose and so forth, but the sense seated
there. The nose here, for instance, stands for the sense of smell.
Nilaka/zMa understands all these words of Alarka as indicating the
so-called Ha//$a-yoga, which, he adds, invariably occasions death.
As to the throwing of arrows at the mind, he says, it means, ' I will
subdue the mind by the restraint of the excretive organs by means

of the Ha/â-yoga.' And finally he says, 'A man, having restrained
all the senses by means of the Ha/$a-yoga, merely droops away
becoming deficient in those senses, he does not accomplish
his end.
298 ANUGITA.
them only. Therefore I will cast sharp arrows at

the tongue.
The tongue said
you may destroy me.
consideration :
Alarka said
Touching various (objects of) touch, the skin
hankers after them only. Therefore I will tear
off the skin by various feathered arrows.
The skin said :

you may destroy me.
Hearing that, he then said after consideration :
Alarka said
Hearing various sounds, the (ear) hankers after
them only. Therefore I (will) cast sharp arrows
at the ear.
The ear said
own vital part, and then you will lose (your) life.
Look out for other arrows by which you may

destroy me.
Hearing that, he then said after consideration :
CHAPTER XV, 28. 299
Alarka said
Seeing numerous colours, the eye hankers after
them only. Therefore I will destroy the eye with
sharp arrows.
The eye said
you may destroy me.
Hearing that, he then said after consideration:
Alarka said
This (understanding) forms various determina-
tions by its operation. Therefore I will cast sharp
arrows at the understanding.
The understanding said :
These arrows, O Alarka! will not penetrate

through me at all. They will only pierce your own
vital part, and your vital part being pierced, you
will die. Look out for other arrows by which you
may destroy me.
The Brahmaâ 1
said:
Then Alarka even there employed himself in a
2
fearful penance difficult to perform; but he did not
obtain any arrows for these seven by his devotions.
Then that king deliberated with a mind very intent
on one (subject), and after deliberating for a long
time, O best of the twice-born ! Alarka, the best of
talented (men), could not arrive at anything better
1
Sic in our copies. It should be the Pitr/s, seeing that they
are relating Alarka*s story to Paraûrama.
2
Meditation, or pondering, according to Nilakaw/â.
300 ANUGITA.
than concentration of mind 1 . Then directing his mind

2
to he became steady, and applied him-
one point ,
self to concentration of mind. And (then) the brave

man forthwith destroyed the senses with one arrow
and entering the self by means of concentration of
mind, he reached the highest perfection. And the
royal sage, amazed, then uttered this verse, O '
Alas that we should have engaged in all external

!
(matters) that being possessed of a desire for en-

;
joyments, we should have devoted ourselves before

now to sovereignty I have now subsequently learnt
!
that there is no higher happiness than concentration

of mind/ Do you understand this too, O Rama
and do not kill Kshatriyas. Perform a fearful 3
penance, thence you will obtain the highest good.
Thus spoken to by (his) grandfathers, the noble son
of âmadagni engaged himself in fearful penance, and
attained that perfection which is difficult to reach.
Chapter XVI.
The Brdhma/za said

There are, verily, three foes in (this) world, and
they are stated to be (divided) ninefold, according
to qualities. Exultation, pleasure, joy 4 these three ,
1
I. e. the raâ-yoga, says Nilaka#//za, which consists in mere
control of the mind. Cf. Sankhya-sara, p. 39.
2
See Yoga-sutra, p. 45.
3
This means difficult, and occasioning many trials to one who
performs it.
4
Nilaka/z/â says exultation is when one is sure of obtaining
what is desired, pleasure when it is obtained, and joy when the
thing obtained is enjoyed. Arûna Mi^ra takes a different distinc-
tion ; but our copy of his commentary is not quite intelligible in
CHAPTER XVI, 5. 3OI
are qualities appertaining to the quality of good-

ness. Grief, wrath, persistent hatred, these are
stated to be qualities appertaining to the quality of
passion. Sleep, sloth, and delusion, these three
qualities are qualities appertaining to the quality
of darkness. Cutting these off by multitudes of
arrows 1 a courageous man, free from sloth, having
,
a tranquil self, and senses controlled, is energetic

about subjugating others 2 . On this, people who
know about ancient times celebrate verses which
were sung of old by the king Ambarisha, who had
become tranquil (in mind). When vices 3 were in
the ascendant, and good (men) were oppressed,
Ambarisha, of great glory, forceably possessed him-
the beginning. Pleasure he takes to mean '

pride felt in supposing
oneself to possess some merit/ and joy that produced when im-
pending danger is averted. As to the next triad, the text is again
unsatisfactory. The text printed in the edition which contains
Nilaka#//a's commentary, is 'desire, anger/ &c. There is nothing
about them in the commentary. Arg-una Mora's text is the one
we have adopted. He says, '
grief, pain caused by loss of what is
desired ; anger, the pain caused by the counteraction of one's

attempts to injure another ;
persistent hatred, the pain caused by
believing another to be doing harm to oneself.' Persistent hatred
is Nilakaw/â's interpretation. I think his interpretation is prefer-
able. The two triads seem to be based on one principle of grada-

tion. The distinctive marks of the three qualities are pleasure,
pain, and delusion respectively, and those characterise the three
triads stated in the text. See -Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 194,
st. 27 seq.
1
Tranquillity and so forth, Nllaka#$a ;
practising yoga or
concentration of mind, Ar^nna Mijra.
2
I. e. external, says Arg-una MLrra ; external foes of one's own
emancipation is, I presume, what is meant.
3
Arg-una Mirra says, '
his own and those of others/ Nilakaw/â
takes good to mean not men, but tranquillity, &c. The next sen-
tence seems rather to militate against this view, which in itself
is not a well-founded one.
302 anugIta.
self of the kingdom 1 . He (then) restraining his own

vices, and honouring good men, attained high per-
fection, and sang these verses I have conquered :
'
most vices destroyed all foes but there is one,

; ;
the greatest, vice which should be destroyed and

whichI have not destroyed that (vice), being im-
pelledby which, a creature does not attain freedom
from desire, and being troubled by desire, under-
stands (nothing) while running into ditches 2 ;
(that
vice), man even does
being impelled by which, a
what ought not be done. That avarice cut
to
(it) off, cut (it) off with sharp swords. For from
avarice 3 is born desire then anxiety comes into
;
existence and he who desires, mostly acquires

;
qualities appertaining to the quality of passion.

Obtaining those, he mostly acquires qualities ap-
pertaining to the quality of darkness 4 . When the
bodily frame is destroyed, he, owing to these quali-
ties, is born again and again, and engages in action.

And at the expiration of life, again with his body
dismembered and scattered about, he meets death,
and again birth. Therefore, properly perceiving this,
and restraining avarice by courage, one should wish
for sovereignty in the self. This is sovereignty 5 ;
there is no other sovereignty here. The self pro-

perly understood is itself the sovereign/ Such were
1
For the good of the people, says Arûna Mwra.
2
I. e. base actions, Nilakaw/â.
3
Avarice, according to Arg-una Mi^ra, is the belief that one has
not got that which one has, and desire is the wish for more and
more. Avarice seems, however, to be the general frame of mind,
always wishing for something, never being contented, and desire
is the wish for a specific object.
* Which are sources of delusion. Cf. a similar doctrine at Apa-
5
stamba II, 5, 140. Nilakaw/â compares Taittiriya, p. 26.
the verses sung with regard to the great sovereignty,

by the glorious Ambarlsha, who destroyed the one
(chief vice), avarice.
Chapter XVII.
The Brihmaâ said

On this \ too, they relate this ancient story (in the
shape of) a dialogue, O you of a pure heart between !
a Brahmaâ and kanaka. King kanaka, by way of

punishment, said to a Brcthmaâ who had fallen into
some offence You should not live within my do-
:
'
minions/ Thus spoken to, the Brahma/za then

replied to that best of kings Tell me, O king how
:
'
!
far (extend) the dominions which are subject to you.

I wish, O Lord to live in the dominions of another
!
king, and, O master of the earth I wish to do your !
bidding according to the S&stras/ Thus spoken

to by that glorious Brahma/za, the king then heaved
frequent and warm sighs, and said nothing in reply.
While that king of unbounded power was seated,
engaged in meditation, a delusion suddenly came
upon him, as the planet 2 upon the sun. Then when
the delusion had gone off, the king recovered him-
self, and after a short while spoke these words to
the Brihmaâ.
kanaka said
Though this country, which is the kingdom of my
father and grandfather, is subject (to me), I cannot
1
On getting rid of the notion that this, that, and the other
thing is one's own, Arg-una Mi^ra. Nilaka/a agrees, and adds
also on the subject of cutting off avarice.
2
That is to say, Rahu.
304 ANUGITA.
find my domain 1
, searching through the (whole)
earth. When I did not find it on the earth, I looked
for Mithila ; when I did not find it in Mithila, I looked
for my own offspring. When I did not find it among
them, then came the delusion on me. Then on the

expiration of the delusion, intelligence again came
to me. Now I think that there is no domain (of
mine), or that everything is my domain. Even this
self is not mine, or the whole earth is mine. And
as mine, so (is it) that of others too, I believe, O
best of the twice-born ! Live (here, therefore) while
2
you desire, and enjoy while you live .
The Brahma/za said

by which,
Tell me, what belief you have resorted to,
though this country, which is the kingdom of your

father and grandfather, is subject to you, you have
got rid of (the notion that this or that is) mine.
What conviction have you adopted, by which verily
you consider your whole domain as not (your)
domain, or all as your domain?
kanaka said
I understand (all) conditions here, in all affairs, to
3
be terminable hence I could not find anything that
,
should be (called) mine 4 (Considering) whose this .
1
Meaning, apparently, that over which he and no one else has
power. He contracts his vision gradually, and finds nothing at all
which he can call his own to the exclusion of others. He explains, fur-
ther on, how he arrives at the alternative conviction stated towards
the close of this speech. In the Brrhadarawyaka (p. 916) he is said
to have offered his kingdom to Yaîiavalkya and himself as his slave,
after learning the Brahma- vidya. See too Muir, SanskritTexts, vol. iv,
2
p. 426 seq. See *Santi Parvan (Moksha)I, 13.
8
Conditions of indigence or affluence, Nilaka/$a. Arûna
Mfrra's reading is different.
4 l
There is a familiar verse, ascribed to Ganaka, which says, If
was, (I thought of) the Vedic text about anybody's

property, (hence) I could not find by my intelligence
anything that should be (called) mine \ Resorting
to this conviction, I have got rid of (the notion that
this or that is) mine. Now hear the conviction,
holding which, my
domain (appears to me to be)
everywhere 2 do not desire for myself even smells
. I
existing in the nose 3 Therefore the earth 4 being .
conquered is always subject to me. I do not desire

for myself tastes even dwelling in the mouth.
Therefore water being conquered is always subject
to me. I do not desire for myself the colour (or) light
appertaining to the eye. Therefore light being con-
quered is always subject to me. I do not desire for
myself the (feelings of touch) which exist in the
skin. Therefore air being conquered is always
Mithild is on fire, nothing of mine is burnt (in it)/ The verse

occurs in the Mahabharata, anti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap.
178, st. 2, and also chap. 276, st. 4. See too Muir, Sanskrit Texts,
vol. i, p. 429.
1
This is not clear. I have followed Nllakaâ's text. Arâina
Mwra's is in the earlier part more intelligible, Whose is this to-day, '
whose to-morrow?' But I cannot find that there is any Vedic

text to this effect. Nilakaâ cites on his text Iropanishad, p. 5.
The meaning here seems to be, ' When I considered as to whom
the things I saw in my thoughts belonged to, I remembered the
Vedic text that one should not wish to obtain another's property,
and so, thinking about the matter with that caution, I could not
make out that there was anything which I could call my own.'
2
This is the alternative conclusion he has come to.
3
The sense of smell enjoys the smell, my self has nothing to
do with it. Cf. GM, p. 55, also Maitri, pp. 112, 113.
4
Whenever there is any smell, it is supposed that particles of
earth are there ; so the meaning here is '
all things having the
quality of smell are subject to me/ and so throughout. The
objects of sense are all used for the purposes of the prescribed
actions, the benefits of which accrue to gods, &c. Cf. Gita, pp. 53,
54, and see also pp. 84, 85.
[8] X
306 ANUGITA.
subject to me. I do not desire for myself sounds

even though existing in the ear. Therefore sounds
being conquered are always subject to me. I do
not desire for myself the mind always within me.
Therefore the mind being conquered is always sub-
ject to me. All these actions of mine are, verily,
for this purpose, (namely) for the gods, the Pitrzs, the
Bhfttas, together with guests. Then the Brahmaâ,
smiling, again said to (kanaka :
'
Know me to be
Dharma, come here to-day to learn (something)
about you 1
. You are the one person to turn this
wheel, the nave of which is the Brahman 2 , the spoke
s
the understanding, and which does not turn back ,
and which is checked by the quality of goodness as

its circumference 4 /
Chapter XVIII.
The Brahma/za said
do not move about in this world

modest one ! I
in way which, according to your own under-

the
standing, you have guessed. 1 5 am a Brdhmaâ, I am
1
I.e. to put him to the test. Such examinations are often
referred to in our later literature.
2
I. e. Veda, says Arûna Mijra.
3
I. e. says Arg-una Mkra, which leads to the seat from which
there is no return. Cf. GM, p. 112.
4
The wheel is the yoga, says Argnna Mura. The expression
is noteworthy, as being that used of Buddha's teaching. See on
that Davids' Buddhism, p. 45.
5
The man who has achieved final emancipation has got that, in
which the benefits to be derived from the course of life of a Brah-
xnawa, &c, are included (see p. 191 supra). Hence, says he, the
emancipated, I am a forester, and I likewise perform

the duties of a householder, observing vows. I am
not such, O beautiful one as you see me with the !
eye. I pervade every single thing that is in this

world. Whatever creatures there are in the world,
movable or not moving, know me to be the de-
stroyer of them as fire is of wood 1 Sovereignty .
over the whole world, and even over heaven that, ;
or else this knowledge (of these two) knowledge ;
is my only wealth
2
This 3 is the path of the
.
Brihmaâs, by which those who understand that 4

proceed, to households, or residence in forests, or,
dwelling with preceptors, or among mendicants 5 .
With numerous unconfused symbols only one know-

ledge is approached. And those who, adhering to
various symbols and Airamas, have their under-
standing full of tranquillity 6
go to the single entity
,
as rivers to the ocean. This path is traversed

by the understanding, not by the body 7 Actions .
have a beginning and an end, and the body is tied
down by action. Hence, O beautiful one! you
doubt, on which your question is based as to what world you will
go to by being joined to me, is wrong. See p. 256 supra.

1
He is speaking here on the footing of the essential identity
of everything. Cf. Gita, p. 62.
2
The expression here is clumsy; the meaning is that he prefers
knowledge to sovereignty, if the alternative is offered him.
4
8
Viz. knowledge. I. e. the Brahman.
5
These are the four orders or Asramas.
6
The knowledge to be acquired, by whatever symbols the
attempt to acquire it is made, is but this, that all is one ; and that
is acquired certainly when tranquillity has been achieved.
I. e. by realising the identity of everything, not by the actions

7
performed with the body, which, as he goes on to show, are perish-

able, and cannot lead to any lasting result.
X 2
308 anugitA.
(need) have no fear occasioned by the other world.

With your heart intent upon the real entity, you will
certainly come into my self.
Chapter XIX.
The Brahma/za's wife said

This is not possible to be understood by one
whose is frivolous, or by one whose self is not
self 1
refined and my intelligence is very frivolous, and

;
narrow, and confused. Tell me the means by which

this knowledge is acquired. I (wish to) learn from you
the source from which that knowledge proceeds.
The Brahmaâ said

Know that he who devotes himself to the Brah-
man is the (lower) Ara/zi, the instructoris the upper
Aram. Penance and sacred learning cause the at-

trition 2 , and from that the fire of knowledge is
produced.
The Brihmaâs wife said:
As to this symbol of the Brahman which is de-
nominated the Kshetra^na, where, indeed, is (to be
found) a description of it, by which it 3 is capable
of being comprehended ?
1
I. e. mind, Argiina MLrra.
2
Scil. of the Arams (i. e. the wood used for kindling fire) the
;
sense is, that the pupil who has penance and Vedic learning goes to
a teacher for knowledge. See *Sveta\rvatara, pp. 307, 308.
3
I. e.Brahman, says Arûna Mkra, of which the Kshetraîia
the
is only a symbol. For a definition of Kshetraîia, see Santi
Parvan (Moksha), chap. 187, st. 23.
CHAPTER XIX, 9. 309
The Brahma/za said :
He is without symbols 1
, and also without qualities;
nothing exists that is a cause of him. I will only
state themeans by which he can be comprehended
or not. A good means is found, namely, action 2
and knowledge, by which that 3 (entity), which has
the symbols (useful) for knowledge 4 attributed to it
through ignorance, is perceived as by bees 5 In the .
(rules for) final emancipation, it is not laid down, that

a certain thing should be done, and a certain thing
should not But the knowledge of the things bene-
6
.
ficial to the self is produced in one who sees and

hears 7
. One should adopt as many of these things,
(which are) means of direct perception, as may here
be practicable unperceived, and those whose form
is perceivedhundreds and in thousands, all of
8
, in
various descriptions. Then one reaches near that
beyond which nothing exists.
The Deity said
Then the mind of the Br^hma/za's wife, after the
1
See Sanatsu^tiya, p. 160.
2
Viz. that which is required as a preliminary to the acquisition
of knowledge, and hence is necessary for final emancipation.
3
The Brahman.
4
symbols which are to convey a knowledge of the Brahman.
I. e.
5
in a way not perfect ; as bees hovering above a flower
I. e.
get the fragrance of it without grasping the flower itself, so these

means give one an imperfect knowledge of the Brahman to be
afterwards perfected by constant meditation upon it (nididhyasa).
6
As it is in the prior portion of the Vedas, as to sacrifices, &c.
7
Sees, i. e. by contemplation ; hears, i. e. from a teacher, Arûna
Misra.
This seems to mean such things as hearing, reading, &c,
8
which would be perceived scil. by the senses and all intellectual

'
' ;
operations which would be unperceived.' '

3IO ANUG1TA.
1
destruction of the Kshetra^fia y
turned to that which
isbeyond (all) Kshetra^nas by means of a knowledge
of the Kshetra 2 .
Ar"una said
Where, indeed, O Krzshna.1 is that Brahmaâs
wife,and where is that chief of Brihmaâs, by both
of whom this perfection was attained ? Tell me
about them both, O undegraded one
The Deity said

Know my mind to be the Brihmaâ, and know
my understanding to be the Brahmaâ's wife. And
he, O Dhananâya! who has been spoken of as the
Kshetra^fia, is I myself s .
Chapter XX.
Arûna said
Be pleased to explain to me the Brahman which
is the highest object of knowledge ; for by your
favour my mind is much interested in (these) subtle 4
(subjects),
Vasudeva said
On they relate an ancient story (in the
this, too,
shape of) a dialogue, connected with final emanci-

pation, between a preceptor and a pupil. A talented
1
I. e. after the identification of the individual self with the uni-
versal self, when the individual ceases to be perceived as such. Cf.
*Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 187, st. 23.
2
That beyond Kshetra^nas=the absolute supreme self. Cf.
Gita, p. 106.
3
The substance of this speech, says Argnna Mijra, is that the mind
and understanding devoted to the supreme lead to final emancipation.
4
See p. 296 supra. The last chapter closes what in some of the
MSS. is called the Brahma Gita, or Brahmawa Gita contained in the
Anugita Parvan. See further as to this our Introduction, where the
point is further dwelt on.
CHAPTER XX, 12. 311
pupil, O asked a Brahma/za pre-

terror of your foes !
ceptor of rigid vows, (when he was) seated, something

about the highest good. '
I ' (he said), *
whose goal
is the highest good, am come to you (who are)
venerable; pray of you with (bowed) head, O
I
Brahmaâ! that you should explain to me what I

ask/ The preceptor, O son of Przthd said to the !
pupil who spoke thus you every-

:
*
I will explain to
thing, O twice-born one on which you verily have !
any doubt/ Thus addressed by the preceptor, O

best of the Kauravas he who was devoted to the
!
preceptor, put (his) questions with joined hands.

Listen to that, O you of great intelligence
The pupil said

Whence am 1
1
, and whence are you ? Explain
that which is From what were
the highest truth.
the movable and immovable entities born ? By
what do and what is the limit of their
entities live,
life ? What is truth, what penance, O Br&hma/za ?
What are called the qualities by the good ? And what
paths are happy ? What is pleasure, and what sin ?
These questions of mine, O venerable Brihmaâ
sage O you of excellent vows do you be pleased
! !
to explain 2 correctly, truly, and accurately. There

is none else here who can explain these questions.
Speak, O best of those who understand piety I feel !
the highest curiosity (in this matter). You are cele-

brated in the worlds as skilled in topics connected
with the piety (required for) final emancipation. And
there exists none else but you who can destroy all
1
Compare the questions at the beginning of the *SVeta\rvatara-
upanishad.
2
A similar expression to that in the Sanatsuâtiya, p. 149,
and elsewhere.
3 2 anugIta.
doubts. And we l
, likewise, are afraid of worldly life
and also desirous of final emancipation.
Vasudeva said :
That talented preceptor, who preserved (all) vows,

O son of Przth& ! O chief of the family of the
Kauravas ! O restrainer of foes ! duly explained all
those questions to that pupil, who had approached

him (for instruction), who put (his) questions properly,
who was possessed of (the necessary) qualifications,
who was tranquil, who conducted himself in an agree-
able manner, who was like (his) shadow 2 and who ,
was a self-restrained ascetic and a BrahmaMrin.

The preceptor said
All which is connected with the knowledge
this,
3
of the Vedas and involves a consideration of the
real entity, and which is cultivated by the chief
sages, was declared by Brahman. We consider
knowledge only as the highest thing and renuncia- ;
tion 4 as the best penance. And he who understands

determinately the true object of knowledge which is

inexpugnable 5 the self abiding in all entities and
who can move about anywhere 6 is esteemed highest. ,
The learned man who perceives the abiding together 7 ,
1
It is not easy to account for the change here from the singular
to the plural.
2
I. e. always attended on the preceptor. Cf. generally, Mu^^faka,
p. 283.
3
The question was not quite from his own imagination, says
Nilaka/â. Arûna MLsra has a different reading, which he inter-
prets to mean that on which the Vedas are all at one/
'
4
Of the fruit of action, Arûna Misra.
5
I. e. not such as to require modification by any other knowledge,
as knowledge of the world does.

6
Nilaka/$a compares .-Oandogya, pp. 523-553.
7
I. e. of Kit and GWa, says Nilakaw/â ; of Brahman and its
manifestations, as alluded to, inter alia, at pp. 105, 106, 191 supra.
CHAPTER XX, 2 2. 3I3
and the severance also, and likewise unity and

variety 1
, is released from misery. He who does
not desire anything, and has no egoism about any-
thing,becomes eligible for assimilation with the
Brahman, even while dwelling in this world 2 He .
who knows the truth about the qualities of nature,

who understands the creation of all entities, who is
devoid of (the thought that this or that is) mine,

and who is devoid of egoism, is emancipated there ;
is no doubt of that. Accurately understanding the

great (tree) of which the unperceived 3 is the sprout
from the seed, which consists of the understanding
as its trunk, the branches of which are the great
egoism, in the holes of which are the sprouts, namely,
the senses, of which the great elements are the
4
flower-bunches , the gross elements the smaller
boughs, which is always possessed of leaves, always
possessed of flowers, and from which pleasant fruits
are always produced, on which all entities subsist,
which and the seed of which is the Brah-
is eternal,
man and ; it with that excellent sword
cutting know-

ledge one attains immortality, and casts off birth
and death 5 I will state to you to-day, O highly
.
1
I. e. that variety is only in this world, but that the unity of
everything is the true proposition. Cf. inter alia Gita, p. 104.
2
Cf. Br/hadara^yaka, p. 858, and Gita, p. 65.
3
I. e. the Prakr/ti of the Sankhyas.
4
The great elements are the five tanmatras of earth, water, fire,
air, and space, which afterwards produce what we have called the
gross elements in the text, namely, the earth &c. which we perceive.
5
The tree typifies worldly life. Cf. pp. 111-189 supra. The
leaves and flowers, Arguna MLrra says, stand for volition and action;
and Nilaka/z/â seems to agree. The tree is called eternal, as
worldly life is supposed to have had no beginning. Cf. Sariraka
Bhashya, p. 494, sprout from the seed,' this rendering is neces-
'
sitated by Brahman being described as the seed. Cf. Muâka,

p. 288; *SVeta\yvatara, p. 362; Ka/#a, pp. 143, 144.
314 anugitA.
1
talented one! the true conclusion about the past,
the present, the future, and so forth, and piety, de-
2
sire, and wealth , which is understood by the mul-
titudes of Siddhas, which belongs to olden times, and
is which ought to be apprehended, and under-
eternal,
standing which talented men have here attained
3
perfection. Formerly the sages, B/Vhaspati, Bha- ,
radva/a, Gautama, and likewise Bhrgava,Vasish/â,

and also KcLsyapa, and Visvamitra, and Atri also,
desiring knowledge, met each other, after having
4
travelled over all paths and becoming wearied of ,
their own actions. And those twice-born (sages),

giving the lead to the old sage Angirasa, saw Brah-
man, from whom (all) sin has departed, in Brah-
man's mansion. Having saluted that high-souled
one who was sitting at ease, the great sages, full
of humility, asked him this momentous (question)
concerning the highest good: How should one per- '
form good action ? how is one released from sin ?

what paths are happy for us ? what is truth and
what vice ? By what action are the two paths southern
and northern obtained 5 ? (and what is) destruction 6 and
emancipation, the birth and death of entities?' What
the grandsire said conformably to the scriptures 7 ,
1
I. e. the means of arriving at it, Ar^-una Mijra.
2
The triad, the acquisition of which worldly men aspire to.
3
He explains how the doctrine belongs to olden times.
4
I. e. paths of action, Nilakaw/â. See Sanatsug-atfya, p. 165.
5
Namely, the Pitrzyana and Devayana (Arûna MLrra), as to
which see .Oandogya, p. 341, Kaushitaki, p. 13, and Br/hadara-
wyaka, p. 1034.
6
Nilakaw/â seems to interpret this to mean the temporary and
final dissolutions of the worlds, on which see, inter alia, Vedanta
Paribha-sha, p. 48.
7
So Nilakaâ. May it not be ' according to the received
tradition?'
CHAPTER XX, 37. 3T5
when thus spoken to by the sages, I will state to you.
Listen (to that) O pupil
Brahman said
From the truth were the entities movable and
immovable produced. They live by penance 1 .
Understand that, O you of excellent vows By their !
own action they remain transcending their own

source 2
. For the truth joined with the qualities is
invariably of five varieties. The Brahman 3

is the
truth ;
penance is the truth ; Praâpati also is truth ;
the entities are born from the truth ; the universe

consisting of (all) creatures is the truth. Therefore
Brahmaâs whose final goal is always concentration
of mind, from whom
anger and vexation have de-
parted, and who are invariably devoting themselves
to piety, are full of the truth. I will speak about
those (Brahma/zas) who are restrained by one

another 4 , who are possessed of knowledge, who are
the establishers of the bridge of piety, and who are
5
the constant creators of the people . I will speak
of the four (branches of) knowledge, and likewise
of the castes, and of the four orders, distinctly. The
wise always speak of piety as one, (but) having
1
I.e. by action, NilakawMa. Cf. Mundaka, p. 280, and see
p. 166 supra, note 1.
2
they remain apart from the Brahman, being engaged in
I. e.
action. This answers some of the questions put by the pupil to

the preceptor. As to 'the truth/ see p. 162, note 2 supra.
8
I.e. Irvara, or god; penance =
piety; Praâpati=the individual
soul, Nilaka/z/#a. Brahman =' that' (but how is 'that' 'joined with
qualities V);Praâpati= Brahman, Ar^-una MLsra. They agree about
penance and entities (which they take to mean the gross elements)
and creatures. Brahman and Praâpati=Vira- and Hirarcyagar-
bha (?), p. 186 supra. Cf. *Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 190, st. 1.
4
I. e. who commit no breach of piety through fear of one
5
another, Nllaka/â. Cf. Gita, p. 86.
3i6 anugitA.
four quarters. I will speak to you, O twice-born

ones ! of the happy path, which is productive of
pleasure, and which has been invariably travelled
over by talented men in old days for (obtaining)
assimilation with theBrahman. Learn, O noble ones
from me, now speaking exhaustively, of that highest
path which is difficult to understand, and of the
highest seat. The first step is said to be the order
of BrahmaMrins the second is that of householders
;
next after that is that of foresters and next after ;
that too, the highest step must be understood to be

that relating to the Adhyatma \ Light 2
, space, sun,
air, Indra, Praâpati, one sees not these, while one
does not attain to the Adhyatma 3 . I will subse-
quently state the means to that, which you should
understand. The order of foresters, (the order) of
the sages who dwell in forests and live on fruits
roots and air, is prescribed for the three twice-born
(castes). The order of householders is prescribed
for all castes. The talented ones speak of piety
as having faith for its characteristic. Thus have
4
I described to you the paths leading to the gods ,
which are occupied by good and talented men by

means of their actions, and which are bridges of
piety. He who, rigid in his vows, takes up any one
of these modes of piety separately, always comes in
time to perceive the production and dissolution of
1
That is to say, that of the ascetic, who specially devotes him-
self to the acquisition of knowledge about the relation of the
supreme and individual self (Adhyatma).
The deity presiding over the bright fortnight, says Arg-una MLrra.
2
The words space and sun and air must be similarly interpreted.
3
Nilaka/$a says '
one sees these only while one has not had a
perception of the self/ He takes light &c. to mean the '
universe/
4
I. e. the means of reaching the Devayana path (mentioned at
p. 314, note 5), Nilakaw/â. Cf. also Mu/zdaka, p. 312.

CHAPTER XXI, 2. 317
(all) entities 1 . Now I shall state with accuracy and

with reasons, all the elements which abide in parts
in all objects. The great self 2 the unperceived 3 like-
,
wise, and likewise also egoism, the ten senses and

the one 4 (sense), and the five great elements, and the
6
specific characteristics of the five elements , such is
the eternal creation. The number of the elements is
celebrated as being twenty-four plus one. And the

talented man who understands the production and
dissolution of (all) elements, he, of all beings, never
comes by delusion. He who accurately understands
the elements, the whole of the qualities and also
6
,
7
all the deities , casting aside sin, and getting rid of
(all) bonds, attains to all the spotless worlds.
Chapter XXI.
Brahman said
That unperceived (principle), all-pervading, ever-
lasting,and immutable, which is in a state of equi-
8
librium should be understood (to become) the city
,
of nine portals, consisting of three qualities, and five
1
Namely, how they are all manifestations of the Brahman, and
are all dissolved in Cf. inter alia Gita, pp. 74, 92.
it.
2
See the Ka/ôpanishad, p. 149. See also p. 332 infra.
3
See p. 313, note 3 supra.
4 5
I. e. the mind. Cf. Gita, p. 102. Viz. smell, sound, &c.
6
Tranquillity, self-restraint, &c, Ar^-una MLrra. Are they not
rather the three qualities ? As to '
twenty-four plus one' above,
see p. 368.
7
Does this mean the senses, as at Gitd, p. 123? An accurate
understanding of the things noted requires a knowledge of their
relation to the supreme, which is the means of final emancipation.
And see p. 337 infra.
8
See Gita, p. 107, and Sankhya-sara, p. 11, and note 2, p. 331
infra.
318 anugIta.
constituent principles 1 encircled by the eleven 2 con-

, ,
sisting of mind 3 as the distinguishing power, and of

the understanding as ruler, this is (an aggregate
made up of) eleven 4
. The three currents 5 which
are within this (city) support (it)
6
again and again,
and those three channels run on, being constituted
by the three qualities. Darkness, passion, and
goodness, these are called the three qualities,
which are all coupled with one another, and like-
wise one another, which depend on one
serve
another, and attend on one another, and are joined
to one another 7 And the five constituent princi-
.
1
The five gross elements of which the body is composed (cf.
Mahabharata, *Santi Parvan, Moksha Dharma, chap. 183, st. 1 seq.)

are developments of the unperceived principle, the Prakrz'ti. Cf.
GM, p. 112, where the words which remain (absorbed)
'
in nature*
have been inadvertently omitted after '
with the mind as the sixth.'
As to the nine portals cf. GM, p. 65.

2
The five active organs, the five perceptive senses, and the mind.
3
This Arguna MLsra takes to mean egoism/ Nilakaw/â takes '
the usual meaning, and adds, objects are produced from mental
operations ;
'
distinguishing,' that is, manifesting as distinct entities.
4
The eleven are, according to Argnna Miyra, the three qualities,
the five gross elements, the group of organs and senses as one,
egoism, and understanding.
5
Viz. the n&/is, Id&, Pihgala*, and Sushum^d, Argima Mi^ra,
who adds that they are respectively of the quality of darkness,
passion, and goodness.
6
The three nadis, says Arg-una Misra, support the life-winds.
Nilaka/zMa takes the three currents to be the threefold inclination
of the mind, viz. towards a pure piety, towards injuring other living
creatures, and towards that mixed piety which requires the destruc-
tion of life for its performance. Nilaka/a also has a different
reading from Argxma Mura, which means 'are replenished ' instead
of '
support/ And the three channels are, according to NilakawMa,
the Sawskaras, or effects of previous actions of piety or impiety.
7
Coupled = always existing in association with one another;
serving = being necessary to the operations of one another; depend-
ing = supporting one another like three staves, says Nilaka^/â
CHAPTER XXI, II. 319
pies (are made up of) the three qualities. Good-

ness is the match of darkness, and passion is the
match of goodness and goodness is also the match
;
of passion, and darkness the match of goodness.

Where darkness is restrained, passion there pre-
vails. Where goodness there
passion is restrained,
1
prevails Darkness should be understood to con-
.
sist in obscurity. It has three qualities 2 and is ,
called delusion. Its characteristic is also impiety,

and it is constant in sinful actions. This is the
nature of darkness ; it also appears combined (with
others). Passion is said to consist in activity, and

is the cause of successive 3 (acts). When it prevails,
its characteristic, among all beings, appears to be
production 4 . Light, lightness 5 faith, such , is stated
to be the nature of goodness (prevailing) among
all beings, as accepted by good men. The true
nature of their characteristics, in aggregation and
separation, will now be stated together with the
reasons learn those accurately. Delusion, ignorance,
;
upholding, says Arûna Mi^ra, as the total absence of one would lead
to the absence of the others also; attending = becoming subordinate
to whichever of them is dominant for the time being; joined=so
as to become one organic whole. Cf. as to all this, Yoga-sutra II,
18, and commentary, p. 10 1; Sankhya-karika, Karika 12, with

Vaâspati Mwra's comments on it.
1
Cf. Git&, p. 108, and the quotation in the Sahkhyatattvakau-
mudi, p. 64.
2
I.e. characteristics, viz. obscurity (which seems to stand for
ignorance), delusion (which is false knowledge), and impiety (doing
that which is known to be sinful and wrong).
3
The original means, according to Nilaka/â, wrong, unlawful
conduct. As to all this cf. *Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 194, st. 29.
4
I.e. apparently perpetually doing something. Cf. Gita*, p. 108.
5
Cf. as to this, and generally also, Sahkhya-Mrika 13, and com-
mentary ofVaâspati Mirra (p. 64). The blazing upwards of fire
is said to illustrate the lightness of the quality of goodness which
belongs to fire.
320 anugSltA.
want of liberality, indecision about actions 1 sleep, ,
2
haughtiness , fear, avarice, grief, finding fault with
good acts, want of memory 3
, immaturity (of intel-
4
lect), nihilism , violation of (the rules of) conduct,
want of discrimination 3 blindness, behaviour of the ,
lowest 5 quality, pride of performance without (actual)

performance, pride of knowledge without (actual)
knowledge, unfriendliness, evil disposition, want of
faith, deluded convictions, want of straightforward-
ness, want of knowledge 6 sinful action, want of ,
knowledge (of the subtle principle), stolidity 7 lassi- ,
tude, want of self-restraint, going into inferior ways ;
all these qualities, O Brdhmaâs are celebrated as !
being dark. And whatever other states of mind,

connected with delusion, are found in various places
in this world, all these are dark qualities. Constant
talk in disparagement of gods Brihmaâs and
8
Vedas, want of liberality, vanity, delusion , anger,
want of forgiveness likewise, and also animosity
1
According to Gitd, p. 108, doing nothing stolid laziness is
a mark of darkness. Cf. generally on this passage Gita, pp. 107,

118, 124 seq. ; Maitrf, p. 49.
2
The same word as at GitS, pp. 116, 125 (headstrong in the
latter passage should have been haughty). Cf. as to the word,
8
^Mndogya, p. 383. Cf. Gita\ p. 51.
4
The opposite of the belief mentioned at Gita, p. 126.
5
The same word as at Gita, p. 109. But the commentators
render it here by hiwsra, i. e. destructive.
6
I am not sure about the original word here, and the word next
but one after this. The latter Arûna MLrra renders by sukshma-
tattvavedanam, which I have translated above in the text. The
former seems to mean general unintelligence.
7
Heaviness and dulness, induced by indolence, &c, Nilakaâ.
Lassitude is drooping from despondency. Going into inferior ways,
Arûna Misra says, means falling into the inferior castes Nilakaw/â ;
says it means love for base actions.

8
Not being cognisant of one's own shortcomings, Arûna Mwra.
CHAPTER XXI, 1 8. 321
towards people, this is considered to be dark con-

duct. Whatever vain 1
actions (there are), and what-
ever vain gifts, and vain eating, that is considered
to be dark conduct. Reviling, and want of forgive-
ness, animosity, vanity, want of faith also, this is
considered to be dark conduct. And whatever such
people there are in this world, doers of sinful acts,
who break through (all) regulations, they are all
held to be dark. I will state the wombs appointed
for these (men) of sinful actions. They go to the
hell, (namely) the brute (species), to be born in the
2
lower hell become) the immovable entities 3
;
(or ,
animals, beasts of burden, demons, and serpents,

and worms, insects, birds, and also creatures born
from eggs, and all quadrupeds, and idiots, deaf
and dumb men, and whatever others are attacked
by diseases generated by sin 4 These dark, evil- .
conducted men, who are sunk in darkness, who

bear the marks of their own actions, the current
of whose (thoughts) is downwards 5 sink into dark- ,
ness. I will now proceed to state their improve-

ment and ascent how, becoming men of meritorious
;
actions, they attain to the worlds of those who per-

form good acts 6
Resorting to a contrary (course
.
7
of life), and growing old in (good) actions 8 they exert ,
1
Cf. GM, p. 83.
2
Cf. GM, p. 116.
8
Such as trees and so which are also forms of life.
forth,
4
This is alluded to in some Smrz'tis too. And cf. -Oandogya,
p. 358, and the quotation in the commentary on Sarikhya-sutra
V, 122.
5
Such, says Nilaka/â, as to fit them for the nether world. See
Tattvakaumudi, p. 1 13. As to marks, cf. p. 239 supra.
6
Cf.GM,p. 130.
7
I. e. contrary to that already described as dark.
8
Nilaka7z//$a renders this to mean ' destroyed for Agnihotra and
such ceremonies/ like the goat referred to above at p. 290.
[8] Y
32 2 ANUGiTA.
themselves, and through the ceremonies (performed

for them) by benevolent Brahmaâs devoted to their
own duties, they go upwards to the same world (as
the Br&hmaâs)
the heaven of the gods. Such is
the Vedic text. Resorting to a contrary 1 (course
of life), and growing old in their own duties, they
become men in this world whose nature is to return 2 .
Coming to a sinful womb, as Aandalas 3 or deaf, or ,
lisping men, they attain to higher and higher castes in

order going beyond the .Sudra womb, and (beyond)
;
whatever other dark qualities there are which abide in

the quality of darkness 4 in the current (of this world).
Attachment to objects of desire be is laid down to
the great delusion. There, sages and saints and
gods become deluded, wishing for pleasure. Dark-
ness 5 delusion, the great delusion, the great obscu-
,
rity called anger, and death the blinding obscurity ;
anger is called the great obscurity. I have now

duly described to you, O Brahmaâs this quality !
of darkness, in full and accurately with reference to
1
See note 7 on last page. The sequence of ideas seems not to
be properly brought out here. In the course of transmigration after
their course of conduct is altered they become men, and then pro-
ceed to heaven. This seems the real sense here.
2
To return to life and death, and so on, until they fit themselves
for final emancipation. Cf. Apastamba II, 5, 11, 10-11.
3
Cf. .Oandogya, p. 359.
4 and the commentators give but
This is not very clear, little
help. The meaning probably is, that they gradually, in course of

improvement, cross beyond the -Sudra caste, and all those qualities
or tempers of mind, and so forth, which have been stated to apper-
tain to the quality of darkness.
5
Cf.S^hkhya-kariM,pp. 47, 48, and Vatepati's comment. There
these are identified with the afflictions ' of the Yoga-âstra
'
igno-
rance, self-consciousness, affection, aversion, persistent attachment,
and they are five divisions of false knowledge, or the quality of dark-
ness, as it is here called. See, too, -SVetawatara (comm.), p. 284.
CHAPTER XXII, 5. 323
its nature, and also its qualities, and also its source.
Who, indeed, understands this properly; who, in-
deed, perceives this properly ? The definition of
the essence of darkness is, that one sees the real-
in what is unreal. The qualities of darkness have

been described to you in many ways. And dark-
ness in its higher and lower 1 (forms) has been accu-
rately stated. The man who always understands
these qualities gets rid of all dark qualities.
Chapter XXII.
Brahman said
best (of men) ! I will explain to you accurately
the quality of passion. Learn, O noble ones! the

action of the quality of passion. Injuring (others),
beauty 2 , toil, pleasure and pain, cold and heat,
power war, peace, argument, repining 3 endurance,
2
, ,
strength, valour, frenzy, wrath, exercise and quarrel

too, vindictiveness, desire, backbiting, battle, the
thought (that this or that is) mine, preservation 4 ,
slaughter, bonds, and selling,

affliction, buying
touching other peoples weak points, by cutting,
5
breaking, piercing fierceness and cruelty, vilifying,

;
pointing out others weaknesses, thinking of (this)
world, harbouring evil thoughts, animosity, abuse,
Generally and specifically, says Arûna Mwra.

1
Arûna Mijra says these mean pride of beauty and pride of

2
power respectively. Cf. as to this list generally, Maitri, pp. Ôy^ 1 -
3
Cf. Sanatsuâta, p. 168.
4
I presume this means solicitude for preserving what one has
got. Cf. GM, p. 48.
5
Literally, piercing. '
Cutting, breaking, piercing/ further on,
seem to indicate the greater or less offensiveness of the operation
of touching others' weak points.'
*
Y 2
324 anugIta.
uttering falsehoods, bad 1 gifts, doubt, boasting, cen-

sure, praise, laudation 2 prowess, defiance, attendance
,
(on another), obedience 3 service, harbouring desire,

,
management 4 ,
policy, heedlessness, contumely, belong-
ings 5 and the various decorations which prevail in
,
this world, for men, for women, for living creatures,

for articles, and for houses, vexation, and also want
of faith, vows and regulations 6 and actions with ex- ,
pectations, and the various acts of public charity 7 ,
the ceremony of Svclha, the ceremony of Svadhd,

the ceremony of Vashat 8 salutation, both officiat- ,
ing at sacrifices and imparting instruction, and also

sacrificing and study, gifts and acceptance of gifts, ex-
piations, auspicious rites, the wish this may be mine
i
and that may be mine/ affection generated by the qua-

lities 9 treachery and likewise deception, disrespect
,
and respect, theft, slaughter, disgust, vexing (oneself),

wakefulness, ostentation, haughtiness, and attach-
ment also, devotion, pleasure and delight, gambling,
common scandal, association with women, devotion
1
I. e. to undeserving persons, Aiguna MLsra. Probably it in-
cludes the other defects also pointed out at Gitd, p. 120. As to

doubt, see GM, p. 63.
2
The one is attributing merits which do not exist, the other is
merely parading merits which do exist.

8
Argrma Mirra takes this literally to mean wish
'
to hear/
4
Cleverness in worldly affairs, Nilakaw/â.
5
Cf. Gita, passim, and see also Yoga-sutras II, 30, and com-
mentary (pp. 127-129, Calc. ed.)
6
Fasts and other observances for special benefits.
7
E. g. digging tanks and wells, &c.
8
Vashat and Svah& indicate offerings to gods, Svadha to the
manes. See Br/hadarayaka, p. 982, and MaWukya (Gaudapada
Karika), p. 443, and commentaries there.
9
I presume this means attachment to the operations of the
qualities. Cf. Gita, p. 48. As to the wish just before, see GM,
pp.115, II6 -
CHAPTER XXIII, 3. 325
to dancing, and instrumental or vocal music, all these

qualities, O Brahma/zas ! are described as passionate.
The men who meditate on past, present, and future
entities in this world 1 , who are always devoted to
the triad piety, wealth, and lust also 2 who acting
under (the impulse on the success
of) desires exult
of all their desires, these men, who are enveloped by
passion, have (their) currents downwards 3 Born again .
and again in this world, they rejoice 4 and wish for ,
the fruit appertaining to the life after death 5 and that

appertaining to this world also. They give and re-
ceive, and make Tarpa/za 6 and also sacrifice. The
,
qualities of passion have been described to you in

many ways, and the action of the quality has
also been stated accurately. The man who always
understands these qualities, gets rid of all passionate
qualities.
Chapter XXIII.
Brahman said
Now I shall proceed to describe the third the
best quality, beneficial to all creatures, and unblam-
able, theduty of the good. Joy 7 pleasure, nobility, ,
enlightenment and happiness also, absence of stingi-

ness, absence of fear, contentment, faith, forgiveness,
courage, harmlessness, equability, truth, straight-
forwardness, absence of wrath, absence of calumnia-
1
I. e. who are always thinking of what they have done and what
they have to do, and so forth. Cf. Gita, pp. 1 15, 1 16.
2
And not that which is higher than these, viz. final emancipation.
3 4
See p. 321 and note 5 there. Cf. inter alia, Gitsi, p. 48.
5 6
Viz. heaven. Cf. Gita, p. 48. I.e. offerings to the manes.
7
Cf. p. 300 supra, and *Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 194, st. 34;
chap. 219, st. 36. For nobility, Arûna Mura has manifestation of joy.
326 ANUGITA.
tion, purity, dexterity, valour. He who possesses the

piety of concentration of mind, (holding) knowledge
to be vain x
,
(good) conduct vain, service vain, and
labour vain, he attains the highest in the next
world. Devoid of (the notion that this or that is)
mine, devoid of egoism, devoid of expectations,

equable everywhere, not full of desires, (to be) such
is the eternal duty of the good. Confidence, modesty 2 ,
forgiveness, liberality, purity, freedom from laziness,

absence of cruelty, freedom from delusion, com-
passion to (all) creatures, absence of backbiting, joy,
contentment, joviality, humility, good behaviour,
purity 3
in all action for (acquiring) tranquillity ,
righteous feelings, emancipation 4 5

, indifference , life
as a Brahma/arin, abandonment on all hands, freedom

from (the notion that this or that is) mine, freedom
from expectations 6 unbroken piety 7 (holding that)
, ,
gifts (are) vain, sacrifices vain, learning vain, vows

vain, receipt of gifts vain, piety vain, penance vain.
Those talented Br&hmaâs in this world, whose
conduct is of this description, who adhere to the
quality of goodness, abiding in the seat of the Brah-
man 8
,
perceive (everything) aright. Getting rid of all
1
Such is Nilakarc/â's reading, and he takes knowledge to mean
mere knowledge derived from books, &c. Arg-una Mi^ra has a dif-
ferent reading for vain, which he interprets to mean wish '
for fruit/
2
See Sanatsug-atiya, p. 162.
3
I. e. pure and straightforward conduct in the performance of
whatever is done for attaining final emancipation.
4
Of other people from sorrow, Argima MLrra.
5
The state of being unconcerned, udasina, Nilakaâ.
6
Cf. Gita, p. 60, inter alia.
7
Arûna Mi^ra understands the original here to mean f
not
being under the control of another/
8
I. e. the source of the Vedas, according to Nilakaâ. The
supreme is called Brahmayoni, the original word here, at *Svetii-
CHAPTER XXIII, 14. 327
sins,and free from grief, those talented men reach

heaven, and create (various) bodies 1 The power of .
governing, self-restraint, minuteness 2 these those high- ,
souled ones make (for themselves) by (the operations

of their own) minds like the gods dwelling in heaven.
They are said to have their currents upwards
and 3
,
to be gods, and of the quality of goodness and 4

;
having gone to heaven they verily change in various

ways, by means of nature 5 They obtain and divide 6 .
whatever they desire. Thus, O chiefs of the twice-

born have I described to you the conduct of the
!
quality of goodness. Understanding this according to

rule, one obtains whatever one desires. The qualities
jvatara, p. 354, where Brahman is rendered to mean Prakrz'ti by

ASahkara. See Sanatsuâtiya, p. 1 86, note 6, and Taittiriya-ara^yaka,
p. 894. As to the probable sense here, see p. 339, note 2 infra.
1
I.e. for themselves.
Cf. p. 345 infra; Yoga-sutras, p. 227;
and Br/hadarawyaka, p. 849.
2
These include, according to Nilaka//$a, the other qualities of
the same class unnamed here, for which see Yoga-sutra III, 44
(p. 207). The power of governing, i. e. producing, destroying, or
combining worldly objects as one pleases; self-restraint, i.e. in
the presence of tempting objects minuteness power of becoming
;
=
as minute as one pleases. The other qualities are lightness, large-
ness, and heaviness power of attracting everything so as to be
;
near oneself (e. g. touching the moon with the finger), power of
obtaining one's wish.
3
Cf. p. 32 t supra and note 5. Arguna Mi^ra, and Nilakaâ
also, here render it by those who go upwards.' As to which, see
'
Gita, p. 109.
4
Cf. for this sense, which is given by Ar^-una Mijra, Sahkhya-
sara, p. 19.
6
Nilakaâ says this means that they change their minds for
purposes of enjoyment by means of the impression of previous
enjoyments. The changes, however, seem to be those above referred
to minuteness, &c, and the acquisition of other bodies. As to na-
ture, cf.Gita, pp. 58 and 1 1 2, with the correction made at p. 3 1 8 supra.
6
This is not quite clear. Does it mean distribute among them-
selves or others ?
328 ANUGITA.
of goodness have been specifically described, and the

operation of the qualities has been accurately stated.
The man who always understands these qualities,
1
enjoys the qualities , but is not attached to the
qualities.
Chapter XXIV.
Brahman said
The qualities cannot be explained altogether dis-
tinctly (from one another). Passion, goodness, and
darkness likewise are seen mixed up (with one
another). They are attached to one another, they
feed on one another. depend on one They all
another, and likewise follow one another 2

There .
is no doubt of this, that as long as there is goodness

3
so long darkness exists. And as long as goodness

and darkness, so long is passion said (to exist) here.
They perform their journey together, in union, and
moving about collectively. For they act with cause
or without cause 4 moving in a body.
, Of all these
acting with one another, but differing in development,
the increase and diminution will now be stated.
Where darkness is increased, abiding 5
in the lower
entities, there passion should be understood to be
little, and goodness likewise to be less. Where
1
Cf. GM inter alia, p. 104. 2
Cf. p. 318 supra.
3
So Aignna Mura. Nilakaâ says on this, ' However much
goodness may be increased, it is still held in check by darkness,
and thus there is the continual relation of that which checks and
that which is checked between the three qualities hence they are ;
alike. So also passion being increased, holds goodness and darkness

in check. The sense seems to be that the qualities dominate all in
this world and exist together though varying in strength (Gitd, p. 3). '
7
4
I. e. spontaneously, Arîina MLrra. Cf. *Santi Parvan (Moksha),
chap. 194, st. 35.
5
It is in the lower species that darkness is predominant.
CHAPTER XXIV, 14. 329
passion is developed, abiding in those of the middle

current *, there darkness should be understood to be
little, and goodness likewise to be less. And where
goodness is developed, abiding in those of the upward
current 2 there darkness should be understood to be
,
little, and passion likewise to be less

3
Goodness .
is the cause of the modifications in the senses, and
the enlightener 4 For there is no other higher duty

.
laid down than goodness. Those who adhere to

(the ways of) goodness go up the passionate remain ;
in the middle the men of the quality of darkness,

;
being connected with the lowest quality, go down 5 .
The three qualities abide in the three castes thus

darkness in the .Stidra, passion in the Kshatriya, and
the highest, goodness, in the BrAhmaâ 6
. Even
from afar 7
, darkness, goodness, and passion also,
are seen to have been together and moving about
collectively. We
have never heard of them (as
existing) separately. Seeing the sun rising, evil-
doers are alarmed, and travellers, suffering trouble
from the heat, feel the warmth. The sun is good-
ness developed, evil-doers likewise are darkness, and
the heat to the travellers is said to be a property of
1
I. e. the human species, Argnna MLsra. Cf. Gita, p. 109.
2 In his Sahkhyatattva-
See Gitd, p. 109, also p. 327 supra.
kaumudt, Vaâspati MLnra applies the epithet to Yogins (see p. 13
of Taranath's edition, and the editor's note there).
3
Cf. Gita, p. 108.
4
Cf. Gita, p. 108. The modifications of the senses constituting
perception by them is an operation of the quality of goodness.
This seems to be the meaning of the text ; as to this, cf. Tattva-
kaumudi, p. 14 (Taranath's edition).
5
See Gita, p. 109 the words are nearly
; identical.
6
Cf. Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 188, st. 15. The Vairya is
omitted here.
7
I. e. Arûna Mijra says, even after much observation.
330 ANUGITA.
passion 1
. The light in the sun is goodness the heat
;
isthe quality of passion and its eclipse on the ;
Parvan 2 days must be understood to be of the quality

of darkness. So in all shining bodies, there exist
three qualities. And they act by turns in the several
places in several ways. Among immovable entities,
darkness is in the form of their belonging to the
lower species; the qualities of passion are variable;
and the oleaginous property is of the quality of
goodness 3 The day should be understood to be
.
threefold, the night is stated to be threefold, and

likewise months, half-months, years, seasons, and
4
the conjunctions . Threefold are the gifts given 5
,
threefold the sacrifices performed, threefold are the
1
This illustrates the existence of the qualities as one body.
Even the enlightening sun, which embodies the quality of goodness,
produces effects which belong to the other qualities. The fear and
sorrow which evil-doers, that is thieves, feel, is an effect of the rising
of the sun, which appertains to the quality of darkness, and the heat
as being the cause of vexation and consequent delusion to travellers,
appertains to the quality of passion.
2
I. e. the days of the moon's conjunction or opposition.
3
I understand this to mean that in the 'immovable entities' the
three qualities co-exist ; the birth in the lower species is an effect
of darkness ; the variable qualities, viz. the heat, &c, as Arôina
MLsra says, are the properties of passion; and the oleaginous
properties among them appertain to goodness, as, says Argnna
MLsra, they are sources of pleasure (cf. Gita, p. n8). Nilaka^Ma
says, 'Immovable being very unintelligent, darkness is
entities
very much developed among them/ but this last, as an interpreta-
tion of tiryagbhavagata, appears to me to be alike unwarranted
and inappropriate here.
4
Does this mean the period about the close of one and beginning
of another yuga or age ? That is the only sense ejusdem generis
with the words preceding it that I can think of; yet the jump from
years to yuga-sandhis is a long one.
5
Cf. Gita, p.120. With reference to some, at least, of the things
enumerated here, the division would be rather fanciful.
CHAPTER XXIV, 25. 33
worlds, threefold the gods, threefold the (depart-

ments of) knowledge, and threefold the path \ The
past, the present, and the future piety, wealth, and ;
lust; the Pr&/za, the Apina, and the Ud&na; these

are the three qualities. And whatever there is in
this world, all that is (made of) these three qualities 2 .

The three qualities goodness, passion, and darkness
also are always acting unperceived. The creation
of the qualities is eternal. Darkness, unperceived,
holy 3
, constant, unborn, womb, eternal, nature,
4
change , destruction, Pradhina, production and ab-
sorption, not developed, not small, unshaking, im-
movable, immutable, existent and also non-existent 5
all these, the unperceived, (consisting) of the three
qualities, is said to be. These names should be learnt
by men who ponder on matters relating to the self.
He who understands correctly all the names of the

unperceived, and the qualities, and its pure opera-
tions, he, freed from the body, understanding the

truth about (all) distinctions, and being free from all
misery, is released from all qualities.
1
See these three mentioned at iTMndogya, pp. 340-359. As
to departments of knowledge, cf. Gita, p. 84 ; Arg-una Misra reads,
1
threefold the Vedas/
2
The universe is all developed from the Prakrz'ti, which is merely
the three 'qualities in equilibrium/ Cf. Sahkhya-sutra I, 61.
3
Because it gives final emancipation to one who discriminates
it from Purusha, Arûna Mijra. Cf. Sahkhya-sutra II, 1 seq., and
Sahkhya-karika, p. 56 seq., and commentary. For another list of
names of Prakr/ti, see *SVeta\yvatara (comm.), p. 283.
4
Nature is not a development from anything, and hence is called
Sankhya-karika 3 but change here probably means
avikrz'ti in ;
'
'
the whole aggregate of Vikrz'tis, changes or developments, which

'
'
make up Prakrz'ti; or by a different derivation it may, perhaps, also

mean that from which all development or change takes place.
5
See Sahkhya-sutra V, 52-56 and also I, 26, and commentary
;
here. The Vedantins speak of Maya which answers to what the

33 2 anugJta.
Chapter XXV.
Brahman said
From the unperceived was first produced the
great self 1 , of great intelligence, the source of
2
all qualities ; it is said to be the first creation.
That great by these synonymous
self is signified

terms the great self, intelligence, Vishnu 3 Gishnu, ,
6ambhu, the valiant, the understanding, means of

knowledge, means of perception, and likewise cogni-
tion, courage, memory. Knowing that (great self), a
learned Brahmaâ comes not by delusion. It has
hands and feet on all sides 4 it has eyes, heads, and ,
faces on all sides it stands pervading everything

;
in the world 5 The being of great power is stationed

.
in the heart of all. Minuteness 6 lightness, (the power ,
of) obtaining (everything) (are his) he is the ;
governor, the light, inexhaustible. Now people who

comprehend the understanding, and who are always
possessed of a good heart, who practice meditation,
who are constant at concentration of mind, who are
true to their promises, and whose senses are subdued,
who are possessed of knowledge, who are not ava-
ricious, who have subdued wrath, whose minds are
clear, who are talented, who are devoid of (the thought
that this or that is) mine, who are devoid of egoism,
Sahkhyas call Prakrz'ti (see *Sveta\yvatara, p. 340, and Sahkhya-sutra

I,69, and commentary there)
as sattvasattvabhyamanirva^ya/
'
1
I.e. the understanding, on which see Sahkhya-sutra 1,61-64. It
is called being (Purusha) further on, as it dwells in the body (Puri).

2
I. e. of the effects of all qualities (namely, the universe ; cf.
Gita, p. 48), Nilaka/$a.

3
I. e. all-pervading, Argnna MLsra. On the w hole
r
passage, see
Sahkhya-sara, pp. 15, 16, and note 3 on page 333 infra.
4
As, says Argoina Mi^ra, it is the source of all activity.
5
The words are identical with those at Gita, p. 103.
6
See p. 327 supra.
CHAPTER XXVI, 2. 333
these being emancipated, attain greatness 1

. And
the talented man who understands that high and
holy goal, the great self 2 he , among people comes
all
not by delusion. The self-existent Vish/m is the

Lord in the primary creations 3 . And he who thus
knows the lord lying in the cave 4 the transcendent, ,
ancient being, of universal form, and golden 5 the ,
highest goal of those possessed of understanding,

that talented man, abides transcending the under-
6
standing .
Chapter XXVI.
Brahman said
That Mahat which was first produced, is (after-
wards) called egoism; when it is born as (the feeling
7
itself) 1, that is said to be the second creation.
That egoism is stated to be the source of all entities*,
1
I. e. says Arg-una Mura, the world of the understanding. Does
this mean the world of Hira/zyagarbha ? The understanding is said
to be the *
subtle body' of Hirawyagarbha (Veddnta ParibhashS,
p. 46). Probably the reference spiritually interpreted is to the state
in which egoism and all its products are non-existent.
2
Literally, and holy passage to the great self/
' the high
3
The Mahat first itself as Vishmi before it manifests
manifests
itself as Brahman or -Siva (Sahkhya-sara, p. 16), hence he is said
to be the Lord in the primary creation. It may be added, that
in the Sahkhya-sara where this passage is quoted the original word
rendered '
cognition' above (khyati) does not occur, but in lieu of
it occurs Brahman. The sentence '
And the talented man ' &c. is
also wanting there.

4
I.e. the understanding. See *Sahkara on *SVeta\rvatara, p. 329;
Ka/$a, p. 100.
5
Source of enlightenment, Arûna MLfra. Cf. Mu^daka, pp. 303-
308 (gloss).
6
I. e. attaching himself to the Purusha, as the never-changing
reality, and rising above Prakrz'ti and its manifestations.
7
when the Mahat develops into the feeling of self-conscious-
I. e.
ness
8
I
then it assumes the name of egoism.
See on this Sahkhya-sara, Hall's Introd. p. 31, note.
334 ANUGITA.
that from which the changes take place x

; it is full
of light, the supporter of consciousness ; it is that

from which the people are produced, the Praîpati.
It is a deity, the producer of the deities, and of the
mind ; it is the creator of the three worlds. That
which feels 2
thus
'I am all this' is called (by) that
(name). That eternal world is for those sages who
are contented with knowledge relating to the self,
who have pondered on the self, and who are perfected

by sacred study and sacrifice. By 3 consciousness of
self one enjoys the qualities and thus that source of ;
all entities, the producer of the entities, creates (them) ;
and as that from which the changes take place, it
causes all this to move and by its own ; light, it
likewise charms the world.
1
So Arûna Mijra. Nilaka//a says it means 'born from the
change, or development, viz. Mahat/ The Sahkhya-sara, p. 17,
however, shows means appertaining to the quality of goodness.'
it '
See also Sahkhya-karikd 25, and commentary there, which is of great

help here. The sense is this Egoism is of three descriptions it
: ;
appertains to the quality of goodness, and as such is the creator

of the deities and mind, the deities being those presiding over the
ten senses (cf. Sankhya-s&ra, p. 17); it is full of light, or apper-
tains to the quality of passion (cf. ibid.), and as such imparts to
the other two qualities their virtue of activity (cf. Sahkhya-Mrika
commentary, p. 91, Taranath's ed.); it is also of the quality of
darkness, and as such the producer of the triple world (see ibid.)
See Sahkhya-sutra II, 17, 18, and comment, where a view some-
what different in one or two details is stated.
2
Sankhya-s&ra, p. 16; Sahkhya-karika 24, p. 89 (Taranath's ed.)
8
Arg-una Mura says that the words Ahahkara &c. are here ex-
plained; qualities here means objects, as at Gita, p. 55. The
meaning of the first clause is, that the feeling that the objects are
for oneself, and therefore enjoying them, gives the name of Ahankara
to the principle in question; its creation of all the elements gives it the
name of Bhutadi. It is called Vaikarika, as the cause of the various
activities and developments going on. The last clause seems to be
an explanation of the epithet Taiâsa, also applied to egoism.
CHAPTER XXVII, J. 335
Chapter XXVII.
Brahman said
From egoism, verily, were the five great elements
born earth, air, space, water, and light as the fifth.
In these five great elements, in the operations of
(perceiving) sound, touch, colour, taste, and smell,
creatures are deluded 1 . When, at the termination
of the destruction of the great elements, the final
dissolution approaches, O talented one ! a great

danger for all living beings arises 2 . Every entity
is dissolved into that from which it is produced.
They are born one from the other, and are dis-
solved in the reverse order 3
. Then when every
entity, movable or immovable, has been dissolved,
the talented men who possess a (good) memory 4
are not dissolved at all. Sound, touch, and like-
wise colour, and smell as the fifth
taste, the ;
operations (connected with these) have causes 5 ,
and are inconstant, and their name is delusion.

Caused by the production of avarice 6 not different ,
from one another 7 and insignificant 8 connected with

, ,
flesh and blood, and depending upon one another,
1
The contact of the objects of sense with the senses is the
source of delusion.
2
Cf. Gita, p. 107, and note 1 there.
3
Cf. Sankhya-sutra 1, 121, and p. 387 infra.
4
knowledge of the truth, Arguna Mi^ra.
I. e.
5
Hence, as they have a beginning, they also must have an end,
and hence they are inconstant.
6
This and following epithets expand the idea of inconstancy.
7
Being all in substance connected with the Prakrzti, the material
world, so to say.
8
Containing no reality, Nilakaw/â.
336 ANUGfTA.
excluded from the self 1 these are helpless and ,
powerless. The Priâ and the Ap&na, the Ud&na,

the Sam&na, and the Vyina also, these five winds
are also joined to the inner self 2 , and together
with speech, mind, and understanding make the
eight constituents of the universe 3 He whose skin, .
nose, ear, eye, tongue, and speech are restrained,

and whose mind is pure, and understanding un-
swerving 4 and whose mind is never burnt by these
,
eight fires 5 he attains to that holy Brahman than

,
which nothing greater exists. And the eleven

organs, which are stated as having been produced
from egoism
these, O twice-born ones! I will
describe specifically. The ear, the skin, the two
eyes, the tongue, the nose also as the fifth, the
two feet, the organ of excretion, and the organ of
generation, the two hands, and speech as the tenth
such is the group of organs, the mind is the ele-
venth. This group one should subdue first, then
the Brahman shines (before him). Five (of these)
are called the organs of perception, and five the
1
Nllaka/$a apparently takes the original here to mean of gross
nature, not subtle, such as anything connected with the self would
be. They are helpless and powerless without support from other
principles, and mainly the self.
2
He here states what is more closely connected with the self,
and, as Nilaka/â puts it, accompanies the self till final emancipa-
tion. The inner self Nilakaw/â takes to mean the self associated
with egoism or self- consciousness.
3
Nilakaâ cites certain texts to show that the perceptive senses
work only through and that the objects of the senses are
the mind,
produced from the senses, and hence the universe, he says, is con-
stituted of the eight enumerated above.
4
I. e. from the truth.
6
I. e. vexed by the operations of any of these.
CHAPTER XXVII, 24. 337
organs of action. The five beginning with the

ear are truly said to be connected with knowledge.
And all the rest are without distinction connected
with action. The mind should be understood to be
among both and the understanding is the twelfth.
1
,
Thus have been stated the eleven organs in order.

Understanding these 2 learned men think they have,
accomplished (everything). I will now proceed to

3
state all the various organs. Space is the first
entity ; as connected with the self it is called the

ear ; likewise as connected with objects (it is) sound
and the presiding deity there is the quarters. The
second entity is air; it is known as the skin as
connected with the self; as connected with objects
(it is) the object of touch and the presiding deity
;
there is lightning. The third (entity) is said to be

light ; as connected with the self it is called the eye ;
next as connected with objects (it is) colour; and

the presiding deity there is the sun. The fourth
(entity) should be understood to be water; as con-
nected with the self it is called the tongue ; as con-
nected with objects it is taste ; and the presiding
deity there is Soma. The fifth entity is earth
as connected with the self it is the nose; as con-
nected with objects likewise it is smell ; and the
presiding deity there is the wind. Thus are the
five entities stated to be divided among the three 4 .
I will now proceed to state all the various organs.
1
Cf. Sankhya-karika 27 ; S&nkhya-sara, p. 17.
2
Cf. Ka/#a, p. 148.
3
Cf. Lalita Vistara (translated by Dr. R. Mitra), p. 11.
4
The above sentences show the entities in the three different
aspects mentioned, which correspond to each other; the ear
is the sense, that which is connected with the self; sound is the
object of that sense, as connected with the external world; and the
[8] Z
338 anug!ta.
As connected with the self, the feet are mentioned

by Brihmaâs, who perceive the truth ; as connected
with objects it is motion ; the presiding deity there
is Vishnu. The Ap&na wind, the motion of which is
downward, as connected with the self, is called the

organ of excretion as connected with objects it is
;
excretion 1 and the presiding deity there is Mitra.

;
As connected with the self the generative organ is

mentioned, the producer of all beings as connected ;
with objects it is the semen

and the presiding deity ;
there is Pra^&pati. Men who understand the Adhya-

tma speak of the two hands as connected with the
self; as connected with objects it is actions; and
the presiding deity there is Indra. Then first, as
connected with the self, is speech which relates
to all the gods as connected with objects it is
;
what is spoken; and the presiding deity there is

fire. As connected with the self they mention the
mind, which follows after the five entities 2 as con- ;
nected with objects it is the mental operation ; the

presiding deity there is the moon. Likewise (there
is) egoism, the cause of the whole course of worldly
life, as connected with the self; as connected with
objects, self-consciousness ; the presiding deity there
is Rudra. As connected with the self, they men-
tion the understanding impelling the six senses 3 ;
quarters, Dik, are the deities presiding over the senses ; as to this
Sahkhya-sara, p. 17, and Vedanta Paribhasha, p. 45, which show
cf.
some discrepancies. The distinctions of Adhyatma &c. are to

be found in the Upanishads; cf. inter alia, -Oandogya, p. 227, and
cf. Gita, p. 77.
1
As tothe original word, cf. inter alia, *SVeta\fvatara, pp. 197-202.
2
This probably means the five senses which can perceive only
when associated with the mind. See p. 268 supra.
3
The understanding is called the charioteer at Ka//$a, p. 1 1 1
as connected with objects that which is to be un-

derstood; and the presiding deity there is Brah-
man. There are three seats for all entities a fourth
is not possible
land, water, and space. And the
(mode of) birth is fourfold. Those born from eggs,
those born from germs, those born from perspira-
tion, and those born from wombs such is the four-
fold (mode of) birth of the group of living beings 1 .
Now there are the inferior beings and likewise those

moving in the air. Those should be understood to
be born from eggs, as also all reptiles. Insects
are said to be born from perspiration and worms ;
of the like description. This is said to be the

second (mode of) birth, and inferior. Those beings,
however, which are born after the lapse of some
time, bursting through the earth, are said to be
born from germs, O best of the twice -born!
Beings of two feet or more than two feet, and
those which move crookedly, are the beings born
from wombs. Understand about them also, O
best of men ! The eternal seat (where) the
Brahman 2
(is to be attained) should be under-
stood to be twofold penance 3 and meritorious
action. Such is the doctrine of the learned.
Action should be understood to be of various 4
1
Cf. .A^Mndogya, pp. 404-406, and glosses; Aitareya, p. 243;
Vedanta ParibhdsM, p. 47; Sarikhya-sutra V, in; Manu I, 43;
Max Muller's note at p. 94 of his -Oandogya in this series.
2
So Nilakaw/â, but he also adds that this means birth as a
Brdhmawa, which seems to be quite wrong. Arûna Miira's
1
means of acquiring Brahman* is right. See p. 369 infra.
8
I. e., I presume, knowledge/ /Sarikara has so interpreted the
'
word at Muâka, p. 270, and Ka/â, p. 127, and elsewhere; and

see Sanatsug-atiya, p. 166 supra.
4
Another reading is of two kinds/ '
But I prefer this, as three
kinds are mentioned further on.
Z 2
34-0 ANUGITA.
descriptions, (namely) sacrifice, gift at a sacrifice,
and sacred study 1 for (every one) who is born 2

, .
Such is the teaching of the ancients. He who

duly understands this, becomes possessed of concen-
tration of mind, O chief of the twice-born and !
know, too, that he is released from all sins. Space 3

is the first entity; as connected with the (indivi-
dual) self it is called the ear ; as connected with
objects likewise it is called sound and the presiding
;
deity there is the quarters. The second entity is air ;
as connected with the (individual) self it is called

the skin ; as connected with objects it is the object
of touch ; and the presiding deity there is the
lightning. The third is called light; as connected
with the (individual) self it is laid down to be the
eye ; next as connected with objects it is colour
the presiding deity there is the sun. The fourth
should be understood to be water; as connected
with stated to be the
the (individual) self it is
tongue as connected with objects it should be

;
understood to be taste the presiding deity there ;
is Soma. The fifth element is earth as connected ;
with the (individual) self it is called the nose; as

connected with objects likewise it is called smell ;
the presiding deity there is Vdyu. Thus have I
1
Cf. as to this iTMndogya, p. 136, which justifies our rendering,
though the commentator Argnna Mi^ra seems to understand the
passage differently.
2
Ar^-una MLrra seems to understand this to mean twice-born/ *
3
This is a repetition of what occurs at p. 337, and apparently is
spurious. But two of theMSS., both those containing commentaries,
contain the passage twice. One of the other MSS. omits the pas-
sage where it occurs before, and has it here. I think that the
passage is in its place before, and probably interpolated here.
accurately described to you the creation 1 as connected

with the (individual) self. A knowledge of this, O ye
who understand piety! is here obtained by those
who possess knowledge. One should place all these
together, (viz.) the senses, the objects of the senses,
and the five great elements, and hold them by the
mind 2 When everything is absorbed into the mind,
.
3
the pleasures of (worldly) life are not esteemed.
The learned (men) whose understandings are pos-
sessed of knowledge esteem the pleasure derived
from that 4 . Now 5
I shall proceed to describe that
discarding of all entities by (means) gentle and
hard 6
which produces attachment to subtle 7 (topics),
,
and is sanctifying. The (mode of) conduct in which

qualities are not (treated as) qualities 8 which is free ,
from attachment, in which one lives alone 9 which is ,
uninterrupted 10 and which is full of the Brahman 11

, ,
32
is called happiness (dwelling) in one aggregate .
1
I am not quite sure that this is a correct rendering. But I can
think of none better, and the commentators afford no help.
2
Nilakaw/â says, '
Thinking that the great elements are not dis-
tinctfrom the senses, one should hold them absorbed in the mind/
Arûna Misra says, In the mind as their seat they should be placed,'
'
as being not distinct from the mind, I presume. Cf. Ka/â, p. 148.
3
Literally, ' birth.'
4
From knowledge, I presume. The commentators afford no help.
5
Ar^-una MLrra's text appears to commence a new chapter here.
6
Such as meditation or up&sana, and pra/zayama or restraint of
life-winds respectively, Aignna Miira.
7
Cf. p. 310 supra.
8
I. e. bravery, learning, &c. are treated as not being merits, as
they cause pride, &c, Nilaka^/â.
9
I. e. in solitude, Nilaka#/$a ; devoting oneself to the self only,
Argnma MLrra. Cf. also p. 284 supra, note 4.

10
Or, says Nllakaâ, free from any belief in distinctions.
11
Another reading would mean which *
exists among Brahmaas.'
12
I. e. all collected together, I presume.
342 anugita.
The learned man who absorbs objects of desire

from all sides, as a tortoise (draws in) his limbs 1 ,
and who is devoid of passion, and released from

everything 2 is ever happy.
, Restraining objects
3
of desire within the self he becomes fit for assi- ,
milation with the Brahman 4 having his cravings ,
destroyed, and being concentrated in mind, and

friendly and affectionate 5 to all beings. The fire
of the Adhyatma 6
is kindled in a sage by his
abandoning the country 7 and by the restraint of ,
all the senses which hanker after objects of sense.
As fire kindled with fuel shines forth with a great

8
blaze, so the great self shines forth through the
restraint of the senses. When
one with a tranquil
self perceives all entities in one's own heart, then
being self-illumined 9 one attains to that which is
,
10
subtler than (the most) subtle (thing) and than ,
which there is nothing higher. It is settled, that
the body in which the colour 11 is fire, the flowing 12
1
Cf. Gita, pp. 50, 51, and S&nti Parvan (Moksha Dharma) I, 51,
where the phrase is precisely the same as here.
2
I. e. from all bonds, I suppose. See p. 292 supra.
3
Cf. Gitd, p. 51.
4
Cf. GitS, p. no. 5
Cf. GM, p. 68.
6
I.e. experience, Nilaka/â. It means direct perception of the
relations between the supreme and individual self. Cf. Giti, p. 1 1 1.
7
As opposed to forests. See Sanatsuâtiya, p. 159, note 9.
8
This must mean here the supreme self, apparently.
9
I. e. being devoted to the self only, Arg-una Mijra. The
ordinary meaning of the word, however, is one who has direct
experience or perception without the aid of senses, &c, Cf. Br*ha-
dara^yaka, p. 765, and -Sariraka Bhashya, pp. 648, 784, &c.

10
Nilakaw/â says, ' The supreme Brahman which is subtler than
the Brahman within the lotus-like heart/
11
I. e. that which perceives colour, viz. the sense, Arûna Mijra.
This applies to the analogous words coming further on.
12
I. e. taste, says Arguna Mura, which seems to be more correct
than Nilaka/z/#a's blood and such other liquid elements of the body.
(element) water, and the feeling of touch is air,
the hideous is earth, and

holder of the mud 1
likewise the sound which is pervaded by

is space ;
disease and sorrow which is surrounded by the

;
five currents 2
which is made up of the five ele-
;
ments which ;has nine passages 3 and two deities 4 ;
which is full of passion unfit to be seen 5 made ; ;
up of three qualities and of three constituent ele-

ments 6 pleased with contacts 7 and full of delusion 8
; ; ;
this same (body), which is difficult to move in this

mortal world, and which rests on the real (entity) 9
,
is the very wheel of time which rotates in this
world 10 It is a great ocean, fearful and unfathom-

.
able, and is named 11 delusion. The world, together

with the immortals, should cast it aside, curtail it,
1
I. e. the flesh, bone, and so forth, Nilaka/#a ; the mucus in
the nose, Aiguna Mm*a.
2
I.e. the senses. Cf. p. 238 supra, note 7.
3 * See Sanatsug-atiya,
Cf. Gita, p. 65. p. 187 supra.
5
As being unholy, Nilakaâ ; as the bodies of KsWalas &c.
when seen are productive of sin, Arûna MLrra. See p. 155 supra.
6
Viz. vata, pitta, jleshma, or wind, bile, and phlegm. The
dhatus are sometimes spoken of as seven. See Yoga-sutras,
p. 192 Taitt. Ar. p. 874, commentary, and p. 246 supra. See, too,
;
however, *SVeta\rvatara, commentary, p. 287.

7
Which is delighted only by contact with food and so forth, not
otherwise, Nilaka/zMa.
8
I. e. cause of delusion. The original word for '
it is settled ' at the
beginning of this sentence is otherwise rendered by Arûna MLrra.

He takes it to mean '
in this light (namely, as above stated) should
one contemplate the body.' The other rendering is Nilakaâ's.
9
I. e. the self, Ar^-una MLrra the understanding, Nilaka/â
;
;
difficult to move = difficult to adjust if attacked by disease, &c.,
Nllaka/#a.
10
It is owing to this body that the self becomes limited by time,
Arûna MLrra. Nilaka/z/â's gloss I do not follow. Cf. p. 187 supra,
and p. 355 infra.

11
I. e. characterised by delusion, Arg-una MLnra.
344 ANUGITA.
and restrain it 1 Desire, wrath, fear, avarice, trea-

.
chery, and falsehood also, (all these), which are

difficult to get rid of, the good do get rid of by
restraint of the senses 2 And he who in this .
world has vanquished the three qualities and the

five constituent elements 3
, obtains the highest 4 )
the infinite seat in heaven. Crossing the river of

which the five senses are the lofty banks, the agita-
tion of mind 5 the mighty waters, and delusion the
reservoir 6 ,one should vanquish both desire and
wrath. Freed from all sins, he then perceives that
highest (principle), concentrating the mind within
the mind 7 and seeing the self within the self 8
, .
Understanding everything, he sees the self with

the self in all entities as one 9 and also as various, ,
1
I am not sure about the meaning here. Ar^-una Mura says,
(reading vimget, ' send forth/ for vikshipet, '
cast aside,') '
send forth
at the creation, curtail at the dissolution, and restrain at the final
emancipation/ The commentary reads rodhayet, which we have
adopted above. The text in the same copy, however, is bodhayet.
Argima MLrra adds, as far as I can make out from an incorrect
copy :
*
as in this life everything is accomplished by these actions
(namely, I suppose, the casting aside, &c.) Nilaka/z/$a says, '
This
same thing is the cause of creation, destruction, and knowledge,'
2
reading bodhayet. Cf. Giti, p. 57.
8
I. e. the five great elements, as stated in Williams' Dictionary,
citing Yaîiavalkya III, 145. See *Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 182,
4
st. 16; chap. 1 84, st. 1 I. e. the seat of the Brahman, Nilaka/â.
.
5
See Gita, p. 66, where the word is the same, viz. vega.
6
From which, namely, the river issues. Cf. for the whole figure,
S&nti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 251, st. 12.
7
The mind = the lotus-like heart, Nilaka^/â. Cf. Gita, p. 79.
Concentrating = withdrawing
from external objects, &c.
8
I.e. in the body, NilakawMa. See p. 248.
9
Cf. GM, p. 83, and note 4 there. Nilakaâ says, as one, i. e. '
by direct perception of the unity of the individual and supreme^

and as various, i. e. in the all-comprehending form.*
CHAPTER XXVIII, 2. 345
changing from time to time 1 He can always perceive .
(numerous) bodies like a hundred lights from one

light. He verily is Vishmi, and Mitra, and Varu/za,
Agni, and Praâpati. He is the supporter, and the
creator. He is the lord whose faces are in all direc-
tions 2 . (In him) the great self the heart of all
beings
is resplendent. Him, all companies of Brah-
ma/zas, and also gods, and demons, and Yakshas, and
PLy&/as, and Pitrzs, and birds, and the bands of
Rakshases, and the bands of Bhfttas 3 and also all ,
the great sages, ever extol.
Chapter XXVIII.
Brahman said
Among men the royal Kshatriya is the middle 4
quality ; among vehicles the elephant 5

, and among
denizens of the forest the lion ; among all sacrificial
animals the sheep, and among the dwellers in holes

the snake ; among cattle also the bull, and among
1
I. e. creating or acting, Arg-una MLrra. I think it probable
that it was meant go with the preceding words. See Gita,
to
p. 83 note; but, for this, 'changing' must be in the accusative.
It is in the nominative. As the original stands, and on Arûna
Mura's interpretation, the sense seems to be that when he is about
to engage in the work of creation, he can obtain as many bodies as he
likes. Nilaka/z/â compares iTMndogya, p. 526. And see pp. 249,
327 supra. Can always perceive = invariably obtains when he wishes.

2
Cf. Gita, pp. 83, 93, and note 1 there.
3
Cf. Gita, pp. 85,118.
4
I.e. passion that quality is dominant in the Kshatriya,
Nilaka//5a. See p. 329 supra.
5
Commenting on Gitl V, 18 (p. 65) Sankara calls the elephant
atyantatamasa, belonging entirely to the quality of darkness.
346 ANUGITA.
females a male The Nyagrodha, the Gambu, the

l
.
and likewise the .Salmali, the .Sinsapd, and the

Pippala,
Meshasrmga, and likewise the bamboo and willow 2 ;
these are the princes among trees in this world,

there is no doubt of that. The Himavat, the
Pclriyatra, the Sahya, the Vindhya, the Trikti/avat,
the 6Veta, the Nila, the Bh&sa, and the Kosh/âvat
mountain, the Mahendra, the Guruskandha, and
likewise the M&lyavat mountain, these are the
princes among mountains 3 Likewise the Maruts .
are (the princes) among the Gaâs the sun is the ;
prince among the planets, and the moon 4 among

the Nakshatras Yama is the prince among the
;
Pitrzs, and the ocean among rivers Varu/za is the ;
king of the waters, and Indra is said to be (the king)

of the Maruts. Arka is the king of hot (bodies),
and Indu is said to be (the king) of shining bodies.
Fire is ever the lord of the elements 5 and Brzhaspati ,
of Brahma/zas Soma is the lord of herbs, Vishnu

;
is the chief among the strong Tvash/rz is the prince

;
1
As cf. generally Gita, p. 88, and see
to the constructions here,
the remarks of Ramanuâ and -Sridhara on Gita X, 2 1. The meaning
here is, of course, the male is ruler over females.
2
I do not know what distinction is intended between these two.
Generally kiâka is used for the hollow bamboo, which whistles
when the wind blows through it.
3
Some of these mountains are mentioned in Patafig-ali. See
Introduction.
4
This list may be compared with that at Gita, chapter X.
Sometimes the same object occurs more than once with reference
to more than one class thus the moon occurs as lord of Naksha-
;
tras, of shining bodies, and of herbs

unless Soma there stands for the
Soma plant. See Gita, p, 113. Arg-una Mirra says expressly that the
moon occurs more than once as the correlatives, the classes with re-
ference to which she is mentioned, are different. In such cases I have
kept the original names untranslated; Arka=sun; Indu=moon.
5
Cf. Ka/â, p. 83.
chapter xxviii, 1 6. 347
of the Rudras, and 61 va is the ruler of (all) creatures ;
1
likewise, sacrifice of (all) initiatory ceremonies , and
Maghavat 2 likewise of the gods; the north among
the quarters, and among all vipras the powerful
king Soma 3 ; Kubera (is lord) of all jewels, Puran-
dara of (all) deities. Such is the highest creation
among all entities. Praâpati (is lord) of all
peoples; and of all entities whatever I, who am

full of the Brahman, and great, (am lord). There
is no higher being than myself or Vishnu.
The great Vishnu full of the Brahman is the
king of kings over all. Understand him to
be the ruler, the creator, the uncreated Hari. For
he is the ruler of men, Kinnaras, and Yakshas ;
of Gandharvas, snakes, and Rakshases of gods, ;
demons, and Nigas. Among all those who are

followed by (men) full of desires, (the chief) is 4 the
great goddess Mahe^varl, who has beautiful eyes.
She is called Pdrvatl. Know the goddess Uma 5 to
be the best and (most) holy of (all) females. Among
women who are (a source 6
of) happiness, likewise,
the brilliant 7
Apsarases (are chief). Kings desire
1
This must mean, I presume, that the sacrifice is higher than
the initiation, as male than female, see p. 346, note 1.
2
This is another repetition. Indra has been mentioned before,
and Purandara is mentioned further on.
3
As to king Soma, see inter alia BrzliadaraTzyaka, p. 237;
.ATMndogya, p. 342, where *S"ahkara explains king by adding of ' ' '
Brahmawas.' Vipras =Brahmaas.

4
I. e. Mahe^vari is the most beautiful of womankind.
It is well known that Uma, Parvati, Mahe^vari are names of

5
the consort of the third member of the Hindu Trinity; see Kena,
p. 13, and *Sankara's comment there. See, too, Muir, Sanskrit Texts,
vol. iv, p. 421, and Taittiriya-ara^yaka, p. 839.
6
The idea of '
source ' is supplied by Arûna Mi^ra.
7
Literally, '
rich.' Arg-una Mi^ra paraphrases it by '
Gyotish-
mati.' Nilakatf/â's explanation here is not quite clear.
348 anugitA.
piety; and Brahmaâs are the bridges 1 of piety.

Therefore a king should always endeavour to pro-
tect the twice-born 2 Those kings in whose domi-
.
nions good men lie low, lose all their qualifications 3 ,
and go into wrong paths after death. But those

high-souled kings in whose dominions good men
are protected, rejoice in this world, and attain the
infinite (seat) after death. Understand this, O chiefs
of the twice-born ! I shall now proceed to state the
invariable characteristics of piety. Non-destruction
4
is and destruction is of the
the highest piety ,
nature of impiety. Enlightenment 5 is the character-

istic of gods action 6 the characteristic of men
;
sound is the characteristic of space; (the sensation

of) touch is the characteristic of air ; colour is the
characteristic of light ; taste is the characteristic of
water ; the characteristic of earth, the supporter of
all beings, is smell ; words are the characteristic
of speech 7
refined into vowels and consonants ; the
characteristic of mind is thought. Likewise as to
what is described here as understanding, a deter-
1
I. e. instrumental in piety, or guides to piety. Cf. 6Veta\yvatara,
p. 370; Muwdfoka, p. 297.

2
So literally, doubtless Br&hmawas only are intended here.
3
I. e., I presume, they lose all their merits, their good points are
destroyed by this dereliction of duty.
4
Cf. p. 291 supra. Ar^-una Mura begins a fresh chapter with '
I
6
shall now/ &c. Knowledge of the truth, Ar^-una Miyra.
6
I. e. action performed for the purpose of obtaining the fruit of
it. The next five items refer to the five elements and their cha-
racteristic properties. Nilakara/â's explanation, that all these are
merely parallels not stated for their own relevancy here, but as
illustrations, seems to be the only available one.
7
I. e. the learning of other people, Nilakaâ. The meaning
seems to be that we know speech only in its manifestation in the
form of words.
CHAPTER XXVIII, 2<J. 349
mination is here formed by (that) understanding

about objects which have been thought over by the
mind 1 And there is no doubt of this that deter-
.
mination is the characteristic of the understanding.

The mind is meditation 2 and the
characteristic of ;
characteristic of a good man is (living) unperceived 3 .
The characteristic of devotion is action 4 and know- ;
ledge the characteristic of renunciation. Therefore

a man of understanding should practice renunciation,
giving prominence to knowledge 5 The renouncer .
possessed of knowledge attains the highest goal. And

crossing beyond darkness, and transcending death
and old age, he repairs to that which has no second 8 .
Thus have I duly spoken to you concerning the

characteristic of piety. I will now proceed to explain
properly the comprehension 7
of the qualities. As
to the smell of the earth, verily, that is comprehended
by the nose and the wind 8 likewise residing in the
;
nose is appointed 9 to the knowledge of smell. Taste 10 ,
1
The text here is rather unsatisfactory; I have adopted that
which I find in the copy containing Arûna MLsra's commentary.
2
Frequent pondering on matters learnt from *S*&stras or common
life, Nllakaâ. Why mind comes twice the commentators do not
explain.
3
Does this refer to what is said at Sanatsug-atiya, p. 159 ?
4
Devotion means here, as in the Gita, action without desire of fruits.
For action the word here is the same as at Gita", p. 115, note 2.
5
Cf. Git*, p. 52, note 7.
6
This is Arg-una MLsra's interpretation, and appears to me to be
correct. Nilakatf/â's is different, but seems to omit all account
of abhyeti, ' repairs.'
7
Arg-una MLsra's interpretation seems to be different, but our
copy is not quite intelligible.
8
See p. 337 supra. The wind is the presiding deity of the nasal
organ.
9
I. e. that is its function. Arg-una MLsra says, ' it is pondered
on,' which is not clear.
10
Cf. Gita, p. 74, as to taste and water.
350 ANUGITA.
the essence of water, is always comprehended by the

tongue. And the moon likewise, who resides in the
tongue, is appointed to the knowledge of taste. The
quality of light is colour, and that is comprehended
by the eye; and the sun residing in the eye is
appointed always to the knowledge of colour. The
(sensation of) touch, belonging to the air, is perceived
by the and the wind residing in the skin is
skin, 1
always appointed to the knowledge of (the objects) of

touch. The quality of space is sound, and that is
comprehended by the ear. And all the quarters re-
siding in the ear are celebrated as (being appointed)
to the knowledge of sound. Thought is the quality
of mind, and that is comprehended by the under-
standing. The supporter of consciousness 2
residing
in the heart is appointed to the knowledge of mind 3 .
The understanding (is comprehended in the form

of) determination, and the Mahat 4 of knowledge.
To comprehension, the unperceived 5
(this) positive
(is appointed), there is no doubt of that. The Kshe-

tra^fia, which is in its essence devoid of qualities
and eternal, is not to be comprehended by any
1
This cannot be the presiding deity here, though one expects
such deity to be mentioned; see p. 337 supra.
2
The text of more than one of the lines here is rather doubtful
we follow Nilaka^Ma, who takes this to mean the giva, the indi-
vidual soul. Cf. p. 239, note 2 supra.
3
I. e. thought, as Nilaka/a points out.
4
Mahat is properly the same as buddhi, understanding, but as
it is here mentioned separately, I suppose, it signifies Aharikara.
Nilakaâ takes its operation, here called knowledge, to mean
' the feeling I am,' which agrees with our interpretation, for which
some support be derived from p. 333 supra.
is also to
5
Arûna Mirra, though somewhat diffidently. The
I here follow
knowledge this is 1/ and the knowledge this is so and so and
' '
nothing else is presided over by the unperceived the Prakr/ti.

'
CHAPTER XXVIII, 42. 35 I
symbols. Therefore the characteristic of the Kshe-

tra^na, which is void of symbols 1 is purely knowledge. )
The unperceived is stated to be the Kshetra 2 in

which the qualities are produced and absorbed. And
I always see, know, and hear it, (though) concealed.
The Purusha knows it, therefore is he called Kshe-

tra^fia 3
. And the Kshetra^fia likewise perceives all
the operations of the qualities The qualities created

4
.
again and again, do not know themselves 5 being non- ,
intelligent, to be created and tied down to a begin-

ning, middle, and end 6 . Only the Kshetra^fia attains,
no one (else) attains, to the truth, which is great,
transcendent, and beyond the qualities and the entities
(produced) 7 from the qualities. Hence a man who
understands piety, abandoning qualities, and the cre-
ation 8 in this world,
, and transcending the qualities,
and having his sins destroyed, then enters into the
Kshetra^-na. One who is free from the pairs of
opposites, free from the ceremony of salutations, and
1
See Sanatsuâtiya, p. 146. See also p. 309 supra.
2 8
See Gita, p. 102 seq. I. e. he who knows the Kshetra.
4
Enlightenment, activity, and delusion, Nilakaw/â.
5
I. e. do not know the self, Nilaka/z/â better, I think, the
;
'
qualities do not know themselves, only the Kshetra^na knows

them/ Cf. Aânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 194, st. 41.
6
I. e. production, existence, and destruction, Nilakaw/â. This
must, however, mean their manifestation, continuance, and dis-
solution in any particular form. For the prakrz'ti, which is made
up of the three qualities, is beginningless. Cf. Gita, p. 104.
7
I. e. the actual physical manifestations, as we may say, of the
qualities.
8
The original, sattva, Nilaka^/â renders by buddhi, and qualities
by visible objects. In the familiar Sahkhya phrase sattvapuru-
sMnyatapratyaya sattva means other than
creation, or what is
purusha Sahkhyatattvakaumudf, pp. 9-144).

(cf. That is the
meaning here. See too p. 371 infra, and -Santi Parvan (Moksha
Dharma), chap. 194, st. 38 seq. and comments there.
352 anug!ta.
from the sv3M ceremony 1

, who is unmoving, and
homeless 2 , is the Kshetra^na, he is the Supreme
Lord.
Chapter XXIX.
Brahman said
I about that which has a be-
will state truly all
ginning, middle, and end 3 and about the means for ,
its comprehension, together with names and charac-

4
teristics . day was first and then
It is stated that
night months have the bright 5 first, the Nak-
; that
shatras .Sravana 6 as the first (among them), and the
seasons the winter as the first (among them). The
7
earth is the source of smells, water of tastes, the
light (of) the sun is the source of colours, the wind is
stated to be the source of (the feelings of) touch ; like-

wise space is the source of sound. These are the
qualities of the elements. Now I shall proceed to
state the highest and first of all entities. The sun is
1
See
p. 324 supra.
2
See Gita, p. 101. Unmoving probably means 'not perturbed
by the qualities' (GM, p. no), or perhaps the same thing as 'of
steady mind' at Gitd, p. 101. The sense is pretty much the same
in both places.
3
Which has birth &c, Nilaka#/$a, i.e. all the creation, I presume.
4
The names, that is to say, of the various elements, and their
qualities.
5
This must mean fortnights.
6
This is Arûna MLrra, as the six months of the
specified, says
northern caused by the sun being at this Nakshatra.
solstice are
As to those six months, cf. Gita, p. 81. For the same reason,
Aigxma MLsra adds, the winter season is mentioned as the best.
7
The word adi, literally beginning, is used in the whole of this
passage in different senses ; it means the source, it means the best,
and it means the first in order.
CHAPTER XXIX, IO. 353
the first among shining bodies * ; fire is said to be

2 3
the first of the elements ; S&vitrt of all branches
of learning Pra^pati of deities the syllable Om
; ;
of all the Vedas and the Priâ life-wind, of all

;
words 4 whatever is prescribed in this world, all

;
that is called Savitri 5

. The G&yatrf is the first
among metres among ; (sacrificial) animals, the goat 6

is mentioned Cows are the first among
(as the first).
quadrupeds, and the twice-born among men 7 The .
.Syena is first among birds among sacrifices, the ;
offering (into the fire) is the best and among all ;
reptiles, O best of the twice-born! the snake 8 is
the highest. Of all ages the Krzta is the first, there

is no doubt of that. Among all precious things,
gold (is the first), and among vegetable (products)
likewise the barley seed 9
. Among all things to
be eaten or swallowed food is the highest; and of
1
This should be compared with the enumeration at p. 345 supra,
and that in the Gita there referred to.
2
Cf. p. 346 supra. Nilaka#/$a takes fire to mean the gastric fire,
and bhuta, rendered by us elements, to mean the species of beings

born from eggs and wombs.
3
The famous verse 'Tat savitur,' &c. See inter alia Bnhadara-
wyaka, p. 999; Apastamba I, 1, 1, 9; Manu II, 77 seq., 104-170.
4
See pp. 264, 265 supra.
5
Here he turns back to the Savitri, ' looking back in the manner
of the lion,' says NilakawMa, and for purposes of upasana. He
does not give up the thread of his discourse entirely, but simply
interjects this little clause. Nilakaw/â adds, Savitri here includes
every mode of worship prescribed for Brahmaâs, &c, and even
for Mle^/âs. Cf. note 3, and Gautama (Btihler's ed.), p. 174 note.
6
Cf. .ATMndogya, p. 109, and Ankara's commentary. Argnna
MLyra compares this text, Tasmadesha etesham pajunam sreshtM-
tamoâh. Where it occurs I know not.
7
Cf. *Santi Parvan (Raâdharma), chap, n, st. 11.
8
I.e. Vasuki, Nilakaw/â. More probably it refers to the species.
9
As it is used in various ceremonies.
[8] A a
354 ANUGITA.
all liquid substances which are to be drunk, water

is the best. And among all immovable entities,
without distinction, the Plaksha, the ever holy field
of Brahman 1 is stated to be the first.
, I, too, (am
the first) among there is no

all the patriarchs 2
,
doubt of that. And the unthinkable, self-existent

Vishnu is stated to be my own self. Of all moun-
tains, the great Meru is stated to be the first-born.
And among all quarters and sub-quarters, likewise,
the eastern quarter 3 is the first. Likewise the Ganga
going in three paths is stated to be the first-born
among rivers. And likewise of all wells and reser-
voirs of water, the ocean is the first-born. And of all
gods, Ddnavas, Bhtitas, Piiiias, snakes, and Rak-
shases, and of men, Kinnaras, and Yakshas, l^vara 4
is the lord. The great Vishnu, who is full of the
Brahman, and than whom there is no higher being in
these three worlds, is the source of all the universe.
Of all orders 5 , that of householders (is the first), there
is no doubt of that. The unperceived is the source
of the worlds and the same is also the end of every-
;
thing. Daysendwith(thesuns)setting 6 thenightends ;
with (the sun's) rising; the end of pleasure is ever grief;

1
I. e. the Creator ; his field means, I presume, his special seat.
2
Beings from whom all creatures were born. See inter alia *Santi
Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 208, st. 5; Manu I, 34.

3
At p. 347 the north is mentioned. Ar^-una MLsra has 'urdhva/
or upward here, and yet north before. Is the north the best as
'
'
the seat of the higher world mentioned at S&nti Parvan (Moksha

Dharma), chap. 192, st. 8 seq. ?
4
I. e. Rudra, says Nilakaw/â.
5
Viz. Brahmaârin, householder, forester, and Samnyasin. Cf.
Santi Parvan (Moksha), ch. 191, st. 10; Manu VI, 89; Gautama, p. 190.
6
These stanzas also occur in the 3anti Parvan, chap. 27, st. 31
seq. (Raâdharma). Apart of them appears to be quoted inSarikhya-
sutra V, 80. And the commentator Vi^-fiana Bhikshu introduces it
with the expression 'iti .rruyate.' But it is not a Vedic text.

CHAPTER XXX, I. 355
the end of grief ever pleasure. All accumulations

end in exhaustion ; all ascents end in falls ; all asso-
ciations end in dissociations ; and life ends in death.
All action ends in destruction ; death is certain for
whatever is born *
;
(everything) movable or immov-
able in this world is ever transient. Sacrifice, gift,
penance, study, observances, and regulations, all this
ends in destruction 2 There is no end for knowledge-

.
Therefore one whose self is tranquil, whose senses

are subjugated, who is devoid of (the idea that this
or that is) mine, who is devoid of egoism, is released
from all sins by pure knowledge.
Chapter XXX.
Brahman said
The wheel of life 3 moves on a wheel of which ;
4
the spoke is the understanding, of which the pole
is the mind, of which the bonds are the group of
5
the senses, of which the outer rim is the five great
elements, of which the environment is home 6 ; which
1
Cf. Gita, p. 45.
2
All this is action, the fruit of which is perishable ; the fruit of
knowledge, on the other hand, is everlasting.
3
Literally, time ; it seems, however, to stand for the vicissitudes
of worldly life. Cf. -SVetawatara, p. 283. The body is called
1
wheel of time* at p. 53 supra, but Argima MLsra there says 'it is
the wheel which causes the rotation of the wheel of time.'

4
The cause of its being large in dimensions, Argxina MLsra ; the
supporting pillar, Nilaka/z/â. I prefer the former, and take the
sense to be that worldly life is co-extensive with the operations or
'fancies' of the mind.
6
What is outside the elements, the physical manifestations of
Prakrz'ti, is beyond the domain of worldly life.
6
The possession of home is equivalent to a dwelling in
' ' the
midst of worldly life. Hence the idea of homelessness at inter alia
Gita, pp. 101-103.

A a 2
356 anugIta.
abounds age and grief, which moves in the

in old
midst of disease and misfortune, which rotates in x
space and time the noise of which is trouble and
;
toil, the rotations

2
of which (constitute) day and
night; which is encircled with cold and heat; of
which pleasure and pain are the joints, and hunger
and thirst the nails fixed into it, of which sunshine
and shade are the ruts which staggers in the opening ;
or closing of an eyelid, which is enveloped in the

fearful waters of delusion, which is ever revolving
and void of consciousness 3 which is measured by ,
months and half months, is ever-changing 4 which ,
moves through (all) the worlds 5 the mud 6 for which ;
is penance and regulations, the mover of which is
the force of the quality of passion 7 which is lit up 8 ;
by the great egoism, which is sustained by the

qualities; the fastenings in which are vexations 9 ;
1
This means, I presume, that worldly life is conditioned, so to
say, by space and time. See p. 343 supra.
2
I. e. the cause of the rotation, Nilaka/â.
3
I. e. unintelligent.
4
Now takes the form of a man, now of an animal, and then of
some other thing, Nilaka/â. I think, however, that the meaning
is, that it is not alike to all ; different persons are in different states
in this world.
5
Arg-una MLrra says this means that it is the cause of the move-
ments in all the worlds. That is the sense I extract from his words,
which are not quite clear, lokanam samârawe hetus. The render-
ing in the text follows Nilaka^Ma.
6
I.e., I presume, that which retards the revolutions of the 'wheel/
Instead of penance/ Nilaka/z/â's reading is the quality of darkness.'

'
*
7
Cf. Sahkhya-karikd, p. 1 3, and Vaâspati's commentary thereon.
8 c
Animated,' Nilaka/â. Egoism is the cause of the world,
and of all knowledge of it. Cf. Sahkhya-karika, p. 24.
9
The text here is unsatisfactory. I follow Nilaka#//a, who says
'
vexations = those arising from not obtaining what is desired.'
CHAPTER XXX, IO. 357
which revolves in the midst of grief and destruction 1 ,
which is full of actions and instruments of action 2 ,
which is large, and which is extended by means of

attachments 3 which is rendered unsteady by avarice
,
and desire 4 which is produced by ignorance of

,
various (matters) 6 which is attended upon by fear

,
and delusion, and which is the cause of the delusion

of all beings, which moves towards joy and pleasure 6 ,
which has desire and wrath as its appurtenances,

which is made up of (the entities) beginning with
the Mahat and ending with the gross elements 7 ,
which is unchecked, the imperishable source (of all) 8 ,
the speed of which is like that of the mind, and

which is (never) fatigued. This wheel of life, which
is associated with the pairs of opposites, and which
is devoid of consciousness, all the world, together

with the immortals, should cast away, abridge, and
check 9
. That man, among all creatures, who always
1
Revolves in the midst of, = lives upon, is fed by, Nilaka/â.
2
I. e. the organs of action, I presume.
3
The moreattachments one has, the more one is tied down to
worldly and the more comprehensive such life becomes.
life,
4
Avarice is coveting another's wealth when one has one's own;
desire is the wish for that which one has not.
5
Nilakafl//$a reads vi&tra,' which he renders to mean diversi-
'
fied, as being made up of the three qualities, ignorance there being
the same thing as Prakn'ti, which is probably a better sense alto-

gether than that obtainable from Arîina Mora's reading.
6
Which moves by attachment to external pleasures, &c,
Nilaka/z/yfca. See p. 300 supra.
7
I. e. all the world developed from Prakrz'ti a common phrase.
This is Nflaka/a's forced meaning. But the text here is
8
doubtful. Perhaps the sense is in which production and disso-

*
lution are going on unchecked/

9
See p. 344 note. For the last word, the variant here is sthapayet,
make steady or stop.

358 anug!ta.
accurately understands the movement and stoppage 1

of the wheel of life is never deluded. (That) sage,
2
released from all impressions , transcending all
pairs of opposites, and released from all sins, attains

the highest goal. The householder, and the Brah-
maMrin, the forester, and also the beggar 3
, all
these four orders are stated to have the order of

householder for their basis. Whatever system of
4
rules is prescribed in this world, to follow it is
5
good ; this has been celebrated from ancient times .
He who has been first refined by ceremonies 6

, and
who has duly observed vows, being (born) in a caste
of (high) qualifications 7 and who understands the ,
8
Vedas, should return (from his preceptors house).
Always devoted behaving like 9
to his own wife,
good men, with his senses restrained, and full of
faith, one should perform the five sacrifices 10 in this
world. The sage who eats what remains after
(offerings) to deities 11 and guests, who is devoted
to Vedic rites, who duly performs sacrifices and
1
I. e. the causes of the revolution and stoppage, Nilakaâ.
2
Impressions of previous actions, delusions, &c. And see p. 247
supra.
3 4
I. e. the Samny&sin. -Sastra. Cf. Gita, p. 117.
5 '
Such is the eternal fame/ literally.
I. e. on whom the Vedic rites or Sawskaras are duly performed.
6
And see Gita, p. 122.

7
I. e. one of the three higher castes.
8
The original is the technical word for the return of a Brahma-
Mrin after finishing his studies. He is describing the ' householder/
9
following the rule of conduct sanctioned by the good.
I. e.
10
Vide Williams' Dictionary, s.v. mah&yaîia; Arvalayana Gr/hya
III, 1, 3; ManuII, 69; IV, 21.
11
Cf. Gita, p. 62 ; a guest must always be fed, and unless he is
satisfied the host must not eat. Cf. *Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap.
192, st. 15; Manu III, 106; Apastamball, 3, 7, 3.
CHAPTER XXX, 24. 359
gifts according to his means, who is not thought-

lessly active 1
with the hand or foot, who is not
thoughtlessly active with the eye, and who is not
thoughtlessly active with his speech or any of his
limbs, to such a one the (word) good applies.
One should always have the sacred thread and a
clean cloth, and be of pure vows, and self-restrained,
and should always associate with good men, making
gifts, and with one's external organs restrained one ;
should restrain one's lust and hunger 2 should be ,
kind, should behave like the good, and keep a

bamboo stick and a water-pot filled with water 3 .
One should learn and teach, should likewise perform

sacrifices and officiate at others' sacrifices, and should
give and receive gifts,
(thus) one should adopt the
sixfold mode of life
4
. Know that three (of these)
means of livelihood for Brahmaâs, the
duties are the
two teaching and officiating at sacrifices, and also
receiving untainted gifts 5
. And as to the other
remaining three duties, gift, study, and sacrifice, they
are pious 6
duties. With regard to those three
duties, the sage who understands piety, who is self-
restrained, kind, possessed of forgiveness, and equable

to all creatures, should avoid heedlessness 7
. The
1
The same word as at Gita, p. 1 14, there rendered 'vain activity.'
2
Cf. Apastamba II, 1,1, 2 seq.
8
Manu IV, 36 Apastamba II, 1, 1, 15.
Cf. ;
4
These are the well-known six duties of Brahmawas as specified
by Manu and others. See the discussion of this point in the
Introduction.
5
Another reading is
l
gifts from an untainted (source)/
6
What is the of this here? I suppose the
exact meaning
meaning is performance of them is a pure performance of
that the
duty; the others are duties the performance of which supplies one's
own wants, and is therefore interested. Cf. Gautama X, 1 and 2.
7
I. e. omission or mistake in performance.
360 ANUGITA.
Brahma/za householder, who is of rigid vows, who

is thus devoted, discharging all these duties as
much as is in his power, conquers heaven.
Chapter XXXI.
Brahman said :
Thus 1 duly studying to the best of his power, in

the way above 2 stated, and likewise living as a Brah-
ma^drin, one who is devoted to his own duty and
learned, who is a sage with all his senses restrained,
who applies himself to what is agreeable and bene-
ficial to the preceptor, who is pure 3 and constant ,
in veracity and piety, should, with the permission

4
of the preceptor, take food without decrying it ,
should eat (the leavings) of sacrificial offerings, and

alms, and should stand,
and take exercise 5 (duly),
sit,
should sacrifice twice to the fire after becoming

clean and with a concentrated (mind), and should
always bear a staff of the Bilva or Palaâ 6
(wood).
The clothing of the twice-born (man) should be of
linen, or of cotton, or also a deerskin, or a cloth
entirely (dyed with) reddish colour. There should
alsobe a girdle of munâ ; he should have matted
hair,and likewise always (carry) water (with him),
and have his sacred thread, be engaged in sacred
1
Arg-una MLsra says, Having described
' first the order of house-
holder, as that is the chief, he now describes that of Brahmaârin.'
Cf. Apastamba II, 9, 21, 1, and note.
2
Where ? This is obscure.
3
Both internally and externally, I presume.
4
Cf. Taittiriya, p. 129 ; *Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 192, st. 6.
5
Cf. Gita, p. 69. Ar^-una MLsra says, Having exercise by
'
means of standing and sitting; the meaning is not sleeping except

at the proper time/
6
Cf. Manu II, 41 seq.
CHAPTER XXXI, 1 4. 36
study, and
from avarice, and of rigid observances.
free
(Such) a Brahma/&rin, always making offerings like-
wise of pure water to satisfy the deities, being
restrained in mind 1 , is esteemed. One who is thus
devoted 2
, who is concentrated in mind, and con-
3
tinent , conquers heaven, and reaching the highest
seat, does not return to birth. Refined by means
of all ceremonies, and likewise living as a Brahma-
Mrin 4 a sage who has renounced 5
, (all) should go out
of towns and dwell in forests 6
. Wearing a skin or
the bark of a tree, he should bathe (every) morning
and evening, and always living within the forest,
should not enter a town again. He should honour
guests, and should also give them shelter at (the
proper) time, living on fruits and leaves, and roots
and .Sy&mcLka grain. He should without sloth feed on
water, air, and all forest-products down to grass as they
come, in order 7 in , accordance with the (regulations 8
at his) initiation. He should honour a guest who
comes, by (giving him) water accompanied with roots,
fruits, and leaves. And he should always without
sloth give alms out of whatever he has for food. He
should also eat always after the deities and guests 9
1
Or it may be, '
being self- restrained and with (all his) heart/
The constructions in the original vary greatly, and so they do in
2
the translation. Applying himself to his duties.
3
Cf. Maitri, p. 18, and comment there.
5
4
Cf. Manu VI, 1 who is a mendicant ascetic.
seq. I. e.
6
Cf. p. Here he gives a description of the
173 supra, note 9.
third order of forester, as to which compare generally Manu VI.
7
First the jungle-products, then air, &c, Arûna Mirra. The
sense seems to be that the restrictions should become gradually
harder. Cf. Manu VI, 24-31 Apastamba II, 9, 2 2, 2 seq.; 11,9, 23, 2.
;
I. e. whatever restriction he put on himself when entering upon

8
the particular mode of life.
9
Supra, p. 358, and cf. Taittiriya, p. 38.
362 anugItA.
(are satisfied) and with his speech restrained, having

a mind free from envy 1 eating little, and depending
,
on the deities. Restraining the external senses, kind,

full of forgiveness, preserving his hair and moustache,
performing sacrifices, addicted to sacred study, and
devoted to veracity and piety, pure in body 2 always ,
dexterous 3 always in forests, and concentrated in

,

mind, a forester whose senses are subdued and
who is thus devoted 4 conquers the worlds. A house-
holder, or a Brahma/arin, or again a forester, who
wishes to apply himself to final emancipation should
adopt the best (line of) conduct 5 . Offering safety
to all beings, the sage should become free from all
action 6
, and be agreeable to all beings, kind, and
restrained in all his senses. He should make a
fire and feed on the alms (obtained) without ask-
7
ing 8and without trouble 9 and which have come ,
spontaneously 10 in a place free from smoke and

,
where people have already 11 eaten. One who

1
I. e. of others more, and so forth. Arûna
for obtaining
Misra's reading and he renders it to mean, one by
is different, '
whom the rule of life as a BrahmaHrin has not been violated/

2
Arîina Mura's reading, one who has cast away (all attach-
'
ment to) the body/ Compare as to hair and moustache, Manu VI,
6 seq.
3
See Gita, p. 127. Here the meaning is probably assiduous in
the performance of duties, vows, and so forth.
4
I. e. applies himself to his duties.
5
Arg-una Mwra
means anandajramam, but there must
says this
be some bad copying here. I take the word as it stands to mean
something like the 'godlike endowments' at Gita, p. 114.

6
See Gita, pp. 54, 127. The meaning here is probably that of
action without egoism. See Gita, p. 55.
7
I. e. Arûna Mura says, '
not at night/ The readings are
unsatisfactory. I read krz'tva vahnim, but diffidently. Is the allusion
to the rule at Apastamba II, 9, 21, 10 ? Cf. Gautama III, 27.
8 9
Cf. Kaushitaki, p. 32. I. e. to the giver. Cf. Gita, p. 120.
30
See Gft, p. 10.
u Cf. Manu VI, 56; Gautama III, 15.
CHAPTER XXXI, 26. 363
understands final emancipation should seek to ob-

tain alms after the cleaning 1 of the vessels (used
for cooking),and should not rejoice if he obtains,
and should not be dejected if he does not obtain
(alms). Nor should he beg for too much alms 2 ,
seeking merely to sustain life. Eating only a little,
he should go about for alms with a concentrated

mind, looking out for the (proper) time. He should
not wish for earnings in common with another, nor
should he eat when honoured for an ascetic should ;
be averse from all earnings (accompanied) with

honour 3 . When
he should not taste any
eating,
articles of food which have been eaten by others 4 ,
or which are pungent, astringent, or bitter, and like-

wise no sweet juices. He should eat just enough
for his livelihood for the support of life. One
who understands final emancipation should seek for
a livelihood without obstructing (other) creatures
and when he goes about for alms, he should not
go following after another 5 He should not parade.
(his) piety, he should move about in a secluded
place, free from passion. He should resort for

shelter to an empty house, or a forest, or the foot
of a tree, or a river likewise, or the cavern of a
mountain. In summer, (he should pass) but a
single night 6
in a town and in the
; he may
rains,
dwell in one place. He should move about the
1
I. e., I presume, in order to avoid interfering with others'
comforts. And see last note.
2
See Manu VI, 55. As to proper time further on, see last note.
3
Cf. Sanatsu^-atiya, pp. 145-147; 'without respect* at Gita,
p. 120, means probably with disrespect, otherwise that passage

and this would be somewhat inconsistent. See too Manu II, 162.
4
Cf. Manu II, 56; GM, p. 118; and p. 269 supra.
5
As that other may get nothing if they go together, Arg-una
Cf. Manu VI, 51.
6
Mi^ra. Cf. Gautama III, 21.
364 anugitA.
world like a worm 1

, his path being pointed out by
the sun, and he should walk with circumspection
over the earth out of compassion to all beings 2 .
He make any accumulations; and should

should not
eschew dwelling with friends 3 And the man who .
understands final emancipation should verily do all
acts which he has to do, always with clean water.

A man should always bathe in clean water. And
with his senses restrained, he should devote himself
to these eight observances 4 harmlessness, life as a ,
Brahma^drin, veracity, and also straightforwardness,
freedom from anger, freedom from (the habit of)
carping, restraint of the external organs, and habi-
tual freedom from (the habit of) backbiting. He
should always practice a sinless (mode of) conduct,
not deceptive and not crooked and free from attach- ;
ment should always make one who comes (as a guest)

take a morsel of food. He should eat just enough
for livelihood
for the support of life. And he
should eat (only) what has been obtained with
piety 5 and should not follow his
,
own (mere) desire 6 .
He should not accept anything at all other than

food and clothing. And he should accept as much
as he eats and no more. He should not receive
from others, nor should he ever give to others 7 .
1
I. e. not very fast, Aig-una Mura ;
'
the path being pointed out
by the sun'rrnot at night, for fear of destroying worms, &c.
2
This seems to be very like the practice of the Gainas of the
3
present day. And cf. Manu VI, 69. Cf. Gita, pp. 68-103.
4
Cf. Gita, p. 114, and cf. also Sanatsuâtiya, p. 153.
5 any binding
That is to say, obtained without violation of obli-
6
gation, or rule of the *Sastras. Cf. Gita, p. 117.
7
This is not very clear, and Arûna MLrra's comments are not
intelligible. The sense seems to be this, 'He should not take more
than is wanted, nor should he keep any accumulations from which to
give to others, but should a t o n c e share with others all that is earned/
CHAPTER XXXI, 39. 365
But owing to the helplessness of people, a wise

man should always share (with others). He should
not appropriate another's riches, and should not take
(anything) unasked. Nor, verily, after enjoying any
object should one become afterwards attached to it.
One who has anything to do 1

should take earth,
water, pebbles likewise, and leaves, flowers, and
2
fruits which are not secured (by anybody), as they
come 3 . One should not live by the occupation of
an artisan 4 , nor should one wish for gold. One
should not hate, should not teach 5 and should be ,
void of (all) belongings 6

. One should eat what is
consecrated by faith 7
, and should avoid (all) con-
troversies, should act without a purpose 8 , should
be free from attachment, and without fixed appoint-
ments with people 9 One should not perform, or
.
cause to be performed, any action involving expec-

tation of fruit, or involving any destruction of life,
or the assemblage of people 10 . Rejecting all things,
1
Ar^-una Mwra says that this means if he wants them for any
particular purpose he should take the earth, &c.
2
I. e. apparently, taken possession of and preserved as one's own
by anybody.
3 l
Argnna MLsra renders by which lead to action/
this Is it not
rather the '
spontaneous earnings' at GM, p. 60 ?
4
Cf. Manu III, 64; Apastamba I, 6, 18, 18; Gautama XVII, 7.
6
I. e. teach one who does not ask to be instructed. Cf. Manu
II,no.
6
Cf. GM, p. 60 ; the original word, however, is not the same.
7
See p. 360, note 3 supra; Manu 54-55; Gautama IX, 59.
II,
'
Controversies ;' the original is nimitta, and the interpretation is
what appears to be Arûna MLsra's. It may also mean '
omens/
That this is the true sense appears from Manu VI, 50.
8
Cf. Gita, p. 48.
9
ArgTina MLrra says, '
e. g. I shall come to you to-morrow for
alms/ &c. Apastamba I, 6, 19, 12.
Cf.
10
The words are the same as at Gita, p. 54, *
keeping people (to
366 ANUGITA.
and being equable to all beings, moving and un-

moving, one should become an ascetic with small
belongings. One should not perturb any other (per-
son), nor should one be perturbed by any other
(person 1 ). He who is trusted by all beings is said
to be the foremost among those who understand
final emancipation. One should not think of what
is not come
2
nor reflect on that which is past; one
,
should disregard the present, being concentrated (in
mind) and indifferent to time 3

. He should not de-
4
file anything by the eye, or the mind, or by speech,
nor should he do anything wrong openly or in secret.
One who draws in the senses from all sides as a tor-
toise (draws in) his limbs 5 , and in whom the senses,
mind, and understanding are absorbed 6 , who is free
from desires, who understands all truth, is free who
from the pairs of opposites, and from the ceremony
of svaha, and who is free from salutations 7 and ,
who is free from (the thought that this or that is)

mine, who is free from egoism, who is free from
anxiety for new acquisitions or protection of old
acquisitions, and self-controlled 8
, who is free from
their duties)/ but the sense seems to be different. The commen-

tators say nothing on this.
1
Cf. Gita, p. 101.
2
I. e. one should not look to the future with any aspirations or
expectations, and should not look back on the past with grief,
Argnna Mura. See too p. 170, note 9 supra.

3
I am not sure if this is a correct interpretation. But it does
not seem likely that the other possible sense literally 'expecting
time '
can be intended here.
4
This is obscure. Is the sense this, that one should not observe,
or think, or speak badly or of the bad side of things ?
6
5
Cf. p.342 supra, note 1. Cf. KaMa, p. 151.
7
See p. 352 supra, note 1.
8
Cf. Gftl, p. 48, where the original words are the same.
CHAPTER XXXI, 5 1. 367
expectations,who is free from attachments to any

entity, and who is dependent on none who is at- 1
,
tached to the self, and who understands the truth,

is emancipated, thereno doubt of that. Those is
who perceive thewhich is without hands, foot,self,
or back, without a head, without a stomach, which

is free from the operations of the qualities 2 abso- ,
lute, untainted, and stable, devoid of smell, devoid
of taste or touch, devoid of colour, and also devoid

of sound, which is to be understood 3 which is un- ,
attached, and which is also devoid of flesh, which

is free from anxiety 4 imperishable, divine, and ,
though dwelling in a house 5 always dwelling in all ,
entities, they never die 6 There the understanding .
reaches not, nor the senses, nor the deities, nor

Vedas, sacrifices, nor worlds 7 , nor penance, nor
valour 8
; the attainment to it of those who are
possessed of knowledge is stated to be without
comprehension of symbols 9 . Therefore the learned
man who knows (the) property of being void of
10
symbols , being devoted to pious conduct, and
1
Cf. Gita, p. 60.
2
These are effects of Prakrz'ti by which the Purushais unaffected.
3
Literally, '
pursued/
4
This is obscure. Arûna Mura's text is nis&tyam. Does that
mean which should be
'
accurately understood ?' The rendering in
the text of NilakawMa's reading may mean that the Brahman has
no such thoughts (&nta) as are referred to at Gita, p. 115.
5
Does this mean the body ?
6
I. e. are free from birth and death. Cf. Apastamba I, 8, 22, 4.
7
This, again, is not quite clear. Probably the explanation is
to be found in the passage at Gita, p. 79.

8
Nilakaâ's reading is
i
observances or vows/
9
I. e. 'not to be acquired by inference/ Arûna Mijra, p. 33 1 supra,
10
See p. 309 supra ;
'
who is without symbols, and knows piety/
according to Arûna Mura's reading.
368 ANUGITA.
resorting to concealed 1 piety should adopt the mode

of life (necessary) for experience 2
. Though unde-
luded, he should act in the manner of the deluded 3 ,
not finding fault with piety 4 . He should perform

piety, behaving so that others would always dis-
respect him 5 and should not find fault with the
,
ways of the good 6 That sage is said to be the

.
best who has adopted this (line of) conduct. The

senses, and the objects of the senses, and the five
great elements, and mind, understanding, egoism,
the unperceived, and the Purusha likewise 7 by an ,
accurate determination about the truth, after under-

standing all these, one attains heaven 8 being ,
released from all bonds. One who knows the truth,

understanding these same (entities) at the time of the
termination (of his life), should meditate, exclusively
pondering on one point 9 and then, depending on ;
none 10 he gets emancipation. Freed from all attach-

,
ments, like the atmosphere dwelling in space 11 with ,
his accumulations 12 exhausted, and free from dis-

tress 13 he attains to the highest seat.
,
1
See p. 159 supra, note 7, and cf. Manu III, 109, which is the
text referred to in note 5 there.
2
I. e. direct perception of the Brahman. See Gitsi, p. 57, note 5.
3
See p. 160 supra, note 8, and cf. also Manu II, no.
4
Arûna Mwra compares
Gitd, p. 55, about 'shaking convictions.'
5
59-1 6 1 supra.
Cf. pp. 1
6
This means, I presume, the good devoted to action and not
to knowledge only.
7
These are the famous elements of the Sarikhyas; see Sutra 1, 6 1.
8 9
Cf. p. 159 and note 2. Cf. p. 300 supra.
10
Cf. Gtta, p. 60. n Cf. Gita, p. 82, note 3.
12
Of actions previously performed. See p. 246 supra.
18
Cf. Gitd, p. 1 01, where, however, the original word is different.
CHAPTER XXXII, 6. 369
Chapter XXXII.
Brahman said
The ancients who perceived the established (truth)
call renunciation 1
penance ; and the Br&hmaâs
dwelling in the seat of the Brahman 2 understand
knowledge to be concerned with the Brahman 3 The .
highest Brahman is very far off 3 and (the attain- ,
ment of it) depends on Vedic knowledge 4 it is free ;
from the pairs of opposites, devoid of qualities 5 ever- ,
lasting, of unthinkable qualities, and supreme. The

men of talent, who are pure 6
and whose minds are ,
refined, transcending passion, and being untainted,

perceive that supreme (principle) by means of know-
ledge and penance. Those who are constantly de-
voted to renunciation and understand the Brahman
7
,
and wish for the supreme, go to the happy path

by penance, Penance 8 is said to be a light (correct) ;
conduct is the means to piety; knowledge verily

should be understood to be the highest, and re-
nunciation the best penance. He who understands
determinately the self which is unperturbed, which
abides in all entities, and which is the essential
1
Abandoning of fruit, Arûna MLsra. Cf. Gita, p. 121.
2
Cf. p. 339 supra, note 4, dwelling in=adhering to.
3
See GM, p. 104.
5
4
Cf. Sanatsu^-atiya, p. 158 seq. Viz. the three famous ones.
6
Pure, refined, and untainted are not easily distinguished. Pro-
bably 'pure' refers to external cleanliness ; 'untainted' to freedom
from sin and such taints; and refined to freedom from error.
' '
7
I. e. who have no belongings/ Arûna Mi-sra.
'
8
Action without desire, Argrma MLsra, who adds that it is called
a light, as it leads to knowledge. See too p. 166, and p. 247,
note 11, and p. 340 supra.
[8] B b
3 JO ANUGITA.
element in knowledge, he is laid down 1

(as being
able) to move everywhere. The learned man who
perceives, association and dissociation, and likewise
unity and diversity 2 , is released from misery. He
who desires nothing, and despises nothing 3 becomes ,
eligible, even dwelling in this world, for assimilation

with the Brahman 4 . He who knows the truth about
the qualities of Pradhana and understands the Pra- 5
,
dhana of 6
free from (the thought
all entities , who is
that this or that is) mine, and free from egoism 7 is ,
emancipated, there is no doubt of that. One who

is free from the pairs of opposites, free from the
(ceremonies of) salutation, free from (the ceremony

of) svadhd 8 attains to that everlasting (principle)
,
which is free from the pairs of opposites, and devoid

of qualities, by tranquillity only. Abandoning all
action, whether agreeable or disagreeable, developed
from the qualities 9 and abandoning both truth and
,
falsehood 10 a creature is emancipated, there is no

,
doubt of that. The great tree of Brahman 11 is

1
'Laid down' is literally 'wished/
2
I presume this means the real fact underlying the appear-
ances of association and so forth, namely, that there is but one
reality, and all appearances of difference &c. are unreal. Cf. Gita,
p. 124. See also p. 313 supra, note 1, and p. 374 infra.
3 4
Cf. Gita, p. 65, and see Ka/â, p. 155. Cf. Gita, p. 65.
5
The qualities, viz. the three, of Pradhana, i. e. constituting Pra-
6
krz'ti, or nature. See Gita, p. 106, and note 3 there.
7
For this whole expression which occurs so frequently, cf.
Maitri, p. 44, and comment there.

8 9
See p.324 supra, note 8. Cf.Gita, p. 48; *SVeta^vatara,p.36o.
10
I. e., I presume, what is real and unreal in a worldly view, the
great truth is not to be 'abandoned.' Cf. Taittiriya, pp. 97-99;
p. 191 supra; *Santi Parvan (Moksha), chap. 174, st. 53; Apastamba
II, 9, 21, 13.
11
I. e., says Arûna MLrra, the tree of worldly life produced from
the Brahman. Compare chapter XII supra.
CHAPTER XXXII, I 7. 371
eternal ; a tree which

produced from the unper-
is
ceived as the seed, which consists of the under-

standing as its trunk, whose collection of boughs
is the great egoism, the sprouts within which are
the senses, the great branches of which are the

great elements, and the side branches the objects
of sense, which is always possessed of leaves, always
possessed of flowers, in which agreeable and dis-
agreeable fruits are always produced, and which is
fed upon by all creatures. Cutting and piercing this
(tree) with the sword of knowledge of the truth, and
1
abandoning the bonds in the shape of attachment,

which cause birth, death, and old age 2 a wise man who ,
is free from (the thought that this or that is) mine,
and who is devoid of egoism, is emancipated, there

is no doubt of that There are these two birds 3 ,
(which are) unchanging, and which should also be

known to be unintelligent 4 But as to that other .
who is above them, he is called intelligent. (When)

the inner self, devoid of knowledge of nature 5 and ,
(as it were) non-intelligent 6 understands that which is,
1
Cf. Gita, p. in; and Mu/zâka, p. 307, and commentary there.
2
So I render the original, though the sense at first sight appears
to be which are caused by birth/ &c.
'
3
and egoism, which dwell in the tree/
Viz. the understanding '
Arguna Misra. Nilakaw/â says, the great and the individual self.'
'
4
Cf. Sarikhya-karika 11, and comment ofVa&tspati Mura. The
self is not unintelligent; and as the birds are so described, they
must stand for some manifestation of Prakrz'ti, which understand-
ing and egoism are. Otherwise bird does stand for self/ See
'
'
'
p. 189 supra.
5
The original word here is sattva, on which see p. 351 supra.
Ar^-una Mura renders it here by Prakn'ti.
6
So Nilaka///a; 'the only intelligent principle/ Arûna Mkra.
On Nilakaâ's interpretation 'inner self must be the same thing
as Bhutatman at Maitri, p. 41.
B b 2
372 anugIta.
beyond nature, then understanding the Kshetra 1 and ,
with an understanding comprehending all, and tran-

2
scending the qualities he is released from all sins.
Chapter XXXIII.
Brahman said:
Some Brahman as a tree some
(think of) the ;
(think of) the Brahman as a great forest and some ;
(think of) the Brahman as unperceived and some ;
as transcendent and without misery 3

and they 4 ;
think all this to be produced from and absorbed

into the unperceived. He who even for (the space
of) a (single) exhalation, at the time of the termina-
tion (of life
5
) becomes equable 6 , attaining to the
self, becomes fit for immortality. Restraining the
self in the self 7 , even for (the space of) a wink, he
8
repairs to the inexhaustible acquisition of those
who have knowledge, through the tranquillity of the
self 9 . And restraining the life-winds again and
1
See p. 351 supra. 2
See GM, p. 109.
3
As to the first two clauses comp. pp. 284-371 supra; the last
two are said by Arûna Mura to represent the Sahkhya and Yoga
doctrines respectively.
4
I means all teachers. But Nilakaâ takes it to
presume this
mean and he takes the preceding words as indicating

the Sdhkhyas,
two views based on -Sruti texts, viz. the first, that the world is a
development of the Brahman, and the other that the Brahman does
not undergo any development or change. Anamaya he takes to
mean changeless, and Brahmamaya he takes to mean developed
from the Brahman.
5
Cf. Gita, pp. 77, 78.
6
One who sees the supreme as the only real entity, Arûna
Mirra. Nilaka/z/a takes it to mean one who identifies himself
with everything. See GM, p. 6%, and note 4 there.

7
See p. 344 supra.
8
L e. the goal to be acquired.
9
'Tranquillity' the original may also be rendered by 'favour/
CHAPTER XXXIII, J. ^7 2>
2
again by control of the life- winds \ of ten or twelve
(modes), (he repairs to) that which beyond the
is
twenty-four 3
. Thus having first a tranquil self, he
obtains whatever he desires. When the quality
of goodness predominates in the unperceived 4 that ,
fits one for immortality. The men of knowledge

extol nothing else beyond goodness. By inference 5
we understand the (attainment to the) being to de-
pend on goodness. It is not possible otherwise 6
to
attain to that being, O best of the twice-born ! For-
giveness, courage, harmlessness, equability, truth,
straightforwardness, knowledge, abandonment 7 and ,
also renunciation are laid down as (constituting) con-
as to which 234 supra, but further on the phrase 'having a

cf. p.
tranquil self occurs, where the latter sense is not quite suitable.
See GM, p. 51, and Yoga-sutra I, 33.
1
I.e. the specific modes which are mentioned of control of life
winds, e.g. at Gita, p. 61, or Yoga--sutra II, 49 seq.
2
Nilakara/â proposes two interpretations of this. He says the
ten are the eight mentioned in Yoga-sutra II, 29, and in addition
tarka and vairagya (as to which see Yoga-sutra I, 15 and 17). To
make up the twelve he substitutes for the last two the four named
at Yoga-sutra I, 33. He also suggests that 'ten or twelve' may
mean twenty-two, which he makes up thus. The five modes of
yama (Yoga-sutra II, 30), five of niyama (ibid. 32), the remaining
six in Yoga-sutra II, 29, the four in Yoga-sutra I, 33, and tarka and
vairagya as before.
3
The twenty-four are the elements according to the Sankhya
system. See Sahkhya-s&ra, p. 11, and p. 368 supra. That which
is beyond them is Purusha.
4
The unperceived, it should be noted, is made up of the three
qualities ; the predominance of goodness indicates enlightenment
or knowledge. Cf. Gita, p. 108.
5
The middle term in the inference being, says Arûna Mura,
the enlightening effect of the quality in question.
6
Cf. p. 167 supra.
7
The original is tyaga, which Arg-una MLsra renders by ' aban-
donment of all belongings;' renunciation, scil. of fruit. Cf. Gita,
p. 121, and p. 114.

374 ANUGITA.
duct of the quality of goodness. By this very inference

the wise verily believe in the Being and nature as
one, there is no doubt of that. Some learned men,
who are devoted to knowledge, assert the unity of
the Kshetra^na and nature 1
. But that is not correct.
That they are always distinct (from one another)
2
is also (said) without (due) consideration . Dis-
tinctionand also association 3 should be accurately
understood. Unity and diversity 4 are likewise laid
down. Such is the doctrine of the learned. Between
the gnat and the udumbara 5 there is observed
unity and diversity also. As a fish is in water
distinct (from it), such is their relation ;
(such is)
the relation of the drops of water with the leaf of

the lotus.
The preceptor said :
Then those Brahma/zas, who were the best of

sages, having again felt doubts, interrogated the
grandsire of the people who spoke to them thus.
1
Here, says Nilaka^Ma, the author indicates an objection to the
proposition stated just before. But the passage is not clear.
2
This, says Nilaka//$a, is a reply to the Sankhyas, who hold the
two to be distinct. Nilaka/z/â adds, that if the two are distinct,
nature will, conceivably, adhere even to an emancipated creature
and if they are one, then the being or self would be really engaging
in action and so forth, and that activity being really a property of
the self, could not be destroyed save by the destruction of the self.
Hence that view is also wrong.

8
Like that of sea and wave, Nilakaw/â.
4
Unity of Brahman and diversity of manifestation of nature,
Ar^-una Mi^ra,
who adds by reason of the association they are
spoken of as one, by reason of the unity and diversity they are
distinct. The next sentence contains three parallel cases.
5
Cf. as to all this, -Santi Parvan, chap. 194, st. 38 seq. (Moksha
Dharma); chap. 249, st. 20 seq. ; chap. 285, st. 33 seq.
CHAPTER XXXIV, 7. 375
Chapter XXXIV.
The sages said
Which (form of) piety is deemed to be the most
worthy of being performed ? We observe the various
modes of piety to be as it were contradictory. Some say
(it
1
remains) after the body (is destroyed) some say ;
that is not so. Some (say) everything 2

is doubtful
and others that there is no doubt Some say the
permanent (principle) is impermanent, and others, too,
that it exists, and (others) that it exists not 3 Some .
(say it is) of one form or twofold, and others (that

it is) mixed
4
Some Brihmaâs, too, who know the
.
Brahman and perceive the truth, believe it to be one ;
others distinct; and others again (that it is) manifold 5 .
Some say both time and space (exist) 6 ,and others that
that is not so. Some have matted hair and skins ;
and some (are) clean-shaven and without covering.

Some people are for bathing; some for the omission 7
of bathing. Some are for taking food ; others are
intent on fasting. Some people extol action, and
1
I. e. the piety, Arûna MLrra ; the self, Nilaka^/â.
2
I. e. such as piety, &c, Argrma Mura.
3
I follow Aig-una MLsra, who says < permanent ' means soul, &c.
The correct expression would seem to be '

that which is called
permanent by others is impermanent/

4
This is the view of those who hold the theory of Parkama,
or development, says Arûna MLrra.
5
'To be one* = knowledge to be all of one description, dis- '
tinct '= knowledge having various entities for its distinct objects
(this is the view of the holders of the Vi^nanavada, says Arûna
Mura) manifold = that the selfs are numberless. The words here
;
are nearly identical with those at Gita, p. 83, see note 4 there.
6
I. e. help in action, Arûna MLrra.
7
See Apastamba I, i, 1, 2 (comment).
376 ANUGITA.
others tranquillity. Some extol final emancipation ;
some various kinds of enjoyments some wish for ;
riches, and others indigence. Some (say) means

should be resorted to others that that is not so.
;
Some are devoted to harmlessness, and some given

up to destruction some are for merit and glory
;
;
and others say that is not so. Some are devoted

to goodness some are in the midst of doubts some
; ;
are for pleasure, and some for pain 2 Some people .
3
(say) meditation other Brahmaâs (say) sacrifice,
,
and others, gifts; but others extol penance, and other

persons sacred study; some knowledge, and renuncia-
tion 4 and those who ponder on the elements 5
;
,
nature 6 Some extol everything, and others nothing 7

. .
1
I. e. for the acquisition of anything desirable, Arg-una
Mura,
who by those who wish for piety/ Nilakaâ says means
adds, '
'meditation and so forth;' as to 'that is not so' he cites what he

calls a *Sruti, which is however one of the Karikas of Gaudapada
on the Ma/^/ukya; see p. 432.

2
This, too, is not quite clear, but Nilaka//&a says, 'meditation
should be practised for release from pain, and for acquisition of plea-
'
sure and others say not so, it should be done without desire/
;'
3
That is to say, they hold that meditation should be practised.
4
Arûna MLsra seems to take this to mean 'renunciation of
knowledge,' i.e. a blank, and says this was the view of the M&dhya-
mikas, I suppose the Madhyamika Bauddhas.
5
I. e. the iTarvakas, Arûna Mura.
6
Svetlyvatara, p. 276, and -Sankara's commentary there.
7
Were there optimists and pessimists at the time of the Anu-
gita in India ? This verse, however, does not occur in some MSS.
Nilakaâ's note on this passage may be of some interest. He says,
'Some hold that the self exists after the body is lost others, that is
;
the LoMyatas or iTarvakas, hold the contrary. Everything doubtful

is the view of the Syadvadins; nothing doubtful that of the Tairthikas,
the great teachers (I presume, about their own respective doctrines).
Everything impermanent, Tarkikas; permanent, Mimawsakas; no-
thing exists, the Sunyav&dins; something exists,but only momentarily,
CHAPTER XXXIV, I 7. 377
And, O best of the gods piety being thus confused !
and abounding in contradictions, we are deluded,

and come to no determination. People are acting,
(saying) this is good, this is good. And he who is
attached to a certain (form of) piety, always esteems
that. Here (therefore) our understanding breaks
down, and our mind is distracted. We wish, O best
(of beings)! to be informed of what is good. Be
pleased now to proceed to state what is (so) myste-
rious, and what is the cause of the connexion be-
tween the Kshetra^na and nature. Thus addressed
by those Brahmaâs, the venerable, holy, and talented
creator of worlds told them accurately (what they
asked).
Saugatas ; knowledge is one, but the ego and non-ego are two
different principles, theYogaMras; mixed, Udulomas; one, is the
view of the worshippers of the Brahman as possessed of qualities
distinct, other Mimazrcsakas, who hold that the special actions are
the cause (of everything, is meant, I presume) ; manifold the
atomists ; time and space = astrologers. Those who " say that is
not so," that is to say, that what we see has no real existence at
all, are the Vrz'ddhas, ancient philosophers ; omission to bathe = the
condition of Naish/îka Brahmaârins ; bathing = householder's
condition ;
" means should be resorted to, that is not so," those
who are against meditation, &c, according to the Sruti text,
all
which Nilaka/â quotes " merit and glory, that is not so," some
;
say there is no merit as the Lokayatas or ^Tarvakas ; " know-

ledge, renunciation," the former is to be gained only by means of
the latter; "ponder on elements "= who are intent on the inves-
tigation of the true nature abundance of
of things ; nature =
resources, by which alone knowledge is produced, not by mere
renunciation/ It will be understood, that this commentary assumes
a different syntactical construction of the original in some places
from that adopted in our translation.
378 ANUGITA.
Chapter XXXV.
Brahman said
Well then, Iyou what you ask
will declare to
of me, O best (of men)! Learn what a preceptor
told a pupil who went to him. Hearing it all,
deliberate on it properly. Non-destruction of all
creatures, that is deemed to be the greatest duty 1 .
This is the highest seat 2 free from vexation and ,
holy in character. The ancients who perceived the

established (truth) call knowledge the highest hap-
piness. Therefore by pure knowledge one is released
from all sins. And those who are constantly engaged
in destruction, and who are infidels 3
in their conduct,
and who entertain avarice and delusion, go verily to

hell. Those who without sloth perform actions with
expectations, rejoice in this world, being born agajn
and again. But those wise and talented men, who per-
form actions with faith, free from any connexion with
expectations, perceive correctly 4 . Now I will proceed
to state how the association and dissociation of
Kshetra^na and nature (take place). Learn that,
O men)
best (of The relation here ! is said to be
that between the object and subject 5 . The subject
1
See p. 291 supra, and note 3 there.
2
So literally the sense is
;
that which one is to aim at.
3
The original is nastika, the contrary of that <
astikya,' which at
Gita, p. 126, we have rendered by c
belief (in a future world)/ fol-
lowing -Srfdhara. R&m&nug-a, whose commentary came to hand
too late for any other than a very occasional use in the translation
of the Gita, renders it by '
belief in the truth of the teaching of
4
the Vedas/ I. e. learn the truth.
5
I use the terms subject and object here in the philosophical
sense explained by Sir W. Hamilton, viz. the thinking agent and the
object of thought respectively. And cf. also the passage referred to
in note 3 on p. 379 infra.
CHAPTER XXXV, 1 5. 379
is always the being, and nature is stated to be the

object. It above mode,
has been explained in the
as (having the relation) of the gnat and the
udumbara Nature which is non-intelligent knows
1
.
nothing, though it is the object of enjoyment 2 Who .
enjoys and what is enjoyed 3 is learnt from the .Sastras.

Nature is said always to abound in the pairs of
opposites, and to be constituted of the qualities
the Kshetra^na is free from the pairs of opposites,
devoid of parts, and in essence free from the
qualities. He abides in everything alike 4 and is ,
connected with (all) knowledge 5 and he always ;
enjoys nature as a lotus-leaf (enjoys) water. Even

brought into contact with all qualities, a learned
man remains untainted 6 There is no doubt that .
the being is unattached just like the unsteady drop

of water placed upon a lotus-leaf 7 . It is established
that nature is the property 8

of the being. And the
relation of the two is like that of matter and the
maker 9 . As one goes into (a) dark (place) taking
a light (with him), so those who wish for the supreme
10
go with the light of nature . While there is oil
1
P. 374 supra. The relation is one of close connexion, coupled
with some identity of nature (because, says Nilaka#/Aa, an entirely
extraneous thing could not get into the inside of the fruit, and the
gnat's body must have come from the fruit itself), but
therefore
2
still the elements are distinct. See p. 371 supra, note 4.
3 4
Cf. Maitri, p. 108. Cf. Gita, pp. 105, 106.
5
Knowledge of the Kshetra^na forms part of all real knowledge.
Aignna Mura's reading and interpretation are different. He says,
'
As he is seen coming to light everywhere alike, so/ &c.
6
Cf. Git&, pp. 55-110. 7
Again the common simile.
8
The original is dravya, rendered 'matter' in the next sentence.
Arguna Mi^ra paraphrases it by upakarana/ paraphernalia.
'
9
So the original, the sense is not clear. But see -SVeta^vatara, p. 368.
10
Knowledge, which, says Nilakafl/â, is a manifestation of
nature. Arg-una Mirra says the knowledge of the truth which the
380 anugIta.
and wick 1
9
the light shines ; but the flame is ex-
tinguishedwhen the oil and wick are exhausted.
Thus nature is perceived 2 the being is laid down ;
(as being) unperceived. Understand this, O Brah-

maâs Well now, I will tell you something more.
!
One who has a bad understanding does not acquire

knowledge even with a thousand (admonitions).
And one who is possessed of knowledge enhances
(his) happiness even with a fourth share 3 Thus .
should one understand the accomplishment of piety

by (apt) means. For the talented man who knows
(these) means, attains supreme happiness 4 As a .
man some way without provisions

travelling along
for the journey, travels with great discomfort, and
may even be destroyed on the way, so should one
understand, that by action 5 the fruit is or is not
produced. For a man to see within (his) self 6
what is agreeable and what is disagreeable to him
is good. And as one who is devoid of a perception
of the truth rashly travels on foot by a long way
unseen before 7
, while (another) goes by the same
by means of nature. Cf. Sankhya-karika 56, and

self acquires is
comment.
1
So Nilaka;/Ma. Ar^-una MLrra does not take gua here to
mean '
wick/
2
I. e., I presume, in its manifestations ; it is perceived for some
time and then vanishes. Cf. Sankhya-karika 59-61; the Purusha
is not '
perceived ' in this sense.
8
Viz. of admonition, Argnna Misra.
4
Cf. Gita, p. 70, where the same phrase occurs.
5
The fruit of this is uncertain; knowledge which is in one's
self is the thing to be worked for.
6
I. e. the mind, Nilakaâ. The meaning is, he should not
care for external pleasure and pain. Cf. GM, inter alia, p. 50.
7
This seems to be so left imperfect in the original. The con-
struction seems to be this: the progress of the latter is as great as that
of one who drives in a chariot as compared with that of one who goes
011 foot with much suffering. Cf. the construction on next page.
CHAPTER XXXV, 28. 38
1
way in a carriage drawn by horses, and going
swiftly, such is the progress of the men of under-
standing. Having climbed up a mountain one
should not look at the surface of the earth 2
. One
sees a man travelling in a chariot, and void of intel-
ligence, afflicted by reason of the chariot. As far as

there is a carriage-path, he goes in the carriage
where the carriage-path stops, a learned man goes
on abandoning the carriage. So travels the talented
man, who understands the procedure respecting
(knowledge of the) truth and devotion 3 and who ,
knows about the qualities, comprehending the grada-

tions 4 one above the other. As one who without
a boat dives into the ocean with his arms only,
through delusion, undoubtedly wishes for destruction;
while a wise man likewise knowing distinctions 6 ,
and having a boat with good oars, goes in the water

without fatigue, and soon crosses the reservoir, and
having crossed (it) goes to the other shore, throwing
1
I. e. the -Sastras, says Nilaka/z/a. Cf. Gita, p. 117.
2
When one has arrived at knowledge, the highest seat, says
Nilaka7z/$a,
one need not perform the dictates of the Sastras,
which are only preliminary to the acquisition of knowledge. Cf.
Gita, pp. 48, 73. Cf. as to this figure of the chariot and the next
one about the boat, Bn'hadara/zyaka, p. 695.
3
Iadopt Arg-una's rendering of the original here, viz. Yoga.
The meaning, on that rendering, is the same as it is in the Gita.
4
According to Aigxma Mura, action with desire, action without
desire, and lastly, knowledge. According to Nilaka/#a, action
laid down in the *S3stras, then Yoga, and then the condition of
Hawsa, Paramahazrasa, &c.
5
Literally, one knowing divisions. I presume the meaning is
distinctionsbetween various things as to which suits which, and so
forth. The boat, says Nilakaâ, is a preceptor, and even a pre-
ceptor is not to be sought for after a man has achieved Yoga
hence the text proceeds to speak further on of casting aside the
boat. Wishes for destruction = is sure to meet destruction.
?82 ANUGITA.
aside the boat, and devoid of (the thought that this or

that is) This has been already explained by the
mine.
parallel of the carriage and pedestrian. One who
has come by delusion through affection, adheres to
that like a fisherman to his boat, being overcome
by (the thought that this or that is) mine. It is
not possible to move on land after embarking in
a boat. And likewise one cannot move in water
after entering a carriage. Thus there are various
actions in regard to different objects 1
. And as
action performed in this world, so does it result
is
2
to them That which sages by their understanding
.
meditate upon, which is void of any smell whatever,

void of taste, and void of colour, touch, or sound,
that is called the Pradhina 3 Now that Pradhana .
is unperceived a development of the unperceived

;
is the Mahat and a development of the Pradhina

;
(when it is) become Mahat is egoism. From egoism

is produced the development, namely, the great
elements and of the elements respectively, objects
;
of sense are verily stated to be the development 4 .
The unperceived is of the nature of seed 5

, and
also productive in its essence. And we have heard
1
I. e. appertaining to the various orders of householders, &c,
Nilakaâ. But I am not aware of any authority for this sense of
vishaya.
2
I. e. those who perform them.
3
Nilaka/z/â says, 'Having stated above the means of knowledge,
he now states the proper object of knowledge/
4
See p. 332 supra. The original for development is guâ,
literally quality.
5
The meaning of this passage seems to be identical with that
of Sarikhya-karika 3. Productive (Prasavatmakam) is probably to
be explained as Prasavadharmi is at Sankhya-karika 1 1 (see com-
mentary of Vaâspati, pp. 59, 60), viz. always undergoing develop-
ment. The great elements are of course the tanmatras.
CHAPTER XXXV, 42. 383
that the great self is of the nature of seed and

a product. Egoism is of the nature of seed and a
product also again and again. And the five great
elements are verily of the nature of seed and
products. The objects of the five elements are
1
of the nature of seed but they do not yield pro-
9
ducts. Learn about their properties. Now space

has one quality, have two qualities
air is said to
it is said that light has three qualities and water, ;
too, is of four qualities and earth, abounding with ;
movables and immovables, the divine source of all

entities, full of examples of agreeable and disagree-
able (things), should be understood to be of five

qualities 2 Sound, touch, colour likewise, taste, and
.
smell as the fifth these, O best of the twice-born!

should be understood to be the five qualities of
earth. Smell always belongs to the earth 3 and ;
smell is stated to numerous

be (of) descriptions.
I will state at length the numerous qualities of
4
smell . Smell is agreeable or disagreeable, sweet,
sour, and bitter likewise, diffusive and compact
also, soft, and rough, and clear also 5
thus should
1
This is not clear, unless 'product' above means productive, and
seed means a product, it being a product of the ankura or sprout.
Nilakaâ says, '
seed = cause ;
product = effect. The unperceived
is an and so the contrary doctrine of the Sarikhya is here
effect,
shown to be wrong. The objects are causes, as their enjoyment

2
causes an impression/ See pp. 285, 286 supra.
3
That is to say, smell is the special property of the earth only,
the other qualities are common to it with the other elements. The
word in the original is guzza or quality everywhere.
4
See *Santi Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 184, st. 27.
5
Bitter, Nilaka//a exemplifies by the smell of the chili, appa-
rently interpreting ka/vi, as it may be interpreted, to mean sharp
diffusive = overcoming all other smells, like Asafoetida; compact =
made up of many smells. Nilaka/â adds, that soft is like that of
384 ANUGITA.
smell, which belongs to the earth, be understood

to be of ten descriptions. Sound, touch, and colour
likewise, and taste, are stated to be the qualities
of water. I will now give (some) information about
taste. Taste is stated to be of numerous descrip-

tions. Sweet 1 , sour, bitter, sharp, astringent, and
saltish likewise thus are the forms of taste, which
is a development of water, said to be of six descrip-
tions. Sound, touch, and likewise colour; thus is
light said to have three qualities. The quality of
light is colour,and colour is stated to be of numerous
descriptions. White, black, red likewise, green,
2
yellow, and grey likewise, short long, narrow ,
broad, square, and circular thus is the colour of

light said to be of twelve forms. It should be
understood by aged Brihmaâs, who speak the

3
truth, and are conversant with piety. Sound and

touch also should be understood air is said to have ;
(these) two qualities. And touch is the quality of air,

and touch is stated to be of numerous descriptions.
Rough, cold and hot likewise, tender and clear also,
hard, glutinous, smooth, slippery, hurtful, and soft 4
thus the quality of air is properly said by Br&h-
maâs who have reached perfection, who are con-
versant with piety and perceive the truth, to be of
twelve descriptions. Now space has one quality,
liquid ghee, rough of the oil of mustard, and clear as of cooked
1
rice. The Parvan passage omits sour/
*Santi Cf. Gita, p. 1 18.
'
2
Literally, lean and fat. These are rather unusual qualities to
attribute to colour. The *Santi Parvan passage gives more.
3
Sic. Does it mean 'it is understood V Cf. Pacini III, 3, 113.
4
Tender = like the touch of a son, &c. ; clear = like that of an
excellent cloth, Nilaka/a; glutinous = like that of oil; smooth
like that of a gem ; slippery = not really smooth, but appearing to
be such, like that of saliva (?), Arg-una Mi^ra. The enumeration of
these in the ânti Parvan loc. cit. is again different.
CHAPTER XXXVI, I. 385
and that is stated to be sound only. I will speak

at length of the numerous qualities of sound.
Shaaâ, 7?zshabha, together with Gandh&ra, Ma-
dhyama, and likewise and beyond these Pafi/ama,
should be understood to be Nish&da and Dhaivata
likewise * agreeable and disagreeable sound also,
;
compact, and of (many) ingredients 2 Thus sound, .
which is produced in space, should be understood

to be of ten descriptions. Space is the highest
element 3 egoism is above that
, above egoism is ;
understanding, and above that understanding is the

self 4 above that is the unperceived, and above the
;
unperceived is the being. One who knows which

is superior and inferior among entities, and who
knows the proper procedure in all actions, and who

identifies himself with every being 5 repairs to the,
imperishable self.
Chapter XXXVL
Brahman said
Since the mind is ruler of these five elements, in

(the matter of) absorbing or bringing (them) forth 6 ,
1
This is the Hindu Gamut.
2
These are not in the anti Parvan; of many ingredients
collection of sounds, Arg-una MLsra.
8
Being all-pervading, Arguna MLrra. Cf. its position at Taitti-
riya, p. 67.
4
Cf. KaMa, pp. 114, 115, 149, and Sankara^&rya's commentary
there, for an explanation of the whole passage. And see S&hkhya-
S&ra, p. 16, as to what are here called self and understanding.
6
Cf. GM, p. 64, where the words are identical.
6
The elements are perceived or are not perceived by the senses
under the direction of the mind ; absorbing = destroying ; bringing
forth = producing, Nilakaâ. See p. 268 supra, and *Santi Parvan
(Moksha), chap. 240, st. 12.
[8] C C
386 ANUGITA.
the mind itself is the individual self 1 The mind

.
always presides over the great elements. The un-

derstanding proclaims its power 2 and, it is called the
Kshetra^fia. The mind yokes the senses as a cha-
rioteer (yokes) good horses. The senses, the mind,
and the understanding are always joined to the
Kshetra^fia 3 That individual self, mounting the
.
chariot to which big horses 4 are yoked, and in which

the understanding is the drag 5 drives about on all ,
sides. The great chariot which is pervaded by the

Brahman 6 has the group of the senses yoked (to it),
,
has the mind for a charioteer, and the understanding

for a drag. That learned and talented person verily,
who always understands thus the chariot pervaded
by the Brahman, comes not by delusion in the midst
of all entities 7 This forest of the Brahman 8 begins
.
with the unperceived,and ends with the gross objects 9 ;
1
The word is the same as at Maitri, p. 41, the comment on
which should be seen.
is to be perceived by itself, Nilakaâ.
2
I. e. the mind's power
The meaning seems to be that the understanding can only operate
on what the mind places before it.
8
The passage at Ka/â, and Sankara's commentary
p. 1 1 1 seq.,
there, throw though the figure is not drawn out in the

light on this,
same way in both places. For a definition of Kshetra^fia, see

S&nti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 187, st. 23.
4
I. e. the senses.
5
I. e. that which holds the horses in check. Nilakaâ seems
to render by whip/ but that is not correct, I think.
it '
6
So Argima Mura. Nilaka/â says, The senses, ' &c., when
they turn towards the outer world make the self drive about,
as an individual self; when turned inwards they show him that he
is the Brahman/ Nilaka//&a thus likens this to the KaMa passage.
See also p. 187 and notes there.
7
Or it may mean, among all men.
8
See p. 164 supra, note 2 ; and p. 285, note 4.
9
That is to say, it includes all Sawsara, all the elements recog-
nised by the Sankhya philosophy, save the Being or Purusha.
CHAPTER XXXVI, 12. 387
and includes movables and immovables, receives

light from the radiance of the sun and moon, is
adorned with planets and nakshatras, and is decked
on all sides with nets of rivers and mountains, and
always beautified likewise by various (descriptions
of) waters it is (the means of) subsistence for all
;
1
entities and it is the goal of all living crea-
,
tures. In this the Kshetra^fia always moves about.

Whatever entities (there are) in this world, movable
or immovable, they are the very first 2 to be dis-
solved and next the developments produced from the
;
elements 3 and (after) these developments, all the ele-

;
ments. Such is the upward gradation 4 among entities.

Gods, men, Gandharvas, Pisakas, Asuras, R&kshasas,
all have been created by nature
5
not by actions, nor ,
by a cause. These Brdhmaâs 6 the creators of the ,
world, are born here again and again. And what-

1
Cf. p. 371 supra.
2
Another reading means 'they are dissolved in the waters/ As
and p. 335 supra.
to the order, cf.Vedanta Paribhasha, p. 48,
I take these to mean the gross elements of which things mov-
3
able and immovable may be said to be made, if one may use

a non-idealist phrase in the Sankhya philosophy. Then the ele-
ments next spoken of are the subtle ones or tanmatras. Cf. the
references in note 2. As to developments, see p. 382, note 4.
4
Viz. gross object, gross element, subtle element.
5
The original is Mura renders by
svabhava, which Arûna
Prakrzti. Arûna Miara take to
'Actions' both Nilaka/$a and
mean sacrifices, &c, and 'cause' the former interprets by Brahman;
the latter by tanmatras or subtle elements, and adds, the sense is '
not by sacrifice or tanmatras only/ Nilakaw/â says, 'The gods,

&c, are produced by nature, as the gods, &c, seen in a dream/
The meaning seems to be that there are energies in nature which
evolve these forms of being. Cf. also Gitd, p. 65.
6
I presume this means that the patriarchs (Mariî and others,
says Nilaka#//$a) are also born again and again that is to say, in
different kalpas, I suppose by nature only.
C C 2
388 ANUGITA.
ever produced from them 1 is dissolved in due

is
time in those very five great elements, like billows

in the ocean. The great elements are in every way
(beyond) the elements that make up the world 2 .
And he who is released, even from those five ele-

ments, goes to the highest goal. The Lord Prag-
pati created all this by the mind 3 only. And in the
same manner 4 the sages attained the godhead 5 by
means of penance 6 And in like manner, those who
.
have achieved perfection, who have acquired concen-

tration by a course of penance, and who likewise feed
on fruits and roots, perceive the triple world 7 here
by penance. Medicines, and herbs, and the various
sciences are all acquired 8 by means of penance
alone. For all acquisition 9 has penance for its
root. Whatever is difficult to obtain 10 difficult to ,
1
I think this must mean the elements, though it might at first
sight be referred to the Brahmaâs.
2
I. e. the gross elements, I take it; the others are the tanmatras.
3
I. e. the meditation which constitutes true knowledge, Arg-una
Mi^ra. But see Git&, p. 87, note 1, and Sarikhya-siitra.
4
by the mind, as to which cf. Taittiriya, p. 89; Ka/â, p. 164.
I. e.
Arûna Mura says, This apparent deviation from the ordinary

*
modes of cause and effect is not altogether without parallel, so he

adds this to show that/
5
Literally, the gods/ but the meaning seems to be that given
'
in the text, as Argrma MLrra says.

8
This is only the concentration of mind and senses on one
object, Nilaka/â. See p. 166, note 1 supra.
7
See 174 supra.
p.
8
are accomplished/ which seems to mean that they
Literally, '
are acquired so as to be practically at one's command when

required.
9
The original word is derived from the same root as the subject
of the last note.
10
Difficult to obtain = the seat of Indra, &c; to learn =Vedas,
&c.; to vanquish = fire, &c; to pass through = a great deluge, &c,
learn, difficult to vanquish, and difficult to pass

through ; all that can be accomplished by penance, for
penance is difficult to overcome. One who drinks
spirituous liquors, one who kills a Brahma/za, one
who one who destroys an embryo, one who
steals,
violates the bed of his preceptor 1 is released from ,
that sin only by penance well performed. (Those)

2
men, Pitrzs, gods, (sacrificial) animals beasts and ,
birds, and all other creatures movable or im-

movable, (who are) constantly devoted to penance,
always reach perfection by penance. And in like
manner the noble(-minded) gods went to heaven 3 .
Those who without sloth perform actions with ex-

pectations, and being full of egoism, they go near
Pra^&pati 4 Those high-souled ones who are devoid
.
of (the thought that this or that is) mine, and devoid

of egoism, by means of a pure concentration (of
mind) on contemplation, obtain the great and highest
world. Those who best understand the self, attain-
ing concentration (of mind) on contemplation 5 and ,
having their minds always tranquil, enter into the

unperceived accumulation of happiness 6 . Those
Nilaka/â. Aig-una MLrra seems to interpret the last word, where

his reading is doubtful, to mean '
difficult to do/
1
Cf. ZMndogya, p. 361. Except the destruction of the embryo
(see Taitt. Araw. p. 870, but at Br/hadara#yaka, p. 795, Kaushitaki,
p. 77,and Apastamba I, 6, 19, 16, the commentators render Bhru/za
by 'learned Brahmaâ'), the rest are the great sins. But note that
stealing gold, not theft generally, is mentioned as a great sin.
2
Or, perhaps, cattle. The original is pam.
3
See p. 160 supra, and cf. p. 178.
4
I. e. Kajyapa, as gods, &c. This seems to be Arûna Mora's
interpretation. This condition is inferior to that described in the
5
following sentence. See p. 162, note 1.
5
Nilakaâ's rendering is '
that by which (worldly) happiness is
390 ANUGITA.
who are free from (all thought that this or that is)
mine, and who are free from egoism, attaining con-
centration (of mind) on contemplation 1 , enter the
highest world of the great, which is the unperceived.
Born from that same unperceived 2 (principle), again
acquiring knowledge, and getting rid of the (quali-
ties of) passion and darkness, and resorting to the
pure (quality of) goodness, a man gets rid of all sins,
and abandons everything as fruitless. He should

be understood to be the Kshetra^na. He who
understands him understands the Vedas 3 With- .
drawing from the mind the objects 4 of mental opera-

tions, a sage should sit down self-restrained. (He)
necessarily (becomes) that on which his mind 5 (is
fixed). This is the eternal mystery. That which
begins with the unperceived and ends with the gross
objects 6 is stated to be of the nature of ignorance 7 .
But (you should) learn that whose nature is devoid
heightened/ He compares Br/hadara/zyaka, p. 816. See also

Taittiriya, p. 112.
1
See Gita, p. 128, note 1, where dhyana and yoga are taken
separately. Here the compound is in the singular. Nilaka#//$a's
reading is different.
2
The sense here is not quite clear. It seems, however, to be
this. The acquisitions mentioned in the preceding sentence take
the acquirers to some temporary world from which they afterwards
return ; when they get rid of the qualities, they get final eman-
but
cipation. As to the unperceived, cf. inter alia Gita, p. 112, note 2.
3
Cf. Gita, p. in, and note 2 there. That seems to approach
the question from the opposite point of view.
4
So Arg-una Mi.rra. At Gita XVI, 16, &tta means the opera-
tion itself. That also will do here.
5
Cf. Gita, p. 78; Maitri, p.178; Piuma, p. 194; and the quotations
at Sahkhya-s&ra, p. 3.
6
This phrase has occurred before; it means all the developments
which make up worldly life. See Sahkhya-sara, p. 5.
7
See p. 371 supra.
of qualities. Two syllables 1

are death ; three syllables
the eternal Brahman. Mine is death, and not mine
is the eternal 2
. Some men of dull understandings
extol action. But as to the high-souled ancients
they do not extol action 3 . By action a creature is
born with a body and made up of the sixteen 4 .
Knowledge brings forth 5 the being, and that is

acceptable and constitutes immortality. Therefore
those who are far-sighted have no attachment to
actions. This being is stated to be full of know-
ledge, not full of action 6
. The self-restrained man
who thus understands the immortal, changeless,
incomprehensible, and ever indestructible and
unattached (principle), he dies not 7
. He who thus
understands the self to which there is nothing prior,
which is unmoving 8 which
uncreated, changeless, ,
is incomprehensible (even) to those who feed on
nectar, he certainly becomes immortal 7 and not to

be restrained 9 in consequence of these means 10
, .
1
See *Santi Parvan (R%adharma) XIII, 4. Cf. Maitri, p. 180.
This means the two and three syllables of mama' and 'na ' mama/
mine and not mine. Cf. Brz'hadara/zyaka, p. 970, and -Oandogya,
p. 118, and p. 548, for a similar conceit.
2
Final emancipation follows on abandoning the idea of 'mine;'
3
bondage on harbouring it. See Mu^daka, p. 279.
4
The eleven organs and the five great elements which go to form
the body. See Sankhya-karika 3, and comment thereon -Santi Par- ;
van, chap. 210, st. 32 seq.; chap. 242, st. 7 seq.; Prama, p. 230.
6 6
I. e. shows. Cf. Gita, p.i 18 ; anti Parvan, ch. 242, st.
r
5.
7
See p. 367 supra, note 6; and cf. KaMa, pp. 155, 156.
8
I. e. which remains unconcerned, cf. Ira, p. 10. Apurvam (to
which there is nothing prior), Arûna Misra renders by 'not familiarly
known/ and Nilakaâ by 'not understood by any other means of
knowledge/ See also Bn'haddrawyaka, p. 502, and ankara on that.
9
This is not very clear, but I suppose the meaning to be the
same as that of '
unconquerable' at p. 161, and see p. 231.
10
I. e. the means mentioned further on, says Nilaka/â.
39 2 ANUGITA.
Expelling all impressions 1 and restraining the self

,
2
in the self , he understands that holy Brahman,
than which nothing greater exists. And when the
understanding is clear, he attains tranquillity 3 And .
the nature of tranquillity is as when one sees a

dream 4 . This 6 is the goal of those emancipated
ones who are intent on knowledge. And they see
all the movements 6 which are produced by develop-
ment. This is the goal of those who are indifferent
(to the world). This
This is is the eternal piety.
what acquired by men of knowledge. This is the
is
uncensured (mode of) conduct. This goal can be

reached by one who is alike to all beings 7 who is ,
without attachment, who is without expectations,
1
Impressions from external causes. Cf. inter alia Sankhya-sutra
III, 83; see, too, pp. 247-358 supra and notes there.
2
L e. restraining the mind in the lotus-like heart, Nilaka/#a.
Cf. as to this, pp. 248, 372 inter alia.
3
Cf. Gttd, p. 51. See also Maitri-upanishad, p. 176, and MuWaka,
P. 3i4.
4
Ar^-una Mi^ra says, '
The nature of tranquillity is this, that in
that state you perceive everything to be unreal like what is seen in
a dream.' Nilakaw/v&a says, '
The nature of tranquillity is this, that
in that state the self abides without attachment to the body and any
external objects, but working within itself as in a dream/ But see
on this Ka//fca, p. 147.
5
Viz. tranquillity, Nilaka#/â.
6
I.e., says Nilaka#/#a, they see all worldly objects past and
future. Arg-una MLrra, '
They see the actions performed for some
wealth and so forth/' I am not satisfied with either meaning.
Arûna Mwra's is besides based on a reading different from that
adopted in the text, namely, Parimawaâh, instead of Pari/zamaâh.
I think 'parMma' is the development which, according to the
Sankhya philosophy, produces the universe, and the movements
are the actions which that development namely, here the activity
of egoism and its products occasions. as some
Cf. to extent
supporting this, Sankhya-sara, p. 16.
7
See inter alia Git&, pp. 68-70.
and who looks alike have now

on everything 1 . I
declared everything to you, O best of Brahma/za

sages Act thus forthwith then you will acquire
! ;
perfection.
The preceptor said
Thus instructed by the preceptor Brahman, those
high-souled sages acted accordingly, and then at-
tained to the worlds 2 . Do you, too, O noble person,
of pure self! duly act according to the words of
Brahman which I have stated. Then will you
attain perfection.
Vasudeva said
That pupil thus instructed in the highest piety
by the preceptor, did everything (accordingly), O
son of Kunti and then attained final emancipation.
!
And the pupil, having done all he should have done,

attained to that seat, O supporter of the family of
the Kauravas! going to which one grieves not 3 .
Argnna said
Who, indeed, O Krishna]
was that Brihrnaâ,
and who the pupil, O ânirdana! If this verily
is fit to be heard by me, O Lord then tell it me. !
Vasudeva said
1
4
am the preceptor, O you of mighty arms ! and
1
See inter alia Gita, pp. 68-70.
2
I. e., I rest. But see also iTMndogya,
presume, Bhur and the
pp. 272, 541, 620, and Brz'hadarawyaka, pp. 302, 608.
8
See p. 285 supra, and cf. inter alia -Oandogya, p. 550.
* I. e. I, the Kshetrag-na, am the preceptor, and the mind is that
which has to be taught. This shows that one's instructor must be

oneself, Nilaka/â. Arûna MLyra says, I am the preceptor, the
'
mind is the pupil. The meaning of this is that anybody who has
not acquired knowledge is treated here as a pupil there is no other ;
special pupil intended/ Cf. also p. 310 supra.

394 ANUGITA.
know the mind to be my pupil. And, O Dhananâya

I have related this mystery to you out of love for
you. If you have love for me, O supporter of the
family of the Kauravas! then having heard this
(instruction) relating to the self, always duly act 1
(according to it). Then when this piety is duly
practised, you will attain the absolute final eman-
cipation, getting rid of all sins. It was this same
thing I stated to you before 2 when the time for
battle had come, O you of mighty arms ! There-
fore fix your mind on this. And now 3 O , chief of
the descendants of Bharata! it is long since I saw
the lord my father. I wish to see him, with your
consent, O Phalguna 4 !
VaLramp&yana said
When Krishna, spoke these words, Dhananâya
replied (saying), O Krishna
'
! let us verily go to-day
to the city of Gaâsa 5 you who
Be . pleased, O
understand piety! to see there king YudhishMira,
who is of a devout heart, and after taking leave of
him to go to your own city/
1
Nilakaâ interprets the words without supplying anything,
thus '
be devoted to yama niyama/ &c. Yama &c. are the eight
requisites for Yoga or concentration of mind as taught by Patanâli.
2
That is to say, in the Gita.
8
Here he takes up the thread of the story. In the first chapter
it was hinted that Krishna, was anxious to go to Dv&raka.
4
This is a name of Arûna.
6
I. e. Hastinapur, the capital of the Pawdavas. They were, when
the dialogue was held, at Indraprastha. See p. 229 supra.
INDEX
OF PRINCIPAL MATTERS.
In this Index, Roman and Italic letters, long and short vowels
have been classed together.
A, the letter, page 90. Act, auspicious. See Auspicious.

Abandonment, 49, 67, 71, 101, no, thought and word. See Body,
121, 122, 123, 154, 168, 177, 182, Mind, and Speech.
246, 280, 283, 326, 369, 370, 371, Action, 48, 49, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 59,
373? 39* See Renunciation. 60, 62, 63, 65, 67, 77, 81, 82, 95,
Abhimanyu, 37, 39. 98, 99, 102, 103, 106, 108, 109,
Abhiras, 295. no, in, 115, 117, 118, i2i, 122,
Abiding in everything. See Within. 123,124,125, 127,128,152,153,
Abiding together. See Unity. 156, 179, 180, 182, 184, 185, 188,
Abode of Brahman. See Identifica- 191,193,232, 233,238,240,241,
tion, Seat, and Unity. 243, 244, 256, 261, 278, 279, 280,
Abortive, nothing in Yoga, 47, 72. 283, 286, 289, 293, 297, 302, 306,
See Action, Life, Resolution, 307, 309, 3i3, 3i4, 3i5, 316, 319,
and Vain. 320, 321, 326, 338, 339, 348, 349,
Abridging, 357. 355, 357, 358, 365, 368, 369, 37o,
Absolute, 248, 310, 367, 394. 374, 375, 377, 380, 381, 382, 3S5,
Absolution. See Release. 387,389,391, 393.
Absorbent, 84, 104, 106, 112,191, 258, abandonment See Abandon- of.
268,279,286,318. See Assimi- ment and Inaction.
lation, Dissolution, Life-winds. bond of, 47, 53, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63,
Absorption, 331, 341, 342, 351, 366, 64, 65, 82, 85, 107, 108, 115,
385. See Assimilation. 123, 125, 307. See Taint.
Abstinence, 50. burning See Burning.
of.
Abstraction, 10, 68, 69, 70, 75, 77, capacity 65, 104, 241.
for,
78, 79, 86, 100, 114, 125, 128. causes 65, 123, 278.
of,
See Concentration. dedication to Brahman,
of, 55, 61,
Abuse, 166, 323. 64, 83, 85, 100, 105, 128, 168.
Acceptable, 391. See Renunciation.
Acceptance, 324, 325, 359, 364. defect cured, 121.
in,
Accessible,Supreme Being, 71, 79. destruction 241, 242. See De-
of,
See Approaching and Attain- struction.
ment. different from See Soul.
soul.
Accomplishment of all duty, 54, 1 14, evil,121, 127, 235, 238, 240, 242,
169, 193, 337, 344, 380, 388, 389, 257, 302, 320.
393. exhaustion 236, 237, 240, 241,
of,
Accumulation, 355, 364, 368. 242.
of honey, 188. ferocious. See Ferocious.
of sin and merit. See Happiness, freedom from. See Freedom.
Merit, and Sin. fruit of. See Fruit.
Acid, 118. instrument See Instrument.
of.
Acquisition, 48, 49, 55, 59, 70, 74, man 73, 255, 256.
of,
84,115,323,327* 332, 366, 372, marks 239, 321.
of,
376, 388, 392. See Body. meritorious, 72, 76, 109, 130, 233,
highest, 70,
225. 238, 314, 320, 321.
new, for Kr/'sha, 54. motive240, 242,49.257, See
to, 48, Duty and
of anything desired. See Desire. Fruit.
396 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUgAtIyA, ANUGItA.
Action, ordinary and special, 102. Agnihotra, 129, 191, 321.

organs of, 337. See Organs and Agnishtoma, 158.
Senses. Agreeable, 50, 66, 85, 101, 103, no,
performance of, 108, 378. 118,119,122,151,177,183,189,
prescribed, 53, 54, 67, 115, 117, 246, 278, 312, 360, 362, 370, 371,
118, 120, 122, 124, 125, 126, 305, 380,383,385.
39, 353 381. See Duty. Agriculture, 127.
A^yabhaga, 276.
prohibited, 60, 117, 119, 120, 125,
309. Ahavaniya, 262.
prompting to, 123. Ailment, 233, 237, 245, 321, 343,
pursuit of, 59, 60, 63. 356. See Disease.
release from. See Freedom.Aims of 100, 117, 125, 156, 177,
life,
ripening 241. of, 314, 33i, 378.
success of, 59. Air, 179, 260, 289, 305, 316,
73, 82,
to propitiate Supreme. See Pro- 339, 343, 361, 368.
a
pitiation. Airavata, 89.
unnecessary, 54. Aitareya-ara#yaka, 90, 102, 123, 87,
82.
vain, And see Destruction, 180, 239, 249, 250, 259, 339.

Success. brahmawa, 221, 265, 276, 277, 19,

world 239. of, 280.
Active mind, 70. upanishad, 120, 123, 153, 179, 187,
principle. See Soul, not active.
189, 191.
.
Activity, 65, 88, 104, 108, no, 114, Akhyanas, 145, 170.
160, 185, 319, 332, 334, 351, 358, Alarka, 296, 297, 298, 299.
374. See Soul, not active. Alarm at sight of universal form, 94,
Acute, 163, 164. 96, 98.
Adhibhuta, 77, 78. Alexander the Great, 223.
Adhidaiva, 77, 78. Alike to all,65, 68, 70, 71, 85, 101,
Adhiya^na, 77, 78. 106, no, 128, 292, 356, 379,
Adhvaryu. See Priest. 39 2 , 393. See Equability.
Adhyatma, 77, 90, 316, 338, 342. All- comprehending. See Universal
See Soul, science of. form.
Adityas, 88, 92, 94, 219. All-pervading. See Pervading prin-
Admonition. See Advice. ciple.
Advice, 174, 380. All,supreme, 97.
Adviser, 105. Alms, 43, 216, 360, 361, 362, 363.
iEon. See Kalpa. Alone. See Solitary.
Afar, 104, 369. Altar, 262.
Aifection, 50, 51, 56, 59, 68, 103, Amazement, 93, 94, 130, 300. See
124, 127, 166, 178, 193, 194, 246, Alarm.
250, 322, 324, 342, 382. See Ambarisha, 301, 303.
also Aversion, Favourite. Ambiguous. See Equivocal.
Affliction, 101,107, 122,284, 3 22 , 3 2 3> Amusement, 97,251. See Recreation.
381. See Trouble. Analyser, 173.
Affluence, 304. Analysis, 174.
Affright. See Fear. Anandagiri, 18, 49, 87, 113, 159, 186,
Age, 59, 79, 80, 330, 353. See Kalpa. 251, 266.
old, 44, 77, 103, 109, 140, 151, 170, Ananta, 89.
187, 194, 233, 247, 249, 250, 289, Anantagita, 28.
349,356,371,384. Anantaviâya, 38.
Agent,55, 65, 123,124,278. See Soul. Ancestors, 41. See Manes.
Agitation, 42, 50, 56, 66, 68, 108, 1 10, Ancient being. See Primeval.
344, 366, 369. Ancients, 59, 78, 86, 87, 260, 340,
of world, 10 1. And see Per- 369, 378, 391. See Elders.
turbation, Vexation. Ancient times, those who know about,
Agni, 219, 220, 345. 101. See Old times.
INDEX OF PRINCIPAL MATTERS. 397
Anger. See Wrath. Apsarases, 178, 347.

Angirasa, 314. Aquatic beings, 89.
Animals. See Beasts and Offerings. Arai, 284, 308.
Animate, 74, 244, 356. Ara/zyakas, 17.
Animating new body, 45, 112. Argument, 90, 102, 124, 276, 323.
Animosity, 60, 99, 167, 182, 183, 281, Arûna, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 17, 28, 34, 35,
321. See Hatred. 37, 38, 40, 42, 47, 48, 52, 53, 54,
Anointment, 93. 56, 58, 59, 62,63,69,71,72,73,
Antelope, 155, 295. 75, 76, 77,79,81,82,84,87,88,
Antipathy, 168. See Animosity. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 96, 98, 99, 109,
Antiquary, Indian, 27, 28, 139, 222. 117, 121, 122, 125, 128, 130, 131,
Anugita, 158, 161, 162, 166, 256. 135, 197, 198, 205, 229, 230, 293,
age of, 206 seq. 294, 3io, 393, 394- See Bha-
authorship of, 204 seq. rata, Favourite, Forgetfulness,
comparison of, with Apastamba, Kunti, and Prz'tha.
215 seq.; with Gita, 207 seq. MLrra, 200, 201, 204, 227,232,
199,
200, 201, 204.
divisions of, 198, 23 6,
237, 238, 239, 240, 242, 241,
extent 198of, 204.seq., 243, 244, 245, 246, 248, 249, 247,
geography 222. of, 250, 254, 256, 257,
252, 253, 255,
gods mentioned 219, 220. in, 258, 259, 260, 262, 263, 264, 265,
interpolations,205. 266, 269, 270, 273, 276, 271, 272,
language 226. of, 277, 278, 280, 281, 282, 284, 286,
mountains mentioned 222. in, 287, 288, 290, 292, 293, 300,
289,
numbering of chapters, 201. 301, 302, 303, 305, 308, 304, 306,
Parvan of Bharata, 200, 309, 310, 312, 313,
197, 199, 316, 314, 315,
318, 319, 320, 323, 324, 326, 325,
recapitulation of Gita, 197. 327,328,329,330,331,332,333,
scheme 197 of, 206.seq., 334, 34,
335, 339, 343,34*, 342,
stateof society disclosed 207, in,345, 34 344, 6 , 347, 348,
349, 350,
208. 360,
352, 353, 354, 355, 356, 357,
style of. See language of. 362, 363,
361, 364, 365, 366,
367,
substance of sections 201. of, 368,
369, 370, 371, 372, 374, 373,
222.
tribes in, 375, 376, 379, 38o, 381, 384,
385,
upanishad, 200. 386, 387, 388, 389, 390,
391, 392,
verse 226.
of, 393-
Anus, 258, 261. Arka, 219, 346.
AnushAibh, 142. Arms, 93, 94, 381.
Anxiety, 48, 302, 366, 367. mighty, 39, 45, 51, 55, 58, 63, 64,
Apana, 258, 338. See Life- winds. 71,72,74, 86, 94, 107, 121, 123,
Apastamba, 14, 20, 21, 22 seq., 24, 229, 252, 393, 394.
29, 3, 32, 69, 101, 103, 118, 120, thousand, 94, 98, 293, 294.
147, 176, 177, 208, 210, 211, 215, unnumbered, 94.
216, 217, 218, 225, 236, 243, 275, Army, 38, 294.
291, 302, 322, 353, 358, 359, 360, Array. See Battle-array.
361, 362, 365, 367, 370, 375, 389- Arrogance, 116, 128. See Boastful,
Ape, 39. Egotism, Pride, and Vanity.
Appearance. See Entity and Real. Arrows, 42, 294, 296, 297, 298, 299,
Application. See Assiduous. 300, 301.
Appointment, 365. Arteries, 257.
Apportionment, 59. Articulation. See Speech.
Apprehension, 82, 257, 283, 314. Artisans, 208, 365.
Approaching Brahman, 59, 75. See Aryaman, 89.
Accessible. Aryas, 222, 223.
preceptor. See Preceptor. Aryavidyasudhakara, 27, 33, 224.
Appropriating, 60, 243, 365. Asad, 120, 121.
Appurtenances, 357. See Belongings. Asafoetida, 383.
398 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGAtIyA, ANUgItA.
Ascent, 321, 385. 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86, 87, 99, 100,
Ascertainment of truth, 64. 104, 106, 116, 127, 129, 162, 164,
Ascetics, 61, 63, 66, 78, 123, 159, 212, 167, 173,174,175,185,189, 191,
217, 232, 246, 289, 290, 292, 293, 230, 257, 287, 339, 348, 367, 369,
312,316,354,358,363. 37o, 372, 373, 385, 392. See
Ashes, 62, 276. Brahman.
Asita, 87. Attendance, 324. See Preceptor.
Asking alms, 362. Attention, 231. See Assiduous.
Ajoka, 223. Attraction, 327.
Aspirations. See Expectations. Attractive, 189.
Ajramas, 30, 216, 307, 315. See Attrition, 308.
Orders. Auspicious act, 120, 324.
Ass, 20. Austerity. See Penance.
Assault, 41. Author. See Creator.
Assemblages of men. See Society. Authority, 54, 117, 243.
Assiduous, 50, 63, 72, 73, 83, 101, Automaton. See Free-will and Ma-
112, 115, 125, 161, 253, 255, 360, chine.
361. See Industry. Autumn, 159.
Assimilation with Brahman, 52, 59, Avarice, 41, 43, 108, 109, 114, 117,
66, 69, 70, 85, 99, 100, 104, 106, 155, 166, 181, 284, 302, 303, 320,
107, 109, no, 128, 156, 176, 178, 332, 335, 344, 357, 361, 378.
253,308,313,316,342,370. See Covetous.
Association, 233, 355, 359, 370, 374? Aversion, 50, 51, 56, 62, 63, 68, 76,
378. See Company, Dissocia- 101, 103, no, 122, 123, 124,
tion, and Society. 128, 322, 363. See Affection.
with preceptor, 177, 178. Avimukta, 257.
with senses, 288. Awake. See Day and Night.
Astringent, 363, 384. Axe, 294.
Astrologers, 377.
Asura, 83. See Demons. Back, 367.
A-rvalayana, 61, 68, 119, 236, 358. Backbiting, 114, 168, 183, 323, 326,
Ajvamedha, 156. 364.
Parvan, 197. Badarayawa, 30, 33.
Parvan, sections of, 198 seq. Bahu. See Bhuman.
Ajvattha, 89, in, 189, 247. Bali-offering, 216.
Ajvatthaman, 38. Balls of food for ancestors, 41.
Ajvins, 92, 94. Bamboo, 346, 359.
Asylum, 84, 129, 361, 363. See Re- Baa Bha#a, 13, 27.
sort. Banks of rivers, 344.
Atharva-veda, 18, 19, 180. Bark, 361.
Atheism, 115. Barley-seed, 353.
Atmosphere. See Air. Basis. See Real.
Atom, 78, 194. Bathing, 48, 64, 1 22,361, 364, 375,377-
Atomists, 377. Battle, Arûna directed to engage
Atri, 314. , 44, 47, 55, 78, 96, 127, 128.
Attachment, 48, 50, 52, 53, 54, 55, array, 4, 37.
59, 60, 61, 64, 65, 66, 67, 82, fie ld , 3, 4, 5, 37, 38, 42, 294, 296,
99, 101, 103, 104, 107, 109, in, 323, 394.
116, 118, 122, 124, 125, 127, 154, righteous, 46.
161, 166, 181, 182, 232, 236, 241, running away from, 127.
242, 246, 250, 289, 322, 324, 328, Baudhayana, 32.
34i, 357, 362, 364, 365, 367, 368, Beams. See Rays.
371,377,379,391,392. Beasts, 89, 90, 105, 109, 116,167,284,
Attack of vice, 167. 289, 290, 321, 345, 353, 356,
Attainment to Brahman, 52, 54, 59, 389.
60, 61,62, 64,71,75,76,78,79, Beauty, 177, 178, 238, 256, 260, 261,
264, 267, 268, 270, 272, 275, 286, 261, 262, 266, 270, 277, 278,279,
307,323^347. 28r, 282, 283, 284, 285, 288, 289,
Bed, 389. 291, 292,295, 305, 306, 307, 310,
Bees, 155, 188, 309. 313,315,317,318,319,320,321,
Beggar. See Ascetic and Asking. 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328,329,
Beginning and end and middle, 44, 33o,33i,332,334,335,338,342,
46, 66, 88, 90, 93, 94, in, 307, 343, 344, 345, 34 6 , 349, 35*, 352,
335, 35i, 352. 353, 355, 358, 359, 3 6 o, 362,363,
void of, 44, 86, 94, 103, 104, 106, 3 6 4, 3 6 5, 366, 367, 368, 369,370,
157, 3i3. 37i,372,373,375,378,38o,38i,
Behaviour. See Conduct. 384, 385, 387, 388, 390, 391, 392,
Being. See Spirits. 393, 394.
Ancient, 96, 97. See Primal. Bhagavadgita, appropriateness of, 4,
Best, 87, 92, 113, 114, 377. 6, 135.
Divine,77,78,
-
87, 186, 187, 188, 189, author of, 6, 28.
190, 191, 192. Brahmanization of, 4, 6, 21, 22.

Eternal, 87, 94. character of, 4, 7, 8, 10, 13, 17, 25.
Primal, in. connexion with Bharata. See
of,
Supreme, 54, 57, 78, 81, 83, 85, appropriateness, supra.
in, 113, 157, 188, 281, 284. date and Introduction,
of, 17, 19,
See Brahman and God. passim.
Beings, beginning of. See Source. dissemination 129, 130. of,
created. See Creatures. frame of, 2, 3.
embodied. See Embodied souls. genuineness of, 2, 4, 5, 6.
friend See Friend.
of. inconsistencies of, 11.
higher, in. language. See style, infra.
See Creatures.
living. names of, 2, 28.
lord See Lord.
of. non-systematic. See character,
seed See Seed.
of. supra.
tempers See Tempers.
of. Parvan of the Mahabharata, 2.
two, 113. Phalajruti 143. in,
two classes of, 93, 1 15. philosophy See character,
of.
within See Within.
all, 113, 194. supra.
position Sanskrit
Belief. See Convictions and Faith. in literature, 17,
Belongings, 60, 68, 128, 160, 170, 34, 138.
247, 324, 365, 3 6 9, 373. See relation to Buddhism, 24, 34.
Appurtenances. relation to Vedas, See 16, 17.
Beloved. See Favourite, Husband. character, supra.
Belt. See Girdle. relation to Yoga-sutras, 8.
Beneficial speech, 119. responsible for want of history, 1
Benefit, 76, 178, 182, 184, 185, 189, scheme of, 2, 3.
309, 324, 325, 360.

stanzas, common with other
Benevolence, universal, 66, 94, 99, works, 18, 27.
100, 101, 114, 322. stanzas number
of, of, 35.
Beyond. See Highest. study of.See dissemination,

Bhagavadgfta, 135, 137, 138, 142, supra.
143, 144, 145, 146,147, 148, 150,
style and language of, 4, 11, 13,
151,152,153,154,155,158,159, 14, 15.

160, 164, 165, 167, 168, 170, 171, teaching of, 16.
172, 173, 175, J 7 6 , !77, 179, 180, terminology of, 11.
184, 185, 186, 188, 189, 193, 194, text of, 34.
197, 203,207,208,210, 215,218,

upanishad, 200. 2,
222, 226, 230, 231, 232, 233,234, verse See History.

of, 15.
235, 236, 239, 240, 242, 243,244, Bhagavan, meaning of, 157.
245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, BhaWarkar, Professor R.G., 28, 107,
253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 260, 137, 199, 227.
400 BHAGAVADGiTA, SANATSUGATiYA, ANUGITA.
Bharadvaâ, 314. 302,325,361,367,371,378,387.

Bharata, 39, 43, 44, 46, 55, 57, 59, See Return.
63, 74, 75, 76, 79, 80, 92, 102, Birth, sinful, 85, 255.
105, 106, 107, 108, in, 114, Biting, 282.
115, 117, 119, 122, 126, 129, Bitter, 118, 363, 383, 384.
149, 150, 170, 176, 194, 231, Black, 179, 384.
254, 255, 256, 394. Blame and praise, 101, no, 185, 324,
Bharata. See Bharata and Maha- 392.
bharata. Blank, 376.
varsha, 39. Blind man, 155.
Bhargava, 314. Blindness, 320, 322.
Bhartr/hari, 14, 32, 220, 221, 239. Bliss, 52, 66. See Brahmic state.
Bhasa, 222, 346. Blood, 43, 155, 241, 252, 275, 335, 342.
Bhashya. See Patanâli. Boar, 37.
Bhattogi, 33. Boastful, 167, 170, 181, 324. See
Bhau Daji, Dr., 27. Arrogant.
Bhavabhuti, 13. Boat, 51, 381, 382.
Bhikshu-sutra, 32, 33. of knowledge, 62.
Bhima, 37, 38. Bodily and mental, 247, 251, 359,
Bhishma, 3, 38, 39, 42, 95, 96. 362, 364.
Parvan, 2, 6, 40. Bodily, mental, vocal, 119 seq.
roaring of, 38. Body, 55, 64, 6 9) 71, 72, 77, 83, 92,
Bhramara, 188. 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108,
Bhr/gu, 89, 294. See Bhargava. in, 112, 113, 118, 123, 128, 155,
Bhuman, 173. 173,176,177,178,179,186,187,
Bhur, 174, 393. 191, 193, 235, 236, 237, 240,242,
Bhutas, 85, 118, 306, 345, 354. 245, 246, 248, 249, 250, 252, 253,
Bhutis, 92. 257, 259, 262, 279, 288, 289,290,
Bile, 343. 302,307,326,331,332,342,344,
Billow, 388. 345, 362, 367, 376, 391, 392.
Bilva, 360. acquisition of, 44.
Bipeds, 171, 209, 339. of nine
city portals, 65,
Birds, 90, 109, 142,164,189,321,345, development 252. 108, 317.
of,
353, 37i, 389. from
distinct soul, 44, 45,
Birth, 45, 48, 58, 59, 76, 86, 103, distribution on death, 290,375.302,
of,
105, 109, 116, 170, 176, 177, 194, leaving, 112, 235,
59, 66, 78, 79,
231, 233, 237, 239, 241, 245, 247, 237, 238, 239, 250, 252, 253, 255,
257, 302, 313, 339, 341, 390. 257, 266, 331.
See Death, and Meditation at liquids in, 342. See Liquids.
time of death. movement 343. of,
after lapse of time, 339. of Krishna, 92, 93.
as devotee, 72. passages See Passages.
of, 79.
bond 115, 201.
of, 49, 62, perishable, 44, 45.
causes of, 48,
105. produced from qualities,
109.
certainty of, 45,
154. release from. See supra.
leaving,
divine, 29, 59. ruler 112.of,
freedom from, 56,
67, 59, 79, source 244. of,
105, 107, 109, 188, 241. subtle,
low
in species,
152. support190, 333.of, 53, 60, 159,
291, 318,
knowledge of, 58,
72. 359, 366.
363,
low, 85. supporter 228, 262.
of,
number of, 49, 58. two kinds of, 160.
of deity, 59. See Bond and Deities.
previous. See Life. Boehtlingk, 144.
repeated, 49, 58, 59, 67, 73, 75, Boisterous. See Mind and Senses.
79, 105, 107, 154, 185, 191, 242, Bond, 66, 107, 146, 246, 247, 248,
INDEX OF PRINCIPAL MATTERS. 40I
317, 323, 342, 35i> 355, 368, 371, 288, 293, 295, 296, 299, 300, 303,
39i. 304, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311,
Bond, of qualities, 107. See Action 315, 320, 322, 325, 326, 329, 332,
and Birth. 338, 339, 345, 346, 347, 348, 353,
Bone, 252, 343. 359, 360, 369, 374, 375, 376, 377,
Books, 57, 326. 380,384,387,389,393.
Boon. See Present. Brahmaa Gita. See Brahma Gita\
Borrowing. See Common passages. Brahmawa's wife. See Brahmawa.
Bosom, 239. Brahmawas. See Vedas.
Boughs, small, 313, 371. See Brahmanical age, 4.
Branches. Brahmanism, 4, 6, 22, 25, 26.
Bows, 37, 39, 42, 293, 294, 296, 311. Brahmic state, 52, 66, 176.
See Salutation. Branch. See Knowledge.
Brahma, 79, 80, 93, 96, 219, 220, 231, Branch and moon, 142, 146, 172.
234, 244, 257, 264, 271, 312, 314, Branches downwards, in.
315,317,323,325,328,332, 333, many, 47, 294, 313,371.
337, 339, 345, 352, 354, 355, 360, Brave, 122, 160, 294, 300, 341. See
372, 378, 385, 393. See Priest. Valour.
Brahma Gita, 198 seq., 255, 310. Breach. See Regulation, and Duty.
See Anugita. Breast, 233. See Bosom.
Brahmaarin, 69, 79, 119, 146, 152, Breath, 64, 67, 78, 201, 238, 252, 270,
i53 169, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 276, 341. See Life- winds.
216, 242, 283, 284, 312, 316, 326, Bribing, 91.
354, 358, 360, 361, 362, 364. Bridge of piety, 315, 348.
Naishîka, 377. Br/hadarawyakopanishad, 6, 81, 119,
Brahman, 52, 56, 61, 62, 64, 65, 66, 149, 152, 153, 155, 158, 159, 160,
7o, 72, 77, 79, 81, 84, 87, 90, 91, 161, 162, 166, 171, 172, 173, 174,
102, 103, 106, 107, 108, no, 113, 178, 179, 181, 185, 186, 187, 189,
120, 121, 127, 128, 146, 147, 149, 192, 193, 204, 208, 231, 239, 249,
151, 152, 153, 156, 160, 161, 162, 251, 255, 258, 259, 261, 264, 268,
163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 170, 271, 274, 279, 283, 287, 289, 290,
171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 178, 180, 295, 304, 3i3, 3i4, 324, 327, 342,
181, 182, 185, 186, 187, 189, 190, 347,353,38i,389,39o,39L
191, 192, 226, 230, 234, 235, 238, BWhadratha, 180.
241, 243, 244, 245, 246, 248, 250, Br/'haspati, 89, 214, 314, 346.
251, 252, 253, 255, 257, 258, 260, Br/hatsaman, 90, 180.
265, 277, 282, 283, 284, 286, 287, Brilliant, 78, 93, 187, 192, 287, 347.
288, 296, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, Bringing forth. See Production.
312,313,316,317, 326,327,336, Broad, 384.
339, 34i, 342, 344, 347, 354, 3^7, Brooding on evil, 168.
368, 369, 372, 375, 377, 386, 387, Brothers, 40, 290.
391, 392. See God, Being-Su- Brothers-in-law, 40.
preme, Seat, and Vedas. Brow, 67, 78, 257. See Head.
Brahmananda. See Felicity, Brute force, 116.
Brahma-ya^na, 61, 184. Brutes. See Beasts.
Brahma-loka, 20. Buddhism, 9, 20, 23, 24, 25, 26, 69,
Brahma-vidya, 166. 146, 147, 212, 213, 214, 215, 224,
Brahma-sutras, 31. 225,226, 306, 376.
Brahmawa, 21, 22, 23, 24, 38, 48, 65, Biihler, J. G., Dr., 14, 20, 21, 27,
86, 119, 120, 126, 147, 150, 158, 32, 33, 208, 213, 215, 224, 353.
159, 160, 161, 165, 171, 172, 173, Bull, 345.
174, 175, i79, 182, 185, 189, 193, Burden, beasts of, 321.
209, 210, 217, 218, 239, 245, 248, Burnell, Dr., 20, 31.
252, 254, 255, 256, 261, 263, 264, Burning taste, 118.
265, 266, 267, 270, 271, 272, 273, ofaction by knowledge, 60,62, 279-
274, 275, 276, 277, 281, 284, 285, of Arûna's skin, 40.
[8] Dd
402 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGATlYA, ANUGiTA.
Burning of soul, 45. Characteristics. See Qualities.

Business, 183. See Management. Chariot, 187, 221, 294, 380. See Car.
Butter, 83, 184, 276. Charioteer, 4, 338, 386.
Butterflies, 95, 155. Charioteer's son. See Karwa.
Buying and selling, 323. Charity, 169, 324.
Charm. See Enamoured.
Calamity, 50. See Distress. Chastity, 275.
Calmness, 119. See Tranquillity. Cheat, 91. See Crafty and Deceitful.
Calumny, 116, 129, 325. See Carp- Check, 243, 306, 328, 357. See
ing and Censoriousness. Restraint.
Capacity of doing action. See Ac- Childhood, 178. See Infancy.
tion and Activity. Children, 63, 64, 116, 124, 154, 159,
Capital, 394. 161,185,246,304. See Heroes.
Captivity, 207, 233. See Bond. Chili, 383.
Car, great, 37, 38, 39, 42, 46, 381, Choristers. See Gandharvas.
382, 386. Churning, 89.
without horse, 40. Circular, 384.
Carelessness. See Heedlessness. Circumference, 306.
Carnal. See Love. Circumspection, 364. See Caution.
Carping, 56, 81, 130, 320, 364, 368. City, 251, 318, 394. See Body.
See Calumny. Class, 65, 103.
Carriage. See Car. Classical Sanskrit. See Kavyas.
Caste, 21, 23, 24, 25, 30, 59, 126, 129, Cleanness, 68, 103, 114, 119, 126,128,
208, 217, 315, 316, 320, 322, 329, 359, 360, 363, 364. See Purity.
358. Clear, 383, 384, 392. See Mind
author of, 59. and Undistinguished.
comminglings, 41, 55. Cleverness, 128, 324.
rites of, 41. Closing. See Eyelid.
Casting aside, 343, 344, 357. Cloth, 45, 68, 217, 359, 360, 3^4, 384*
Cataclysm, 94. Cloud, 72, 179.
Cattle, 59, 127, 345, 389. Cognition, 332.
Cause, 96, 192, 247, 278, 309, 335, Cold, 118, 238, 384.
383, 387, 388, 392. See Con- Cold and heat, 44, 48, 68, 88, 101,
sequence. 167, 284, 323, 356.
material, 58, 106, 113, 191, 244. Colebrooke, H. T., 2, 7, 29, 32, 186,
See Action, Inconstant, Nature, 225.
and Source. Collections, 188.
Caution, 63, 97. See Heedlessness Colour, 92, 93, 94, 179, 247, 252,
and Circumspection. 258, 260, 285, 286, 342, 368.
Cave, 333, 363. See Objects of sense.
Celebration of God's name. See Combination. See Production.
Glorification. Combustible, 45.
Celestial pleasures, 84. Comfort, 95, 98, 118.
Censoriousness, 166, 167, 181, 182, Coming and going, 44, 80, 84, 231.
183. Commentators on Gita, 11, 35.
Censure, 150. See Blame. Commission. See Omission.
Centering. See Concentration. Common earnings. See Earnings.
Ceremonies, 112, 169, 171, 172, 293, passages, 18, 27, 139, 140, 202
321, 322, 353, 358, 361, 366, 370. seq., 225, 354.
See Rites. people, 51.
Ceylon, 223. Compact, 383, 385.
Change, 157, 327, 331, 345, 356, 372. Companion, 40, 159. See Associa-
See Development and Un- tion.
changeable. Company, 97, 293, 359.
Channel. See Current. Comparison of one's own with
Chanting verse, 15. others' pleasures and pains, 7 1
Compassion, 87, 101, 114, 231, 243, Constitution, 236,

326, 359, 362, 364. See Affec- Constraint. See Free-will.
tion and Pity. Consubstantial, 163.
Compounds, 13, 90. Consummation of devotion, 72.
Comprehension. See Understanding. Contact with Brahman. See Assimi-
Comprehensiveness, 124, 372. lation.
Compulsion. See Free-will. with knowledge, 72.
Concealed. See Nature. with objects, 44, 66 9 126, 154,
Concentration, 12, 61, 65, 66, 68, 69, 335, 334.
73> 78, 79, 99, 100, 101, 105, 1 10, Contamination. See Taint.
128, 153, 160, 169, 181, 185, 189, Contemn, 246. See Despise.
232, 242, 243, 247, 248, 249, 250, Contemplation, 47, 49, 50, 61, 100,
251,254,255,257,279,280,285, in, 156, 162, 169, 181,234, 245,
287, 299, 300, 301, 315, 326, 332, 283, 39> 389* 39o.
340, 342, 344, 360, 361, 362, 363, Contemporary Review, 5, 18.
366,368,388,389,390,394. See Contempt, 97, 120, 154.
Intent. Contentment, 54, 60, 68, 86, 87, 101,
of breath. See Breath. 166, 168, 240, 286, 288, 302, 325,
Conch, 38, 39. 326, 334, 361.
Conclusion. See Resolution. Continence, 169, 361, 389.
Condition. See State. Continuous meditation, 78, 79, 100,
Conditioning of soul, 107. 169.
Conduct, 9, 115, 159, 170, 178, 232, Control of nature. See Nature.
243, 283, 312, 320, 324, 341, 358, of senses. See Restraint, Senses.
359, 3 6 2, 364, 367, 368, 369, 378, of tongue. See Taciturnity.
392. See Ill-conducted, and Controversialists, 90, 365.
Goodness, Darkness, Passion, Contumely, 324.
and Sinful. Conversation, 87, 232.
of one transcending qualities. Convictions, 55, 305.
See Qualities. demoniac, 118.239, 304,
of steady-minded man. See wrong, 120, 320. See Notion,
52,
Steady-minded. false.
unknown. See Unknown. Cooked rice, 384.
Confidence, 326. Cooking, 53, 279, 363.
Confinement of mind, 79. See Copulative compound. See Com-
Quiescence. pounds.
Confluence, 287. Copyright, 5, 18. See Common pas-
Confusion, 43, 49, 50, 52, 59, 160, sages.
182, 254, 269, 308, 377. See Coronet, 93, 96, 98.
Distraction and Soul. Corruption of women, 41.
Conjunction, 330. Cotton, 300.
Connexions. See Kinsmen. Counsellor, 280, 283.
Conquered. See Accomplishment. Counting of sins, 89.
Conquest. See Victory. Country, 342.
Conscience, 41. Courage, 48, 70, 90, 94, 102, 103,
Consciousness, 82, 88, 102, 103, 176, 114, 124, 125, 126, 127, 167, 168,
181, 188, 238, 239, 242, 245, 290, 176, 182, 288, 301, 302, 325, 332,
334, 35o, 356, 359. 373.
Consequences, 56, 124, 126. See Course of life. See Life.
Effect. Cousin, Victor, 1
Consonants, 348. Covering, 375.

Constancy. See Perseverance. Covetous, 125. See Avarice.
Constant, 100, 120, 125, 248, 289, Cow, 65, 89, 209, 265, 353.
33i) 332, 360, 369, 375, 376. Cowell. See Maitri Upanishad.
Constituents, 246, 318, 336, 343, 344. Crafty, 125. See Cheat, Deceitful.
See Ingredient. Craving, 107, 166, 181, 342.
D d 2
404 BHAGAVADGiTA, SANATSUGAliYA, ANUgItA.
Created things, 124, 157, 190, 234, Dear to God. See Favourite, God.
258, 260, 262. Death, 44, 45, 46, 52, 56, 66, 77, 78,
Creation, 90, 106, 107, 124, 313, 317, 81, 84, 86, 89, 90, 95, 103, 105,
332, 333, 334, 340, 344, 345, 108, 109, 115, 122, 142, 150, 153,
347, 35i, 352, 388. See Power, 154,155,156,163,170, 176,178,
Source, and World. 185,189,191,232,233,237,238,
of man, 53. See Man. 249, 250, 270, 289, 290, 297, 298,
of sacrifices, 52. 322, 348, 349, 355, 368, 371, 372,
Creator, 53, 59, 83, 86, 87, 90, 97, 380,381,391.
101, 104, 121, 170, 231, 315, 334, according to quality,
prevailing,
338, 347, 354, 377, 387. 108.
Creatures, 54, 65, 69, 71, 74, 76, 86, before and 66.
after, bliss,
88, 113, 114, 115, 118, 119, 156, before and necessary,
after, faith
167, 168, 183, 193, 241, 243, 244, 121.
245, 246, 250, 257, 263, 268, 269, certainty 45, 154, 355.
of,
272, 273, 274, 275, 281, 289, 290, death 154.of,
291, 294, 307, 315, 318, 321, 324, fear 152.
of,
325, 326, 334, 335, 339, 342, 345, performing one's duty, 56.
in
347, 354, 357, 359, 3 6 2, 3^3, 3^4, and infancy, 44.
life
365, 37i, 374, 378, 385, 387, 389, meditation at time of,
391,392. non-existent, 149, 151, 78.
152.
Crooked. See Straightforward. release from, 77, 105, 152. See
movement, 339. Age, old.
Cruel, 125, 181, 182. time 80.
of, 52,
Cruelties, 166, 167,168, 243, 323, 326. world See World, mortal.
of.
Crumbling of earth. See Earth. Debasement of self, 68.
Culmination, 69. See Knowledge. Deceitful, 164, 324, 364. See Crafty.
Cunningham, 223. Decision. See Action.
Curiosity, 311. Declivity, 281.
Currents, 95, 187, 238, 318, 321, 322, Decoration, 207, 324, 387.
325, 327, 329, 343. Decrying food, 216, 360.
Curse. See Speech. Dedication. See Action.
Curtailing, 343, 344. See Abridging. Deed. See Act.
Cutting. See Indivisible. Deer-skin, 68, 159, 360.
Defeat. See Victory.
Daityas. See Demons. Defects, 56, 65, 121, 122, 127, 166,
Dakshiwa, 119, 261, 280. 168, 170, 182.
Danavas, 354. Defiance, 324.
Dancers, 183, 208, 325. Defiling. See Taint.
Dawdfin, 13, 144, 205. Degradation, 157, 191, 243.
Danger, 47, 56, 125, 157, 167, 188, Degrees. See Gradation.
I 9, 335. See Fear. Deities, 123, 153, 179, 220, 243, 259,
Darkness, 75, 78, 87, 104, 107, 108, 276, 279, 317, 334, 337, 343, 347,
109, no, 117, 118, 119, 120, 122, 353, 358, 361, 362, 367. See
124, 125, 126, 168, 180, 214, 239, Divinities, Organs.
276, 278, 284, 301, 302, 318, 319, Deity, form of, 76, 78, 80. See
320, 321, 322, 323, 328, 329, 330, Being-Supreme, Brahman, and
33 1 , 334, 345, 349, 35^, 379, 39<>. Kr/shwa.
Da.rahotri &c, 262 seq., 266. Dejection, 42, 50. See Despondency.
Dajakumaraiarita. See DaWin. Deliberation. See Thought.
Dajaratha, 221. Delight, 41, 177, 285, 324. See Joy,
Davids, T. W. R., 23, 25, 64, 66, Pleasure.
87, 306. Deliverance. See Emancipation.
Day and night, 51, 79, 80, 81, 276, Deliverer, 100.
277, 33o, 352, 354, 356. Deluge, 97, 106, 260, 388. See De-
Deaf, 321, 322. struction, Dissolution.
Delusion, 42, 49, 52, 53, 55, 56, 57, Despise, 370. See Contemn.
58, 59, 62, 65,66,72,75,76,81, Despondency, 40, 42, 43, 70, 1 25, 1 26,
82, 83, 86, 92, 104, 107, 108, 109, 250, 320, 363. See Dejection.
no, in, 112, 114, 115, 116, 122, Destructible, 113, 244, 292.
124, 126, 128, 129, 130, 152, 153, Destruction, fire of. See Fire.
154,155,157, 161,162, 166, 176, of action, 355. SeeAction,
60, 61,
181, 182, 183, 184, 189, 190, 233, destruction of.
243, 256, 284, 293, 301, 302, 303, of entities,106, 154, 180,
250, 276,
304, 3i7, 3i9, 320, 322, 326, 330, 307, 378.
335, 357, 365, 376,
33i,332,333,335,343,344,35i, of food, 279.
356, 357, 358, 368, 377, 378, 381, of life. See of supra,
entities,
382, 386. and Death.
net of, 116. of men, 190.
power of, 59, 75, 76. of nature, 106.
release from, 75, 76. of others, 120, 348.
Demerit. See Defects. of self. See Self-destruction.
Demon, 87, 89, 91, 94, 96, 151, 152, of warriors, 96. 95,
257,282,283,321,345,347,387. of worlds, 107, 314. See
55, 115,
See Asura. Creatures, Deluge, Dissolution,
Demoniac, 75, 83, 115. Life, Nature, Production and
birth, 116. destruction, and Ruin.
convictions, 118.
time of, 237.
endowments, 115. 114, Determinate, 52, 63.
Departed See Manes.
spirits, 118. Determination, 255, 260, 268, 299,
Departure from world, 77, 78, 79, 348, 349, 35o, 368, 377. See
80, 81, 166, 191. Resolution.
of soul. See Body-leaving and Devadatta, 38.
Death. Devaki, 229.
Dependence on God, 59, 66, 73, 75, Devala, 87.
76, 77, 85, 91, in, 128, 253, 258, Devamata, 226, 274, 275.
362. Devatadhyaya-brahmawa, 20.
on none, 54, 60, 367, 368. Devayana, 314, 316.
Dependent, 167, 256, 290. See In- Development, 77, 103, 104, 109, 156,
dependent. 165, 166, 170, 184, 186, 288, 318,
Depreciation of Arûna's merits, 46, 33i> 334, 37o, 372, 375, 382, 387,
47. 392.
Descent, 321. of intelligence, 293.
Description of Brahman, 164. Devotee, 58, 61, 64, 66, 67, 68, 69,
Desertion of man by God, 71. 70, 71, 72, 73, 75, 79, 81, 84,
Deserving man, 169, 183. 85, 86, 87, 99, 100, 101, 102,
Designation of Brahman, 120. 104, ii2, 129, 186, 187, 188, 189,
Desire, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 56, 57, 190, 191, 192, 193, 209, 243, 248,
58, 60, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 70, 74, 249, 266.
75, 76,78, 83, 84, 101, 102, 108,
four classes, n, 75.
110,111,115,116,117,118,121, Devotion, 9, 12, 17, 23, 48,
49, 50,
123,128,151,153,154,155,165, 52, 53, 55, 58, 60, 61, 62, 63,
166, 169, 173, 176, 181, 184, 233, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71,
241, 246, 263, 269, 275, 283, 284, 73, 78, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87,
288, 289, 300, 302, 313, 314, 322, 99, 100, 103, no, 119, 128, 129,
323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 342, 344, 130, 173, 185, 232, 243, 255, 299,
347, 349, 356, 357, 3 6 4, 3^5, 3 66 , 308, 310, 311, 324, 349, 360, 361,
369, 37o, 376, 381. 362, 368, 369, 381, 389.
capacity of obtaining, 92,171,287, mode 83. of,
327, 332, 373 See Objects of same as renunciation, 67, 85.

desire. See Renunciation.
Despair. See Despondency. unconsummated, 72.
406 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGATIYA, ANUGITA.
Devout, 85, 394. See Pure. Disgust, 151, 324.

Dexterity, 38, 127, 326, 362. Dishonest, 243.
Dhaivata, 385. Dishonour. See Honour.
Dhammapada, 35, 50, 51, 52, 69, 71, Disorder. See Body and Mind.
84, 101, 102, 108, no, 123, 241. Disparagement of gods &c, 209, 214,
Dhana%aya, 38, 48, 49, 63, 74, 93, 320.
100, 125, 130, 230, 310, 394. Disposition, 43, 117, 182.
Dharma, 219, 223, 306. evil, 320.
Dhatu. See Elements. Disrespect, 83, 97, 159, 324, 368.
Dhnsh/adyumna, 39. Dissatisfaction. See Disgust.
Dhr/sluaketu, 37. Dissociation. See Association and
Dhritarash/ra, 3, 35, 37, 39, 40, 41, Severance.
42, 43, 95, 135, 136, 141, 149, Dissolution, 80, 82, 84, 92, 112, 189,
150,151,155,156,157,158,162, 192, 3i7, 335, 344, 387. See
163, 164, 165, 166, 170, 174, 175, Destruction and Order of dis-
179. solution.
Dhyanayoga, 128. Distinction, 83, 124, 126, 157, 285,
Diadem. See Coronet. 33i, 335, 34i, 370, 374, 375, 381.
Dialects &c. of South India, 222. See Difference.
Dialogue, 5, 130, 263. And see Distinguished, 168.
Itihasa. Distinguishing power, 318. See
Dice, 91. Discernment.
Difference, apparent, 104, 105, 124, Distraction, 49, 67, 269, 377. See
193. See Soul, State, Unity. Confusion.
Difficult deeds, 296. Distress, 75, 101,368. See Calamity.
penance, 300. Distribution of food, 119, 273, 275.
Difficulty,
120, 128, 388, 389. Ditch, 155, 302.
oflookingatUniversalform,93,99. Diversified. See Variegated.
of worship, 100. Diversity, 313, 344, 374.
Diffusive, 383. Dividing soul. See Indivisible.
Digestion, 113, 236, 252, 273, 275. Divine Being. See Being.
Dignity, 74. form. See Form.
Din, 38, 39, 356. nature,
Dinner, 97. speech, 265. 367, 383.
75, 83,
Directions. See Quarters. state.See Brahmic state.

Direct knowledge, 82. Divinities, 59, 75, 76, 77, 84, 115,
Director, 281, 385. 123, 178. See Deities.
Disagreeable. See Agreeable. Division,327, 381.
Disaster, 160. of honey, 188.
Discarding of entities. See Indiffer- Doctrine, esoteric &c, 149.
ence to worldly objects. holy, 185, 255, 256.
82,
Discernment, 50, 53, 56, 67, 74, 76, Doer. See Agent and Soul.
91,110, 112, 114, 117, 118, 123, Dog, 20, 65, 142, 160.
125,126,154,155,166,183,256, Dolphin, 90.
320, 331. Domain. See Kingdom.
Disciple. See Pupil. Domination of Supreme, 75.
Discomfort, 380. Dominion. See Kingdom.
Discontent. See Contentment. Door, 270.
Discrimination. See Discernment. Doubt, 72, 260, 375, 376. See Mis-
Discus, 93, 98. givings, Objects of sense.
Discussion, 276. See Controversial- secret and open, 149.
ists. Downfall, 233, 355. See Fall.
Disdain. See Arrogance. Downwards. See Branches and Up.
Disease, 103, 118. See Ailment. Drag, 386.
Disgrace, 42, 46, 86. See Honour. Drama. See Kavyas.
Disguise of Dharma, 223. Draupadt, 37, 39.
Dravi^/as, 225, 295. Effeminate, 42.

Dream, 249, 269, 387, 392. Effort, personal, 46. See Assiduous.
Drink, 113, 159, 183, 236, 259. See Effulgence, 94, 95. See Radiance
Objects of sense and Senses. and Refulgence.
Drinking, 48, 279, 354, 389. Eggs, 321, 339, 353-
Driving. See Gar. Ego and non-ego, 377.
Droa, 37, 39, 42, 95, 96. Egoism, 52, 55, 65, 74, 101, 102, 103,
Drooping of Arg-una's limbs, 40. 118, 123, 124, 128, 153, 246, 280,
See Despondency. 287,313,317,318,326,332,333,
Drupada, 37, 39. 334,335,336,338,350,355,356,
Drying up of mouth, 40. 362, 366, 368, 370, 371, 382, 383,
of organs, 43. 385,389,390,392.
of soul, 45. Egotism, 118, 124, 128, 268. See Ar-
Dulness, 320, 391. See Ignorance. rogance, Pride, and Vanity.
Dumb, 321. Eight, 373.
Duryodhana, 37, 38, 39. Elders, 291. See Ancients.
leaders of his army, 39. Elements, 84, 102, 179, 184, 238, 245,
Dushyanta, 39. 246, 247, 334, 335, 340, 343, 346,
Dust, 57. 348,352,353,355,357,368,371,
Duty, 21, 43, 46, 54, 55, 56, 59, 67, 376,377,382,385,386,387,388,
74, 108, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 39i.
119, 120, 122, 125, 126, 127,128, gross. See Constituents and Ele-
129,157, 178, 209, 210, 231, 247, ments.
255,291, 295, 296, 302, 322, 325, subtle, 186, 285, 287, 313, 317.
326,329, 348, 359, 360, 361, 362, Elephant, 65, 89, 155, 208, 345.
364, 3 6 5, 378, 393. See Ac- Elevated place, 68.
complishment, Action, pre- Elevation of self. See Exaltation.
scribed and prohibited, Right Eleven, 318, 336.
and wrong. Emanation, 87, 88, 89, 91, 106, in,
Dvaraka, 198, 230, 394. 127.
Dwelling in Brahman, 71, 75, 80, 82, Emancipated. See Emancipation.
84, 85, 100, 106, 194. See Assi- Emancipation, 48, 50, 52, 54, 58, 59,
milation and Attainment. 67, 69, 72, 73, 89, 90, 99, in,
of a Brahmawa &c, 159. See 115, 120, 122, 125, 127, 146, 156,
House and Residence. 157, 162, 165, 170, 176, 178, 184,
of a donor, 185. 189, 190, 191, 221, 231, 232, 242,
243, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 252,
Eagle, 90. 253, 254, 255, 265, 276, 278, 280,
Earnings, 54, 60, 363, 364. See Gain. 284, 286, 287, 293, 301, 306, 307,
Ears, 65, 103, 112, 253, 259, 261, 290. 309,310,311,312,313,314,317,
See Senses. 322, 325, 326, 331, 333, 336, 344,
Earth, 73, 74, 94, 102, 112, 113, 126, 362, 363, 364, 366, 367, 368, 370,
!56, 179, 187, 192, 260, 261, 290, 37i,374,375,388,39o,39i,392,
291, 303, 304, 305, 339, 343, 352, 393,394-
364, 365, 38r. path of,
47, 48, 54, 58, 72, 73.
sovereignty of, 40. Embodied soul, 44, 45, 46, 50, 51, 57,
Ease, 65, 314. 63, 65, 77, 100, 107, 108, 109,
East, 354. 117, 122, 154, 158.
Easy, 82. Embodiment of Brahman, no.
Eating 61, 62, 64, 69, 85, 113, 118, Embryo, 389.
236, 269, 279, 321,353? 358, 3 6 2, Emperor, 72, 232.
363, 3 6 4, 365. Empty. See House.
Eclipses, 224, 330. Emulation. See Superiority.
Edge, sharp. See Arrows. Enamoured, 96, 107, 334.
Effect, 119, 383, 388. See Cause. End, evil, 72, 81, 103, 243.
Effects, household, 253. of the great cause, 192, 287.
End of things, 46, 354, 355. See Ephemeral. See Perishable.

Destruction of entities. Epic Age. See Greek poetry.
of worldly life, in. See Aims, Equability, 47, 48, 49, 60, 65, 71, 86,
Beginning, and Wicked. 100, 101, 103, no, 325, 326, 359,
Endowments, 114, 115, 362, 388. 366, 372, 373. See Alike and
Endurance, 167, 168, 182, 246, 323. Impartial.
Enemy, 43, 46, 56, 57, 58, 67, 68, 82, Equal, 97, 116. See Power, un-
99, 101, no, 115, 116, 246, 282, equalled.
283, 296, 300. Equanimity. See Equability.
destroyer of, 42. Equilibrium, 217, 331.
destruction of, 48, 302. Equivocal words, 52.
restrainer of, 231, 253, 312. Error, 65, 369. See Conviction false.
Energy, 91, 106, 118, 124, 125, 177, Esoteric. See Doctrine.
255, 387. Essence, 50, 58, 59, 74, 76, 78, 107,
Engagement. See Appointment. 109, no, 128, 130, 370, 379, 382.
Enjoyer, 105, 116, 379. Eternal, 62, 74, 76, 79, 80, 81, 87, 94,
of qualities. See Qualities. 100, no, 112, 128, 157, 186, 187,
of sacrifices, 67, 84. 188, 189, 190, 191, 192, 230, 233,
Enjoyment, 40, 43, 53, 61, 66,84, 105, 238, 241, 245, 247, 248, 255, 265,
in, 112, 115, 116, 126, 154, 165, 277,3i3,3i4,3i7,33i,334,339,
166, 167, 181, 182, 184, 188, 190, 350,376,391.
236, 240, 241, 268, 269, 283, 289, Eternity of soul, 43, 44, 45.
290, 291, 300, 304, 327, 328, 334, Evening, 361.
365,375,379,383. Evenness, 67, 69.
capacity 104. of, Everlasting, 45, 58, 79, 157, 233, 317,
higher and lower, 240. 355, 369, 37o.
nothing beyond, 115. Evil, 103, 105, 115, 121,126, 127, 247,
repeated, See Pleasure.
126. 276, 277,289,366.
Enlightenment, 107, 155, 265, 287, action, 121.
293,325,329,333,348,351,356, cause of, 156.
373. conduct. See Ill-conducted.
Enmity, 99. See Benevolence. doers, 59, 75. See Wicked.
Enormity, 181. See Sin. duty, 56, 127.
Entities, 75, 76, 80, 82, 83, 88, 90, end, 72.
106, 107, in, 113, 126, 180, 190, of attachment. See Attachment.
192, 244, 260, 292, 312, 313, 315, perception 103.
of,
316, 317, 318, 333, 335, 337, 338, release from, 81.
339, 34i, 342, 347, 35i, 352, 353, speaking, 182.60,
357, 367, 368, 369, 370, 386, 387. world, 60.
cause See Source.
of. Exaltation of self, 67.
distinctions between, 104, 318, Examination. See Test.
328, 352, 375. Example, 41, 54, 59.
lord of, 83, 88. Excellent, 86, 92.
supporter of, 80. Excess, 159.
threefold division of,
337. See Exclusion. See Objects of sense.
Creation, Destruction, Produc- Exclusive. See Concentration.
tion, Source, Unity, and Within. Excretions, 4, 65, 155, 236, 252, 261,
Entity, real, 124, 154, 157, 176, 191, 336,338. See Organs and Senses.
307, 308, 309, 312, 333, 335, 343, menstrual, 275.
37o, 372. Excretive organs, 297.
Entrance into the Supreme, 82, 94, Exercise, 69, 236, 323, 360. See
95, 99, 128, 285. See Assimila- Power.
tion and Essence. Exertion. See Assiduous.
Enumeration of qualities, 124. Exhalation, 264, 265, 372.
Environment, 355. Exhaustion, 355.
Envy, 166, 362. See Superiority. Existence, 105, 120, 176, 292, 351, 377.
Existence and non-existence, 44, 84, Fasts, 76, 283, 324.

96, 103, 191, 194, 276, 277, 331, Fat, 384.
375,377- Father, 40, 83, 97, 107, 176, 194, 233,
Exoteric. See Doctrine.
Expanse, 258. and243,son,290,98.303, 304, 394.
Expectation, 60, 68, 119,120,292,324, Father-in-law, 40.
326, 365, 366, 367, 378, 389, 392. Fatigue, 357.
Experience, 50, 57, 66, 68, 73, 81, 82, Fault-finding. See Calumny and
99, 112, 126, 179, 185, 186, 187, Carping.
188, 189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 231, Faults, 247, 293, 320.
245, 248, 249, 250, 253, 256, 263, Fauriel, M., 6.
309,316,342,344,368. Favour, 71, 128, 129, 130, 161, 310,
Expiation, 324. 372. See Soul.
External and internal. See Bodily Favourite, 17, 75, 85, 86, 87, 101,
and Mental. 102, 129, 183, 230, 394.
objects. See Objects of sense. name, 79.
world. See World. Favouritism, 59, 85, 182. See Im-
Extinction. See Fire. partiality.
Exultation and grief, 50, 65, 249, 285, Fear, 46, 50, 58, 67, 69, 86, 94, 96, 98,
300, 325. See Joy. 101, 114, 122, 126, 151, 155, 159,
Eye, 65, 67, 69, 187, 189, 219, 253, 161, 167, 246, 250, 285, 287, 292,
258, 259, 260, 290, 307, 347, 359, 294, 295, 320, 325, 329, 330? 344?
366. See Senses. 357, 362. See Danger.
divine, 72, 239. Fearful. See Difficult and Terrible.
many an, 93, 94. Feathered arrows, 298.
of knowledge. See Knowledge, Feeling, 104, 112, 288. See Organs
eye of. and Senses.
on all sides, 93, 103, 332. Fees. See Gift.
sun and moon, 94. Feet, 53, 94, 103, 119, 235, 253, 261,
Eyelid, opening and closing, 64, 161, 332, 339, 359, 3 6 7, 380.
356, 372. Felicity, 162.
Fellow-student. See Student.
Faces downwards, 287. Felons, 41.
in all directions, 90, 93, 103, 253, Females, 41, 85, 90, 241, 255, 275,
332, 345. 277,287,295,324,346,347. See
Factiousness, 182. Corruption and Male and fe-
Failure. See Success. male.
Faith, 56, 62, 63, 72, 73, 76, 77,82,84, Ferocious, 115, 116, 323.
99, i2, 115, H7> n8, 119,121, Fetter, 53, 62, 64, 123, 127. See
126, 130, 220, 255, 316, 319, 320, Action and Bond.
321,324,325,358,365,366,378. Fibres, 176, 249.
Fall, 84, 107, 113, 116, 240. See Fickleness, 167. See Mind.
Downfall. Field, 41, 72, 354.
Falsehood. See Truth. Fierce. See Ferocious.
Faltering, 46. Fig tree, 89.
Fame, 46, 90, 116, 236, 287, 358. Figure and trope. See Bhagavadgita
of Kr/sha, 96. and Sanatsu^-atiya, and Simile.
Family, destruction of, 41. Finding fault. See Carping.
extinction 41. of, Fire, 45, 57, 61, 62, 67, 73, 74, 80, 83,
rites of, 41,
42. 88, 94, 95, 97, 102, 112, 113,
Fancies, 60, 67, 70, 116, 171, 184,185, 127, 156, 192, 242, 247, 257, 259,
247, 284, 288, 355. See Pon- 260, 261, 262, 268, 270, 271, 276,
dering and Thought. 277, 279, 283, 288, 307, 308, 319,
Far and near. See Afar. 336, 338, 342, 34 6 , 353, 360, 362,
Far-seeing, 160, 391. 380,388.
Fastenings, 356. and smoke, 57, 127,
4IO BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGATIYA, ANUGITA.
Fire, discarding, 67. Forgiveness, 86, 90, 101, 103, 114,

of destruction, 95. 126, 176, 181, 182, 183, 320, 321,
of knowledge, 60, 62. 325, 326, 359, 362, 373.
See Brahman and Sense. Form divine, 92, 93, 229.
Firm, 45, 49, 101. See Fixed. divine, entry into. See Entrance.
Firmness in vows, 83. divine, sight of desired by gods, 99.
of belief,
77. divine, wonderful, 94.
of mind, 49. fierce, 95. See Terrible.
of resolution, 70, 125. See Cou- human. See Human.
rage, Faith, and Understanding. infinite, 97, 98.
First, 161, 345, 352 seq. material of Brahman, 58.
First-born. See First. of Brahman. See Brahman.
Fish, 90, 155, 374. See
universal, 97, 98, 99, 130.
Fisherman, 382. Degradation.
Fit donee &c. See Gift. Former life. See Life, previous.
Fixed firmly, 29, 89, in. Formless, 233, 247.
Fixing. See Concentration. Forms, many, 83, 92, 93, 274. See
Flame. See Fire. Real.
Flamingo, 138, 189. of all, 93.
Flesh, 252, 335, 343, 367. of nature, 74.
Flickerings, 69. Fortnight, 81,188,316,330,352,356.
Flippancy, 183. Fortune, 90, 131.
Flower and fruit, 85, 93, 285, 286, Four-handed, 98.
309, 313, 365, 371, 388. Fragrance, 74,247,257,258,286, 291,
bunches, 313. 309. See Objects of sense, Per-
Flowery talk, 47. fume, and Senses.
Flowing element, 342. Free, 60, 65, 243, 342.
Foam and water, 104. Freedom from action, 52,54,56, 127,
Foe. See Enemy. 256, 257, 362.
terror of, 42, 43, 58, 62, 76, 82, 84, from delusion, 75, 76.
9h97, 99, 126, 232, 234,311. of will.See Desire and Free-will.
Foetus, 57, 144, 176, 240, 242. Freeman, E. A., 5, 18, 203.
Following. See Imitation and Obe- Free-will, 53,56,80,82, 128,156, 157.
dience. Frenzy, 115, 116, 151, 168, 183, 323.
Folly, 126. See Frenzy. See Folly.
Fondness, 74. See Acquisition. Friend, 40, 41, 58, 67, 68, 72, 84, 97,
Food,83, 118, 119,144,156, 159,188, 98, 101,no, 167, 181, 183, 184,
216, 233, 235, 238, 252, 254, 270, 233, 246, 290, 295, 364.
279> 343, 353, 360, 363,364, 388. Friendly, 101, 342.
See Eating. Frivolous, 308.
cooking for oneself only, 53. Fruit, connexion of with action, 65.
digestion and distribution 273, of, of action, 48, 49, 58, 59, 60, 65,
277. 67, 73, 76, 81, 84,85, 100, 101,
fourfold, 113. 109, 118, 119, 120, 121,122, 123,
moderation See Eating.
in. 124,125,126,153,156,158,165,
origin of creatures, 54. 188, 191, 236, 240, 243, 264, 307,
Forbearance. See Forgiveness. 312, 325, 326, 348, 355, 365, 369,
Force. See Brute force.
Forest, 173, 259, 284, 285, 286, 288, of373,380,382.
Sankhya and Yoga, 64.
307, 342, 361, 362, 363, 372, 386. of worship, 76, 81, 84. See
Forester, 217,307,316,345,354,358, Flower, Phalajruti, and Tree.
362. Frustration of desire, 50. See Desire.
Forest-products, 361. Fuel, 62, 247, 259, 261, 268,283, 286,
Forgetfuiness of Arûna, 230. 290,291,307,308,342.
of Krishna, 230. Fugitive. See Perishable.
of one's nature, 50, 152, 154. Full of Brahman, 59.
Funeral rites. See Balls of food. Gishu, 219, 332.

Future, 76, 79, 90, 170, 194, 269, 314, Gita. See Bhagavadgita.
325, 331, 366, 392. See Entities Given up to God. See Devotion.
and World. Gladstone, W. E., 4.
Gleaning corn, 21, 217.
Gadfly, 284. Glorification, 64, 83.
Gaâsa, 394. Glorious, 172, 289, 303.
Gahnavi. See Ganges. Glory, 43, 74, 86, 91, 93, 96, 97,
Gain and loss, 47, 151, 170, 246. See 98, 112, 126, 158, 164, 179, 180,
Earnings. 185, 186, 192, 276, 287, 308, 376,
Gainas, 224, 225, 226, 364. 377.
Gamadagni, 294, 295, 300. Glow-worm, 239.
Gambling, 324. See Game. Glutinous, 384.
Gambu, 346. Gnanakanda. See Vedas.
Game, 91. See Gambling. Gnanendra Sarasvati, 33.
Gamut, 385. Gnat, 374, 379.
Ganaka, 5, 54, 215, 222, 303, 304, Goal, 59, 61, 65, 67, 69, 73, 75, 79,
306. 80, 81, 83, 85, 86, 87, 97, 99,
Ganameg-aya, 229. 100, 102, 104, 106, 107, 117, 156,
Ganardana, 41, 42, 52, 88, 99, 233, 163,167,182,231,233,255,256,
393. 258,3n,3i5,333,349,358,372,
Gawas, 346. 387, 388, 392.
Gandhara, 385. Goat, 290, 321, 353.
Gandharvas, 89, 94, 178, 347, 387. God, 284.
Gawiiva, 40. dear to192,
98,
man of knowledge, 75.
Gaf\g-am, 223. form of, 76, 78.
Ganges, 90, 222, 354. full of. See Full.
Gapa, 89, 184. manifest, not to 76. all,
Garhapatya, 262. mover of world. See Movement.
Garrulity, 168, 181. See Taciturnity. not active agent, 106. 59, 65,
Garu^/a, 90. See Soul.
Gasp, 239. primal, 96.
Gastric. See Fire. source unknown, 86.
Gau<sfopada, 160, 324, 376. superior none, See Brahman,
74.
Gautama, 208, 213, 218, 224, 236, Deity, Dependence, Hatred, and
3i4, 353> 354,359,362, 363,365. fjvara.
See Buddhism. Goddess, 347.
Gayadratha, 96. Godlike. See Endowments.
Gayatri, 90, 353. Gods, 16, 53, 61, 80, 84, 86, 87, 88,
Gem, 384. 93, 94, 95, 99, 105, 108, 109,
General, 89. 118, 119, 126, 146, 151, 153, 160,
his position in army, 38. 169, 186, 241, 250, 254, 255, 282,
Generation, 74, 89, 260, 287, 336. 283, 305, 306, 316, 320, 322, 324,
See Organs and Senses. 327, 33i, 338, 345, 347, 354, 377,
Generosity. See Gifts. 387, 389, 390.
Genital organ, 261, 336, 338. censure of, 150.
Gentle, 114, 119, 341. disparagement See Disparage-
of.
Germs, 339. ment.
Ghee, 384. first of, 87,
93, 97. 95,
Gifts, 21, 22, 23, 81, 84, 85, 86, 98 lord of, 84, 87, 93, 95, 96, 98.
99, 114, 116, 118, 119, 120, 121 nature See Endowments.
of.
122, 127, 147, 167, 169, 173, 182 sacrifice to, 61.
183, 184, 218, 242, 282, 320, 321 sovereignty of, 43.
324, 325, 326, 330, 340, 359, 364, world 84,254, 322. See World.
of,
376. See Dakshiwa. Going and returning. See Coming
Girdle, 217, 360. and going, and Return.
412 BHAGAVADGiTA, SANATSUGATiYA, ANUGITA.
Gold, 68, no, 189, 209, 333,353, 365, Guesses at truth, 8, 12.
389. Guests, 216, 243, 285, 286, 306, 358,
Goldstiicker, Prof., 3, 5, 6, 8, 14, 20, 361, 364.
33, 74, 79? 89,118. Guide, 348.
Good, 42, 43, 52, 53, 59, 68, 85, 91, Guilt, 98. See Fault.
105, 108, 109, 115, 118, 120, 124, Guru. See Preceptor.
168, 175, 178, 191, 243, 276, 277, Gurujishyasawvada, 199 seq. See
282, 287, 290, 292, 293, 300, 301, Anugita.
302,311,314,316,319,320,325, Guruskandha, 222, 346.
326, 348, 349, 358, 359, 368,377, Gyotishtoma, 156, 164.
39o-
deeds, doers of, 72,75,105,153, 243. Habit of pondering, 78, 250.
Goodness, 75, 91, 106, 107, 108, 109, Habitation, 251. See Dwelling.
117,118, 120, 122, 124, 125, 126, Hair, 40, 93, 130, 362.
184, 276, 278, 300, 306, 318, 319, matted. See Matted hair.
326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 334, thick, 39.
373, 374, 376. Half-hearted, 73.
Government of tongue. See Taci- Hall, F. E., 8, 10, 28, 141, 197, 201,
turnity. 202, 204, 219, 221, 222, 244, 280,
of world. See Universe. 285,300,317,327,332,333,334,
Governor. See Ruler of universe. 337, 338, 373, 39o, 392.
Govinda, 40, 43. Hamilton, Sir W., 378.
Gracious, 95, 98. Hawsa, 381.
Gradation, 381, 385, 387, 388. Hands, 53, 261,359, 367.
Gradual progress, 70. See Improve- four, 98.
ment. joining, 294, 311.
93, 94, 96,
Grain, 361. on all sides,
103, 203, 253, 332.
Grammarian, 174. one thousand. See Arms.
Grammatical blunders of demons, Hanging, 237.
152. Hankering. See Craving, Desire.
Grandsire, 38, 40, 83, 194, 244, 271, Hanumat. See Ape.
289, 295, 300, 303, 304, 314, 374. Happiness, 51, 63, 65, 66, 70, 76, 85,
great, 97. 87, 101, 103, 107, 108, no, 116,
Grandson, 40. 117, 126, 170, 185, 189, 233, 242,
Grass, 68, 142, 159, 360. 250, 255, 270, 285, 300, 311, 314,
Gratitude, 176, 177. 325, 34i, 342, 347, 348, 369, 378,
Great, capacity of becoming, 92. 380, 389. See Enjoyment,
See Large. Pleasure, and Unhappiness.
men, 54, 72. Hard, 341, 384.
Greatness, 333, 347, 354. Hari, 92, 130, 219, 347.
Greatness of Supreme, 92, 97, 128, Harmlessness, 83, 86, 101, 103, 114,
157, 287, 336. 119, 124, 325, 364, 373, 376.
worldly, 151, 178. Harshaârita, 28.
Greek poetry, 5, 18, 203. Harshavardhana, 27, 28.
Green, 384. Harshness, 114, 181, 256. See Mer-
Grey, 179, 384. cilessness.
Grief, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 66, 101, Haste, 175.
115, 118, 126, 128, 166, 181, 183, Hastinapur, 2, 394.
193, 250, 284, 285, 301, 320, 326, Hateful to Supreme Being, 85. See
327, 343, 354, 355, 356, 357, 366, Likes and dislikes.
393. See Sorrow. Hafâ-yoga, 297.
Griffiths, R. T. H., 90. Hatred, 68, 85, 99, 101, 116, 168,
Grote, G., 5, 6. 182, 194, 281, 288, 289, 301, 320,
Group. See Collection. 323, 365. See Antipathy.
of senses. See Senses. Haug, M., 19, 221, 276, 277.
Guâkeja, 39, 43, 88, 92, Haughty, 167, 168, 320, 324.
Head, 69, 79, 93, 103, 238, 253, 332, Holes, dwellers in, 345.
367. See Bow. Holiness. See Purity.
Heads smashed, 95. Holy, 87, 119, 331, 333, 336, 347,
Headstrong, 125,320. SeeStubborn. 354,377,378,392. See Devout.
Health, 118. dialogue, 129, 130.
Heard instruction, 49, 105, 173, 283. means of immortality, 102.
Hearer, 282, 283. men, 72.
Hearing, 130, 246, 258, 259,309, 351. world, 84.
See Heard, Instruction, Senses. Home, 113, 170, 355.
Heart, 42, 43, 50, 51, 52, 64, 69, 70, of woes, 79.
79, 85,87, 88,98,104,113,114, Homeless, 101, 103, 352, 355.
118, 119, 122, 129, 153, 177, 183, Homeric question, 4, 5.
187, 192, 194/232, 239, 242,251, Honey, 188, 190.
252, 278, 281, 282, 283, 287, 293, Honour, 116, 118, 119, 160, 243, 246,
33, 308, 332, 342, 345, 350, 361, 302, 361, 363.
394. and dishonour, 68, 101, no.
Heat, 84, 95, 237, 329, 330. See Hope, 82, 115.
Warmth. Horizontally, 287.
and cold. See Cold and heat. Horrific. See Terrible.
Heaven, 42, 46, 47, 48, 49, 72, 81, 84, Horses, 89, 381, 386.
93, 94, 120, 125, 126, 130, 156, white, of 187,
Arg-una, 38.
158, 159, 165, 179, 187, 192, 240, Hospitality, 286, 294. See Guest.
264, 281, 289, 290, 307, 322, 325, Host, 358.
327, 344, 360, 361, 362, 368, 389. Hosts. See Army.
degrees in, 240. Hot, 118, 246, 384.
sovereignty of, 43. Hotn. See Priest.
touching, 94. House-decoration, 207, 324. See
voice from, 295. Habitation.
Heaviness, 320, 327. See Lazy. Householder, 307, 316, 354, 358,
Heedlessness, 63, 97, 108, 109, 126, 360, 362, 377.
152, 153, 155, 156, 168, 169, 170, HWshikeja, 38, 39, 43, 96, 121, 242,
176, 183,253, 324, 359. 248, 270, 363, 367.
Hell, 41, 42, 116, 155, 183,190,233, Hue. See Colour.
240, 259, 321, 378. Human form, 76, 83, 87.
ways to, 116. world, 20. See World, human.
Helpless, 336, 365. Humility, 65, 116, 314, 326. Seealso
Helplessness of Ar-una, 43. Modesty.
Herbs, 83, 113, 346, 388. See Vege- Hunger, 151, 356, 359.
tables. Hunter, 142, 167.
Heretics, 171. Hurry. See Haste.
Hermitage, 221, 285, 294. Hurtful, 384.
Hero, 37, 95, 98, 295. Hurtfulness. See Harmlessness.
Hidden. See Concealed. Husband and wife, 98, 256.
Hideous, 343. Hymns, 94, 102, 280. See Saman.
Highest, 74, 99, 108, 113, 244, 309, Hypocrite, 53, 164.
326, 336, 342, 344, 347, 35i, 354,
368, 369, 372, 389, 390. See Iia, 257, 277, 318.
Supreme. Idealism, 107, 387.
High position, 68, 178, 233. Identification with Brahman, 52, 61,
High-souled, 75, 79, 83, 94, 96, 98, 62, 64, 65, 69, 70, 71, 75, 83,
151, 294, 295, 296, 314, 327, 348, 106, 114, 120, 128, 156, 162, 164,
389, 39i, 393- 167, 169, 176, 181, 188, 189, 190,
Hill, 284, 287. See Mountain. 191, 193, 234, 283, 385. See
Himalaya, 29, 89, 222, 346. Unity.
Hirayagarbha,io8,in,i86,3i5,333. of self with all, 62, 64, 246, 307,
History, 1. 310. See Unity.
Identification of self with wife &c, Inanimate creation, 77, 244.

64, 103, 248. Inattention. See Heedlessness.
Identity. See Soul. Incarnation, 59,221. See Manifesta-
Idiots, 321. tion.
Ignominy, 233. See Disgrace. Incautious, 97. See Heedlessness.
Ignorance, 63, 65, 76, 87, 100, 103, Incendiary, 41.
109, 114, 116, 120, 151, 155, 157, Inclination, 282, 283, 318. See Dis-
160, 168, 171, 178, 186, 267, 319, position.
322, 357, 39o- Incombustible, 44, 45.
about Supreme, 75, 76, 309. Incomprehensible, 391. See Un-
Ignorant people, 55, 63, 76, 109, 151, knowable.
156, 158. Inconstancy, 287, 289, 335.
Ikshvaku, 58. Incontinent, 236.
Ill-conducted, 71, 85, 105, 321. Incorrect. See Conviction and
Ill-success. See Success. Knowledge.
Illumination of world, 178, 186. Indecision. See Misgivings.
Illustrious. See Great men. Indefeasible, no.
Image, 208, 242. See Embodiment Indefinable, 44, 94, 97.
and Representative. I ndependence, 326. See Dependent
Imitation, 55. on none.
Immaculate. See Soul. Indescribable, 100.
Immaturity, 320. Indestructible, 44, 45, 46, 54, 66, 77,
Immediate knowledge. See Direct. 78, 80, 94, 96, 99, 100, 113, 173,
Immortal, 43, 44, 45, 84, 86, 102, 103, 179, 244, 248, 257, 292, 391.
109, no, 143, 152, 153, 166, 168, India, South. See Dialect and
170, 176, 179, 180, 182, 185, 187, Tank.
189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 244, 255, Indication of Brahman, 102.
282,313,343,357,367,372,373, Indicative use of words, 272.
39i- Indifference, means of,
Immovable, 100, 159, 266, 307, 321, to ordinary books, 49.341.
33o, 33i, 353, 355, 383, 387. to worldly objects, 9, 10, 69, 71,
See Movable. 89, 101, 103, in, 128, 168, 169,
Immutable. See Unchangeable. 233, 247, 326, 341, 365, 366, 392.
Impartiality, 85,101,128. See Alike Indifferent, 68, 82, 100, no, 113.
and Equability. Indigent, 256, 304, 376.
Impassable, 284, 285, 389. Indignities, 233. See Ignominy.
Impatience, 166. Indische Studien, 33.
Impediment. See Obstacle. Individual soul. See Soul.
Imperceptible, 234, 241. See Per- Indivisible, 45.
ceptible. Indolence, 108, 320. See Lazy.
Imperfect. See Knowledge. Indra, 88, 89, 96, 175, 219, 250, 261,
Imperfection, 168. 282, 316, 338, 346, 388.
Imperishable, 58, 81, 128, 245, 248, Indraprastha, 229, 394.
357, 367, 385. Indu, 346.
Impermanence. See Perishable. Indulgence of senses, 54. See Senses.
Impiety, 41, 125, 158, 246, 319, 348. Industry, 91. See Assiduous.
See Piety. Inexhaustible, 44, 45, 58, 59, 75, 76,
Implement. See Instrument. 83, 84, 90,92, 94,106, 107,111,
Important. See Excellent. 113, 124, 187, 250, 332, 372.
Impression, 247, 264, 266, 318, 358, Inexpugnable, 312.
383, 392. Infamy. See Disgrace.
Improvement, 321. Infancy compared to death, 44.
Impure, 118, 125, 154. Inference, 160, 291, 367, 373, 374.
Inaccessible, 295. Inferior. See Beasts, Entities, and
Inaction, 48, 53,60,67, 115, 122, 125, Path.
320. See Freedom from action. Infidel, 378.
Infinite, 93, 96, 97, 98, 344, 348. Joviality, 326.

Information. See Knowledge. Joy, 86, 96, 98, 101, 116, 131, 183,
Ingenious, 173. 185, 284, 300, 301, 325, 326, 357,
Ingredient, 385. 363,378.
Inheritance, 21, 217. Joy and sorrow, 125, 183.
Initiation, 285, 286, 347, 361. Judgment, 51,76. See Discernment.
Injury, 101, 114, 119, 124, 159, 167, Juice, 113, 236, 238, 252, 363.
168, 176, 182, 318, 323. See Jungle. See Forest.
Harmlessness. Just, 123.
Insatiable. See Desire. Justice, 131.
Inscriptions, 13, 28, 223.
Insects, 225, 321, 339. Kadambari, 27, 28.
Insignificant, 124, 335. Kaffirs, 97.
Inspiration, 76, 281. akrapravartana. See Wheel, turn-
Instruction, 21, 22, 23, 87, 102, 105^ ing of.
172, 176, 177, 218, 248, 251, 254, ATakravartin, 232.
264, 281, 282, 283, 290, 312, 324, Kalidasa, 13, 14, 28, 29, 30, 80, 220,
359, 3^5, 393,394. 221, 224.
Instructor. See Preceptor. Kalpa, 82, 387.
Instrument,6i,i23,278,348,357,365. Mlukyas, 28.
Intellect, 86, 90, 257, 309, 320. Kamadhenu. See Cow.
Intelligence, 86, 125, 127, 234, 241, Kandala, 23, 322, 343.
242, 263, 269, 276, 284, 286, 296, Sandra, 219, 220.
304,305,308,311,332,371,381. jfif&ndr&ya/za, 164.
Intelligent. See Unintelligent. .Kafiy&ipura, 222.
Intent, 66, 73, no, 308, 392. See Kapila, 89, 105, 124, 211.
Concentration. KarmakaWa. See Vedas.
Interest, 54, 193. Karmamarga, 171.
Interminglings. See Caste. Karmayoga, 105.
Interpolation in Mahabharata, 4, 34, Kara,^7, 38, 95, 9 6 -
340. See Anugita\ Kartavirya, 221, 293.
Interspace between earth and sky, 94. Zarvaka, 24, 214, 376, 377.
Intoxicating drinks, 183, 279. Kaji, 37, 39-
Introspection, 105. Kajika, 32.
Invincible, 180, 389. See Uncon- Kajyapa, 205, 231, 232, 234, 235, 245,
querable. 314, 389.
Invisible, 192. See Movement, con- Kathasaritsagara, 32, 206.
cealed, and Regulation. Kathava/e, A.V., Prof., 137, 19 9-
Involuntary action. See Free-will. Kaôpanishad, 45, 46, 57, 65, 66, 67,
Irascible, 167. See Wrath. 76, 78, 79, 80 , Io8 , I", "2, 124,
Iron, 208, 242. 129, 152, 153, 154, 156, 157, 158,
Irregular worship, 84. 160, 162, 163, 169, 170, 172, 173,
f jopanishad, 54, 62, 71, 104, 106, 153, 175, 176, 179, 180, 186, 187, 188,
160, 180, 187, 192, 193, 194, 248, 192, 193,211,212,233,234,246,
305,391. 247, 249, 253, 264, 286, 313, 317,
pvara, 219, 315, 354. 333, 337, 338, 339, 34*, 34^, 37,
Ijvaragita, 2. 385,386,388,391,392.
Itihasa, ancient, 198, 207, 210, 226, .STaturhotra, 277.
238, 256, 261, 268, 270, 274, 277, Katyayana, 32.
282,289,293,296,303,310. Kaumudi. See Siddhanta-kaumudi.
Kaunteya. See Kunti.
Jaws, 94, 95. Kauravas, 2, 3, 6, 26, 38, 39, 40, 62,88,
Jewels, 347, 353. 98, 135, 136, 311,312, 393, 394.
Joint,237, 258, 356. Kaushitaki-upanishad, 112, 180, 208,
earnings. See Earnings. 249, 259, 264, 268, 271, 277, 314,
Journey, 380. 362,389.
41 6 BHAGAVADGfTA, SANATSUGATIYA, ANUGiTA.
Kautsa, 214. 332, 335, 337, 339,341, 344, 348,

Kavyas and Nafakas, 13, 15, 142, 144. 349, 35o, 35i, 352, 355, 367, 368,
Keeping people to duty. See Duty. 369, 37o, 37i, 372, 373, 374,375,
JTekitana, 37. 377,378,379,380,381,388,389,
Kenopanishad, 163, 257. 390, 39i, 392.
Kerala, 222. Knowledge, boat of. See Boat.
Kejava, 35, 40, 49, 52, 87, 96, 130, branches of, 84, 315.
229, 230. ceasing of, 239. See Perception.
Keshub Ghunder Sen, 26. 126.
clear,
Kejin, 121. complete, 73.
Kettledrum, 38. constancy in. See Perseverance.
jOandas, 16, in, 146, 164, 171, 172. culmination of, 127.
See Vedas. deprivation of by desire, 75.
jOandogya-upanishad, 17, 20, 58, 64, destruction of, 113.
68, 79, 81, 84, 88, 90, 91, 114, devotion better than, 73.
120, 141, 143, 145, 150, 152, 156, direct, 82.
158, 161, 164, 165, 166, 167,170, exhaustive, 73.
171. 172. 173. 174. 175. 176. 178, eye of, 106, 112, 239.
179, 187, 189, 190, 191, 193,194, fire of.See Fire.
224, 233, 234, 236, 238, 239, 241, goal attainable by, 104.
243, 246, 249, 252, 258, 259, 262, highest, 73, 106, 151, 240, 261.
263, 264, 265, 266, 268, 269,270, immediate. See Direct.
271, 277, 285, 287, 290, 291,295, imperfect, 55, 125, 309.
312, 314, 320, 321, 322, 331, 337, incorrect, 125.
339, 340, 345, 347, 353, 389, 39*, inexpugnable. See Inexpugnable.
393. insignificant.See Insignificant.
Killing, 96, 116. See Murder. lamp of, 87.
Kind. See Compassion. light of, 66.
King, 23, 30, 72, 82, 89, 90, 95, 162, little, 115.
167. 169. 170. 171. 175. 178. 179, loss of, 75.
181, 185, 233, 294, 296, 299, 303, man n, of, 51, 54, 56, 57, 62,
346, 347, 348. See Ruler. 72, 73, 75, 91, 119, 146, 156,
Kingdom, 43, 96, 302, 303, 304, 305. 158, 373, 392.
See Sovereignty. modification of, 312.
Kinnaras, 347, 354. mysterious, 81.
Kinsmen, 40, 41, 42, 68, 159, 233, object of, 103, 104,
83, 94, 97,
246, 281, 294. 123, 172, 262, 310, 312, 382.
mtamai, 179. of creation, 341.
^Titraratha, 89. of everything, 114. See Universal.
Knowable. See Knowledge, object of. of geography, 222 seq.
Knower. See Knowledge, subject of. of God, 99.
Knowledge, 12, 17, 44,46, 47, 52, 55, of previous lives, 58.
56,57, 58,59*60,61,62,63,65, of 126, 334.

self, 46, 51, 65, 87,
67, 68, 72, 73, 75, 81, 82, 83, of supreme, 87.
84, 86, 87, 89, 91, 99, 100, 101, of truth, 103, 335, 348, 381.
102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, practical,
113, 114, 115, 123, 124, 126, 127, prompting349. 123. to,
128, 129, 147, 154, 156, 158, 159, pursuit See Perseverance.
of.
162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 173, 174, removal 113. of,
175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180, 181, seeker of, 75.
187, 188, 189, 190, 194, 231, source 248, of, 308.
239, 242, 245, 247, 253, 254, 256, subject 123, 262.
of, 97,
261, 262, 263, 264, 266, 267, 276, sword of, 63,
371.
279, 280, 286, 287, 288, 292, 307, three branches. See Branches,
308, 309, 310, 312, 313, 3H, 3i5, supra.
316,317,319,320,322,326,331, through See Faith.
faith, 63.
Knowledge, want of, 49, 73, 84, 162. Lamp of knowledge. See Knowledge.
See Ignorance. Lances, 294.
within oneself, 62, 66, 380. Land, 339, 382.
See Progress, Sacrifice, and Language, 90. See Bhagavadgita,
Understanding. Dialects, and Style.
ifola, 222. Lapse of time, 58.
Kolhafkar, V. M., 137. Large, 285, 327, 357.
Kosegarten, 139. Lassen, 2, 31, 34, 35, 91.
Kosh/avat, 222, 346. Lassitude, 320.
Kratu, 83. Last moments. See Death.
Kr/pa, 38. Laudation, 324. See Praise.
Krishna, 3, 4, 9, 11, 12, 34, 40, 41, Law, 4, 207, 268, 269. See Regu-
48,49,52,56, 58,59,63,67,71, lations.
72, 73, 78, 88, 91, 95, 96, 97, 98, sacred, 82.
99, 102, 106, no, in, 117, 121, Lazy, 125, 126, 151, 320, 326. See
130, 131, 197, 198, 205,229, 230, Indolence and Stolidity.
231,254,284,310,393,394. See Leaf, 85, 313, 361, 365, 371, 374.
Being-Supreme and Brahman. of Ajvattha, in, 189.
Dvaipayana. See Vyasa. Lean, 288, 384.
imitation of, 55. Learned, 44, 49, 50, 55, 56, 60, 63,
nought to do, See Embodi-
54. 64,65,66,87, 102, 121, 122, 152,
ment. 154, 157, 160, 161, 162, 164, 172,
Kr/ta, 353. 174, 176, 185, 257, 260, 270,278,
Kritavtrya. See Kartavirya. 279, 284, 312, 315, 332, 337,339,
Kshatriyas, 22, 23, 24, 43, 46, 126, 341, 360, 367, 370, 371, 374, 378,
127, 128, 152, 155, 162, 165, 174, 379,381,386. See Well-read.
179, 185, 205, 209, 217, 221, 255, Learner. See Pupil.
295, 300, 329, 345. Learning, 65, 114, 124, 128, 178, 182,
kinsmen of, 295, 296. 232, 239, 269, 308, 326, 341, 348,
Kshetra, 102, 104, 105, 106, 310, 353, 359, 388, 389. See In-
35o, 372. struction and Study.
Kshetra^na, 102, 105, 106, 109, 253, Leavings, 53, 62, 118, 358, 360.
284, 287, 288, 293, 308, 310,350, Left-hand, shooting, 96.
35i, 352, 374, 377, 378, 379? 386, Leg, 189. See Feet.
387, 39o, 393. Leibnitz, 268.
Kubera, 88, 347. Letter, single. See Om.
Kulluka Bha//a, 262. Letters, 90, 264.
Kumarasambhava, 29, 69, 80, 220, Lewes, G. H., 57.
257. Libation to manes, 41.
Kumarila, 31. Liberality. See Gifts.
Kunte, M. M., 30. Licking, 95, 113.
Kunti, 38, 40, 44, 47, 5, 53, 57, 66, Life, 40, 54, 74, 89, 118, 160, 162, 177,
7i, 74, 78, 79, 82, 84, 85, 95, 181, 192, 246, 268, 269, 276, 279,
102, 106, 107, 116, 117, 127, 289, 290, 291, 295, 302, 317, 318,
128, 254, 393. 321, 325, 355, 357. See Birth
Kuntibho>g-a, 37. and Death.
Kuru, 47, 72, 108. See Kauravas. conditions of, 233.
Kurukshetra, 3, 37, 198. course of, 89, in,
190, 191, 201,
Kuja grass, 68, 159. 233, 235, 243, 245, 253, 258, 259,
284, 285, 287, 306, 312, 313, 338,
Labour, 69, 100, 184, 323, 324, 356. 34i,355,357,359,36i,368,37o,
Ladle, 261. 386, 390.
Lalita Vistara, 146, 183, 208, 212, exhaustion 236. of,
226, 261, 275, 284, 289, 337. form unknown, 1 1 1.
Lamentation. See Grief. forms 321.

of, 154,
Lamp, 69, 242, 253. higher, 285, 322.
[8] e e
41 8 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGATIYA, ANUGITA.
Life, limit of,

244, 311. Lord of sacrifices, 84.
long,
236. of speech. See Speech.
many a, 58, 73, 75. of universe. See Universe, lord of.
offering to supreme, 87. of worlds. See Worlds, master
previous, 117, 188, 243,
56, 58, 72, of.
supreme, 352.
244. 284.
subtle, Loss, 124,
106,
166.
transient and miserable, 86. 79, of the Brahman, 71.
vain, 54. Lotus-eye, 294.
92,
Life-winds, 6i, 62, 67, 78, 79, 113, heart, 342, 344, 392.
194,
123, 125, 140, 157, 189, 190, 237, leaf, 64, 92,
289, 374, 379.
238, 242, 246, 257, 258, 259, 263, seat, 93.
264, 265, 266, 270, 271, 272, 273, Love, 74, 87, 89, 394.
274, 275, 276, 277, 280, 289, 290, Low. See High.
292,318,331,336,353,372,373. Lower species, 241, 330, 339. See
concentration See Breath.
of. Beasts and Creatures.
production and preservation of, Lunar light, 81.
238. mansions, 88, 158, 346, 352, 387.
Light, 69, 74, 1 10, 163, 180, 186, 260, world, 240.20,
305, 316, 319, 330, 332, 334, 344, Lust, 115, 116, 117, 125, 166, 167,
3 6 9, 379? 380, 387. See Object 183, 233, 246, 325, 331, 359.
of sense.
of knowledge, 66, 108. Mace, 93, 98.
within oneself, 66. See Enlight- Machine, 129.
enment. Madhava, 38, 40, 230, 231, 252.
Lightness, 319, 327, 332. Madhavaârya, 32, 90, 135, 139, 214.
Lightning, 179, 337, 340. Madhu, 40, 42, 71, 77, 231, 252.
Likes and dislikes, 56, 71, 118, 288, Madhusudana, 5, 18, 35, 72, 89, 91,
289. See Affection and Aver- 92, 96, 107, 108, 113, 123.
sion. Madhvaârya, 30, 31.
Limbs, 50, 177, 242, 342, 359, 366. Madhyama, 385.
Limitation. See Perfection and Madhyamika Bauddhas, 376.
Time. Maghavat, 219, 347.
Linen, 360. Mahabharata, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 28, 34, 35,
Lion, 38, 90, 295, 345. 135, 136, 137, 138, 140, 155, 160,
manner of, 353. 170, 181, 187, 197, 201, 202, 203,
Liquid, 354. See Flowing element. 204, 205, 206, 209, 221, 225, 227,
Liquors, 389. 229, 234, 253, 256, 271, 281, 284,
Lisping, 322. 292, 295, 301, 304, 305, 308, 3 10,
Literature, 1, 13, 15. 3i5, 318, 319, 325, 328, 329,342,
Littleness, 46, 191. 344, 35i, 353, 354, 358, 360, 370,
Livelihood. See Body, support of. 374,383,384,385,386,391. See
Lokayatas. See arvakas. Bhishma Par van.
Long, 384. Mahabhashya. See Patang-ali.
Longing. See Desire. Mahat, 157. See Understanding.
Looker on, 55. See Activity, Soul, Mahavrata, 180.
passive spectator. Mahendra, 222, 223, 346.
Looking-glass. See Mirror. Mahejvari, 219, 347.
Lord, 65, 83, 87, 88, 92, 97, 105, 109, Mahidhara, 248.
113, 116, 128, 165, 173, 188, 190, Maintenance. See Body, support of.
231, 263, 267, 293, 294, 303, 333, Maitri-upanishad, 50, 51, 52, 53, 61,
345, 347, 388, 393, 394. 68, 79, 100, 102, 105, 112, 152,
in the bodies of all, 116, 118. 155, 158, 160, 162, 170, 171, 173,
of all, 83. 175, 185, 186, 187, 189, 192, 194,
of beings, 58, 273. 233, 234, 238, 241, 243, 247, 251,
of gods. See Gods. 252, 255, 259, 263, 268, 269, 270,
271, 274, 277, 305, 320, 323, 361, Maya, 197, 229.
37o, 37i, 378, 379, 386, 390, 391, Maya. See Nature.
392. McCrindle, 223.
Makara, 90. Mean, 116.
Maker, 379. Means, 376, 377, 380, 391. See
Male, 346. Wealth.
and female, 115, 244. Meat, 236.
Malicious, 125. See Malignity. Medicine, 83, 388.
Malignity. See Harmlessness and Meditation, 64, 79, 84, 88, 100, 103,
Injury. 105, 128, 192, 248, 249, 251, 252,
Mallinath, 29, 293. 299, 300, 332, 341, 349, 353, 368,
Malyavat, 222, 346. 376, 377, 382, 388.
Man, creation of, 74. See Crea- at time of death, 78, 390.
tion. continuous, 78, 79, 100, 309.
descendant of Manus, 86. exclusive, 78, 79, 84, 99.
highest, 129. mystic, 136, 150.
Management, 324. See Business. on Supreme, 61, 78, 88, 99, 100,
MaWukya-upanishad, 79, 247, 251, 103, 128.
259, 324? 376. See Concentration of mind and
Manes, 83, 85, 89, 93, 153, 169, 221, Pondering.
296, 306, 324, 325, 345, 366, 389. Melancholy, 125.
Manifestation, 65, 76, 77, 83, 87, 88, Memory, 90, 98, 113, 164, 320, 332,
104, 107, 108, 292, 312, 317, 318, 335-
374, 379, 380. See Form, In- confusion of, 50, 51.
carnation, and Nature. destruction of, 113.
Manifold, 375, 377. See Forms, Mendicancy, 307, 361.
many. Mental operation. See Mind.
Mawipushpaka, 39. pain. See Pain.
Mankind, 345, 347, 348, 353, 354, penance. See Penance.
356, 378, 386, 387, 389. Mercilessness, 114, 166, 181. See
Manliness, 74. Harshness.
Man-lion, 89. Merging in Brahman. See Absorb-
Mansions, 108. ent and Assimilation.
Mantras, 119, 209, 264. See Verse, Merit, 12, 49, 65, 72, 76, 109, 151,
sacred. 158, 164, 165, 166, 169, 178, 184,
Manu, 20, 21, 22, 24, 27, 29, 30, 37, 185, 232, 241, 246, 341, 376, 377.
48, 58, 80, 86, 147, 153, 159, 179, exhaustion of, 84. See Action.
203, 208, 210, 217, 218, 225, 233, Merriment, 97.
262, 279, 284, 339, 353, 354, 358, Meru, 88, 222, 354.
359, 3 6 , 3 61 , 3 6 2, 3 6 3, 3 6 4, 3 6 5, Meshasringa, 346.
368. Metals, 209.
Margajirsha, 27, 90, 91. Metre, 15, 90, 142, 226, 353.
MarUi, 88,387. Midday bath, 122.
Marriage, 121. Middle. See Beginning and Up.
Marrow, 252. Migration, 153, 154, 185, 190, 232,
Maruts, 88, 92, 94, 346. 234, 244.
Master of world, 97. See World. Mild. See Gentle.
Match. See Equal. Military. See Kshatriyas.
Material cause. See Cause and Milk, 265.
Nature. Mimawsa, 31, 32, 376, 377.
Materialists, 24, 27. Mind, 9, 43, 47, 49, 50, 51, 53, 55,
Matsya-purawa, 113. 57, 60, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68,
Matted hair, 360, 375. 69,7o,7i,73,75,78, 79,83,86,
Matter, 379. 87,88, 99, 100, 101, 102, 105, 107,
Maturity, 177. 112, 119, 122, 123, 125, 126, 128,
Maurice, F. D., 1. 129, 162, 163, 169, 170, 172, 173,
e e 2
175,177,181,184,185,187,188, 257,261,277,327,330,338,346,
189, 190, 193, 194, 219, 238,
234, 35, 387. See Lunar light.
239, 241, 242, 243, 246, 248,
250, Moon, eye of divine form, 94.
251, 252, 253, 257, 258, 260,
259, Morals, 4.
261, 262, 263, 264, 267, 268,
269, Morning, 361.
275, 280, 286, 288, 292,
296, 300, Morsel, 364.
301, 308, 310, 317, 318, 320, 322, Mortal, form, 255.
327,332,334,336,337,338,341? Mortals, 190, 255, 297.
344, 348, 349, 35o, 352, 355, 357, Mosquitoes, 284.
361, 362, 366, 368, 369, 377, 380, Mother, 83, 176, 193, 233, 243, 290.
385, 386, 388, 390, 392, 393, 394. Motion. See Moving.
Mind, Arûna's, whirls round, 40. Motive. See Action.
birth from, 87. Mould, 242.
breaking out of restraint, 70. Mountain, 88, 89, 180, 222, 284, 287,
ceasing to work. See Quiescence. 295, 346, 354, 363, 381, 387.
fickle, 9,
71. See Hill.
68.
friendly, Moustache, 362.
movable and immovable, 264. Mouth, 65, 94, 95, 305.
restraint by, 70. drying up of Arûna's, 40.
steady. See 53,
Steady-minded. like fire, 94, 95.
Mine, 52, 56, 101, 128, 279, 292, 303, many a, 93, 94.
304, 305, 3i3, 323, 326, 332, 355, Movable, 82, 91, 92, 97, 104, 105,
3 66 > 37o, 37i, 381, 389, 39o, 39i. 243,266,307,311,315,335,366,
Minute, 78, 180, 194, 327, 332. 387, 389. See Immovable.
Mirage, 253. Movement, 49, 87, 123, 274, 291,
Mirror, 57. 392.
Misapprehension, 184. See Convic- concealed, 232, 235.
tion and Knowledge. of mind, 263. See Quiescence.
Mischief. See Evil. of world, 82, 89, 334, 340, 355,
Miserly, 167, 182. 356, 358.
Misery. See Pain and Unhappi- Moving, 64, 90, no, 192, 194, 261,
ness. 338.
Misfortune, 356. among objects, 51.
Misgivings, 63, 66, 72, 83, 87, 122, everywhere, 232, 312, 370.
129, 130, 152, 231, 263, 282, 311, Mr/'tyu, 220.
312, 320, 324, 374. Mucus, 343.
Mismanagement, 183. See Manage- Mud, 343, 350.
ment. Muir, J., Dr., 14, 16, 20, 23, 90, 91,
Missile, 39. 180, 295, 304, 305, 347.
Mistake, 359. See Error. Muladhara, 251.
Mithila, 304, 305. Mtiller, Max, Prof., 1, 8, 12, 16, 17,
Mitra, 219, 220, 261, 338, 345. 23, 25, 69, 79, 87, 88, 114, 123,
Dr. R. See Lalita Vistara. 171, 339.
Mixed, 118, 122, 286, 375. Muwâkopanishad, 17, 62, 74, 84,
Mie&6as, 353. 104,112,123, 153,156,158,165,
Mode of life. See Conduct, Life. 166, 167, 169, 170, 173, 175, 176,
Moderation. See Eating. 179, 180, 184, 185, 186, 189, 192,
Modesty, 114, 162, 167, 182, 281, 194, 230, 241, 244, 259, 312, 313,
306, 326. See Humility. 315,316,333,339,348,371,391,
Moistening, 45. 392.
Momentary existence, 376. Mundane. See World.
Monism. See Unity. Muf\-a, 176, 249, 360.
Months, 81, 90, 188, 255, 330, 352, Murder, 45, 89, 123, 290, 291, 293,
356. 295, 296, 323, 324, 389.
Moon, 74, 81, 83, 88, 97, 112, 113, Muscles, 252.
142, 172, 179, 189, 192, 219, 224, Music, 88, 208, 325.
INDEX OF PRINCIPAL MATTERS. 42 1
Mustard, 384. 263, 264, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283,

Mystery, 58, 81, 92, 114, 129, 130, 284, 286, 287, 289, 292, 296, 297,
150, 166, 230, 254, 278, 377, 390, 299, 300, 301, 302, 303, 305, 312,
394. 313,314,315,316,318,319,320,
321,326,330,332,334,335,336,
Nagas, 89, 347. 339, 34i, 342, 343, 344, 345, 347,
Nago^-i Bhatta, 33. 348,35o,35i,352,353,354,355,
Nails, 356. 356, 357, 367, 37i, 372, 373, 374,
Nakshatras. See Lunar mansions. 376, 377, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383,
Nakula, 38. 384, 385, 386, 389, 390, 391, 392,
Name, 164, 352. See Favourite 393, 394.
and Real. Nilgiri. See Nila.
Nanda, 32. Nine portals. See Body.
Narada, 17, 87, 89, 150, 226, 274, Nirukta, 144, 176, 225, 265.
2 75- Nirvana, 27, 212, 215.
A
Narayawa, 148, 219, 280, 281. Nishada, 385.
Narrow, 308, 384. Nitijataka. See Bhartr/'hari.
Na/akas. See Kavyas. Noble birth, 116.
Nature, 53, 55, 56, 58, 65, 74, 76, mind, 75, 114, 264, 295, 300, 316,
82, 102, 104, 105, 106, 107, 112, 323, 325, 389, 393.
113, 126, 127, 128, 157, 186, 201, Noise, 251. See Din.
235, 244, 245, 253, 260, 288, 289, Noiseless. See Noisy.
313, 318,327,331,333,335,350, Noisy speech, 265.
35i, 355, 357, 367, 370, 371, 372, Non-destruction. See Destruction.
374, 376, 377, 378, 379, 380, 382, Non-entity, 102.
387, 390. Non-existence. See Existence.
active principle, 65, 106. Non-nutritive, 252.
control of, 58, 82. North, 347. See South path.
destruction of, 106. Nose, 67, 69, 257, 258, 259, 267, 343,
divine and demoniac, 83. 349. See Senses.
following, 157. Nostrils, 65.
names 331. of, Notion, false, 52, 65, 115, 253. See
two forms, 74. Conviction.
Nave, 306. Not-self, 377. See Soul.
Navel, 258, 266, 271. November, 91.
Near. See Afar. Nnsiwha Tapini, 20, 79, 85, 93, 105,
Neck, 69, 252. 112,142,152,157,163,170, 171,
Nectar, 62, 88, 89, 126, 391. 186.
Negative argument, 213. Numerous. See Forms, many.
Nest, 142, 164. Nushirvan, 29.
Net, 115, 116, 289, 387. Nutrition, 118.
Nether world, 321. See Hell. Nyagrodha, 346.
Night, 362, 363. See Day and Night.
of sage and common men, 5 1 Oars, 381.
Nihilism, 320. Obedience, 324, 358. See Scripture.
Nila, 222, 346. Obeisance. See Salutation.
Nilakaâ, 35, 39, 44, 45, 108, no, Object, 123, 378, 379, 382. See Sub-
118, 120, 121, 125, 127, 128, 137, ject.
141, 144, 148, 149, 151, 153, 154, of desire, 51, 69, 84, 115, 116,
155,156, 157,158,161,162,163, 124, 154, 157, 289. See Desire
164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 170, 171, and Enjoyment.
180, 181, 182, 184, 189, of gift, 120,
174, 178,
192, 193, 194, 200, 203, 213, 227, of knowledge,324. 83, 94. See Know-
231, 234, 235, 236, 242, 243, 245, object
ledge, of.
246, 247, 248, 249, 251, 252, 253, of sense, 48, 50, 51, 53, 54, 56,
254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 262, 57, 61, 64, 66, 67, 69, 71, 102,
42 2 BHAGAVADGiTA, SANATSUGATIYA, ANUGITA.
103, III, 112, 121, 126, 127, 152, One, everything. See Mind, Unity.
i54> 155, 166, 167, 168, 170, 173, Open. See Secret.
174, 175, 184, 190, 238, 247, 259, Opening eyelid. See Eyelid.
260, 261, 267, 268, 269, 270, 273, Operation of mind. See Mind.
275, 278, 279, 284, 286, 288, 291, Opinion of Krishna, 56.
297, 300, 305, 3<> 6 3i3 317, 318,
-
?
Opponent. See Enemy.
327, 334? 335, 336, 337, 34, 34i, Opposites. See Pairs.
342, 344, 348, 349, 35o, 35i, 352, Opposition, 30.
365,367,368,371,382,383,384, Oppression, royal, 207, 208.
385, 386, 388, 390, 392. See Optimists, 376.
Destruction of entities and Order, 129, 307, 354, 358, 382. See
Enjoyment, Perceptible and Ajramas.
Perishable. of dissolution of entities, 335, 387.
Oblation, 61, 77, 83, 121, 188, 261. Ordinances, 84, 117, 118, 119, 120.
See Offering. See Rule and Scripture.
Obligation. See Duty. Organs, 53, 64, 93, 118, 123, 189, 219,
Oblivion. See Forgetfulness. 243, 247, 257, 258, 261, 271, 287,
Obscurity. See Darkness. 292,318,336,337,357,359,364,
Obsequies. See Balls of food. 391. See Bodily and mental,
Obsequious, 159. Drying up, and Senses.
Observances, 67, 112, 115, 143, 145, Origin. See Source and Species.
147, 156, 164, 167, 182, 283, 324, Orissa, 222.
355, 364. Ornaments, 93, 326.
Obstacles, 47, 162, 168, 183, 279, 363. Ostentation, 103,114, 115, 116,118,
Obstinate, 71. See Headstrong. 119, 159, 160, 161, 164, 165, 282,
Obstructors, 284. 324,363.
Occupancy, 21. Overcome. See Invincible.
Occupations. See Duties. Oviparous. See Eggs.
Ocean, 51, 89, 95, 100, 179, 192, 245,
293, 294, 296, 307, 343, 346, 354, Pain, 70, 76, no, 118, 120, 159, 169,
374,38i,388. 233, 238, 239, 245, 250, 291, 292,
Odious. See Agreeable. 301. See Pleasure and pain.
Offence, 256, 303. See Sin. Pairs, 48, 60, 63, 74, 76,111,160,167,
Offering, 61, 77, 83, 169, 184, 185, 168, 233, 244, 246, 247, 257, 276,
260, 261, 262, 276, 279, 280, 325, 277,292,351,357,358,366,369,
353,358,360,361. See Leavings. 37o, 379.
of action. See Action, dedica- Palace, magical, 197, 229.
tion of. Palaja, 360.
of 87.
life, Palate, 252, 262.
of 128.
self, PaWava, 2, 6, 37, 38, 39, 62, 67, 91,
Officiating at sacrifices, 21, 22, 218, 93, 95, 99, no, 136, 197, 229,
324, 359. 230, 255, 394.
Offspring. See Children. PaWavas, leaders of the army of, 13.
Oil, 79, 379, 384- PaWu. See PaWavas.
Old age. See Age. PaWya, 222.
times, 314,316, 358. Paini, 32, 33.
Oleaginous, 118, 330. Panâ^-anya, 38.
Om, 74, 79, 83, 89, 120, 121, 163, Panâhotri, 270.
282, 353. Panâma, 385.
Omens, 40, 365. Panâtantra, 28, 29, 139, 206.
Omission and commission, 54, 359. Parade. See Ostentation.
See Action and Inaction. Parallel, 97, 116, 187.
Omniscience and omnipotence, 58, Paramahawsa, 381.
234- Paraphernalia, 379. See Appurte-
Omniscient, 174. nances.
One, 102, 317, 375. Panbara, 33, 164.
Pantaarya, 32. 64, 108, 112, 123, 238, 270, 316,

Parajurama, 221, 294, 295, 299. 329, 331, 336. See Organs and
Pardon, Arg-una asks, 97, 98. Senses.
Pariyatra, 222, 346. Perception, personal. See Experi-
Part, 112,379. See Soul, individual. ence.
Partha. See Pritha. Perfect, 173, 186, 248, 251, 287.
Partiality. See Favouritism and Perfection, 52, 54, 62, 72, 73, 79, 100,
Impartiality. 107, 116, 117, 127, 176, 232,
Parvati, 219, 347. 233, 234, 287, 300, 302, 310,
Passages of body, 79, 253, 265, 273, 3H, 334, 384, 388, 389, 393-
275, 277, 318, 343. See Body. Performance. See Pride.
of heart, 253. Perfume, 93, 112. See Fragrance.
Passing through, 388, 389. See Im- Peril, 42. See Danger.
passable. Periplus, 223.
Passion, 57, 70, 75, 89, 106, 107, 108, Perishable, 44, 66 f 76, 77, 79, 8r,
109, no, 117, 118, 119, 120, 120, 154, 158, 304, 307, 355,
122, 124, 125, 126, 276, 278, 292, 375, 37 6 See Inconstantly.
301,302,318,319,323,325,328, Permanent. See Constant.
3*9* 33, 33i>334,342, 343, 345, Permeating. See Pervading.
356, 363, 3 6 9, 39o. Permission. See Preceptor.
Past. See Birth, Entities, and Fu- Perplexed, 98.
ture life. Perseverance, 51, 60, 79, 87, 103,
Pata%ali. See Yoga-sutras. in, 114, 120, 175, 255.
Mahabhashya, 19, 31, 32,139, Perspiration, 339.
140, 152, 211, 222, 223, 346. Perturbation, no, 352. See Agita-
Path, 47, 59, 64, 72, 80, 81, 82, ti6, tion.
125, 127, 153, 156, 165, 248, Pervading principle, 44, 45, 80, 82,
257, 284, 307, 311, 314, 316, 320, 83, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97,
33i, 348, 364, 369, 380, 381. 98, 100, 104, 106, 113, 127,
See Southern. 187, 242, 244, 253, 258, 307,
Paths, three, 354. 3i7, 332, 385.
of emancipation, 47, 52. Pessimists, 376.
unfamiliar, 380. Phalanx, 38.
Patience. See Forgiveness. Phalajruti, 143.
Patriarchs, 86, 354, 387. Phalguna, 394.
Pau/z^ra, 38, 295. Philanthropy. See Benevolence.
Peace, 91, 323. Philosopher, 44, 377.
Pearls, simile of, 74. Philosophy, Indian, 7, 26.
Pebbles, 365. Phlegm, 155, 343.
Pedestrian, 382. Physical pain. See Pain.
Penance, 11, 12, 59, 61, 67, 73, 74, Piety, 47, 59, 74, 89, no, 114, 125,
81,85,86, 98,99, 114, 117, 118, 128, 158, 159, 161, 168, 182,
119, 120, 121, 122, 126, 129, 183, 230, 231, 232, 242, 243,
147, 164, 165, 166, 170, 173, 246, 252, 254, 311, 314, 315,
178, 182, 184, 221, 231, 242, 316, 318, 325, 326, 331, 341,
247, 248, 254, 258, 259, 288, 348, 349, 35i, 359, 3 6 o, 362,
296, 299, 300, 308, 311, 312, 3 6 3, 3 6 4, 367, 368, 369, 375,
3i5, 326, 339, 355, 356, 367, 376, 377, 380, 384, 392, 393,
369, 376, 388, 389. 394. See Merit.
People. See Creatures. and impiety, 59, 125, 292.
common. See Populace. protector of, 59, 89, 94, 125, 130,
Perceptible, 76, 80, 96, 180, 192, 231, 235.
193, 257, 264, 309, 313, 377, Pilgrimage, 143.
380, 385, 386. Pillar. See Pole.
Perception of worlds, 174. Pingala, 16.
organs of, their operations, 57, Pingala, 257, 277, 318.
424 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGATiYA, ANUGITA.
Pippala, 346. Powerof Brahman, part in patriarchs,

Pijaas, 345, 354, 387. 87.
Pitr/s. See Manes. of knowledge, 167.
Pitriyawa, 314. of nature, 82.
Pity, 40, 42, 181, 243. See Com- participation in divine, 87.
passion. regard to one's own, 237. 89,
Place and time. See Gift. superhuman, 260.
76, 89,
Placid, 192, 194, 234, 245. See unequalled, See Equal.
97.
Tranquillity. worldly, 47. See Strength.
Plaksha, 354. Powerful, 269.
Planet, 303, 346, 387. Powerless, 336.
Play, 97. See Recreation and Sport. Practicable, 82.
Pleasant and unpleasant. See Agree- Practice, 9, 71, 73, 79. See Con-
able. duct.
Pleasure, 40, 42, 47, 50, 66, 107, 108, Praâpati, 58, 97, 219, 220, 244, 261,
126, 265, 268, 270, 275, 280, 292, 262, 263, 264, 265, 271, 282, 315,
300, 301, 311, 316, 322, 324, 325, 3i 6 , 334, 338, 345, 347, 353, 388,
33, 34i, 354, 355, 357, 389. 389. See Creator.
and pain, 44, 47, 48, 68, 71, 86, Praise, 94, 280. See Blame and
101, 103, 104, no, in, 112, 245, Laudation.
246, 285, 323, 356, 376. Praiseworthy, 97, 190.
celestial, 84. Praietas, 220.
higher, 287. Prakr/ti. See Nature.
within oneself, 50, 54, 66, 69, 70, Pralhada, 89.
!5 2 , 2 53, 2 88, 380. See Gods Praa, 258. See Life-winds.
and Happiness. Prawayama See Breath, control of.
Point, one. See Concentration. Prajastri, 280.
Poison, 41, 89, 126, 159, 190. Pra^nopanishad, 20, 65, 79, 81, 123,
Pole, 355. 152, 166, 176, 259, 271, 390, 391.
Polemic. See Controversialist. Pratyahara. See Senses.
Policy, 91, 324. Prayer, 94.
Politics, 91. Preceptor, 37, 40, 43, 57, 91, 3,
Pondering, 78, 175, 297, 33i> 334, 119,129,175,176,177,178,232,
349, 368. 243, 264,282, 283, 307, 308, 309,
objects, 50, 57, 154, 263. See 310, 311, 312, 358, 360, 372, 374,
Fancies. 376, 378, 381, 389, 393.
Poor. See Indigent. Precious things, 353.
Populace follow great men, 54. Prescribed action. See Action and
keeping of to duty, 54, 55, 127. Duty.
Portals, nine, 79, 108. See Body. by nature, 126, 127, 128.
Position in army, 38. Presence of mind. See Courage.
raised. See High position. Present. See Future.
Possession, 365. made by god, 59, 76.
Powder, 113. to god. See Flower.
Power, 58, 88, 91, 97, 102, 113, 182, See Dakshi/za and Gift.
287, 303, 323, 332, 360, 385. Preservation. See Acquisition.
creative, 170, 260, 279, 327. Previous life. See Life, previous.
delusive, 59. Preya. See Sreya.
desire for, 47. Pride, 52, 62, in, 112, 114, 116, 124,
divine. See mystic, infra. 128, 264, 294, 301, 320, 323,341.
exercise of, 127. See Arrogance and Vanity.
infinite, 94,
97. Priest, 89, 189, 241, 259, 261, 266,
intellectual.See Energy. 267, 270, 276, 278, 279, 280, 289,
lordly,
127. 290, 293.
mystic, 76, 82, 86, 88, 89, 92, 93, Primal being, 77, 96, in. See
98, 120, 131, 149, 230. Primeval.
Primeval, 45, 58, 81, 95, 98, 190, 333. 115, 119, 122, 126, 127, 162, 233,
Prince. See King and Ruler. 243,320, 326.
Principle,
170. Purpose, 48, 365.
none, 115, 124. Pursuit. See Abstraction, Enjoy-
Principles, divine, two, 187, 192. ment, and Knowledge.
Prior to all, 391. Purug-it, 37.
Pr/'tha, 40, 42, 45, 46, 47, 49, 52, 54, Purusha. See Spirit.
55, 59? 62, 72, 73, 74, 78, 79, sukta, 91, 280.
80, 8r, 83, 85, 92, 93, 100, 114, Purushottama. See Being, best.
115, 120, 121, 12 2, 125, 126, 130,
131, 205, 229, 230, 231, 254, 255, Quadrupeds, 209, 321, 339, 353.
256,281,311,312. Qualifications, 166, 177, 279, 312,
Procedure, 381, 385. 348, 358.
Product, 383. Qualities, 17, 21, 53, 55, 57, 59, 65,
Production and destruction, 74, 79, 70, 75, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107,
80, 82, 92, 106, 107, 127, 180, 108, 109, no, 111,112, 117, 124,
192,287, 314, 316, 317, 319, 327, 125, 126, 184, 185, 247, 260, 267,
33i, 351, 357, 372, 385, 388. 268, 270, 274, 276, 278, 279, 285,
See Entities. 286, 288, 292, 300, 301, 309, 311,
and development, 77, 82. 313,315,317,318,319,320,322,
sevenfold, 260. 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329,
Productive, 382. 330, 33i, 332, 334, 34i, 343, 344,
Progress, 380, 381. See Improve- 345, 349, 350, 35i, 352, 356, 3 6 7,
ment. 369, 37o, 372, 373, 374, 377, 379,
Promises, 332. 381,383,390,391.
Prompting to action, 123. See Ac- all-pervading, 126, 331.
tion. beyond, 75, 109*
Propagation, 53. See Generation. connexion with, in, 112. 105,
of truth, 129, 130. dealings no.
of, 55,
Property, 161, 182, 183, 255, 305, development of, 108, 328,
329.
379, 383. differentfrom See Soul.
soul.
destruction of, 41, 159. doers of actions, 55, 109.
Propitiation, 76, 97, 98, 99, 100, 115. effects of, 48, 108, 332.
Prosperity, 43, 96, 131, 151, 166, enjoyer 247, 328.
of, 104, 105,
167, 178, 182. enumeration of, 124.
Prostration, 97, 232. forms higher and lower, 323.
of,
Protection. See Acquisition, De- increase and diminution 328. of,
pendents, Good, and Piety. perturbation by. See Perturba-
Proud, 182. See Pride. tion.
Provisions, 380. prevalence of, 108, 328, 373.
Prowess, 324. See Valour. repression 108. 319,
of,
Publication of Gita, 129, 130. ruled by supreme, 75.
Pungent, 363. soul above, 109.
Punishment, 303. transcending, no.
48, 75, 109,
Pupil, 37, 43, 151, 175, 176, 177, Quarrelsomeness, 168, 183, 323.
252, 254, 262, 269, 282,283, 308, Quarters, 69, 94, 95, 178, 186, 192,
310, 311, 312, 315, 373, 378. 261, 268, 282, 290, 316, 337,34,
See Student.
Purawas, 14, 18, 20, 26, 143, 224. of347,354- a
life as Brahmaârin. See
Purandara, 219, 347. Brahmaârin.
Pure, 101, 103, 114, 127, 158, 159, Question, 62, 175, 231, 235, 252, 283,.
165, 170, 176, 183, 185,186, 246, 311,312,314,374-
247, 254,336, 355, 359, 360, 362, Quiescence, 69, 70, 79, 105, 167, 173,
369, 390, 393. See Heart, Holy, 185, 245, 263. See Mind.
and Sanctiiication. Quitting body. See Body, leaving.
Purity, 52, 64, 68, 76, 85, 103, 114, Quiver. See Tremour.
Radiance, 94, 104, 186, 190, 387. See Release, 63. See Birth, Body, Bond,
Effulgence and Light. Delusion, Free, Nature, Society.
Ra^-adharma. See Mahabharata. from sin. See Sin.
Rag-a-yoga, 300. Relish, 118. See Taste.
Raghuvawja, 29, 224, 293. Reluctant, 72.
Rahasyas. See Upanishads. Remainder of offerings. See Leavings.
Rahu, 224, 303. Remembrance of Deity, 78.
Rain, 54, 84, 363. Removal of knowledge, &c. See
Rakshas, 83, 88, 118, 345, 347, 354, Destruction.
387. Renouncer. See Renunciation.
Rama, 90, 294, 300. Renown. See Fame.
Ramamig-a, 30, 31, 32, 35, 66, 84, Renunciation, 52, 63, 64,65, 67, 85,
89, 90, 107, 112, 116, 124, 346, 114, 12T, 122,123,127,257,312,
378. 349, 36r, 369, 373, 376, 377.
Ramayawa, 10, 28, 90, 139, 140, 221. See Abandonment and Action,
Rambling. See Restraint and Senses. dedication of.
Rammohun Roy, 26. Repeated happiness, 126.
Rash, 380. thought. See Continuous medi-
Rathantara, 180. tation.
Ravenous, 57. See Eating. Repentance, 167.
Rays, 287, 289. Repetitions of passages, 144, 145,
Readiness of resource, 127. 181.
Reading much, 171, 309. of words and phrases, 14.
Real and unreal, 44, 154, 155, 164, Repining, 168, 323.
i 9 i j3 2 3?39 2
See Entity, real. Representative of Deity for medita-
Reason, 51, 124, 183. See Mind and tion, 88.
Understanding. Repression. See Qualities.
Receipt. See Acceptance. Reptiles, 284, 339, 353.
Receptacle, 84, 245. Reservoir, 48, 89, 193, 344, 354, 381.
Reception, 119, 150. See Youth. Residence, 84,233,240,250,260,287.
Recitation. See Vedas. See Dwelling.
Reclamation of bad men, 121. See Residue. See Leavings.
Improvement. Resolution, 47, 70, 101, 110,115,119,
Recognition, 249. 314. See Determination.
Recreation, 66. See Sport. good, 85.
Red, 179, 360, 384. vain, 128.
Reduced. See Desire. Resort, 50, 59, 75, 85, 102, 107. See
Refinement, 112, 123, 193, 308, 358, Asylum.
361, 369. Resource, 190, 377. See Readiness.
Reflexion, 169. Respect, 83, 119, 120, 159, 161, 162,
Refuge. See Asylum. 182, 246, 283, 324, 363.
Refulgence, 74, 94. See Effulgence, Rest, 150. See Dependence.
Light, and Radiance. Restraint, 9, 50, 53, 56, 57, 58, 60, 61,
Regard. See Fruit. 63, 64, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 86,
for wife, child, &c, 103. See 91, 99, 100, 103, 114, 119, 125,
Respect. 126, 127, 128, 161, 162, 163, 167,
Regulation, 6t, 76, 83, 84, 85, 150, 168, 232, 242, 243, 248, 251, 257,
170, 180, 254, 257, 269, 279, 283, 282, 296, 297, 301, 306, 336, 342,
288,291,296,307,311,312,315, 344, 355, 358, 3 6 o, 361, 362, 364,
316, 320, 321, 324, 326, 355, 356, 372,391,392.
358,359,360,361,367. mutual, 315.
Regulator, 89, 91. Result, 126. See Consequences.
Rejection. See Casting aside. Retard. See Wheel.
Rejoicing, 116. See Joy. Retrogression. See Wheel.
Relation, 103, 104. See Soul. Return of service, 120, 183.
Relative, 68. See Kinsmen. time of, 180, 244. See P. eceptor.
Return to birth, 65,79, 80, 81,82,84, Sacred learning. See Learning,

in, 112, 113, 116, 165, 234,306, Study, and Vedas.
322, 390. See Birth. Sacrifice, 12, 21, 22, 23, 53, 54, 60, 61,
Revelation. See Vedas. 62, 67, 81, 83,84,85,86,89,98,
Reverence, 42, 78, 80, 83, 85, 86, 119, 99, 114, 116, 118, 119, 120, 121,
129. 122, 129, 147, 161, 164, 167, 169,
Reviling, 166, 168, 181, 321. 173, 180, 184, 185, 189, 193, 218,
Revolution, 356, 357. See Universe 241, 260, 262, 276, 279, 280, 284,
and Wheel. 287, 288, 289, 290, 293, 309, 324,
Riches. See Wealth. 325, 326, 330? 334? 340,347, 353,
Richest, 287. 355, 358,359, 360, 362, 367, 376,
Right and wrong, 50, 166, 183, 319, 387.
366. See Duty. enjoyer of, 12, 67.
Righteous feeling, 326. fire, 216.
Rigid. See Regulation. giver of desires, 53.
Rik, 18, 20, 83, 146, 162, 163, 179, instrument, 61.
224, 277, 280, 284. knowledge of, 62, 83,
130.
Rikika, 295. lord See Enjoyer.
of.
Rim, 355. not performing, 62.
i?/shabha, 385. from,
rain 54.
ifrshis. See Sages. of
result action, 54, 62.
Rite. See Ceremony, Family, Fu- various classes, 61.
See, too,
neral, and Observances. Kratu and Ya^g-fia.
Ritter, 1. Sad, 120, 121.
River, current of, 95. See Stream. Sadhyas, 94.
Roar of Bhishma, 38. Safety. See Fear.
Robber, 41. See Thief. Sage, 50, 51, 59, 64, 66, 67, 86, 87,
Rod, 91. 89, 91, 93, 94, 102, 107, 162,
Roots, in, 316, 361, 388. 164, 173, 174, 178, 209, 221,
Rotation. See Universe and Wheel. 281, 282, 283, 286, 294, 296,
Roth. See Nirukta. 312, 314, 315, 316, 322, 334,
Rough, 118, 383, 384. 342, 345, 358, 360, 361, 362,
Round. See Circular. 368, 374, 375, 382, 388, 390,
Royal sage, 58, 86, 296, 300. 393-
saint, 23, 86. ancient, 86.
Rudra, 88, 92, 94, 219, 338, 347, 354- divine, 87, 89.
Ruin, 51, 55, 56, 63, 72, 85, 128, 151, seven, 29, 213, 281, 287. See
154. Royal sage and Royal saint.
of soul, 115, 117, 155,236,245, Sahadeva, 38.
279. See Destruction. Sahya, 222, 346.
Rule. See Regulation and Scrip- Saibya, 37.
ture. Saint. See Sage.
against, 116. See Ill-conducted Sakra. See Indra.
and Ordinances. Sakuntala, 29, 39, 243.
heavenly, 231. Saliva, 384.
Ruler, 249, 318, 385. See Body. Salmali, 346.
of men, 209, 346. See
44, 89, 95, Saltish, 118, 384.
King. Salutation, 61, 62, 83, 93, 95, 96, 97,
of universe, 78,115, 167, 182, 249, 140, 176, 294, 314, 324, 351,
2 79, 33 2 , 347* See Atheism. 366, 370.
Running away. See Slinking away. Salvation. See Emancipation.
Ruts, 356. Saman, 18, 19, 20, 83, 88, 90, 145,
146, 162, 163, 180, 280.
Sabaras, 221, 295. Samana, 258.
Sabarasvamin, 31. Samavidhana, 31.
Sabha Parvan, 174, 229. iSambhu, 219, 332.
428 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGATIYA, ANUGiTA.
Samnyasin. See Ascetic. Sankhya Sutra, 123, 190, 244, 265,

Sanaka, 86. 286,321,331,332,334,337,339,
Sanandana, 86. 354, 368, 392.
Sanatana, 86, 149. Tattvakaumudi. See Sankhya
Sanatkum&ra, 17, 86, 135, 141, 150. Karika.
Sanatsuâta, 125, 136, 141, 149, 150, Yoga, 105.
151, 152, 156, 157, 163, 164, Sanskara. See Ceremony.
165, 166,
174, 175, 179, 193, Sanskrit literature, 13, 15. See Ka-
39> 3Ji> 314. vyas.
A
Sanatsuâtiya, 48, 135, 136, 138, 143, Santi Parvan, 155, 160, 170. See
144? 145) 146, 197? 202, 203, 206, Mahabharata.
211, 226, 227, 231, 232, 234,240, S aptahot ri, 266.
245, 246, 249, 251, 253, 255,282, Sarasvati. See Speech.
285, 323, 326, 327, 339, 342,343, Sariraka Bhashya. See ankara>arya.
349, 351? 363, 364, 369. Sarvadarjanasangraha, 32, 214.
age of, 140, 147, et passim. Sarva^na Narayawa. See Narayawa.
character 144. of, Sastra, 280.
connexion with Bharata, 135, 136. Sastras, ir, 50, 56, 74, 161, 166, 176,
genuineness 137. of, 177, 303.
language and style, Sat. See Asad and Sad.
metre 142. 140, 142, 143.
of, Satakratu, 219.
name of, 138. Satapatha, 248, 265.
position 135,147.of, Satiety, 88.
to Vedas, 145.
relation Satisfaction. See Contentment.
text 138, 148, 203.
of, 137, See Sattva, 193.
Phalajruti. Satyaki, 39.
Sanctification, 59, 62, 64, 68, 69, 81, Satyaloka. See World.
83, 85, 101, 103, 122, 193, 247, Saugatas, 213, 377.
341. See Purity. Savana, 277.
Sanâya, 3, 35, 37, 39, 42, 92, 96, 98, Saviour. See Deliverer.
136. Savitri, 353.
Saiikara, 88. Savoury, 118. See Taste.
SankarcUarya, 2, 6, 18, 20, 27, 30, Savyasaiin, 96.
3i 32, 35, 45, 49, 52, 58, 59, Scandal, 324.
60, 64, 73, 79, 80, 81, 85, 87, Scenes, 93.
88, 90, 93, 103, 105, 107, 112, Sceptic. See Atheism, Faith, and
114,119,121,123, 124,125,127, Infidel.
128,129,135,137,138,141,143, Schlegel, 34, 35, 38. See Lassen.
144,151,152,153,154,155,156, Science, 6, 81, 90, 114, 388.
157, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163,164, Scripture, 117, 118, 119, 120, 231,
165, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 173, 238, 242, 290, 291, 314, 349,358,
174, 176, 177, 179, 180, 181,184, 364, 379, 381. See Sastras.
186, 187, 188, 190, 193, 197,201, Sea. See Ocean.
202, 203, 204, 206, 226, 230,231, Search for Brahman, 173.
239, 241, 247, 248, 251, 255,256, for faults. See Fault.
262, 263, 266, 271, 280, 290,313, Season, 91, 236, 330, 352.
327,333,339,342,345,347,353, Seat, 49, 64, 68, 78, 79, 80, 81, in,
376,385, 386,391. 112, 128, 129, 162, 163, 194,230,
Sankara-viâya, 135. 234, 239, 240, 245, 251, 257, 306,
Sankhya, 8, 27, 47, 52, 63, 64, 74, 316, 326, 339, 344, 348, 354,361,
123,210,215,313,332,368,372, 368,369,378,388,393.
373, a374, 383, 386, 387, 392. for practising abstraction, 68.
Karika, 240, 258, 265, 286, 291, of desire and wrath, 57.
319,321,322,329,331,334,337, Seclusion. See Solitary.
351,356,371,380,382,391. Second, without, 349.
Sara. See Hall, F. E. Secrecy. See Mystery.
Secret, 68, 91, 366. Serpent. See Snake.

Sects, 7. Service, 62, 127, 243, 324, 326.
Securing, 365. return of. See Return.
Security. See Fear. Serving devotees, 59.
Seed, 74, 84, 91, 107, 241, 313, 371, Severance. See Separation and Dis-
382, 383. sociation.
Seeing, 309, 351. See Senses. Shackle. See Bond.
Seeker after knowledge. See Know- Shade, 286, 356. See Shadow.
ledge. Sha^g-a, 385.
Seer, 78. Shadow, 312. See Shade.
Self, 170, 317. See Atman in the Shaken, not to be, 161.
Sanskrit index and Embodied Shakespeare, 113.
soul and Soul in this. Shapes, various, 92.
Self-consciousness, 102, 322, 333, Sharing with others, 364, 365.
336,338. Sharp 118, 383, 384.
Self-contained, no. Shaving, 375.
Self-contemplation, 50. Sheep, 345.
Self-control, 48, 126, 127, 183, 236, Shelter. See Asylum.
246, 366. Shining bodies, 88, 291,330,341,353.
Self-destruction, 106, 279. Shore, 381.
Self-existent, 333, 354. Short, 384.
Self-illumined, 342. Shortcoming. See Fault.
Self-knowledge. See Knowledge. Show. See Ostentatiousness.
Self-possessed, 63, 246, 248. Shower. See Rain.
Self-restraint, 9, 10, 21, 51, 61, 64, Siddhanta Kaumudi, 32.
65, 66, 68, 71, 77, 86, 100, 101, Siddhas, 89, 94, 96, 232, 233, 235,
103, 114, 119, 127, 149, 167,168, 236, 239, 314.
170, 173, 182, 190, 243, 249,250, Sides, both, 68.
292, 300, 312, 317, 320,327, 332, Sighs, 303.
342, 359>39>39i- Sight. See Scene and Visual power.
Selling. See Buying. of Brahman, 99.
Semen, 238, 241, 261, 275, 338. of universal form, 98, 99.
Sen, Keshab Ghunder, 26. Significance, 174.
Sensation not permanent, 44. Slkhandin, 39.
Sense, good. See Learned. Silence, 91, 245. See Taciturnity.
Senses, 26, 44, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55, 56, Similes, 142.
57, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 66, 67, 68, Sin, 12, 41, 42, 46, 47, 49, 53, 54,
69, 70, 71, 79, 86, 88, 93, 99, 102, 56, 60, 62, 64, 65, 66, 68, 70,
104, 105, 108, in, 112, 123, 125, 7i, 73, 76, 84, 86, 89, 127, 129,
126, 153, 154, 160, 161, 162, 165, 130, 139, 146, 149, 151, 157,160,
167, 168, 170, 173, 182, 185, 186, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 170,
187, 188, 190, 193,232, 238, 242, 181, 182, 232, 233, 241,246,288,
246, 248, 249, 251,253, 256, 257, 290, 293, 296, 311, 314, 317,319,
261, 262, 264, 266,267, 268, 269, 320, 321, 322, 327, 340, 343, 344,
278, 279, 280, 282, 283, 285, 286, 351,355,358,369,372,378,389,
290, 291, 292, 297 seq., 300, 305, 39, 394* See Counting.
306, 313, 317, 318, 329, 332, 334, Sinful, 57, 62, 68, 85, 164, 283, 293.
336, 337, 338, 34, 34i, 342, 343, Singers, 232.
344, 348, 349, 35o, 355, 358, 360, Single, 284.
362, 364, 366, 367, 368, 371, 386, Sinless, 52, 107, 114, 233, 252, 254,
388. See Absorbent, Contact, 256, 3H, 364.
Organs, Soul, Bodily and mental. Sinjapa, 346.
lord of, 38. Sitting, 49, 97, 232, 360, 390.
objects of enumerated, 102. .Siva, 219, 333, 347.
operations of, 61, 64. Sixteen, 371.
Separation, 233, 313. Skanda, 89.
430 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGATIYA, ANUGtTA.
Skin, 40, 259, 261, 267, 298, 305, Soul, all-pervading, 45, 193. See
3 6l 375 See Senses. Unity.
Sky.
>
See Heaven. association with, 288, 336.

Slander. See Backbiting. beauty 177. of,
Slaughter, 168. See Murder. beginningless, 44, 45.
Slave, 304. destruction of, seq.,
Sleep, 64,67,69,77,97, 108,112, 126, different from 44 160, 374.
and ac-
qualities
236, 258, 259, 268, 269, 301, 320, tions, 55, 56,
105.
360. distinctfrom nature, 201, 289.
lord of. See Gudakesa. from senses, 160, 173,285,
distinct
Slinking away from battle, 127.
Slippery, 384. 289, 305.
distinctfrom universe, 164.
Sloth, 55, 192, 194, 301, 361, 378, embodied, 44, 45, 65, 232, 46, 77,
389. 238, 240, 244, 249, 252.
Slow, 125. See Gradual. eternal. See Eternity.
Small, 92, 285, 331. existence of, 26.
Smell. See Fragrance and Senses. favour 234. of,
Smile, 43, 253, 256, 265. firm,
45.
Smoke, 57, 81, 127, 276, 362. high and low, 232.
Smooth, 384. highest. See Highest.
Smr/ti, Gita regarded as, 2, 6, 30. immaculate, 123.
Sanatsuâtiya regarded as, 138. immortal. See Immortality.
Smritis, 7, 27, 30, 83, 153, 158, 169, indefinable, 44.
321. indestructible, 46. 44,
Snake, 89, 93, 190, 281, 282, 283, individual, 112, 157, 188,
77,
321, 345, 347, 353, 354- 192, 253, 258, 263, 289, 310,
Society, 68, 103, 364, 365. 3i5, 337, 340, 34i, 350, 37i,
Sod, 68, no. 386.
Soft, 383, 384. See Gentle. individual's relation to supreme,
Soilure. See Dust. 3o,55, 77,92,97, 103, 111,112,
Solar world, 240. 153, i54, 156, 186, 189, 316, 342,
Solicitude. See Acquisition. 35o.
Solitary, 68, 97, 151, 232, 251, 256, indivisible, 45.
287, 341, 363. inexhaustible, 45.
Solstices, 81, 352. and being
killing killed, 44, 45.
Soma, 84, 219, 220, 337, 340, 346, knowledge of, 46, 66, 106,
163.
347. loss of, 151.
Somadatta, 38. manifestation See Manifes-
of.
Son, 40, 59, 74, 103, 121, 169, 170, tation.
178, 183, 189, 194, 284, 384. migration to new body, 44.
of preceptor. See Preceptor. not active agent, 105, 55, 65,
Sorrow, 119, 126, 330. See Grief, 106, 109, 123, 125,
285.
Joy and sorrow. primeval, 45.
Soul, 44, 49, 50, 51, 54, 64, 65, 66, science See
of, 49, 90, 173, 181.
67, 68, 70, 73, 88, 105, 107, 108, Adhyatma.
152, 154, 159, 160, 162, 180, 190, seats of,
237, 240.
191, 194, 224, 235, 237, 238,239, stable, 45.
242, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 252, unchangeable, 45.
253, 254, 256, 257, 258, 262, 263, union. See &c, supra.
individual's
274,276,278,279,280,281,282, wonder, 46.
286, 288, 292, 300, 304, 308, 309, Soul, supreme, 82, 86, 105, 106, 112,
312,331,332,333,334,336,337, 113,156,172,173,175,189,190,
340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 345, 35i, 248, 259, 284, 310, 342.
354, 355, 367, 3 6 9, 37i, 372, 374, abode of. See Seat.
375, 376, 380, 382, 385, 389, 391, access to. See Attainment.
392, 393, 394. connexion of with world, 189.
Soul, does nothing, 64, 65, 106, 123. Sridharasvamin, 35, 38, 45, 49, 54,
originof all, 87. 64, 67, 71, 80, 85, 89, 96, 105,
originof gods and sages, 86. 107, 108, no, 112, 116, 117, 120,
part of, individual, 30, 112,
186. 123, 124, 127, 129, 346, 378.
passive spectator, 100, 105. Sruti. See Vedas.
relation of, to See
individual. Stable, 45, 367.
Soul, &c, supra.
individual's Staff, 37, 217, 359, 360.
source unknown, 86. Staggering, 356.
union of with See
individual. Stale, 118.
Union. Standard, 39.
Sound, 61, 74, 127, 155, 247, 258, Standing, 360.
260, 266, 271, 273, 343. See Stars, 179, 240.
Objects of sense. State, 117, 304. See Brahmic, Mind,
Sour, 383, 384. and Vilest state.
Source of things, 46, 74, 75, 80, 83, differences of, 59, 82, 356.
84, 87, 90, 107, 112, 127, 191, normal, 99.
194, 283, 284, 311, 315, 323, 333, Staves, three, 318.
334, 354, 357, 377, 383. Steady, 49, 70, 103, no, 167, 357.
and end, 46, 84. See Beginning, Steady-minded, 49, 50, 51, 52, 66, 68,
Production, and Soul, supreme. 69, 70, 78, 83, 100, 101, 103, 109,
South path, 314. no, 117, 250, 296, 300, 352.
Sovereignty, great, 303. Stealing. See Thief.
of earth, 40, 42, 43, 47, 96, 300. Steeds, white, 38.
of three worlds, 40, 307. Steps. See Gradually.
within, 302. Stick. See Staff.
Space, 73, 74, 82, 106, 156, 186, 244, Stinginess, 325. See Gifts.
251, 260, 289, 316, 339, 343, 356, Stinking, 118.
368, 375, 377. See Time and Stolidity, 320.
place, and Objects of sense. Stomach, 93, 94, 252, 367.
Speaking 182, 183.
ill, Stone, 68, no, 179.
Species, origin of, 244. See Eggs. heated, standing on, 1 1 8.
Spectator, soul is, 105. Stoppage, 357, 358.
Speech, 49, 87, 90, 119, 123, 128, Store. See Provisions.
161, 177, 184, 185, 243, 257, 261, Store-room, 253.
262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 275, 295, Storm-gods, 88.
33 6 , 338, 348, 359, 3 6 4, 3 6 6. Story, ancient. See Itihasa.
See Objects of sense. Stotra, 280.
forms of, 265. Straightforward, 103, 114, 119, 126,
Speed, 357, 364, 381. See Velocity. 161, 320, 325, 326, 364, 373.
Spirit, 104, 105, 331, 333, 351, 367, Strangers, 159.
368, 373, 380, 385, 386. Straw, 142, 155.
departed. See Departed spirits. Stream, 90, 95, 192, 284, 287, 307,
supreme. See Soul, supreme. 344, 346, 354, 363, 387. See
Spiritual topics, 51, 296, 310. River.
Spirituous, 389. Strength, 74, 116, 118, 124, 178, 236,
Splendour, 91, 95, 240. 252, 294, 323. See Power.
Brahmic, 162, 232, 287. Stri Parvan, 187.
Spoke, 306, 355. Strong, 71, 116, 158, 346.
Spontaneous earnings, 60, 101, 362, Stubborn, 118, 128. See Head-
365. strong and Obstinate.
Sport, 251. See Play and Recreation. Student, 177, 216. See Pupil.
Spring, 90. Study, 21, 23, 61, 68, 81, 98, 99,
Sprouts, in, 313, 371, 383. 114, 119, 120, 121, 164, 167,
Square, 384. 172, 174, 181, 185, 269, 324,
Sravawa 352. 334, 340, 355, 358, 360, 361,
Sreya and Preya, 161. 362, 376.
432 bhagavadgJta, sanatsugatIya, anugita.
Study of Gita, 130. Supreme, part of, supports all, 91.

of Vedas. See Vedas. See Being- Supreme, Brahman,
Style. See Anugita, Bhagavadgita, and Highest.
and Sanatsuâtiya. Surface. See Earth.
Subandhu, 13. Surya, 219.
Subdivision, love of, 10. Sushuma, 156, 277, 318.
Subduing. See Self-restraint. Suspension. See Hanging.
Subhadra, 37, 39. Sumita, 144.
Subjects, 295, 378. See Object. Sustainer, 83.
Subjugation. See Self-restraint. Sustenance. See Body, support of.
Sub-quarters. See Quarters. Sutras, 7, 14, 30.
Subsistence. See Entities. Sutta Nipata, 14, 19, 23, 35, 36, 40,
Substratum, 123, 249, 289, 292. 45, 46, 48, 49, 50, 51, 56, 59,
Subtle topics. See Spiritual. 60, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 68, 69,
Subtlety, 104, 106, 160, 241, 285, 70, 79, 88, 89, 101, 103, 105, 108,
296, 310,320, 336, 341, 342. 109, in, 112, 114, 118, 121.
Success, 47, 48, 49, 59, 60, 124. Svadha, 83, 324, 370.
5udra, 22, 24, 85, 126, 127, 136, 150, Svaha, 324, 352, 366.
322, 329. .Svapaka, 65.
Sughosha, 39. SVeta, 222, 346.
Summer, 122, 363. Svetajvataropanishad, 65, 68, 78, 89,
Summum bonum, 117, 214. See 102, 103, 104, 105, 112, 113, 129,
Aim, Emancipation, Heaven. 138, 157, 160, 163, 165, 166, 172,
Sun, 58, 65, 74, 78, 83, 88, 94, 106, 176, 179, 180, 186, 187, 189, 190,
no, in, 178, 179, 186, 189, 224, 192, 193, 238, 249, 265, 308, 311,
251, 277, 287, 289, 290, 303, 316, 313,322,327,331,332,333,338,
329? 33o, 337, 34o, 346, 350, 352, 343,348,355,37o,376,379-
354, 364, 387. Swallowing, 95, 353.
eye of divine form, 94. Swamy, Sir M. C. See Sutta Nipata.
one thousand, 93. Sweet, 363, 383, 384.
Sunrise. See Morning, Sun. Swerving. See Moving and Truth.
Sunset. See Evening, Sun. Swift. See Speed.
Sunshine, 356. Sword, 63, 294, 302, 313.
Sunyavadins, 376. Syadvadin, 376.
Superhuman cause of pain. See Syamaka. See Grain.
Pain. Syena, 82, 353.
Superior to God none. See Equal. Syllable, 391. See Om.
Superiority, feeling of, 158, 159. See Symbols, 160, 307,308, 309, 350, 367.
Envy. Systematic arrangement, 7, 10, 13.
Supervisor, 82, 83, 105, 109, 188. See Philosophy.
Suppliant, 169, 183.
Support of Ajvatth a, in. Tabor, 38.
of body. See Body. Taciturnity, 101, 119, 159, 161, 162,
without, 72. 163, 168, 173.
See Dependent. Tad, 120, 161.
Supporter, 83, 84, 105, 257, 348. Taint, 43, 49, 59, 64, 82, 106, 107,
of universe, 78, 80, 82, 91, 94, 109, 123, 127, 154, 155, 160, 163,
97, 105, 113, 180, 192, 258. 186, 247, 248, 289, 366. See
Supreme, 49, 50, 54, 64, 65, 69, 77, Bond.
79, 81, 83, 85, 93, 94, 106, 113, Tairthikas,376.
176, 188, 192, 326, 369, 379. Taittiriya Arawyaka, 159, 164, 170,
belongs to none, 194. 178, 186, 188, 190, 259, 261, 262,
form 193.
of, 266, 277, 280, 327, 347, 389.
loss of, 71. Brahmawa, 261, 262, 266.
manifestation 77. of, See Incar- Upanishad, 103, 120, 123,127, 152,
nation. 155, *5 6 > i6i> i 6 3; i 6 4, 168, 171,
180, 191, 192, 220, 236, 238, 244, Tie. See Bond.
280, 293, 302, 343, 360, 361, 378, Tiele, G. P., Prof., 20, 23, 24, 27, 97.
385, 388, 389, 390. Tiger, 142, 153, 155.
Taking, 64. like, 230, 294.
Talent, 37, 72, 120, 177, 182, 191, Time, 62, 81, 90, 120, 176, 186, 244,
193, 255, 292, 299, 310, 312, 314, 276, 316, 356, 357, 363, 366, 375,
316,317,326,327,332,335,369, 377.
377, 378, 380, 381, 386. and place, soul unlimited by, 45,
Talk, 47, 64, 124, 164, 320. 186, 356.
TaWya Brahmawa, 180. lapse 343, See Birth.
of, 58.
Tanks, 222, 324. of return, &c, 80. See Death
Tapas, 166. and Gift.
Taranatha Tarkavaâspati, Prof., 28, wheel 343, 355.
of,
32, 33, 329, 334, 342. To-day, 305.
Tarkikas, 376. Toil. See Labour.
Tarpawa, 325. To-morrow, 305.
Taste, 74, 257, 258. See Objects of Tone, 264.
sense, Relish, and Savoury. Tongue, 219, 252, 259, 261, 292.
by another, 269, 270. See Senses and Taciturnity.
for objects of sense, 50, 166. Tooth. See Teeth.
Tasteless, 118, 247. Tortoise, 50, 342, 366.
Tawny, 179. Torture, 118, 237, 240.
Teacher. See Preceptor. Touching, 247, 257, 258, 343. See
Teaching. See Instruction. Senses.
Tears, 42. Town, 173, 212, 361, 363.
Technical terms, 10. Trade, 127.
Teeth, 95, 113. Tradition, 314.
Temperate. See Food and Sleepi- Tranquillity, 2 1, 5 1, 52, 63, 65, 67, 68,
ness. 69, 70, 85, 86, 94, 101, 108, 114,
Tempers, 86, 322. 119, 120, 126, 128, 129, 190,232,
Temporary. See Perishable. 243, 246, 247, 248, 250, 256, 257,
Temptation, 154, 327. 277, 287, 288, 301, 307, 312, 317,
Ten, 373. 326, 342, 355, 370, 372, 373, 375,
Tender, 384. 389,392.
Terminable. See Perishable. Transcendent Brahman, 76, 78, 113,
Termination of Life. See Death. 333, 35i, 372.
Terrible, 94, 95, 98, 343. happiness, 70.
Test, 306. nature, 76.
Texts, 102. Transcending. See Qualities, Source.
Vedic, 48, 269, 290, 305, 322. See Transgressing. See Ill-conducted
Mantra. and Sin.
Thief, 53, 160,169,284,324,330, 389. Transient, 44, 79, 86, 154, 179, 187,
Thigh, 94. 246, 250, 355, 390. See Life.
Thirst, 151, 168, 356. penance, 120.
Thomas, E., 224, 225. Transmigration, 322. See Life,
Thomson, Archbishop, 268. higher.
Thought, 87, 115, 116, 192, 259, 263, Travellers, 329, 380, 381.
321, 348, 350, 378. See Con- Treachery, 41, 151, 324, 344.
tinuous meditation and Mind. Treasure, 115.
evil, 323. Trees, 89, in, 112, 142, 172, 241,
Thoughtless, 183, 359. See Rash. 284, 285, 286, 294, 296, 313, 316,
Thread, 74, 359, 360. 321, 346, 361, 363, 365, 370, 371,
Throat, 96, 252, 262, 266, 271. 373, 379, 388.
Throwing out, 64. Tremour, 40, 96, 239.
Thumb, 190, 192. Trespasses. See Sin.
Thunderbolt, 37, 89. Triku/avat, 222, 346,
[8] Ff
Trinity, 88, 220, 347. 73, 78, 97, 100, 101, 102, 112,
Trouble, 56, 71, 118, 122, 124, 183, 123,125,127,161,175,177,179,
329, 356, 362. See Agitation. 181, 187, 188, 189, 190, 193, 236,
Trumpet, 38. 247, 259, 260, 267, 279, 284, 287,
Trunk, 313, 371. 302, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 313,
Trust. See Faith. 316,318,332,336,337,338,341,
Truth, 44, 60, 62, 64, 70, 83, 86, 87, 343, 344, 348, 349, 35, 35i, 355,
92, 103, no, 114, 115, 119, 124, 357, 366, 367, 368, 370, 372, 377,
160, 161, 162, 167, 168, 169, 170, 380, 381, 382, 385, 386, 391, 392.
171,172,174,175,176, 177,182, See Knowledge.
184, 185, 280, 284, 293, 296, 311, Understanding, world of, 333.
3i3 ? 3i4 315, 324, 325? 326, 331,
?
Undesponding. See Despondency.
335, 336, 338, 344, 35i, 360, 362, Undeveloped, 331.
364, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, Undiscerning. See Discernment.
373, 375, 378, 380, 381, 384. Undistinguished colours, 286.
Turbid, 42. Unfathomable, 343.
Turning back. See Wheel. Unfriendliness, 320. See Antipathy.
Tvash/r/, 219, 346. Ungrateful, 254.
Twelve, 373. Unhappiness, 49, 51, 53, 66, 69,70,
Twenty-four, 373. 78, 79, 86, 101, 103, 107, 109,
plus one, 317. 126, 151, 157, 232, 233, 245, 247,
Twenty-two, 373. 255, 3i3, 33i, 37o, 372. See
Twice-born, 156, 160, 163, 166, 209, Pain.
231, 232, 285, 291, 293, 296, 299, Unholy, 116, 343.
304, 311, 314, 316, 327, 33 6 339, ,
Unintelligent, 160, 172, 312, 320, 330.
340, 348, 353, 360, 373, 383. 35i, 356, 371*379-
Twofold, 375. Uninterrupted, 341.
Union, 66, 70, 71, 115, 275.
Ubiquitous, 82. Unity of everything, 62, 71, 75, 83,
Udana, 258. 104, 105, 106, 107, 112, 116, 124,
Uûlomas, 377. 128, 312, 313, 344, 370, 374. See
Udumbara, 374, 379. Difference, Identification. And
Udyoga Parvan, 135, 138, 139, 140. Soul, all-pervading.
Uâijjravas, 89. of work, 6.
Uma, 219, 347. Universal benevolence. See Bene-
Unasked, 365. volence.
Unattached. See Attachment. form, 92, 333, 344.
Unavoidable, 46. knowledge, 114. 76,
Unborn, 45, 58, 76, 86, 87, 192, 194, Universe, constituents 336. of,
33i. destruction of, 80.
Uncertain, 120, 380. devoid of truth, 115,
315.
Unchangeable, 45, 100, 317, 331, 333, 261.
divisions of, 93,
37i, 39i. eternal, 158.
Unchecked, 357. government of, 115,
Uncle, maternal, 40. heated by universal327.form, 94,
Unconcern, 82, no, 326, 391. See 95-
Indifference. illumination 178, 186.
of,
Unconfused, 307. lord of, 83, 86, See
87, 93.
Unconquerable, 161, 231. See In- Atheism and Ruler.
vincible. movement See Move-
of, 82, 87.
Uncreated, 45, 347, 391. See Self- ment.
existent. producer and destroyer of, 74,
Undegraded, 39, 97, 130, 310. 287, 354, 392.
158,
Underlying principle. See Substra- support157,
95,
of, 74, 78, 80, 82, 93, 94,
tum. 97, 104, 112, 180, 192.
Understanding, 47, 57, 64, 65, 67, 70, upholding. See Support.
Universe, welfare of, 29, 94. See Vaâspati Mbra, 319, 322, 329, 356,
Benevolence. 371, 382.
within and without. See Within. Valiant, 332. See Valour.
See Body of Krishna and Ruler. VallabhaHrya, 30, 31.
Unknowable, 76, 104, 160, 247. Valour, 126, 323, 326, 367.
Unknown, 159, 160, 349, 368. See Valuables. See Precious things.
Incomprehensible. Vamadeva, 193.
Unmanageable, 57. Vamadevya, 277.
Unmoved, 51, 68, 69, no, 248, 352, Vanishing of nature, 380.
391. Vanity, 103, 114, 115, 116, 166, 181,
Unpeopled. See Solitary. 246, 320, 321. See Arrogance
Unperceived, 45, 46, 76, 80, 82, 88, and Pride.
96, 99, 100, 102, 193, 313, 317, Vanquished, 96, 152, 388, 389. See
318, 331, 332, 349, 350, 351, 354? Victory.
368, 371, 372, 373, 380, 382, 383, Variable, 330.
385,386,389,390. Variegated colours, 286, 357.
Unpleasant, 122. See Agreeable. Variety. See Diversity.
Unreal, 44. Varu#a, 89, 97, 219, 220, 345, 346.
Unreasonable, 237. Vasavadatta, 28.
Unrighteous, 53. Vashat, 324.
Unseen, 115. See Unperceived. Vajikara san^na, 9.
Unshaking, 331. Vasishâ, 159, 160, 314.
Unsteady. See Steady. Vasu, 88, 92, 94.
Unsubstantial, 255. Vasudeva, 75, 83, 91, 98, no, 130,
Unswerving, 125, 336. 230, 235, 254, 310, 312, 393.
Untainted, 367, 369, 379. See Gift, Vasuki, 89, 353.
Lotus-leaf, and Worlds. Vayu, 219, 340. See Wind.
Unthinkable, 45, 78, 100, 354, 369. Veda, 171, 172.
Untruthfulness, 168, 183. Vedanta, 8, 17, 113, 123, 147, 159,
Unwilling, See Reluctant. 174, 246^331.
Up and down, going, 109, 240, 321, Paribhasha, 220, 258, 286, 314,
322, 325, 327, 329. 333, 338, 339? 387.
Upanishads, 2, 5, 7, 8, 13, 15, 16, 17,
Sara, 186.
18, 19, 23, 25, 26, 34, 35, 135, Sutras, 30,
3 1, 32, 33,105,188,191.
141, 142, 143, 144, 147, 174? 181, Vedas, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 25,
5,
207, 210, 211, 212, 215, 22 3, 226, 26,48,54,61,62,68, 74, 78, 81,
251. 83, 84, 88, 91, 98, 99, 102, no,
dialogues in, 5. 111,112, 113,114, 115, 119, 120,
Upasana. See Meditation. 121,143,144,145,146, 152,153?
Upavarsha, 32. 156, 157, 158, 159, 161, 162, 163,
Upholding. See Support. 164, 166, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173,
Upwards and downwards, branches, 174,177,182,185,193,211,214,
in, 184, 287, 354. See Up 226, 262, 269, 276, 306, 309, 312,
and down. 320, 322, 326, 331, 353, 354, 358,
Urine, 261. 367,369,378,388,390.
Ujanas, 91. Atharva, 18,
19, 145.
Ushmapas, 94. consubstantialwith Brahman, 163.
Uttamauâs, 37. disparagement See Disparage-of.
ment.
Vain, 321, 327. See Life. like reservoir, 48.
Vaisampayana, 150, 151, 229, 230, theogony 220. of,
394. three, 83 19, 84.

Vaisvanara, 191, 259, 276. two KaWas 146.
?
of, 17,
Vaijyas, 22, 24, 85, 126, 127, 217, Vedic words, 48.
255, 329. Vegetables, 83, 113, 144, 156, 353.
Vaivasvata, 153. See Herbs.
F f 2
Vehicle, 345. Vowels, 348.

Veil concealing Brahman, 76. Vr/ddhas, 377. See Elders.
Velocity, 192. See Speed. Vr/kodara. See Bhima.
Venerable, 32, 97, 252, 267, 282, 293, Vr/'shalas, 295.
3" 377. Vr/shis, 41, 46, 56, 91, 235.
Veracity. See Truth. Vulgar, 151.
Verse, sacred, 83. Vultures, 40.
Sanskrit, 15. Vyadi, 32.
Vessels, 363. Vyana, 258.
Vestments, 93. Vyasa, 3, 6, 32, 33, 87, 91, 130, 204,
Vexation, 43, 56, 68, no, 159, 168, 206, 207.
315, 324, 330, 336, 356, 378. author of Gita, 6.
See Agitation. Vyuha, 38.
Vices, 301, 302, 303, 314. See Attack
of vices. Wain, 37.
Vicissitudes. See Life, course of. Wakefulness, 51, 69, 269, 324. See
Victory, 40, 43, 47, 91, 131, 287, 296, Day and night.
305, 306, 344. War. See Battle-field.
Vidura, 136, 149, 150, 151. Warmth, 238, 329. See Heat.
Vi^nana Bhikshu, 197, 201, 202, 203, Washing, 119.
204, 354. Water, 45, 64, 73, 74, 95, 156, 159,
Vada, 375. 179, 187, 189, 193, 238, 260, 281,
Vikanza, 38. 283, 284, 287, 289, 290, 339, 343,
Vilasavati, 28. 344, 346, 353, 356, 359, 360, 361,
Vilest state, 116. 364, 365, 374, 379, 382, 384, 387.
Vilifying, 323. See Abuse. offering to Supreme, 85. See
Vinata, 90. Libations and Reservoir.
Vindhya, 222, 346. Waterpot, 359.
Vindictiveness, 151, 323. Wave, 374. See Billow.
Violation. See Regulation. Way. See Hell and Path.
Vipra, 347. Weak, 269.
Vh%, 186, 315. point, touching, &c, 323.
Virata, 37, 39. Wealth, 40, 61, 62, 75, 88, 114, 115,
Viroiana, 175. 116, 124, 125, 169, 177, 178, 181,
Virtue and vice, 56, 115. 183, 184, 233, 243, 246, 261, 284,
Virtuous, 116, 283. 307, 314, 325, 331, 347, 357, 359,
Vishamajlokf, 227, 259. 3 6 5, 376, 39 2 See Belongings
Vishmi, 29, 76, 88, 89, 90, 94, 95, and Property.
190, 219, 220, 221, 261, 332, 333, Brahmic, 162.
338, 345? human, 161, 255.
Purawa, 221, 222.347, 354.
34<5,
lord of, 88.
Visible. See Perceptible and Regu- Weapons, 38, 41, 42, 45, 89, 90, 93,
lation. in, 250.
Visual power, concentration of, 67, do not cut soul, 45, 250.
69. Weary, 160, 314.
VLfvamitra, 314. Weaving, 74, 194.
Vijvas, 94. Weber, A., Prof., 6, 8, 23, 25, 28, 31,
Vital parts, 237, 238, 239, 297, 298, 33, 139, 248.
299. See Soul, seat of. Welfare. See Good.
Vitality. See Life. of all. See Benevolence.
Vocal. See Bodily and Speech. of Arûna, 86, 92, 129.
Voice. See Speech. of oneself, 117.
Volition, 313. Well, 324, 354.
Vomited, 142, 160. Well-read, 209, 255. See Learned.
Voracity. See Eating. Well-wishers, 68.
Vow. See Firmness, Regulation. Westminster Review, 3* 5, 6.
Wheel of the world, 54. See Discus. Words, 89, 103, 185, 209, 261, 262,
holder of, 232. 263, 266, 338, 348, 353.
turning of, 215, 306. man of, 171.
See Time. of wisdom, 44.
Wheeler, T., 3, 5, 6. Work, divine, 29, 59.
Whip, 386. World, 52, 54, 55, 59, 60, 62, 63,
Whirling of mind, 40. 66, 68, 72, 79, 84, 86, 100, 106,
Whistling. See Bamboo. 116, 161, 163, 164, 170, 174, 179,
White, 179, 384. 180, 190, 230, 231, 233, 234, 236,
Wick, 380. 239, 240, 243, 246, 249, 253,255,
Wicked, 75, 121, 153, 329, 330. 256, 258, 278, 281, 282, 283, 287,
Wife, 41, 97, 103, 159, 161, 167, 170, 292, 296, 307, 313, 314, 3i6, 325,
181, 183, 189, 216, 256, 307, 358. 33i, 332, 334, 343, 354, 35<5, 362,
of preceptor. See Preceptor. 364, 367, 37o, 387, 388, 393.
Wilkins, C, 2. affairs of, 55, 60,
304, 324.
Will of entities. See Free-will. of and by, 10
agitation r.
Williams, M., Prof., 243, 344, 358. beginning of,See Begin-

152.
Willow, 346. See Bamboo. ning, void of.
Wilson, H. H., Prof., 24, 50, 205, destroyer of, 95.
221, 222. destruction See
of, 55, 96, 115.
Wind, 71, 90, 97, 156, 192, 232, 237, Destruction.
238, 239, 257, 261, 337, 343, 349, external and internal,
292, 337,
350. 386.
carries astray boat, 51. foes 115.
of,
carries away perfumes, 112. future, 62, 63, 72, 115, 126, 165,
does not dry up soul, 45. 167, 188, 308, 326, 378.
See Life-winds.
life. government 115.of,
restraint of, 71. higher, 354, 389.
upward and downward. See holy. See Holy world.
Life-winds. human, in.
59, 84, 95,
Windless place, 69. knowledge of, 161.
Wing, 164, 188, 189, 192. master of, 67, 86,
Wink. See Eyelid. material, 65, 161, 97.
163, 172, 175,
Winter, 332. 186, 187, 189, 191, 335.
Wisdom, 44, 49. mortal, 82, 84, 100, 112, 153, 175,
Wise. See Learned, Life, and Un- i9i>
happiness. nether.234,See343.Hell.
Wish. See Desire. of death, 100.See mortal, supra.
Wish-giving cow, 89. of meritorious men, 72, 84, 130,
stone. See Stone. 321.
184,
Within all things, 104, 112, 180, 190, release from, 62, 159,
235.
367, 369, 379. spotless. See Untainted.
Without. See Within. survey 234.of,
Withstand, difficult to. See Re- thought 323. of,
straint and Unconquerable. three, 40, 54, 94, 97, 113, 244,
Woe. See Home and Misery. 249> 334, 354, 388.
Womb, 105, 107, 109, 116, 175, untainted, 108, 317.
155, See
237, 239, 241, 260, 321, 322, 331, Current, Death, Destruction,
339? 353* See Foetus and Pre- Evil, Lord, and Transient.
ceptor. Worldliness, 51, 159, 314, 370.
Women. See Female. Worldly life. See Life, course of.
Wonder, 92, 93. Worms, 225, 321, 339, 364.
soul, subject of, 46. Worship, 59, 71, 73, 75, 76, 85, 86,
Wood. See Fuel and Staff. 87, 99, no, 117, 127, 156, 186,
Word. See Speech. 257, 286, 377.
divine, 59, 73. complete, 114.
Worship, exclusive, 73, 75, 78, 79, Yaûs, 18, 20, 83, 146, 162, 163,
80, 83, 84, 85, 99, 100, 103, 1 10. 180.
irregular. See Irregular. Yakshas, 88, 94, 118, 345, 347, 354.
mode of, 83, 114, 127, 245, 353. Yama, 89, 97, 153, 219, 233, 346.
of divinities, 59, 75, 118. Yaska, 225.
Worshippers go to deity wor- Years, 330.
shipped, 76, 84. Yellow, 384.
receive due fruit, 59. Yoga, 9, 10, 11, 27, 47, 61, 63, 64,
Woven. See Weaving. 74, 297, 306.
Wrath, 50, 57, 59, 66, 67, 101, 114, Sutras, 8, 9, 10, 74, 210, 211, 212,
115,116,117,128,151,154,155, 215, 226, 234, 248, 250, 251, 252,
156, 160, 165, 166, 181, 183, 185, 260, 266, 271, 274, 285, 286, 300,
233, 241, 246, 284, 289, 294, 301, 319,322,324,327,343,372,373,
315, 320, 322, 323, 325, 332, 343, 394.
357? 364. See Irascible. V&sishâ, 206, 240.
Wretched, 49. YogaHras, 213, 377.
Wrong. See Modesty, Right and Yogin, 52, 293.
wrong. Youth,175.
compared to death, 44.
Yadava, 97. receiving senior, 139, 203.
Ya^fia, 83. Yudhamanyu, 37.
Ya^navalkya, 5, 237, 304, 344. Yudhishîra, 38, 394.
Yaffle jvar Gastrin, 33, 224. Yuyudhana, 37.
SANSKRIT INDEX.
B.= Bhagavadgita S. = Sanatsuâtiya A. = Anugita.
; ;
N. B. Only in some cases have references been given to all the passages in
which a certain word occurs. In most cases, only the passages in which words
are used in noteworthy senses are referred to.
AkamabMta, (A.) XXIII, 5. i9 20, 47; XXIII, 5; XXV,

,
Akshara,(B.) Ill, 15; VIII, 3, it, 21; 9; XXVI, 1, 2, 5; XXVII,

X, 2, 5, 33; XI, 18, 37; XII, I, 12, 30; XXIX, 22; XXX,
1, 3; XV, 16, 18. (S.) Ill, 18, 6; XXXI, 45, 55 XXXII, 5
45 ;IV,i8. (A.) Ill, 27; IV, 14; 9, 12, 15; XXXV, 33 seq., 54,
V, 11; XIII, 22; XXXVI, 33. 55; XXXVI, 21.
A/tetana, (A.) XXI, 15. Ahaiikrita, (B.) XVIII, 17. (A.)
Adhishâna,(B.)III, 4 o; XVIII, 14. XXXVI, 22.
Adhyatma, (A.) XX, 40; LXI, 4. Ahangata, (S.) II, 7.
Anadiyoga, (S.) IV, 20.
Anamaya, (B.) II, 51 XIV, 6. ; Atman, (B.) II, 41, 43, 44, 45, 55, 64
Aniketa,(B.) XII, 19; (A.) XXVIII, III, 6, 13, 17, 27, 43; IV, 6, 7,
42. 21, 27, 35, 38, 40, 41, 42; V, 7,
Anukalpa, (S.) VI, 11. II, 16, 17, 21, 25, 26; VI, 5, 6,
Anr//as, (S.) Ill, 37. 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 18, 19, 20,
Anta, (B.) II, 16. 25, 26, 28, 29, 32, 36, 47; VII,
Antariksha, (S.) VI, 4. 18, 19; VIII, 2, 12, 15, 19; IX,
Apara, (B.) IV, 4; VII, 5. (A.) 5, 26, 28,31, 34; X, 11, 15, 16,
XXVII, 34; XXXV, 56. 18,19, 20; XI, 3,4, 24, 47, 50;
Aparaspara Sambhuta, (A.) XVI, 18. XII, 11, 14; XIII, 7, 22, 24,
Aparyapta, (B.) I, 10. 28, 29, 31, 32; XIV, 24; XV,
Apratish/a. See Pratish/â. II, 13, 17; XVI, 9, 17, 18, 21,
Abhikrama, (B.) II, 40. 22; XVII, 16, 19; XVIII, 16,
Abhidhya, (S.) II, 11. 27, 37, 39, 49, 5i, 54- (S.) I,
Abhyasa, (B.) VI, 35, 44 XII, 9, ; 10, 6, 7; II, 10, 15, 18, 30, 32;
12; XVIII, 36. III, 8, 9, 41, 54; IV, 22; V,
Ayana, (B.) I, 11. 12 ; VI, 11, 16, 25, 26. (A.) I,
Alolutva, (B.) XVI, 2. 39, 40; II, 3, 7, 8, 18, 36; III,

Avyakta, (B.) II, 25, 28; VII, 24; 3 seq., 30; IV, 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10,
VIII, 18,20, 21; IX, 4; XII, 1, 15 seq., 42,46,51,56,58; V, 5,
3,5; XIII, 5. (A.) I, 42; HI, 9, 11; VIII, 23; X, 9, 15, 17;
6; XII, 1, 3, 5; XIX, 8; XX, XI, XII, 21, 22; XIII, 22, 24;
9;
20,47; XXI, 1 XXIV, 22, 24, ; XV, 29; XVI, 3, 12; XVII, 11,
25; XXV, 1; XXVIII, 25,35, 18 seq.; XVIII, 8; XIX, 1,7;
37; XXIX, 17; XXXI, 55; XX, 16,47; XXV, 1,2, 3,8;
XXXII, XXXIII, 1, 5;
12; XXVI, 4; XXVII, 8, 9, 39, 5i,
XXXV,i6,33,34,5 5 ;XXXVII, 53,54,63,64,66; XXIX, 12,22;
7, 23 seq. XXXI, 45, 46, 49; XXXII, 6,
Asangraha, (S.) Ill, 27. 17; XXXIII, 2,3,5; XXXV,
Asiddhi, (S.) Ill, 25. 20, 35 seq., 55, 56; XXXVI,
Ahankara, (B.) II, 71; III, 27, 28; 4, 23, 33 seq.
VII, 4; VIII, 1, 3; XII, 13; Adadhriki, (S.) VI, 4.
XIII, 5,8; XVI, 18; XVII,5; Apas, (S.) VI, 4.
XVIII, 24, 53, 58, 59. (A.) XX, Apomaya, (A.) XIII, 19.
Avasatha, (A.) IV, 34, 35. Duranvaya, (A.) XXXVI, 17.

Avr/tti, (B.) V, 17 ; VIII, 16, 23, 26. Deva, (S.)II, 8; VI, 4.
A
(A.) Ill, 29. Daiva, (B.) XVIII, 14.
Asya, (S.) II, 7. Dhamawja, (S.) Ill, 41.
Dharaa,(B.)VIII,i2. (A.) XXVII,
Uta,(B.)I,39; XIV, 9, n. (S.) V, 57.
3. (A.)XI,i 4 ;XIV,2i;XXV, Dharayan, (B.) V, 9. (A.) IV, 50.
8; XXXI, 3,7; XXXV, 43; Dhish/ita, (B.) XIII, 17.
XXXVI, 28.
Uttama, (B.) XIV, 14; XV, 17. Niya>taati, (A.) V, 7.
Utsa, (S.) VI, 13. Nirvana, (B.) VI, 15. See Brahma-
Uddeja, (B.) X, 40. (A.) I, 3. And nirvaa, (A.) IV, 12.
see (A.) XXVIII, 37. Nirvuesha, (A.) XXI, 13.
Upapatti, (A.) II, 2, 30, 42 ; III, 10. Nivr/tti, (B.) XVI, 7; XVIII, 30.
Nishâ,(B.)III,3; V,i2,i7; XVII,
Ritvig, (S.) VI, 10. 1; XVIII, 5 o. (A.) 11,38; V,
27 ; VII, 12 ; XV, 24.
Karmayoga, (B.) Ill, 3, 7 V, 2 ; Nyasta, (A.) V, 3.
XIII, 24.
Kamakara,(B.) V, 12; XVI, 23. Pada, (B.) VIII, 11 XIII, 4. ; (A.)
Kamayana, (A.) XIII, 4. XX, 24; XXXV, 3.
Karyakarana, (B.) XIII, 20. Para. See Apara.
Ku&ira, (A.) XXIV, 13, 14. Parasu, (S.) V, 1.
Ku/astha, (B.) VI, 8; XII, 3; XV, Pariwama, (A.) XXXVI, 37.
16. Parita, (A.) II, 13.
Kr/ta, (B.)XV, 11; XVIII, 16.
Ketu, (S.) VI, 5.
Kshara, (B.) VIII, 4 XIV, 16, 18.;
(A.) Ill, 27. See Akshara.

Kshema, (B.) I, 46 11,45; IX, 22.
;
(A.) XXXI, 45; XXXII, 4.
Gati, (B.) IV, 17 ; VIII, 26 ; XII, 5.

(S.) I, 10. (A.) XXXIV, 1.
Guasankhyana, (B.) XVIII, 19. '*> "59 "y> st -..*, j, .".
1
Grihita, (B.) VI, 25. And see VI, 35. 7; XVIII, 40, 59. (A.) II, 3 5
Grahaanika, (A.) XXX, 6. 111,26; XXIII, 13; XXIV, 23.
tishâ, (B.) Ill, 15; VI, 38; XIV,
^Takradhara, (S.) I, 23. 27; XV, 3. And see XVI, 8.
#ara, (S.) Ill, 17. mana, {t\.j
Pradhana, (A.) Ill,
111, 20,
26, 33 IV, 47; ;
;
iTitta,(B.) XVI, 16. (A.) XXXVI, 27. XX, 19; XXIV, 23; XXXII,
ATodana, (B.) XVIII, 18. 9 ; XXXV, 32 seq.
Kodya, (S.) Ill, 27. Pramada, (S.) II, 5, 7.
Prayatamana, (S.) II, 39.
Gana, (S.) II, 27. Pravritti, (B.) XI, 31 ; XIV, 12, 22;
Gati, (A.) I, 21; II, 18; III, 14, 33; XV, 4; XVI, 7; XVII, 30, 46;
XXXI 8 XVIII, 30, 46. (A.) XXI, 9;
Giva, (B.)VIl',5; XV,
(A.) II, 7. XXVIII, 26; XXXIII, 3;
16,17, 25, 28, 30, 33; III, 7,9, XXXVI, 37.
10; IV, 43, 50. Prasanga, (B.) XVIII, 34.
Gnanayoga, (B.) Ill, 3; XV, 1.
Bala, (B.) XVI, 18; XVII, 5; XVIII,
Tanu, (B.) VII, 21. (S.) I, 36. 53.
Tyaga, (B.) XVIII, 1, 2, 4, 8, 9, 10, Bahu, (S.) Ill, 44.
12. (A.) XXXIII, 7. Buddhi, (B.) I, 23 II, 39, 41,
;
44, 49,
Trivishmpa,(S.) 11,26. (A.)XVIII, 4 . 5> 5i. 52,53,63,65,66; III, 1,
SANSKRIT INDEX. 441
2, 4, 26, 40, 42, 43; IV, 18; V, VI, 29, 31; VII, 6, 9, 11, 26, 27;
11,17, 20, 28; VI, 9,21, 23, 25, VIII, 3,19, 20, 22; IX, 4,5, 6,
43 ; VII, 4, 10, 24; VIII, 7; X, 7,8,11,13,25,29; X, 5, 15,20,
4, 10; XII, 4, 8, 14; XIII, 5, 22, 39; XI, 2, 15, 55; XII, 4,
30; XV, 20; XVI, 9; XVIII, 13; XIII, 5, 15, 16, 27, 30, 34 5
16, 17, 29 seq., 37, 49, 50, 51, XIV, 3; XV, 13, 16; XVI, 2,6;
57. (S.) II, 1, 31, 35, 37, 53, XVII, 4, 6; XVIII, 20,21,46,
57; III, 2; IV, 11. (A.) I, 10, 54,61. (A.) I, 17; II, 22; III,
14, 46; II, 7, 38; IV, 8, 12, 7, 16, 28, 29, 33; IV, 3,11, 27;
64; V, 19, 24; VII, 2, 6 seq., 22; V,8; VII, 15; XIII, 18, 20,24;
IX, 10; X, 4; XIII, 26; XV, XIV, 5; XVII,2 4 ;XX,
7 ,8,i6,
24; XVII, 14, 16, 17; XVIII, 1, 19, 21, 22, 30, 32, 34, 47, 48, 49
4, 7; XIX, 6, 7, 12; XX,
6, XXI, 9, 10, 18, 23; XXII, 8;
20; XXI, 2; XXIII, 7; XXV, XXIII, 1, 6; XXV, 9, 10, 11;
2, 6, 13; XXVII, 9, 10, 15, XXVI, 2, 5; XXVII, 1 seq., 18
16, 31; XXVIII, 24 seq., 35; seq., 32, 34, 37, 38, 41 seq., 46,
XXX, 1 ; XXXI, 44, 50, 55; 48, 51, 64, 66, 67; XXVIII, 8,
XXXII, 12, 1.7; XXXIV, 17 11, 12 ; XXIX,4, 5, 11, 15, 16
seq.; XXXV, 17, 22, 32, 55; XXX, 1, 8, 11, 24; XXXI, 18,
XXXVI, 2, 30. 24, 27, 34, 40,
41, 49, 54;
Buddhiyoga, (B.) II, 49; X, 10; XXXII, 6, 9, 13, 14; XXXIV,
XVIII, 57. 12; XXXV, 34, 36, 37, 39, 54,
Brahman, (B.) Ill, 15; IV, 24, 25, 31, 56; XXXVI, 1, 2, 6, 9, 10, 12,
32; V, 6, 10, 19, 20, 21, 24; 13, i9> 39.
VI, 14, 20, 27, 28, 38, 44 VII, ; Bhfttatman, (B.) VI, 14; XIII, 3;
29; VIII, 1, 3, 11, 13, 16, 17, XXXVI, 4.
24; X, 12; XI, 2; XIII, 4, 12, Bhfitadi. See Bhfita.
30; XIV, 3, 4, 26, 27; XVII,
23, 24; XVIII, 42, 50, 53, 54. Matva, (S.) Ill, 17. (A.) XXXV, 32.
(S.) II, 5, 34, 36, 37; III, 44, Manasvin, (S.) Ill, 98.
47 5 IV, 2, 14; V, 7, 21; VI, 2. Mahat, (A.) XX, 47; XXVI, 1;
(A.) I, 12, 13, 15, 42; II, 24; XXVIII,3 5 XXX, 9 XXXV,
; ;
III, 6; IV, 14, 26, 47, 50, 60, 33 seq.; XXXVI, 4.

62 V, 10, 17; VI, 22 IX, 17;
; ; Matra, (B.) II, 14. (A.) XXXI, 21,40.
XI, 8, 16, 17; XII, 20; XVII, Maya, (B.) IV, 6; VII, 14,15, 25;
26 ; XIX, 4 XX, 1, 18, 22, 34,
; XVIII, 61. (A.) XXXVI, 20.
38; XXIII, XXVII, 11, 14,
10; Marga, (S.) Ill, 9.
38, 49, 515 XXVIII, 12, 13; Mukta, (B.) IV, 23. (A.) III,2i.
XXIX, 16; XXXII, 1, 2, 4,8, Mauna, (S.) II, 41 III, 1, 2, 20, 45.
;
14; XXXIII, 1; XXXIV, 4 6; ,
XXXVI, 5 seq., 9, 29, 35. Yatra, (A.) XXXI,

23, 32; XLVI,
Brahmanirvawa, (B.) II, 72 ; V,24seq. 23. Andsee (B.) Ill, 8.
Yukta, (B.) II, 61, 66; III, 26; IV,
Bhakti, (B.) VII, 17 VIII, 10, 22
; ; 18; V, 6,7, 8, 12, 21, 23; VI, 8,
IX, 14, 26, 29; XI, 54; XII, 14,18,29,47; VII,i7,3o; VIII,
17, 19; XIII, 10; XIV, 26; 14; IX, 14; X, 4, 10; XII, 1,
XVIII, 54, 55, 68. 2; XIII, 2; XVIII, 28. (A.)
Bhagadeva, (A.) XXVIII, 15. IV, 18 seq., 26, 66; V, 11 XI, ;
Bhavana, (B.) II, 66. (A.) XXI, 14. 1; XXXI, 8, 16,30.

Bhavayata, (B.) Ill, 11, 12. And see Yoga, (B.) II, 39, 45, 48, 49, 50, 53
(B.) VIII, 6. (A.) VIII, 24; 111,3,7; IV, 1, 2, 3, 27, 28, 38,
XXII, 15; XXVI, 4. 41,42; V, 1, 2,4,5,6,7, 21; VI,
Bhasha, (B.) II, 54. 2, 3, 4,12,16,17,19,20,23,29,
Bhinnavr/tti, (B.) XXI, 13. 33, 36, 37, 41, 44; VII, 1, 25;
Bhuta, (B.) II, 28, 30, 34, 69 ; III, 14, VIII, 8, 10, 12, 27; IX, 5, 22,
i 8 , 335 IV, 6, 35; V, 7, 25, 29; 28; X, 7,10, 18; XI, 1, 4, 8,9,
442 BHAGAVADGITA, SANATSUGAtIyA, ANUGITA.
18,47; XII, 1,6,9, 11; XIII, Vyutthana,(A.)XXIX,i6;XXXIV,

10, 24; XIV, 26; XVI, 1; 13,14.
XVIII, 33, 52, 57, 75, 78. (S.)
11,7,9, 10? 20, 21; V, 18. (A.) Sastrakara, (S.) 111,5.
I, 13, 29; III, 13; IV, 15, 17, Sukra, (S.) VI, 2.
18,33,66; X, 14; XV, 28 seq.,

XX,35;XXV,6;XXVIII, 2 6; Sankhya, (A.) XXXII, 17.
XXXV, 25; XXXVI, 22 seq. Sangraha, (B.) Ill, 20, 25; VIII, 12 ;
See Kshema. XVIII, 18. (A.) XXXI, 39.

Yogin,(B.)III,3;IV,25;V,ii,2 4 ;
Sanghata, (B.) XIII, 6.
VI, 1,2,8, 10, 15,19, 27, 28, 31, Sa%na, (B.) I, 7. (S.)V,2,n. (A.)
32, 42, 45, VIII, 14,
46, 47; XXI,i 5 ; XXXV, 11; XXXVI,
23,25,27,28; X, 17; XII, 14; 25.
XV, 11. (S.) VI, 1 seq. (A.) Safi^nita, (B.) XI, 1. (A.) XXVII,
Ill, 21 ; IV, 15, 22, 23. 59.
Yoni, (S.) IV, 5. (A.) V, 24 XX, ; Sattva, (B.) II, 45 ; X, 36, 41; XIII,
32; XXIV, 8; XXVII, 38; 26; XIV, 6; XVI, 1 ; XVII, 3,
XXXII, 1. 8; XVIII, 10, 40. (A.) II, 8,
27; XIII, 23; XXVII, 58;
Rati, (S.) V, 19. (A.) XXVIII, 16. XXVIII, 41; XXXII, 17;
Rupa, (A.) IV, 9, 13 seq. XXXIII, 6, 8 seq.; XXXIV,
16; XXXV, 7 seq.; XXXVI,
Linga, (S.) VI, 11. 36.
Samadhi, (B.) II, 44, 53, 54; IV, 24;
Vadanya, (S.) V, 2. VI, 7; XII, 9; XVII, 11.
Varga, (S.) Ill, 9, 18. Samasita, (A.) XIV, 6.
Vikarman, (B.) IV, 17. Samahvaya, (A.) VI, 13.
Vikara, (S.) II, 21. (A.) XXIV, 23. Samudra, (S.) IV, 19.
Vi^nana, (B.) Ill, 41; VI, 8; VII, Sampratish^M. See Pratishâ.
21; IX, 1 XVIII, 42. (A.) I,
; Samvid, (A.) XI, 6.
20; V, 2; VI, 11; VII, 5; Samstha, (B.) VI, 15.
XXXI, 5. IV, 19; VI,
Salila, (S.) 4, 11.
Vinirwaya, (A.) IV, 63. Savitri, (A.) XXIX, 6.
Vibhaga^na, (A.) XXXV, 27. And Sutra, (B.) XIII, 4.
see XXIV, 25. Stabdha, (B.) XVI, 17; XVIII, 28.
Vimarga, (S.) II, 7. And see (A.) XXI, 12.
VLresha, (A.)XX, 21, 48; XXX, Smr/ti, (A.) XXVI, 5.
9; XXXII, 13; XXXV, 7; Srotas, (A.) II, 24; XXI, 3, 31.
XXXVI, 7, 28. And see XXII, 16; XXIII, 13
Vijvarupa, (S.) IV, 1. XXIV, 7 seq.
Vishamedhamana, (S.) Ill, 18. Svabhava, (B.) II, 7 ; V, 14 VIII, 3; ;
VishM, (S.) VI, 4. XVII, 2; XVIII, 41 seq., 47,

Visarga, (A.) XXVII, 26. 60. (S.)II, 40. (A.) VII, 3;
Vismaya, (A.) XXIII, 7. VIII, 3; XI, 10; XIII, 2, 4,5,
Vira, (A.) XIV, 17. 22; XXXIV, 12; XXXVI, 11.
Vr/gina, (S.) Ill, 5. Svarga, (S.) II, 26.
Vega, (S.) II, 11. (A.) II, 11;
XXVII, 62. Ha, (B.) II, 9 . (A.) VIII, 9,15,18,
Veda, (S.) Ill, 35, 38 seq. 20; XIV, 4; XV, 4 ; XVIII,
Vedya, (S.) Ill, 38 seq. 3^ XX, 5; XXXI, 5.
Vaidya, (A.) XX, 36. Hitakamya, (B.) X, 1.
Vyakarawa, (S.) Ill, 45. Hma, (S.) V, 21.
TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS. 443
V
a
a
^ ^ ^
A
"^ 5
...
* * *
I
n n *^ ^ n- '
nsscm:
.....
D
J
* U oJ-U k)o^
Si
a
.2
-D !\) 1
'o ! *> _ kJoJ-U "
^ . b> <x->
*V 3 10j
1
Ph
?
i ; ; ; j-ac
^-s ^"N ^
a
<u
N
\~ . bo 55 *?
: : : ; ! ^ \ ^ \ \
'.'.'.'.
!
Iff *T pr \ & 1* |F 1* IF i* |T
r *
S
i D
8
a
3
U ^ ^ .^ r55 ^ g *> H> l
1
O
En
w 8 bo *
.S
O #
:::::
H
GO
: I'lll -II
'
c8
00
p
cm
^ ^ y
O
i 1 &-| &
:
1 . 1" %
to
.a !
g 3
Ph
03
1 QQ 1

s i i a 1 a J ||
'
^
00
03
1
*
!
* S
8
p -*
S
:

z 8 s a *
w g
.2J
| * c
a,

I
:
> i>. a } ft O h N
-( rHf-H
W
i-H r-
> CO N.
444 TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS
V
4>
** -^ ^g . . c! ~-< OQ
o
U
. ,
t
1
#*
C c; . r r . *-i^r\ . .9 D M
1
<
*>. ; " : 9 ^ *> b*^>
!)
:
^ ^ :
**-^
1
I
Ph
S* *b^ <3 o .o D-o . .
:^^
1
Ph
*> 9 . . . . ^
1 m : :
init.
d
8 ? ^^ ^^ -^ 3 ^
*T3
'.
I ; I ; . . .
p- .
R. ! |c P . hr St
*.
fr |S |8 ! '.
\
in
M
<
r
* .

#

8X8
H

W
Q.

\
*
s **=>
cs^
~ . . .
00 f
N N.
51
1 "5Ji "S>
o <o t ">a
s B
1
2 > -* -5 . -d jg fl ^ QQ N .
=3 2
13
* ' 1

rH W
00
to rS OQ
pi
*S3 OQ CQ Of3 * 3
5? a i C8
5 i-i C3
I 2 .2 'E 'E
1 3 < a 3 i .s .3 ^ CQ Ph 3 Ph Or
^ : ?o 8 a a
Q
s DQ
3 1 .a * *
8
* s s
a :\3
'a.
2 ; go
00
tH
Gb
i-H
o th d
CI W W
COTH5COt^00050i-4C5
NNNNMNNCOMCi CO ^ ) CO s
3 CO CO CO CO CO
FOR THE SACRED BOOKS OF THE EAST. 445

&
p-

co -a
;
a * ;
H
a '

'

i

r i!
uionn 1 Q i 1 #"
-* A "^ ^ : :
-
3 ^ : :
: :
a ju -> > : y : . t- . )->::

<<
?
'
.
-n;; N* . .
50
! : :
ia- : * :i :
':* ts3
lo to fr & & * IX jy F r * 1 tr ".

I - Br -P |?

*
5

"*
3S ^ ! 8
. . . . s**
'
S ^
pd J3 p.
-a* 3 a * J ^
09
Q
I 03 W
.a 8 . oq qj
Hi
3
03
.2
-S ^ IP
'3 2 *
* a 'fa
, C .2
ft
H & go
CO Oi o i-H W CO rH OOQOHWCOTfi5(OS0005
CO CO ^
446 TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS.
6 .. ^. . . . . .
.9
V
JCti

03 <c on
..
. . 3 <s <1J <v <cg
'5
^ O :3 *
Jo
i
I-
:
:
j,
M .,|. : : : : |,. |, |, : : :
|^ : : : : :
<
o
2
: ,| ^ |, lj. : : :
:.|^ :
^ : : :
:.^ : :
: : :
a
.2
. :
i
ii |, y, : : : :.|^ : -^ : : : :;j. : : : :
1
; .
^
.
.... ^ ....
c !a *
o . .
.... So/ ... ^ . . . .
g
'
. .

* 3
^ -*
i ** ....
~ *s*C
^9^

'

:^-*^
'
a ;

;

;

"
. . . . . .
to * * " a> *
J3
; ip ^ nriwr|g? îp i^^ ^ :; ^,rv : :
:^^ :

; i
in
'.
43 - -
W
m
<
S
0,
J
8
u *S*S ^"S*s S
O
55
CO Cfl
o *u >o <i - < s S 'C ? S <S 2.aS.6|,3 -S- * x s a

03
*r=; .2
4 ' ^
rS
.2 08
ctf
&
>*
*
* * !S
S
.
'
.SrtP * * ' bD P E 2 _

+3
e3
' ' J3 _ s 2 S 3 c3
w -1 "-3
fe ? & .2 * ' 8> .a * 3 *> '-3 * 1 1
o
> :|iMsj
^ 3 ^ ? |^ fJJ ôph.g
>S 1 |1 1 ,2 ro
1
? *
1
e
*3 *Si
.
i
-i
'-a
_2
s o ^ . a
i2 o * _g o " 2 'S .2 o
* C fl 3 e3 3 "^ 3 -*f * * 3 + c
I i
1 c
1
HNW^5N00OOH(NW^5ON000}OHNM^
,-HrH,-HT-(,-lT-<r-l,-lrHrH<M<M<M<M<MO 3 c
April 1882.
BOOKS
PUBLISHED FOR THE UNIVERSITY BY
HENRY FROWDE,
AT THE OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,
7 PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON.
ALSO TO BE HAD AT THE
CLARENDON PRESS DEPOSITORY, OXFORD.
LEXICONS, GRAMMARS, &c.

{See also Clarendon Press Series pp. 26, 29.)
A Greek-English Lexicon, by Henry George Liddell, D.D.,

and Robert Scott, D.D. Sixth Edition, Revised and Augmented,
1870. 4to. cloth, i/. 1 6s.
A copious Greek-English Vocabulary, compiled from the

best authorities. 1850. 241110. bound, 3s.
A Practical Introduction to Greek Accentuation, by H. W.
Chandler, M.A. Second Edition, Revised, 1881. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Etymologicon Magnum. Ad Codd. MSS. recensuit et notis
variorum instruxit Thomas Gaisford, S.T.P. 1848. fol. cloth, il. 12s.
Suidae Lexicon. Ad Codd. MSS. recensuit Thomas Gaisford,

S.T.P. Tomi III. 1834. fol. cloth, 2L 2s,
Seheller's Lexicon of the Latin Tongue, with the German ex-

planations translated into English by J. E. Riddle, M.A. 1835. fol.
cloth, il, is,
A Latin Dictionary, founded on Andrews' edition of Freund's

Latin Dictionary, revised, enlarged, and in great part rewritten by
Charlton T. Lewis, Ph.D., and Charles Short, LL.D., Professor of
Latin in Columbia College, New York. 1879. t0 côth *' S 4 *
5
Scriptores Rei Metricae. Edidit Thomas Gaisford, S.T.P.

Tomi III. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Sold separately:
Hephaestion, Terentianus Maurus, Proclus, cum annotationibus, etc.
Tomi II. 10s. Scriptores Latini. 5s.
[a] b
Clarendon Press, Oxford.
The Book of Hebrew Hoots, by Abu '1-Walid Marwan ibn

Janah, otherwise called Rabbi Yonah. Now first edited, with an
Appendix, by Ad. Neubauer. 1875. 4to. cloth, 2I. p. 6d.
A Treatise on the use of the Tenses in Hebrew. By S. R.
Driver, M.A. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Extra fcap. 8vo.
cloth, 7s. 6d.
Hebrew Accentuation of Psalms, Proverbs, and Job. By

William Wickes, D.D. Demy 8vo. stiff cover, 5s.
Thesaurus Syriacus : collegerunt Quatremere, Bernstein, Lors-

bach, Arnoldi, Field : edidit R. Payne Smith, S.T.P.R.
Fasc. I-V. 1868-79. sm *1' eacn > ^- Is '
-
Vol. I, containing Fasc. I-V. sm. fol. cloth, 5/. 5s.
A Practical Grammar of the Sanskrit Language, arranged

with reference to the Classical Languages of Europe, for the use of
English Students, by Monier Williams, M.A., Boden Professor of San-
skrit. Fourth Edition, 1877. 8vo. cloth, 15$.
A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, Etymologically and Philo-

logically arranged, with special reference to Greek, Latin, German, Anglo-
Saxon, English, and other cognate Indo-European Languages. By Monier
Williams, M. A., Boden Professor of Sanskrit. 1872. 4to. cloth, 4Z.i4s.6rf.
Nalopdkhyanam. Story of Nala, an Episode of the Maha-

Bharata : the Sanskrit text, with a copious Vocabulary, and an im-
proved version of Dean Milman's Translation, by Monier Williams, M.A.
Second Edition, Revised and Improved, 1879. 8vo. cloth , 15s.
Sakuntala. A
Sanskrit Drama, in seven Acts. Edited by
Monier Williams, M.A. Second Edition, 1876. 8vo. cloth t 21s.
An Anglo-Saxon Dictionary, by the late Joseph Bosworth,

D.D., Professor of Anglo-Saxon, Oxford. New edition. In the Press,
An Icelandic-English Dictionary, based on the MS. col-

lections of the late Richard Cleasby. Enlarged and completed by
G. Vigfiisson. With an Introduction, and Life of Richard Cleasby,
by G. Webbe Dasent, D.C.L. 1874. 4to. cloth, 3/. 75.
A List of English Words the Etymology of which is
illustrated by comparison with Icelandic. Prepared in the form
of an Appendix to the above. By W. W. Skeat, M.A., stitched, 2s,
A Handbook of the Chinese Language. Parts I and II,

Grammar and Chrestomathy. By James Summers. 1 863. 8vo. half
bound, ll. 8s.
Cornish Drama (The Ancient). Edited and translated by E.

Norris, Esq., with a Sketch of Cornish Grammar, an Ancient Cornish
Vocabulary, etc. 2 vols. 1859. 8vo. cloth, ll. is.
The Sketch of Cornish Grammar separately, stitched, 2s. 6d.
An Etymological Dictionary of the English Language,

arranged on an Historical Basis. By "W. W. Skeat, M.A., Elrington
and Bosworth Professor of Anglo-Saxon in the University of Cambridge.
4to. cloth, 2l. 4s.
Part IV., completing the Work, 10s. 6 d.
A Concise Etymological Dictionary of the English Lan-
guage. By W. W. Skeat, M.A. Crown 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6d.
GREEK CLASSICS, See.
Aeschyli quae supersunt in Codice Laurentiano quoad effici

potuit et ad cognitionem necesse est visum typis descripta edidit
R. Merkel. 1861. Small folio, cloth, 1/. is.
Aeschylus: Tragoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil.

Dindorfli. Second Edition, 1851. 8vo. cloth, e,s.6d.
Aeschylus: Annotationes Guil. Dindorfii. partes II. 1841,
8vo. cloth, 1 os.
Aeschylus : Scholia Graeca, ex Codicibus aucta et emendata a

Guil. Dindorfio. 1 851. 8vo. cloth, 5s.
Sophocles: Tragoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione et cum
commentariis Guil. Dindorfii. Third Edition, 2 vols. i860, fcap. 8vo,
cloth, il. is.
Each Play separately, limp, 2s. 6d.
The Text alone, printed on writing paper, with large
margin, royal i6mo. cloth, 8s.
The Text alone, square i6mo. cloth, is.6d.

Each Play separately, limp, 6d. (See also pp. 31, 32.)
Sophocles : Tragoediae et Fragmenta cum Annotatt. Guil,
Dindorfii. Tomi II. 1849. 8vo. cloth, 10s.
The Text, Vol. I. 5s. 6d. The Notes, Vol. II. 4s. 6d.
Sophocles: Scholia Graeca:
Vol. I. ed. P. Elmsley, A.M. 1825. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Vol. II. ed. Guil. Dindorflus. 1 85 2. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Euripides: Tragoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil. Din-
dorfii. Tomi II. 1834. 8vo. cloth, 10s.
Euripides : Annotationes Guil. Dindorfii. Partes II. 1840.
8vo. cloth, 10s.
Euripides: Scholia Graeca, ex Codicibus aucta et emendata a
Guil. Dindorfio. Tomi IV. 1863. 8vo. cloth, il. 16s.
Euripides : Alcestis,ex recensione Guil. Dindorfii. 1834. 8vo.
sewed, 2s. 6d.
Aristophanes : Comoediae et Fragmenta, ex recensione Guil.

Dindorfii. Tomi II. 1835. 8vo. cloth, lis. (See page 30.)
B 2
Aristophanes: Annotationes Guil. Dindorfii. Partes II. 1837.

8vo. cloth, lis.
Aristophanes : Scholia Graeca, ex Codicibus aucta et emendata

a Guil. Dindorfio. Partes III. 1839. 8vo. cloth, 1/.
Aristophanem, Index in: J.Caravellae. 1822. 8vo. cloth, 3/.

Metra Aeschyli Sophoclis Euripidis et Aristophanis. De-
scripta a Guil. Dindorfio. Accedit Chronologia Scenica. 1 842. 8vo.
cloth, 5s.
Anecdota Graeca Oxoniensia. Edidit J. A. Cramer, S.T.P.

Tomi IV. 1835. 8vo. cloth, il. 2s.
Anecdota Graeca e Godd. MSS. Bibliothecae Regiae Parisien-

sis. Edidit J. A. Cramer, S.T.P. Tomi IV. 1839. 8vo. cloth, il. 2S.
Apsinis et Longini Rhetorica. E Codicibus MSS. recensuit

Joh. Bakius. 1849. 8vo. cloth, 3s.
Aristoteles; ex recensione Immanuelis Bekkeri. Accedunt In-

dices Sylburgiani. Tomi
XI. 1837. 8vo. cloth, 2/. 10s.
The volumes (except vol. IX.) may be had separately, price 5s. 6d. each.
Aristotelis Ethica Kicomaehea, ex recensione Immanuelis
Bekkeri. Crown 8vo. cloth, 5s.
Choerobosci Dictata in Theodosii Canones, necnon Epimerismi
in Psalmos. E Codicibus MSS. edidit Thomas Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomi
III. 1842. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Demosthenes : ex recensione Guil. Dindorfii. Tomi I. II. III.

IV. 1846. 8vo. cloth, il. is.
Demosthenes : Tomi V. VI. VII. Annotationes Interpretum.

1849. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Demosthenes: Tomi VIII. IX. Scholia. 1851. 8vo. cloth, ioj,

Harpocrationis Lexicon, ex recensione G. Dindorfii. Tomi
II. 1854. 8vo. cloth, ios.6d.
Heracliti Ephesii Beliquiae. Recensuit I. Bywater, M.A.
Appendicis loco additae sunt Diogenis Laertii Vita Heracliti, Particulae
Hippocratei De Diaeta Libri Primi, Epistolae Heracliteae. 1877. 8vo.
cloth, price 6s.
Herculanensium Voluminum Partes II. 1824. 8vo. cloth, 1 o j.

Homerus Ilias, cum brevi Annotatione C. G. Heynii. Acce-
:
dunt Scholia minora. Tomi II. 1834. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Homerus: Ilias, ex rec. Guil. Dindorfii. 1856. 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6d.
Homerus : Scholia Graeca in Iliadem. Edited by Prof. W. Din-
dorf, after a new collation of the Venetian MSS. by D. B. Monro,
M.A., Fellow of Oriel College.
Vols. I. II. 1875. 8vo. cloth, 24s.
Vols. III. IV. 1877. 8vo. cloth, 26s.
Homerus: Odyssea, ex rec. Guil. Dindorfii. 1855. 8vo. cloth,

55. 6d.
Homerus : Scholia Graeca in Odysseam. Edidit Guil. Dindorfius.

Tomi II. 1855. 8vo. cloth, 15s. 6d.
Homerum, Index in : Seberi. 1780. 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d.
Homer A Complete
: Concordance to the Odyssey and Hymns
of Homer ; to which
is added a Concordance to the Parallel Passages
Odyssey,
in the Iliad, and Hymns. By Henry Dunbar, M.D., Member of
the General Council, University of Edinburgh. 1880. 410. cloth, il. is.
Oratores Attici ex recensione Bekkeri

I. Antiphon, Andocides, et Lysias. 1822. 8vo. cloth, *js.
II. Isocrates. 1822. 8vo. cloth, *]s.
III. Isaeus, Aeschines, Lycurgus,Dinarchus,etc. 1823. 8vo. cloth, *js.
Scholia Graeca in Aeschinem et Isocratem. Edidit G. Dindor-

fius. 1852. 8vo. cloth, 4s.
Paroemiographi Graeci, quorum pars nunc primum ex Codd.

MSS. vulgatur. Edidit T.Gaisford, S.T.P. 1836. 8vo. cloth, 5$. 6d.
Plato : The Apology, with a revised Text and English Notes,

and a Digest of Platonic Idioms, by James Riddell, M.A. 1878. 8vo.
cloth, 8s. 6d.
Plato : Philebus, with a revised Text and English Notes, by

Edward Poste, M.A. i860. 8vo. cloth, p. 6d.
Plato : Sophistes and Politieus, with a revised Text and Eng-
lish Notes, by L. Campbell, M.A. 1866. 8vo. cloth, iSs.
Plato : Theaetetus, with a revised Text and English Notes, by

L.Campbell, M.A. 1 861. 8vo. cloth, gs.
Plato : The Dialogues,

translated into English, with Analyses
and Introductions, by B. Jowett, M.A., Regius Professor of Greek.
A new Edition in 5 volumes, medium 8vo. 1875. cloth, 3Z. 10s.
Plato : The Republic, translated into English, with an Analysis

and Introduction, by B. Jowett, M.A. Medium 8vo. cloth, I2s.6d.
Plato : Index to. Compiled for the Second Edition of Professor

Jowett's Translation of the Dialogues. By Evelyn Abbott, M.A. 1875.
8vo. paper covers, 2s.6d,
Plotinus. Edidit F. Creuzer. Tomi III. 1835. 4to. 1/. 8j.
Stobaei Florilegium. Ad MSS.fidem emendavit et supplevit

T. Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomi IV. 1822. 8vo. cloth, 1/.
Stobaei Eclogarum Physicarum et Ethicarum libri duo. Ac-
cedit Hieroclis carmina Pythagoreorum. Ad
Commentarius in aurea
MSS. Codd. recensuit T.Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomill. 1850. Zvo. cloth, us.
B3
Thucydides Translated into English, with Introduction, Mar-

:
ginal Analysis, Notes, and Indices. By B. Jowett, M.A., Regius Pro-

fessor of Greek. 2 vols. 1881. Medium 8vo. cloth, i/. 12s.
Xenophon : Historia Graeca, ex recensione et cum annotatio-

nibus L. Dindorfii. Second Edition, 1852. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Xenophon: Expeditio Gyri, ex rec. et cum annotatt. L. Din-

dorfii. Second Edition, 1855. 8vo. cloth, 10s, 6d.
Xenophon : Institutio Gyri, ex rec. et cum annotatt. L. Din-

dorfii. 1857. 8vo. cloth, ios.6d.
Xenophon : Memorabilia Socratis, ex rec. et cum annotatt. L.

Dindorfii. 1862. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d.
Xenophon : Opuscula Politica Equestria et Venatica cum Arri-

ani Libello de Venatione, ex rec. et cum annotatt. L. Dindorfii. 1866.
8vo. cloth, 1 os. 6d.
THE HOLY SCRIPTURES, &c.
The Holy Bible in the earliest English Versions, made from the
Latin Vulgate by John Wycliffe and his followers : edited by the Rev.
J. Forshall and Sir F. Madden. 4 vols. 1850. royal 4to. cloth, 3/. 3s.
Also reprinted from the above, with Introduction and Glossary

by W. W. Skeat, M.A.,
The "New Testament in English, according to the Version by

John Wycliffe, about and Revised by John Purvey, about
a.d. 1380,
a.d. 1388. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 6s.
The Books of Job, Psalms, Proverbs, Ecelesiastes, and the

Song of Solomon: according to the Wycliffite Version made by
Nicholas de Hereford, about a.d. 1381, and Revised by John Purvey,
about a.d. 1388. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
The Holy Bible: an exact reprint, page for page, of the Author-
ized Version published in the year 161 1. Demy 4to. half bound, i7. is.
Vetus Testamentum Graeee cum Variis Lectionibus. Edi-

tionem a R. Holmes, S.T.P. inchoatam continuavit J. Parsons, S.T.B.
Tomi V. 1 798-1 82 7. folio, 7/.
Vetus Testamentum ex Versione Septuaginta Interpretum
secundum exemplar Vaticanum Romae editum. Accedit potior varietas
Codicis Alexandrini. Tomi III. Editio Altera. i8mo. cloth, 18s.
Origenis Hexaplorum quae supersunt; sive, Veterum Inter-
pretum Graecorum totum Vetus Testamentum Fragmenta.
in Edidit
Fridericus Field, A.M. 2 vols. 1 867-1 874. 4to. cloth, 5/. 5s.
Libri Psalmorum Versio antiqua Latina, cum Paraphrasi

Anglo-Saxonica. Edidit B. Thorpe, F.A.S. 1835. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Libri Psalmorum Versio antiqua Gallica e Cod. MS. in Bibl.

Bodleiana adservato, una Versione Metrica aliisque Monument is
cum
pervetustis. Nunc primum descripsit et edidit Franciscus Michel, Phili
Doct. i860. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
The Psalms in Hebrew without points. 1879. Crown 8 vo,

cloth, 3s. 6d.
Libri Prophetarum Majorum, cum Lamentationibus Jere-

miae, in Dialecto Linguae Aegyptiacae Memphitica seu Coptica. Edidit
cum Versione Latina H.Tattam,S.T.P. Tomi II. 1852. Svo. cloth, 17s.
Libri duodecim Prophetarum Minorum in Ling. Aegypt.

vulgo Coptica. Edidit H. Tattam, A.M. 1836. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d.
Novum Testamentum Graece. Antiquissimorum Codicum

Textus in ordine parallelo dispositi. Accedit collatio Codicis Sinaitici.
Edidit E. H. Hansell, S.T.B. Tomi III. 1864. 8vo. half morocco,
2I. 12s. 6d.
Novum Testamentum Graece. Accedunt parallela S. Scrip -

turae loca, necnon vetus capitulorum notatio et canones Eusebii. Edidt.
Carolus Lloyd, S.T.P.R., necnon Episcopus Oxoniensis. i8mo. cloth, 3s.
*he same on writing paper, with large margin, cloth, ios.
Novum Testamentum Graece juxta Exemplar Millianum.

i8mo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
The same on writing paper, with large margin, cloth, gs,
Evangelia Sacra Graece. fcap. 8vo. limp, is. 6d.
The Greek Testament, with the Readings adopt ed by the Re-

visers of the Authorised Version :
(1) Pica type. Second Edition, with Marginal References. Demy

8vo. cloth, los. 6d.
(2) Long Primer type. Fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
(3) The same, on writing paper, with wide margin, cloth, 15s.
The New Testament in Greek and English. Edited by

E. Cardwell, D.D. 2 vols. 1837. crown 8vo. cloth, 6s.
Novum Testamentum Coptice, cura D. Wilkins. 17 16. 4to.

cloth, 12s. 6d.
Evangeliorum Versio Gothica, cum Interpr. et Annott. E.

Benzelii. Edidit, et Gram. Goth, praemisit, E. Lye, A.M. 1759. 4to.
cloth, 1 25. 6d.
Diatessaron ; sive Historia Jesu Christi ex ipsis Evangelistarum

verbis apte dispositis confecta. Ed. J.White. 1856. 1 2mo. cloth, 3s. 6rf.
Canon Muratorianus : the earliest Catalogue of the Books of
the New Testament. Edited with Notes and a Facsimile of the MS. in
the Ambrosian Library at Milan, by S.P. Tregelles, LL.D. 1868. 4to.
cloth, 1 os. 6d.
The Book of Tobit. A

Ghaldee Text, from a unique MS. in
the Bodleian Library; with other Rabbinical Texts, English Trans-
lations, and the Itala. Edited by Ad. Neubauer, M.A. 1878. Crown
8vo. cloth, 6s.
A Commentary on the Book of Proverbs. Attributed to

Abraham Ibn Ezra. Edited from a Manuscript in the Bodleian Library
by S. R. Driver, M.A. Crown 8vo. paper cover, 3s. 6d.
The Book of Wisdom the Greek Text, the Latin Vulgate,

:
and the Authorised English Version; with an Introduction, Critical

Apparatus, and a Commentary. By William J. Deane, M.A., Oriel
College, Oxford; Rector of Ashen, Essex. Small 4to. cloth, 12s. 6d.
The Five Books of Maccabees, in English, with Notes and

Illustrations by Henry Cotton, D.C.L. 1833. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Horae Hebraicae et Talmudicae, a J. Lightfoot. A new

Edition, by R. Gandell, M.A. 4 vols. 1859. 8vo. cloth, 1/. is.
FATHERS OF THE CHURCH, &c.
St. Athanasius : Orations against the Arians. With an Account

of his Life by William Bright, D.D. 1873. Crown 8vo. cloth, gs.
St. Athanasius : Historical Writings, according to the Benedic-

tine Text. With an Introduction by William Bright, D.D., Regius Pro-
fessor of Ecclesiastical History, Oxford. 1881. Crown 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
St. Augustine: Select Anti-Pelagian Treatises, and the Acts

of the Second Council of Orange. With an Introduction by William
Bright, D.D. Crown 8vo. cloth, gs.
The Canons of the First Four General Councils of Nicaea,
Constantinople, Ephesus, and Chalcedon. 1877. Crown 8vo. cloth, 2s.6d.
Notes on the Canons of the First Four General Councils.
By William Bright, D.D. 1882. Crown 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6d.
Catenae Graecorum Patrum in Novum Test amentum. Edidit

J. A. Cramer, S.T.P. Tomi VIII. 1838-1844. 8vo. cloth, 2/. 4s.
dementis Alexandrini Opera, ex recensione Guil. Dindorfii.

Tomi IV. 1869. 8vo. cloth, 3/.
Cyrilli Archiepiscopi Alexandrini in XII Prophetas. Edidit

P. E. Pusey, A.M. Tomi II. 1868. 8vo. cloth, 2/. 2s.
Cyrilli Archiepiscopi Alexandrini in D. Joannis Evangelium.

Accedunt FragmentaVarianecnonTractatus adTiberium Diaconum Duo.
Edidit post Aubertum P. E. Pusey, A.M. Tomi III. 1872. 8vo. 2/. 5s.
Cyrilli Archiepiscopi Alexandrini Commentarii in Lucae Evan-

gelium quae supersunt Syriace. E MSS. apud Mus. Britan. edidit R.
Payne Smith, A.M. 1858. 4to. cloth, ll. 2s.
The same, translated by R. Payne Smith, M.A. 2 vols. 1859.
8vo. cloth, 14s.
Ephraemi Syri, Rabulae Episcopi Edesseni, Balaei, aliorumque
Opera Selecta. E Codd. Syriacis MSS. in Museo Britannico et Biblio-
theca Bodleiana asservatis primus edidit J. J. Overbeck. 1865. 8vo.
cloth, ll. is.
Eusebii Pamphili Evangelicae Praeparationis Libri XV. Ad

Codd. MSS. recensuit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomi IV. 1843. 8vo.
cloth, ll. 1 os.
Eusebii Pamphili Evangelicae Demonstrationis Libri X. Re-

censuit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomi II. 1852. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Eusebii Pamphili contra Hieroclem et Marcellum Libri. Re-
censuit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. 1852. 8vo. cloth, 7s.
Eusebius* Ecclesiastical History, according to the text of

Burton, with an Introduction by William Bright, D.D. 1872. Crown
8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d.
Eusebii Pamphili Hist. Eccl. : Annotationes Variorum.

Tomi II. 1842. 8vo. cloth, 17s.
Evagrii Historia Ecclesiastica, ex recensione H.Valesii. 1844.
8vo. cloth, 4s.
Irenaeus: The Third Book of St. Irenaeus, Bishop of Lyons,

against Heresies. With
short Notes and a Glossary by H. Deane, B.D.,
Fellow of St. John's College, Oxford. 1874. Crown 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6d.
Origenis Philosophumena ; sive omnium Haeresium Refutatio,

e Codice Parisino nunc primum edidit Emmanuel Miller. 1851. 8vo.
cloth, I os.
Patrum Apostolicorum, S. Clementis Romani, S. Ignatii, S*

Polycarpi, quae supersunt. Edidit Guil. Jacobson, S.T.P.R. Tomi II.
Fourth Edition, 1863. 8vo. cloth, ll. is.
Reliquiae Sacrae secundi tertiique saeculi. Recensuit M. J.

Routh, S.T.P. Tomi V. Second Edition, 1 846-1 848. 8vo. cloth, ll. 5s.
Scriptorum Ecclesiasticorum Opuscula. Recensuit M. J.

Routh, S.T.P. Tomi II. Third Edition, 1858. 8vo. cloth, 10s.
Socratis Scholastici Historia Ecclesiastica. Gr. et Lat. Edidit

R. Hussey, S.T.B. Tomi III. 1853. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Socrates' Ecclesiastical History? according to the Text of

Hussey, with an Introduction by William Bright, D.D. 1878. Crown
8vo. cloth, 'js. 6d.
io Clarendon Press, Oxford.
Sozomeni Historia Ecclesiastica. Edidit R. Hussey, S.T.B.

Tomi III. 1859. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Theodoreti Ecclesiasticae Historiae Libri V. Recensuit T.

Gaisford, S.T.P. 1854. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d.
Theodoreti Graecarum Affectionum Curatio. Ad Codices MSS.

recensuit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. 1839. 8vo. cloth, p. 6d.
Bowling (J.G.). Notitia Scriptorum SS. Patrum aliorumque vet.
Eccles. Mon. quae in Collectionibus Anecdotorum post annum Christi
mdcc. in lucem editis continentur. 1839. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY, &c.
Liturgies, Eastern and Western. Edited, with Introduction,

Notes, and a Liturgical Glossary, by C. E. Hammond, M.A. 1878.
Crown 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
An Appendix to the above. 1879. Crown 8vo. paper covers, is. 6d.
Monumenta Ritualia Ecclesiae The occasional

Anglicanae.
Church of England according to the old use of Salisbury, the
Offices of the
Prymer in English, and other prayers and forms, with dissertations and
notes. By William Maskell, M.A. Second Edition. 3 vols. 8vo. cloth,
2!. 1 OS.
The Ancient Liturgy of the Church of England, according

to the uses of Sarum, York, Hereford, and Bangor, and the Roman
Liturgy arranged in parallel columns, with preface and notes. By
William Maskell, M.A. Third Edition. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Baedae Historia Ecclesiastica. Edited, with English Notes,

by G. H. Moberly, M.A. 1881. crown 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Bingham's Antiquities of the Christian Church, and other
Works. 10 vols. 1855. 8vo. cloth, 3/. 3s.
Bright (W., D.D.). Chapters of Early English Church History.
1878. 8vo. cloth, 12s.
Burnet's History of the Reformation of the Church of Eng-

land. A new Edition. Carefully revised, and the Records collated
with the originals, by N.Pocock, M.A. 7 vols. 1865. 8vo. 4/. 4s.
Burnet's Life of Sir M. Hale, and Fell's Life of Dr. Hammond.

1856. small 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Cardwell's Two Books of Common Prayer, set forth by

authority in the Reign of King Edward VI, compared with each other,
Third Edition, 1852. 8vo. cloth, 7s.
Cardwell's Documentary Annals of the Reformed Church of

England; being a Collection of Injunctions, Declarations, Orders, Arti-
clesof Inquiry, &c. from 1546 to 1716. 2 vols. 1843. 8vo. cloth, iSs.
Clarendon Press, Oxford. n
Cardwell's History of Conferences on the Book of Common
Prayer from 155 1 to 1690. Third Edition, 1849. 8vo. ff ''& *js.6d.
Councils and Ecclesiastical Documents relating to Great

Britain and Ireland. Edited, after Spelman and Wilkins, by A. W.
Haddan, B.D., and W. Stubbs, M.A., Regius Professor of Modern
History, Oxford. Vols. I. and III. 1869-71. Medium 8vo. cloth,
each 1/. is.
Vol. II. Part I. 1873. Medium 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.

Vol.11. Part 1878. Church of Ireland
II. ; Memorials of St. Patrick*
stiff" covers, 3s. 6d.
Formularies of Faith set forth by the King's Authority during

the Reign of Henry VIII. 1856. 8vo. cloth, 7s.
Fuller's Church History of Britain. Edited by J. S. Brewer,

M.A. 6 vols. 1845. 8vo. cloth, il. 19s.
Gibson's Synodus Anglicana. Edited by E. Cardwell, D.D.

1854. 8vo. cloth, 6s,
Hussey's Rise of the Papal Power traced in three Lectures.

Second Edition, 1863. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Inett's Origines Anglicanae (in continuation of Stillingfleet).

Edited by J. Griffiths, M.A. 3 vols. 1855. 8vo. cloth, 15s.
John, Bishop of Ephesus. The Third Part of his Ecclesias-

tical History. [In Syriac] Now first edited by William Cureton,
M.A. 1853. 4to. cloth, il. 12s.
The same, translated by R. Payne Smith, M.A. i860. 8vo.

cloth, I os.
Knight's Life of Dean Golet. 1823. 8vo. cloth, 7s, 6d.
Le Neve's Fasti Ecclesiae Anglicanae. Corrected and continued

from 1 715 to 1853 by T.DufFus Hardy. 3 vols. 1854. Svo. cloth, il. is.
The Liturgy and Ritual of the Celtic Church. By F. E.
Warren, B.D., Fellow of St. John's College, Oxford. 8vo. cloth, 14s.
The Iieofrie Missal. Edited by F. E. Warren, B.D., Fellow of

St. John's College, Oxford. In the Press.
Noelli (A.) Catechismus sive prima institutio disciplinaque

Pietatis Christianae Latine explicata. Editio nova cura Guil. Jacobson,
A.M. 1844. 8vo. cloth, e>s.6d.
Prideaux's Connection of Sacred and Profane History. 2 vols

1 85 1. 8vo. cloth, ios.
Primers put forth in the Reign of Henry VIII. 1848. 8vo.

cloth, 5s.
B3
12 Clarendon Press, Oxford.
Records of the Reformation. The Divorce, 1527 1533.

Mostly now for the first time printed from MSS. in the British Museum
and other Libraries. Collected and arranged by N. Pocock, M.A.
1870. 2 vols. 8vo. cloth\ 1/. 1 6s.
Reformatio Legum Bcclesiasticarum. The Reformation of

Ecclesiastical Laws, as attempted in the reigns of Henry VIII, Edward
VI, and Elizabeth. Edited by E. Cardwell, D.D. 1850. 8vo. cloth,
6s. 6d.
Shirley's (W. W.) Some Account of the Church in the Apostolic

Age. Second Edition, 1874. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Shuckford's Sacred and Profane History connected (in con-

tinuation of Prideaux). 2 vols. 1848. 8vo. cloth, 10s.
Stillingfleet's Origines Britannicae, with Lloyd's Historical

Account of Church Government. Edited by T. P. Pantin, M.A. 2 vols.
1842. 8vo. cloth, 10s.
Stubbs (W.), Registrum Sacrum Anglicanum. An attempt

to exhibit the course of Episcopal Succession in England. 1858. small
4to. cloth, 8s. 6d,
Strype's Memorials of Cranmer. 2 vols. 1840. 8vo. cloth, in,

Lifeof Parker. 3 vols. 1828. 8vo. cloth, 16s. 6d.
Lifeof Whitgift. 3 vols. 1822. 8vo. cloth, i6j. 6d.
Lifeof Aylmer. 1820. 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6d.
Lifeof Cheke. 1821. 8vo. cloth, $s. 6d,
General Index. 2 vols. 1828. 8vo. cloth, us,
Sylloge Confessionum sub tempus Reformandae Ecclesiae edi-
tarum. Subjiciuntur Catechismus Heidelbergensis et Canones Synodi
Dordrechtanae. 1827. 8vo. cloth, 8s.
ENGLISH THEOLOGY.
Beveridge's Discourse upon the XXXIX Articles. The third
complete Edition, 1847. 8vo. cloth, 8s.
Bilson on the Perpetual Government of Christ's Church, with a

Biographical Notice by R.Eden, M.A. 1842. 8vo. cloth, 4s.
Biscoe's Boyle Lectures on the Acts of the Apostles. T840. 8vo.

cloth, 9s. 6d.
Bull's Works, with Nelson's Life. Edited by E. Burton, D.D.

A new Edition, 1846. 8 vols. 8vo. cloth, 2/. 9s.
Burnet's Exposition of the XXXIX Articles. 1845. 8vo. cloth, js.

Burton's (Edward) Testimonies of the Ante-Nicene Fathers to
the Divinity of Christ. Second Edition, 1829. 8vo. cloth, 7s.
Clarendon Press, Oxford. 13
Barton's (Edward) Testimonies of the Ante-Nicene Fathers to

the Doctrine of the Trinity and of the Divinity of the Holy Ghost.
1831. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Butler's Works, with an Index to the Analogy. 2 vols. 1874.
8vo. cloth, lis.
Butler's Sermons. 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6d.

Butler's Analogy of Religion. 8vo. cloth, 5J. 6d.
Chandler's Critical History of the Life of David. 1853. 8vo.

cloth, 8s. 6d.
Chillingworth's Works. 3 vols. 1838. 8vo. cloth, 1l.1s.6d.

Clergyman's Instructor. Sixth Edition, 1855. 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d,
Comber's Companion to the Temple or a Help to Devotion in ;
the use of the Common Prayer. 7 vols. 1841. 8vo. cloth, ll. lis. 6d.
Cranmer's Works. Collected and arranged by H. Jenkyns,

M.A., Fellow of Oriel College. 4 vols. 1834. 8vo. cloth, ll. 10s.
Enchiridion Theologicum Anti-Romanum.

Vol. I. Jeremy Taylor's Dissuasive from Popery, and Treatise on
the Real Presence. 1852. 8vo. cloth, 8s.
Vol. II. Barrow on the Supremacy of the Pope, with his Discourse
on the Unity of the Church. 1852. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d.
Vol. III. Tracts selected from Wake, Patrick, Stillingfleet, Clagett,
and others. 1 83 7. 8vo. cloth, lis.
[Fell's] Paraphrase and Annotations on the Epistles of St. Paul.

1852. 8vo. cloth, 7s.
Greswell's Harmonia Evangelica. Fifth Edition, 1856. 8vo.

cloth, 9s. 6d.
Greswell's Prolegomena ad Harmoniam Evangelicam. 1840.

8vo. cloth, gs. 6d.
Greswell's Dissertations on the Principles and Arrangement

of a Harmony of the Gospels. 5 vols. 1837. 8vo. cloth, 3/. 3s.
Hall's (Bp.) Works. A new Edition, by Philip Wynter, D.D.

10 vols. 1863. 8vo. cloth, 3/. 3s.
Hammond's Paraphrase and Annotations on the New Testa-

ment. 4 vols. 1845. 8vo. cloth, il.
Hammond's Paraphrase on the Book of Psalms. 2 vols. 1850.

8vo. cloth, 1 os.
Heurtley's Collection of Creeds. 1858. 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d.
Homilies appointed to be read in Churches. Edited by J.

Griffiths, M.A. 1859, 8vo. cloth, p.6d.
Hooker's Works, with his Life by Walton, arranged by John

Keble, M.A. Sixth Edition, 1874. 3 vols. 8vo. cloth, ll. lis Ad,
Hooker's Works; the text as arranged by John Keble, M.A.

2 vols. 1875. 8vo. cloth, lis.
Hooper's (Bp. George) Works. 2 vols. 1855. 8vo. cloth, $s.

Jackson's (Dr. Thomas) Works. 12 vols. 1844. 8vo. cloth,
31. 6s.
Jewel's Works. Edited by R. W. Jelf, D.D. 8 vols. 1847.

8vo. cloth, ll. 10s.
Patrick's Theological Works. 9 vols. 1859. 8vo. cloth, 1/. is.
Pearson's Exposition of the Greed. Revised and corrected by

E. Burton, D.D. Sixth Edition, 1877. 8vo clot ^ IOS $d. *
Pearson's Minor Theological Works. Now first collected, with

a Memoir of the Author, Notes, and Index, by Edward Churton, M.A.
2 vols. 1844. 8vo. cloth, 10s.
Sanderson's Works. Edited by W. Jacobson, D.D. 6 vols.

1854. 8vo. cloth, ll. 10s.
Stanhope's Paraphrase and Comment upon the Epistles and

Gospels. A new Edition. 2 vols. 1 85 1. 8vo. cloth, 10s.
Stillingfleet's Origines Sacrae. 2 vols. 1837. 8vo. cloth, qj.
Stillingfleet's Rational Account of the Grounds of Protestant

Religion; being a vindication of Abp. Laud's Relation of a Conference,
&c. 2 vols. 1844. 8vo. cloth, 1 os.
Wall's History of Infant Baptism, with Gale's Reflections, and

Wall's Defence. A new Edition, by Henry Cotton, D.C.L. 2 vols.
1862. 8vo. cloth, ll. is.
Waterland's Works, with Life, by Bp. Van Mildert. A new

Edition, with copious Indexes. 6 vols. 1 85 7. 8vo. cloth, 2/. lis.
Waterland's Review of the Doctrine of the Eucharist, with a

Preface by the present Bishop of London. 1880. crown 8vo. cloth,
6s. 6d.
Wheatly's Illustration of the Book of Common Prayer. A

new Edition, 1846. 8vo. cloth, 5s.
Wyclif. A Catalogue of the Original Works of John Wyclif, by

W. W. Shirley, D.D. 1865. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Wyclif. Select English Works. By T. Arnold, M.A. 3 vols.

1 871. 8vo. cloth, 2I. 2s.
Wyclif. Trialogus. With the Supplement now first edited. By

Gotthard Lechler. 1869. 8vo. cloth, 14s.
Clarendon Press\ Oxford. 15
ENGLISH HISTORICAL AND DOCUMENTARY

WORKS.
British Barrows, a Record of the Examination of Sepulchral
Mounds in various parts of England. By William Greenwell, M.A.,
F.S.A. Together with Description of Figures of Skulls, General
Remarks on Prehistoric Crania, and an Appendix by George Rolleston,
M.D., F.R.S. 1877. Medium 8vo. cloth, 25s.
Two of the Saxon Chronicles parallel, with Supplementary

Extracts from the Others. Edited, with Introduction, Notes, and a
Glossarial Index, by J. Earle, M.A. 1865. 8vo. cloth, 1 6s.
Magna Carta, a careful Reprint. Edited by W. Stubbs, M.A.,

Regius Professor of Modern History. 1879. 4 t0 * stitched, is.
Britton, a Treatise upon the Common Law of England, com-

posed by order of King Edward I. The French Text carefully revised,
with an English Translation, Introduction, and Notes, by F. M. Nichols,
M.A. 2 vols. 1865. royal 8vo. cloth, il. 1 6s.
Burnet's History of His Own Time, with the suppressed Pas-

sages and Notes. 6 vols. 1833. 8vo. cloth, til. 10s.
Burnet's History of James II, with additional Notes. 1852.

8vo. cloth, gs. 6d.
Carte's Life of James Duke of Ormond. A new Edition, care-

fully compared with the original MSS. 6 vols. 1 851. 8vo. cloth, il. 5s.
Clarendon's (Edw. Earl of) History of the Rebellion and Civil

Wars in England. To which are subjoined the Notes of Bishop War-
burton. 7 vols. 1849. medium 8vo. cloth, til. 10s.

Wars in England. 7 vols. 1839. i8mo. cloth, il. is.

Wars Also His Life, written by Himself, in which
in England. is in-
cluded a Continuation of his History of the Grand Rebellion. With
copious Indexes. In one volume, royal Svo. 1842. cloth, il. 2s.
Clarendon's (Edw. Earl of) Life, including a Continuation of

his History. 2 vols. 1857. medium 8vo. cloth, il. 2s.
Calendar of the Clarendon State Papers, preserved in the

Bodleian Library. In three volumes. 1869-76.
Vol.1. From 1523 to January 1649. 8vo. cloth, 18s,
Vol. II. From 1649 to 1654. 8vo. cloth, 16s.
Vol. III. From 1655 to 1657. 8vo * cloth, 14s.
Calendar of Charters and Bolls preserved in the Bodleian

Library. 1878. 8vo. cloth, l/. lis. 6d.
1 Clarendon Press y
Oxford.
Freeman's (E. A.) History of the Norman Conquest of England;

its Causes and Results. In Six Volumes, 8vo. cloth, 5/. 9s. 6d.
Vols. I II together, 3rd edition, 1877. l7. 16s.
Vol. Ill, 2nd edition, 1874. iZ. is.
Vol. IV, and edition, 1875. il. is.
Vol. V, 1876. il. is.
Vol. VI. Index. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Freeman (E. A.). The Reign of William Rufus and the Acces-
sion of Henry the First. 2 vols. 8vo. cloth, il. 1 6s.
Gascoigne's Theological (" Liber Veritatum ")

Dictionary
Selected Passages, illustrating the condition of Church and State, 1403-
1458. With an Introduction by James E. Thorold Rogers, M.P.
Small 4to. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Lloyd's Prices of Corn in Oxford, 1 583-1 830. 8vo. sewed, is.
Iiuttrell's (Narcissus) Diary. A

Brief Historical Relation of
State Affairs, 1678-1714. 6 vols. 1857. 8vo. cloth, il. 4s.
Bogers's History of Agriculture and Prices in England, a.d.
1259-1793-
Vols. I and II (1 259-1400). 8vo. cloth, 2I. 2s.
Vols. Ill and IV (1401-1582). 8vo. cloth, 2/. 10s.
Sprigg's England's Recovery being the History of the Army

;
under Sir Thomas Fairfax. 1854. 8vo. cloth, 6s.

Whitelock's Memorials of English Affairs from 1625 to 1660.
4 vols. 1853. 8vo. cloth, il. 10s.
Protests of the Lords, including those which have been

expunged, from 1624 to 1874; with Historical Introductions. Edited
by James E. Thorold Rogers, M.A. 1875. 3 vols. 8vo. cloth, 2I. 2s.
Enactments in Parliament, specially concerning the Universi-
ties of Oxford and Cambridge. Collected and arranged by J. GrifBths,
M.A. 1869. 8vo. cloth, 12s.
Ordinances and Statutes [for Colleges and Halls] framed or
approved by the Oxford University Commissioners. 1863. 8vo. cloth,
125.
Sold separately (except for Exeter, All Souls, Brasenose, and
Corpus), at is. each.
Statuta Universitatis Oxoniensis. 1881. 8vo. cloth, 51.
New Statutes made for the University by the University of
Oxford Commissioners. 1882. 8vo. stitched, is. 6d.
The Student's Handbook to the University and Colleges

of Oxford. Sixth Edition. 1 881. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Index to "Wills proved in the Court of the Chancellor of the

University of Oxford, &c. Compiled by J. Griffiths, M.A. 1862.
royal 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Catalogue of Oxford Graduates from 1659 to 1850. 1851.

8vo. cloth, p. 6d.
CHRONOLOGY, GEOGRAPHY, &c.

Clinton's Fasti Hellenici. The Civil and Literary Chronology
of Greece, from the LVIth to the CXXIIIrd Olympiad. Third edition,
1841. 4to. cloth, ll. 14s. 6d.
Clinton's Fasti Hellenici. The Civil and Literary Chronology
of Greece, from the CXXIVth Olympiad to the Death of Augustus.
Second edition, 1 85 1. 4to. cloth, ll. 12s.
Clinton's Epitome of the Fasti Hellenici. 185 1. 8vo. cloth t
6s. 6d.
Clinton's Fasti Romani. The Civil and Literary Chronology

of Rome and Constantinople, from the Death of Augustus to the Death
of Heraclius. 2 vols. 1845, 1850. 4to. cloth, 3/. 9s.
Clinton's Epitome of the Fasti Romani. 1854. 8vo. cloth, 7j.

Cramer's Geographical and Historical Description of Asia
Minor. 2 vols. 1832. 8vo. cloth, us.
Cramer's Map of Asia Minor, 15J.
Cramer's Map of Ancient and Modern Italy, on two sheets, 1 $s.
Cramer's Description of Ancient Greece. 3 vols. 1828. 8vo
cloth, 1 6s. 6d.
Cramer's Map of Ancient and Modern Greece, on two sheets, 1 s.

Greswell's Fasti Temporis Catholici. 1852. 4 vols. 8vo. cloth,
2/. I OS.
Greswell's Tables to Fasti, 4to., and Introduction to Tables,

8vo. 1852. cloth, 15s.
Greswell's Origines Kalendarise Italieae. 1854. 4 vols. 8vo. cloth,

2l. 2S.
Greswell's Origines Kalendarise Hellenieae. 6 vols. 1862.

8vo. cloth, 4/. 4s.
MATHEMATICS, PHYSICAL SCIENCE, &e.
Archimedis quae supersunt omnia cum Eutocii commentariis

ex recensione Josephi Torelli, cum nova versione Latina. 1792. fol.
cloth, ll. 5s.
Bradley's Miscellaneous Works and Correspondence. "With an

Account of Harriot's Astronomical Papers. 1832. 4to. cloth, l*]s.
Reduction of Bradley's Observations by Dr. Busch. 1838. 4to. cloth, 3s.
Astronomical Observations made at the University Obser-

vatory, Oxford, under the direction of C. Pritchard, M.A., Savilian Pro-
fessor of Astronomy. No. 1. 1878. Royal 8vo. paper covers, $s.6d.
Treatise on Infinitesimal Calculus. By Bartholomew Price,

M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy, Oxford.
Vol. I. Differential Calculus. Second Edition, 8vo. clothe 14s. 6d.
Vol. II. Integral Calculus, Calculus of Variations, and Differential
Equations. Second Edition, 1865. 8vo. cloth, iSs.
Vol. III. Statics, including Attractions; Dynamics of a Material
Particle. Second Edition, 1868. 8vo. cloth, 16s.
Vol. IV. Dynamics of Material Systems; together with a Chapter on
Theoretical Dynamics, by W. F. Donkin, M.A., F.R.S. 1 862.
8vo. cloth, 16s.
Rigaud's Correspondence of Scientific Men of the 17th Century,

with Table of Contents by A. de Morgan, and Index by the Rev. J.
Rigaud, M.A., Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford. 2 vols. 1841-1862.
8vo. cloth, 1 8s. 6d.
Daubeny's Introduction to the Atomic Theory. i6mo. cloth, 6s.
Vesuvius. By John Phillips, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of

Geology, Oxford. 1869. Crown 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Geology of Oxford and the Valley of the Thames. By the same

Author. 1 87 1. 8vo. cloth, 21s.
Synopsis of the Pathological Series in the Oxford Museum.

By H. W. Acland, M.D., F.R.S., 1867. 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d.
Thesaurus Entomologicus Hopeianus, or a Description of

the rarest Insects in the Collection given to the University by the
Rev. William Hope. By J. O. Westwood, M.A., F.L.S. With 40
Plates. 1874. Small folio, half morocco, 7/. 1 as.
Text-Book of Botany, Morphological and Physiological. By

Dr. Julius Sachs, Professor of Botany in the University of Wiirzburg.
Translated by S. H. Vines, M.A. Royal 8vo. New Edition, in the
Press.
Johannes Miiller on Certain Variations in the Vocal Organs

of the Passeres that have hitherto escaped notice. Translated by
F. J. Bell, B.A., and edited with an Appendix, by A. H. Garrod, M.A,,
F.R.S. With Plates. 1878. 4to. paper covers, p. 6d.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
Ebert's Bibliographical Dictionary, translated from the German.
4 vols. 1837. 8vo. cloth, il. 105.
Cotton's List of Editions of the Bible in English. Second Edition,

corrected and enlarged. 1852. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d.
Cotton's Typographical Gazetteer. 183 1. 8vo. cloth, 12s. 6d.

Cotton's Typographical Gazetteer, Second Series. 1866. 8vo.

cloth, 1 25. 6d.
Cotton's Rhemes and Doway. An attempt to shew what has

been done by Roman Catholics for the diffusion of the Holy Scriptures
in English. 1855. 8vo. cloth, 9s.
MISCELLANEOUS.
&ict)ota <&*otwngta:
Classical Series. Vol. I. Part I. The English Manuscripts
of the Nicomachean Ethics, described in relation to Bekker's
Manuscripts and other Sources. By J. A. Stewart, M.A., Classical
Lecturer, Christ Church. Small 4*0. 3s. 6d.
Classical Series. Part II. Wonius Marcellus, de Com-
Vol. I.
pendiosa Doctrina, Harleian MS. 2719. Collated by J. H. Onions, M.A.,

Senior Student of Christ Church. Just Ready.
Semitic Series. Vol. I. Part I. Commentary on Ezra and
Nehemiah. By Rabbi Saadiah. Edited by H. J. Matthews, M.A.,
Exeter College, Oxford. Just Ready.
Aryan Series. Vol. I. Part I. Buddhist Texts from Japan.
Edited by F. Max Miiller. Small 4to. 3s. 6d.
Modem Series. Vol. I. Part I. Sinonoma Bar-
Mediaeval and
tholomei A
Glossary from a Fourteenth-Century MS. in the Library
;
of Pembroke College, Oxford. Edited by J. L. G. Mowat, M.A.,

Fellow of Pembroke College. Just Ready.
Bacon's Novum Organum. Edited, with English notes, by

G. W. Kitchin, M.A. 1855. 8vo. cloth, gs. 6d.
Bacon's Novum Organum. Translated by G. W. Kitchin,

M.A. 1855. 8vo. cloth, gs. 6d. (See also p. 38.)
The Works of George Berkeley, D.D., formerly Bishop of

Cloyne; including many of his writings hitherto unpublished. "With
Prefaces, Annotations, and an Account of his Life and Philosophy, by
Alexander Campbell Fraser, M.A. 4 vols. 1871. 8vo. cloth, 2/. 18s.
The Life, Letters 3 &c. 1 vol.cloth, 16s. See also p. 38.
Olaf. Passio et Miracula Beati Olavi. Edited from a Twelfth-
Century MS. in the Library of Corpus Christi College, Oxford, with
an Introduction and Notes, by Frederick Metcalfe, M.A. small 4to.
stiff cover, 6s.
The Logic of Hegel; translated from the Encyclopaedia of

the Philosophical Sciences. With Prolegomena by William Wallace,
M.A. 1874. 8vo. cloth, 14s.
Smith's "Wealth of Nations. A new Edition, with Notes,
by J. E. Thorold Rogers, M.A. 2 vols. 1880. cloth, 21s.
A Course of Lectures on Art, delivered before the University

of Oxford in Hilary Term, 1870, by John Ruskin, M.A., Slade
Professor of Fine Art. 8vo. cloth, 6s.
Aspects of Poetry ; being Lectures delivered at Oxford by

John Campbell Shairp, LL.D., Professor of Poetry, Oxford. Crown
8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
A Critical Account of the Drawings by Michel Angelo

and Raffaello in the University Galleries, Oxford. By J. C. Robinson,
F.S.A. 1870. Crown 8vo. cloth, 4s.
Catalogue of the Castellani Collection of Antiquities in the

University Galleries, Oxford. By W. S. W. Vaux, M.A., F.R.S. Crown
8vo. stiff cover, is.
Sturlunga Saga, including the Islendinga Saga of Lawman

Sturla Thordsson and other works. Edited by Dr. Gudbrand Vigftisson.
In 2 vols. 1878. 8vo. cloth, 2/. 2s.
Casauboni Ephemerides, cum praefatione et notis J. Russell,

S.T.P. Tomiil." 1850. 8 vo. cloth, i$s.
The Ormulum ; with the Notes and Glossary of Dr. R. M. White.

Edited by Rev. R. Holt, M.A. 1878. 2 vols. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 21s.
The Sacred Books of the East. Translated by various

Oriental Scholars, and edited by F. Max Muller.
Vol. I. The TTpanishads. Translated by F. Max Muller.

Part I. The jOandogya-upanishad, The Talavakara-upanishad, The
Aitareya-arawyaka, The Kaushttaki-brahmaraa-upanishad, and The
Vag'asaneyi-samhita-upanishad. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Vol. II. The Sacred Laws of the Aryas, as taught in the

Schools of Apastamba, Gautama, Vasishâ, and Baudhayana. Trans-
A
lated by Prof. Georg Buhler. Part I, Apastamba and Gautama.
8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d,
Vol. III. The Sacred Books of China. The Texts of Con-
fucianism. Translated by James Legge. Part I. The Shu King, The
Religious portions of the Shih King, and The Hsiao King. 8vo. cloth,
1 2s. 6d.
Vol. IV. The Vendidad. Translated by James Darmesteter.

8vo. cloth, 1 os. 6d.
Vol. V. The Bundahir, Bahman Yajt, and Shayast-la-

Shayast. Pahlavi Texts, Part I. Translated by E. W. West. 8vo.
cloth, 12s. 6d.
Vols. VI and IX. The Qur'an. Parts I and II. Trans-

lated by Professor E. H. Palmer. 8vo. cloth, 21s.
Vol. VII. The Institutes of Vishmi. Translated by Pro-

fessor Julius Jolly. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d
Vol. X. The Dhammapada, translated by Professor F. Max

Miiller and The Sutta Nipata, translated by Professor Fausboll
;
being Canonical Books of the Buddhists. 8vo. cloth, ios. 6d.
Vol. XI. The Mahaparinibbana Sutta, The Teviâ

Sutta, The Mahasudassana
Sutta, The Dhamma-.Kakkappa-
vattana Sutta. Translated by T. W. Rhys Davids. 8vo. cloth, \os.6d.
The following Volumes will be published immediately, viz :
Vol. VIII. TheBhagavadgita, Sanatsuâtiya, and Anugita.

Translated by Kashinath Trimbak Telang.
Vol. XII. The Satapatha-Brahmaa. Translated by Pro-

fessor Eggeling. Vol. I.
Vol. XIII. The Patimokkha. Translated by T. W. Rhys

Davids. The Mahavagga, Part I. Translated by Dr. H. Oldenberg.
Vol. XVI. The Yi King, with an Appendix on the Philosophy
of the Scholars of the Sung dynasty, professedly derived from the Yi.
Translated by James Legge.
The following Volumes are in the Press :
Vol. XIV. The Sacred Laws of the Aryas, as taught in the

Schools of Apastamba, Gautama, Vasishâ and Baudhayana. Trans-
lated by Professor Georg Biihler. Part II, Vasish/â and Baudhayana.
Vol. XV. The Upanishads. Part II. Translated by F. Max

Miiller.
Vol. XVII. Mahavagga. Part II. Translated by T. W.

Rhys Davids and Dr. H. Oldenberg.
Vol. XVIII. Da^/istan-i Dinik, and Mainy6-i Khar</. Pah-

lavi Texts, Part II. Translated by E. W. West.
Vol. XIX. Fo-sho-hing-tsan-king. Translated by Samuel

Beal.
Vol. XX. Vayu Puraa. Translated by Professor Bhan-

darkar, of Elphinstone College, Bombay.
Vol .XXI. Saddharma-pu/fc/arika. Translated by P rofessor
Kern.
hmxbmx jfess Storm
The Delegates of the Clarendon Press having undertaken

the publication of a series of works, chiefly educational, and
entitled the luxz\xhaix |)rm Sbtxittt have published, or have
in preparation, the following.
Those to which prices are attached are already published; the others are in
preparation.
I. ENGLISH.
A First Reading Book. By Marie Eichens of Berlin; and
edited by Anne J. Clough. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, \d.
Oxford Beading Book, Part I. For Little Children. Extra

fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, 6d.
Oxford Beading Book, Part II. For Junior Glasses. Extra

fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, 6d.
An Elementary English Grammar and Exercise Book.

By O. W. Tancock, M.A., Head Master of Norwich School. Second
Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. 6d.
An English Grammar and Beading Book, for Lower Forms

in Classical Schools. By O. W. Tancock, M.A., Head Master of
Norwich School. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Typical Selections from the best English Writers, with Intro-

ductory Notices. Second Edition. In Two Volumes. Extra fcap. 8vo.
cloth, 3s. 6d. each.
Vol. I. Latimer to Berkeley. Vol. II. Pope to Macaulay.

The Philology of the English Tongue. By J. Earle, M.A.,
formerly Fellow of Oriel College, and Professor of Anglo-Saxon, Oxford.
Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, *js. 6d.
A Book for the Beginner in Anglo-Saxon. By John Earle,

M.A., Professor of Anglo-Saxon, Oxford. Second Edition. Extra fcap.
8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
An Anglo-Saxon Beader. In Prose and Verse. With

Grammatical Introduction, Notes, and Glossary. By Henry Sweet,
M.A. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d.
An Anglo-Saxon Primer, with Grammar, Notes, and Glossary,

By the same Editor. Nearly Ready.
Specimens of Early English. A New and Revised Edition.

With Introduction, Notes, and Glossarial Index. By R. Morris, LL.D.,
and W. W. Skeat, M.A.
Part I. From Old English Homilies to King Horn (a.d. 1150 to
a.d. 1300). Just Ready.
Part II.From Robert of Gloucester to Govver (a.d. 129810 a.d. 1393).
Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d.
Specimens of English Literature, from the Ploughmans '
C rede' to the 'Shepheardes Calender* (a.d. 1394 to a.d. 1579). With

Introduction, Notes, and Glossarial Index. By W. W. Skeat, M.A.
Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, *js.6d.
The Vision of William concerning Piers the Plowman,

by William Langland. Edited, with Notes, by W. W. Skeat, M.A.
Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Chaucer. ThePrioresses Tale; Sir Thopas; The Monkes

Tale; The ClerkesTale; The Squieres Tale, &c. Edited by
W. W. Skeat, M.A. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Chaucer. The Tale of the Man of Lawe The Pardoneres ;
Tale ; The Second Nonnes Tale The Chanouns Yemannes Tale.

;
By the same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. (See also p. 24.)
Old English Drama. Marlowe's Tragical History of Dr.

Faustus, and Greene's Honourable History of Friar Bacon and Friar
Bungay. Edited by A. W. Ward, M.A., Professor of History and
English Literature in Owens College, Manchester. 1878. Extra fcap.
8vo. cloth, 5s. 6 d.
Marlowe. Edward II. With Introduction, Notes, &c. By

O. W. Tancock, M.A., Head Master of Norwich School. Extra fcap.
8vo. cloth, 3s.
Shakespeare. Hamlet. Edited by W. G. Clark, M.A., and

W. Aklis Wright, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, 2s.
Shakespeare. Select Plays. Edited by W. Aldis Wright, M.A.

Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers.
The Tempest, is. 6d. King Lear, is. 6d.

As You Like It, is. 6d. A Midsummer Night's Dream, is. 6d,
Julius Caesar, 2s. Coriolanus, 2s. 6d.
Richard the Third, 2s. 6d. Henry the Fifth, 2s.
(For other Plays, see p. 25.)
Milton. Areopagitica. With Introduction and Notes. By

John W. Hales, M.A., late Fellow of Christ's College, Cambridge.
Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s.
Bunyan. Holy War. Edited by E. Venables, M.A. In the Press.

(See also p. 25.)
Locke's Conduct of the Understanding. Edited, with Intro-

duction, Notes, etc., by T. Fowler, M.A., Professor of Logic in the
University of Oxford. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.
Addison. Selections from Papers in the Spectator. With

Notes. By T. Arnold, M.A., University College. Second Edition.
Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Burke. Four Letters on the Proposals for Peace with the Regi-
cide Directory of France. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by
E. J. Payne, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s. (See also p. 25.)
Also thefollowing in paper covers :

Goldsmith. The Deserted Village. 2d.
Gray. Elegy, and Ode on Eton College. 2d.
Johnson. Vanity of Human Wishes. With Notes by E. J.

Payne, M.A. 4^.
Keats. Hyperion, Book I. With Notes byW. T.Arnold, B.A. 4^.
Milton. With Notes by R. G. Browne, M.A.

Lycidas, $d. V Allegro, 3d. II Penseroso, ^d. Comus, 6d.
Samson Agonistes, 6d.
Parnell. The Hermit. 2d.
A SEBIES OP ENGLISH CLASSICS,

Designed to meet the wants of Students in English Literature^
by the late Rev. J. S. BREWER, M.A., of Queen's College, Oxford,
and Professor of English Literature at King's College, London.
1. Chaucer. The Prologue to the Canterbury Tales; The
Knightes Tale The Nonne Prestes Tale. Edited by R. Morris,
;
Editor of Specimens of Early English, &c, &c. Sixth Edition. Extra

fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. (See also p. 23.)
2 . Spenser's Faery Queene. Books I and 1 1. Designed chiefly

for the use of Schools. With Introduction, Notes, and Glossary. By
G. W. Kitchin, M.A.
Book I. Eighth Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.6d
Book II. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8 vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
3. Hooker. Ecclesiastical Polity, Book I. Edited by R. W.

Church, M.A., Dean of St. Paul's ; formerly Fellow of Oriel College,
Oxford. Second Edition. Extra feap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.
4. Shakespeare. Select Plays. Edited by W. G. Clark, M.A.,

Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge ; and W. Aldis Wright, M.A.,
Trinity College, Cambridge. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers.
I. The Merchant of Venice, is.
II. Richard the Second, is. 6d.

III. Macbeth, is. 6d. (For other Plays, see p. 23.)
5. Bacon.
I. Advancement of Learning. Edited by W. Aldis Wright, M.A.
Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo, cloth, 4s. 6d.
II. The Essays. With Introduction and Notes. By J. R. Thursfield,
M.A., Fellow and formerly Tutor of Jesus College, Oxford.
6. Milton. Poems. Edited by R. C. Browne, M.A. 2 vols.

Fourth Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d.
Sold separately, Vol. I. 4s.; Vol. II. 3s. (See also p. 24.)
7. Dryden. Select Poems. Stanzas on the Death of Oliver

Cromwell ;Redux Annus Mirabilis Absalom and Achitophel
Astraea ; ;
Religio Laici; The Hind and the Panther. Edited by W. D. Christie,

M.A. Second Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6a.
8. Bunyan. The Pilgrim's Progress, Grace Abounding, Relation

of the Imprisonment of Mr. John Bunyan. Edited, with Biographical
Introduction and Notes, by E. Venables, M.A. 1879. Extra fcap.
8vo. cloth, 5s.
9. Pope. With Introduction and Notes. By Mark Pattison,

B.D., Rector of Lincoln College, Oxford.
I Essay on Man. Sixth Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. is. 6d.
II. Satires and Epistles. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. 2s.
10. Johnson. Rasselas; Lives of Pope and Dryden. Edited

by Alfred Milnes, B.A. (London), late Scholar of Lincoln College,
Oxford. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
11. Burke. Select Works. Edited, with Introduction and Notes,

by E. Payne, M.A., of Lincoln's Inn, Barrister-at-Law, and Fellow of
J.
University College, Oxford.
I. Thoughts on the Present Discontents the two Speeches on ;
America. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.

II. Reflections on the French Revolution. Second Edition. Extra
fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s. (See also p. 24.)
12. Cowper. Edited, with Life, Introductions, and Notes, by

H. T. of Pembroke College, Oxford.
Griffith, B.A., formerly Scholar
I. The Didactic Poems of 1782, with Selections from the Minor

Pieces, a.d. i 7791 783. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s.
II. The Task, with Tirocinium, and Selections from the Minor Poems,
a.d. 1 784-1 799. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s.
II. LATIN.
An Elementary Latin Grammar. By John B. Allen, M.A.,
Head Master of Perse Grammar School, Cambridge. Third Edition,
Revised and Corrected. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
A First Latin Exercise Book. By the same Author.

Angliee Reddenda, or Easy Extracts, Latin and Greek, for

Unseen Translation. By
C. S. Jerram, M.A. Second Edition, Revised
and Enlarged. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Passages for Translation into Latin. For the use of Pass-

men and others. Selected by J. Y. Sargent, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of
Hertford College, Oxford. Fifth Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
First Latin Reader. By T. J. Nunns, M.A. Third Edition.

Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.
Second Latin Header. In Preparation.
Caesar. The Commentaries (for Schools). With Notes and

Maps. By Charles E. Moberly, M.A.
Part I. The Gallic War. Third Edition. Extra fcap.8vo. cloth, 4s.6d.
Part II. The Civil War. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
The Civil War. Book I. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.
Cicero. Selection of interesting and descriptive passages. With
Notes. By Henry Walford, M.A. In three Parts. Second Edition.
Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Each Part separately, limp, is.6d.
Part I. Anecdotes from Grecian and Roman History.
Part II. Omens and Dreams: Beauties of Nature.
Part HI. Rome's Rule of her Provinces.
Cicero. Selected Letters (for Schools). With Notes. By the

late C. E. Prichard, M.A., and E. R. Bernard, M.A. Second Edition.
Cicero. Select Orations (for Schools). With Notes. By J. R.

King, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Cornelius ETepos. With Notes. By Oscar Browning, M.A.

Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Livy. Selections (for Schools). With Notes and Maps. By

H. Lee-Warner, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. In Parts, limp, each is. 6d.
Part I. The Caudine Disaster.
Part II. Hannibal's Campaign in Italy.
Part III. The Macedonian War.
Livy. Books VVII. With Introduction and Notes. By

A. R. Cluer, B.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Ovid. Selections for the use of Schools. With Introductions

and Notes, and an Appendix on the Roman Calendar. By W. Ramsay,
M.A. Edited by G. G. Ramsay, M.A., Professor of Humanity, Glas-
gow. Second Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s. 6d.
Pliny. Selected Letters (for Schools). With Notes. By

the late C. E. Prichard, M.A., and E. R. Bernard, M.A. Second Edition.
Virgil. With Introduction and Notes, by T. L. Papillon, M.A.,

Fellow of New College, Oxford. Nearly Ready.
Catulli Veronensis Liber. Iterum recognovit, apparatum

criticum prolegomena appendices addidit, Robinson Ellis, A.M. 1878.
Demy 8vo. cloth, 16s.
A Commentary on Catullus. By Robinson Ellis, M.A. 1876.
Demy 8vo. cloth, 16s.
Catulli Veronensis Carmina Seleeta, secundum recogni-

tionem Robinson Ellis, A.M. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Cicero de Oratore. With Introduction and Notes, by A. S.

Wilkins, M.A., Professor of Latin, Owens College, Manchester.
Book I. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 6s. Book II. 1881. 8vo. cloth, 5s.
Cicero's Philippic Orations. WithNotes. By J. R. King, M.A.

Second Edition. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Cicero. Select Letters. With English Introductions, Notes,

and Appendices. By Albert Watson, M.A. Third Edition. 1881.
Demy 8vo. cloth, 1 8s.
Cicero. Select Letters. Text. By the same Editor. Extra

fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s.
Cicero pro Cluentio. With Introduction and Notes. By W.

Ramsay, M.A. Edited by G. G. Ramsay, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth,
3s. 6d.
Horace. a Commentary. Volume I. The Odes, Carmen

With
Seculare,and Epodes. By Edward C. Wickham, M.A., Head Master
of Wellington College. Second Edition, 1877. Demy Svo. cloth, 125.
Horace. A reprint of the above, in a size suitable for the use

of Schools. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, $s. 6d.
Iiivy, Book I. WithIntroduction, Historical Examination, and

Notes. By J.R. Seeley, M.A., Regius Professor of Modern History,
Cambridge. Second Edition. 1874. 8vo. cloth, 6s.
Ovid. P. Ovidii Nasonis Ibis. Ex Novis Codicibus Edidit.

Scholia Vetera Commentarium cum Prolegomenis Appendice Indice
addidit, R. Ellis, A.M. Demy 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
Persius. The Satires. With a Translation and Commentary.

By John Conington, M.A. Edited by Henry Nettleship, M.A. Second
Edition, 1874. 8vo. cloth, *js. 6d.
Selections from the less known Latin Poets. By North

Pinder, M.A. 1869. Demy 8vo. cloth, 15s.
Fragments and Specimens of Early Latin. With Introduc-

tions and Notes. 1874. By John Wordsworth, M.A. 8vo. cloth, iSs.
Tacitus. The Annals. Books I-VI. With Essays and Notes,

Preparing.
Vergil Suggestions Introductory to a Study of the Aeneid.

:
By H. Nettleship, M.A. 8vo. sewed, is. 6d,

Ancient Lives of Vergil with an Essay on the Poems of Vergil,
;
in connection with his Life and Times. By H. Nettleship, M.A. 8vo.

sewed, 2s.
The Roman Satura : its original form in connection with its

literary development. By H. Nettleship, M.A. 8vo. sewed, is.
A Manual of Comparative Philology. By T. L. Papillon,

M.A., Fellow and Lecturer of New College. Second Edition. Crown
8vo. cloth, 6s.
The Roman Poets of the Augustan Age. By William

Young Sellar, M.A., Professor of Humanity in the University of
Edinburgh. Virgil. 1877. 8vo. cloth, 14s.
The Roman Poets of the Republic. By the same Author.

New Edition, Revised and Enlarged. 1 881. 8vo, cloth, 14s.
III. GREEK.
A Greek Primer, for the use of beginners in that Language.
By the Right Rev. Charles Wordsworth, D.C.L., Bishop of St. Andrews.
Sixth Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. 6d.
Graecae Grammaticae Rudimenta in usum Scholarum. Auctore

Carolo Wordsworth, D.C.L. Nineteenth Edition, 1877. i2mo. cloth, 4s.
A Greek-English Lexicon, abridged from Liddell and Scott's

4to. edition, chiefly for the use of Schools. Nineteenth Edition. Care-
fully Revised throughout. 1880. Square 1 2 mo.cloth, *]s. 6d.
Greek Verbs, Irregular and Defective; their forms, mean-

ing, and quantity ; embracing the Tenses used by Greek writers,
all
with references to the passages in which they are found. By W. Veitch,
Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
The Elements of Greek Accentuation (for Schools): abridged

from his larger work by H. W. Chandler, M.A., Waynflete Professor of
Moral and Metaphysical Philosophy, Oxford. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth ,2s. 6d.
A Series of Graduated Greek Readers;

First Greek Reader. By W.
G. Rushbrooke, MX., for-
merly Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge, Second Classical
Master at the City of London School. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Second Greek Reader. By A. M . Bell, M.A. Extra fcap.

8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Third Greek Reader. In Preparation.
Fourth Greek Reader ; being Specimens of Greek

Dialects. With Introductions and Notes. By W. W. Merry, M. A.,
Fellow and Lecturer of Lincoln College. Extra fcap. 8 vo cloth, 4s. 6c?.
.
Fifth Greek Reader. Part Selections from Greek Epic

I.
and Dramatic Poetry, with Introductions and Notes. By Evelyn
Abbott,M.A., Fellow of Balliol College. Ext.fcap. 8vo.cloth,4s.6d.
Part II. By the same Editor. In Preparation.
The Golden Treasury of Ancient Greek Poetry ; being a Col-

lection of the finest passages in the Greek Classic Poets, with Introduc-
tory Notices and Notes. By R. S. Wright, M.A., Fellow of Oriel
College, Oxford. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d.
A Golden Treasury of Greek Prose, being a collection of the

finest passages in the principalGreek Prose Writers, with Introductory
Notices and Notes. By R. S. Wright, M.A., and J. E. L. Shadwell, M.A.
Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d,_
Aeschylus. Prometheus Bound (for Schools). With Intro-

duction and Notes, by A. O. Prickard, M.A., Fellow of New College.
Aeschylus. Agamemnon. With Introduction and Notes by

Arthur Sidgwick, M.A., Tutor of Corpus Christi College, Oxford ; late
Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, and Assistant Master of Rugby-
School. Extra foarr. 8vo. cloth, 3s.
Aeschylus. The Choephoroe. With Introduction and Notes

by the same Editor. Preparing.
Aristophanes. In Single Plays, edited, with English Notes,

Introductions, etc., by W. W. Merry, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo.
The Clouds, 2s. The Acharnians, 2s.
Other Plays will follow.
Arrian. Selections (for Schools). With Notes. By J. S. Phill-

potts, B.C.L., Head Master of Bedford School.
Cebes. Tabula. With Introduction and Notes by C. S.
Jerram, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Euripides. Alcestis (for Schools). By C. S. Jerram, M.A.

Euripides. Helena. Edited with Introduction, Notes, and

Critical Appendix, for Upper and Middle Forms. By C. S. Jerram, M.A.
Herodotus. Selections from. Edited, with Introduction, Notes,

and a Map, by W. W. Merry, M.A., Fellow and Lecturer of Lincoln
College. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Homer. Odyssey, Books I XII (for Schools). By W. W.

Merry, M.A. Nineteenth Thousand. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Book II, separately, is. 6d.
Homer. Odyssey, Books XIII-XXIV (for Schools). By the

same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 55.
Homer. Iliad, Book I (for Schools). By D. B. Monro, M.A.

Homer. Iliad, Books VI and XXI. With Introduction and

Notes. By Herbert Hailstone, M.A., late Scholar of St. Peter's College,
Cambridge. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. 6d. each.
Iiucian. Vera Historia (for Schools). By G. S. Jerram, M.A.

Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. 6d.
Plato. Selections (for Schools). With Notes. By B. Jowett,

M.A., Regius Professor of Greek and J. Purves, M.A., Fellow and
;
late Lecturer of Balliol College, Oxford. In the Press.

Sophocles. In Single Plays, with English Notes, &c. By Lewis

Campbell, M.A., Professor of Greek in the University of St. Andrew's,
and Evelyn Abbott, M.A., Balliol College, Oxford. Extra fcap. 8vo.
limp.
Oedipus Tyrannus. New and Revised Edition. 2s.
Oedipus Coloneus, Antigone, is. gd. each.

Ajax, Electra, Trachiniae, Philoctetes, 2s. each.
Sophocles. Oedipus Rex : Dindorfs Text, with Notes by the

present Bishop of St. David's. Ext. fcap. 8vo. limp, is. 6d.
Theocritus (for Schools). With Notes. By H.Kynaston, M.A.

(late Snow), Head Master of Cheltenham College. Third Edition.
Xenophon. Easy Selections (for Junior Classes). With a

Vocabulary, Notes, and Map. By J. S. Phillpotts, B.C.L., and C. S.
Jerram, M.A. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
Xenophon. Selections (for Schools). With Notes and Maps.

By J. S. Phillpotts, B.C.L., Head Master of Bedford School. Fourth
Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, $s.6d.
Xenophon. Anabasis, Book II. With Notes and Map. By C. S.

Jerram, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.
Aristotle's Politics. By W. L. Newman, M.A., Fellow of

Balliol College, Oxford. In Preparation.
Aristotelian Studies. I. On the Structure of the Seventh

Book of the Nicomachean Ethics. By J. C. Wilson, M.A., Fellow of
Oriel College, Oxford. 1879. Medium 8vo. stiff, 5s.
Demosthenes and Aeschines. The Orations of Demosthenes

and iEschines on the Crown. With Introductory Essays and Notes.
By G. A. Simcox, M,A.,and W.H.Simcox.M.A. 1872. 8vo. cloth, 1 2s.
Homer. Odyssey, Books I-XII. Edited with English Notes,
Appendices, etc. By W. W. Merry, M.A., and the late James Riddell,
M.A. 1876. Demy 8 vo. cloth, 1 6s.
Homer. Odyssey, Books XIII-XXIV. With Introduction
and Notes. By S. H. Butcher, M.A., Fellow of University College.
Homer. Iliad. With Introduction and Notes. By D. B.

Monro, M.A., Vice-Provost of Oriel College, Oxford. Preparing.
A Homeric Grammar. By D. B. Monro, M.A. In the Press.
Sophocles. The Plays and Fragments. With English Notes

and Introductions, by Lewis Campbell, M.A., Professor of Greek, St.
Andrews, formerly Fellow of Queen's College, Oxford. 2 vols.
Vol. I. Oedipus Tyrannus. Oedipus Coloneus. Antigone. Second
Edition. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 16s.
Vol. II. Ajax. Electra. Trachiniae. Philoctetes. Fragments. 1881.
8vo. cloth, 16s.
Sophocles. The Text of the Seven Plays. By the same Editor.

Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
A Manual of Greek Historical Inscriptions. By E. L.

Hicks, M.A., formerly Fellow and Tutor of Corpus Christi College,
Oxford. Demy 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
IV. FRENCH.
An Etymological Dictionary of the French Language, with
a Preface on the Principles of French Etymology. By A. Brachet.
Translated into English by G. W. Kitchin, M.A. Second Edition.
Crown 8vo. cloth, Js. 6d.
Brachet's Historical Grammar of the French Language.
Translated into English by G. W. M.A. Fourth Edition,
Kitchin,
Historical Outlines of French Literature. By George

Saintsbury, M.A. In the Press.
A Primer of French Literature. By the same Author. Extra

French Classics, Edited by GUSTAVE MASSON, B.A.

Corneille's Ginna, and Moliere's Les Femmes Savantes. With
Introduction and Notes. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Racine's Andromaque, and Corneille's Le Menteur. With

Louis Racine's Life of his Father. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Moliere's Les Fourberies de Scapin, and Racine's Athalie.

With Voltaire's Life of Moliere. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Selections from the Correspondence of Madame de Sevign6

and her chief Contemporaries. Intended more especially for Girls'
Schools. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s.
Voyage autour de ma Ghambre, by Xavier de Maistre Ourika, ;
by Madame de Duras La Dot de Suzette, by Fievee ; Les Jumeaux

;
de l'Hotel Corneille, by Edmond About ; M&aventures d'un ficolier,

by Rodolphe Topffer. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Regnard's Le Joueur, and Brueys and Falaprat's Le

Grondeur. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Louis XIV and his Contemporaries ; as described in Extracts

from the best Memoirs of the Seventeenth Century. With English
Notes, Genealogical Tables, &c. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
V. GERMAN.
LANGE'S German Course. By HERMANN LANGE, Teacher of
Modern Languages, Manchester:
The Germans at Home; a Practical Introduction to German
Conversation, with an Appendix containing the Essentials of German
Grammar. Second Edition. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
The German Manual ; a German Grammar, a Reading Book,

and a Handbook of German Conversation. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d.
A Grammar of the German Language. 8vo. cloth, 3J. 6d.

This *
Grammar* is a reprint of the Grammar contained in The German
*
Manual* and, in this separate form, is intended for the use of students
who wish to make themselves acquainted with German Grammar
chiefly for the purpose of being able to read German books.
German Composition; Extracts from English and American

writers for Translation into German, with Hints for Translation in foot-
notes. In the Press,
Lessing's Laokoon. With Introduction, English Notes, etc.

By A. Hamann, Phil. Doc, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4$. 6d.
Wilhelm Tell. A Drama. By Schiller. Translated into

English Verse by E. Massie, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s.
Also, Edited by G. A. BUCHHEIM, Phil. Doc, Professor in

King's College, London
Goethe's Egmont. With a Life of Goethe, &c. Third Edition,

Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With a Life of Schiller ; an historical

and critical Introduction, Arguments, and a complete Commentary.
Fourth Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6 d.
Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. A Comedy. With a Life of

Lessing, Critical Analysis, Complete Commentary, &c. Fourth Edition.
Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d,
Schiller's Historische Skizzen ; Egmonts Leben und Tod, and

Belagerung von Antwerpen. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth,
2s. 6d.
Goethe's Iphigenie auf Tauris. A Drama. With a Critical

Introduction and Notes. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s.
Modern German Reader. A Graduated Collection of Prose

Extracts from Modern German writers :
Part I. With English Notes, a Grammatical Appendix, and a complete

Vocabulary. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6c?.
Parts II and III in preparation.
Lessing's Nathan der Weise. With Introduction, Notes, etc.

In the Press.
Selection from Heine's Prose Works. With Introduction and

Notes. In the Press.
In Preparation.
Schiller's Maria Stuart. With Notes, Introduction, &c.
Schiller's Jungfrau von Orleans. With Notes, Introduction, &c.
Selections from the Poems of Schiller and Goethe.
Becker's (K. F.) Friedrich der Grosse.
VI. MATHEMATICS, &c.

Figures Made Easy: a first Arithmetic Book. (Introductory
to 'The Scholar's Arithmetic.') By Lewis
Hensley, M.A., formerly
Fellow and Assistant Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge. Crown 8vo.
cloth, 6d.
Answers to the Examples in Figures made Easy, together

with two thousand additional Examples formed from the Tables in the
same, with Answers. By the same Author. Crown Svo. cloth, Is.
The Scholar's Arithmetic; with Answers to the Examples,

By the same Author. Crown Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
The Scholar's Algebra. An Introductory work on Algebra*
By the same Author. Crown 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Book-keeping. By R. G. G. Hamilton, Financial Assistant
Secretary to the Board of Trade, and John Ball (of the Firm of
Quilter, Ball, &
Co.), Co-Examiners in Book-keeping for the Society
of Arts. New and enlarged Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. limp cloth, 2s.
A Course of Lectures on Pure Geometry. By Henry J.

Stephen Smith, M.A., F.R.S., Fellow of Corpus Christi College, and
Savilian Professor of Geometry in the University of Oxford.
Acoustics. By W. F. Donkin, M.A., F.R.S., Savilian Professor

of Astronomy, Oxford. 1870. Crown 8 vo. cloth, Js. 6d.
A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism. By J. Clerk

Maxwell, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Experimental Physics in the Uni-
versity of Cambridge. Second Edition. 2 vols. Demy 8vo. cloth,
1/. 11s. 6d.
An Elementary Treatise on Electricity. By the same

Author. Edited by William Garnett, M.A. Demy 8vo. cloth, Js. 6d.
A Treatise on Statics. By G. M. Minchin, M.A., Professor of

Applied Mathematics in the Indian Engineering College, Cooper's Hill.
Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 14s.
A Treatise on the Kinetic Theory of Gases. By Henry

William Watson, M.A., formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge.
1876. 8vo. cloth, $s.6d.
A Treatise on the Application of Generalised Coordinates

to the Kinetics of a Material System. By H. W. Watson, M.A., and
S. H. Burbury, M.A. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 6s.
Geodesy. By Colonel Alexander Ross Clarke, C.B., R.E. 1880.

8vo. cloth, 12s. 6d.
VII. PHYSICAL SCIENCE.

A Handbook of Descriptive Astronomy. By G. F.
Chambers, F.R.A.S. Third Edition. 1877. Demy 8vo. c/o*A, 28s.
A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Observed, Reduced, and Dis-

cussed by Admiral W. H. Smyth, R.N. Revised, condensed, and
greatly enlarged by G. F. Chambers, F.R.A.S. 1881. 8vo. cloth, 21s.
Chemistry for Students. By A. W. Williamson, Phil. Doc,

F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry, University College, London. A new
Edition, with Solutions, 1873. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d.
A Treatise on Heat, with numerous Woodcuts and Diagrams.

By Balfour Stewart, LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy in
Owens College, Manchester. Fourth Edition. 1 88 1. Extra fcap. 8 vo.
cloth, 7* 6d.
Lessons on Thermodynamics. By R. E. Baynes, M.A., Senior

Student of Christ Church, Oxford, and Lee's Reader in Physics. 1878.
Forms of Animal Life. By G. Rolleston, M.D., F.R.S.,
Linacre Professor of Physiology, Oxford. Illustrated by Descriptions
and Drawings of Dissections. A New Edition in the Press.
Exercises in Practical Chemistry. Vol. I. Elementary Exer-

cises. By A. G. Vernon Harcourt, M.A. and H. G. Madan, M.A.
;
Third Edition. Revised by H. G. Madan, M.A. Crown 8vo. cloth, gs.
Tables of Qualitative Analysis. Arranged by H. G. Madan,

M.A. Large 4to. paper covers, 4s. 6d.
Crystallography. By M. H. N. Story-Maskelyne, M.A., Pro-

fessor of Mineralogy, Oxford ;and Deputy Keeper in the Department of
Minerals, British Museum. In the Press.
VIII. HISTORY.
The Constitutional History of England, in its Origin and
Development. By William Stubbs, D.D., Regius Professor of Modern
History. Library Edition. Three vols, demy 8vo. cloth, il. 8s.
Also in 3 vols, crown 8vo. price 12s. each.
Select Charters and other

Illustrations of English Con-
stitutional History, from the Times to the Reign of Edward I.
Earliest
Arranged and Edited by W. Stubbs, M.A. Fourth Edition. 1881.
A History of England, principally in the Seventeenth Century.
By Leopold Von Ranke. Translated by Resident Members of the
University of Oxford, under the superintendence of G. W. Kitchin,
M.A., and C. W. Boase, M.A. 1875. 6 vols. 8vo. cloth, 3/. 3s.
A Short History of the Norman Conquest of England. By
E. A. Freeman, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d.
Genealogical Tables illustrative of Modern History. By

H. B. George, M.A. Second Edition. Small 4to. cloth, 12s.
A History of France. With numerous Maps, Plans, and
Tables. By G. W. Kitchin, M.A. In Three Volumes. 1873-77.
Crown 8vo. cloth, each 10s. 6d.
Vol. I. Second Edition. Down to the Year 1453.
Vol. 2. From 1453-1624.
Vol. 3. From 1624-1793.
A History of Germany and of the Empire, down to the close
of the Middle Ages. By J. Bryce, D.C.L., Regius Professor of Civil
Law in the University of Oxford.
A History of British India. By S. J. Owen, M.A., Reader in

Indian History in the University of Oxford.
A Selection from the Despatches, Treaties, and other Papers

of the Marquess Wellesley, K.G., during his Government of India.
Edited by S. J. Owen, M.A., formerly Professor of History in the Elphin-
stone College, Bombay. 1877. 8vo. cloth, il. 4s.
A Selection from the Despatches, Treaties, and other Papers

relating to India of Field-Marshal the Duke of Wellington, K.G. By
the same Editor. 1 880. 8vo. cloth, 24s.
A History of the United States of America. By E. J. Payne,

M.A., Barrister-at-Law, and Fellow of University College, Oxford. In
the Press.
A History of Greece from its Conquest by the Romans to

the present time, b.c. 146 to a.d. 1864. By George Finlay, LL.D.
A new Edition, revised throughout, and in part re-written, with con-
siderable additions, by the Author, and Edited by H. F. Tozer, M.A.,
Tutor and late Fellow of Exeter College, Oxford. 1877. 7 vols.
8vo. cloth, 3/. 10s.
A Manual of Ancient History. By George Rawlinson, M.A.,

Camden Professor of Ancient History, formerly Fellow of Exeter
College, Oxford. Second Edition. Demy 8vo. cloth, 14s.
A History of Greece. By E. A. Freeman, M.A., formerly
Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford.
Italy and her Invaders, a.d. 376-476. By T. Hodgkin,

Fellow of University College, London. Illustrated with Plates and
Maps. 2 vols. 8vo. cloth, il. 12s.
IX. LAW.
The Elements of Jurisprudence. By Thomas Erskine
Holland, D.C.L., Chichele Professor of International Law and Diplo-
macy, and Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford. 1880. Demy 8vo.
cloth, 1 os. 6d.
The Institutes of Justinian, edited as a recension of the Insti-

tutes of Gaius. By the same Editor. Second Edition, 1881. Extra
Gaii Institutionum Juris Civilis Commentarii Quatuor ;

or, Elements of Roman Law by Gaius. With a Translation and Com-
mentary by Edward Poste, M.A., Barrister-at-Law, and Fellow of Oriel
College, Oxford. Second Edition. 1875. 8vo. cloth, 18s.
Select Titles from the Digest of Justinian. By T. E.

Holland, D.C.L., Chichele Professor of International Law and Diplo-
macy, and Fellow of All Souls' College, Oxford, and C. L. Shadwell,
B.C.L., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. 8vo. cloth, 14s.
Also sold in Parts, in paper covers, as follows :

Parti. Introductory Titles. 2s. 6d.
Part II. Family Law. is.
Part III. Property Law. 2s. 6d.
Part IV. Law of Obligations (No. 1). 3-r. 6d.
Part IV. Law of Obligations (No. 2). 4J. 6d.
An Introduction to the Principles of Morals and Legisla-

tion. By Jeremy Bentham. Crown 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d.
Elements of Law considered with reference to Principles of

General Jurisprudence. By William Markby, M. A., Judge of the High
Court of Judicature, Calcutta. Second Edition, with Supplement,
1874. Crown 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6d. Supplement separately, 2s.
Alberici Gentilis, I. G. D., I. G. Professoris Regii, De lure Belli

Libri Tres. Edidit Thomas Erskine Holland I. CD., Gentium
Iuris
Professor Chicheleianus, Coll. Omn. Anim. Socius, necnon in Univ.
Perusin. Iuris Professor Honorarius. 1877. Small 4X0. half morocco, 21s.
International Law. By William Edward Hall, M.A.,

Barrister-at-Law. Demy 8vo. cloth, 21s.
An Introduction to the History of the Law of Seal

Property, with original Authorities. By Kenelm E. Digby, M.A., of
Lincoln's Inn, Barrister-at-Law. Second Edition. 1876. Crown 8 vo.
cloth, Js. 6d.
Principles of the English Law of Contract. By Sir William

R. Anson, Bart., B.C.L., Vinerian Reader of English Law, and Fellow
of All Souls College, Oxford. 1879. Crown 8vo. cloth, gs.
X. MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY.

Bacon. Novum Organum. Edited, with Introduction, Notes,
&c, by T. Fowler, M.A., Professor of Logic in the University of
Oxford. 1878. 8vo. cloth, 14s.
Locke's Conduct of the Understanding. Edited, with In-

troduction, Notes, etc., by T. Fowler, M.A., Professor of Logic in the
University of Oxford. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.
Selections from Berkeley, with an Introduction and Notes,

For the use of Students in the Universities. By Alexander Campbell
Fraser,LL.D. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. cloth, p. 6d. (See also
p. 19.)
The Elements of Deductive Logic, designed mainly for the

use of Junior Students in the Universities. By T. Fowler, M.A.,
Professor of Logic in the University of Oxford. Seventh Edition, with
a Collection of Examples. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d.
The Elements of Inductive Logic, designed mainly for the

use of Students in the Universities. By the same Author. Third
Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 6s.
A Manual of Political Economy, for the use of Schools. By

J. E.Thorold Rogers, M.A., formerly Professor of Political Economy,
Oxford. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d,
XI. ART, &e.
A Handbook of Pictorial Art. By R. St. J. Tyrwhitt, M.A.,

formerly Student and Tutor of Christ Church, Oxford. With coloured
Illustrations, Photographs, and a chapter on Perspective by A. Mac-
donald. Second Edition. 1875. 8vo. half morocco, 18s.
A Music Primer for Schools. By J. Troutbeck, M.A., Music

Master in "Westminster School, and R. F. Dale, M.A., B. Mus., Assistant
Master in Westminster School. Crown 8vo. cloth, is. 6d,
A Treatise on Harmony. By Sir F. A. Gore Ouseley, Bart.,

Professor of Music in the University of Oxford. Second Edition. 4to.
cloth, 1 os.
A Treatise on Counterpoint, Canon, and Fugue, based upon

thatofCherubini. By the same Author. Second Edition. 4 to. cloth, 16s.
A Treatise on Musical Form and General Composition.

By the same Author. 4to. cloth, 10s.
The Cultivation of the Speaking Voice. By John Hullah.

Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s> 6d.
XII. MISCELLANEOUS.
The Construction of Healthy Dwellings; namely Houses,
Hospitals, Barracks, Asylums, etc. By Douglas Galton, late Royal
Engineers, C.B., F.R.S., etc. Demy 8vo. cloth, 10s. 6d.
A Treatise on Rivers and Canals,

relating to the Control and
Improvement of Rivers, and the Design, Construction, and Development
of Canals. By Leveson Francis Vernon-Harcourt, M.A., Balliol College,
Oxford, Member of the Institution of Civil Engineers. 2 vols. (Vol. I,
Text. Vol. II, Plates). 8vo. cloth, 21s. Just Published.
A Treatise on Harbours and Docks. By the same Author.

Preparing.
A System of Physical Education : Theoretical and Practical.

By Archibald Maclaren. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, *js. 6d.
Specimens of Lowland Scotch and Northern English. By

Dr. J. A. H. Murray. Preparing.
English Plant Names from the Tenth to the Fifteenth Century.

By J. Earle, M.A. Small fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s.
An Icelandic Prose Reader, with Notes, Grammar, and Glos-

sary. By
Dr. Gudbrand Vigfdsson and F. York Powell, M.A. 1879.
Dante. Selections from the Inferno. With Introduction and

Notes. By H. B. Cotterill, B. A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Tasso. La Gernsalemme Liberata. Cantos i, ii. With Intro-

duction and Notes. By the same Editor, Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, is. 6d.
The Modern Greek Language in its relation to Ancient Greek.

By E. M. Geldart, B.A. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
Outlines of Textual Criticism applied to the New Testament.

By C. E. Hammond, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Exeter College, Oxford.
A Handbook of Phonetics, including a Popular Exposition of

the Principles of Spelling Reform. By Henry Sweet, M.A. Extra fcap.
8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d.
LONDON: HENRY FROWDE,

Oxford University Press Warehouse, 7 Paternoster Row,
OXFORD: CLARENDON PRESS DEPOSITORY,
116 High Street.
The Delegates of the Press invite suggestions and advice from

all persons interested in education; and will be thankful for hints, &c.
addressed to the Secretary To the Delegates, Clarendon Press,
Oxford.
$*
THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
GRADUATE LIBRARY
DATE DUE
Form 9584
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
III
BOV 3 9015 02354 6784
MAY 24 1948
UNIV Of MtCH.
LIBRARY
GRAD
BL
1010
.M946
v.8

The Sacred Books of The East (Volume 8)

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

The Sacred Books of The East (Volume 8)

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

ioio

SACRED BOOKS OF THE EAST

OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE

SACRED BOOKS OF THE EAST

BY VARIOUS ORIENTAL SCHOLARS

[All rights reserved'}

kAshinAth trimbak telang, m.a.

AT THE CLARENDON PRESS

[ All rights reserved ]

Transliteration of Oriental Alphabets adopted for the

a remarkable irony of fate, that we should be obliged to

philosopher, Cousin 2 this great deficiency in Sanskrit litera-

ture is due, in no inconsiderable measure, to the doctrines

occupies in literature, which one naturally desires, when

students of the history of religion, I should have been better

understood to embody and must

In the colophons to the MSS. of the work, the form current,

(Gitas) by the Deity.' >Sankaraarya, indeed, sometimes

an amicable arrangement had proved fruitless, it was deter-

other anomalous characteristic of the history of the great

be passed over in silence; and that is the extraordinary-

on the morning of the first day of the war, when both

however incongruous and irrelevant such a dialogue must

Bhagavad-gM or Divine Song. Indeed no effort has . . .

been spared by the Brahmanical compilers to convert the

is supposed to have been written, but of this enlightened

history of the great war, appears to me

be understood as holding that the Gita must be accepted

regarding any particular given section of it. And it must

recently, though not for the first time, by Mr. Freeman 3

have existed as such a dialogue before the Mahabharata,

whole, having regard to the fact that those ideas of unity

the late Professor Goldstiicker 3 hold to have animated the

these facts, I am prepared to adhere, I will not say without

the Bhagavadgita, also, is naturally affiliated to the same

body of the Gita would, from a historic standpoint, seem to

absent from the Gita; see p. 21 seq. infra.

Smrztis and Sutras of the names of those to whom those

more full. And taking first the internal evidence, the

in the Gita and the Upanishads, the philosophical part has

is afterwards, it is at a later stage of philosophical progress,

that system-making arises. In that stage some thinkers

trines or expressions. And the result is the development

doctrine from the GM or the Upanishads, yet each dif-

have expressed in the words now quoted. Professor Max

phical system in these Upanishads. They are in the true

one, the test of which lies more in a comprehensive review

or two topics, where they both travel over common ground.

and obstinate,' is to be brought under control such control

to worldly objects,' no exposition of the mode in which

mind.' And then after pointing out what the movements of

BhagavadgM. But having come thus far, the author of

for keeping it steady. And that becomes firmly grounded

when resorted to for a long time, without interruption, and

difference to worldly objects is the consciousness of having

He next proceeds to distinguish another and higher species

E. Hall 1 has somewhere attributed to the Hindus, appears

most of the raw material of a system, but you have no

which we have rendered devotion.' At Gita, chapter II,

stanza 48 (p. 49), a definition is given of that word. In

too occurs in widely varying significations. And one of its

chapter XIV, stanza 3). Similar observations, to a greater

unimportant in the philosophy of the BhagavadgM. And